Jak w temacie szukam schematu instalacji silnika ( ecu EDC17C11 ) MASTER III , MOVANO najbardziej zależy mi na opisie zasilania czujników, z tego co udało mi się dojść to są tam 3 zasilania po 5 V na trzy grupy czujników , nie mam zasilania oznaczonego nr2 błąd DF012 Sens. Supply nr.2 Voltage , bellow the min level - zamiast 5V mam 0.4V nie wiem które czujniki są tym układem zasilane z góry dziękuję za podpowiedzi Dodano po 47 : znalazłem tylko Renault Master III PDF Workshop Service & Repair Manual 2010-2018 niestety nie zawiera schematów, ale może komuś się przyda .... sporo wiedzy technicznej
Remove the 3rd brake light by turning the bulb holder a quarter of a turn clockwise(1 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x02x06x08-01x37-1-31-1.xml
-2-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
ACCELERATOR PEDAL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 37A, Mechanical
component controls , Pedal assembly: Exploded view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the accelerator pedal connector(1 ) .
-2-
Remove:
the accelerator pedal nuts(2) ,
the accelerator pedal.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-3-
Repair-30x03x03x02-01x37-1-31-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
ACCELERATOR PEDAL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 37A, Mechanical
component controls , Pedal assembly: Exploded view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the accelerator pedal connector(1 ) .
-2-
Remove:
the accelerator pedal nuts(2) ,
the accelerator pedal.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-3-
Repair-30x03x03x02-01x37-1-31-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
ACCESSORIES BELT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
parts always to be replaced:
Accessories belt tensioning roller
Accessories fixed roller
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine without the accessories belt to avoid damaging the crankshaft
accessories pulley.
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 11A, Top and front
of engine, Engine accessories assembly: Exploded view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the intercooler air outlet pipe.
M9T, 700(700)
Remove the engine cooling fan propellerEngine cooling fan assembly: Removal - Refitting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Position a 3 mmAllen key in the accessories belt tensioning roller hole(1 ) .
Rotate the accessories belt tensioning roller clockwise and push on the Allen key(2 ) at the same time
until the accessories belt tensioning roller locks.
-3-
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Remove (see 11A, Top and front of engine, Engine accessories assembly: Exploded view) :
the accessories belt by passing it between the fan and the diffuser,
the accessories belt tensioning roller,
the accessories belt fixed roller protector,
the accessories belt fixed roller.
M9T, 700(700)
Remove :
the
the
the
the
the
the
accessories
accessories
accessories
accessories
accessories
accessories
belt,
belt tensionning roller bolts,
belt tensionning roller,
belt fixed roller protector,
belt fixed roller bolt,
belt fixed roller.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
In case of reuse, clean the crankshaft accessories pulley V-grooves to get rid of any deposits.
parts always to be replaced:
Accessories belt tensioning roller
parts always to be replaced:
Accessories fixed roller
CAUTION
Only use brushes with plastic or non-corrosive metal (brass) bristles.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine without the accessories belt to avoid damaging the crankshaft
accessories pulley.
-4-
Note:
The belt must be replaced with a new one if it has been removed.
Note:
When replacing the accessories belt, always replace the accessories belt tensioning
roller and fixed roller.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit (see 11A, Top and front of engine, Engine accessories assembly: Exploded view) :
the accessories belt tensionning roller,
the accessories belt tensionning roller bolt,
the accessories belt fixed roller,
the accessories belt fixed roller bolt.
Torque tighten:
the accessories belt tensionning roller bolt25
the accessories belt fixed roller bolt44
N.m,
N.m.
Refit the accessories belt fixed roller protector(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
assembly: Exploded view) .
Engine
accessories
Recover the locking pin of the accessories belt tensioning roller and gradually release the
accessories belt tensioning roller using a spanner.
-5-
Turn the crankshaft two revolutions clockwise to position the accessories belt correctly.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x10x01x03-01x37-1-164-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
ACCESSORIES BELT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
parts always to be replaced:
Accessories belt tensioning roller
Accessories fixed roller
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine without the accessories belt to avoid damaging the crankshaft
accessories pulley.
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 11A, Top and front
of engine, Engine accessories assembly: Exploded view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the intercooler air outlet pipe.
M9T, 700(700)
Remove the engine cooling fan propellerEngine cooling fan assembly: Removal - Refitting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Position a 3 mmAllen key in the accessories belt tensioning roller hole(1 ) .
Rotate the accessories belt tensioning roller clockwise and push on the Allen key(2 ) at the same time
until the accessories belt tensioning roller locks.
-3-
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Remove (see 11A, Top and front of engine, Engine accessories assembly: Exploded view) :
the accessories belt by passing it between the fan and the diffuser,
the accessories belt tensioning roller,
the accessories belt fixed roller protector,
the accessories belt fixed roller.
M9T, 700(700)
Remove :
the
the
the
the
the
the
accessories
accessories
accessories
accessories
accessories
accessories
belt,
belt tensionning roller bolts,
belt tensionning roller,
belt fixed roller protector,
belt fixed roller bolt,
belt fixed roller.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
In case of reuse, clean the crankshaft accessories pulley V-grooves to get rid of any deposits.
parts always to be replaced:
Accessories belt tensioning roller
parts always to be replaced:
Accessories fixed roller
CAUTION
Only use brushes with plastic or non-corrosive metal (brass) bristles.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine without the accessories belt to avoid damaging the crankshaft
accessories pulley.
-4-
Note:
The belt must be replaced with a new one if it has been removed.
Note:
When replacing the accessories belt, always replace the accessories belt tensioning
roller and fixed roller.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit (see 11A, Top and front of engine, Engine accessories assembly: Exploded view) :
the accessories belt tensionning roller,
the accessories belt tensionning roller bolt,
the accessories belt fixed roller,
the accessories belt fixed roller bolt.
Torque tighten:
the accessories belt tensionning roller bolt25
N.m,
the accessories belt fixed roller bolt44
N.m.
Refit the accessories belt fixed roller protector(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
assembly: Exploded view) .
Engine
Recover the locking pin of the accessories belt tensioning roller and gradually release the
accessories belt tensioning roller using a spanner.
Turn the crankshaft two revolutions clockwise to position the accessories belt correctly.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-5-
accessories
Repair-10x10x01x03-01x37-1-164-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
ADDITIONAL RADIATOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
-1-
CAUTION
When carrying out a repair that requires a complete change, it is essential to flush the
circuit with clean water, blast compressed air through the circuit to drive out the
water, fill and bleed the circuit and then measure the effective protection.
The criteria to be met are:
protection down to
protection down to
-25 C ± 2for
-40 C ± 2for
cold and temperate countries,
" extreme cold " countries.
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) .
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
M9T, 678 680 694 698 700 702(678 OR 680 OR 694 OR 698 OR 700 OR 702)
Remove:
the
the
the
the
engine undertray,
radiator grille(see Radiator grille: Removal - Refitting) ,
headlights(see Headlight: Removal - Refitting) ,
front bumper(see Front bumper: Removal - Refitting) .
Drain the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Move aside using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly:
Exploded view ) :
the clip of the pipe between the cooling radiator and the additional cooling radiator,
the additional cooling radiator outlet pipe clip.
Disconnect from the additional cooling radiator(see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the pipe between the cooling radiator and the additional cooling radiator,
the additional cooling radiator outlet pipe.
-2-
Unclip the additional cooling radiator(1 ) by pressing on the tabs(2 ) .
-3-
Remove the additional cooling radiator by sliding it to the right(3 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fill and bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
-4-
.
Repair-10x06x01x25-01x37-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
AIR CONDITIONING: CHECK
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Equipment required
Dual-sensor temperature measuring device
Note:
When performing RENAULT maintenance, check the air conditioning system at the
end of the vehicle's maintenance program so that the engine will be cold.
1. PREPARATION OPERATION FOR THE MEASUREMENT DEVICE
Check that the measurement device functions properly (see the device's instruction manual).
Set units to C.
Set the device's sensitivity to 0.1 C.
-1-
Set the reading mode to (T) = (T1 - T2)
-2-
Check the two sensors T1 and T2 in order to calculate the correction () to be applied to the measurement (T1 - T2). the two
sensors must indicate the same measurement under the same conditions. Check the sensors by:
bringing the ends of the 2 sensors together until they touch,
placing the sensors in the air flow of an air vent,
setting the passenger compartment fan assembly to top speed.
waiting for the value to become stable.
recording the correction value ().
Note:
It is not necessary to start the vehicle. The device display is in mode (T) = (T1 - T2).
-3-
CAUTION
Note the difference and sign as soon as the temperature becomes stable.
Calculate the correction () = - (T1 - T2) to be applied to the measurement (T).
Examples:
If (T1 - T2) = - 0.3 C, correct the measurement (T) by () = + 0.3 C
If (T1 - T2) = + 0.3 C, correct the measurement (T) by () = - 0.3 C
2. VEHICLE PREPARATION OPERATION
Put the vehicle in the shade, where the temperature is greater than or equal to 15 Cminimum.
Close the bonnet.
Open the front windows.
Start the engine and let it idle.
Set the air conditioning controls with:
recirculation mode in the external position,
the ventilation distribution in " face " mode,
the temperature control to coldest temperature setting in front (and at the back, if it exists),
the speed of the passenger compartment fan assembly set to maximum (switch off the rear control if it exists),
the front side and centre air vents open with the vanes in a neutral position,
the air conditioning system must be turned on (indicator light illuminated).
Wait 5 minutes with the engine idling before taking any measurements.
3. MEASUREMENTS
-4-
Record the air temperature at the scuttle panel grille (T3).
open the bonnet, depending on the vehicle, to access the scuttle panel grille.
place the sensor where air is drawn through the scuttle panel grille.
wait for the value to become stable.
record the T3 temperature value.
close the bonnet if it was opened.
-5-
Record the air temperature at the left air vent (T1), and at the right air vent (T2).
fit sensor T1 in the left air vent(1) .
fit sensor T2 in the right air vent(2) .
Record the differences in temperature once the (T) value has stabilised:
between T3 and the higher of values T1 or T2, (T3 - highest value).
record this difference in temperature.
between T1 and T2 (read the (T) value (T1-T2) display mode).
record the difference in temperature (T) according to the correction () to be applied to the measurement.
If the (T)=(T1-T2) measurement is unstable, follow the procedure below:
-6-
Note:
Depending on the vehicle's air conditioning system programming, this check method
may not be applicable because the engine cooling fan assembly has been activated.
Its operation renders the () value between T1 and T2 unstable. To eliminate this
error, the fan assembly must be activated for the entire period over which temperature
T1 and T2 measurements are recorded.
Activate the engine cooling fan assembly operation by modifying the engine speed.
stabilise the engine speed at 2000 rpmwhile T1 and T2 temperature measurements are being recorded.
check that the engine cooling fan assembly operating.
record the temperatures by following the instructions given in the paragraph MEASUREMENTS.
4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE
The following two following conditions must be met:
the difference between T3 and the higher of the two values T1 or T2, must be greater than or equal to
the difference between T1 and T2 must be less than or equal to
5 C,
2 C.
Note:
If one of these two conditions is not met, then the air conditioning system is not
working properly. Should this be the case, refer to the fault finding procedure for the
air conditioning system for the vehicle concerned.
Repair-30x02x02-01x58-1-9-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
AIR CUSHION: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
RENAULT TECH MOUNTING
-1-
DRIVE RITE MOUNTING
-2-
Remove the air supply pipe(1) :
Unscrew the supply pipe union for the Renault Tech Mounting,
Push and pull the supply pipe union for the Drive Rite Mounting.
CAUTION
The pressure in the air cushions is between 1 to 7 bardepending to the load.
-3-
Remove the air cushion lower bolt(2 ) .
-4-
Remove :
the air cushion upper bolts(3) ,
the air cushion.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply teflon adhesive rollVehicle: Parts and
consumables for the repair
-5-
on the air pipe union.
CAUTION
Be sure to connect the air supply pipes correctly.
Do not inflate the air cuhion if is not secured to the vehicle.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the
the
the
the
air
air
air
air
cushion,
cushion upper bolts,
cushion lower bolt,
supply pipe of the air cushion.
1- RENAULT TECH MOUNTING
Torque tighten the air supply pipe of the air cushion12 N.m.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-13x02x09x04-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
AIR DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Centre air distribution duct
2
Front side air distribution duct
4
Front footwell air distribution duct clip
(see 61A, Heating,
Front footwell air distribution duct: Removal - Refitting)
5
Front footwell left-hand upper air distribution duct
(see 61A, Heating,
Front footwell air distribution duct: Removal - Refitting)
8
Condensation drain pipe
11
Front footwell right-hand upper air distribution duct
(see 61A, Heating,
Front footwell air distribution duct: Removal - Refitting)
12
Front footwell air distribution duct clip
(see 61A, Heating,
Front footwell air distribution duct: Removal - Refitting)
14
Front side air distribution duct
15
Distribution unit
Dashboard: Removal - Refitting
(see 61A, Heating,
(see 61A, Heating,
Front side air distribution duct: Removal - Refitting)
Front side air distribution duct: Removal - Refitting)
(see 61A, Heating,
-1-
(57A, Interior equipment)
Distribution unit: Removal - Refitting)
Mark
Description
Information
3
Glovebox cooling duct
6
Front footwell left-hand lower air distribution duct
(see 61A, Heating,
Front footwell air distribution duct: Removal - Refitting)
7
Front footwell left-hand lower air distribution duct clip
(see 61A, Heating,
Front footwell air distribution duct: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-30x02x08-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
AIR INLET ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Precautions for the repair
Mark
Description
Information
1
Air filter unit air inlet pipe
2
Air filter unit air outlet pipe
3
Turbocharger air inlet pipe seal
4
Air filter unit
5
Air filter
6
Air flowmeter
7
Air flowmeter seal
8
Air filter cover
9
Oil vapour rebreathing pipe
10
Turbocharger air inlet pipe
11
Intercooler air inlet pipe seal, intercooler end
Intercooler air inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting
12
Intercooler air inlet pipe
Intercooler air inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting
13
Intercooler air inlet pipe seal, turbocharger end
Intercooler air inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting
14
Turbocharger
Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view
15
Inlet distributor assembly
16
Intercooler air outlet pipe
Intercooler air outlet pipe: Removal - Refitting
17
Intercooler air outlet pipe seal, intercooler end
Intercooler air outlet pipe: Removal - Refitting
18
Intercooler
Intercooler : Removal - Refitting
Repair-11x01x10-02x50-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
AIR INLET ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
-1-
M9T, 700(700)
Illustration key: Description
.
For fastenings with no specified tightening torque values, refer to the Table of Standard TorquesTightening torques: General information .
Marks
Designations
Informations
1
Intercooler air inlet pipe
Intercooler air inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting
2
Intercooler air inlet pipe seal, turbocharger end
3
Damper valve
4
Seal
5
Turbocharger
Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view
6
Intercooler air outlet pipe
Intercooler air outlet pipe: Removal - Refitting
7
Intercooler air outlet pipe seal, intercooler end
8
Intercooler
Intercooler : Removal - Refitting
9
Intercooler air inlet pipe seal, intercooler end
Intercooler air inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting
10
Air filter unit air inlet pipe
-2-
11
Air filter unit
12
Turbocharger air inlet pipe seal
13
Turbocharger air inlet pipe
14
Air filter
15
Air flowmeter
16
Air flowmeter seal
17
Duct
18
Air filter unit cover
M9T, 702(702)
Illustration key: Description
.
For fastenings with no specified tightening torque values, refer to the Table of Standard TorquesTightening torques: General information .
Marks
Designations
Informations
1
Turbocharger air inlet pipe
2
Intercooler air inlet pipe seal, turbocharger end
-3-
3
Turbocharger
4
Turbocharger air inlet pipe seal
5
Damper valve
6
Seal
7
Intercooler air outlet pipe
8
Intercooler air outlet pipe seal, intercooler end
9
Intercooler
10
Air filter unit air inlet pipe
11
Air filter
12
Intercooler air inlet pipe seal, intercooler end
13
Air filter unit
14
Intercooler air inlet pipe
15
Air flowmeter
16
Duct
17
Air flowmeter seal
18
Air filter unit cover
Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view
Intercooler air outlet pipe: Removal - Refitting
Intercooler : Removal - Refitting
Intercooler air inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting
Intercooler air inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting
Repair-11x01x10-02x50-1-14-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
AIR RESERVOIR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the compressor unit(see 38F,
Pneumatic suspension , Compressor assembly: Removal - Refitting)
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove:
the air pipe from the air reservoir,
the air reservoir bolts from the compressor unit,
the air reservoir.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply teflon adhesive rollVehicle: Parts and
consumables for the repair
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the air reservoir,
the air reservoir bolts on the compressor unit,
the air pipe on the air reservoir.
Torque tighten the air pipe12 N.m.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-1-
on the air pipe union.
.
Repair-13x02x09x05-01x37-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
AIRBAG AND PRETENSIONERS: LIST AND LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
Location and specifications (tightening torque, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
view ) (75A, Front seat frames and mechanisms).
seat: Exploded
Note:
If the vehicle is equipped with a passenger frontal airbag, the passenger side seat belt
and the front bench seat belt are equipped with a pyrotechnic system.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a passenger frontal airbag, the passenger side seat
belt and the front bench seat belt are equipped with a mechanical inertia reel.
1. LIST OF COMPONENTS
1- THE " AIRBAGS AND PRETENSIONERS " EQUIPMENT CONSISTS OF:
an airbag computer(see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Airbag computer: Removal - Refitting)
a driver's frontal airbag(see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Driver's frontal airbag: Removal - Refitting)
front side seat belts(see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Front side seat belt: Removal - Refitting)
front side seat belt buckles(see Front seat: Exploded view)
a front centre seat belt(see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Front centre seat belt: Removal - Refitting)
side impact sensors(see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Side impact sensor: Removal - Refitting)
front side (chest-level) airbags(see Front seat: Exploded view)
2. LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
AIRBAG COMPUTER
-1-
-2-
DRIVER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG
-3-
FRONT SIDE SEAT BELT
-4-
FRONT CENTRE SEAT BELT
-5-
SIDE IMPACT SENSORS
-6-
Repair-31x02x01x04-02x51-1-17-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
AIRBAG COMPUTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for the
repair ) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
WARNING
To avoid any risk of triggering when working on or near a pyrotechnic component
(airbags or pretensioners), lock the airbag computer using the diagnostic tool.
When this function is activated, all the trigger lines are inhibited and the airbag
warning light on the instrument panel lights up continuously (ignition on).
Lock the airbag computer by applying the " Before repair procedure " using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Airbag computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Switch off the ignition.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Remove:
the right-hand door sillDoor sill: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim),
the front right-hand door sill trimFront door sill lining: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
Remove:
the floor carpet clip(1) ,
the floor carpet partially by(2) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
CAUTION
To prevent any risk of noise, premature wear, short circuits, etc. after the refitting
operation, mark the wiring routing and how to connect the connectors.
Mark the wiring routing.
Unlock the connector(3 ) of the airbag computer at(4 ) .
Disconnect the airbag computer connectors(4 ) and (5 ) .
-3-
Remove:
the airbag computer nuts(6) ,
the airbag computer.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the airbag computer mounting nuts.
-4-
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
CAUTION
To guarantee a good electrical connection, make sure that the wiring does not place
any stress on the connectors or the surrounding components.
Torque tighten the airbag computer nuts8 N.m.
Refit the wiring in the position marked during removal.
Connect the airbag computer connectors.
Lock the airbag computer connector(4 ) .
3. FINAL OPERATION
Connect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Unlock the airbag computer by applying the " After repair procedure " using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Airbag computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
-5-
Repair-31x02x01x03-01x37-1-25-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
ALTERNATOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
parts always to be replaced:
Accessories belt tensioning roller
Accessories fixed roller
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Engine
assembly: Exploded view .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the intercooler air outlet pipe.
-1-
accessories
M9T, 700(700)
Remove the engine cooling fan propellerEngine cooling fan assembly: Removal - Refitting .
Remove :
the
the
the
the
the
the
accessories
accessories
accessories
accessories
accessories
accessories
belt,
belt tensionning roller bolts,
belt tensionning roller,
belt fixed roller protector,
belt fixed roller bolt,
belt fixed roller.
Remove the bolt(1 ) of the remote battery plug bracket.
-2-
Move aside the remote battery plug with its bracket(2 ) .
Remove the nut(3 ) of the engine wiring bracket.
Move aside the engine wiring channel(4 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the alternator regulator.
Remove the nut(2 ) from the alternator positive terminal.
Move aside the alternator wiring.
Remove :
the alternator bolts,
the alternator,
-4-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
Accessories belt tensioning roller
parts always to be replaced:
Accessories fixed roller
-5-
Push in the alternator rings(3 ) using a vice to facilitate fitting.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit :
the alternator,
the alternator bolts,
Torque tighten the alternator bolts.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-32x02x01-01x37-1-161-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
A-PILLARREINFORCEMENT:REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
-2-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
A-pillar reinforcement
Mild steel
0.9
(2 )
A-pillar upper hinge reinforcement
THLE
2
(3 )
A-pillar lower hinge reinforcement
THLE
1.8
(4 )
Front door stop reinforcement
THLE
2
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
The options for replacing this part are as follows:
Complete replacement
partial replacement along cut A.
-3-
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
-4-
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
-5-
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
2- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT ALONG CUT A
1)PART IN POSITION
-6-
DETAILED VIEW A
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-7-
Repair-40x08x02x02-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
AXIAL BALL JOINT LINKAGE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Tool for removal - refitting of rack axial ball joint
Dir. 1923
Steering rack locking tool
Dir. 1926
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 36A, Steering
assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the track rod(see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) .
1- STEERING COLUMN SIDE
Remove the steering box gaiter(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
2- PASSENGER SIDE
-1-
Steering assembly: Exploded view)
.
Cut the large clip(1 ) of the steering box gaiter on the steering column side.
Move aside the steering box gaiter on the steering column side.
Remove the steering box gaiter on the passenger side(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Exploded view ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Lock the wheels to disengage the rack teeth at the pinion end.
-2-
Steering assembly:
Fit the toolSteering rack locking tool(Dir. 1926 ) (2 ) on the steering rack at the pinion end.
-3-
Unlock the axial ball joint linkage using the toolTool for removal - refitting of rack axial ball joint(Dir.
1923 ) (3 ) .
Remove the axial ball joint linkage(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-4-
Steering assembly: Exploded view)
.
Adjust the front axleFront axle system: Adjustment .
Repair-13x04x02x01-01x37-1-28-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
AXLE ASSEMBLIES: CHECK
Lock the slip plates of the lift.
Position the vehicle on a liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Check the condition of the following components:
track rods,
axial ball joint linkages,
subframe,
lower arm rubber bushes,
lower arm ball jointsFront driveshaft lower arm ball joint: Check ,
shock absorbers,
tyres,
Check:
the tyre sizeTyres: Identification ,
the tyre inflation pressure(see Tyre pressure: Identification) .
Refer to the user manual for the geometry tester.
Check the geometry using the geometry tester.
Measure the underbody heights(see 30A, General
information, Underbody heights: Adjustment value)
.
Consult:
the front axle geometry values(see 30A, General information, Front axle assembly: Adjustment values) ,
the rear axle geometry values(see 30A, General information, Rear axle assembly: Adjustment values) .
Note:
The green-and-red graphs on the geometry bench are only valid when checking a
VODM (vehicle in working condition). For a loaded vehicle, use the calculator values
as a reference.
If there is an inconsistency between the manufacturer's values and the measured values:
adjust the front axle(see 30A, General information, Front axle system: Adjustment) .
Repair-13x02x12-01x58-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
BATTERY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
workshop hoist
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 80A, Battery, Battery: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
CAUTION
Before disconnecting the battery:
wait for the motor-driven fan assembly to stop,
wait for the computer to finish saving (
1 minute).
CAUTION
The visual indicator cannot be considered reliable in After-Sales; do not use it to
determine the state of the battery.
Remove the door sillDoor sill: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
-1-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- DISCONNECTION
Undo the nut(1 ) of the negative battery terminal.
Remove the negative battery terminal.
Move the earth strap to one side.
-2-
BRAZIL, ADAPTATION HOUSING(Brazil)
Unclip the brakets(2 ) of the negative auxiliary battery terminal.
Remove the negative auxiliary battery terminal.
2- REMOVAL
-3-
Undo the nut(3 ) of the positive battery terminal.
Unclip the brackets of the battery protective fuse holder by(4 ) then (5 ) .
Remove:
the " positive battery terminal - protective fuse holder " assembly,
the battery bracket bolt(6) ,
the battery bracket.
Remove the wiring from the battery's positive terminal.
-4-
Remove the battery from the vehicle using a workshop
3- REPLACEMENT
-5-
hoist.
Unclip the degassing pipe from the battery(6 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Check the battery (see
Battery: Check)
(Technical Note 6002A, 80A, Battery).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
1- REPLACEMENT
Clip the degassing pipe onto the battery.
2- REFITTING
-6-
Refit:
the battery using a workshop hoist,
the battery bracket.
Push the positive battery terminal fully onto the terminal post.
Clip the protective fuse holder onto the battery.
CAUTION
Incorrect tightening could cause heating of contacts, starting or charging faults,
sparking, or could cause the battery to explode (see Battery: Precautions for repair).
Torque tighten the nut of the positive battery terminal8 N.m.
3- CONNECTION
Push the negative battery terminal fully onto the terminal post.
CAUTION
Incorrect tightening could cause heating of contacts, starting or charging faults,
sparking, or could cause the battery to explode (see Battery: Precautions for repair).
Torque tighten the nut of the negative battery terminal8 N.m.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the door sillDoor sill: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
When refitting the battery or each time it is disconnected, carry out a certain number of
operations, without using the diagnostic tool, so that the vehicle can operate correctly (see Battery:
Initialisation) (80A, Battery).
-7-
Repair-32x01-01x37-1-45-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
BODY SIDE: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
-2-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Body side
Mild steel
0.75
(2 )
Front wing mounting bracket
Mild steel
1
(3 )
A-pillar lining reinforcement
Mild steel
0.8
(4 )
Front outer wheel arch
Mild steel
0.75
(5 )
Windscreen pillar lining
HLE
1.2
(6 )
B-pillar extension
Mild steel
0.9
(7 )
B-pillar stiffener upper mounting
Mild steel
0.7
(8 )
Upper centring device mounting reinforcement
Mild steel
1.5
(9 )
B-pillar striker panel reinforcement
Mild steel
1.2
(10 )
B-pillar stiffener lower mounting
Mild steel
0.7
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
The options for replacing this part are as follows:
partial replacement section A-D,
partial replacement section B-E,
partial replacement section B-D,
partial replacement section C-E,
partial replacement section D-F.
-3-
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
1- POSITION OF ELECTRIC EARTHS
-4-
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
2- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT SECTION A-D,
1)PART IN POSITION
-5-
DETAILED VIEW A
-6-
DETAILED VIEW D
-7-
3- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT SECTION B-E
1)PART IN POSITION
-8-
DETAILED VIEW B
-9-
DETAILED VIEW E
- 10 -
4- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT SECTION B-D
1)PART IN POSITION
- 11 -
DETAILED VIEW B
- 12 -
DETAILED VIEW D
- 13 -
5- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT SECTION C-E
1)PART IN POSITION
- 14 -
DETAILED VIEW C
- 15 -
DETAILED VIEW E
- 16 -
6- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT SECTION D-F
1)PART IN POSITION
- 17 -
DETAILED VIEW D
- 18 -
DETAILED VIEW F
- 19 -
2)PARTS ALWAYS TO BE REPLACED
For the partial replacement of section D-F on versions without a sliding side door, it is also necessary to
order the trim mounting front support(11 ) .
Repair-40x08x08-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 20 -
BONNET:ADJUSTMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
ADJUSTMENT VALUES
For information on the adjustment values for the bonnetVehicle
bodywork specifications).
panel gaps: Adjustment value
(01C, Vehicle
ADJUSTMENT
Observe the correct adjustment order for the bonnetNon-side opening elements: Adjustment (MR 400, 48A,
Non-side opening elements).
-1-
Symbols A, B, C and D show the adjustment options.
The black dot in the centre represents the body of the bolt.
The grey section represents the component to be adjusted.
The white section represents the adjustment area.
1. ADJUSTMENT USING THE BONNET HINGE NUTS
-2-
Undo the nuts(1 ) .
Adjust the bonnet panel gaps.
Repair-40x10x08-01x67-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
BONNET HINGE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the bonnetBonnet: Removal - Refitting (48A, Non-side opening elements).
-1-
Unclip the bonnet hinge trim by(1 ) .
Remove the trim by(2 ) and by (3 ) .
-2-
Unclip the windscreen washer pipe from the bonnet right-hand hinge at(4 ) and at (5 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
Remove:
the nuts(6) ,
the bonnet hinge(7) .
REFITTING
-4-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x03x02x06-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
BONNET LOCK: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove:
-1-
the bonnet catch bolts(1) ,
the permanent shim(2) .
Unclip the bonnet release cable(3 ) by (4 ) .
Remove the bonnet catch.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
-2-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Carry out a function test.
Torque tighten the bonnet catch bolts8 N.m.
Repair-50x03x02x04-01x37-1-14-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
BONNET RELEASE CABLE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the bonnet release catch(see 52A, Non-side opening element mechanisms, Bonnet release control: Removal Refitting) ,
the bonnet catch(see 52A, Non-side opening element mechanisms, Bonnet lock: Removal - Refitting) ,
the front sill panel trimFront door sill lining: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
-1-
Remove the soundproofing pad(1 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Remove:
the bolt(2) ,
the bonnet opening mechanism by(3) .
Note the route of the bonnet release cable.
Remove the bonnet release cable.
REFITTING
-3-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x03x02x16-01x37-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
BONNET RELEASE CONTROL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the bonnet release control by(1 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-50x03x02x02-01x37-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
BONNET STRIKER PANEL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Open the bonnet.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Unclip the striker panel opening control at(1 ) .
Remove:
the bolts(2) ,
the bonnet striker panel.
-2-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x03x02x08-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
BONNET: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
This operation can be carried out in two ways:
- removal without the hinges: allows the initial adjustments to be kept.
- removal with the hinges: prevents the original paintwork from coming off between the hinges and the
bonnet lining.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL WITHOUT THE BONNET HINGES
1- REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the bonnet soundproofing.
Disconnect the screen washer pipes.
Unclip the screen washer pipes.
2- REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove:
the nuts(1) ,
the bonnet (this operation requires two people).
2. REFITTING WITHOUT THE BONNET HINGES
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
3. REMOVAL WITH THE BONNET HINGES
-2-
1- REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-3-
Unclip the scuttle panel grille side trims in the direction(1 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.
(Car. 1363 ) .
-4-
Then unclip the scuttle panel grille side trims in the directions(2 ) and (3 ) .
-5-
-6-
Unclip the bonnet trims.
Remove the bonnet soundproofing.
Disconnect the screen washer pipes.
Unclip the screen washer pipes.
2- REMOVAL OPERATION
-7-
Remove:
the nuts(4) ,
the bonnet (this operation requires two people).
4. REFITTING WITH THE BONNET HINGES
-8-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the opening clearances and flush fitting(see 48A, Non-side opening elements,
Adjustment ) .
Repair-40x10x08-01x37-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-9-
Bonnet:
B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the complete rear seator the complete rear bench seat,
the upper body rear trim(see 71A, Body internal trim, Upper body trim: Removal - Refitting) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the clips(1 ) .
Unclip the B-pillar lower trim.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-70x02x06x06-01x37-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
B-PILLAR TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the bolt of the front seatbelt(see Front
seat: Exploded view) .
-1-
Partially remove the seal at(1 ) .
-2-
Unclip the seatbelt height adjustment control(2 ) at (3 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car.
1363 ) .
-3-
Remove the bolt of the front side seat belt return mechanism(4 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
-5-
Unclip the B-pillar trim at(5 ) .
Remove the B-pillar trim.
REFITTING
-6-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the front side seat belt return mechanism bolt30 N.m.
Repair-70x02x08x10-01x37-1-13-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
BRAKEFLUID:SPECIFICATIONS
1. BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT INTERVAL
Our braking technology, and in particular the disc brakes (hollow pistons which conduct little heat, have
a low volume of fluid in the cylinder, sliding callipers avoiding the need for a fluid reserve in the least
cooled area of the wheel), has allowed us to prevent the risk of " vapour lock " as far as possible, even
with heavy braking (mountainous area). However, current brake fluids are subject to minor deterioration
during the first months of use due to slight humidity intake. This is why it is recommended that you
change the brake fluid: see maintenance booklet for the vehicle.
1- TOPPING UP THE LEVEL
Wear of the brake pads will result in a gradual drop in the fluid level in the reservoir.
Do not top up the fluid, as the level will rise again when the pads are next changed. The brake fluid level
must not fall below the minimum mark.
2- APPROVED BRAKE FLUID
Using a mixture of two incompatible brake fluids in the brake circuit may give rise to:
significant risk of leaks mainly due deterioration of the cups,
impaired operation of the ESP system.
To avoid such risks, it is essential to only use RENAULT standard approved brake fluidsVehicle: Parts
and consumables for the repair .
Repair-13x03x01x02-02x08-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
BRAKE MECHANISM: PRECAUTIONS FOR THE REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
1. SAFETY
1- ADVICE TO BE FOLLOWED BEFORE ANY OPERATION
For an operation requiring the use of a lift, follow the safety advice(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A,
Lifting equipment).
2- INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED DURING THE OPERATION
Using a mixture of two incompatible brake fluids in the brake circuit may give rise to:
serious risk of leakage due mainly to deterioration of the cups,
degradation of the ESP system.
To avoid such risks, only ever use brake fluids which comply with the RENAULT standard(see Vehicle:
Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products).
CAUTION
Switch off the vehicle ignition so as not to activate the hydraulic unit solenoid valves
when bleeding the brake circuit.
Reminder:
The pipes between the master cylinder, the callipers, and the hydraulic unit are connected using threaded unions
with a metric thread.
Therefore, only parts specified in the Parts Catalogue for this vehicle should be used.
WARNING
To ensure that the ABS and ESP systems operate correctly, check that the
underbody brake pipes are clipped in place and are not crossed.
-1-
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
If, during work on the brake system, any damage on any part is observed, it must be repaired before
driving the vehicle again.
2. CLEANLINESS
1- ADVICE TO BE FOLLOWED BEFORE ANY OPERATION
Protect any bodywork components that risk being damaged by brake fluid with a cover.
2- INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED DURING THE OPERATION
To avoid contaminating the brake circuit, do not allow the brake circuit components to drop on the
ground.
Clean around the braking system with brake cleaner(see Vehicle:
Consumables - Products).
Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B,
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
3. GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
1- MASTER CYLINDER - BRAKE SERVO
Always replace the master cylinder seals.
Check that the brake servo seal is in place. Replace the seal if it is damaged.
Always replace the master cylinder - brake servo assembly when the master cylinder leaks into the
brake servo. The brake servo becomes unusable when the rubber diaphragm is contaminated with brake
fluid.
-2-
WARNING
To avoid breaking the connection between the brake servo pushrod and the brake
pedal, check that the safety clevis pin is locked onto the brake servo pushrod by
tilting it from the top downwards.
2- BRAKE HOSE
CAUTION
In order not to damage the brake hose:
do not tension the hose,
do not twist the hose,
check that there is no contact with the surrounding components.
Repair-13x03x02-02x60-1-5-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
BRAKE PEDAL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
parts always to be replaced:
Connecting shaft between the brake pedal and the brake servo pushrod
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the lower trim under the steering wheel.
Remove the lower right-hand air duct.
Remove the brake pedal brake light switch.
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-1-
Remove the connecting shaft(1) between the brake pedal and the brake servo pushrod:
unlock the shaft in accordance with(2) ,
extract the shaft in accordance with(3) .
-2-
Remove the nut(4 ) from the brake pedal shaft.
Remove the shaft(5 ) to release the brake pedal.
Remove the brake pedal.
REFITTING
-3-
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
pushrod
Connecting shaft between the brake pedal and the brake servo
.
Coat the shaft with MOLYKOTE 33Mgrease(see Vehicle:
Parts and consumables for the repair) .
2. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Note:
Do not hit the shaft with a hammer to get it to go back into place.
Refit:
the brake pedal,
the brake pedal shaft.
Torque tighten the brake pedal shaft nut17 N.m.
-4-
Refit a new connecting shaft between the brake pedal and the brake servo pushrod:
insert the shaft in accordance with(6) ,
lock the shaft in accordance with(7) .
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit and adjust the brake switch(see 37A, Mechanical
Refit the lower right-hand air duct.
Refit the lower trim under the steering wheel.
-5-
component controls, Pedal switches: Adjustment)
.
Check that the entire braking system operates correctly.
Repair-30x03x02x01-01x37-1-44-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
BRAKE SERVO NON-RETURN VALVE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 37A, Mechanical
component controls , Braking control assembly: Exploded view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the brake servo non-return valve(1 ) .
Fit blanking plugs into openings.
-2-
Unclip the non-return valve pipe(2 ) from the vacuum pump.
Fit blanking plugs into openings.
-3-
Unclip the brake servo non-return valve from the body at(3 ) .
Remove the brake servo non-return valve.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Check the condition of the brake servo non-return valve(see 37A, Mechanical
-4-
component controls, Braking
assistance circuit: Check)
.
Replace any faulty parts.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
Lubricate the end piece of the non-return valve pipe.
Note:
Check that the non-return valve pipe is correctly clipped onto the vacuum pump and
onto the brake servo.
Insert the connector until the locking click sound is heard (risk of poor connection).
Repair-13x03x06x04-01x37-1-28-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
BRAKE SERVO: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 37A, Mechanical
component controls , Pedal assembly: Exploded view ) .
Note:
Never handle the brake servo by the control rod. This could damage the control
system.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove (see 37A, Mechanical component controls, Braking control assembly: Exploded view) :
the master cylinder,
the brake servo non-return valve.
Move aside the air filter unit air outlet pipeAND
(M9T) AND (PA0 OR PF6) M9T, PA0 PF6(12A,
Remove the A-pillar air distribution duct(see Air
distribution circuit assembly: Exploded view) (61A,
-1-
Fuel mixture).
Heating).
-2-
Remove:
the bolts(1) of the cowlings under the steering wheel,
the cowlings under the steering wheel.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
Remove:
the rubber ring(2) from the dual safety connecting shaft,
the dual safety connecting shaft.
Remove (see 37A, Mechanical component controls, Pedal assembly: Exploded view) :
the brake servo nuts,
the brake servo.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-4-
Use SURFACE CLEANER(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables Products) to clean the bearing face of the brake servo on the bulkhead.
Remove the adhesive film of the brake servo on the bulkhead.
Always replace the dual connecting shaft.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Fit the brake servo flat against the bulkhead.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-13x03x06-01x37-1-75-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
BRAKE SERVO: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 37A, Mechanical
component controls , Pedal assembly: Exploded view ) .
Note:
Never handle the brake servo by the control rod. This could damage the control
system.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove (see 37A, Mechanical component controls, Braking control assembly: Exploded view) :
the master cylinder,
the brake servo non-return valve.
Remove the A-pillar air duct(see Air
distribution circuit assembly: Exploded view) (61A,
-1-
Heating).
-2-
Remove:
the bolts(1) of the cowlings under the steering wheel,
the cowlings under the steering wheel.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
Remove (see 37A, Mechanical component controls, Pedal assembly: Exploded view) :
the rubber ring(2) from the dual safety connecting shaft,
the dual safety connecting shaft,
the brake servo.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and
consumables for the repair) (04B,
-4-
Consumables - Products) to
clean the bearing face of the brake servo on the bulkhead.
Remove the adhesive film of the brake servo on the bulkhead.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Fit the brake servo flat against the bulkhead.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-13x03x06-01x37-1-73-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
BRAKE
SPECIFICATIONS
1.
Front brakes (mm)
Disc diameter
302
Disc thickness
28
Minimum disc thickness (1)
24.5
Piston diameter
48 (2 pistons)
Maximum disc run-out
0.096
Brake lining thickness (including backplate)
18.2
Minimum brake pad thickness (including backplate)
9.1
(1) the brake discs cannot be reground. If the brake discs are excessively worn or scratched they must
be replaced.
-1-
Rear brakes (mm)
Type of rear wheel drive
Single wheel rear wheel
drive
Twin wheel rear wheel
drive
Disc diameter
305
302
Disc thickness
12
18
Minimum disc thickness (1)
10
15
Piston diameter
48
48
Maximum disc run-out
0.08
0.08
Brake lining thickness (including backplate)
18.2
18.2
Minimum brake pad thickness (including
backplate)
9.1
9.2
(1) the brake discs cannot be reground. If the brake discs are excessively worn or scratched they must
be replaced.
Repair-13x03-02x08-1-38-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
BRAKING CIRCUIT: BLEED
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
brake circuit bleeding device
pedal press
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness
instructions and operation recommendations before carrying out any repair(see 30A,
General information, Brake circuit: Precautions for the repair) .
CAUTION
To avoid residual air being present in the brake circuit, the parking brake must be
released before starting the bleeding process.
This procedure must be applied after one of the following components has been removed or replaced:
the master cylinder,
the brake fluid,
the hydraulic unit,
a rigid pipe,
a hose,
the reservoir,
a calliper.
CAUTION
Switch off the vehicle ignition so as not to activate the hydraulic unit solenoid valves
when bleeding the brake circuit.
-1-
CAUTION
The level must be between the " MIN " and " MAX " markings on the reservoir.
Use locally produced containers to collect the used brake fluid.
Front and rear callipers:
2 washer fluid containers(1) (
4 mmdiameter
1 litre),
transparent pipes(2) ,
4 pipettes(3) ,
-2-
2 T-unions(4) .
Note:
The new hydraulic unit is pre-filled.
When working on one of the following components, position a pedal pressto limit the outflow of brake
fluid and prevent any air from entering the master cylinder and the circuits downstream of the master
cylinder:
hydraulic unit,
pipes between the hydraulic unit and brake callipers,
brake hoses,
brake calliper.
Remove the pedal
pressbefore
carrying out the braking system bleeding procedure.
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Switch off the vehicle ignition.
Connect the brake circuit bleeding device(after having received Renault approval) to the master cylinder
reservoir (see the instructions for the equipment).
Pressurise the brake circuit.
Adjust the pressure to between 1.5 bar & lt; P & lt; 2 barfor 3 minutesto stabilise it in the braking circuit.
Close the circuit between the bleed screw and brake fluid reservoir without dumping the pressure.
Note:
The circuit between the bleed screw and brake fluid reservoir is closed in different ways depending on
the type of equipment used:
valve,
switch.
Fit the bleed containers to the six bleed screws of the callipers.
-3-
Note:
Some callipers are equipped with several bleed screws. In this case, turn the bolts
one after another to perform the brake circuit bleed.
Undo the calliper bleed screws:
front left-hand,
front right-hand,
rear left-hand,
rear right-hand.
Open the circuit between the bleed screw and brake fluid reservoir and allow the liquid to run until all
the air bubbles have been released.
Tighten the bleed screws in the following order:
front left-hand,
front right-hand,
rear left-hand,
rear right-hand.
Undo the calliper bleed screw:
front left-hand,
allow the fluid to run until all the air bubbles have been released,
tighten the bleed screw on the calliper.
Carry out the previous operation on the callipers:
front right-hand,
rear left-hand,
rear right-hand.
Close the bleed screw to dump the pressure in the brake circuit.
Remove the brake
circuit bleeding devicefrom
the master cylinder reservoir.
Check pedal travel and resistance. If it is not correct, finish bleeding the brake circuit with the help of a second operator. Start
the bleed operation by bleeding the calliper that is the furthest away from the master cylinder:
hold down the brake pedal,
open the circuit bleed screw to release the air from the brake circuit,
close the circuit bleed screw,
release the brake pedal.
Top up the brake fluid level in the reservoir, if necessary. Check the sealing of the front and rear bleed
screws and ensure that the sealing covers are in placeFront brake calliper assembly: Exploded view .
-4-
During a road test, trigger braking regulation to confirm that the brake pedal travel is correct.
Clean off any traces of brake fluid on the vehicle using brake cleaning productVehicle:
consumables for the repair .
1. BLEEDING THE BRAKING ASSISTANCE CIRCUIT
Repair-13x03x01-01x76-1-29-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
Parts and
BRAKING CONTROL ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
(see Illustration key: Description) Key.
Mark
Description
1
Brake fluid reservoir
2
Master cylinder seal on brake fluid reservoir side
3
Master cylinder nut
4
Brake pipe between master cylinder and hydraulic unit
5
Brake pipe between master cylinder and hydraulic unit
6
Brake fluid reservoir pin
7
Master cylinder
8
Brake servo non-return valve
9
Information
Brake servo
(see 37A, Mechanical
(see 37A, Mechanical
component controls, Master cylinder: Removal - Refitting)
component controls, Brake servo non-return valve: Removal - Refitting)
(see 37A, Mechanical
-1-
component controls, Brake servo: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-13x03x02x01-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
BULKHEAD LOWER CROSS MEMBER: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Bulkhead lower cross member
HLE
0.9
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x06x17-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
BULKHEADSIDEREINFORCEMENT:REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Bulkhead side reinforcement
Mild steel
1.5
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x06x14x13-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
BULKHEAD:REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
Precautions for the repair
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Centre floor front extension
Mild steel
0.9
(2 )
Dashboard mounting reinforcement
Mild steel
1.5
(3 )
Gearbox control mounting reinforcement
Mild steel
1.2
(4 )
ESP computer support
Mild steel
1.5
(5 )
Dashboard frame support
Mild steel
1.5
(6 )
Left-hand drive heater bulkhead
Mild steel
1.2
(7 )
Diesel filter support
Mild steel
1.17
(8 )
Right-hand water chamber evacuation channel
Mild steel
0.8
(9 )
Right-hand heater bulkhead
Mild steel
1.2
(10 )
Windscreen shim support
Mild steel
1.2
(11 )
Bulkhead
Mild steel
1.2
(12 )
Left-hand water chamber evacuation channel
Mild steel
0.8
(13 )
Pedal support mounting bridge piece
Mild steel
2.0
(14 )
Airbag computer support
HLE
1.5
(15 )
Left-hand pedal plate reinforcement
HLE
1.8
(16 )
Left-hand heater bulkhead
Mild steel
1.2
(17 )
Bulkhead reinforcement
Mild steel
0.8
(18 )
Dashboard frame mounting support
Mild steel
1.2
(19 )
Scuttle panel rain channel
Mild steel
0.85
(20 )
Bulkhead upper reinforcement
Mild steel
0.8
(21 )
Windscreen aperture lower cross member
Mild steel
0.8
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-2-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
Repair-40x06x14-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
by arc welding under
CAB FLOOR: REPLACEMENT
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
-2-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Handbrake lever protector plate
HLE
1.2
(2 )
Spacer
Nylon
4
(3 )
Reinforcement bar
HLE
1.2
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
Position the handbrake lever protector plate with:
one spacer(2) ,
one reinforcement bar(3) ,
three bolts(4) ,
one nut(5) .
2)SPECIAL NOTES FOR REMOVAL
-4-
Note:
Remove the handbrake lever protector plate following the direction of the arrow.
Repair-40x03x04-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
CABIN FILTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 61A, Heating,
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the dashboard lower trimDashboard lower trim: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment),
the right-hand A-pillar air duct(see 61A, Heating, Air distribution circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (see 61A, Heating, Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly: Exploded view) :
the cabin filter access flap,
the cabin filter.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Check there are no foreign bodies in the passenger compartment filter housing and clean thoroughly if
necessary.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-1-
Fit the first half of the cabin filter(1 ) in its housing.
Position the adjusting strip(2 ) on the first half of the cabin filter.
Fit the second half of the cabin filter(3 ) in its housing.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x02x01x14-01x37-1-28-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
CAMSHAFT: CHECK
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Cylinder block liner clamps.
Mot. 588
Equipment required
component support
Dial gauge
dial gauge support
external micrometer
radial play measuring tape
compressed air nozzle
1. PREPARATION OPERATION FOR CHECK
CAUTION
It is strictly forbidden to apply any pressure to the engine oil sump. Damage to the sump will irreparably
damage the engine by:
blocking the strainer,
raising the oil level above maximum, with a risk of engine racing.
Note:
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before
carrying out any repair(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine: Precautions
the repair) .
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Position the engine on the
equipment: Use ) .
component support(see
10A, Engine
-1-
and cylinder block assembly, Engine support
for
Remove the camshafts(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Camshaft: Removal - Refitting) .
Camshaft: Removal - Refitting)
(see 10A,
Before any checks:
clean the camshafts with surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables Products) and dry them using a compressed air nozzle,
check that the camshafts are not scratched and do not show signs of impact or abnormal wear (replace the
camshaft if necessary).
2. CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT
1- IDENTIFICATION OF THE CAMSHAFTS
(1 ) : inlet camshaft.
(2 ) : exhaust camshaft
(3 ) : timing end
(4 ) : flywheel end
-2-
(A) : inlet spacer
(E) : exhaust spacer
2- CHECKING THE CONCENTRICITY OF THE CAMSHAFT JOURNALS
Place the camshaft on two slightly oiled v-blocks(5 ) .
Fit:
the dial gauge support(6) ,
the Dial gauge(7) .
-3-
Position the dial gauge sensor against the centre of the mating face of the camshaft journals.
Calibrate the dial gauge to zero.
Rotate the camshaft while avoiding the lubrication holes to check the journal concentricity, which must
be less than 0.05 mm.
3- CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETERS
Use a
external micrometerto
measure the diameter(X1 ) of the camshaft journal, which must be between
24.98 and 25 mm.
4- CHECKING THE HEIGHT OF THE CAM LOBES
-4-
-5-
Place the camshaft on two slightly oiled v-blocks.
Measure using a
mm .
external micrometerthe
height of the cam(X2 ) , which must be between 39.03 and 39.13
5- CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT RADIAL PLAY
-6-
Cut 12 pieces of
radial play measuring tapethe
width of the camshaft journal mating face.
Place each piece of wire on the rocker cover camshaft journal mating faces in line with the camshaft at
(8 ) and (9 ) .
Note:
Do not allow the camshaft to rotate during the operation in order to avoid distorting the
measurement.
Refit (see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Camshaft: Removal - Refitting) (see 10A,Engine and cylinder block
-7-
assembly , Camshaft: Removal - Refitting) :
the camshafts,
the camshaft bearing caps,
the rocker cover (without seals).
Remove:
the
the
the
the
the
rocker cover bolts,
rocker cover,
camshaft bearing cap bolts,
camshaft bearing caps,
camshafts.
Measure the flattening of the clearance measuring tape, which must be between 0.04 and 0.08 mm,
-8-
using the gauge(10 ) printed on the measuring tape packaging paper.
Clean any traces of measuring tape off the camshaft and the camshaft bearing caps.
6- CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT LONGITUDINAL PLAY
Refit the camshafts on the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly,
Refitting) (see 10A,Engine and cylinder block assembly, Camshaft: Removal - Refitting) .
Camshaft: Removal -
Fit:
a metal plate(11) on the rocker cover (e.g.: toolCylinder block liner clamps.(Mot. 588 ) ),
the dial gauge support(12) on the metal plate,
-9-
the Dial gauge(13) on the mounting.
Position the dial gauge sensor against the end of the camshaft.
Move the camshaft towards the dial gauge until it hits a stop.
Calibrate the dial gauge to zero.
Move the camshaft towards the side opposite the dial gauge until it hits the other stop.
Check that the longitudinal play is between 0.08 and 0.18 mm.
Remove the rocker cover camshafts(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly,
Refitting) (see 10A,Engine and cylinder block assembly, Camshaft: Removal - Refitting) .
Camshaft: Removal -
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the camshafts(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Camshaft: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove the engine from
equipment: Use ) .
component support(see
10A, Engine
Camshaft: Removal - Refitting)
and cylinder block assembly, Engine support
Refit the engine - gearbox assembly.
Repair-10x02x02-02x58-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
(see 10A,
CAMSHAFT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Cylinder head support
Mot. 1573
parts always to be replaced:
camshaft timing sprocket bolt
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Remove:
the timing chain(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting) ,
the timing sprockets(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing sprocket: Removal - Refitting) .
X74, M9R, 760(760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR 802
OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 845 OR 849 OR 858) AND (E05A-Euro 05 with
OBD)
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust gas pressure
sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Remove:
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls),
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
-1-
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal
- Refitting ,
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting) .
2. CAMSHAFT REMOVAL OPERATION
Fit the rocker cover on theCylinder head support(Mot. 1573 ) .
Remove:
the camshaft bearing cap bolts,
the camshaft bearing caps,
-2-
the camshaft(1) on the inlet side,
the camshaft(2) on the exhaust side.
Note:
The bearing caps are marked at the factory.
1- REMOVAL OF THE HIGH PRESSURE PUMP DRIVE PINION
Carry out this operation only when replacing the exhaust side camshaft or the high pressure pump
drive pinion.
-3-
Immobilise the high pressure pump drive pinion(3 ) using a vice with jaws.
Remove the bolt(5 ) from the pinion, holding the camshaft(4 ) steady by hand.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean:
the camshafts,
the camshaft bearing caps,
the bearings on the rocker cover.
Check that the teeth of the high pressure pump drive pinion are not chipped, flaked, or scratched.
parts always to be replaced:
camshaft timing sprocket bolt
1- REFITTING THE HIGH PRESSURE PUMP PINION
Carry out this operation only when replacing the exhaust side camshaft or the high pressure pump
drive pinion.
Immobilise the high pressure pump drive pinion in a vice with jaws.
Without tightening, fit the new bolt of the pinion whilst holding the camshaft (exhaust side).
Torque and angle tighten the high pressure pump drive pinion bolt40 N.m + 34 ± 6 .
2. CAMSHAFT REFITTING OPERATION
-4-
Fit the rocker cover on theCylinder head support(Mot. 1573 ) .
Lubricate the camshaft bearings on the rocker cover with engine oil.
Refit:
the camshaft, inlet side(6) ,
the camshaft, exhaust side(7) .
Lubricate the camshafts around the bearing caps with engine oil.
Refit:
the camshaft bearing cap(8) (part marking: ADM1),
the camshaft bearing cap(9) (part marking: ADM2),
the camshaft bearing cap(10) (part marking: ECH1),
-5-
the camshaft bearing cap(11) (part marking: ECH2).
Note:
Check that the camshaft bearing caps are in contact with the rocker cover before
refitting the bolts.
Fit the camshaft bearing cap bolts, without tightening them.
Torque tighten the camshaft bearing cap bolts10 N.m.
Remove the rocker cover from theCylinder head support(Mot. 1573 ) .
Position:
the groove(12) on the exhaust side camshaft horizontally (large segment(13) facing upwards),
the groove on the inlet side of the camshaft(14) facing towards the rocker cover boss(15) .
-6-
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit:
the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting) ,
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal
- Refitting ,
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls).
X74, M9R, 760(760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR 802
OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 845 OR 849 OR 858) AND (E05A-Euro 05 with
OBD)
Refit the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Refit:
the timing sprockets(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing sprocket: Removal - Refitting) ,
the timing chain(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting) .
Refit the engine and gearbox assembly.
Repair-10x02x02-01x37-1-134-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
CAMSHAFT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Cylinder head support
Mot. 1573
parts always to be replaced:
camshaft timing sprocket bolt
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Remove:
the timing chain(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting) ,
the timing sprockets(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing sprocket: Removal - Refitting) .
X74, M9R, 760(760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR 802
OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 845 OR 849 OR 858) AND (E05A-Euro 05 with
OBD)
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust gas pressure
sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Remove:
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls),
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
-1-
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal
- Refitting ,
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
X62, M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove:
the turbocharger strutExhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view ,
the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view ,
the engine lifting eyes .
The rocker cover(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting)
2. CAMSHAFT REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
.
Fit the rocker cover on theCylinder head support(Mot. 1573 ) .
Remove:
the
the
the
the
camshaft bearing cap bolts,
camshaft bearing caps,
camshaft(1) on the inlet side,
camshaft(2) on the exhaust side.
Note:
The bearing caps are marked at the factory.
-3-
1- REMOVAL OF THE HIGH PRESSURE PUMP DRIVE PINION
Carry out this operation only when replacing the exhaust side camshaft or the high pressure pump
drive pinion.
Immobilise the high pressure pump drive pinion(3 ) using a vice with jaws.
Remove the bolt(5 ) from the pinion, holding the camshaft(4 ) steady by hand.
-4-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean:
the camshafts,
the camshaft bearing caps,
the bearings on the rocker cover.
Check that the teeth of the high pressure pump drive pinion are not chipped, flaked, or scratched.
parts always to be replaced:
camshaft timing sprocket bolt
1- REFITTING THE HIGH PRESSURE PUMP PINION
Carry out this operation only when replacing the exhaust side camshaft or the high pressure pump
drive pinion.
Immobilise the high pressure pump drive pinion in a vice with jaws.
Without tightening, fit the new bolt of the pinion whilst holding the camshaft (exhaust side).
Torque and angle tighten the high pressure pump drive pinion bolt40 N.m + 34 ± 6 .
2. CAMSHAFT REFITTING OPERATION
-5-
Fit the rocker cover on theCylinder head support(Mot. 1573 ) .
Lubricate the camshaft bearings on the rocker cover with engine oil.
Refit:
the camshaft, inlet side(6) ,
the camshaft, exhaust side(7) .
Lubricate the camshafts around the bearing caps with engine oil.
Refit:
the camshaft bearing cap(8) (part marking: ADM1),
the camshaft bearing cap(9) (part marking: ADM2),
the camshaft bearing cap(10) (part marking: ECH1),
-6-
the camshaft bearing cap(11) (part marking: ECH2).
Note:
Check that the camshaft bearing caps are in contact with the rocker cover before
refitting the bolts.
Fit the camshaft bearing cap bolts, without tightening them.
Torque tighten the camshaft bearing cap bolts10 N.m.
Remove the rocker cover from theCylinder head support(Mot. 1573 ) .
Position:
the groove(12) on the exhaust side camshaft horizontally (large segment(13) facing upwards),
the groove on the inlet side of the camshaft(14) facing towards the rocker cover boss(15) .
-7-
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit:
the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting) ,
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal
- Refitting ,
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls).
X74, M9R, 760(760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR 802
OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 845 OR 849 OR 858) AND (E05A-Euro 05 with
OBD)
Refit the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Refit:
the timing sprockets(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing sprocket: Removal - Refitting) ,
the timing chain(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting) .
Refit the engine and gearbox assembly.
Repair-10x02x02-01x37-1-77-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
CATALYTIC CONVERTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Pliers for removing exhaust pipe rubber mounting bushes
Mot. 1857
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 19B, Exhaust, Exhaust: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
To prevent the surrounding components from overheating, do not damage (tear, pierce,
bend, etc.) a heat shield.
Any damaged heat shields must be replaced.
WARNING
Wear heat protective gloves during the operation.
-1-
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine undertray.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (see 19B, Exhaust, Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view) :
the catalytic converter exhaust clip,
the catalytic converter bracket nuts,
the catalytic converter bracket seal,
the catalytic converter from the rubber mounting bushes of the front axle subframe,
the catalytic converter.
Note:
In case of difficulty removing the rubber mounting bushes, use the toolPliers for
removing exhaust pipe rubber mounting bushes(Mot. 1857 ) .
If necessary, spray brake cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables Products):
inside the catalytic converter mounts,
on the welded threads of the catalytic converter.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean
and degrease the bearing faces between the exhaust flange and the catalytic converter.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Start the engine.
-2-
Check that there are no leaks and deal with them if necessary.
Refit the engine undertray.
Repair-10x08x02x08-01x37-2-123-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
CENTRAL FLOOR FRONT EXTENSION: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Centre floor front extension
Mild steel
0.9
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
The options for replacing this part are as follows:
-2-
complete replacement A-C,
side partial replacement A-B.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
-3-
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT A-C
1)PART IN POSITION
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
-4-
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
2- SIDE PARTIAL REPLACEMENT A-B
1)PART IN POSITION
-5-
Make a superimposed connection (at B) Partial
40E, Partial replacement connections).
replacement connections by overlapping: Description
DETAILED VIEW B
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
-6-
(MR400,
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
Repair-40x03x02x07-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
CENTRE CONSOLE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the gear knob - gear control lever gaiter assembly by(1 ) .
-1-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Remove bolts (2 ) and (3 ) .
Unclip the centre console.
Disconnect the connector.
Remove the centre console.
-3-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x08x04x02-01x37-1-18-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
CENTRE FLOOR FRONT CROSS MEMBER: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Central floor front cross member
HLE
0.75
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x03x08-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
CENTRE FLOOR FRONT SIDE CROSS MEMBER: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Centre floor front side cross member
HLE
1.5
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x03x08x04-02x49-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
CENTRE FLOOR REAR SECTION: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
H62(H62)
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Centre floor rear section
HLE
1.2
(2 )
Left-hand cross member upper reinforcement
HLE
1.5
-2-
(3 )
Right-hand cross member upper reinforcement
HLE
1.5
(4 )
Parking brake mounting reinforcement
HLE
1.5
Type
Thickness (mm)
U62(U62)
No.
Description
-3-
(5 )
Centre floor rear section
HLE
1.2
(6 )
Left-hand cross member upper reinforcement
HLE
1.5
(7 )
Right-hand cross member upper reinforcement
HLE
1.5
(8 )
Parking brake mounting reinforcement
HLE
1.5
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld areaEarth
screw connection: Description (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld area(see Earths on body: List and location of components) .
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldElectrical resistance spot welding
connection with indirect access: Description (MR 400, 40B, Electrical resistance welded
connections).
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-4-
H62(H62)
U62(U62)
-5-
Repair-40x03x02x03-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
CENTRE FRONT PANEL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the centre console(see 57A, Interior equipment ,
-1-
Centre console: Removal - Refitting)
.
WITHOUTDASHBOARDSHELF(STABPB)
Unclip the storage compartment using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
-2-
DASHBOARDSHELF(TABPDB)
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the removable table(2) .
Remove the radioRadio: Removal - Refitting (86A, Radio).
-3-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove bolts (3 ) and (4 ) .
Unclip the centre front panel.
Disconnect the connectors (depending on equipment level).
Remove the centre front panel.
-4-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x08x02x17-01x37-1-13-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
CIGARETTE LIGHTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the centre consoleCentre console: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the cigarette lighter.
Unclip the bulb mounting from the cigarette lighter using a flat-blade screwdriver at(1 ) and (2 ) .
-2-
Keep the plastic support unlocked at(3 ) .
Pull the cigarette lighter support at(4 ) .
Unclip the plastic support from the centre console.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-3-
Repair-30x04x11x04-01x37-1-20-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Repair-12x03x01-02x50-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Repair-12x03x01-02x50-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
CLUTCH CIRCUIT: BLEED
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
brake circuit bleeding device
hydraulic circuit bleed syringe
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Bleed in the event of:
dead travel,
pedal at mid-travel,
pedal to the floor,
poor gear changing.
1. PRECAUTIONS DURING REPAIR
1- RISKS RELATING TO CONTAMINATION
The hydraulic clutch circuit is highly sensitive to contamination. The risks caused by contamination are:
impossible to change gears,
damage to or destruction of the clutch system,
leaks on the hydraulic circuit.
All the operations on the clutch hydraulic circuit system must be carried out under very clean
conditions. This ensures that no impurities enter the hydraulic circuit during the operation.
The cleanliness principles apply to all components of the hydraulic clutch circuit.
Items causing contamination are:
metal or plastic swarf,
-fibres:
cardboard, brushes, paper, clothing, cloth, dust and particles in the air, etc.
-1-
1- CLEANING CLOTHS
Use lint-free cleaning cloths(see Vehicle: Parts and
Products).
consumables for the repair) (04B,
Consumables -
Each cloth must only be used once.
1- THERE ARE TWO TYPES OF EQUIPMENT USED TO BLEED THE CLUTCH CIRCUIT:
ARC50 via the brake fluid reservoir.
Syringe via the bleed hole located on the clutch slave cylinder.
1- THERE ARE TWO PROCEDURES USED TO BLEED THE CLUTCH CIRCUIT:
If parts of the hydraulic clutch circuit are removed:
Carry out the bleed operation using the ARC50 via the brake fluid reservoir or using a new syringe via the bleed
hole located on the clutch slave cylinder.
If no parts of the clutch hydraulic circuit are removed:
Only carry out the bleed operation using a new syringe by injecting the brake fluid via the bleed hole on the clutch
slave cylinder.
Note:
Even the tiniest air bubble in the circuit can cause faulty operation (pedal failing to return
properly, crunching sound when changing gear, etc.).
Incorrect bleeding can lead to incorrect detection of faults and unnecessary part
replacements.
1- CONSUMABLES FOR THE REPAIR:
Bleed the clutch circuit using approved brake fluid(see Vehicle: Parts and
Consumables - Products).
consumables for the repair) (04B,
2. PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
-2-
Remove the engine undertray.
1- THERE ARE SEVERAL VERSIONS OF BLEED SCREW:
SCREW TYPE BLEED SCREW
To open the bleed screw, hold the plastic union(1 ) using a ring spanner and undo the bleed screw(2 ) .
HALF-TURN BLEED SCREW
-3-
To open the bleed screw, fully turn the bleed screw(3 ) by hand.
BLEED SCREW WITH A CLIP
-4-
To open the bleed screw, press and hold the clip(4 ) while pulling by one notch.
BLEED SCREW WITH A CLIP
-5-
To open the bleed screw, lift the clip(5 ) while pulling by one notch.
BLEED SCREW WITH TWO CLIPS
-6-
To open the bleed screw, lower the clip(6 ) and lift the clip(7 ) while pulling by one notch.
3. BLEED PROCEDURE IF NO PARTS OF THE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT ARE REMOVED
1- BLEED USING THE ARC50
Keep the clutch pedal in the upper position using a strap attached to the steering wheel to ensure
continuity of the hydraulic circuit during the bleed operation.
-7-
Note:
Take care not to disrupt the adjustment of the clutch start of travel switch.
Connect the brake circuit bleeding device(after having received Renault approval) to the master cylinder
reservoir (see the instructions for the equipment).
Remove the bleed plug from the clutch slave cylinder.
Connect a transparent pipe to the bleed hole running to an empty container placed under the bleed
hole.
Open:
the bleed screw,
the circuit between the bleeding device and the brake fluid reservoir.
Let the brake fluid run until all air bubbles have been released.
Stop the bleeding device to dump the pressure in the clutch circuit.
Close the bleed screw.
Remove the transparent pipe from the bleed hole.
Refit the bleed plug.
Top up the brake fluid level in the master cylinder reservoir after disconnecting the bleed device.
Disengage and engage the clutch quickly around twenty times.
Check that the clutch system is operating correctly.
Repeat the bleed operation if necessary.
Check the adjustment of the clutch pedal switch(see 37A, Mechanical
Adjustment ) .
component controls, Pedal switches:
2- BLEED USING A NEW SYRINGE
Keep the clutch pedal in the upper position using a strap attached to the steering wheel to ensure
continuity of the hydraulic circuit during the bleed operation.
-8-
Note:
Take care not to disrupt the adjustment of the clutch start of travel switch.
Remove the bleed plug from the clutch slave cylinder.
Connect a transparent pipe of sufficient length to the bleed hole (at least thirty centimetres) in order to
place it at the same height as the reservoir.
Open the bleed screw.
Fill the brake fluid master cylinder reservoir until brake fluid flows out of the bleed screw.
Note:
The transparent pipe must remain at the same height as the master cylinder reservoir
to prevent air from entering inside the clutch circuit.
Connect a new
brake fluid.
hydraulic circuit bleed syringeto
the end of the transparent pipe filled with 60 mlof approved
Slowly inject the entire contents of the syringe into the hydraulic clutch circuit without injecting any of
the air from the top section of the syringe.
Close the bleed screw.
Remove the transparent pipe from the bleed hole.
Refit the bleed plug.
Top up the brake fluid level in the master cylinder reservoir.
Disengage and engage the clutch quickly around twenty times.
Check that the clutch system is operating correctly.
Repeat the bleed operation if necessary.
Check the adjustment of the clutch pedal switch(see 37A, Mechanical
Adjustment ) .
-9-
component controls, Pedal switches:
4. BLEED PREPARATION PROCEDURE IF PARTS OF THE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT ARE REMOVED
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid and protect the surrounding components.
Note:
The master cylinder pipe must be disconnected from its take-off point on the brake
fluid reservoir, to avoid any foreign matter penetrating inside the hydraulic brake circuit.
Note:
Prefill the hydraulic circuit pipe equipped with a filter.
Position the filter head facing downwards to ensure that it fills.
1- THERE ARE SEVERAL VERSIONS OF PIPE WITH AND WITHOUT A FILTER:
PIPE WITHOUT FILTER
- 10 -
FILLING POSITION FOR PIPE WITH FILTER
- 11 -
FILLING POSITION FOR PIPE WITH FILTER
- 12 -
FILLING POSITION FOR PIPE WITH FILTER
- 13 -
Prefill the clutch pipe using the syringe.
Plug the prefilled pipe on the master cylinder end to stop any brake fluid from escaping.
- 14 -
Prefill the hydraulic tappet by gravity using the syringe.
Refit the part(s) concerned.
5. BLEED OPERATION AFTER REMOVING A HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT PART
Keep the clutch pedal in the upper position using a strap attached to the steering wheel to ensure
continuity of the hydraulic circuit during the bleed operation.
- 15 -
Note:
Take care not to disrupt the adjustment of the clutch start of travel switch.
Remove the bleed plug from the clutch slave cylinder.
Connect a transparent pipe of sufficient length to the bleed hole (at least thirty centimetres) in order to
place it at the same height as the reservoir.
Open the bleed screw.
Fill the brake fluid master cylinder reservoir until brake fluid flows out of the bleed screw.
Note:
The transparent pipe must remain at the same height as the master cylinder reservoir
to prevent air from entering inside the clutch circuit.
Connect a new syringe to the end of the transparent pipe filled with 60 mlof approved brake fluid.
Slowly inject the entire contents of the syringe into the hydraulic clutch circuit without injecting
any of the air from the top section of the syringe.
Close the bleed screw.
Remove the transparent pipe from the bleed hole.
Refit the bleed plug.
Top up the brake fluid level in the master cylinder reservoir.
- 16 -
Disengage and engage the clutch quickly around twenty times.
Check that the clutch system is operating correctly.
Repeat the bleed operation if necessary.
Check the adjustment of the clutch pedal switch(see 37A, Mechanical
switches: Adjustment ) .
6. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the engine undertray.
Repair-12x04x02x04-01x76-1-42-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 17 -
component controls, Pedal
CLUTCH CIRCUIT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Clutch
Exploded view ) .
assembly:
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine undertray.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the bleed plug from the clutch circuit.
Connect a transparent pipe to the bleed hole running to an empty container placed under the bleed
hole.
-1-
Press the clip(1 ) of the clutch slave cylinder, then pull the circuit pipe out one notch.
Depress the clutch pedal by hand to empty the clutch circuit.
Disconnect the transparent pipe and the container from the bleed hole of the clutch slave cylinder.
Press the clutch slave cylinder clip.
Disconnect the hydraulic clutch control pipe from the clutch slave cylinder.
Fit blanking plugs into all openings.
-2-
Pull the clip(2 ) of the clutch master cylinder.
Disconnect the hydraulic clutch control pipe from the clutch master cylinder.
Fit blanking plugs into all openings.
Unclip the hydraulic clutch control pipe.
-3-
Note:
Carefully unclip the hydraulic clutch control pipe, taking care to correctly follow the
routing.
Remove the hydraulic clutch control pipe.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Check the condition of the seals of the hydraulic clutch control pipe.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
Bleed the clutch circuit(see 37A, Mechanical
component controls, Clutch circuit: Bleed)
Repair-12x04x02x04-01x37-1-36-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
.
CLUTCH FORK: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 20A, Clutch,
Clutch assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the manual gearboxGearbox
assembly: Exploded view
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the clutch fork(see 20A, Clutch,
Clutch assembly: Exploded view)
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-1-
.
Repair-12x03x01x05-01x37-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
CLUTCH HOUSING BEARING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
ZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit
Bvi. 1950
Equipment required
component support
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Manual gearbox: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the manual gearboxGearbox
Position the gearbox on the
assembly: Exploded view
component support(see
.
21A, Manual gearbox ,
Gearbox support equipment: Use)
.
Remove:
the gearshift plate(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) ,
the reverse gear switchGearbox assembly: Exploded view .
-1-
Remove the clutch housingGearbox
assembly: Exploded view
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the stops(1 ) Gearbox
assembly: Exploded view
.
-2-
.
-3-
Remove the input shaft bearing on the clutch housing using toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit
(Bvi. 1950 ) (D) + (C) (2 ) Gearbox assembly: Exploded view .
-4-
Remove the ball bearings(3 ) Gearbox
assembly: Exploded view
IF NECESSARY
-5-
.
Remove the needle bearings(4 ) Gearbox
assembly: Exploded view
-6-
.
Remove the outer bush of the output shaft bearing on the clutch housing(5 ) Gearbox
Exploded view .
-7-
assembly:
Remove the compensating washer(6 ) Gearbox
assembly: Exploded view
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-8-
.
Clean all the removed partsVehicle: Parts and consumables for
Products).
Always replace:
the stops bolts,
the needle bearings,
the ball bearings.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
IF REPLACING THE CLUTCH HOUSING
-9-
the repair
(04B, Consumables -
Fit the needle bearings using toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) F (7 ) Gearbox
assembly: Exploded view .
Note:
The faces of the needle bearing respectively, with the writing on them, must be facing
the push rod.
- 10 -
- 11 -
Fit the ball bearings using toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) F (9 ) Gearbox
Exploded view .
assembly:
Note:
The faces of the ball bearing respectively, with the writing on them, must be facing the
push rod (8 ) .
- 12 -
- 13 -
Refit Gearbox assembly: Exploded view :
the compensating washer,
the outer bush of the output shaft bearing on the clutch housing using toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation
kit (Bvi. 1950 ) (D) + (C) (10) .
- 14 -
Note:
Determine the thickness of the compensating washer(see Shafts
Adjustment) .
- 15 -
and synchronisers:
Refit Gearbox assembly: Exploded view :
the ball bearing using toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) (D) + (B) (11) ,
the stops with new bolts.
3. FINAL OPERATION
- 16 -
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x01x04x14-01x37-1-21-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 17 -
CLUTCH HOUSING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Inertia seal extractor
Bvi. 1948
Tool for fitting the ZF4 primary shaft seal
Bvi. 1947
Washer of compensation for installation primary shaft seal.
Bvi. 1985
Equipment required
component support
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Manual gearbox: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the manual gearboxGearbox
Position the gearbox on the
assembly: Exploded view
component support(see
.
21A, Manual gearbox ,
Remove:
-1-
Gearbox support equipment: Use)
.
the gearshift plate(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) ,
the reverse gear switchGearbox assembly: Exploded view .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove:
the clutch forkClutch assembly: Exploded view ,
the clutch thrust bearingClutch assembly: Exploded view ,
the clutch thrust bearing guideGearbox assembly: Exploded view .
Remove the input shaft lip seal using the toolInertia seal extractor(Bvi. 1948 ) (1 ) .
-2-
Remove the clutch shaft stop ring(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Put the gear control in neutral.
-3-
Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) (2 ) .
-4-
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) :
the control shaft locking plug(3) ,
the control shaft locking spring(4) ,
the control shaft locking finger(5) .
-5-
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) :
the control selector bolt(6) ,
the control selector(7) .
-6-
-7-
Remove the locking rod plugs(8 ) .
-8-
Remove the locking rod(9 ) .
Note:
Mark the direction of fitting of the locking rod.
-9-
- 10 -
Remove the 5th and 6th fork retaining bolts(10 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view ) .
- 11 -
Selector shafts and
- 12 -
forks
Remove the 3rd and 4th fork retaining bolts(11 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
assembly: Exploded view) .
Remove Gearbox
assembly: Exploded view
the clutch housing.
- 13 -
Selector shafts and gearbox
Remove the clutch shaft(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
hydraulic press.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
- 14 -
Input shaft assembly: Exploded view)
using a
Clean all the removed partsVehicle: Parts and consumables for
Products).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
- 15 -
the repair
(04B, Consumables -
Note:
To facilitate the fitting of the clutch housing, grease the rollers of the cylindrical
bearing roller (12 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) to fit them
inside the cylindrical roller bearing.
Check that the centring dowelsare in place(13 ) .
- 16 -
Check that the gear control shaft is refitted the right way round, the flat surface(14 ) towards the
external gearbox side.
Refit the clutch housingGearbox
assembly: Exploded view
3. FINAL OPERATION
- 17 -
.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fit a new seal using the toolTool for fitting the ZF4 primary shaft seal(Bvi. 1947 ) (15 ) .
Note:
For a good installation, use the additional toolWasher of compensation for installation
primary shaft seal.(Bvi. 1985 ) .
- 18 -
Refit a new seal using the toolsTool for fitting the ZF4 primary shaft seal(Bvi. 1947 ) and Washer of
compensation for installation primary shaft seal.(Bvi. 1985 ) (16 ) .
- 19 -
- 20 -
Fit the biggest off set of the locking rod(A) on the gearbox right-hand side.
CAUTION
Observe the direction of fitting of the locking rod.
Repair-12x01x03x02-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 21 -
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Clutch
Exploded view ) .
assembly:
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the clutch circuit bleed plug.
Connect a transparent pipe to the bleed hole running to an empty container placed under the bleed
hole.
-1-
Turn the clutch slave cylinder bleed tap(1 ) one turn anti-clockwise.
Depress the clutch pedal by hand to empty the clutch circuit.
Disconnect the transparent pipe and the container from the bleed hole of the clutch slave cylinder.
-2-
-3-
Remove:
the bolts(2) of the cowlings under the steering wheel,
the cowlings under the steering wheel,
the A-pillar air duct(see Air distribution circuit assembly: Exploded view) (61A, Heating).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
Pull the clip(3 ) of the clutch master cylinder.
Disconnect the hydraulic clutch control pipe from the clutch master cylinder.
Fit blanking plugs into all openings.
-5-
Disconnect the clutch master cylinder supply pipe(4 ) from the brake fluid reservoir.
Insert the blanking plugs.
-6-
Unclip the clutch master cylinder rod by pressing on the clips(5 ) .
-7-
Unclip the clutch master cylinder supply pipe from the bulkhead at(6 ) .
-8-
Remove from the brake pedal(see 37A, Mechanical component controls, Pedal assembly: Exploded view) :
the rubber ring(7) from the dual safety connecting shaft,
the dual safety connecting shaft.
-9-
Loosen the nuts(8 ) of the pedal yoke.
Move the pedal yoke slightly aside.
Remove the clutch master cylinder by turning it a quarter of a turn clockwise using a 24 mm
open-jawed spanner.
- 10 -
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Check the condition of the seals.
Note:
Dismantling the components of the master cylinder is prohibited.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
- 11 -
Correctly position the seal of the clutch master cylinder supply pipe on the bulkhead at(9 ) .
Bleed the clutch circuit(see 37A, Mechanical
component controls, Clutch circuit: Bleed)
Repair-12x04x02x02-01x37-1-31-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 12 -
.
CLUTCH PEDAL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
IMPORTANT
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
Pedal assembly mechanism: Precautions for the repair ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the lower trim under the steering wheel,
the lower right-hand air duct.
Remove the clutch pedal switch by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise.
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-1-
Unclip the clutch master cylinder(1 ) from the pedal.
Remove the pedal shaft nut(3 ) .
Remove the shaft(2 ) to release the clutch pedal.
Extract the spring from its housing on the clutch pedal support.
Remove the clutch pedal.
-2-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Coat the shaft with Molykote 33MgreaseVehicle: Parts and
Products).
consumables for the repair
(04B, Consumables -
2. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Place the clutch pedal in position with its spring.
Note:
Do not hit the shaft with a hammer to get it to go back into place.
Refit:
the clutch pedal shaft,
the clutch pedal shaft nut.
Torque tighten the clutch pedal shaft nut17 N.m.
Clip the clutch master cylinder back onto the pedal.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the clutch pedal switch by turning it a quarter of a turn clockwise.
Adjust the clutch pedal switchPedal
switches: Adjustment
.
Refit:
the lower right-hand air duct,
the lower trim under the steering wheel.
Check that the whole clutch system operates correctly.
Repair-30x03x01x02-01x37-1-36-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
CLUTCH THRUST BEARING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 20A, Clutch,
Clutch assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the manual gearboxGearbox
assembly: Exploded view
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
.
Remove the clutch thrust bearing by moving aside the clip(1 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
-2-
-3-
Fit the clutch thrust bearing to the gearbox:
move aside the clutch fork as much as possible(2) ,
fit the clutch fork into the lugs on the clutch thrust bearing(3) .
Note:
Carefully check by hand that the clutch thrust bearing slides properly into the clutch
thrust bearing guide before refitting the gearbox.
-4-
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x03x01x04-01x37-1-44-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
COMPLETE FRONT BENCH SEAT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
Exploded view ) .
bench seat:
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the bolt from the seat belt of the front bench seat(see Front
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (see Front bench seat: Exploded view)
the bolts of the front bench seat on the body,
the front bench seat (this operation requires two people).
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-1-
bench seat: Exploded view) .
Repair-70x07x02-01x37-1-5-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
COMPLETE FRONT SEAT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
view ) .
seat: Exploded
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for repair) (88C, Airbags and pretensioners),
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
Never handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioners or airbags) near to a source of
heat or naked flame - they may be triggered.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
-1-
Remove the bolt from the front seat belt(see Front
seat: Exploded view) .
Disconnect the connector using a flat-blade screwdriver(1 ) .
-2-
Disconnect the connector at(2 ) .
Unclip the connector .
Protect the front door sill lining.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (see Front seat: Exploded view) :
the front seat bolts on the height adjuster,
the front seat.
-3-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x06x02-01x37-1-31-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
COMPLETE REAR AXLE SYSTEM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Support plate for pushing back the brake calliper piston
Fre. 1939
Equipment required
component jack
safety strap(s)
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear axle assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE RIGHT-HAND SIDE
-1-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the rear brake pad wear warning light.
-2-
Unclip the wiring of the rear brake pad wear warning light from the rear brake calliper at(2 ) .
-3-
Unclip the wiring of the rear brake pad wear warning light from the rear axle at(3 ) .
-4-
Mark the position of the rear brake hose cap(4 ) on the rear axle using an
indelible
pencil.
Unclip the rear brake hose cap(4 ) from the rear axle.
Remove the bolts of the rear brake calliper mountings(see 33A, Rear
assembly: Exploded view) .
Move aside the " calliper mounting - brake calliper " assembly.
Attach the " calliper mounting - brake calliper " assembly to the body.
-5-
axle components, Rear brake calliper
Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor connectors(5 ) .
-6-
Unclip the wiring of the rear wheel speed sensors from the body at(6 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-7-
Fit a
component jackunder
the rear axle.
IF EQUIPPED WITH A REAR ANTI-ROLL BAR
-8-
Remove:
the bolts(7) of the rear anti-roll bar tie rods from the body,
the bolts of the rear shock absorbers from the rear axle(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle
assembly: Exploded view) .
Attach the rear axle to the
component jackusing
a safety strap(s).
-9-
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle assembly: Exploded view) :
the nuts of the leaf spring U-bolts from the rear axle,
the leaf spring U-bolts,
the leaf spring clamps,
the rear axle.
In the event of replacement, remove:
the rear anti-roll bar(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle assembly: Exploded view) ,
the rear brake discs(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) ,
the rear wheel sensors(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) ,
the rear brake disc protectors(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded
view ) ,
the rear wheel hub cover plugs(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded
view ) ,
the rear wheel hubs(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
In the event of replacement, refit:
the rear wheel hubs(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) ,
the rear wheel hub cover plugs(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded
- 10 -
view ) ,
the rear brake disc protectors(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded
view ) ,
the rear wheel sensors(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) ,
the rear brake discs(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) ,
the rear anti-roll bar(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle assembly: Exploded view) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
- 11 -
- 12 -
Note:
Correctly position the rear axle on the centring pin(9 ) of the suspension spring.
Rear
Torque tighten the nuts of the calliper leaf springs on the rear axle(see 33A, Rear
axle assembly: Exploded view) .
- 13 -
axle components,
Refit the leaf spring clamp plates in the position marked during removal.
Push the rear brake calliper pistons to the end of their housings using the toolSupport plate for
pushing back the brake calliper piston(Fre. 1939 ) .
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Check the axle geometryAxle
assemblies: Check
.
Adjust the front axle, if necessaryFront axle system: Adjustment
Repair-13x02x05x06-01x37-1-29-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 14 -
COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Equipment required
component jack
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the compressor unit protective cover bolts(1 ) .
-2-
-3-
Open the compressor unit protective cover.
Note:
Note the positioning of the pipes for refitting.
Disconnect:
the
the
the
the
air outlet pipes(2) from the compressor unit,
computer connector,
solenoid valves connector,
compressor connector(3) .
-4-
Move aside the wiring.
-5-
Fit the
component jackunder
the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly(4 )
Cut the wiring clamp.
Remove the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly nuts.
Move down the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly using the
-6-
component jack(5 ) .
Remove the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly.
1- IN CASE OF REPLACEMENT
Remove the air reservoir(see 38F,
Pneumatic suspension , Air reservoir: Removal - Refitting)
.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply teflon adhesive rollVehicle:
Parts and consumables for the repair
on the air pipes unions.
1- IN CASE OF REPLACEMENT
Refit the air reservoir(see 38F,
Pneumatic suspension , Air reservoir: Removal - Refitting)
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly,
the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly nuts.
Torque tighten the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly nuts60 N.m.
Connect the pipes in the position noted during removal.
-7-
.
Torque tighten the air pipes12 N.m.
Ensure that the following connectors are correctly connected:
of the computer,
of the compressor,
of the solenoid valves.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-13x02x09x06-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Equipment required
component jack
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the compressor unit protective cover bolts(1 ) .
-2-
-3-
Open the compressor unit protective cover.
Note:
Note the positioning of the pipes for refitting.
Disconnect:
the
the
the
the
air outlet pipes(2) from the compressor unit,
computer connector,
solenoid valves connector,
compressor connector(3) .
-4-
Move aside the wiring.
-5-
Fit the
component jackunder
the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly(4 )
Cut the wiring clamp.
Remove the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly nuts.
Move down the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly using the
Remove the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly.
-6-
component jack(5 ) .
1- IN CASE OF REPLACEMENT
Remove the air reservoir(see 38F,
Pneumatic suspension , Air reservoir: Removal - Refitting)
.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply teflon adhesive rollVehicle:
Parts and consumables for the repair
on the air pipes unions.
1- IN CASE OF REPLACEMENT
Refit the air reservoir(see 38F,
Pneumatic suspension , Air reservoir: Removal - Refitting)
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly,
the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly nuts.
Torque tighten the " compressor unit - air reservoir " assembly nuts60 N.m.
Connect the pipes in the position noted during removal.
Torque tighten the air pipes12 N.m.
Ensure that the following connectors are correctly connected:
-7-
.
of the computer,
of the compressor,
of the solenoid valves.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-13x02x09x06-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
Technical Note 6515A
All types
Subsection concerned: 01B
COMPUTER AUTOMATIC
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
This Technical Note concerns the on-board computer Automatic Configuration operations using
a RENAULT.NET connection or the Reprogramming CD (part no.: 77 11 298 859).
Edition 1 - XXX 2007
" The repair procedures given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the
technical specifications current when it was prepared.
The methods may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the manufacturer
in the production of the various component units and accessories from which his
vehicles are constructed. "
Edition Anglaise
All rights reserved by RENAULT.
Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part
reference numbering system is forbidden without the prior written authority of
RENAULT.
© RENAULT S.A.S
Contents
Page
01B VEHICLE FAULT FINDING
SPECIFICATIONS
Computer automatic configuration
01B-1
VEHICLE FAULT FINDING SPECIFICATIONS
101B
Computer automatic configuration
01B
GENERAL INFORMATION
Automatic configuration consists of automatically adapting a new computer to the vehicle to which it is fitted.
It is done by the diagnostic tool RENAULT CLIP using either RENAULT.NET, or the Reprogramming-Configuration
CD part no 77 11 298 859.
When to automatically configure a computer:
This operation is a step in the procedure to apply after repairing the computer. If it must be carried out, it will be present
in the procedure to apply after repairing the computer. This procedure is detailed in the after repair documents of this
computer.
The reprogramming data available via RENAULT.NET is always more up to date than that available on the CD
(Part No. 77 11 298 859).
The CD is edited and distributed every month in the same way as the diagnostic tools update.
Each CD cancels and replaces the previous one.
Tooling required
● CLIP with the most recent update.
● 1 connection to RENAULT.NET (requires a CLIP with a radiofrequency kit and a RENAULT.NET certificate)
or
1 reprogramming CD, Part No.77 11 298 859 for the current month.
01B -1
VEHICLE FAULT FINDING SPECIFICATIONS
Computer automatic configuration
01B
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
The automatic configuration operation is accessible only from the " after repair " documentation of the computer.
CLIP displays for access to " after repair " documentation
Screen
Step
1
Fault finding
2
Repair
3
Before/after repair
documentation
Notes
Fault finding of the vehicle is complete. Repairs can begin.
Select the button depicting an open-jawed spanner
Select the button depicting 2 books.
CLIP displays the before/after repair documentation.
Browse through the documentation using the mouse to display the " after
repair " procedure
1: Select the repair button
1: Select the before/after repair
documentation button
1: Browse through the documentation using the mouse
to display the " after repair " procedure
01B -2
VEHICLE FAULT FINDING SPECIFICATIONS
Computer automatic configuration
01B
CLIP screens of the automatic configuration for each stage
Screen
Step
Notes
1
Procedure to follow after
repair
2
Confirmation of procedure
to apply after the repair
followed
If the procedure is followed, select " Continue " .
Otherwise, select " Cancel "
3
Finding a configuration file
patch
If a patch, supplied by Techline, is found, screen 9 is displayed.
Otherwise, screen 4 is displayed.
4
Searching for the
configuration file on
Renault.Net
5
Interrogating Renault.Net
6
Interrogation of
Renault.Net complete
CLIP has received a reply from Renault Net
7
Closing the communication
interface
Select " OK " to close the interface.
If the file is recovered, screen 9 will appear.
Otherwise, screen 8 will appear.
8
Finding the configuration
file on CD/DVD
9
Configuration file
recovered
10
Preparing computer data
11
Sending the data to the
computer
CLIP sends the data to the computer.
12
Transmission complete
CLIP has sent all data to the computer
The automatic configuration is successful if the message " completed
successfully " appears and if the two numbers displayed are identical.
13
Opening the
documentation
Follow the procedure to be implemented after repair.
Click on " AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION " when this step is reached.
If CLIP is configured in disconnected mode, screen 8 is displayed.
Otherwise, CLIP will start the interface to communicate with Renault Net.
CLIP interrogates Renault.Net to receive the configuration file
Insert the latest updated CD/DVD.
Select " YES " to initiate the automatic configuration of the computer.
Select " NO " to stop. Clip moves on to screen 13.
CLIP prepares the data to be sent to the computer.
CLIP displays the documentation window again.
If the configuration proceeded correctly, begin the after repair procedure.
If the configuration did not proceed correctly contact Techline (see ASSISTANCE PROCESS).
01B -3
VEHICLE FAULT FINDING SPECIFICATIONS
Computer automatic configuration
1-Follow the procedure to be implemented after repair.
Click on " AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION " when this
step is reached
1- Select " Continue "
No
patch
Find a patch supplied by Techline during an assistance
procedure.
Searching for the configuration file on
Renault Net
Patch found
9
Interrogating Renault.Net
6
01B -4
01B
VEHICLE FAULT FINDING SPECIFICATIONS
Computer automatic configuration
01B
5
3
Interrogation of Renault.Net complete
1: Select " OK "
File
found on
Renault
Net
1- Select " OK "
File not found
File
found
on CD
Select " YES " to initiate the
automatic configuration of the computer.
Select " NO " to stop
" Yes " button
selected
1: Insert the latest updated CD/DVD
2: Select " Continue "
10
01B -5
VEHICLE FAULT FINDING SPECIFICATIONS
Computer automatic configuration
9
Preparing computer data
Transmission complete 1: select " OK "
Sending the data to the computer
Reopening the documentation
01B -6
01B
VEHICLE FAULT FINDING SPECIFICATIONS
Computer automatic configuration
01B
ASSISTANCE PROCEDURE
The ASSISTANCE PROCEDURE must be applied in the event that automatic configuration is interrupted, i.e. if
screen 12 is not displayed.
The ASSISTANCE PROCEDURE consists of ACTIS completing a CUSTOMER INCIDENT REPORT (CIR) to be
sent to Techline, stating the following details:
● The VIN of the vehicle.
● The fabrication number of the vehicle.
● The code or error message given in the CLIP message.
● The computer (UCH, AIR CONDITIONING, etc.).
The speed and relevance of the solution provided by Techline will depend on the accuracy with which this
information is entered into the customer fault log.
Following analysis of the fault by Techline, a patch will be sent to you to enable automatic configuration of the
computer.
01B -7
Technical Note 3585A
ALL TYPES
Subsection concerned: 01B
COMPUTER REPROGRAMMING AND
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
This Technical Note relates to onboard computer Reprogramming and Calibration operations using
a RENAULT.NET connection or a Reprogramming CD (Part No.: 77 11 298 859).
77 11 338 820
Edition 4 - OCTOBER 2007
" The repair procedures given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the
technical specifications current when it was prepared.
The methods may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the manufacturer
in the production of the various component units and accessories from which his
vehicles are constructed. "
All copyrights reserved by Renault.
Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part
reference numbering system is forbidden without the prior written authority of Renault.
© Renault s.a.s. 2007
Temp.mif
V4
EDITION ANGLAISE
CONTENTS
Page
GENERAL INFORMATION......................................................................................................................................... 1
Tooling required....................................................................................................................................................... 1
Calibration ............................................................................................................................................................... 2
Reprogramming ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
OPERATING PROCEDURE (Programming and reprogramming a computer)........................................................... 3
Preparing the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool......................................................................................................... 3
Preparing the vehicle ............................................................................................................................................... 3
Programming phase - reprogramming..................................................................................................................... 4
Returning the vehicle ............................................................................................................................................... 4
CLIP screens depending on programming - reprogramming step........................................................................... 5
Linking the screens.................................................................................................................................................. 6
CODE SERVER PROCEDURE (in CD mode only) .................................................................................................. 15
CONSULTING THE COMPUTER IDENTIFICATION FRAME .................................................................................. 17
CONSULTING THE COMPUTER'S HISTORY ......................................................................................................... 17
CONSULTING THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL LOG ........................................................................................................ 18
TRACE FILE (upon the request of Techline)............................................................................................................. 19
Creating the trace file ............................................................................................................................................ 19
Recovering the trace file after programming - reprogramming .............................................................................. 19
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
101B
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
GENERAL INFORMATION
Two types of operation can be carried out in after-sales, either programming or reprogramming of the computer.
These operations apply to all vehicles and all types of (re)programmable computer (e.g: Injection, Gearbox, Air
conditioning, Instrument panel, Parking brake, UCH).
The two types of operation are carried out with the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool using either RENAULT.NET, or
the Calibration - Reprogramming CD Part No. 77 11 298 859.
The reprogramming data available via RENAULT.NET is always more up to date than that available on the
CD (Part no. 77 11 298 859).
The CD is edited and distributed every month in the same way as the diagnostic tools update.
Each CD cancels and replaces the previous one.
Tooling required:
CLIP with the most recent update.
●
1 connection to RENAULT.NET (requires a CLIP with a RF kit and a RENAULT.NET certificate)
or
1 reprogramming CD, Part No. 77 11 298 859 from the current month.
●
1 RENAULT approved battery charger.
●
The FAULT FINDING REPAIR MANUAL relevant to the vehicle and the system to be (re)programmed.
●
1 RENAULT.NET connection to the NRE reprogramming codes server for each calibration - reprogramming with
a reprogramming CD (See CODE SERVER PROCEDURE).
●
01B-1
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
Computer
The operation consists of downloading the calibration using the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool.
It affects computers supplied as non operational (also known as blank) by the Parts Department for all vehicles in the
RENAULT range, but only for certain types of computer.
The types of computers which are delivered blank and to be calibrated are, to date, engine management (Petrol,
Diesel and GPL injection), automatic and sequential gearboxes and ABS/ESP computers.
When To Program:
The operation is carried out as part of a computer replacement operation.
The non operational status of the computer, as delivered by the Parts Department, is specified in DIALOGYS by the
message:
Information:
Specific characteristic.
COMPUTER TO BE PROGRAMMED
Reprogramming
The operation consists of exchanging the software and/or calibration for the most recent version using the RENAULT
CLIP diagnostic tool.
This relates to computers already fitted to the vehicle as well as computers supplied as operational (also called " full " .
E.g: Air conditioning) by the Parts Department, for the entire RENAULT range.
It enables systematic replacement of the computer to be avoided.
After having entered the VIN in the main menu, the types of (re)programmable computer are displayed in the
RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool REPROGRAMMING menu.
When To Reprogram:
The operation is carried out within the framework of:
●
an OTS or a Technical Note arising from a fault resulting from an After-Sales problem, or a functional improvement.
●
RENAULT Technical Directives or following a request from the Techline.
01B-2
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
OPERATING PROCEDURE (Programming and reprogramming a computer)
The operating procedure for Calibration and Reprogramming operations is strictly identical.
The operation is carried out using the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool, either connected to RENAULT.NETor with the
reprogramming CD.
WARNING
To prevent any computer malfunctioning or locking, the following operations must be carried out before
(re)programming.
Preparing the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool
Always use the latest available version of the CLIP update.
●
Always use the RENAULT.NET connection if available, in preference to the CD.
●
The reprogramming data available via RENAULT.NET is always more up to date than that available
on the CD.
●
Whenever the CD mode is being used for calibration - reprogramming, always use the latest available version
of the CD.
●
Connect CLIP to the mains.
●
Set the Windows screen saver time for the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool to NONE or 60 minutes minimum.
Setting the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool Windows monitor screen locking delay:
In the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool Windows system:
●
Right click on the mouse and select Properties.
●
In the new Display Properties window, select the Screen Saver tab.
Then set the screen saver to (None) or set the Wait time delay to a minimum of 60 minutes.
●
Confirm and close the display windows.
Preparing the vehicle
●
Connect an approved battery charger to the vehicle.
●
Switch off all the vehicle's electrical consumers (Lights, Interior lighting, Air conditioning, CD Radio, etc).
●
Switch on the ignition (+ forced + after ignition, See Procedure).
01B-3
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
Programming - reprogramming phase
●
Enter the exact VIN of the vehicle in the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool main menu.
WARNING
Using a VIN which is not allocated to the vehicle risks compromising the correct running of the programming reprogramming operation, as well as the conformity of the vehicle
Apply the correct pre-reprogramming Procedure for the vehicle and for the system to be reprogrammed.
– For example, in the case of a diesel injection: Backup the computer data if the command is available.
– For example, in the case of an Automatic Transmission: Put the gear lever in the P position.
●
Find the Parts Department reference number for the computer to be reprogrammed (see CONSULTING THE
COMPUTER IDENTIFICATION FRAME), which is necessary in the event of an EMERGENCY PROCEDURE.
●
During any calibration and reprogramming:
WARNING
DO NOT WORK ON THE VEHICLE OR OPERATE THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL.
In the CD mode only, enter a reprogramming code: see CODE SERVER PROCEDURE.
●
●
At the end of calibration and reprogramming, observe the following instructions:
Proceed to the WARRANTY SCREEN by pressing the NEXT button.
Apply the pre-reprogramming procedure to the vehicle and to the system to be reprogrammed.
– For example, in the case of a diesel injection: Write the saved computer data if the command is available.
– Enter the VIN into the computer.
Always deal with faults in all computers (when a computer is being reprogrammed, it cannot transmit data to
the multiplex network. As a result, faults will be generated in other computers connected to the multiplex network).
Note the CODECAL and the SUPPLIER CODE and transfer them to the Repair Order.
If the CODECAL and the SUPPLIER CODE are lost, they can be recovered: see CONSULTING THE TOOL LOG.
Returning the vehicle
Test all the computers and deal with any faults present.
●
●
Check that all the vehicle's current systems are correctly configured.
01B-4
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
CLIP screens depending on programming – reprogramming step
Screen
Step
Commentary
02
12
CLIP home
CLIP determines, via the VIN, the Technical Specification of the
vehicle.
Warning: To ensure that reprogramming is carried out effectively,
enter the correct VIN for the vehicle (17 characters).
02
12
Reprog home
15
Choice of computer
16
Connecting
17
Select REPROGRAMMING and the system to (re)program.
CLIP identifies the computer concerned and recovers the technical
data necessary for the (re)programming operation.
Enter the After-Sales information necessary for the warranty.
Note:
Entering and confirming repair order/
Enter the repair order if it has not been written in the main menu.
Entering Vehicle Technical
The " Vehicle Technical Specification " field is to be filled in at the
Specification
request of Techline or if required in a reprogramming Technical
Note.
Description of the environment to be set up before any
reprogramming.
Warning: Follow the instructions which can differ from one
computer and vehicle to the next.
18
Pre-reprogramming Message
19
Checking battery voltage
CLIP automatically checks the voltage level necessary for the
correct running of the re-programming operation.
20
Select the reprogramming mode
Choose the technical resource: either RENAULT.NET or CD.
21
22
23
24
25
RENAULT.NET
Finding the file(s)
CD
File selection
Enter the reprogramming code in CD
mode.
See CODES SERVER
PROCEDURE
File downloading
26
Post-reprogramming Message
27
Warranty screen
CLIP finds the technical data to download to the computer.
In RENAULT.NET mode, a password is needed for authentication.
Confirm the operation by selecting the Software reference to be
downloaded.
In CD mode only:
CLIP provides a reprogramming code.
●
Provide the code management server with the reprogramming
code and the VIN.
●
The server issues an " After-Sales reprogramming code " .
●
Enter this code in CLIP.
●
CLIP downloads the technical data to the computer.
Description of the actions to carry out to finish the reprogramming
operation and return the conforming vehicle.
Warning: Follow the instructions which can differ from one
computer and vehicle to the next.
CLIP provides the warranty screen describing the operation
performed and the CODECAL necessary for the Warranty
procedure.
01B-5
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
Order of the screens
1: Obtain vehicle VIN automatically.
1: Enter the repair order.
1: Select the reprogramming page.
2: Enter the repair order.
See Interface 2
See New Interface
01B-6
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
New Interface
01B
2
1: Select the Validate button.
Multiplex network test.
1: Select the Continue button.
Analyse data and Read faults.
1: Select the Computer button.
1: Select the system to be reprogrammed.
9
01B-7
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
8
1: Select Repair mode.
1: Select the Reprogramming page.
Step 15 opens simultaneously.
1: Select the Validate button
16
See reprogramming interface
01B-8
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
Interface 2
12
1: Select the Reprogramming button.
Select the system to be reprogrammed.
1: Select the Validate button.
16
See reprogramming interface
01B-9
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
Interface Reprogramming
15
Identification of computer data.
1: Enter the Vehicle Technical Specification code if
requested.
2: Select the Validate button.
IMPORTANT: Adhere to the instructions.
1: Select the OK button.
2: Select the next button.
Automatic battery voltage check.
RENAULT.NET
Select the reprogramming mode.
Enter the Renault.Net password.
CD-ROM
RENAULT.NET
22
23
01B-10
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
20
01B
21
CD-ROM
RENAULT.NET
CD-ROM
Software reference search.
CD-ROM
1: Select the software reference.
2: Select the Validate button.
RENAULT.NET
1: Enter the reprogramming code.
Downloading of the file. (CODE SERVER
PROCEDURE)
2: Select the Validate button
IMPORTANT: Adhere to the instructions.
1: Select the OK button.
2: Select the next button.
END. Return to the welcome screen.
01B-11
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
CLIP SCREEN ERROR MESSAGES AND PROCEDURE TO FOLLOW
SCREE
CLIP ERROR MESSAGE
ORIGIN
PROCEDURE TO FOLLOW
●
Re-enter the VIN.
Note: the VIN does not contain:
01
THE VEHICLE CANNOT BE
–
After the VIN has been
IDENTIFIED WITH THIS VIN…
entered into the main menu
the letter O as it can be confused with the
number 0.
–
the letter I as it can be confused with the
number 1.
●
01
The AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION
HAS FAILED…
After the VIN automatic
search button has been
pressed
Check the sensor/PC and vehicle/sensor
connections.
Note: Ensure that the 4 green and red sensor LEDs
are illuminated.
●
If the fault is still present, contact the CLIP
After-Sales service.
●
15
CLIP INTEGRITY PROBLEM…
After the reprogramming
●
button has been pressed
●
Reinstall CLIP with the latest available version.
If the fault is still present, carry out the
EMERGENCY PROCEDURE.
16
16
button has been pressed
CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH THE
Following selection of the
COMPUTER…
Following selection of the
DATA…
16
17
Check the connections.
●
If the fault is still present, carry out the
EMERGENCY PROCEDURE.
computer to reprogram
OPERATION INTERRUPTED:
CANNOT ACQUIRE NECESSARY
●
After the reprogramming
REPROGRAMMABLE COMPUTERS
CLIP integrity error:
Reinstall CLIP with the latest available version.
If the fault is still present, carry out the
EMERGENCY PROCEDURE.
●
15
THIS VEHICLE HAS NO
IMPORTANT: THE VIN READ IN THE
COMPUTER TO BE REPROGRAMMED
DOES NOT CORRESPOND…
●
●
computer to reprogram
Following selection of the
●
After a repair order number
NOT EXCEED 6 CHARACTERS
THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
CRITERION MUST BE COMPOSED OF
●
has been entered
After the Vehicle Technical
Specification has been
entered at the request of
Techline or as described in a
10 CHARACTERS
BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW or
At any point in the
TOO HIGH
E.g: 0000CR347B
●
●
reprogramming procedure
TO CARRY OUT REPROGRAMMING
VIA RENAULT.NET …
After the battery voltage has
Connect an approved battery charger to the
vehicle.
●
been checked
●
01B-12
If the fault is still present, carry out the
EMERGENCY PROCEDURE.
●
20
Check that the Vehicle Technical Specification
contains 10 alphanumerical characters.
Technical Note.
19
Check that the order number entered is correct
(6 alphanumerical characters).
●
17
As a default, use the VIN of the computer (not that
from the main menu).
computer to reprogram
THE REPAIR ORDER NUMBER MUST
Restart operation.
If the fault is still present, carry out the
EMERGENCY PROCEDURE.
Check that the wireless connection device is
working.
If the fault is still present, contact the CLIP
After-Sales service,
or use the latest version of the reprogramming CD.
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
SCREE
CLIP ERROR MESSAGE
ORIGIN
20
NO CD-ROM IN THE READER…
When the
reprogramming mode
is being selected
20
20
THE REPROGRAMMING CDROM IN USE IS TOO OLD…
THE CD-ROM TO INSERT IS
THE REPROGRAMMING CDROM
When the
reprogramming mode
is being selected
When the
reprogramming mode
is being selected
When the
reprogramming mode
is being selected
01B
PROCEDURE TO FOLLOW
●
Insert the latest available version of the reprogramming CD.
●
If the fault is still present, contact the CLIP After-Sales service.
●
Insert the latest available version of the reprogramming CD.
●
If the fault is still present, contact the CLIP After-Sales service.
●
Check that the CD being used is a reprogramming CD.
●
If the fault is still present, contact Techline or the CLIP
After-Sales Service.
THE CD-ROM READER IS NOT
FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY…
After-Sales Service ERROR 650
After-Sales Service ERROR 651
After having selected
the Renault. Net
mode
●
Follow the on-screen instructions.
●
If the fault is still present, contact the CLIP After-Sales service.
●
20
CLIP integrity error in RENAULT.NET mode.
●
Restart the reprogramming procedure.
●
If the fault is still present, contact your IT representative or the
CLIP After-Sales Service.
●
After-Sales Service ERROR 653
After-Sales Service ERROR 654
After-Sales Service ERROR 655
CLIP integrity error (in RENAULT.NET mode) or reprogramming
CD error (in CD mode).
After-Sales Service ERROR 652
After selecting the
reprogramming
method
●
In mode RENAULT.NET mode, reinstall CLIP
●
In CD mode, restart with another reprogramming CD (previous
version if necessary).
●
After-Sales Service ERROR 656
If the fault is still present, contact the After-Sales Service or carry
out the EMERGENCY PROCEDURE.
●
21
TRANSMISSION PROBLEM…
During authentication
on Renault. Net
●
Check the Renault.Net connection.
If the fault is still present, contact your IT representative or the
CLIP After-Sales Service.
21
TRANSMISSION PROBLEM…
Whilst searching
Renault. Net for the
file to download
●
●
DEFECTIVE DATABASE, …
Whilst finding the file
to download
If the fault is still present, contact your IT representative or the
CLIP After-Sales Service.
●
22
Restart the reprogramming procedure.
●
●
Check faults linked to the CD (operation, presence or version
of the CD).
Try with another CD (same or previous version).
If the fault is still present, carry out the EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE.
●
22
VEHICLE TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION NOT
RECOGNISED IN RENAULT
DATABASE…
Whilst finding the file
to download
Enter the Vehicle Technical Specification, checking it is correct
(10 alphanumerical characters).
E.g: 0000CD347B
●
If the fault is still present, carry out the EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE.
22
ERROR 10X: … (X = 1 to 9),
EMERGENCY PROCEDURE
Whilst finding a file
01B-13
●
Carry out the EMERGENCY PROCEDURE.
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
SCREE
CLIP ERROR MESSAGE
ORIGIN
PROCEDURE TO FOLLOW
●
22
COMPUTER ALREADY
REPROGRAMMED, CANNOT
PERFORM OPERATION…
01B
RENAULT.NET mode: the computer does not need to be
reprogrammed.
●
Whilst finding a file
CD mode: Restart the operation using the latest available
version of the CD.
If the message remains, the computer does not need to be
reprogrammed.
●
Restart the reprogramming procedure, checking that the VIN
corresponds to that of the vehicle.
22
VIN NOT RECOGNISED IN
RENAULT DATABASE…
●
Whilst finding a file
If the fault is still present, carry out the EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE.
●
Note: In CD mode, it is possible that CLIP will not recognise
the VIN if the vehicle has been recently manufactured.
●
25
After the After-Sales
reprogramming code
has been entered
CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH
Whilst downloading
a file
THE COMPUTER…
Re-enter the reprogramming code.
●
If the fault is still present, carry out the EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE.
●
Follow the on-screen instructions.
●
24
THE AFTER-SALES
REPROGRAMMING KEY ENTERED
IS INCORRECT
Check that the pre-reprogramming instructions have been
followed: see [01B-4].
25
COMPUTER FAULT:
CANNOT UNLOCK…
Whilst downloading
a file
●
Restart the programming - reprogramming operation.
●
If the fault is still present, print the computer identification
screen and the history and carry out the EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE.
●
Check that the pre-reprogramming instructions have been
followed: see [01B-4].
25
COMPUTER FAULT:
CANNOT DELETE…
Whilst downloading
a file
●
●
●
25
COMPUTER FAULT:
DOWNLOAD INTERRUPTED…
Whilst downloading
a file
Restart the programming - reprogramming operation.
If the fault is still present, print the computer identification
screen and the history and carry out the EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE.
Check the connections and the battery voltage and restart the
operation.
●
If the fault is still present, carry out the EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE.
25
25
NON LOCKING ERROR
OCCURRED DURING WRITING…
THE COMPUTER HAS NOT
RESPONDED TO THE LAST
REQUEST…
At the end of
downloading a file
●
will not affect the reprogramming of the vehicle.
●
At the end of
downloading a file
The computer's history is full. This is not a critical error and it
●
Try to re-establish dialogue with the computer.
If the vehicle no longer starts, carry out the EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE.
01B-14
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
CODE SERVER PROCEDURE (in CD mode only)
When Calibrating - reprogramming with the reprogramming CD Part No. 77 11 298 859, enter an After-Sales
reprogramming code to be able to carry out the operation.
This code is provided by the code management server on RENAULT.NET after having entered the VIN and the
reprogramming code displayed on screen 24 of the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool.
Refer to the Technical Note CODE DELIVERY PROCEDURE,section Tool reprogramming key for more details.
Steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
CLIP provides a reprogramming code.
Provide the code management server with the reprogramming code and the VIN of the vehicle.
The server issues an After-Sales reprogramming code.
Enter this code in CLIP.
01B-15
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
EMERGENCY PROCEDURE
The EMERGENCY PROCEDURE must be carried out when Calibration - reprogramming is interrupted by
a message advising you to contact Techline.
Example:
ERROR 10X (X = 1 to 9)
EMERGENCY PROCEDURE, PLEASE CONTACT YOUR TECHLINE
The EMERGENCY PROCEDURE consists of using ACTIS or a Fax to produce a customer fault log, to be sent
to Techline, containing the following information:
●
●
●
●
●
●
The VIN of the vehicle.
The fabrication number of the vehicle.
The code or error message specified in CLIP (e.g: ERROR 105).
The type of computer (INJECTION, AIR CONDITIONING, etc).
The Parts Department reference number for the computer read using the tool in the COMPUTER identification fault
finding screen: see CONSULTING THE IDENTIFICATION FRAME.
The Hardware Part No. for the computer read using the tool in the COMPUTER identification fault finding screen:
see CONSULTING THE IDENTIFICATION FRAME
.
The speed and relevance of the solution provided by Techline will depend on the accuracy with which this
information is entered into the customer fault log.
Following Techline's analysis of the fault, a 10 character code (e.g: 0000CD347B) should be sent back to you.
Repeat the Calibration - reprogramming procedure and enter the Vehicle Technical Definition code in screen 17 of
the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool.
1: Enter the repair order.
2: Enter the Vehicle Technical Definitioncode.
If necessary, an unconventional error could lead Techline to demand:
the computer IDENTIFICATION FRAME: see CONSULTING THE IDENTIFICATION FRAME
●
the HISTORY: see CONSULTING THE HISTORY
●
the consultation of the TOOL LOG: see CONSULTING THE TOOL LOG
●
the creation of a trace file: see TRACE FILE
●
01B-16
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
CONSULTING THE COMPUTER IDENTIFICATION FRAME
Consulting the computer identification frame can help a problem to be better understood during an EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE.
It allows the current (dummy) component Part No. of the computer to be consulted and to confirm that the
(re)programming has been correctly carried out.
On the request of Techline, print this information screen and send it to Techline:
Access the identification frame screen:
MULTIPLEX NETWORK TEST/COMPUTER FAULT FINDING/IDENTIFICATION FRAME
●
Press the button Print screen on the top right of the keypad of the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool.
●
Syst
●
→
→
Open WORDPAD(Start → Programs→Accessories→WordPad),
in the Edit menu, Paste the print screen,
then: print the document to send by fax to Techline,
or copy it onto a disk to send by mail to Techline,
or register the document to add it as an attachment in ACTIS.
CONSULTING THE COMPUTER HISTORY
Consulting the computer's history can help a problem to be better understood during an EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE.
It allows the last 8 reprogramming operations stored in the computer to be consulted and displays, among others,
the different (dummy) component part numbers of the computer by (re)programming date.
On the request of Techline, print this screen of information and fax it to them.
See CONSULTING THE COMPUTER IDENTIFICATION FRAME for how to print a screen.
1 - Icon: COMPUTER CONSULTATION
2 - Tab: HISTORY
01B-17
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
CONSULTING THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL LOG
Consulting the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool log can aid:
understanding of a fault during an EMERGENCY PROCEDURE.
●
the recovery of CODECAL from the last reprogramming operations carried out.
●
This log enables the last 50 reprogramming operations stored in the RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tool to be consulted,
displayed in chronological order with the most recent first.
This screen will provide, amongst other information:
The vehicle's VIN.
●
The Repair Order.
●
The programming - reprogramming CODECAL.
●
The new (dummy) Part No. for the computer in addition to that read in the CONSULTING THE COMPUTER
IDENTIFICATION FRAME.
●
Upon the request of Techline, print the screen containing this information and fax it to them.
See CONSULTING THE COMPUTER IDENTIFICATION FRAME for how to print a screen.
01B-18
VEHICLE GENERAL INFORMATION
Programming – Reprogramming the computers
01B
TRACE FILE (upon the request of Techline)
Creating the trace file
After starting up the CLIP software, click on the Tools tab, then on Tool configuration.
●
●
In the Tool configuration window.
Tick the AFTER-SALES SAVE MODE box, then confirm with OK.
●
Carry out the Calibration - reprogramming until the error message is displayed.
Recovering the trace file after programming - reprogramming
Close the CLIP application (Return to the CLIP home page then EXIT).
● In the Windows Start menu (bottom left-hand corner of the Windows screen), select My Computer.
Then select (double left click) the following: Local disc (C:) / CLIP / DATA / USER / LOGS.
●
Send this file to your Techline by e-mail.
Note:
For all RENAULT CLIP diagnostic tools under Windows XP, compress the file " clip.log " :
● Select the clip.log trace file.
● Right click the on the clip.log file, and select Properties.
● Then send_to Compressed (zipped) folder.
01B-19
COMPUTERS: LIST AND LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
1. LIST AND LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
List of vehicle computers:
ECU-Navigation(1)
Telematic box(2)
C-box(3)
interface display(4)
airbag computer(5)
UCH(6)
ABS-ESP computer(7)
injection computer(8)
Additional cornering lights computer(9)
pre-postheating unit(10)
air conditioning computer(11)
Repair-32x05x16-02x51-1-26-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
COOLANT CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Special tooling required
Clip pliers for hose clips (large size).
Mot. 1202-01
Clip pliers for hose clips (small size)
Mot. 1202-02
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
-1-
M9T, 686 690 692(686 OR 690 OR 692)
(see Illustration key: Description) Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Expansion bottle
2
Cooling radiator degassing pipe
3
Cooling radiator
4
Cooling radiator outlet pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
5
Cooling radiator inlet pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
6
Engine cooling fan assembly
7
Exhaust gas cooler coolant outlet pipe
8
Coolant pump inlet pipe seal
9
Exhaust gas cooler
Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view
10
Water pump
(see Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view)
11
Turbocharger coolant pipe
(see Turbocharger coolant pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19A,
Cooling, Expansion bottle: Removal - Refitting)
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
(see 19A,
(see 19A,
Cooling, Cooling radiator: Removal - Refitting)
Cooling, Engine cooling fan assembly: Removal - Refitting)
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
(see 19A,
-2-
Cooling, Coolant pump inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting)
12
Coolant pump inlet pipe
(see 19A,
Cooling, Coolant pump inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
13
Exhaust fuel injector cooler
(see Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view)
14
Turbocharger coolant pipe seal
(see Turbocharger coolant pipe: Removal - Refitting)
15
Coolant pipe between electric coolant pump and turbocharger coolant pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
16
Turbocharger
(see Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view)
17
Electric coolant pump at turbocharger outlet
(see 19A,
Cooling, Electric coolant pump: Removal - Refitting)
18
Clip of electric coolant pump at turbocharger outlet
(see 19A,
Cooling, Electric coolant pump: Removal - Refitting)
19
Support of electric coolant pump at turbocharger outlet
20
Oil filter unit
21
Thermoplunger unit
22
Thermoplunger unit support
23
Water chamber
24
Heater matrix coolant pipe
25
Coolant temperature sensor seal
(see 19A,
Cooling, Coolant temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
26
Coolant temperature sensor
(see 19A,
Cooling, Coolant temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
27
Coolant temperature sensor clip
(see 19A,
Cooling, Coolant temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
28
Coolant pipe between exhaust fuel injector cooler and turbocharger coolant pipe
36
Water chamber seal
(see Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view)
(see 19A,
Cooling, Thermoplunger unit: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19A,
Cooling, Cooling unit : Removal - Refitting)
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
(see 19A,
-3-
Cooling, Cooling unit : Removal - Refitting)
M9T, 694 696 698(694 OR 696 OR 698)
(see Illustration key: Description) Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Expansion bottle
2
Cooling radiator degassing pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
3
Cooling radiator inlet pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
4
Additional radiator
5
Cooling radiator outlet pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
6
Heater matrix coolant outlet pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
7
Exhaust gas cooler inlet pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
8
Pipe between cooling radiator and additional cooling radiator
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
9
Electric coolant pump at exhaust gas cooler inlet
(see 19A,
Cooling, Electric coolant pump: Removal - Refitting)
10
Clip of electric coolant pump at exhaust gas cooler inlet
(see 19A,
Cooling, Electric coolant pump: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19A,
(see 19A,
-4-
Cooling, Expansion bottle: Removal - Refitting)
Cooling, Additional radiator: Removal - Refitting)
11
Coolant pump inlet pipe seal
(see 19A,
Cooling, Coolant pump inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting)
12
Water pump
(see Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view)
13
Turbocharger coolant pipe
(see Turbocharger coolant pipe: Removal - Refitting)
14
Turbocharger coolant pipe seal
(see Turbocharger coolant pipe: Removal - Refitting)
15
Cooling radiator
16
Additional cooling radiator coolant outlet pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
17
Turbocharger
(see Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view)
18
Exhaust fuel injector cooler
(see Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view)
19
Coolant pump inlet pipe
20
Thermoplunger unit outlet pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
21
Exhaust gas cooler
Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view
22
Water chamber
23
Thermoplunger unit
24
Coolant temperature sensor clip
(see 19A,
Cooling, Coolant temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
25
Coolant temperature sensor
(see 19A,
Cooling, Coolant temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
26
Coolant temperature sensor seal
(see 19A,
Cooling, Coolant temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
27
Thermoplunger unit support
28
Oil filter unit
(see Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view)
29
Heater matrix coolant inlet pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
30
Coolant pipe between exhaust fuel injector cooler and turbocharger coolant pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
31
Coolant pipe between electric coolant pump and turbocharger coolant pipe
(Mot.1202, Mot.1448)
32
Electric coolant pump at turbocharger outlet
(see 19A,
Cooling, Electric coolant pump: Removal - Refitting)
33
Clip of electric coolant pump at turbocharger outlet
(see 19A,
Cooling, Electric coolant pump: Removal - Refitting)
34
Support of electric coolant pump at turbocharger outlet
35
Engine cooling fan assembly
42
Water chamber seal
(see 19A,
(see 19A,
Cooling, Cooling radiator: Removal - Refitting)
Cooling, Coolant pump inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19A,
(see 19A,
(see 19A,
Cooling, Thermoplunger unit: Removal - Refitting)
Cooling, Engine cooling fan assembly: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19A,
-5-
Cooling, Cooling unit : Removal - Refitting)
Cooling, Cooling unit : Removal - Refitting)
M9T, 700(700)
(see Illustration key: Description) Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Additional radiator
2
Engine cooling fan assembly
(see Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view)
3
Water pump
(see Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view)
4
Coolant pump inlet pipe seal
5
Coolant pump inlet pipe
6
Oil filter unit
7
Coolant circuit switchover valve
8
Coolant circuit switchover valve mounting
9
EGR valve
(see 19A,
(see 19A,
(see 19A,
-6-
Cooling, Additional radiator: Removal - Refitting)
Cooling, Coolant pump inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting)
Cooling, Coolant circuit switchover valve : Removal - Refitting)
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 )
10
water chamber coolant hose outlet
Clip pliers for hose clips (small size)(Mot.
1202-02)
Clip pliers for hose clips (large size).(Mot.
1202-01)
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 )
11
Cooling radiator inlet pipe
Water chamber
14
Coolant temperature sensor
15
Coolant temperature sensor seal
16
1202-01)
Water chamber seal
13
1202-02)
Clip pliers for hose clips (large size).(Mot.
12
Clip pliers for hose clips (small size)(Mot.
Coolant temperature sensor clip
(see 19A,
(see 19A,
Cooling, Cooling unit : Removal - Refitting)
Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view)
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 )
17
Heater matrix coolant pipe
Thermoplunger unit
1202-01)
Exhaust gas cooler
19
1202-02)
Clip pliers for hose clips (large size).(Mot.
18
Clip pliers for hose clips (small size)(Mot.
(see 19A,
Cooling, Thermoplunger unit: Removal - Refitting)
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 )
20
Thermoplunger unit outlet pipe
Clip pliers for hose clips (small size)(Mot.
1202-02)
Clip pliers for hose clips (large size).(Mot.
1202-01)
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 )
21
Exhaust gas cooler inlet pipe
Clip pliers for hose clips (small size)(Mot.
1202-02)
Clip pliers for hose clips (large size).(Mot.
1202-01)
22
Electric coolant pump at turbocharger outlet
(see 19A,
Cooling, Electric coolant pump: Removal - Refitting)
23
Clip of electric coolant pump at turbocharger outlet
(see 19A,
Cooling, Electric coolant pump: Removal - Refitting)
24
Support of electric coolant pump at turbocharger outlet
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 )
25
Cooling radiator outlet pipe
Clip pliers for hose clips (small size)(Mot.
Clip pliers for hose clips (large size).(Mot.
26
Expansion bottle
27
Electric coolant pump at exhaust gas cooler inlet
28
Clip of electric coolant pump at exhaust gas cooler inlet
30
Clip of electric coolant pump at exhaust gas cooler inlet
31
Electric coolant pump at exhaust gas cooler inlet
1202-01)
Support of electric coolant pump at exhaust gas cooler inlet
29
1202-02)
(see 19A,
-7-
Cooling, Expansion bottle: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19A,
Cooling, Electric coolant pump: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19A,
Cooling, Electric coolant pump: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19A,
Cooling, Electric coolant pump: Removal - Refitting)
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 )
32
Left-hand elecric coolant pump
Clip pliers for hose clips (small size)(Mot.
1202-02)
Clip pliers for hose clips (large size).(Mot.
1202-01)
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 )
33
Expansion bottle degassing pipe
Clip pliers for hose clips (small size)(Mot.
Clip pliers for hose clips (large size).(Mot.
Repair-10x06x01-02x50-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
1202-02)
1202-01)
COOLANT CIRCUIT SWITCHOVER VALVE : REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) .
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove the engine undertray.
Drain the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
-1-
.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove the intercooler air outlet pipeAND (ZA4 OR ZF4) ZA4 ZF4.
Remove :
the
the
the
the
the
damper valve,
exhaust gas recirculation rigide pipe at the exhaust gas cooler outlet,
exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve,
exhaust gas circuit temperature sensor,
inlet distributor.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
M9T, 870(870)
Remove the nuts on the thermoplunger unit wiring.
Move the thermoplunger unit wiring to one side.
Separate the following from the thermoplunger unit using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) :
the clip of the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe,
the clip of the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe.
Disconnect the following from the thermoplunger unit:
the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe,
the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe.
Separate the following from the coolant circuit switchover valve using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot.
1448 ) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe,
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe.
-3-
Disconnect the following from the coolant circuit switchover valve:
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe,
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe,
the control pipe from the coolant circuit switchover valve(1) .
Remove the retaining bolt of the hydraulic pipe.
Move the hydraulic pipe.
-4-
Remove:
the " coolant circuit switchover valve - thermoplunger unit " assembly bolts(2) ,
the " coolant circuit switchover valve - thermoplunger unit " assembly.
-5-
Remove:
the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts(3) ,
the coolant circuit switchover valve.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
-6-
Move aside using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe clip(2) ,
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe clip(1) .
Disconnect:
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe,
-7-
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe.
Disconnect the coolant circuit switchover valve control pipe(3 ) .
Remove (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts,
-8-
the coolant circuit switchover valve.
REFITTING
M9T, 700 702(M9T) AND (700 OR 702)
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve,
the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts.
Torque tighten the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts(see 19A, Cooling,
Exploded view ) .
Coolant circuit assembly:
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
-9-
M9T, 870(M9T) AND (870)
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the thermoplunger unit wiring nuts4 N.m
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
Repair-10x06x10-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
COOLANT CIRCUIT SWITCHOVER VALVE : REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) .
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove the engine undertray.
Drain the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
-1-
.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove the intercooler air outlet pipeAND (ZA4 OR ZF4) ZA4 ZF4.
Remove :
the
the
the
the
the
damper valve,
exhaust gas recirculation rigide pipe at the exhaust gas cooler outlet,
exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve,
exhaust gas circuit temperature sensor,
inlet distributor.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
M9T, 870(870)
Remove the nuts on the thermoplunger unit wiring.
Move the thermoplunger unit wiring to one side.
Separate the following from the thermoplunger unit using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) :
the clip of the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe,
the clip of the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe.
Disconnect the following from the thermoplunger unit:
the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe,
the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe.
Separate the following from the coolant circuit switchover valve using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot.
1448 ) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe,
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe.
-3-
Disconnect the following from the coolant circuit switchover valve:
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe,
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe,
the control pipe from the coolant circuit switchover valve(1) .
Remove the retaining bolt of the hydraulic pipe.
Move the hydraulic pipe.
-4-
Remove:
the " coolant circuit switchover valve - thermoplunger unit " assembly bolts(2) ,
the " coolant circuit switchover valve - thermoplunger unit " assembly.
-5-
Remove:
the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts(3) ,
the coolant circuit switchover valve.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
-6-
Move aside using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe clip(2) ,
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe clip(1) .
Disconnect:
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe,
-7-
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe.
Disconnect the coolant circuit switchover valve control pipe(3 ) .
Remove (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts,
-8-
the coolant circuit switchover valve.
REFITTING
M9T, 700 702(M9T) AND (700 OR 702)
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve,
the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts.
Torque tighten the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts(see 19A, Cooling,
Exploded view ) .
Coolant circuit assembly:
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
-9-
M9T, 870(M9T) AND (870)
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the thermoplunger unit wiring nuts4 N.m
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
Repair-10x06x10-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
COOLANT CIRCUIT SWITCHOVER VALVE : REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) .
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove the engine undertray.
Drain the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
-1-
.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove the intercooler air outlet pipeAND
(PA0 OR PF6) PA0 PF6.
Remove Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the damper valve,
the exhaust gas recirculation rigide pipe at the exhaust gas cooler outlet,
the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve,
the exhaust gas circuit temperature sensor,
the inlet distributor.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
M9T, 870(870)
Remove the nuts on the thermoplunger unit wiring.
Move the thermoplunger unit wiring to one side.
Separate the following from the thermoplunger unit using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) :
the clip of the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe,
the clip of the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe.
Disconnect the following from the thermoplunger unit:
the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe,
the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe.
Separate the following from the coolant circuit switchover valve using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot.
1448 ) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe,
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe.
-3-
Disconnect the following from the coolant circuit switchover valve:
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe,
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe,
the control pipe from the coolant circuit switchover valve(1) .
Remove the retaining bolt of the hydraulic pipe.
Move the hydraulic pipe.
-4-
Remove:
the " coolant circuit switchover valve - thermoplunger unit " assembly bolts(2) ,
the " coolant circuit switchover valve - thermoplunger unit " assembly.
-5-
Remove:
the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts(3) ,
the coolant circuit switchover valve.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
-6-
Move aside using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe clip(2) ,
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe clip(1) .
Disconnect:
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe,
-7-
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe.
Disconnect the coolant circuit switchover valve control pipe(3 ) .
Remove (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts,
-8-
the coolant circuit switchover valve.
REFITTING
M9T, 700 702(M9T) AND (700 OR 702)
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve,
the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts.
Torque tighten the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts(see 19A, Cooling,
Exploded view ) .
Coolant circuit assembly:
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
-9-
M9T, 870(M9T) AND (870)
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the thermoplunger unit wiring nuts4 N.m
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
Repair-10x06x10-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
COOLANT PUMP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Pin wrench..
Mot. 1729
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Cylinder block
assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
-1-
CAUTION
When carrying out a repair that requires a complete change, it is essential to flush the
circuit with clean water, blast compressed air through the circuit to drive out the
water, fill and bleed the circuit and then measure the effective protection.
The criteria to be met are:
protection down to
protection down to
-25 C ± 2for
-40 C ± 2for
cold and temperate countries,
" extreme cold " countries.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the engine cooling fan propeller(see Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) .
Drain the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Remove the accessories beltAND
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
(M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
.
Lock the coolant pump pulley using the toolPin wrench..(Mot. 1729 ) (1 ) .
Remove (see Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) :
the water pump pulley,
the coolant pump,
the coolant pump seal.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face
will result in a risk of leaks.
-3-
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
WARNING
Wear goggles with side protectors for this operation.
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
Clean the joint faces using surface cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables Products):
of the coolant pump if it is to be re-used,
the cylinder block.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fill and bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
Repair-10x06x01x04-01x37-1-116-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
.
COOLANT PUMP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Pin wrench..
Mot. 1729
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Cylinder block
assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
-1-
CAUTION
When carrying out a repair that requires a complete change, it is essential to flush the
circuit with clean water, blast compressed air through the circuit to drive out the
water, fill and bleed the circuit and then measure the effective protection.
The criteria to be met are:
protection down to
protection down to
-25 C ± 2for
-40 C ± 2for
cold and temperate countries,
" extreme cold " countries.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the engine cooling fan propeller(see Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) .
Drain the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Remove the accessories beltAND
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
(M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
.
Lock the coolant pump pulley using the toolPin wrench..(Mot. 1729 ) (1 ) .
Remove (see Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) :
the water pump pulley,
the coolant pump,
the coolant pump seal.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face
will result in a risk of leaks.
-3-
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
WARNING
Wear goggles with side protectors for this operation.
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
Clean the joint faces using surface cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables Products):
of the coolant pump if it is to be re-used,
the cylinder block.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fill and bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
Repair-10x06x01x04-01x37-1-116-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
.
COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
parts always to be replaced:
coolant temperature sensor seal
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
WARNING
The circuits are designed to be pressurised, so be careful at high temperatures (risk
of serious burns).
Do not remove the cap from the expansion bottle while the engine is hot.
Take care when carrying out a repair under the bonnet, as the radiator fan(s) may
start to operate without warning.
Do not open the bleed screw(s) with the engine running.
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
-1-
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) .
Remove the engine undertray.
Drain the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
.
M9T, 690 696 698 700 890 896 898(690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 700 OR 890 OR 896 OR 898)
Remove the particle filter(see Exhaust
assembly under body: Exploded view) .
M9T, 686 692 694(686 OR 692 OR 694)
Remove the catalytic converter(see Exhaust
assembly under body: Exploded view) .
-2-
M9T, 700(700)
-3-
Unclip from the high-pressure pump protector:
the fuel collector pipe clip(1) .
the coolant temperature sensor wiring clip(2)
Remove :
the high pressure pump protector bolts,
the high pressure pump protector.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 890 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 890 OR 896 OR 898)
Disconnect the coolant temperature sensor connector(1 ) .
M9T, 700(700)
-5-
Disconnect the coolant temperature sensor connector(3 ) .
Remove (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the coolant temperature sensor clip,
the coolant temperature sensor,
-6-
the coolant temperature sensor seal.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
coolant temperature sensor seal
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the coolant temperature sensor seal.
the coolant temperature sensor,
the coolant temperature sensor clip,
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fill and bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
Repair-10x06x01x03-01x37-1-72-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
.
COOLING RADIATOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
-1-
CAUTION
When carrying out a repair that requires a complete change, it is essential to flush the
circuit with clean water, blast compressed air through the circuit to drive out the
water, fill and bleed the circuit and then measure the effective protection.
The criteria to be met are:
protection down to
protection down to
-25 C ± 2for
-40 C ± 2for
cold and temperate countries,
" extreme cold " countries.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the radiator grille(see Radiator grille: Removal - Refitting) (56A, Exterior equipment),
the headlights(see Headlight: Removal - Refitting) (80B, Headlights),
the front bumper(see Front bumper: Removal - Refitting) (55A, Exterior protection),
the intercoolerAND (ZA4 OR ZF4) ZA4 ZF4AND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702.
Drain the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
Remove the engine cooling fan propeller(see Cylinder
.
block assembly: Exploded view) .
M9T, 694 696 698(694 OR 696 OR 698)
Remove the additional cooling radiator(see 19A, Cooling,
Unclip the engine cooling fan assembly wiring.
-2-
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view)
.
Unclip the cooling pipe(10 ) from the engine cooling fan assembly.
-3-
Unclip the power-assisted steering pipe from the engine cooling fan assembly(11 ) .
-4-
-5-
Remove the bolts(12 ) from the power-assisted steering pipe.
-6-
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove the bolt(13 ) from the power-assisted steering pipes.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Using the toolRemote
Cooling, Coolant circuit
the cooling
the cooling
the cooling
operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) , separate the following from the cooling radiator(see 19A,
assembly: Exploded view) :
radiator outlet pipe clip,
radiator inlet pipe clip,
radiator degassing pipe clip.
-7-
Disconnect the following from
the cooling radiator
the cooling radiator
the cooling radiator
the cooling radiator(see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
outlet pipe,
inlet pipe,
degassing pipe.
Remove the bolt of the bracket of the power-assisted steering pipe on the cooling radiator(see Powerassisted steering assembly: Exploded view) (36B, Power-assisted steering).
Remove:
the cooling radiator bolts(14) ,
the cooling radiator.
1- IF REPLACING THE COOLING RADIATOR
Remove the engine cooling fan assembly from the cooling radiator(see 19A, Cooling,
assembly: Exploded view) .
REFITTING
-8-
Coolant circuit
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fill and bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
Repair-10x06x01x05-01x37-1-107-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-9-
.
COOLING RADIATOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
IMPORTANT
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
WARNING
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
-1-
WARNING
When carrying out a repair that requires a complete change, it is essential to flush the
circuit with clean water, blast compressed air through the circuit to drive out the
water, fill and bleed the circuit and then measure the effective protection.
The criteria to be met are:
protection down to
protection down to
-25 C ± 2for
-40 C ± 2for
cold and temperate countries,
" extreme cold " countries.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment),
the headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting (80B, Headlights),
the front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection),
the intercooler(see 12A, Fuel mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view) .
Drain the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
.
M9T, 694 696 698(694 OR 696 OR 698)
Remove the additional cooling radiator(see 19A, Cooling,
Unclip the engine cooling fan assembly wiring.
-2-
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view)
.
Unclip the power-assisted steering pipes from the engine cooling fan assembly at(8 ) .
1-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Using the toolRemote
Cooling, Coolant circuit
the cooling
the cooling
the cooling
operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) , separate the following from the cooling radiator(see 19A,
assembly: Exploded view) :
radiator outlet pipe clip,
radiator inlet pipe clip,
radiator degassing pipe clip.
Disconnect the following from
the cooling radiator
the cooling radiator
the cooling radiator
the cooling radiator(see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
outlet pipe,
inlet pipe,
degassing pipe.
Remove the bolt of the bracket of the power-assisted steering pipe on the cooling radiatorPowerassisted steering assembly: Exploded view (36B, Power-assisted steering).
-3-
Remove:
the cooling radiator bolts(13) ,
the cooling radiator.
1- IF REPLACING THE COOLING RADIATOR
Remove the engine cooling fan assembly from the cooling radiator(see 19A, Cooling,
assembly: Exploded view) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fill and bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
Repair-10x06x01x05-01x37-1-107-1.xml
-4-
.
Coolant circuit
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
COOLING SYSTEM: DRAINING - REFILLING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Instrument for testing the cooling circuit and the expansion bottle valve. Contains caps 554-01, 554-04, 554-06
Ms. 554-07
Fault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.
Mot. 1700
Equipment required
pedal press
compressed air nozzle
coolant recovery tray
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
-1-
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
CAUTION
The coolant helps to keep the engine running properly (heat exchange).
The system does not operate using pure water.
CAUTION
If the coolant is leaking from the expansion bottle cap, replace the valve.
DRAINING
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the expansion bottle cap,
the engine undertray.
Position an
coolant recovery trayunder the vehicle.
Disconnect the cooling radiator outlet pipe from the cooling radiator(see 19A, Cooling,
assembly: Exploded view) .
Coolant circuit
Use a compressed air nozzleto blow air into the system through the expansion bottle opening to remove
as much coolant as possible.
Connect the cooling radiator outlet pipe to the cooling radiator(see 19A, Cooling,
Exploded view ) .
FILLING
-2-
Coolant circuit assembly:
Note:
There are two procedures for filling the cooling system.
- the procedure using the toolFault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.
(Mot. 1700 ) recommended by Renault. It saves a considerable amount of time because
it does not require the cooling system bleed screws to be opened.
- the procedure without the special tool.
1. FILLING PROCEDURE WITH THE SPECIAL TOOL
Fill the cooling system with coolant recommended by the manufacturer(see Vehicle: Parts and
consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products) using the toolFault finding and filling - bleeding
the cooling circuit.(Mot. 1700 ) . Consult the procedure for using this tool (see Cooling system filling and
diagnostic tool: Use ) (Technical Note 3857A, 19A, Cooling).
2. FILLING PROCEDURE WITHOUT THE SPECIAL TOOL
CAUTION
It is essential to open all of the bleed screws to remove as much as air as possible in
the cooling system. Failure to perform this procedure may prevent the cooling system
from filling properly and may damage the engine.
-3-
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
-4-
Remove:
the bleed screw of the cooling radiator inlet pipe(1) ,
the bleed screw of the heater matrix coolant outlet pipe(2) ,
the bleed screw of the exhaust gas cooler inlet pipe(3) .
M9T, 694 696 698(694 OR 696 OR 698)
-5-
Remove the bleed screw from the additional radiator(4 ) .
M9T, 700(700)
-6-
-7-
Remove:
the
the
the
the
bleed
bleed
bleed
bleed
screw of the cooling radiator inlet pipe(1) ,
screw of the heater matrix coolant outlet pipe(4) ,
screw of the exhaust gas cooler inlet pipe(2) ,
screw from the additional radiator(3) .
Fill the cooling system with engine coolant recommended by the manufacturer(see 19A, Cooling,
Engine cooling system: Specifications) and(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables Products) via the expansion bottle until it overflows.
Close all the bleed screws as soon as the coolant starts to flow in a continuous stream.
Pressurise the system using theInstrument for testing the cooling circuit and the expansion bottle
-8-
valve. Contains caps 554-01, 554-04, 554-06(Ms.
Cooling, Engine cooling system: Check) .
554-07) to
check that there are no leaks(see 19A,
Fill the expansion bottle until it overflows.
Refit the expansion bottle cap.
Clean any surfaces soiled by the coolant.
BLEEDING
CAUTION
Do not open the bleed screw whilst the engine is running; this would damage the
engine.
CAUTION
Before bleeding the cooling system, it is essential to deactivate the thermoplungers to
avoid irreparably damaging them.
-9-
Disconnect the connector(5 ) from the thermoplunger unit.
Deactivate the air conditioning system so that the engine cooling fan assembly is not operating from
the start of the operation.
Start the engine.
- 10 -
Note:
To check that the coolant pump has been correctly primed:
after 5 minutesat 2500 rpm, check that the temperature indicated on the instrument
panel begins to increase,
each time the engine cooling fan assembly is activated, check that there is a return flow
into the expansion bottle through the cooling radiator degassing pipe.
Maintain the engine speed at 2500 rpmusing a
activated for the second time.
pedal press,
until the engine cooling fan assembly is
Check that the heating is operating correctly.
Allow the engine to cool until the coolant temperature is less than 50 C.
Make sure the coolant fluid level is at the " Maximum " mark.
Refit the expansion bottle cap.
Connect the thermoplunger unit connectors.
REFITTING
1.
Remove the coolant
recovery tray.
Refit the engine undertray.
Repair-10x06x01-01x73-1-70-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
COOLING SYSTEM: DRAINING - REFILLING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Instrument for testing the cooling circuit and the expansion bottle valve. Contains caps 554-01, 554-04, 554-06
Ms. 554-07
Fault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.
Mot. 1700
Equipment required
pedal press
compressed air nozzle
coolant recovery tray
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
-1-
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
CAUTION
The coolant helps to keep the engine running properly (heat exchange).
The system does not operate using pure water.
CAUTION
If the coolant is leaking from the expansion bottle cap, replace the valve.
DRAINING
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the expansion bottle cap,
the engine undertray.
Position an
coolant recovery trayunder the vehicle.
Disconnect the cooling radiator outlet pipe from the cooling radiator(see 19A, Cooling,
assembly: Exploded view) .
Coolant circuit
Use a compressed air nozzleto blow air into the system through the expansion bottle opening to remove
as much coolant as possible.
Connect the cooling radiator outlet pipe to the cooling radiator(see 19A, Cooling,
Exploded view ) .
FILLING
-2-
Coolant circuit assembly:
Note:
There are two procedures for filling the cooling system.
- the procedure using the toolFault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.
(Mot. 1700 ) recommended by Renault. It saves a considerable amount of time because
it does not require the cooling system bleed screws to be opened.
- the procedure without the special tool.
1. FILLING PROCEDURE WITH THE SPECIAL TOOL
Fill the cooling system with coolant recommended by the manufacturer(see Vehicle: Parts and
consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products) using the toolFault finding and filling - bleeding
the cooling circuit.(Mot. 1700 ) . Consult the procedure for using this tool (see Cooling system filling and
diagnostic tool: Use ) (Technical Note 3857A, 19A, Cooling).
2. FILLING PROCEDURE WITHOUT THE SPECIAL TOOL
CAUTION
It is essential to open all of the bleed screws to remove as much as air as possible in
the cooling system. Failure to perform this procedure may prevent the cooling system
from filling properly and may damage the engine.
-3-
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
-4-
Remove:
the bleed screw of the cooling radiator inlet pipe(1) ,
the bleed screw of the heater matrix coolant outlet pipe(2) ,
the bleed screw of the exhaust gas cooler inlet pipe(3) .
M9T, 694 696 698(694 OR 696 OR 698)
-5-
Remove the bleed screw from the additional radiator(4 ) .
M9T, 700(700)
-6-
-7-
Remove:
the
the
the
the
bleed
bleed
bleed
bleed
screw of the cooling radiator inlet pipe(1) ,
screw of the heater matrix coolant outlet pipe(4) ,
screw of the exhaust gas cooler inlet pipe(2) ,
screw from the additional radiator(3) .
Fill the cooling system with engine coolant recommended by the manufacturer(see 19A, Cooling,
Engine cooling system: Specifications) and(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables Products) via the expansion bottle until it overflows.
Close all the bleed screws as soon as the coolant starts to flow in a continuous stream.
Pressurise the system using theInstrument for testing the cooling circuit and the expansion bottle
-8-
valve. Contains caps 554-01, 554-04, 554-06(Ms.
Cooling, Engine cooling system: Check) .
554-07) to
check that there are no leaks(see 19A,
Fill the expansion bottle until it overflows.
Refit the expansion bottle cap.
Clean any surfaces soiled by the coolant.
BLEEDING
CAUTION
Do not open the bleed screw whilst the engine is running; this would damage the
engine.
CAUTION
Before bleeding the cooling system, it is essential to deactivate the thermoplungers to
avoid irreparably damaging them.
-9-
Disconnect the connector(5 ) from the thermoplunger unit.
Deactivate the air conditioning system so that the engine cooling fan assembly is not operating from
the start of the operation.
Start the engine.
- 10 -
Note:
To check that the coolant pump has been correctly primed:
after 5 minutesat 2500 rpm, check that the temperature indicated on the instrument
panel begins to increase,
each time the engine cooling fan assembly is activated, check that there is a return flow
into the expansion bottle through the cooling radiator degassing pipe.
Maintain the engine speed at 2500 rpmusing a
activated for the second time.
pedal press,
until the engine cooling fan assembly is
Check that the heating is operating correctly.
Allow the engine to cool until the coolant temperature is less than 50 C.
Make sure the coolant fluid level is at the " Maximum " mark.
Refit the expansion bottle cap.
Connect the thermoplunger unit connectors.
REFITTING
1.
Remove the coolant
recovery tray.
Refit the engine undertray.
Repair-10x06x01-01x73-1-70-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
COOLING SYSTEM FILLING AND DIAGNOSTIC TOOL: USE
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Fault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.
Mot. 1700
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety
instructions (see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
DESCRIPTION OF THE TOOL MOT. 1700
-1-
-2-
(1 )
Connection control between the vehicle's cooling system and tool Mot. 1700
(2 )
Pressure gauge
(3 )
Electric pump air inlet and outlet selection control
(4 )
Vacuum or pressure creation selection control
(5 )
Electric supply
(6 )
Socket for expansion bottle cap
(7 )
Electric pump protection fuse
(8 )
Electric pump stop/start switch
(9 )
Connecting pipe between the vehicle's cooling system and tool Mot. 1700
-3-
-4-
(10 )
Decanting bottle
(11 )
Indicator for reading the coolant level in the reservoir
(12 )
Reservoir filling opening
1. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE FOR THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
CAUTION
Failure to observe the following procedure can lead to the destruction of the engine.
1- FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE FOR THE EXPANSION BOTTLE CAP
Position:
Control(1) to " 0 " ,
Control(2) to " 3 " ,
Control(3) to " 7 " ,
The on/off switch(4) to " OFF " .
-5-
Screw on:
The expansion bottle cap at(5) on the toolFault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.(Mot. 1700 ) ,
The adapter plug(6) (without the pipe) to the vehicle expansion bottle.
Connect the wires to the battery, observing the correct polarity.
-6-
Position:
Control(1) to " 1 " ,
Control(3) to " 6 " ,
The on/off switch(4) to " ON " .
Note:
The pressure gauge needle should point to a pressure value and should settle at the expansion bottle valve
cap valve rating. If the needle does not indicate the rating or exceeds 2 bar, replace the expansion bottle
cap because the rating is incorrect.
Set the on/off switch(4 ) to " OFF " .
Note:
The needle of the pressure gauge must remain at the expansion bottle cap valve rating. If the needle drops
back down, replace the expansion bottle cap as it is leaking.
-7-
Dump the pressure by turning the control(1 ) in the direction shown by the arrow.
2- FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE FOR THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
-8-
Connect the pipe of the toolFault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.(Mot. 1700 ) to the adapter plug.
-9-
Position:
Control(1) to " 1 " ,
Control(3) to " 6 " ,
The on/off switch(4) to " ON " .
Note:
The pressure gauge needle should point to a pressure value and should settle at the expansion bottle
valve cap valve rating.
Set the on/off switch(4 ) to " OFF " .
- 10 -
Set the control(3 ) to " 7 " .
Note:
The pressure gauge needle should not move. If it does not, find and repair any leaks on the cooling
system.
After repair, repressurise the cooling circuit (by restarting the previous operations).
- 11 -
Set the control(3 ) to " 6 " .
Gradually dump the pressure by turning the control(1 ) in the direction shown by the arrow.
- 12 -
Disconnect the tool Fault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.(Mot. 1700 ) from the vehicle.
Refit the expansion bottle cap.
2. FILLING THE COOLING CIRCUIT
- 13 -
This filling operation can be carried out after the cooling circuit has been totally or partially drained, and does not need the
bleed screws to be open. The cooling circuit is filled by vacuum.
CAUTION
Failure to observe the following procedure can lead to the destruction of the engine
1- CREATING A VACUUM IN THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Position:
Control(1) to " 0 " ,
Control(2) to " 3 " ,
Control(3) to " 7 " ,
The on/off switch(4) to " OFF " .
- 14 -
Check that:
The decanting bottle(5) is empty,
There is enough coolant in the reservoir of the toolFault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.(Mot. 1700 ) .
- 15 -
Fit the adapter plug to the vehicle's expansion bottle.
Connect the pipe of the toolFault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.(Mot. 1700 ) to the adapter plug.
Connect the wires to the battery, observing the correct polarity.
- 16 -
Note:
During the operation, do not fit the expansion bottle cap on tool Mot. 1700
Position:
Control(1) to " 2 " ,
Control(2) to " 4 " ,
Control(3) to " 6 " ,
The on/off switch(4) to " ON " .
Note:
The pressure gauge needle should show a vacuum.
- 17 -
The cooling system hoses flatten.
Note:
If replacing a part which not does require the cooling system to be completely drained, it is essential to
position the switch (4) to " OFF " and the control (3) to " 7 " when the coolant starts to rise in the connecting
pipe between the expansion bottle and Mot. 1700.
- 18 -
When the pressure gauge needle shows a vacuum of between
The on/off switch(4) to " OFF " ,
Control(3) to " 7 " .
0.85and 0.95bar
(depending on the vehicle), position:
Note:
The pressure gauge needle should not move. If it does not, find and repair any leaks on the cooling
system.
After repair, create a vacuum in the cooling circuit (by restarting the previous operations).
2- FILLING THE COOLING CIRCUIT
- 19 -
Set the control(3 ) to " 5 " .
The hoses return to their original form.
- 20 -
The pressure gauge needle returns to zero.
Note:
For cooling systems with a coolant capacity greater than 10 litres, stop filling the cooling system before
the reservoir is empty.
To carry out this operation:
Position the control (3) to " 7 " ,
Readjust the coolant level in the reservoir.
Set the control (3) to " 5 " to fill the cooling system again.
- 21 -
The cooling system is full once bubbles appear in the connecting pipe(7 ) between the expansion bottle and toolFault
finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.(Mot. 1700 ) .
Set the control(2 ) to " 3 " .
Disconnect the pipe (7 ) from the adapter plug.
Remove the adapter plug(6 ) .
Connect the adapter plug to the pipe to empty the remaining liquid in the pipe into the reservoir of the toolFault finding
and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.(Mot. 1700 ) .
3- PRESSURIZING THE COOLING SYSTEM
Refit the adapter plug and the pipe to the vehicle's expansion bottle in order to pressurise the cooling circuit to check
the cooling circuit sealing.
Refit the expansion bottle cap(8 ) on the toolFault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.(Mot. 1700 ) .
- 22 -
Position:
Control(1) to " 1 " ,
Control(2) to " 3 " ,
Control(3) to " 6 " ,
The on/off switch(4) to " ON " .
Note:
The pressure gauge needle should point to a pressure value and should settle at the expansion bottle
valve cap valve rating.
Set the on/off switch(4 ) to " OFF " .
Set the control(3 ) to " 7 " .
- 23 -
Note:
The pressure gauge needle should not move. If it does not, find and repair any leaks on the cooling
system.
After repair, repressurise the cooling circuit (by restarting the previous operations).
Set the control(3 ) to " 6 " .
Gradually dump the pressure by turning the control(1 ) in the direction shown by the arrow.
Disconnect the tool Fault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.(Mot. 1700 ) from the vehicle.
Fill the expansion bottle to overflow (only after a total draining of the cooling system).
- 24 -
Refit the expansion bottle cap.
Bleed the engine cooling system(see 19A,
Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
- 25 -
.
Repair-10x06x09-01x79-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 26 -
COOLING UNIT : REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
-1-
CAUTION
When carrying out a repair that requires a complete change, it is essential to flush the
circuit with clean water, blast compressed air through the circuit to drive out the
water, fill and bleed the circuit and then measure the effective protection.
The criteria to be met are:
protection down to
protection down to
-25 C ± 2for
-40 C ± 2for
cold and temperate countries,
" extreme cold " countries.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the bolts of the high pressure pump protector.
Move aside the high pressure pump protector.
M9T, 690 696 698 896(690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 896)
Remove the particle filter(see Exhaust
assembly under body: Exploded view) .
M9T, 686 692 694(686 OR 692 OR 694)
Remove the catalytic converter(see Exhaust
assembly under body: Exploded view) .
Drain the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
-2-
.
Unclip the fuel collector pipe from the water chamber.
Move the fuel collector pipe aside.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
Disconnect the coolant temperature sensor connector(2 ) .
Separate the clips of the cooling pipes on the water chamber using the toolRemote operation pliers
for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
Disconnect the cooling pipes from the water chamber(see 19A, Cooling,
view ) .
Remove (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the water chamber,
the water chamber seal.
-4-
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean and
degrease:
the cylinder head joint face,
the water chamber seal housing if it is to be reused.
CAUTION
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face
will result in a risk of leaks.
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fill and bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
Repair-10x06x01x16-01x37-1-73-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
.
C-PILLAR CLOSURE PANEL: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
C-pillar closure panel
Mild steel
0.8
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld area(see Earths on body: List and location of components) .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weld(see Connections by arc welding
under shielding gas: Description) (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections
(GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x09x12x06-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
C-PILLAR LOWER TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the complete rear seator the complete rear bench seat.
RIGHT-HAND SIDE
LEFT-HAND SIDE
-1-
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the rear loading door stop cam.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Turn the clips(2 ) .
Remove:
the clips(3) ,
the bolt(4) .
Unclip the C-pillar lower trim partially.
-3-
Move the drain pipe(5 ) .
Remove the C-pillar lower trim.
REFITTING
-4-
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Check the fitting in place.
Fit the drain pipe.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-5-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x02x06x11-01x37-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
C-PILLAR UPPER TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
The upper trim center section can be removed separately of side section.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
1- C-PILLAR UPPER TRIM CENTER SECTION
Remove:
the clips(1) ,
the bolts(2) ,
the trims,
the rear courtesy lightHeadlining light: Removal - Refitting (81B, Interior lighting).
2- C-PILLAR UPPER TRIM SIDE SECTION
-1-
Remove the C-pillar lower trim(see 71A, Body internal trim,
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- C-PILLAR UPPER TRIM CENTER SECTION
Remove:
the clips(3) ,
the bolts(4) ,
the C-pillar upper trim center section.
2- C-PILLAR UPPER TRIM SIDE SECTION
-2-
C-pillar lower trim: Removal - Refitting)
.
Remove:
the clips(5) ,
the C-pillar upper trim side section.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-3-
Repair-70x02x08x14-01x37-1-6-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
CRANKSHAFT ACCESSORIES PULLEY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Crankshaft pulley locking tool.
Mot. 1770
Crankshaft pulley locking tool
Mot. 1878
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 11A, Top and front
of engine, Engine accessories assembly: Exploded view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting ,
the headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting ,
the front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting ,
the engine cooling fan propellerCylinder block assembly: Exploded view ,
the intercoolerIntercooler : Removal - Refitting ,
the engine cooling fan assemblyCoolant circuit assembly: Exploded view ,
the accessories belt(see 11A, Top and front of engine, Engine accessories assembly: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
CRANKSHAFT ACCESSORIES PULLEY FITTED WITH AN ADDITIONAL PULLEY
-1-
Loosen the crankshaft accessories pulley bolt by locking the additional pulley using the tool
Crankshaft pulley locking tool(Mot. 1878 ) (1 ) .
CRANKSHAFT ACCESSORIES PULLEY
-2-
Loosen the crankshaft accessories pulley bolt by locking the crankshaft accessories pulley using the
tool Crankshaft pulley locking tool.(Mot. 1770 ) (2 ) .
Remove the crankshaft accessories pulley(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Exploded view ) .
Engine accessories assembly:
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
In case of reuse, clean the crankshaft accessories V-pulley using a brush to get rid of any deposit.
CAUTION
Only use brushes with plastic or non-corrosive metal (brass) bristles.
-3-
CAUTION
Do not run the engine without the accessories belt to avoid damaging the crankshaft
accessories pulley.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the crankshaft accessories pulley(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Exploded view ) .
Engine accessories assembly:
Lock the crankshaft accessories pulley using the toolCrankshaft pulley locking tool.(Mot. 1770 ) or
Crankshaft pulley locking tool(Mot. 1878 ) .
Torque tighten the crankshaft accessories pulley bolt50 N.m.
-4-
Make two marks at 120 (3 ) .
Tighten the bolt of the crankshaft accessories pulley
.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x03x03x07-01x37-1-82-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
CRANKSHAFT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Tightening torques
turbocharger strut lower bolts
25 N.m
turbocharger strut upper bolt
25 N.m
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Dial gauge support.
Mot. 251-01
Flywheel locking tool.
Mot. 1431
Equipment required
component support
puller (from inside)
depth gauge
indelible pencil
compressed air nozzle
set of feeler gauges
parts always to be replaced:
crankshaft bearing bolt
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
It is strictly forbidden to apply any pressure to the engine oil sump. Damage to the sump will irreparably damage the engine by:
blocking the strainer,
raising the oil level above maximum, with a risk of engine racing.
Note:
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before carrying out any repair(see 10A, Engine
the repair) .
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Position the engine on the
component support(see
10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine support equipment: Use)
Drain the engineEngine oil: Draining - Refilling .
Remove:
the accessories beltAccessories belt: Removal - Refitting ,
the coolant pumpCoolant pump: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
.
and cylinder block assembly, Engine: Precautions for
Immobilise the flywheel or the drive plate while fitting theFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) on the cylinder block.
Remove:
the crankshaft accessories pulleyCrankshaft accessories pulley: Removal - Refitting ,
the crankshaft seal on the timing sideCrankshaft seal on timing end: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the timing chain(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
.
X43, M9R, 804 811 817 824 839 844 846(804 OR 811 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (678 OR 680 OR 696 OR 880 OR 896 OR 898) AND (760 OR 762 OR 763) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR
812 OR 814 OR 815 OR 858 OR 859) AND (630 OR 692) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (754 OR 800 OR 802 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR 858)
AND (610 OR 615)
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
-2-
Remove:
the dipstick guide bolt(3) ,
the dipstick guide.
Remove:
the damper valve,
depending on version, the turbocharger outlet catalytic pre-converter or catalytic converterCatalytic pre-converter: Removal - Refitting orCatalytic converter: Removal - Refitting ,
the turbocharger oil pipesTurbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls),
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the bolts(4 ) from the control solenoid valve support of the 5th injector.
Move the support of the control solenoid valve away from the 5th injector.
Remove the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting)
-3-
.
Remove the bolts(5 ) from the exhaust gas cooler.
Separate the clip (6 ) on the coolant hose at the inlet of the exhaust gas cooler using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) .
Disconnect the coolant hose at the inlet of the exhaust gas cooler.
Remove:
the bolts(7) from the turbocharger strut,
the turbocharger strut.
Remove:
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) ,
the oil filter unitOil filter unit: Removal - Refitting .
-4-
Remove:
the gearbox side crankshaft sealCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting ,
the sumpLower cover: Removal - Refitting ,
the cylinder block base plate(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block base plate: Removal - Refitting) .
X62, M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove:
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) ,
the clutchPressure plate - Disc: Removal - Refitting ,
the flywheelFlywheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the gearbox side crankshaft sealCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting ,
the sumpCylinder block assembly: Exploded view ,
the cylinder block base plateCylinder block assembly: Exploded view ,
Remove:
the
the
the
the
oil level sensorOil level sensor: Removal - Refitting ,
oil splash plate bolt,
oil splash plate,
oil pump(see Oil pump: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove the con rod - piston assemblies from each cylinder(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Removal - Refitting)
.
2. CRANKSHAFT REMOVAL OPERATION
1- REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT
Check that the ink marking numbers from the factory on the crankshaft bearing caps are legible (bearing 1 timing end).
Mark the crankshaft bearing caps using a
indelible
pencil,
if necessary.
Note:
Always mark the position of each crankshaft bearing shell using an indelible marker pen, in relation to the crankshaft bearing number.
Remove:
the
the
the
the
crankshaft bearing bolts,
crankshaft bearing caps,
crankshaft,
crankshaft bearing shells.
-5-
Note:
Always mark the position of each thrust washer using an indelible marker pen, in relation to the cylinder block.
Remove the crankshaft thrust washers(8 ) .
2- REMOVE THE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR TARGET
Operation only to be carried out when replacing the crankshaft or the crankshaft position sensor target.
Remove:
the bolts(9) from the crankshaft position sensor target,
the target(10) from the crankshaft position sensor.
3- REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT BEARING
Operation only to be carried out when replacing the crankshaft or crankshaft bearing.
-6-
Remove the bearing using the
puller (from inside)for bearing
17 mminner diameter.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
crankshaft bearing bolt
.
1- CLEANING PARTS
Note:
Avoid any impact or pressure to:
-the mating faces of the seal and bearing of the crankshaft or cylinder block,
-the mating faces of the crankshaft bearing caps.
Use Surface Cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean:
the crankshaft,
the crankshaft bearing caps,
the mating faces of the crankshaft journal bearing caps on the cylinder block,
the mating faces of the crankshaft bearing caps on the cylinder block.
WARNING
Wear goggles with side protectors for this operation.
Dry the parts using a
compressed air nozzle.
2- PREPARATION FOR REFITTING IF REPLACING THE CRANKSHAFT
Operation only to be carried out when replacing the crankshaft or the crankshaft position sensor target.
When replacing the crankshaft or crankshaft bearing shells, always identify the bearing shell thickness class to refit on each crankshaft bearing to ensure the journal clearances remain
within the tolerances, before refitting the crankshaft(see Crankshaft: Check ) .
Note:
Any clearances of the crankshaft journal outside the tolerances can cause engine damage.
-7-
Refit:
the crankshaft position sensor target by aligning the crankshaft centring pin(14) with the target hole,
the bolts from the crankshaft position sensor target.
Pretighten to torque the crankshaft position sensor target bolts3 N.m.
Torque tighten the crankshaft position sensor target bolts20 N.m.
2. CRANKSHAFT REFITTING OPERATION
Note:
If not being replaced, refit following the marks made at the time of the removal:
-the crankshaft bearing shells,
-the crankshaft thrust washers,
-the crankshaft bearing caps.
-8-
Centre the grooved
bearing shellon
bearing No. 1 of the cylinder block while aligning the groove of the bearing shell with the groove of the bearing(15 ) .
Secure the flush bearing shell at(16 ) and push from the opposite side to position the bearing shell flush with the bearing.
-9-
Measure the distance(X1 ) between the bearing face(17 ) and the edge of the bearing shell at points(A) , (B) and (C) using a
If necessary, adjust the position of the bearing shell to the value(X1 ) = 182.71 ± 0.1 mm.
Repeat the previous operations for the bearing shells of bearings No. 2, 4 and 5.
If necessary, adjust the position of the bearing shells:
90.71 ± 0.1 mm,
182.71 ± 0.1 mm.
of bearings No. 2 and 4 to the value(X2) =
of bearing No. 5 to the value(X1) =
- 10 -
depth gauge.
Place:
a rectified shim(18) against the mating face of the crankshaft thrust washer on bearing No. 3 (e.g.: the toolDial gauge support.(Mot. 251-01) ),
the grooved bearingshell against the rectified shim.
Secure the flush bearing shell at(19 ) and push from the opposite side to position the bearing shell flush with the bearing.
Measure the distance(X3 ) between the bearing face of the thrust washer and the bearing shell edge using a
- 11 -
depth gauge.
Centre the grooved bearing shell on the bearing, aligning the bearing shell with the bearing groove.
Adjust the position of the bearing shell at points(A) , (B) and (C) using the rectified shim(20 ) and a set
of feeler gauges(thickness
of the shim(21 ) = X3: 2 ± 0.1mm).
Place:
the bearing cap on a bench,
the non-groovedbearing shell on the bench.
Secure the flush bearing shell with the bearing cap at(22 ) and push from the opposite side to bring the bearing shell flush with the bearing cap.
- 12 -
Measure the distance(X4 ) between the edge of the bearing shell and the wall of the bearing cap at points(A) , (B) and (C) using a
Adjust the position of the bearing shell at points(A) , (B) and (C) using a set
of feeler gauges(thickness
Repeat the previous operations for the other bearing caps.
- 13 -
depth gauge.
of the shim(23 ) = X4: 2 ± 0.1 mm).
Position the crankshaft thrust washers on the cylinder block (washer lug(24 ) in the cylinder block notch).
Use engine oil to lubricate the crankshaft journal bearing shells and thrust washers (only the face making contact with the crankshaft).
Note:
Ensure the bearing shells and the thrust washers do not move when refitting the crankshaft and bearing caps.
Refit:
the crankshaft,
the bearing caps,
the new crankshaft bearing bolts.
Note:
Check that the bearing caps are in contact with the cylinder block before tightening the bearing cap bolts.
Tighten to torque, to angle and in order the crankshaft bearing bolts20 N.m + 70 ± 6 .
- 14 -
Check that the crankshaft turns freely, with no resistance.
Operation only to be carried out when replacing the crankshaft or crankshaft bearing.
Fit the new crankshaft bearing using a spacer of diameter 39 mm.
3. FINAL OPERATION
If replacing the crankshaft, always identify the piston height category to refit in each cylinder to guarantee that the piston protrusion in relation to the cylinder block remains within the
tolerances, before refitting the con rod - piston assemblies(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) .
Note:
A piston protrusion outside the tolerances in relation to the cylinder block can lead to:
-an engine malfunction (incorrect start, pollution, poor performance),
- engine damage (piston in contact with the cylinder head or valves).
Refit the con rod - piston assemblies onto each cylinder(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Removal - Refitting)
.
If replacing the crankshaft, always check that the piston protrusion in relation to the cylinder block remains within the tolerances after refitting the con rod - piston assemblies(see 10A,
.
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check)
Note:
A piston protrusion outside the tolerances in relation to the cylinder block can lead to:
-an engine malfunction (incorrect start, pollution, poor performance),
- engine damage (piston in contact with the cylinder head or valves).
Refit:
the oil pump(see Oil pump: Removal - Refitting) ,
the oil splash plate,
the oil level sensorOil level sensor: Removal - Refitting .
- 15 -
Refit:
the cylinder block base plate(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block base plate: Removal - Refitting) ,
the sumpLower cover: Removal - Refitting ,
a newcrankshaft seal on the gearbox sideCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting .
Refit:
the oil filter unitOil filter unit: Removal - Refitting ,
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) .
Refit the turbocharger strut.
Fit without tightening:
the turbocharger strut lower bolts(25) ,
the turbocharger strut upper bolt(26) .
Torque tighten:
the turbocharger strut lower bolts25
the turbocharger strut upper bolt25
N.m,
N.m.
Connect the coolant hose at the inlet of the exhaust gas cooler.
Fit the clip on the coolant hose at the inlet of the exhaust gas cooler using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) .
Refit the exhaust gas cooler bolts.
Refit the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting)
.
Fit the control solenoid valve support for the 5th injector.
Refit the bolts to the control solenoid valve support of the 5th injector.
Refit:
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the newhigh pressure pipes between the injector rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
a newhigh pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls),
new turbocharger oil pipes Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
depending on version, the turbocharger outlet catalytic pre-converter or catalytic converterCatalytic pre-converter: Removal - Refitting orCatalytic converter: Removal - Refitting ,
the damper valve.
Refit the dipstick guide.
- 16 -
X43, M9R, 804 811 817 824 839 844 846(804 OR 811 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (678 OR 680 OR 696 OR 880 OR 896 OR 898) AND (760 OR 762 OR 763) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR
812 OR 814 OR 815 OR 858 OR 859) AND (630 OR 692) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (754 OR 800 OR 802 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR 858)
AND (610 OR 615)
Refit the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
Refit the timing chain(see 10A, Engine
Refit a
newcrankshaft
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
.
seal at the timing endCrankshaft seal on timing end: Removal - Refitting .
Immobilise the flywheel or the drive plate while fitting theFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) on the cylinder block.
Refit:
the crankshaft accessories pulleyCrankshaft accessories pulley: Removal - Refitting ,
the coolant pumpCoolant pump: Removal - Refitting ,
a new accessories beltAccessories belt: Removal - Refitting .
Remove:
the toolFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) ,
the engine from the component support(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine support equipment: Use) .
Refit the engine - gearbox assembly.
Top up the engine oilEngine oil: Draining - Refilling .
Repair-10x03x03-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 17 -
CRANKSHAFT SEAL ON TIMING END: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Timing
Exploded view .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the accessories belt,
the crankshaft accessories pulley.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
assembly:
-2-
Fit the lugs of the(2 ) into the crankshaft seal notches(1 ) .
Note:
The tool(2 ) is included in the spare parts kit of the new seal.
Remove the crankshaft seal.
-3-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean and degrease the mating face of the crankshaft seal using surface cleanerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Parts and
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-4-
-5-
Place the new fitting protector(4 ) - crankshaft seal(5 ) assembly on the crankshaft.
Note:
Touching the lip of the crankshaft seal is strictly forbidden. Any contact with it will
result in the lip being permanently damaged, which will cause an oil leak.
Align the notches(3 ) on the crankshaft seal with the timing cover notches(6 ) .
-6-
Tighten using the tool(7 ) included in the spare parts kit of the new crankshaft seal.
-7-
Remove the crankshaft seal fitting protector(8 ) .
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x03x03x04-01x37-1-58-1.xml
-8-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-9-
CRANKSHAFT SEAL, GEARBOX END: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the gearboxGearbox assembly: Exploded view ,
the clutch pressure plateClutch assembly: Exploded view ,
the flywheel(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the crankshaft seal on the gearbox end(see 10A, Engine
block assembly: Exploded view) .
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Degrease and clean the following using surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair :
the crankshaft seal face on the cylinder block at the gearbox end,
the mating face of the crankshaft seal on the crankshaft at the gearbox end.
-1-
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Note:
Touching the lip of the seal is strictly forbidden. Any contact with it will result in the lip
being permanently damaged, which will cause an oil leak.
Refit:
the " seal protector - new crankshaft seal on gearbox end " assembly on the crankshaft nose,
-2-
the guide bolts(1) (
M6 - 90 mm long) of the crankshaft seal on the gearbox end.
Finger tighten uniformly by hand the crankshaft seal on the gearbox end until it makes contact with
the cylinder block.
Remove:
the crankshaft seal protector on the gearbox end,
the guide bolts(1) .
Fit without tightening until contact, the bolts of the crankshaft seal on the gearbox end.
-3-
Tighten the crankshaft seal on the gearbox end(see 10A, Engine
assembly: Exploded view) .
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x03x03x05-01x37-1-58-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block
CRANKSHAFT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Tightening torques
turbocharger strut lower bolts
25 N.m
turbocharger strut upper bolt
25 N.m
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Dial gauge support.
Mot. 251-01
Flywheel locking tool.
Mot. 1431
Equipment required
component support
puller (from inside)
depth gauge
indelible pencil
compressed air nozzle
set of feeler gauges
parts always to be replaced:
crankshaft bearing bolt
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
It is strictly forbidden to apply any pressure to the engine oil sump. Damage to the sump will irreparably damage the engine by:
blocking the strainer,
raising the oil level above maximum, with a risk of engine racing.
Note:
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before carrying out any repair(see 10A, Engine
the repair) .
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Position the engine on the
component support(see
10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine support equipment: Use)
Drain the engineEngine oil: Draining - Refilling .
Remove:
the accessories beltAccessories belt: Removal - Refitting ,
the coolant pumpCoolant pump: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
.
and cylinder block assembly, Engine: Precautions for
Immobilise the flywheel or the drive plate while fitting theFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) on the cylinder block.
Remove:
the crankshaft accessories pulleyCrankshaft accessories pulley: Removal - Refitting ,
the crankshaft seal on the timing sideCrankshaft seal on timing end: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the engine lifting eye at the timing endLifting eyes: Removal - Refitting .
Remove:
the bolts(1) of the engine mounting strut,
the engine mounting strut.
-2-
Remove:
the bolts(2) from the cylinder head suspended mounting,
the cylinder head suspended mounting.
Remove the timing chain(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
.
X43, M9R, 804 811 817 824 839 844 846(804 OR 811 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (678 OR 680 OR 696 OR 880 OR 896 OR 898) AND (760 OR 762 OR 763) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR
812 OR 814 OR 815 OR 858 OR 859) AND (630 OR 692) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (754 OR 800 OR 802 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR 858)
AND (610 OR 615)
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Remove:
-3-
the dipstick guide bolt(3) ,
the dipstick guide.
Remove:
the damper valve,
depending on version, the turbocharger outlet catalytic pre-converter or catalytic converterCatalytic pre-converter: Removal - Refitting orCatalytic converter: Removal - Refitting ,
the turbocharger oil pipesTurbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls),
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the bolts(4 ) from the control solenoid valve support of the 5th injector.
Move the support of the control solenoid valve away from the 5th injector.
Remove the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting)
-4-
.
Remove the bolts(5 ) from the exhaust gas cooler.
Separate the clip (6 ) on the coolant hose at the inlet of the exhaust gas cooler using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) .
Disconnect the coolant hose at the inlet of the exhaust gas cooler.
Remove:
the bolts(7) from the turbocharger strut,
the turbocharger strut.
Remove:
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) ,
the oil filter unitOil filter unit: Removal - Refitting .
-5-
Remove:
the gearbox side crankshaft sealCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting ,
the sumpLower cover: Removal - Refitting ,
the cylinder block base plate(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block base plate: Removal - Refitting) .
X62, M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove:
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) ,
the clutchPressure plate - Disc: Removal - Refitting ,
the flywheelFlywheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the gearbox side crankshaft sealCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting ,
the sumpCylinder block assembly: Exploded view ,
the cylinder block base plateCylinder block assembly: Exploded view ,
Remove:
the
the
the
the
oil level sensorOil level sensor: Removal - Refitting ,
oil splash plate bolt,
oil splash plate,
oil pump(see Oil pump: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove the con rod - piston assemblies from each cylinder(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Removal - Refitting)
.
2. CRANKSHAFT REMOVAL OPERATION
1- REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT
Check that the ink marking numbers from the factory on the crankshaft bearing caps are legible (bearing 1 timing end).
Mark the crankshaft bearing caps using a
indelible
pencil,
if necessary.
Note:
Always mark the position of each crankshaft bearing shell using an indelible marker pen, in relation to the crankshaft bearing number.
Remove:
the
the
the
the
crankshaft bearing bolts,
crankshaft bearing caps,
crankshaft,
crankshaft bearing shells.
-6-
Note:
Always mark the position of each thrust washer using an indelible marker pen, in relation to the cylinder block.
Remove the crankshaft thrust washers(8 ) .
2- REMOVE THE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR TARGET
Operation only to be carried out when replacing the crankshaft or the crankshaft position sensor target.
Remove:
the bolts(9) from the crankshaft position sensor target,
the target(10) from the crankshaft position sensor.
3- REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT BEARING
Operation only to be carried out when replacing the crankshaft or crankshaft bearing.
-7-
Remove the bearing using the
puller (from inside)for bearing
17 mminner diameter.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
crankshaft bearing bolt
.
1- CLEANING PARTS
Note:
Avoid any impact or pressure to:
-the mating faces of the seal and bearing of the crankshaft or cylinder block,
-the mating faces of the crankshaft bearing caps.
Use Surface Cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean:
the crankshaft,
the crankshaft bearing caps,
the mating faces of the crankshaft journal bearing caps on the cylinder block,
the mating faces of the crankshaft bearing caps on the cylinder block.
WARNING
Wear goggles with side protectors for this operation.
Dry the parts using a
compressed air nozzle.
2- PREPARATION FOR REFITTING IF REPLACING THE CRANKSHAFT
Operation only to be carried out when replacing the crankshaft or the crankshaft position sensor target.
When replacing the crankshaft or crankshaft bearing shells, always identify the bearing shell thickness class to refit on each crankshaft bearing to ensure the journal clearances remain
within the tolerances, before refitting the crankshaft(see Crankshaft: Check ) .
Note:
Any clearances of the crankshaft journal outside the tolerances can cause engine damage.
-8-
Refit:
the crankshaft position sensor target by aligning the crankshaft centring pin(14) with the target hole,
the bolts from the crankshaft position sensor target.
Pretighten to torque the crankshaft position sensor target bolts3 N.m.
Torque tighten the crankshaft position sensor target bolts20 N.m.
2. CRANKSHAFT REFITTING OPERATION
Note:
If not being replaced, refit following the marks made at the time of the removal:
-the crankshaft bearing shells,
-the crankshaft thrust washers,
-the crankshaft bearing caps.
-9-
Centre the grooved
bearing shellon
bearing No. 1 of the cylinder block while aligning the groove of the bearing shell with the groove of the bearing(15 ) .
Secure the flush bearing shell at(16 ) and push from the opposite side to position the bearing shell flush with the bearing.
- 10 -
Measure the distance(X1 ) between the bearing face(17 ) and the edge of the bearing shell at points(A) , (B) and (C) using a
If necessary, adjust the position of the bearing shell to the value(X1 ) = 182.71 ± 0.1 mm.
Repeat the previous operations for the bearing shells of bearings No. 2, 4 and 5.
If necessary, adjust the position of the bearing shells:
90.71 ± 0.1 mm,
182.71 ± 0.1 mm.
of bearings No. 2 and 4 to the value(X2) =
of bearing No. 5 to the value(X1) =
- 11 -
depth gauge.
Place:
a rectified shim(18) against the mating face of the crankshaft thrust washer on bearing No. 3 (e.g.: the toolDial gauge support.(Mot. 251-01) ),
the grooved bearingshell against the rectified shim.
Secure the flush bearing shell at(19 ) and push from the opposite side to position the bearing shell flush with the bearing.
Measure the distance(X3 ) between the bearing face of the thrust washer and the bearing shell edge using a
- 12 -
depth gauge.
Centre the grooved bearing shell on the bearing, aligning the bearing shell with the bearing groove.
Adjust the position of the bearing shell at points(A) , (B) and (C) using the rectified shim(20 ) and a set
of feeler gauges(thickness
of the shim(21 ) = X3: 2 ± 0.1mm).
Place:
the bearing cap on a bench,
the non-groovedbearing shell on the bench.
Secure the flush bearing shell with the bearing cap at(22 ) and push from the opposite side to bring the bearing shell flush with the bearing cap.
- 13 -
Measure the distance(X4 ) between the edge of the bearing shell and the wall of the bearing cap at points(A) , (B) and (C) using a
Adjust the position of the bearing shell at points(A) , (B) and (C) using a set
of feeler gauges(thickness
Repeat the previous operations for the other bearing caps.
- 14 -
depth gauge.
of the shim(23 ) = X4: 2 ± 0.1 mm).
Position the crankshaft thrust washers on the cylinder block (washer lug(24 ) in the cylinder block notch).
Use engine oil to lubricate the crankshaft journal bearing shells and thrust washers (only the face making contact with the crankshaft).
Note:
Ensure the bearing shells and the thrust washers do not move when refitting the crankshaft and bearing caps.
Refit:
the crankshaft,
the bearing caps,
the new crankshaft bearing bolts.
Note:
Check that the bearing caps are in contact with the cylinder block before tightening the bearing cap bolts.
Tighten to torque, to angle and in order the crankshaft bearing bolts20 N.m + 70 ± 6 .
- 15 -
Check that the crankshaft turns freely, with no resistance.
Operation only to be carried out when replacing the crankshaft or crankshaft bearing.
Fit the new crankshaft bearing using a spacer of diameter 39 mm.
3. FINAL OPERATION
If replacing the crankshaft, always identify the piston height category to refit in each cylinder to guarantee that the piston protrusion in relation to the cylinder block remains within the
tolerances, before refitting the con rod - piston assemblies(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) .
Note:
A piston protrusion outside the tolerances in relation to the cylinder block can lead to:
-an engine malfunction (incorrect start, pollution, poor performance),
- engine damage (piston in contact with the cylinder head or valves).
Refit the con rod - piston assemblies onto each cylinder(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Removal - Refitting)
.
If replacing the crankshaft, always check that the piston protrusion in relation to the cylinder block remains within the tolerances after refitting the con rod - piston assemblies(see 10A,
.
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check)
Note:
A piston protrusion outside the tolerances in relation to the cylinder block can lead to:
-an engine malfunction (incorrect start, pollution, poor performance),
- engine damage (piston in contact with the cylinder head or valves).
Refit:
the oil pump(see Oil pump: Removal - Refitting) ,
the oil splash plate,
the oil level sensorOil level sensor: Removal - Refitting .
- 16 -
Refit:
the cylinder block base plate(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block base plate: Removal - Refitting) ,
the sumpLower cover: Removal - Refitting ,
a newcrankshaft seal on the gearbox sideCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting .
Refit:
the oil filter unitOil filter unit: Removal - Refitting ,
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) .
Refit the turbocharger strut.
Fit without tightening:
the turbocharger strut lower bolts(25) ,
the turbocharger strut upper bolt(26) .
Torque tighten:
the turbocharger strut lower bolts25
the turbocharger strut upper bolt25
N.m,
N.m.
Connect the coolant hose at the inlet of the exhaust gas cooler.
Fit the clip on the coolant hose at the inlet of the exhaust gas cooler using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) .
Refit the exhaust gas cooler bolts.
Refit the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting)
.
Fit the control solenoid valve support for the 5th injector.
Refit the bolts to the control solenoid valve support of the 5th injector.
Refit:
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the newhigh pressure pipes between the injector rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
a newhigh pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls),
new turbocharger oil pipes Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
depending on version, the turbocharger outlet catalytic pre-converter or catalytic converterCatalytic pre-converter: Removal - Refitting orCatalytic converter: Removal - Refitting ,
the damper valve.
Refit the dipstick guide.
- 17 -
X43, M9R, 804 811 817 824 839 844 846(804 OR 811 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (678 OR 680 OR 696 OR 880 OR 896 OR 898) AND (760 OR 762 OR 763) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR
812 OR 814 OR 815 OR 858 OR 859) AND (630 OR 692) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (754 OR 800 OR 802 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR 858)
AND (610 OR 615)
Refit the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
Refit the timing chain(see 10A, Engine
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
.
Refit the cylinder head suspended mounting .
Screw in the cylinder head suspended mounting bolts, without tightening them.
Tighten in order the cylinder head suspended mounting bolts.
- 18 -
Refit the engine mounting strut.
Fit the engine mounting bolts without tightening them.
Tighten the engine mounting bolts in order.
Refit the engine lifting eye at the timing endLifting eyes: Removal - Refitting .
Refit a
newcrankshaft
seal at the timing endCrankshaft seal on timing end: Removal - Refitting .
Immobilise the flywheel or the drive plate while fitting theFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) on the cylinder block.
Refit:
the crankshaft accessories pulleyCrankshaft accessories pulley: Removal - Refitting ,
the coolant pumpCoolant pump: Removal - Refitting ,
a new accessories beltAccessories belt: Removal - Refitting .
Remove:
the toolFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) ,
the engine from the component support(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine support equipment: Use) .
Refit the engine - gearbox assembly.
Top up the engine oilEngine oil: Draining - Refilling .
Repair-10x03x03-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 19 -
CREW CAB PARTITION: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the trims of the single unit rear bench seatbackSingle unit rear bench seatback trim: Removal - Refitting (78A,
Rear seat trim),
the side trims of the passenger compartment partition (71A, Body interior trim).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the upper bolts(2 ) on the passenger compartment side.
-2-
Remove the bolts(3 ) on the luggage compartment side.
-3-
Lift the crew cab partition(4 ) .
Tilt the crew cab partition(5 ) (this operation requires two people).
-4-
Remove the crew cab partition by(6 ) (this operation requires two people).
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-5-
Repair-50x08x08x18-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
CYCLIST PROTECTION BAR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
STAKEBED(PLTRID)
Remove:
the bolts of the cyclist protection bar(1) ,
(2) the cyclist protection bar.
-1-
LARGE VOLUME: 18 M3 or LARGE VOLUME: 20 M3(GRDV1 OR GRDV2)
Remove:
the bolts of the cyclist protection bar(3) ,
the cyclist protection bar(4) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x07x28-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Precautions for the repair
Mark
Description
Information
1
Timing sprocket
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting
2
Crankshaft
3
Crankshaft thrust washer
4
Piston
5
Scraper ring
6
Sealing ring
7
Compression ring
8
Gudgeon pin locking spring ring
9
Piston pin
10
Con rod
11
Con rod bearing shell
12
Flywheel bolts
13
Engine flywheel
14
Crankshaft position target
15
Crankshaft bearing shell
16
Crankshaft bearing cap
Crankshaft: Removal - Refitting
Piston - Con rod: Removal - Refitting
(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Flywheel: Removal - Refitting)
Crankshaft: Removal - Refitting
-2-
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-3-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Water pump pulley
Coolant pump: Removal - Refitting
2
Water pump
Coolant pump: Removal - Refitting
3
Coolant pump O-ring
Coolant pump: Removal - Refitting
4
Crankshaft position sensor
5
Crankshaft position sensor seal
6
Cylinder block
Cylinder block: Removal - Refitting
7
Crankshaft seal on gearbox end
Crankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting
8
Starter
Starter: Removal - Refitting
9
TDC setting hole plug
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting
10
Oil splash plate
11
Cylinder block base plate
Cylinder block base plate: Removal - Refitting
12
Sump
Lower cover: Removal - Refitting
13
Engine cooling fan propeller
Engine cooling fan assembly: Removal - Refitting
Repair-10x03-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Precautions for the repair
Mark
Description
Information
1
Timing sprocket
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting
2
Crankshaft
3
Crankshaft thrust washer
4
Piston
5
Scraper ring
6
Sealing ring
7
Compression ring
8
Gudgeon pin locking spring ring
9
Piston pin
10
Con rod
11
Con rod bearing shell
12
Flywheel bolts
13
Engine flywheel
14
Crankshaft position target
15
Crankshaft bearing shell
16
Crankshaft bearing cap
Crankshaft: Removal - Refitting
Piston - Con rod: Removal - Refitting
(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Flywheel: Removal - Refitting)
Crankshaft: Removal - Refitting
-2-
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-3-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Water pump pulley
Coolant pump: Removal - Refitting
2
Water pump
Coolant pump: Removal - Refitting
3
Coolant pump O-ring
Coolant pump: Removal - Refitting
4
Crankshaft position sensor
5
Crankshaft position sensor seal
6
Cylinder block
7
Crankshaft seal on gearbox end
8
Starter
Starter: Removal - Refitting
9
TDC setting hole plug
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting
10
Oil splash plate
11
Cylinder block base plate
12
Sump
13
Engine cooling fan propeller
Cylinder block: Removal - Refitting
(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Crankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting)
Cylinder block base plate: Removal - Refitting
(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Lower cover: Removal - Refitting)
Engine cooling fan assembly: Removal - Refitting
Repair-10x03-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
CYLINDER BLOCK BASE PLATE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Flywheel locking tool.
Mot. 1431
REMOVAL-REFITTING
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Remove the timing cover(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Remove:
the clutch plate and pressure platePressure plate - Disc: Removal - Refitting ,
the flywheelFlywheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the flywheel locking toolFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) .
Remove:
the gearbox side crankshaft sealCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting ,
the engine oil sumpLower cover: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
.
Undo the oil pump strainer bolts(1 ) .
Remove the " bolt - oil pump strainer " assembly.
2. CYLINDER BLOCK BASE PLATE REMOVAL OPERATION
1- REMOVAL OF THE CYLINDER BLOCK BASE PLATE BLANKING COVERS (IF FITTED)
Perform the following operations if the cylinder block base plate is fitted with blanking covers to seal
the flywheel compartment.
-2-
Drill the blanking covers lodged in the holes(2 ) and (3 ) of the cylinder block base plate using a 13 mm
drill bit.
Cut the blanking covers(3 ) with a very flat chisel.
Note:
Take care not to mark the base plate and its bolts.
Remove the blanking covers(3 ) .
-3-
Remove the blanking covers(4 ) using a copper hammer.
FITTING WITHOUT BLANKING COVERS
-4-
Note:
On cylinder block bases with long bolts(5 ) , the engine compartment is sealed
without blanking covers.
2- REMOVAL OF THE CYLINDER BLOCK BASE PLATE BOLTS
-5-
Remove the cylinder block base plate bolts.
-6-
Fit two studs(6 ) ( M8threaded rod - 90 mmlong), two nuts ( M8) (7 ) and two flat washers(8 ) ( 8 mm
inner diameter - 14 mmouter diameter) in place of the cylinder block base plate bolts.
Tighten the nuts(7 ) until contact with the flat washers(8 ) and cylinder block base plate rib.
Detach the base plate from the cylinder block by gradually tightening the nuts(7 ) .
Remove:
the studs(6) ,
the nuts(7) ,
the washers(8) .
-7-
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace:
the cylinder block base plate blanking covers (if fitted),
the oil pump strainer seal.
Clean using Super cleaning agent for joint facesVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair the gasket surfaces:
of the cylinder block base plate,
of the cylinder block,
of the timing cover.
CAUTION
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face
will result in a risk of leaks.
Remove the residue using a plastic spatula.
Finish cleaning the joint faces using a grey abrasive pad.
Clean, using surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair :
the gasket surface of the cylinder block base plate on the cylinder block,
the gasket surfaces of the timing cover on the cylinder head and the cylinder block,
the cylinder block base plate,
the timing cover.
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
CAUTION
Applying excess sealant could cause it to be squeezed out when parts are tightened.
A mixture of sealant and fluid could damage certain components (engine, radiator,
etc.).
2. REFITTING OPERATION OF THE CYLINDER BLOCK BASE PLATE
-8-
1- REFIT THE CYLINDER BLOCK BASE PLATE (ALL TYPES)
Apply a bead(9 ) of Silicone Adhesive Sealantwith a diameter of 5 ± 2 mmto the cylinder block.
-9-
Refit:
the cylinder block base plate.
the cylinder block base plate bolts.
Tighten the cylinder block base plate bolts in the correct order.
- 10 -
Clean the excess Silicone Adhesive Sealanton the coupling and timing faces using a plastic
spatula.
2- REFIT THE CYLINDER BLOCK BASE PLATE BLANKING COVERS (IF FITTED)
Apply a bead(10 ) of Silicone adhesive sealantwith a diameter of 5 ± 2 mmto the
block base plate blanking covers.
- 11 -
newcylinder
Push the blanking covers into the holes(11 ) on the cylinder block base plate using a copper
hammer ( 3 mmfrom the lower edge of the holes).
Clean any excess Silicone adhesive sealantfrom the base plate of the cylinder block.
3. FINAL OPERATION
- 12 -
Fit a
newseal
on the oil pump strainer.
Lubricate the seal with engine oil.
Refit the " oil pump strainer-bolt " assembly.
Tighten the oil pump strainer bolts.
Refit:
the sumpLower cover: Removal - Refitting ,
the newcrankshaft seal on the gearbox sideCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting .
Refit:
the flywheelFlywheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the clutch plate and pressure platePressure plate - Disc: Removal - Refitting .
Note:
Do not remove the
Mot. 1431flywheel
Refit the timing cover(see 10A, Engine
locking tool.
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
- 13 -
.
Refit the engine - gearbox assembly.
Repair-10x03x01x03-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 14 -
CYLINDER BLOCK: CHECK
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
component support
Dial gauge
cylinder head rule
internal
micrometer
set of feeler gauges
1. PREPARATION OPERATION FOR CHECK
CAUTION
It is strictly forbidden to apply any pressure to the engine oil sump. Damage to the sump will irreparably damage the engine by:
blocking the strainer,
raising the oil level above maximum, with a risk of engine racing.
Note:
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before carrying out any repair(see 10A, Engine
the repair) .
and cylinder block assembly, Engine: Precautions for
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Position the engine on the
component support(see
Remove the cylinder block(see 10A, Engine
10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine support equipment: Use)
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block: Removal - Refitting)
.
.
Before any checks:
clean the cylinder block(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block: Cleaning) ,
Check that the cylinder block does not have any scratches, any trace of impact or abnormal wear on the cylinders, the gasket faces and the mating faces of the crankshaft bearing shell (if necessary, replace the
cylinder block).
2. CHECKING THE CYLINDER BLOCK
1- IDENTIFICATION OF THE CYLINDER BLOCK
-1-
(1) : cylinder block bearing diameter category:
identification by letter of the crankshaft bearing diameter (see correspondence table of the crankshaft bearing diameter categories),
the order of the marking letters goes from the bearing on the timing end to the bearing on the flywheel end.
(2 ) : cylinder diameter category.
(3 ) : marking only for factory use.
1)CRANKSHAFT BEARING DIAMETER CLASSES
-2-
Letter indicating the category (1) on the cylinder block
Cylinder block bearing diameter (mm)
A
63.9975 to & lt; 63.9985
B
63.9985 to & lt; 63.9995
C
63.9995 to & lt; 64.0005
E
64.0005 to & lt; 64.0015
H
64.0015 to & lt; 64.0025
J
64.0025 to & lt; 64.0035
K
64.0035 to & lt; 64.0045
L
64.0045 to & lt; 64.0055
M
64.0055 to & lt; 64.0065
P
64.0065 to & lt; 64.0075
S
64.0075 to & lt; 64.0085
T
64.0085 to & lt; 64.0095
U
64.0095 to & lt; 64.0105
Z
64.0105 to & lt; 64.0115
2- CHECKING THE FLATNESS OF THE GASKET SURFACES OF THE CYLINDER BLOCK
Check using a ruler(4) and a dial gauge - support assembly(5) or a cylinder head ruleand a set of feeler gaugesthe flatness of the gasket surfaces of the cylinder block:
Maximum deformation cylinder head side:
0.05 mm,
-3-
Maximum deformation base plate side:
0.05 mm.
3- CHECKING THE DIAMETER OF THE CRANKSHAFT BEARINGS
Using a
internal micrometer,
measure the crankshaft bearing diameter(X1 ) .
The diameter of the crankshaft bearings, which must be between 63.998 and 64.012 mm.
Compare the value measured with the diameter class marked on the cylinder block (see Class
of crankshaft bearing diameterstable).
4- CHECKING THE DIAMETER, OUT-OF-ROUNDNESS AND TAPER OF BARRELS
-4-
Using an Dial gauge, measure the internal diameter(D1) of the cylinder block barrels at intervals of 45 (4 diagonals) at 3 levels ((N1) , (N2) and (N3) ): at 17 mm, 99 mmand 151 mmdepth
from the cylinder head joint face and note these 12diameter values for each cylinder.
Check that these 48diameter measurements are all within the barrel diameter tolerance.
The diameter(D1) of the barrels should be between 85.00and 85.02 mm.
Check that the difference between the largest and smallest diameters at each depth level in each cylinder is within the out-of-roundness tolerance.
The maximum out-of-roundness permitted is 0.01 mm.
Check that the difference between the largest and smallest diameters in the same vertical plane of each diameter of each cylinder barrel is within the taper tolerance.
The maximum taper permitted is 0.01 mm.
3. CHECKING THE CYLINDER BLOCK BASE PLATE BOLT
-5-
Check using a ruler and a dial gauge - support assembly or a
cylinder head ruleand
a set
of feeler gaugesthe
flatness of the cylinder block base plate gasket surfaces.
Maximum deformation cylinder block side and sump side: 0.4 mm.
4. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the cylinder block(see 10A, Engine
Remove the engine from
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block: Removal - Refitting)
component support(see
10A, Engine
.
and cylinder block assembly, Engine support equipment: Use)
Refit the engine - gearbox assembly.
-6-
.
Repair-10x03x01x07-02x58-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
CYLINDER BLOCK: CLEANING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
component support
CAUTION
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face
will result in a risk of leaks.
WARNING
Wear goggles with side protectors for this operation.
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
CAUTION
Do not allow this product to drip onto the paintwork.
Clean the cylinder head carefully to avoid any foreign bodies entering the oil return and
supply pipes.
Failure to follow this advice could lead to the blocking of the various oil inlet galleries,
which would quickly result in engine damage.
1. CLEANING PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Separate the manual gearbox from the engineManual gearbox: Removal - Refitting
Place the engine on the
equipment: Use ) .
component support(see
Remove the cylinder block(see 10A, Engine
10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine support
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block: Removal - Refitting)
2. CLEANING THE ENGINE PERIPHERALS
Clean the gasket surfaces of the cylinder block with Super cleaning agent for joint facesVehicle: Parts
and consumables for the repair .
Remove the residue using a wooden spatula
Finish cleaning the parts using a grey abrasive pad, part number 77
Remove the cylinder block from the component support.
-2-
01 405 943.
.
-3-
Wash the cylinder block using a cleaning fountain or a heated cleaning bath.
3. FINAL OPERATION.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-4-
Repair-10x03x01x07-01x46-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
CYLINDER BLOCK: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Tightening torques
bolts of the accessories belt fixed roller
25 N.m
Special tooling required
Seal extractor tool
Mot. 587
Engine lifting ring.
Mot. 923
Flywheel locking tool.
Mot. 1431
Equipment required
workshop hoist
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Remove the timing chain(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
.
X43, M9R, 804 817 824 839 844 846(804 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (670 OR 678 OR 680 OR 690 OR
696 OR 698 OR 880 OR 896 OR 898) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815 OR 858 OR 859)
AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR 802 OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR
828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR 858)
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust gas pressure
sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Remove:
the damper valve,
the EGR pipe at the EGR cooler inlet,
depending on the version, the catalytic pre-converter or the catalytic converter at the turbocharger outletCatalytic
pre-converter: Removal - Refitting orCatalytic converter: Removal - Refitting ,
the turbocharger oil pipesTurbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the injector fuel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal
-1-
- Refitting ,
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting) ,
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) ,
the oil filter unitOil filter unit: Removal - Refitting .
Remove:
the clutch plate and pressure platePressure plate - Disc: Removal - Refitting ,
the flywheelFlywheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the flywheel locking toolFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) .
Remove:
the gearbox side crankshaft sealCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting ,
the sumpLower cover: Removal - Refitting ,
the cylinder block base plate(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block base plate:
Removal - Refitting) .
Remove:
the con rod - piston assemblies from each cylinder(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con
rod: Removal - Refitting) ,
the crankshaft(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Crankshaft: Removal - Refitting) .
2. CYLINDER BLOCK REMOVAL OPERATION
Operation only to be carried out when replacing or cleaning the cylinder block.
-2-
Remove the centring dowels(1 ) from the cylinder head using theSeal extractor tool(Mot. 587 ) (2 ) or a
slide hammer.
Remove:
the
the
the
the
crankshaft position sensorCrankshaft position sensor: Removal - Refitting ,
oil level sensorOil level sensor: Removal - Refitting ,
EGR cooler,
coolant pump inlet pipeCoolant pump inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the power assisted steering pumpPower-assisted
-3-
steering pump: Removal - Refitting
.
Remove:
the bolts(3) from the accessories belt fixed roller,
the accessories belt fixed roller.
Remove:
the alternatorAlternator: Removal - Refitting ,
the multifunction supportMultifunction support: Removal - Refitting .
-4-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the Engine lifting ring.(Mot. 923 ) on the cylinder block.
Remove the cylinder block from the component support using a
cylinder block assembly, Engine support equipment: Use) .
Clean the cylinder block(see 10A, Engine
workshop hoist(see
10A, Engine and
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block: Cleaning)
Refit the cylinder block on the component support using a
-5-
workshop hoist(see
10A, Engine
.
and cylinder
block assembly, Engine support equipment: Use)
.
2. CYLINDER BLOCK REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the multifunction supportMultifunction support: Removal - Refitting ,
the alternatorAlternator: Removal - Refitting .
Refit:
the accessories belt fixed roller,
the accessories belt fixed roller bolts.
-6-
Torque tighten in order the bolts of the accessories belt fixed roller25 N.m.
Refit the power assisted steering pumpPower-assisted
steering pump: Removal - Refitting
.
Refit:
the
the
the
the
the
crankshaft position sensorCrankshaft position sensor: Removal - Refitting ,
oil level sensorOil level sensor: Removal - Refitting ,
EGR cooler,
coolant pump inlet pipeCoolant pump inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
cylinder head centring dowels.
3. FINAL OPERATION
When replacing the cylinder block, always identify the crankshaft bearing shell thickness classes to
refit on each bearing to guarantee any journal clearances remain within the tolerances, before refitting
the crankshaft(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Crankshaft: Check ) .
Note:
Any clearances exceeding the tolerances of the crankshaft journals can cause engine
damage.
Refit the crankshaft(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Crankshaft: Removal - Refitting)
.
If replacing the cylinder block, always identify the piston height category to refit in each cylinder to
guarantee the piston protrusion in relation to the cylinder block remains within the tolerances, before
refitting the conrod - piston assemblies(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) .
Note:
A piston protrusion outside the tolerances in relation to the cylinder block can lead to:
-an engine malfunction (incorrect start, pollution, poor performance),
- engine damage (piston in contact with the cylinder head or valves).
-7-
Refit the con rod - piston assemblies onto each cylinder(see 10A, Engine
Piston - Con rod: Removal - Refitting) .
and cylinder block assembly,
If replacing the cylinder block, always check that the piston protrusion in relation to the cylinder block
remains within the tolerances after refitting the conrod - piston assemblies(see 10A, Engine and cylinder
block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) .
Note:
A piston protrusion outside the tolerances in relation to the cylinder block can lead to:
-an engine malfunction (incorrect start, pollution, poor performance),
- engine damage (piston in contact with the cylinder head or valves).
Refit:
the cylinder block base plate(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block base plate:
Removal - Refitting) ,
the sumpLower cover: Removal - Refitting ,
the newcrankshaft seal on the gearbox sideCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting .
Refit:
the flywheelFlywheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the clutch plate and pressure platePressure plate - Disc: Removal - Refitting .
Refit:
the oil filter unitOil filter unit: Removal - Refitting ,
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) ,
the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting) ,
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the newhigh pressure pipes between the injector rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and
injector: Removal - Refitting .
the injector fuel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the newhigh pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting ,
the newoil pipes of the turbochargerTurbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
depending on the version, the catalytic pre-converter or the catalytic converter at the turbocharger outletCatalytic
pre-converter: Removal - Refitting orCatalytic converter: Removal - Refitting ,
the damper valve.
-8-
X43, M9R, 804 817 824 839 844 846(804 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (670 OR 678 OR 680 OR 690 OR
696 OR 698 OR 880 OR 896 OR 898) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815 OR 858 OR 859)
AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR 802 OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR
828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR 858)
Refit the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
Refit the timing chain(see 10A, Engine
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Refit the engine - gearbox assembly.
Repair-10x03x01x07-01x37-1-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-9-
.
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
.
For fastenings with no specified tightening torque values, refer to the Table of Standard TorquesTightening torques: General information .
-1-
Marks
Designations
Informations
1
Cylinder head cover
2
Camshaft position sensor
3
Camshaft position sensor seal
4
Valve spring cup
Valve: Removal - Refitting
5
Valve stem collet
Valve: Removal - Refitting
6
Valve rocker
7
Valve spring
8
Valve stem seal
9
Valve rocker hydraulic tappet
10
Valve
11
Exhaust camshaft
12
High pressure pump
13
Vacuum pump
14
Vacuum pump seal
15
Camshaft bearing cap
16
Lifting eye support bolts
17
Lifting eye support
18
Heater plug
19
Gearbox side lifting eye
20
Gearbox side lifting eye bolts
21
Cylinder head gasket
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting)
(see Camshaft position sensor: Removal - Refitting)
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting)
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting)
Valve: Removal - Refitting
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Camshaft: Removal - Refitting)
(see 11A,Top and front of engine,
Camshaft: Removal - Refitting)
Vacuum pump: Removal - Refitting
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Camshaft: Removal - Refitting)
(see 11A,Top and front of engine,
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Repair-10x02-02x50-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
Lifting eyes: Removal - Refitting)
Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting)
Camshaft: Removal - Refitting)
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Precautions for the repair
No.
Description
1
Valve rocker
2
Valve stem collet
3
Valve rocker hydraulic tappet
4
Valve spring cup
5
Valve spring
6
Valve stem seal
7
Valve
8
Heater plug
9
Timing end lifting eye
10
Cylinder head gasket
11
Camshaft bearing cap
12
Inlet camshaft
13
Cylinder head cover
14
Camshaft position sensor
15
Camshaft position sensor seal
16
Gearbox side lifting eye
17
Exhaust camshaft
18
Vacuum pump
19
Cylinder head
20
Vacuum pump seal
21
Information
High pressure pump
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting)
Valve: Removal - Refitting
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting)
Valve: Removal - Refitting
Cylinder head: Stripping - Rebuilding
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting)
Camshaft: Removal - Refitting)
(see 11A,Top and front of engine,
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Camshaft: Removal - Refitting)
Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting)
Cylinder head: Stripping - Rebuilding
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Camshaft: Removal - Refitting)
(see 11A,Top and front of engine,
Vacuum pump: Removal - Refitting
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting)
Vacuum pump: Removal - Refitting
Repair-10x02-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
Camshaft: Removal - Refitting)
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
No.
Description
Information
1
Valve rocker
Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting
2
Valve stem collet
Valve: Removal - Refitting
3
Valve rocker hydraulic tappet
Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting
4
Valve spring cup
5
Valve spring
6
Valve stem seal
7
Valve
8
Heater plug
9
Timing end lifting eye
Cylinder head: Stripping - Rebuilding
10
Cylinder head gasket
Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting
11
Camshaft bearing cap
12
Inlet camshaft
13
Cylinder head cover
14
Camshaft position sensor
15
Camshaft position sensor seal
16
Gearbox side lifting eye
Cylinder head: Stripping - Rebuilding
17
Exhaust camshaft
Camshaft: Removal - Refitting
18
Vacuum pump
Vacuum pump: Removal - Refitting
19
Cylinder head
Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting
20
Vacuum pump seal
Vacuum pump: Removal - Refitting
21
High pressure pump
Valve: Removal - Refitting
Camshaft: Removal - Refitting
Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting
(see 13B, Diesel
Repair-10x02-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view )
DAMPER VALVE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exhaust
circuit assembly: Exploded view .
gas recirculation
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the intercooler air outlet pipe(see 12A, Fuel mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view) (see 12A,Fuel
mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view) ,
the dipstick.
-1-
Unclip the fuel return pipe(1 ) from the engine oil dipstick guide.
Remove the engine oil dipstick guide.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Disconnect the connector(2 ) from the damper valve.
Remove :
the damper valve strut,
the damper valve,
the damper valve seal.
Move aside the air inlet spacer.
Remove the air inlet spacer seal.
-3-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Using surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products), clean and degrease
the bearing faces between:
the damper valve and the air inlet spacer,
the air inlet spacer and the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-11x01x10x02-01x37-1-33-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
DASHBOARD AIR VENT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Unclip the dashboard air vent flaps(1 ) by (2 ) .
-1-
-2-
Unclip the dashboard air vent at(3 ) and (4 ) .
Remove the dashboard air vent.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-3-
Repair-50x08x02x03-01x37-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
DASHBOARD LOWER TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Unclip the dashboard lower trim by(1 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
Remove the dashboard lower trim.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x08x02x07-01x37-1-6-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
DASHBOARD: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) (80A, Battery).
Remove the radioRadio: Removal - Refitting (86A, Radio).
-1-
Partially remove the front side door seals.
-2-
Remove:
the
the
the
the
the
the
left-hand side panel by(1) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
windscreen pillar trimsWindscreen pillar trim: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim),
driver's front airbagDriver's frontal airbag: Removal - Refitting (88C, Airbags and pretensioners),
steering wheelSteering wheel: Removal - Refitting (36A, Steering assembly),
instrument panelInstrument panel: Removal - Refitting (83A, Instrument panel),
glovebox(see 57A, Interior equipment , Glovebox: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove the electrical accessories socket(88D, Driver's position).
-3-
Remove the passenger front airbagPassenger's frontal airbag: Removal - Refitting (88C, Airbags and
pretensioners).
Remove:
the steering column switch assemblySteering column switch assembly: Removal - Refitting (84A, Controls Signalling),
the inhibitor switchInhibitor switch: Removal - Refitting (88C, Airbags and pretensioners),
the dashboard lower trim(see 57A, Interior equipment , Dashboard lower trim: Removal - Refitting) (71A, Body
internal trim),
the centre console(see 57A, Interior equipment , Centre console: Removal - Refitting) ,
the centre front panel(see 57A, Interior equipment , Centre front panel: Removal - Refitting) ,
-4-
Remove the control board(2 ) .
Disconnect the connectors.
-5-
Remove:
the christmas tree clips(3) ,
the heating ducts(4) .
-6-
-7-
Remove the blanking covers(5 ) by (6 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Note:
Mark the position of the various wiring before removing the dashboard.
-8-
-9-
- 10 -
Remove the bolts.
Remove the dashboard (this operation requires two people).
REFITTING
- 11 -
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiring harness when refitting, observe the original routing.
CAUTION
To guarantee a good electrical connection, make sure that the wiring does not place
any stress on the connectors or the surrounding components.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Carry out a function test on all functions.
Repair-50x08x02x02-01x37-1-28-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 12 -
DIESEL INJECTION COMPUTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply the before repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select the " Diesel injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
-1-
Disconnect the thermoplunger unit connectors(1 ) .
-2-
Remove the bolts(2 ) from the thermoplunger unit support.
Move the heating element unitto one side.
-3-
Remove the nut(3 ) from the engine wiring channel.
Move aside the engine wiring channel.
Unclip the cooling pipe from the diesel injection computer mounting.
-4-
Unclip the offset positive terminal(4 ) from the diesel injection computer mounting.
-5-
Disconnect the pre-postheating unit connector(5 ) .
-6-
Remove the bolts(6 ) from the diesel injection computer mounting.
Move aside the mounting of the diesel injection computer.
-7-
Remove the tamperproof bolts(7 ) from the diesel injection computer mounting cover.
-8-
Remove:
the nut(8) of the diesel injection computer mounting cover,
the diesel injection computer mounting cover.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-9-
Disconnect the connectors(9 ) from the diesel injection computer.
Remove:
the diesel injection computer nuts(10) ,
the diesel injection computer.
- 10 -
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select the " Diesel injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-11x05x05-01x37-1-50-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
DIESEL INJECTOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Injector well cleaning kit
Mot. 1817
M9R/M9T injector extractor
Mot. 1966
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
IMPORTANT
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before carrying out any
repair:
Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
IMPORTANT
During this operation, be sure to:
refrain from smoking or bringing red hot objects close to the working area,
be careful of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
IMPORTANT
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
-1-
WARNING
Do not blast with compressed air once the fuel circuit is open, otherwise impurities
may enter the system. Only use cleaning cloths.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove the air outlet pipe from the air filter box(see 12A, Fuel
mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view)
Remove:
the injector rail protector(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the oil decanterEngine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view ,
the diesel injector fuel return rail(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors from the injector rail(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors from the diesel injectors(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVING THE HIGH PRESSURE PIPE OF INJECTOR 1
-2-
.
Remove the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors(see 13B, Diesel
assembly: Exploded view) .
injection, Injection
Insert the blanking plugs.
WARNING
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
-3-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Mark the injectors in relation to the cylinders using a
indelible
pencil.
Note:
Cylinder number 1 is located on the timing end.
Remove (see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) :
the injector clamps,
the injectors one by one,
the compression washers.
Note:
If it sticks, remove the injector using the toolM9R/M9T injector extractor(Mot. 1966 )
Injector extraction tool: Use .
Note:
If the compression washer is stuck at the bottom of the well, use the toolInjector well
cleaning kit (Mot. 1817 ) Injector well cleaning tool: Use (Technical Note 6040A, 13B, Diesel
injection).
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
1- CLEANING PARTS
-4-
WARNING
It is strictly forbidden to clean the injectors with:
a wire brush,
an emery cloth,
an ultrasonic cleaner.
Always clean the well of the removed injectorInjector
Diesel injection).
-5-
well cleaning tool: Use
(Technical Note 6040, 13B,
If reusing the removed injector:
clean the injector using a cloth soaked in injector cleaneror brake cleaner,
if necessary, leave the injector nozzle to soak in injector cleaner,
wipe the injector with a new wipe,
Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) andDiesel injection: Precautions
for the repair .
2. REFITTING OPERATION
WARNING
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
-6-
If an injector is replaced, note the injector IMA code and the corresponding cylinder number.
Note:
IMA codes are from X1 to XN.
After connecting the battery, program the injectors using the
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-7-
Diagnostic tool.
Prime the diesel circuit using the manual priming pump.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select the " Diesel injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " injectors " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-11x05x06-01x37-1-96-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
DISPLAY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
In the event of replacement, apply the Before repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Radio display " ,
go to repair mode,
display " Before/After repair procedure " in the selected computer,
select " Radio display " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Switch off the ignition.
-1-
Unclip (1 ) the interior light trim(2 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) by (3 ) .
Disconnect:
the interior lighting connector,
the connector of the hazard warning light and central door locking switch.
-2-
Remove the display mounting bolts(4 ) .
-3-
-4-
Partially remove the display mounting from the roof console by pressing the clips(5 ) .
-5-
Unclip the lower section of the display mounting from the upper section by(6 ) .
Disconnect the display connector.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-6-
Remove (7 ) the display from its mounting by pressing the clips(8 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-7-
2. FINAL OPERATION
Switch on the ignition.
In the event of a replacement, apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Radio display " ,
go to repair mode,
display " Before/After repair procedure " in the selected computer,
select " Radio display " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-30x04x06x20-01x37-1-15-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
DISTRIBUTION MOTOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 61A, Heating,
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the dashboard lower trimDashboard lower trim: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment),
the front air distribution duct(see 61A, Heating, Air distribution circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the distribution motor connector.
Remove the distribution motor(see 61A, Heating,
Exploded view ) .
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly:
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Climate control computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " front air distribution flap actuator " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
-1-
Repair-30x02x04x09-01x37-1-24-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
DISTRIBUTION UNIT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
Equipment required
refrigerant charging station
compressed air nozzle
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 61A, Heating,
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
Air conditioning: Precautions for the repair ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
To prevent moisture from entering the system, place plugs on the cold loop
components which are open to the air.
-1-
Note:
Use blanking plugs for the fuel circuits with part numbers 77 01 208 229or 77 01476 857to
plug any openings exposed to the open air. They must be clean. Do not use any
which have already been used to plug a fuel circuit.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
Consult the device's operating manual to avoid incorrect use.
Drain the refrigerant circuit using the
refrigerant charging stationRefrigerant circuit: Draining - Filling
.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove Passenger compartment cooling assembly: Exploded view :
the " condenser - expansion valve " connecting pipe from the expansion valve,
the " expansion valve - expansion valve outlet intermediate pipe " connecting pipe from the expansion valve.
Insert the blanking plugs.
Fit the toolPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) on the heater matrix hoses on the engine side.
Disconnect the heater matrix hoses on the engine side.
Remove:
the dashboardDashboard: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment),
the dashboard cross member(see Dashboard cross member: Removal - Refitting) (42A, Upper front structure).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the distribution unit(see 61A, Heating,
Exploded view ) .
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly:
-2-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
-3-
Clean the surface and seal of the pipe using engine cleanerVehicle: Parts and
(04B, Consumables - Products).
-4-
consumables for the repair
Use a
compressed air nozzleto
blow on the surface and the seal of the connecting pipe.
Lubricate the surface of the connecting pipe and the seal with air conditioning oilAir
and consumables for the repair .
Remove the blanking plugs.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-5-
conditioning: Parts
Fill and bleed the cooling circuitCooling system: Draining - Refilling (19A, Cooling).
Note:
A summary table gives the quantities of refrigerant in the system according to the
engine types Air conditioning: Parts and consumables for the repair .
Perform the following operations:
fill the refrigerant circuit using the refrigerant charging stationRefrigerant circuit: Draining - Filling ,
check for leaksRefrigerant circuit: Check .
Check that the air conditioning system is operating correctlyAir conditioning: Check .
Repair-30x02x01x02-01x37-1-40-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
DOOR MIRROR GLASS: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exterior
element assembly: Exploded view .
Note:
The lower and upper mirror glasses can be removed independently.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
1- LOWER MIRROR GLASS
-1-
front side opening
Unclip the door mirror casing using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- UPPER MIRROR GLASS
Unclip the door mirror upper glassExterior
front side opening element assembly: Exploded view
-2-
.
2- LOWER MIRROR GLASS
Unclip the door mirror lower glass by pressing the clips(1 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-3-
Repair-50x07x08x08-01x37-1-20-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
DOOR MIRROR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exterior
element assembly: Exploded view .
front side opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Unclip the door mirror coverFront side opening
view (72A, Side opening elements trim).
element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded
Unclip the door mirror connector.
Disconnect the door mirror connector.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the door mirrorExterior
front side opening element assembly: Exploded view
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x07x08x02-01x37-1-23-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
.
DOOR SEALING FILM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Front side opening
element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening elements trim).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove Front side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening
elements trim):
the front side door interior handle,
the front side door trim.
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Carefully remove the mastic bead from the door box section around the edges of the door sealing film
Front side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Body internal trim).
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Note:
Remove the adhesive residue from the door box section by applying wide masking
tape over the bonding area. Pull gently on the masking tape to remove any adhesive
residue.
Clean the door box section using a lint-free clothsoaked in heptane(see Vehicle: Parts
and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products).
-1-
CAUTION
To ensure the sealing film adheres correctly:
The door must be clean (free of dust, grease and anti-adhesive products), with no trace of
impurities and no condensation,
The area of the door box section where the film is to be applied must be painted completely,
There must be a minimum temperature of
15 Con
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Remove the paper protecting the door sealing film mastic bead.
Note:
Do not touch the mastic bead.
-2-
the surfaces which are to be bonded.
Pass the interior opening release cable of the front door(1 ) through the slit in the door sealing film.
Index the marks of the door sealing film(2 ) on the front door box section.
Position the door sealing film correctly around the outside edge without applying any pressure.
Firmly attach the door sealing film around its entire edge.
Carry out a sealing test (see
Technical Note 0653A).
2. FINAL OPERATION
-3-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-60x03x02x10-01x37-1-14-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
DRIVER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for the
repair ) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply the procedure for deactivating the safety systems(see 88C, Airbags
pretensioners: Precautions for the repair) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
and pretensioners, Airbag and
Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into one of the openings(1 ) .
-2-
-3-
Unclip the clip(2 ) by pushing the screwdriver on the area(3 ) , while pulling on the driver's frontal airbag.
Proceed in the same manner to unclip the other side of the airbag.
Unlock the connector(s) of the driver's frontal airbag.
Disconnect the connector(s).
-4-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Apply the procedure for activating the safety systems(see 88C, Airbags
pretensioners: Precautions for the repair) .
3. CHECKING AFTER REPAIR
Switch on the ignition.
Check that there are no faults on the instrument panel.
Repair-31x02x01x15-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
and pretensioners, Airbag and
DRIVESHAFT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
(see Illustration key: Description) .
-1-
Marks
Designations
Informations
1
Final drive oil filler cap seal
2
Rear final drive closure housing
3
Rear final drive
4
Universal joint nuts rear final drive side
5
Universal joint bolts rear final drive side
6
Needle bearings
7
Longitudinal driveshaft
8
Manual gearbox
9
Universal joint nuts gearbox side
10
Bracket
11
Universal joint yoke
12
Universal joint cross piece
13
Universal joint bolts gearbox side
14
Longitudinal driveshaft
15
Relay bearing
16
Relay bearing bolts
17
Universal joint yoke
18
Yoke nut
19
Universal joint cross piece
20
Circlip
21
Universal joint cross piece
22
Flector
23
Universal joint bolts gearbox side
24
Universal joint nuts gearbox side
25
Circlip
26
Needle bearings
27
Circlip
28
Needle bearings
29
Dust seal
30
Dust seal
AND (Propulsion) PROPULSION TRANSMISSION
(BVi 1945)
(see Gearbox assembly: Exploded view)
(BVi 1945)
(BVi 1945)
(BVi 1945)
(BVi 1945)
(BVi 1945)
-2-
31
Rear final drive drain plug
32
Rear final drive closure housing bolts
33
Rear final drive filler cap
Repair-13x01-02x50-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
DRIVESHAFT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
(see Illustration key: Description) .
-1-
Marks
Designations
Informations
1
Final drive oil filler cap seal
2
Rear final drive closure housing
3
Rear final drive
4
Universal joint nuts rear final drive side
5
Universal joint bolts rear final drive side
6
Needle bearings
7
Longitudinal driveshaft
8
Manual gearbox
9
Universal joint nuts gearbox side
10
Bracket
11
Universal joint yoke
12
Universal joint cross piece
13
Universal joint bolts gearbox side
14
Longitudinal driveshaft
15
Relay bearing
16
Relay bearing bolts
17
Universal joint yoke
18
Yoke nut
19
Universal joint cross piece
20
Circlip
21
Universal joint cross piece
22
Flector
23
Universal joint bolts gearbox side
24
Universal joint nuts gearbox side
25
Circlip
26
Needle bearings
27
Circlip
28
Needle bearings
29
Dust seal
30
Dust seal
AND (Propulsion) PROPULSION TRANSMISSION
(BVi 1945)
(see Gearbox assembly: Exploded view)
(BVi 1945)
(BVi 1945)
(BVi 1945)
(BVi 1945)
(BVi 1945)
-2-
31
Rear final drive drain plug
32
Rear final drive closure housing bolts
33
Rear final drive filler cap
Repair-13x01-02x50-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
DUCT BETWEEN TURBOCHARGERS : REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always replaced, etc.)Exhaust
compartment: Exploded view .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Open the bonnet.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the bolts of the duct between turbochargers,
the duct between turbochargers,
the seal of the duct between turbochargers.
REFITTING
-1-
assembly in engine
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Parts always to be replaced: seal of the duct between turbochargersExhaust
compartment: Exploded view
assembly in engine
.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Clean using surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair :
the flange of the duct between turbochargers,
the flange of the integrated turbo-manifold.
Check the good condition of the elastomer seal(1 ) (absence of cracks).
Coat using clean oil the elastomer seal(1 ) of the duct between turbochargers.
Refit Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the new seal of the duct between turbochargers,
the duct between turbochargers,
the bolts of the duct between turbochargers.
Torque tighten the bolts of the duct between turbochargersExhaust
-2-
assembly in engine compartment:
Exploded view
.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x09x01x14-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
ELECTRIC COOLANT PUMP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the electric coolant pump.
M9T, 870(870)
Remove the clips from the electric coolant pump.
Move aside the electric coolant pump.
-2-
Position tools Pipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) (2 ) on the electric coolant pump cooling pipes.
Separate the clips from the cooling pipes of the electric coolant pump using the toolRemote operation
pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) .
Disconnect the cooling pipes from the electric coolant pump.
-3-
Remove (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the electric coolant pump clips,
the electric coolant pump.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
REMOVAL
-4-
M9T, 670 672 676 678 680 686 690 692 694 696 698 870 872 876 880 882 890 892 896 898(670 OR 672 OR 676 OR 678
OR 680 OR 686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 870 OR 872 OR 876 OR 880 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892 OR 896
OR 898)
-5-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the electric coolant pump.
Position tools Pipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) (2 ) on the electric coolant pump cooling pipes.
-6-
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
-7-
Disconnect the connectors(3 ) from the electric coolant pumps.
Position tools Pipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) (4 ) on the electric coolant pumps cooling pipes.
M9T, 678 680 694 696 698(678 OR 680 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698)
Separate the clips(see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) on the cooling pipes of
the electric coolant pump using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) .
-8-
M9T, 870(870)
Separate the clips from the cooling pipes of the electric coolant pump using the toolRemote
operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) .
Disconnect the cooling pipes from the electric coolant pump.
M9T, 678 680 694 696 698(678 OR 680 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698)
Remove (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the electric coolant pump clips,
the electric coolant pump.
M9T, 870(870)
Remove:
the electric coolant pump clips,
the electric coolant pump.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
-9-
Repair-10x06x01x10-01x37-1-22-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
ELECTRIC COOLANT PUMP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
IMPORTANT
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
WARNING
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the electric coolant pump.
Remove the clips from the electric coolant pump(see 19A, Cooling,
view ) .
Move aside the electric coolant pump(see 19A, Cooling,
-2-
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view)
.
Position tools Pipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) (2 ) on the electric coolant pump cooling pipes.
Separate the clips(see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) on the cooling pipes of the
electric coolant pump using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) .
Disconnect the cooling pipes from the electric coolant pump.
Remove the electric coolant pump.
-3-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
REMOVAL
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the electric coolant pump.
-4-
Position tools Pipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) (2 ) on the electric coolant pump cooling pipes.
Separate the clips(see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) on the cooling pipes of
the electric coolant pump using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) .
Disconnect the cooling pipes from the electric coolant pump.
-5-
Remove (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the electric coolant pump clips,
the electric coolant pump.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
Repair-10x06x01x10-01x37-1-22-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES SOCKET: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
1- ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES SOCKET ON DASHBOARD
-1-
The electrical accessories socket(1 ) is located on the dashboard behind the instrument panel visor.
Remove the instrument panel visor(2 ) .
Open the cover of the electrical accessories socket.
2- REAR ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES SOCKET
-2-
The electrical accessories socket(3 ) is located on the upper access grille of the rear wing light.
Open the cover of the electrical accessories socket.
-3-
WITHOUT SMOKER ACCESSORIES(SANACF-No)
3 - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES SOCKET ON CENTRE CONSOLE
Note:
The electrical accessories socket on the centre console replaces the cigarette
lighter socket when there are no accessories for smokers in the vehicle.
Remove the electrical accessories socket(4 ) .
-4-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Removethe internal part of the electrical accessories socket(5 ) using a flat-blade screwdriver.
Disconnect the electrical accessories socket connector.
-5-
Remove the plastic support of the electrical accessories socket(6 ) using the toolSet of trim
removal levers. (Car. 1363 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-6-
Repair-30x04x11x01-01x37-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL WINCH: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Fit the tool(1 ) in the winder of the emergency spare wheel winch.
Turn the tool anticlockwise to lower the emergency spare wheel.
Remove the emergency spare wheel by tilting the stop of the emergency spare wheel winch(2 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
-2-
Remove the bolts(3 ) of the winder of the emergency spare wheel winch.
-3-
Remove:
the bolts(4) of the emergency spare wheel winch,
the emergency spare wheel winch.
REFITTING
CAUTION
Do not use a pneumatic tool
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-4-
Torque tighten:
the bolts of the emergency spare wheel winch21
N.m,
the bolts of the winder of the emergency spare wheel winch21
Repair-13x05x01x02-01x37-1-5-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
N.m.
ENGINE - GEARBOX ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly
Mot. 1390
Adapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.
Mot. 1709
Equipment required
refrigerant charging station
safety strap(s)
workshop hoist
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid any risk of injury, wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
CAUTION
To avoid any corrosion or damage, protect the areas on which fuel is likely to run.
-1-
CAUTION
Keep the pipe unions away from contaminated areas.
CAUTION
To prevent moisture from entering the system, place plugs on the cold loop
components which are open to the air.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle in the two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Open the bonnet.
Drain the cooling systemCooling system: Draining - Refilling .
Remove:
the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting ,
the engine undertray.
Strap the vehicle on the two-post lift.
Remove:
the
the
the
the
the
the
the
the
turbocharger air inlet pipe,
particle filterExhaust assembly under body: Exploded view ,
front left-hand wheel arch linerFront wheel arch liner: Removal - Refitting ,
intercooler air inlet pipe,
intercooler air outlet pipe,
air flowmeter,
radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting ,
longitudinal driveshaftsDriveshaft assembly: Exploded view ,
Extract Steering assembly: Exploded view :
the left-hand track rod end,
the right-hand track rod end.
-2-
Disconnect:
the power-assisted steering pump power connector(1) ,
the power-assisted steering pump signal connector(2) .
Remove Power-assisted steering assembly: Exploded view :
the power-assisted steering high-pressure pipe bolt,
the power-assisted steering pump assembly bolts.
Strap the gearbox on the body.
Remove the upper nuts of the anti-roll bar tie-rodsFront
Move aside the anti-roll bar tie-rodsFront
axle assembly: Exploded view
axle assembly: Exploded view
-3-
.
.
Tilt the anti-roll barFront
axle assembly: Exploded view
.
Remove Front axle assembly: Exploded view :
the nuts from the ball joints of the front driveshaft lower arm,
the ball joints of the front driveshaft lower arm using a ball joint extractor.
Fit a component jack under the subframe.
Strap the subframe to the component jack.
Remove:
the gearbox support boltEngine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded view ,
the subframe boltsFront axle assembly: Exploded view ,
the " subframe and power assisted steering pump " assemblyFront axle assembly: Exploded view .
Disconnect Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the heater matrix cooling pipe,
the cooling radiator inlet pipe,
the cooling radiator outlet pipe,
the additional cooling radiator outlet pipe,
the expansion bottle pipe,
the exhaust gas cooler outlet pipe.
Unclip Manual gearbox control cable: Removal - Refitting :
the gearbox control cables on the gearbox,
the control cables on the sleeve stops.
Move aside the gearbox control cables.
Remove the clutch slave cylinder mounting boltsGearbox
Move aside the clutch slave cylinder mountingGearbox
Move aside the engine oil filler neck pipe clip .
disconnect the engine oil filler neck pipe .
-4-
assembly: Exploded view
assembly: Exploded view
.
.
Remove the fuel pipe protector(3 ) .
-5-
Disconnect the fuel supply pipe(4 ) from the fuel filter.
Unclip the fuel supply pipe.
-6-
Disconnect the fuel return pipe from the fuel return pipe union(5 ) .
Unclip the fuel return pipe.
disconnect:
the vacuum hose from the vaccum tank,
the vaccum hose from the vaccum pump.
-7-
Remove the bolt(6 ) from the expansion bottle.
Move aside the expansion bottle.
-8-
Remove:
the bolts(7) from the Protection and Switching Unit cover,
the Protection and Switching Unit cover.
-9-
Disconnect the connectors(8 ) from the Protection and Switching Unit.
- 10 -
Disconnect the pre-postheating unit connector(9 ) .
- 11 -
Disconnect the thermoplunger unit connectors(10 ) .
- 12 -
Remove:
the bolts(11) of the thermoplunger unit mounting,
the thermoplunger unit mounting.
- 13 -
Remove the engine wiring flap(12 ) .
- 14 -
Unclip the fuse holder partition(13 ) from the Protection and Switching Unit.
- 15 -
Unclip the relay holder partition(14 ) from the Protection and Switching Unit.
- 16 -
Remove the nut(15 ) of the supply cables.
Move aside the supply cables.
Disconnect the connector(16 ) of the supply cables.
- 17 -
Disconnect the injection computer connectors(17 ) .
- 18 -
Disconnect the connector(18 ) of the electric coolant pump.
- 19 -
Disconnect the connector(19 ) of the additional electric coolant pump.
- 20 -
Unclip the engine wiring from the injection computer support(20 ) .
- 21 -
Remove the engine wiring nut(21 ) on the hydraulic brake unit support.
Move aside the engine wiring.
Remove the engine cooling fan propeller(see 10A, Engine
assembly: Exploded view) .
- 22 -
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block
Remove the earth wiring nut(22 ) from the body.
- 23 -
Remove:
the battery tray bolts(24) ,
the battery tray.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
- 24 -
Fit the toolSupport for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly(Mot. 1390 ) equipped with
the toolAdapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.(Mot. 1709 ) under the engine.
Remove the safety strap(s)from the manual gearbox.
- 25 -
Remove:
the engine mounting bolts(25) ,
the " engine and gearbox " assembly.
Strap the " engine and gearbox " assembly to the toolSupport for removal - refitting of engine gearbox assembly(Mot. 1390 ) using a safety strap(s).
- 26 -
1- IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
Use a workshop hoistEngine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded view to remove:
the bolt of the front left-hand rubber pad from the engine mounting,
the bolt of the front righ-hand rubber pad from the engine mounting,
the engine mounting,
the front righ-hand rubber pad,
the front left-hand rubber pad.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use grey abrasive padsVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair to degrease:
the gasket face of the connecting hose,
the gasket face of the exhaust gas outlet duct.
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair to clean:
the gasket face of the connecting hose,
the gasket face of the exhaust gas outlet duct.
1- IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
Refit Engine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded view :
- 27 -
the front left-hand rubber pad,
the front right-hand rubber pad,
the engine mounting,
the bolt of the front righ-hand rubber pad on the engine mounting,
the bolt of the front left-hand rubber pad on the engine mounting.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the engine mounting boltsEngine-gearbox
unit support assembly: Exploded view
Fill and bleed the cooling circuitCooling system: Draining - Refilling .
Repair-10x01x01-01x37-2-232-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 28 -
.
ENGINE - GEARBOX ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Ball joint extractor.
Tav. 476
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly
Mot. 1390
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
Adapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.
Mot. 1709
Equipment required
refrigerant charging station
safety strap(s)
workshop hoist
oil recovery tray
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
-1-
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
CAUTION
To avoid any corrosion or damage, protect the areas on which fuel is likely to run.
CAUTION
Keep the pipe unions away from contaminated areas.
CAUTION
To prevent moisture from entering the system, place plugs on the cold loop
components which are open to the air.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery),
the engine undertray.
Drain the cooling systemCooling system: Draining - Refilling .
Remove:
the front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting (35A, Wheels and tyres),
the longitudinal driveshaftPropshaft: Removal - Refitting (29A, Driveshafts),
the exhaust silencer.
M9T, 690 696 698 896 898(690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 896 OR 898)
Remove the particle filterExhaust
assembly under body: Exploded view
-2-
.
M9T, 686 692 694 892(686 OR 692 OR 694 OR 892)
Remove the catalytic converterExhaust
assembly under body: Exploded view
.
Remove the subframeFront axle subframe: Removal - Refitting (31A, Front axle components).
Fit an
oil recovery trayunder
the power-assisted steering pipes of the steering box.
Fit an Pipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) (1 ) on the low pressure pipe of the power-assisted steering circuit.
Remove the bolt of the power-assisted steering pipe bracket on the steering box.Power-assisted steering
-3-
assembly: Exploded view
(36B, Power-assisted steering).
Disconnect the power-assisted steering pipes.
Fit blanking plugs.
Remove the universal joint boltPower-assisted
steering).
steering assembly: Exploded view
Remove the nuts of the track rod endsSteering
assembly: Exploded view
(36B, Power-assisted steering).
Extract the track rod ends using the toolBall joint extractor.(Tav. 476 ) .
-4-
(36B, Power-assisted
Remove:
the safety strap(s)from the steering box,
the steering box.
Loosen the clip of the air filter unit air outlet pipe from the air filter unit.
Disconnect the air filter unit air outlet pipe from the air filter unit.
Disconnect the air flowmeter connector(2 ) .
Unclip the air flowmeter wiring at(3 ) .
-5-
Remove:
the
the
the
the
the
radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment),
headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting (80B, Headlights),
front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection),
intercooler air outlet pipe,
intercooler air outlet pipe seal.
Pull the clip(4 ) of the intercooler air inlet pipe.
Disconnect the intercooler air inlet pipe.
Remove the intercooler air inlet pipe seal.
-6-
Fit a toolPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) (5 ) on the low pressure pipe of the power-assisted steering circuit.
Separate the low pressure pipe clip of the power-assisted steering circuit on the power-assisted
steering pump Power-assisted steering assembly: Exploded view (36B, Power-assisted steering).
Disconnect the low pressure pipe from the power-assisted steering circuit.
-7-
Unclip the coolant pipes from the heater matrix(6 ) .
Separate the clip of the cooling radiator inlet pipe on the cooling radiator using aRemote operation
pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view .
Disconnect the cooling radiator inlet pipe from the cooling radiator.
-8-
Unclip the cooling radiator inlet pipe from the front end panel at(7 ) .
Separate the clip of the expansion bottle lower coolant pipe on the expansion bottle using aRemote
operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view .
Disconnect the expansion bottle lower coolant pipe from the expansion bottle.
Separate the clip of the cooling radiator outlet pipe on the cooling radiator using aRemote operation
pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view .
Disconnect the cooling radiator outlet pipe from the cooling radiator.
-9-
Separate the clip of the additional cooling radiator outlet pipe on the additional cooling radiator using a
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view .
Disconnect the additional cooling radiator outlet pipe from the additional cooling radiator.
Separate the clip of the exhaust gas cooler inlet pipe on the exhaust gas cooler inlet electric coolant
pump using aRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view .
Disconnect the exhaust gas cooler inlet pipe from the exhaust gas cooler inlet electric coolant pump.
Remove the bolt of power-assisted steering return pipe bracket from the front left-hand rubber pad
Power-assisted steering assembly: Exploded view (36B, Power-assisted steering).
- 10 -
Remove the earth strap bolt(8 ) .
Separate the clip of the oil filler neck pipe on the oil filler neck using aRemote operation pliers for
hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) (see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view)
(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
Disconnect the clip of the oil filler neck pipe from the oil filler neck.
Remove the fuel pipe protector(10 ) .
- 11 -
Disconnect the fuel supply pipe(11 ) from the fuel filter.
Unclip the fuel supply pipe.
- 12 -
Disconnect the fuel return pipe from the fuel return pipe union(12 ) .
Unclip the fuel return pipe.
- 13 -
Disconnect the brake servo non-return valve(13 ) from the vacuum pump.
- 14 -
Disconnect:
the vacuum hose from the vacuum tank(14) ,
the connector(15) of the turbocharging pressure regulation solenoid valve.
Unclip the turbocharging pressure regulation solenoid valve wiring from the vacuum tank support(16 ) .
- 15 -
Disconnect the vacuum hose from the turbocharger(17 ) .
- 16 -
- 17 -
Unclip the anchoring ball joints(18 ) using an open-jawed spanner.
Unclip the sheath stops from the gear control cables(19) :
by pressing the tab(20) ,
by pulling the gear control cables(21) .
- 18 -
Move aside the clutch slave cylinder supportGearbox
gearbox).
Remove the bolt(22 ) from the expansion bottle.
Remove the expansion bottle.
- 19 -
assembly: Exploded view
(21A, Manual
Remove:
the bolts(23) from the Protection and Switching Unit cover,
the Protection and Switching Unit cover.
- 20 -
Disconnect the connectors(24 ) from the Protection and Switching Unit.
- 21 -
Disconnect the pre-postheating unit connector(25 ) .
- 22 -
Disconnect the thermoplunger unit connectors(26 ) .
- 23 -
Remove:
the bolt(27) of the thermoplunger unit mounting,
the thermoplunger unit mounting.
- 24 -
Remove the engine wiring flap(28 ) .
- 25 -
Unclip the fuse holder partition(29 ) from the Protection and Switching Unit.
- 26 -
Unclip the relay holder partition(30 ) from the Protection and Switching Unit.
- 27 -
Remove the nut(31 ) of the supply cables.
Move aside the supply cables.
Disconnect the connector(32 ) of the supply cables.
- 28 -
Disconnect the injection computer connectors(33 ) .
- 29 -
Disconnect the connector(34 ) of the exhaust gas cooler inlet electric coolant pump.
- 30 -
Unclip the offset positive terminal(36 ) .
- 31 -
Unclip the engine wiring from the injection computer support(37 ) .
- 32 -
Remove the engine wiring nut(38 ) on the hydraulic brake unit support.
Move aside the engine wiring.
Remove the engine cooling fan propeller(see 10A, Engine
assembly: Exploded view) .
- 33 -
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block
Remove the earth wiring nut(41 ) from the body.
Move the earth wiring to one side.
- 34 -
Remove:
the battery tray bolts(43) ,
the battery tray.
- 35 -
Disconnect the particle filter pressure sensor connector(44 ) .
Unclip the particle filter pressure sensor wiring.
IF FITTED
- 36 -
Disconnect the connector(45 ) of the speed sensor wiring.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
- 37 -
Fit the toolSupport for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly(Mot. 1390 ) equipped with
the toolAdapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.(Mot. 1709 ) under the engine.
Remove the safety strap(s)from the manual gearbox.
- 38 -
Remove:
the engine mounting bolts(46) ,
the " engine and gearbox " assembly.
Strap the " engine - gearbox " assembly to the toolSupport for removal - refitting of engine gearbox assembly(Mot. 1390 ) using a safety strap(s).
- 39 -
1- IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
Use a workshop hoistEngine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded view to remove:
the bolt of the front left-hand rubber pad from the engine mounting,
the bolt of the front right-hand rubber pad from the engine mounting,
the engine mounting,
the front right-hand rubber pad,
the front left-hand rubber pad.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use grey abrasive padsVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean:
the gasket face of the connecting hose,
the gasket face of the exhaust gas outlet duct.
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to degrease:
the gasket face of the connecting hose,
the gasket face of the exhaust gas outlet duct.
1- IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
Refit Engine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded view :
- 40 -
the front left-hand rubber pad,
the front right-hand rubber pad,
the engine mounting,
the bolt of the front right-hand rubber pad on the engine mounting,
the bolt of the front left-hand rubber pad on the engine mounting.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the engine mounting bolts62 N.m.
Refill:
the cooling circuitCooling system: Draining - Refilling ,
and bleed the power-assisted steering circuitPower-assisted steering circuit: Bleeding (36A, Steering
assembly).
Repair-10x01x01-01x37-2-174-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 41 -
ENGINE ACCESSORIES ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Special tooling required
Crankshaft pulley locking tool.
Mot. 1770
Crankshaft pulley locking tool
Mot. 1878
-1-
M9T, 700(700)
Illustration key: Description
.
For fastenings with no specified tightening torque values, refer to the Table of Standard TorquesTightening torques: General information .
Marks
Designations
Informations
1
Engine cooling fan assembly
Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view
2
Accessories belt
3
Water pump
4
Accessories belt tensioning roller
5
Accessories belt fixed roller protector
6
Accessories fixed roller
7
Multifunction support
Multifunction support: Removal - Refitting
8
Alternator
Alternator: Removal - Refitting
9
Air conditioning compressor
Compressor: Removal - Refitting
10
Air conditioning compressor mounting
(see 11A,
Top and front of engine, Accessories belt: Removal - Refitting)
Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view
-2-
11
Accessories dummy pulley
12
Crankshaft accessories pulley
(see 11A,
Top and front of engine, Crankshaft accessories pulley: Removal - Refitting)
Crankshaft pulley locking tool.(Mot. 1770 )
13
Crankshaft accessories pulley spacer
14
Crankshaft accessories pulley
(see 11A,
Top and front of engine, Crankshaft accessories pulley: Removal - Refitting)
Crankshaft pulley locking tool(Mot. 1878 )
15
Crankshaft accessories pulley bolt
M9T, 702(702)
Illustration key: Description
.
For fastenings with no specified tightening torque values, refer to the Table of Standard TorquesTightening torques: General information .
Marks
Designations
Informations
1
Multifunction support
Multifunction support: Removal - Refitting
2
Alternator
Alternator: Removal - Refitting
3
Air conditioning compressor
Compressor: Removal - Refitting
4
Accessories dummy pulley
-3-
5
Crankshaft accessories pulley spacer
6
Crankshaft accessories pulley
(see 11A,
Top and front of engine, Crankshaft accessories pulley: Removal - Refitting)
Crankshaft pulley locking tool(Mot. 1878 )
7
Crankshaft accessories pulley bolt
8
Crankshaft accessories pulley
(see 11A,
Top and front of engine, Crankshaft accessories pulley: Removal - Refitting)
Crankshaft pulley locking tool.(Mot. 1770 )
9
Accessories belt
10
Water pump
11
Accessories fixed roller
12
Accessories belt fixed roller protector
13
(see 11A,
Accessories belt tensioning roller
Top and front of engine, Accessories belt: Removal - Refitting)
Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view
Repair-10x10x01x01-02x50-1-8-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY SENSORS: LIST AND LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
1. SENSORS ON THE FRONT FACE OF THE ENGINE
-1-
Precautions for the repair
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892 OR 896 OR 898)
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Fuel temperature sensor
2
Rail pressure sensor
The rail pressure sensor is not sold separately by the Parts Department
3
Air inlet pressure sensor
Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view
4
Oil pressure sensor
5
Camshaft position sensor
Cylinder head assembly: Exploded view
6
Coolant temperature sensor
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view
Sensor cannot be separated from the fuel supply pipeFuel
(see 10A,
supply assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view)
M9T, 700(700)
-2-
Illustration key: Description
Mark
Description
1
Rail pressure sensor
2
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
3
Turbocharger control solenoid valve
4
Oil pressure sensor
5
Air inlet temperature sensor
6
Air inlet pressure sensor
7
Speed sensor
8
Camshaft position sensor
9
Turbocharger control solenoid valve
10
Fuel supply pressure sensor
Key.
Information
Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view
(see Speed sensor: Removal - Refitting)
2. SENSORS ON THE REAR FACE OF THE ENGINE
-3-
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892 OR 896 OR 898)
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Speed sensor
2
Reverse gear switch
3
Crankshaft position sensor
4
Oil level sensor
5
Oxygen sensor
Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view
6
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view
(see 10A,
(see 10A,
M9T, 700(700)
-4-
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view)
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view)
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
2
Exhaust gas pressure sensor, if equipped
3
Oxygen sensor
4
Oil level sensor
5
Variable air inlet solenoid valve
6
Crankshaft position sensor
7
Variable air inlet solenoid valve
8
Coolant temperature sensor
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view
9
Reverse gear switch
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view
Oxygen sensor: Removal - Refitting
(see 10A,
Repair-10x11-02x51-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view)
ENGINE COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Pin wrench..
Mot. 1729
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
-1-
CAUTION
When carrying out a repair that requires a complete change, it is essential to flush the
circuit with clean water, blast compressed air through the circuit to drive out the
water, fill and bleed the circuit and then measure the effective protection.
The criteria to be met are:
protection down to
protection down to
-25 C ± 2for
-40 C ± 2for
cold and temperate countries,
" extreme cold " countries.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) (80A, Battery).
Remove the engine undertray.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Remove the lower section of the air deflector(2 ) by pressing the tab(3 ) .
-3-
Lock the coolant pump pulley using the toolPin wrench..(Mot. 1729 ) (4 ) .
Loosen the nut(5 ) of the engine cooling fan propeller clockwise.
Remove the engine cooling fan propeller(see Cylinder
block assembly: Exploded view) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-4-
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the radiator grille(see Radiator grille: Removal - Refitting) (56A, Exterior equipment),
the headlights(see Headlight: Removal - Refitting) (80B, Headlights),
the front bumper(see Front bumper: Removal - Refitting) (55A, Exterior protection),
the engine cooling fan propeller(see Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) ,
the intercoolerAND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-5-
Unclip the cooling pipe(4 ) from the engine cooling fan assembly.
-6-
Unclip the power-assisted steering pipe from the engine cooling fan assembly(5 ) .
-7-
Unclip the engine cooling fan assembly(6 ) from the cooling radiator by moving aside the tab(7 ) .
Remove the engine cooling fan assembly.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fill and bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
-8-
.
Repair-10x06x05x05-01x37-1-80-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-9-
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM: CHECK
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Instrument for testing the cooling circuit and the expansion bottle valve. Contains caps 554-01, 554-04, 554-06
Ms. 554-07
Fault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.
Mot. 1700
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) .
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
Note:
There are two
the
the
valve.
procedures for checking the cooling system:
procedure using theFault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.(Mot. 1700 ) ,
procedure using theInstrument for testing the cooling circuit and the expansion bottle
Contains caps 554-01, 554-04, 554-06(Ms. 554-07) .
EXPANSION BOTTLE CAP VALVE RATING:
-1-
Expansion bottle cap with ...
Valve rating
... a brown circle
1.2 bar
... a yellow marking
1.4 bar
... a white marking
1.6 bar
... a grey marking
1.8 bar
1. CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM USING THE TOOL (MOT. 1700)
CAUTION
If the coolant is leaking from the expansion bottle cap, replace the valve.
1- CHECKING THE EXPANSION BOTTLE CAP VALVE
-2-
Use the cooling system filling and diagnostic toolFault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.
(Mot. 1700 ) . Consult the user's manual for this tool(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system filling and diagnostic tool:
Use ) (Technical Note 3857A, 19A, Cooling).
2- CHECKING THE SEALING OF THE COOLING CIRCUIT
Use the cooling system filling and diagnostic toolFault finding and filling - bleeding the cooling circuit.
(Mot. 1700 ) . Consult the user's manual for this tool(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system filling and diagnostic tool:
Use ) (Technical Note 3857A, 19A, Cooling).
-3-
2. CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM USING THE TOOL (MS. 554-07)
CAUTION
If the coolant is leaking from the expansion bottle cap, replace the valve.
1- CHECKING THE EXPANSION BOTTLE CAP VALVE
Fit onto the testerInstrument for testing the cooling circuit and the expansion bottle valve. Contains
caps 554-01, 554-04, 554-06(Ms. 554-07) , the adapter (Ms. 554-06).
-4-
Fit the expansion bottle cap to the adapter
(Ms. 554-06).
Note:
The pressure should not drop; if it does, look for the leak.
Pump with theInstrument for testing the cooling circuit and the expansion bottle valve. Contains caps
554-01, 554-04, 554-06(Ms. 554-07) , the pressure should stabilise at the expansion bottle cap valve
rating with a test tolerance of ± 0.1 bar.
2- CHECKING THE SEALING OF THE COOLING CIRCUIT
Replace the expansion bottle cap with the adapter
(Ms. 554-01).
Connect on the adapter (Ms. 554-01)the toolInstrument for testing the cooling circuit and the expansion
bottle valve. Contains caps 554-01, 554-04, 554-06(Ms. 554-07) .
Pump with theInstrument for testing the cooling circuit and the expansion bottle valve. Contains caps
554-01, 554-04, 554-06(Ms. 554-07) to put the cooling circuit under pressure.
Stop pumping at 0.1 barbelow the valve rating for the expansion bottle cap valve.
Note:
The pressure should not drop; if it does, look for the leak.
Gradually unscrew the union of theInstrument for testing the cooling circuit and the expansion bottle
valve. Contains caps 554-01, 554-04, 554-06(Ms. 554-07) to decompress the cooling system then remove
the adapter (Ms. 554-01)and refit the expansion bottle cap.
Repair-10x06x01-01x58-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
ENGINE: NEW REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
1. NEW ENGINE REPLACEMENT
1- PARTS TO BE CHECKED
1)CHECKING THE HEATER PLUGS ON THE OLD ENGINE.
CAUTION
Failure to observe the following procedure can lead to the destruction of the heater
plugs.
Note:
The Parts Department only supplies engines equipped with heater plugs that have a
WHITE or YELLOW ring.
-1-
Operations to perform:
Check the colour of the ring(1) on the heater plugs of the old engine,
-If the ring is BLACK, when refitting the new engine, and before connecting the heater plug connectors:
Reprogram the injection computer ( see MR DIAG, Section 13B, Fault Finding or Replacement of components, Replacing or
Reprogramming the computer), Reconfigure the type of heater plugs to " rapid " type ( see MR DIAG, Section 13B, Fault Finding
or Replacement of components, Replacement of heater plugs).
2- PREPARING THE OLD ENGINE TO BE RETURNED TO THE ENGINE RENOVATION PLANT
Clean the engine.
-2-
Drain the oil and coolant from the used engine.
Secure the old engine to the stand and under the same conditions as for new engine replacement:
fit the plastic plug welds and covers,
fit the cardboard cover over the whole assembly.
3- PARTS TO LEAVE ON THE OLD ENGINE OR TO INCLUDE IN THE RETURN BOX:
Parts to leave on the old engine or to include in the return box:
the dipstick,
the oil filter,
the oil filter unit,
the coolant - oil heat exchanger,
the cylinder head,
the coolant pump,
the vacuum pump,
the high pressure pump,
the high-pressure rail,
the injectors,
the heater plugs,
the crankshaft accessories pulley,
the lifting rings,
the cylinder head suspended mounting.
4- PARTS TO BE REMOVED FROM THE OLD ENGINE AND FITTED ON THE NEW ENGINE
Remove the following parts from the old engine:
all the coolant circuit pipes,
the coolant pump inlet pipe,
the cylinder head water chamber,
the inlet distributor,
the exhaust manifold,
the turbocharger,
the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve,
the damper valve,
the exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe heat shield at the exhaust manifold outlet,
the exhaust gas cooler,
the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve rigid pipe downstream of the intercooler,
the catalytic converter,
the multifunction support,
the oil pressure sensor,
the oil level sensor,
the camshaft position sensor,
the crankshaft position sensor,
the fuel temperature sensor,
the coolant temperature sensor,
the intercooler control solenoid valve.
-the accessories (depending on the version):
the alternator, the air conditioning compressor , the power-assisted steering pump (if fitted), the dummy pulley.
-3-
Do not forget to remove the exhaust gas temperature sensor from the old engine.
X43, M9R, 804 811 817 824 839 844 846(804 OR 811 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (670 OR 678 OR 680
OR 690 OR 696 OR 698) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724)
AND (800 OR 802 OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854
OR 857 OR 858)
Do not forget to remove the exhaust gas pressure sensor from the old engine.
Do not forget to remove the " air inlet spacer - inlet air pressure sensor " assembly from the old engine.
Parts to remember to remove from the old engine (cont.):
the clutch,
the flywheel.
5- PARTS ALWAYS TO BE REPLACED
Parts always to be replaced:
the catalytic converter half-clamps,
the catalytic converter mounting half-clamps,
the turbocharger strut.
the turbocharger strut bolt,
the turbocharger studs,
the turbocharger nuts,
the inlet distributor studs,
the exhaust manifold studs,
the exhaust manifold nuts,
the accessories belt,
the accessories belt tensioning roller,
the accessories belt fixed roller,
the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve seal,
the damper valve seal,
the dipstick guide tube seal,
the water chamber seal,
the turbocharger seal,
the catalytic converter seal,
the inlet distributor seal,
the exhaust manifold gasket,
the crankshaft position sensor seal,
the camshaft position sensor seal,
the coolant temperature sensor seal.
-4-
Always replace the turbocharger oil " return pipe - supply pipe " assembly.
Always replace the EGR solenoid valve rigid pipe at the exhaust manifold outlet.
Refit the parts removed from the old engine on the new engine.
Repair-10x01-01x91-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
ENGINE OIL CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
-1-
M9T, 700(700)
Illustration key: Description
.
For fastenings with no specified tightening torque values, refer to the Table of Standard TorquesTightening torques: General information .
Marks
Designations
Informations
1
Cylinder block
Cylinder block: Removal - Refitting
2
Engine oil filler cap
3
Oil filler neck
4
Oil filler neck pipe
5
Engine oil dipstick
6
Engine oil dipstick guide
7
Engine oil dipstick guide seal
8
Oil filter cover
9
Oil filter
10
Oil filter cover seal
(see 10A,
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
(see 10A,
-2-
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
11
Oil filter unit
12
Oil level sensor
13
Oil filter unit seal
14
Oil pump strainer
15
Oil pump strainer seal
16
Drain plug seal
17
Drain plug
18
Lower cover
19
Oil pump
20
Oil splash plate
21
Cylinder head
22
Oil decanter seal
23
Oil decanter
24
(see 10A,
Oil level sensor
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Oil filter unit: Removal - Refitting)
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Oil level sensor: Removal - Refitting)
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Oil filter unit: Removal - Refitting)
(see 10A,
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Lower cover: Removal - Refitting)
(see Oil pump: Removal - Refitting)
Oil decanter: Removal - Refitting
(see 10A,
M9T, 702(702)
-3-
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Oil level sensor: Removal - Refitting)
Illustration key: Description
.
For fastenings with no specified tightening torque values, refer to the Table of Standard TorquesTightening torques: General information .
Marks
Designations
Informations
1
Cylinder block
Cylinder block: Removal - Refitting
2
Engine oil dipstick guide
3
Engine oil filler cap
4
Oil filler neck
5
Oil filler neck pipe
6
Engine oil dipstick guide seal
7
Engine oil dipstick
8
Oil filter cover seal
9
Oil filter
10
Oil filter cover
11
Lower cover
12
Drain plug
13
Drain plug seal
14
Oil pressure sensor
15
Oil filter unit seal
16
Oil pump strainer
17
Oil pump strainer seal
18
Oil pump
19
Oil splash plate
20
Oil level sensor
(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Oil level sensor: Removal - Refitting, page )
21
Cylinder head
Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting
22
Oil decanter seal
23
Oil decanter
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Lower cover: Removal - Refitting)
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Oil level sensor: Removal - Refitting, page )
(see Oil pump: Removal - Refitting)
Oil decanter: Removal - Refitting
Repair-10x05x05x01-02x50-1-8-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
ENGINE OIL CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Precautions for the repair
Mark
Description
Information
1
Oil filler neck
2
Filler neck pipe
3
Engine oil dipstick guide
4
Engine oil dipstick guide seal
5
Engine oil dipstick
6
Oil pressure sensor
7
Oil filter unit seal
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Oil filter unit: Removal - Refitting)
8
Oil filter unit
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Oil filter unit: Removal - Refitting)
9
Oil filter cover seal
10
Oil filter
11
Oil filter cover
12
Sump
13
Drain plug
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
14
Drain plug seal
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
15
Oil pump strainer
16
Oil pump strainer seal
17
Oil pump
18
Oil splash plate
19
Cylinder block
20
Oil level sensor
21
Oil decanter
Oil decanter: Removal - Refitting
22
Oil decanter seal
Oil decanter: Removal - Refitting
23
Oil decanter seal
Oil decanter: Removal - Refitting
24
Cylinder head
(see 10A,
(see 10A,
(see 10A,
(see 10A,
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Oil pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting)
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view)
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view)
Repair-10x05x05x01-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
ENGINE: PRECAUTIONS FOR THE REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
1. SAFETY
1- GENERAL INFORMATION
All information contained in these manuals is intended exclusively for automotive industry professionals.
The documentation is intended to cover all vehicles in theRENAULTrange throughout the world, but may
not cover equipment designed for use in specific countries.
The procedures and fault finding procedures recommended and described in this manual have been
designed by automotive industry repair professionals.
1)GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
Observe basic principles of vehicle repair.
The quality of repair depends first and foremost on the care exercised by the person in carrying it out.
To ensure good repair:
use recommended professional products and original parts,
observe the tightening torques,
observe the recommendations for parts that should always be replaced after removal, refitting or replacement
operations,
clean and degrease the sections to be bonded, to ensure they bond correctly.
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
CAUTION
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face
will result in a risk of leaks.
-1-
The design quality of the vehicles demands that nothing be left to chance during repair. Consequently,
parts or components must be refitted in their original positions (for example: heat shields, wiring routing,
pipe routing).
Use professional products and apply them with care. For example, do not apply too much sealant to
joint faces, in order to avoid plugging engine oil or coolant pipes.
CAUTION
Applying excess sealant could cause it to be squeezed out when parts are tightened.
A mixture of sealant and fluid could damage certain components (engine, radiator,
etc.).
2)SPECIAL TOOLING - EASE OF USE
The repair procedures have been designed using special tools; they must therefore be carried out using
these tools to ensure a high degree of working safety and quality of repair.
The equipment we have approved has undergone careful research and testing, and must be used and
maintained with care.
3)SAFETY
Certain devices and parts must be handled with particular attention to safety and cleanliness and, above
all, with due care.
The safety symbol used in this manual indicates that special attention must be paid to the procedure or
the tightening torque values.
Working safely:
use suitable tools which are in good condition (use of " multi-purpose " tools, such as adjustable pliers, etc., should
be avoided wherever possible),
use supports and adopt a correct posture when performing heavy work or raising loads,
check that the working area is clean and tidy during the operation,
use personal protection (gloves, goggles, work shoes, masks, skin protection, etc.),
always follow the safety instructions associated with the operation to be performed,
do not smoke when working on vehicles,
do not use harmful products in unventilated rooms,
do not ingest any chemicals (brake fluid, coolant, etc.).
Respecting the environment:
sort waste according to its particular qualities,
do not burn discarded products (tyres, etc.).
-2-
4)CONCLUSION
The procedures contained in this document merit your attention. Please read them carefully in order to
reduce the risk of injury, and avoid using incorrect procedures that could damage the vehicle or make it
dangerous in use.
Following the recommended procedures will help you to provide a quality of service which will ensure the
vehicles achieve the highest levels of performance and reliability.
Maintenance and repair operations must be carried out under the proper conditions to ensure that our
vehicles run safely and reliably.
2. CLEANLINESS
1- RISKS RELATING TO CONTAMINATION
1)PROTECTIVE BAGS
Use hermetically-resealable plastic bags, using adhesive tape, for example, to store components which
will be refitted and reused. Stored parts will therefore be less subject to the risk of contamination.
These are single-use bags: after use they must be discarded.
Repair-10x01-02x60-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
ENGINE: REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Flywheel locking tool.
Mot. 1431
parts always to be replaced:
balance shaft bolt
Flywheel bolts
Drive plate bolt
REMOVAL
1. UPPER ENGINE REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove:
the engine - gearbox assembly,
the timing chain(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting) ,
the timing sprockets(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing sprocket: Removal - Refitting) .
X43, M9R, 804 817 824 839 844 846(804 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (670 OR 678 OR 680 OR 690 OR
696 OR 698) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR
802 OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR
858)
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust gas pressure
sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Remove:
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the injector fuel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal
- Refitting ,
the injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the damper valve,
the EGR pipe at the EGR cooler inlet,
the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting) ,
-1-
the camshafts(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Camshaft: Removal - Refitting) (see 10A,Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Camshaft: Removal - Refitting) ,
depending on version, the catalytic pre-converterCatalytic pre-converter: Removal - Refitting or the catalytic
converter at the turbocharger outletCatalytic converter: Removal - Refitting ,
the turbocharger oil pipesTurbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) ,
the turbocharger,
the exhaust manifold,
the EGR solenoid valve,
the inlet distributor,
the valves(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Valve: Removal - Refitting) ,
the injector rail,
coolant outlet unitCooling unit : Removal - Refitting ,
the heater plugsHeater plugs: Removal - Refitting .
2. UPPER ENGINE REPAIR OPERATION
Clean the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Cleaning)
.
Check:
the cylinder head and the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Check) ,
the camshafts(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Camshaft: Check ) ,
the valves and the valve springs(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Valve: Check ) .
Note:
Replace the parts whose values are outside the permitted tolerance values.
3. LOWER ENGINE REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the oil filter unitOil filter unit: Removal - Refitting .
Immobilise the flywheel while fitting theFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) on the cylinder block.
Remove:
the clutch plate and pressure platePressure plate - Disc: Removal - Refitting ,
the flywheelFlywheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the flywheel locking toolFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) .
Remove:
the gearbox side crankshaft sealCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting ,
the sumpLower cover: Removal - Refitting ,
the cylinder block base plate(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block base plate:
Removal - Refitting) .
-2-
Remove:
the con rod - piston assemblies from each cylinder(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con
rod: Removal - Refitting) ,
the crankshaft(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Crankshaft: Removal - Refitting) ,
the crankshaft position sensorCrankshaft position sensor: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil level sensorOil level sensor: Removal - Refitting ,
the EGR cooler,
the coolant pump inlet pipeCoolant pump inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the power assisted steering pumpPower-assisted
steering pump: Removal - Refitting
.
Remove the air conditioning compressorCompressor: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the cylinder block(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block: Removal - Refitting)
4. LOWER ENGINE REPAIR OPERATION
Clean the cylinder block(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block: Cleaning)
.
Check :
the cylinder block and the cylinder block base plate(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder
block: Check ) ,
the piston - con rod assemblies(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) ,
the crankshaft(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Crankshaft: Check ) .
Note:
Replace the parts whose values are outside the permitted tolerance values.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Parts always to be replaced:
Accessories belt,
Accessories belt fixed roller,
Accessories belt tensioning roller,
Crankshaft seal, timing end,
-3-
.
Coolant pump seal,
Timing chain,
Crankshaft timing sprocket,
Timing sprocket (driven by the chain) on the camshaft, exhaust side,
Timing sprocket bolt on the camshaft, exhaust side,
Timing sprocket washer on the camshaft, exhaust side,
Timing hydraulic tensioner,
Timing chain guide,
Timing chain guide bolt,
Timing chain tensioner guide,
Timing chain tensioner guide bolt,
Damper valve seal,
Catalytic converter or catalytic pre-converter seal,
Catalytic converter or catalytic pre-converter half-clips,
Catalytic converter or catalytic pre-converter mounting half-clips,
Catalytic converter or catalytic pre-converter nuts,
High-pressure pipe between the pump and the rail,
High-pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors,
Injector seals,
High-pressure pump seal,
High-pressure pump pre-greased bolt,
Oil separator seals,
Cylinder head gasket,
Cylinder head bolts,
Vacuum pump seal,
Valve stem seals,
Inlet distributor seal,
EGR solenoid valve seal,
Water chamber seal,
Exhaust manifold gasket,
Turbocharger seal,
Turbocharger strut bolt,
Inlet distributor studs (if removed),
Exhaust manifold studs (if removed),
Exhaust manifold nuts,
Turbocharger nuts,
High-pressure pump drive sprocket bolt (if removed),
Turbocharger strut,
Con rod cap bolts,
Crankshaft bearing cap bolts,
Cylinder block base plate blanking covers (if fitted),
Oil pump strainer seal,
Engine drain plug seal,
Gearbox end crankshaft seal,
Oil filter unit seal,
Oil filter cover seal,
Oil filter,
Coolant pump inlet pipe seal,
Crankshaft position sensor seal.
Always replace the turbocharger oil pipes.
-4-
Parts always to be replaced:
Seals on the EGR pipe at the EGR cooler inlet,
Bolts on the EGR pipe at the EGR cooler inlet,
Seals on the EGR pipe at the EGR cooler outlet,
Bolts on the EGR pipe at the EGR cooler outlet,
Dipstick guide tube seal.
parts always to be replaced:
Flywheel bolts
CAUTION
The gasket faces must be clean, dry and free from grease (avoid finger marks)
CAUTION
Applying excess sealant could cause it to be squeezed out when parts are tightened.
A mixture of sealant and fluid could damage certain components (engine, radiator,
etc.).
2. LOWER ENGINE REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the cylinder block(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block: Removal - Refitting)
Refit the air conditioning compressorCompressor: Removal - Refitting .
Refit the power assisted steering pumpPower-assisted
Refit:
-5-
steering pump: Removal - Refitting
.
.
the
the
the
the
coolant pump inlet pipeCoolant pump inlet pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
EGR cooler,
oil level sensorOil level sensor: Removal - Refitting ,
crankshaft position sensorCrankshaft position sensor: Removal - Refitting .
When replacing the cylinder block, crankshaft or crankshaft bearing shells, always determine the
thickness class for each bearing shell that will be fitted on each crankshaft bearing, to ensure that
journal clearance is within tolerances(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Crankshaft: Check ) .
Note:
Any clearances of the crankshaft journal outside the tolerances can cause engine
damage.
Refit the crankshaft(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Crankshaft: Removal - Refitting)
.
When replacing the cylinder block, crankshaft, con rods or pistons, always determine the piston pin
height class for each piston that will be fitted on each cylinder to ensure that piston protrusion from the
cylinder block is within tolerances(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) .
Note:
A piston protrusion outside the tolerances in relation to the cylinder block can lead to:
-engine malfunction (poor starting, pollution, poor performance).
-engine damage (due to piston contact with the cylinder head or the valves).
Refit the con rod - piston assemblies onto each cylinder(see 10A, Engine
Piston - Con rod: Removal - Refitting) .
and cylinder block assembly,
When replacing the cylinder block, crankshaft, con rods or pistons, always check that the piston
protrusion in relation to the cylinder block be within tolerances, after refitting the piston - con rod
assemblies (see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) .
-6-
Note:
A piston protrusion outside the tolerances in relation to the cylinder block can lead to:
-an engine malfunction (incorrect start, pollution, poor performances).
- engine damage (piston in contact with the cylinder head or valves).
Refit:
the cylinder block base plate(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block base plate:
Removal - Refitting) ,
the sumpLower cover: Removal - Refitting ,
the gearbox side crankshaft sealCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting .
Refit:
the clutch plate and pressure platePressure plate - Disc: Removal - Refitting ,
the flywheelFlywheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the flywheel locking toolFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) .
Refit the oil filter unitOil filter unit: Removal - Refitting .
3. UPPER ENGINE REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the heater plugsHeater plugs: Removal - Refitting ,
coolant outlet unitCooling unit : Removal - Refitting ,
the injector rail,
the valves(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Valve: Removal - Refitting) .
When replacing valves, always check that the position of the valve in relation to the cylinder head joint
face is within tolerances(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Valve: Check ) .
Note:
A valve position that is outside the permitted tolerance values in relation to cylinder
head joint face may damage the engine.
Refit:
the inlet distributor,
-7-
the EGR solenoid valve,
the exhaust manifold,
the turbocharger.
Check that the cylinder head seal matches the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine
assembly , Cylinder head: Check) .
and cylinder block
Refit:
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) ,
the turbocharger oil pipesTurbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
depending on version, the catalytic pre-converterCatalytic pre-converter: Removal - Refitting or the catalytic
converter at the turbocharger outletCatalytic converter: Removal - Refitting ,
the camshafts(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Camshaft: Removal - Refitting) (see 10A,Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Camshaft: Removal - Refitting) ,
the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting) ,
the injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal
- Refitting ,
the injector fuel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting ,
the EGR pipe at the EGR cooler inlet,
the damper valve.
X43, M9R, 804 817 824 839 844 846(804 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (670 OR 678 OR 680 OR 690 OR
696 OR 698) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR
802 OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR
858)
Refit the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Refit:
the timing sprockets(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing sprocket: Removal - Refitting) ,
the timing chain(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting) ,
the engine - gearbox assembly.
Repair-10x01-01x22-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
ENGINE SUPPORT EQUIPMENT: USE
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Engine support, can be adapted for Desvil stand.
Mot. 1723
Equipment required
component support
workshop hoist
1. PREPARING TO INSTALL THE ENGINE ON THE COMPONENT SUPPORT
-1-
WARNING
To work on the engine in complete safety, it is essential to use a component support.
-2-
CAUTION
It is strictly forbidden to apply any pressure to the engine oil sump. Damage to the sump may also
damage the engine by:
blocking the strainer,
raising the oil level above maximum, with a risk of engine racing.
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly
Disconnect the gearbox from the engineManual gearbox: Removal - Refitting
-3-
Fit the pins of the toolEngine support, can be adapted for Desvil stand.(Mot. 1723 ) on the cylinder
block on the flywheel end.
-4-
Position the mounting plate of theEngine support, can be adapted for Desvil stand.(Mot. 1723 ) on the
support studs (holes(1 ) , (2 ) , (10 ) and (13 ) ).
Tighten the support stud nuts on the stand plate.
-5-
Or:
fit the support bars component supporton the pins,
fit the support bar nuts, without tightening them.
2. FITTING THE ENGINE ON THE COMPONENT SUPPORT
-6-
Position the " engine - pins - mounting plate " assembly or the " engine - pins - support bar "
assembly on the component stand using the workshop hoistand a load positioner.
Tighten the stand plate studs or the support bars on the component stand.
Remove the load positioner.
-7-
3. REMOVING THE ENGINE FROM THE COMPONENT SUPPORT
Maintain the " engine - pins - mounting plate " assembly or the " engine - pins - support bar "
assembly on the component stand using the workshop hoist and load positioner.
Remove the mounting plate studs or the retaining bars from the component support.
Separate the " engine - pins - mounting plate " assembly or the " engine - pins - support bar "
assembly from the component stand using the workshop hoist and load positioner.
4. FINAL OPERATION
Remove:
the pin nuts from the stand plate,
the mounting plate.
Or remove:
the support bar nuts,
the retaining struts.
Remove the pins of theEngine support, can be adapted for Desvil stand.(Mot. 1723 ) .
Reconnect the gearbox on the engineManual gearbox: Removal - Refitting
Refit the engine - gearbox assembly.
-8-
Repair-00x04x01x03-01x79-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-9-
ENGINE-GEARBOX UNIT SUPPORT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
1
Front left-hand rubber pad
2
Manual gearbox
3
Front right-hand rubber pad
4
Information
Rear rubber pad
(see 19D,
Engine mounting, Left-hand suspended engine mounting: Removal - Refitting)
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view
(see 19D,
Engine mounting, Right-hand suspended engine mounting: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19D,
Repair-10x04x01x04-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
Engine mounting, Lower engine tie-bar: Removal - Refitting)
ENGINE-GEARBOX UNIT SUPPORT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Mark
Description
1
Front side member
2
Gearbox support
3
Gearbox rubber pad mounting on the body
4
Rubber pad
5
Engine mounting strut
6
Engine - gearbox assembly
7
Rubber pad
8
Cylinder head suspended mounting
9
Engine tie-bar mounting
10
Information
Engine tie-bar
(see 19D, Engine mounting,
Left-hand suspended engine mounting: Removal - Refitting)
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine - gearbox assembly: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19D, Engine mounting,
Right-hand suspended engine mounting: Removal - Refitting)
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
(see 19D, Engine mounting,
Repair-10x04x01x04-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Lower engine tie-bar: Removal - Refitting)
ESP INHIBITOR SWITCH: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
-1-
Unclip the plate(1 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
Disconnect the connectors from the plate.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the ESP inhibitor switch(3 ) by pressing on the clips(2 ) .
-2-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x04x03x36-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
EXHAUST ASSEMBLY IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT: EXPLODED VIEW
Special tooling required
22 mm socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors.
Mot. 1495-01
Spanner for tightening the exhaust gas temperature sensor
Mot. 1807
-1-
M9T, 672 676 686 692(672 OR 676 OR 686 OR 692)
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Exhaust manifold heat shield
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
2
Exhaust manifold heat shield support
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
3
Exhaust manifold
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
4
Exhaust manifold seal
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
5
Turbocharger seal on exhaust manifold side
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
6
Turbocharger
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
7
Turbocharger oil pipe seal at turbocharger end
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
-2-
8
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust gas temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
9
Seal on turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
10
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
11
Blanking cover seal of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
12
Blanking cover of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
13
Oxygen sensor
14
Bracket of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
15
Turbocharger oil pipe
Oxygen sensor: Removal - Refitting
(Mot. 1495-01)
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
-3-
(Mot. 1448)
(Mot. 1807)
M9T, 680 696 698(680 OR 696 OR 698)
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Exhaust manifold heat shield
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
2
Exhaust manifold heat shield support
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
3
Exhaust manifold
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
4
Exhaust manifold seal
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
5
Turbocharger seal on exhaust manifold side
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
6
Exhaust gas pressure sensor
7
Exhaust gas pressure sensor support
8
Exhaust gas pressure sensor pipe
9
Exhaust gas pressure take-off pipe
10
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
11
Turbocharger
(see 19B,
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting)
Exhaust , Exhaust gas temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
-4-
(Mot. 1807)
12
Turbocharger oil pipe seal at turbocharger end
13
Turbocharger oil pipe
14
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
15
Seal on turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
16
Bracket of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
17
Oxygen sensor
Oxygen sensor: Removal - Refitting (Mot.1495-01)
18
Exhaust fuel injector cooler seal
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
19
Exhaust fuel injector cooler
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
20
Exhaust fuel injector seal
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
21
Exhaust fuel injector
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
22
Exhaust fuel injector bracket
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
23
Exhaust fuel injector protective shield
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
-5-
(Mot. 1448)
M9T, 678 694(678 OR 694)
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Exhaust manifold heat shield
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
2
Exhaust manifold heat shield support
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
3
Exhaust manifold
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
4
Exhaust manifold seal
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
5
Turbocharger seal on exhaust manifold side
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
6
Exhaust gas pressure sensor
(see 19B, Exhaust , Exhaust gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting, page )
7
Exhaust gas pressure sensor support
8
Exhaust gas pressure sensor pipe
9
Exhaust gas pressure take-off pipe
10
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
11
Turbocharger
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust gas temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
-6-
(Mot. 1807)
12
Turbocharger oil pipe seal at turbocharger end
13
Turbocharger oil pipe
14
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
15
Seal on turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
16
Bracket of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
17
Oxygen sensor
Oxygen sensor: Removal - Refitting (Mot.1495-01)
18
Blanking cover seal of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
19
Blanking cover of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
-7-
(Mot. 1448)
M9T, 670 690(670 OR 690)
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Exhaust manifold seal
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
2
Exhaust manifold
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
3
Turbocharger seal on exhaust manifold side
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
4
Turbocharger
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
5
Turbocharger oil pipe seal at turbocharger end
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
6
Turbocharger oil pipe
7
Bracket of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
8
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
9
Exhaust fuel injector cooler seal
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
10
Exhaust fuel injector cooler
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
11
Exhaust fuel injector seal
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
-8-
(Mot. 1448)
12
Exhaust fuel injector
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
13
Exhaust fuel injector bracket
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
14
Exhaust fuel injector protective shield
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
15
Exhaust manifold heat shield
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
16
Exhaust manifold heat shield support
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
17
Oxygen sensor
Oxygen sensor: Removal - Refitting (Mot.1495-01)
18
Seal on turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
19
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust gas temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
-9-
(Mot. 1807)
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Illustration key: Description
Mark
Description
1
Key.
Information
Oxygen sensor
(see Oxygen sensors: Removal - Refitting)
22 mm socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors.(Mot.
2
Turbocharger heat shield
3
Turbocharger
4
Exhaust manifold heat shield
5
Exhaust manifold heat shield
6
Exhaust manifold heat shield
7
Exhaust manifold heat shield bolts
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
- 10 -
1495-01)
Illustration key: Description
Mark
Description
1
Seal
2
Duct between turbochargers
3
Turbocharger strut
4
Integrated manifold turbocharger
5
Oil supply pipe
6
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
7
Exhaust manifold seal
8
Turbocharger strut
Key.
Information
Duct between turbochargers : Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
Spanner for tightening the exhaust gas temperature sensor(Mot. 1807 )
- 11 -
9
Exhaust gas pressure take-off pipe
10
Turbocharger oil pipe
11
Seal
12
Exhaust gas pressure sensor support
13
Oil return pipe
14
Turbocharger oil pipe seal at turbocharger end
15
Turbocharger seal on exhaust manifold side
16
Turbocharger oil pipe seal at turbocharger end
17
Turbocharger oil pipe
18
Bracket of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
19
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
20
Jubilee clip
21
Turbocharger
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
Repair-10x08x08-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 12 -
EXHAUST ASSEMBLY IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT: EXPLODED VIEW
Special tooling required
22 mm socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors.
Mot. 1495-01
Spanner for tightening the exhaust gas temperature sensor
Mot. 1807
-1-
M9T, 672 676 686 692(672 OR 676 OR 686 OR 692)
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Exhaust manifold heat shield
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
2
Exhaust manifold heat shield support
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
3
Exhaust manifold
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
4
Exhaust manifold seal
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
5
Turbocharger seal on exhaust manifold side
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
6
Turbocharger
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
7
Turbocharger oil pipe seal at turbocharger end
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
-2-
8
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust gas temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
9
Seal on turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
10
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
11
Blanking cover seal of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
12
Blanking cover of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
13
Oxygen sensor
14
Bracket of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
15
Turbocharger oil pipe
Oxygen sensor: Removal - Refitting
(Mot. 1495-01)
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
-3-
(Mot. 1448)
(Mot. 1807)
M9T, 680 696 698(680 OR 696 OR 698)
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Exhaust manifold heat shield
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
2
Exhaust manifold heat shield support
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
3
Exhaust manifold
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
4
Exhaust manifold seal
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
5
Turbocharger seal on exhaust manifold side
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
6
Exhaust gas pressure sensor
7
Exhaust gas pressure sensor support
8
Exhaust gas pressure sensor pipe
9
Exhaust gas pressure take-off pipe
10
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
11
Turbocharger
(see 19B,
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting)
Exhaust , Exhaust gas temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
-4-
(Mot. 1807)
12
Turbocharger oil pipe seal at turbocharger end
13
Turbocharger oil pipe
14
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
15
Seal on turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
16
Bracket of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
17
Oxygen sensor
Oxygen sensor: Removal - Refitting (Mot.1495-01)
18
Exhaust fuel injector cooler seal
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
19
Exhaust fuel injector cooler
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
20
Exhaust fuel injector seal
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
21
Exhaust fuel injector
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
22
Exhaust fuel injector bracket
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
23
Exhaust fuel injector protective shield
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
-5-
(Mot. 1448)
M9T, 678 694(678 OR 694)
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Exhaust manifold heat shield
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
2
Exhaust manifold heat shield support
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
3
Exhaust manifold
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
4
Exhaust manifold seal
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
5
Turbocharger seal on exhaust manifold side
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
6
Exhaust gas pressure sensor
(see 19B, Exhaust , Exhaust gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting, page )
7
Exhaust gas pressure sensor support
8
Exhaust gas pressure sensor pipe
9
Exhaust gas pressure take-off pipe
10
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
11
Turbocharger
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust gas temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
-6-
(Mot. 1807)
12
Turbocharger oil pipe seal at turbocharger end
13
Turbocharger oil pipe
14
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
15
Seal on turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
16
Bracket of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
17
Oxygen sensor
Oxygen sensor: Removal - Refitting (Mot.1495-01)
18
Blanking cover seal of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
19
Blanking cover of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
-7-
(Mot. 1448)
M9T, 670 690(670 OR 690)
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Exhaust manifold seal
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
2
Exhaust manifold
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
3
Turbocharger seal on exhaust manifold side
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
4
Turbocharger
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting
5
Turbocharger oil pipe seal at turbocharger end
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
6
Turbocharger oil pipe
7
Bracket of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
8
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
9
Exhaust fuel injector cooler seal
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
10
Exhaust fuel injector cooler
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector cooler: Removal - Refitting)
11
Exhaust fuel injector seal
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
-8-
(Mot. 1448)
12
Exhaust fuel injector
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
13
Exhaust fuel injector bracket
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
14
Exhaust fuel injector protective shield
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Exhaust fuel injector: Removal - Refitting)
15
Exhaust manifold heat shield
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
16
Exhaust manifold heat shield support
Exhaust manifold: Removal - Refitting
17
Oxygen sensor
Oxygen sensor: Removal - Refitting (Mot.1495-01)
18
Seal on turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
19
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
(see 19B,
Exhaust , Exhaust gas temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
-9-
(Mot. 1807)
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Illustration key: Description
Mark
Description
1
Key.
Information
Oxygen sensor
(see Oxygen sensors: Removal - Refitting)
22 mm socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors.(Mot.
2
Turbocharger heat shield
3
Turbocharger
4
Exhaust manifold heat shield
5
Exhaust manifold heat shield
6
Exhaust manifold heat shield
7
Exhaust manifold heat shield bolts
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
- 10 -
1495-01)
Illustration key: Description
Mark
Description
1
Seal
2
Duct between turbochargers
3
Turbocharger strut
4
Integrated manifold turbocharger
5
Oil supply pipe
6
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
7
Exhaust manifold seal
8
Turbocharger strut
Key.
Information
Duct between turbochargers : Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
Spanner for tightening the exhaust gas temperature sensor(Mot. 1807 )
- 11 -
9
Exhaust gas pressure take-off pipe
10
Turbocharger oil pipe
11
Seal
12
Exhaust gas pressure sensor support
13
Oil return pipe
14
Turbocharger oil pipe seal at turbocharger end
15
Turbocharger seal on exhaust manifold side
16
Turbocharger oil pipe seal at turbocharger end
17
Turbocharger oil pipe
18
Bracket of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
19
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
20
Jubilee clip
21
Turbocharger
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting
Turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct: Removal - Refitting
Repair-10x08x08-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 12 -
EXHAUST ASSEMBLY UNDER BODY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Outlet seal of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
-
2
Catalytic converter
3
Catalytic converter suspension mount on the front axle assembly subframe
-
4
Catalytic converter outlet clip
-
5
Silencer
6
Rubber mounting bush of silencer
(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Catalytic converter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Silencer: Removal - Refitting)
-
Repair-10x08x09-02x50-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
EXHAUST ASSEMBLY UNDER BODY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Particle filter temperature sensor
2
Particle filter pressure sensor
3
Outlet seal of turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct
4
Particle filter
5
Catalytic converter temperature sensor
6
Particle filter suspension mount on the front axle assembly
subframe
-
7
Catalytic converter outlet clip
-
(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Particle filter temperature sensors: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Particle filter temperature
sensors: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Particle filter pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B, Exhaust ,
(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Particle filter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Particle filter temperature sensors: Removal - Refitting)
sensors: Removal - Refitting)
-1-
Particle filter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 19B,Exhaust ,
Particle filter temperature
Mark
Description
Information
8
Silencer
9
Rubber mounting bush of silencer
(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Repair-10x08x09-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
Silencer: Removal - Refitting)
-
EXHAUST FUEL INJECTOR SOLENOID VALVE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
During this operation, it is essential to:
refrain from smoking or bringing hot objects close to the working area,
beware of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
-1-
CAUTION
Do not blast with compressed air once the fuel circuit is open, otherwise impurities
may enter the system. Only use cleaning cloths.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply the before repair procedure to discharge the pressure in the system using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " Exhaust fuel injection system " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) of the exhaust fuel injector solenoid valve.
Disconnect:
the fuel pipe(2) between the exhaust fuel injector solenoid valve and the high pressure pump,
the fuel pipe(3) between the exhaust fuel injector solenoid valve and the exhaust fuel injector.
-3-
CAUTION
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
Fit blanking plugs on the fuel pipes.
Remove:
the bolts(4) from the exhaust fuel injector solenoid valve,
the exhaust fuel injector solenoid valve.
-4-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the after repair procedure to check system sealing using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " Exhaust fuel injection system " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-10x08x02x23-01x37-1-6-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
EXHAUST FUEL INJECTOR SOLENOID VALVE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
During this operation, it is essential to:
refrain from smoking or bringing hot objects close to the working area,
beware of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
-1-
CAUTION
Do not blast with compressed air once the fuel circuit is open, otherwise impurities
may enter the system. Only use cleaning cloths.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply the before repair procedure to discharge the pressure in the system using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " Exhaust fuel injection system " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) of the exhaust fuel injector solenoid valve.
-3-
-4-
Disconnect:
the fuel pipe(2) between the exhaust fuel injector solenoid valve and the high pressure pump,
the fuel pipe(3) between the exhaust fuel injector solenoid valve and the exhaust fuel injector.
CAUTION
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
-5-
Fit blanking plugs on the fuel pipes.
Remove:
the bolts(4) from the exhaust fuel injector solenoid valve,
the exhaust fuel injector solenoid valve.
-6-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the after repair procedure to check system sealing using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " After repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " Exhaust fuel injection system " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-10x08x02x23-01x37-1-8-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
EXHAUST GAS COOLER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 14A, Antipollution,
Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) .
Remove (see Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) :
the engine undertray,
the turbocharger,
the turbo-manifold oil pipes.
Remove the exhaust recirculation rigid pipe .
-1-
Clamp the exhaust gas cooler cooling pipes using the toolPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) .
Move aside:
the clip(1) of the exhaust gas cooler coolant inlet pipe using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot.
1448 ) ,
the clip of the exhaust gas cooler coolant outlet pipe.
Disconnect the exhaust gas cooler cooling pipes.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Remove :
the exhaust gas cooler outlet pipe bolts,
the exhaust gas cooler outlet pipe,
the exhaust gas cooler outlet pipe seals.
Remove the bolt(2 ) of the crankshaft position sensor shield.
Remove :
the exhaust gas cooler bolts,
the exhaust gas cooler,
the EGR bypass solenoid valve outlet pipe seal.
-3-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Parts always to be replaced :
exhaust gas cooler outlet pipe seal on the exhaust gas cooler side,
exhaust gas cooler outlet pipe seal on the cylinder block side.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit :
the
the
the
the
the
exhaust gas cooler,
exhaust gas cooler bolts,
new exhaust gas cooler outlet pipe seals,
exhaust gas cooler outlet pipe,
exhaust gas cooler outlet pipe bolts.
Torque tighten :
the exhaust gas cooler bolts,
the exhaust gas cooler outlet pipe bolts.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fil and bleed the cooling systemCooling system: Draining - Refilling .
Repair-11x07x01x05-01x37-1-74-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) .
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
M9T, 670 680 690 696 698 896(670 OR 680 OR 690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 896)
Remove:
the bolts(1) from the exhaust manifold heat shield,
the " exhaust manifold heat shield - exhaust manifold heat shield support " assembly.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
M9T, 670 680 690 696 698 896(670 OR 680 OR 690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 896)
Disconnect the exhaust gas pressure sensor connector(2 ) .
Remove (see 19B, Exhaust, Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) :
the bolt of the exhaust gas pressure sensor from the exhaust manifold on the exhaust manifold side,
the bolt of the exhaust gas pressure sensor support on the exhaust manifold side,
the exhaust gas pressure sensor on the exhaust manifold side with its support.
In the event of replacement, remove(see 19B, Exhaust , Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) :
the clip of the exhaust gas pressure sensor on the exhaust manifold side,
the support of the exhaust gas pressure sensor on the exhaust manifold side.
-3-
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Disconnect the exhaust gas pressure sensor connector(1 ) .
Unclip the pipe clip(2 ) from the exhaust gas pressure sensor bracket.
Remove (see 19B, Exhaust, Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) :
the hollow bolt of the exhaust gas pressure take-off pipe,
the exhaust gas pressure sensor bolt,
the " exhaust gas pressure sensor - exhaust gas pressure take-off pipe " assembly.
-4-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit (see 19B, Exhaust , Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) :
the " exhaust gas pressure sensor - exhaust gas pressure take-off pipe " assembly,
the exhaust gas pressure sensor bolt,
the hollow bolt of the exhaust gas pressure take-off pipe.
Torque
tighten(see 19B, Exhaust , Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) :
the exhaust gas pressure sensor,
the hollow bolt of the exhaust gas pressure take-off pipe.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x08x06-01x37-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
(see Illustration key: Description) Key.
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Damper valve strut
AND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702
2
Damper valve seal
AND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702
3
Air inlet spacer
4
Air inlet spacer seal
5
Exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve
6
Damper valve
7
Air inlet pressure sensor
8
Air inlet pressure sensor seal
9
Inlet distributor
AND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702
10
Inlet distributor seal
AND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702
11
Exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve seal
12
EGR bypass solenoid valve
13
EGR bypass solenoid valve outlet pipe
14
EGR bypass solenoid valve inlet pipe
15
EGR bypass solenoid valve support
16
Seal of exhaust gas recirculation pipe on the exhaust manifold side
(see 14A,
Antipollution, Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe: Removal - Refitting)
17
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe heat shield at the exhaust gas cooler inlet
(see 14A,
Antipollution, Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe: Removal - Refitting)
18
Bolt of exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe on the exhaust manifold side
19
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe at the exhaust gas cooler inlet
(see 14A,
Antipollution, Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe: Removal - Refitting)
20
Exhaust gas cooler inlet heat shield
21
Clip on the exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe at the exhaust gas cooler inlet
22
Exhaust gas cooler
23
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe at the exhaust gas cooler outlet
24
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe seal at the exhaust gas cooler outlet
(see 14A,
Antipollution, Exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve: Removal - Refitting)
AND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702
(see 14A,
Antipollution, Exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve: Removal - Refitting)
(see 14A,
Repair-11x07-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
(see 14A,
Antipollution, Exhaust gas cooler: Removal - Refitting)
Antipollution, Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe: Removal - Refitting)
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Special tooling required
Set of high pressure pipe removal wrenches (diameter 14,17,19)
Mot. 2022
(see Illustration key: Description) .
For fastenings with no specified tightening torque values, refer to the Table of Standard Torques(see Tightening torques: General information) .
-1-
Marks
Designations
Informations
1
Inlet distributor
AND (M9T) AND (ZA4 OR ZF4) M9T, ZA4 ZF4AND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702
2
Damper valve
AND (M9T) M9TAND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702
3
Damper valve seal
4
Water circulation valve
5
Vacuum pipe
6
Inlet distributor seal
7
Exhaust gas cooler
8
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe seal at the exhaust gas
cooler outlet
9
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe at the exhaust gas
coolet inlet
10
EGR bypass solenoid valve
11
Vacuum pipe
12
Seal
13
Support
14
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe heat shield at the
exhaust gas cooler inlet
15
EGR bypass solenoid valve outlet pipe
16
Seal
17
Seal
18
Duct
19
EGR circuit gas temperature sensor
(see 14A, Antipollution,
Exhaust gas cooler: Removal - Refitting)
(see 14A,Antipollution,
Exhaust gas cooler: Removal -
Refitting)
(see 14A, Antipollution,
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see 14A,Antipollution,
Exhaust gas
recirculation rigid pipe: Removal - Refitting)
AND (M9T) M9TAND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702
Set of high pressure pipe removal wrenches (diameter 14,17,19)(Mot. 2022 )
20
Exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve seal
21
Exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve
24
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe at the EGR solenoid
valve outlet
Exhaust gas
(see 14A,Antipollution,
Exhaust gas
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe seal at EGR solenoid
valve outlet
25
(see 14A,Antipollution,
Solenoid valve
23
Exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve: Removal - Refitting)
Air inlet pressure sensor
22
(see 14A, Antipollution,
recirculation solenoid valve: Removal - Refitting)
(see 14A, Antipollution,
Exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve: Removal - Refitting)
recirculation solenoid valve: Removal - Refitting)
(see 14A, Antipollution,
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe: Removal - Refitting)
recirculation rigid pipe: Removal - Refitting)
-2-
(see 14A,Antipollution,
Exhaust gas
26
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe seal at the inlet
distributor inlet
Repair-11x07-02x50-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
No.
Description
Information
1
Damper valve
2
Damper valve seal
3
Inlet distributor
4
Inlet distributor stud
5
Inlet distributor seal
6
Inlet distributor stud
7
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe heat shield at the exhaust gas cooler inlet
8
Seal of exhaust gas recirculation pipe on the exhaust manifold side
9
EGR bypass solenoid valve
10
EGR bypass solenoid valve outlet pipe
11
Engine cover support
12
Exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve seal
13
Exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve
14
Air inlet spacer seal
15
Air inlet spacer
16
Damper valve strut
17
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe at the exhaust gas cooler outlet
18
Exhaust gas cooler
19
Clip on the exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe at the exhaust gas cooler inlet
20
Exhaust gas cooler inlet heat shield
21
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe at the exhaust gas cooler inlet
22
Bolt of exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe on the exhaust manifold side
23
Air inlet pressure sensor
24
Air inlet pressure sensor seal
25
EGR bypass solenoid valve inlet pipe
Damper valve: Removal - Refitting
(see Inlet distributor: Removal - Refitting)
(see 14A, Antipollution,
(see 14A, Antipollution,
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe: Removal - Refitting)
Exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve: Removal - Refitting)
Damper valve: Removal - Refitting
(see 14A, Antipollution,
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see 14A, Antipollution,
Repair-11x07-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
(see 14A, Antipollution,
Exhaust gas cooler: Removal - Refitting)
Exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe: Removal - Refitting)
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SOLENOID VALVE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 14A, Antipollution,
Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) .
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the intercooler air outlet pipeAND (ZA4 OR ZF4) ZA4 ZF4AND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702,
the engine oil dipstickAND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702.
-1-
Unclip the fuel return pipe(1 ) from the engine oil dipstick guide.
Remove the engine oil dipstick guideAND
(M9T) M9TAND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702.
Remove (see 14A, Antipollution, Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view) (see 14A,Antipollution,
Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the damper valve,
the exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe at the exhaust gas cooler outlet.
Remove the support from the EGR bypass solenoid valve(see 14A, Antipollution,
recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
-2-
Exhaust gas
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve connector(see 14A, Antipollution,
recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
Exhaust gas
Remove (see 14A, Antipollution, Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve,
the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve seal.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean and degrease using surface cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) the joint faces of:
the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve,
the inlet distributor.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit (see 14A, Antipollution, Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve seal.
the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve,
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-11x07x01x02-01x37-1-76-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SOLENOID VALVE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 14A, Antipollution,
Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the intercooler air outlet pipe(see 12A, Fuel mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view) ,
the engine oil dipstickEngine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view .
-1-
Unclip the fuel return pipe(1 ) from the engine oil dipstick guide.
Remove the engine oil dipstick guideEngine
oil circuit assembly: Exploded view
.
Remove (see 14A, Antipollution, Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the damper valve,
the exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe at the exhaust gas cooler outlet.
Remove the bolt from the intercooler air inlet pipe on the inlet distributor(see 12A, Fuel
assembly: Exploded view) .
Move aside the intercooler air inlet pipe(see 12A, Fuel
-2-
mixture, Air inlet
mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view)
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve connector(see 14A, Antipollution,
recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
Exhaust gas
Remove (see 14A, Antipollution, Exhaust gas recirculation circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve,
the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve seal.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use a surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean and degrease
the sealing surfaces:
the exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve,
of the inlet distributor.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-11x07x01x02-01x37-1-76-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Spanner for tightening the exhaust gas temperature sensor
Mot. 1807
Set of high pressure pipe removal wrenches (diameter 14,17,19)
Mot. 2022
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
Wear heat protective gloves during the operation.
CAUTION
To prevent the surrounding components from overheating, do not damage (tear, pierce,
bend, etc.) a heat shield.
Any damaged heat shields must be replaced.
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
-1-
M9T, 670 680 690 696 698 700 702 870 880 882 890 896 898(670 OR 680 OR 690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 700 OR 702 OR 870
OR 880 OR 882 OR 890 OR 896 OR 898)
Remove (see 19B, Exhaust, Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) :
the exhaust manifold heat shield,
the exhaust gas duct at the turbocharger outlet.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove the underbody protector.
Disconnect the oil vapour pipe(1 ) on the cylinder head side.
Unclip the engine wiring(2 ) from the turbocharger air inlet pipe.
-2-
Loosen the clip(3 ) of the turbocharger air inlet pipe on the air flowmeter side.
Disconnect the turbocharger air inlet pipe from the air flowmeter.
Remove :
the turbocharger air inlet pipe bolts on the turbocharger side,
the turbocharger air inlet pipe,
the seal of the turbocharger air inlet pipe.
Remove the intercooler air inlet pipe.
Remove (see 19B, Exhaust, Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) :
the duct between the turbochargers,
-3-
the oxygen sensor,
the turbocharger heat shield bolts,
the turbocharger heat shield,
the turbo-manifold upper heat shield bolts,
the turbo-manifold upper heat shield.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
M9T, 670 680 690 696 698 700 702 870 880 882 890 896 898(670 OR 680 OR 690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 700 OR 702 OR 870
OR 880 OR 882 OR 890 OR 896 OR 898)
Disconnect the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector(1 ) .
Unclip the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector from its mounting.
Unclip the wiring harness from the exhaust gas temperature sensor at(2 ) .
-5-
-6-
Loosen the union nut of the exhaust gas temperature sensor using:
a torque wrench(3) ,
an extension(4) ,
a 1/4 to 3/8 adapter(5) ,
the toolSpanner for tightening the exhaust gas temperature sensor(Mot. 1807 ) (6) .
-7-
Remove the exhaust gas temperature sensor(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exploded view ) .
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Disconnect the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector(6 ) .
Unclip:
-8-
Exhaust assembly under body:
the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector(6) ,
the exhaust gas temperature sensor cable at(5)
Remove the exhaust gas temperature sensor(4 ) using the toolSet of high pressure pipe removal
wrenches (diameter 14,17,19)(Mot. 2022 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
M9T, 670 680 690 696 698 700 702 870 880 882 890 896 898(670 OR 680 OR 690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 700 OR 702 OR 870
OR 880 OR 882 OR 890 OR 896 OR 898)
Coat the exhaust gas temperature sensor with COPPER-ALUMINIUM LUBRICANTVehicle: Parts
and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the exhaust temperature sensor.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Torque tighten the exhaust temperature sensor using the toolSet of high pressure pipe removal
wrenches (diameter 14,17,19)(Mot. 2022 ) .
M9T, 670 680 690 696 698 700 702 870 880 882 890 896 898(670 OR 680 OR 690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 700 OR 702 OR 870
OR 880 OR 882 OR 890 OR 896 OR 898)
Torque tighten the union nut of the exhaust gas temperature sensor using the toolSpanner for
tightening the exhaust gas temperature sensor(Mot. 1807 ) .
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-9-
Repair-10x08x05-01x37-1-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Spanner for tightening the exhaust gas temperature sensor
Mot. 1807
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exhaust
engine compartment: Exploded view .
assembly in
WARNING
To prevent the surrounding components from overheating, do not damage (tear, pierce,
bend, etc.) a heat shield.
Any damaged heat shields must be replaced.
IMPORTANT
Wear heat protective gloves during the operation.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the exhaust manifold heat shield,
the exhaust gas duct at the turbocharger outlet.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector(1 ) .
Unclip the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector from its mounting.
Unclip the wiring harness from the exhaust gas temperature sensor at(2 ) .
-2-
-3-
Loosen the union nut of the exhaust gas temperature sensor using:
a torque wrench(3) ,
an extension(4) ,
a 1/4 to 3/8 adapter(5) ,
theSpanner for tightening the exhaust gas temperature sensor(Mot. 1807 ) (6) .
Remove the exhaust gas temperature sensor.
REFITTING
-4-
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Coat the exhaust gas temperature sensor with COPPER-ALUMINIUM LUBRICANTVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x08x05-01x37-1-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
Parts and
EXHAUST: LIST AND LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view) .
-1-
M9T, 670 680(670 OR 680)
-2-
-3-
(1) Particle filter
(2) Clip
(3) Silencer
-4-
-5-
M9T, 672 676 678(672 OR 676 OR 678)
-6-
-7-
(1) Catalytic converter
(2) Clip
(3) Silencer
-8-
-9-
M9T, 690 698(690 OR 698)
- 10 -
- 11 -
(1) Particle filter
(2) Clip
(3) Silencer
- 12 -
- 13 -
M9T, 686 692 694(686 OR 692 OR 694)
- 14 -
- 15 -
(1) Catalytic converter
(2) Clip
(3) Silencer
- 16 -
Repair-10x08-02x51-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 17 -
EXHAUST MANIFOLD: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
parts always to be replaced:
exhaust manifold seal
WARNING
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before
carrying out any operationVehicle: Precautions for the repair .
Note:
This engine is equipped with two turbochargers:
low-pressure turbocharger,
high-pressure integrated turbo-manifold.
This document concerns the high-pressure integrated turbo-manifold.
Locations and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced) :Exhaust
compartment: Exploded view
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the intercooler air inlet pipe(see 12A, Fuel mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view) ,
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
-1-
assembly in engine
the duct between the low pressure turbocharger and the turbo-manifold,
the low-pressure turbocharger,
the exhaust gas temperature sensor,
the turbo-manifold oil supply pipe,
the turbo-manifold oil return pipe.
Remove the EGR rigid pipe at the exhaust gas cooler inlet .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the exhaust gas pressure sensor connector(1 ) .
Unclip the pipe clip(2 ) from the exhaust gas pressure sensor bracket.
-2-
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the hollow bolt of the exhaust gas pressure take-off pipe,
the exhaust gas pressure sensor bolt,
the exhaust gas pressure sensor.
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the turbo-manifold heat shields bolts,
the turbo-manifold heat shields.
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the turbo-manifold bracket bolts,
the turbo-manifold bracket,
the turbo-manifold nuts,
the turbo-manifold,
the turbo-manifold seal.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
exhaust manifold seal
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the turbo-manifold new seal,
the turbo-manifold,
the turbo-manifold new nuts,
the turbo-manifold bracket,
the turbo-manifold bracket bolts,
Torque tighten:
the turbo-manifold nuts in orderExhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view ,
the turbo-manifold bracket boltsExhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view .
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-3-
Repair-10x07x02-01x37-1-150-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
EXHAUST: PRECAUTIONS FOR THE REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
particle filter kit
1. PARTS AND CONSUMABLES FOR THE REPAIR WORK
1- PARTS ALWAYS TO BE REPLACED:
- the seal or sealing ring on the connection between the catalytic converter or catalytic pre-converter and
the remainder of the exhaust pipe,
- the exhaust pipe clamp(s) (if fitted).
2- CONSUMABLES (SEE PART NO. IN TECHNICAL NOTE 5068, 04B, CONSUMABLES - PRODUCTS):
- surface cleaner
- abrasive pads
2. ADVICE TO RESPECT
WARNING
Do not park and run the engine in a place where combustible substances and
materials such as grass or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system.
1 - The catalytic converter or catalytic pre-converter must not be subjected to mechanical shocks during
removal or refitting as this could damage them.
2 - The entire exhaust pipe is made of stainless steel.
3 - After working on the bracket between the catalytic converter or catalytic pre-converter and the
remainder of the exhaust pipe, ensure that the connection is perfectly sealed.
-1-
To do this:
clean the pressure faces on the connection with abrasive pads,
degrease the pressure faces on the connection with surface cleanerand clean cloths,
always replace the connection seal or sealing ring.
For versions fitted with a particle filter, also have a
particle filter kit(high temperature) (see the
Repair-10x08-02x60-1-15-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
catalogue).
EXPANSION BOTTLE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Remove the expansion bottle cap(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view)
.
Empty the expansion bottle using a syringe.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Fit the toolPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) on (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the cooling radiator degassing pipe,
the expansion bottle lower pipe.
Using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) , separate the clip(see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit
assembly: Exploded view) :
of the cooling radiator degassing pipe,
of the expansion bottle lower pipe.
Disconnect the following from the expansion bottle(see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the cooling radiator degassing pipe,
the expansion bottle lower pipe.
-2-
Remove (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the expansion bottle bolt,
the expansion bottle in order, as shown by the directional arrows.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-3-
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
fill and bleed the coolant circuit(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
Repair-10x06x01x07-01x37-1-36-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
EXTERIOR FRONT SIDE OPENING ELEMENT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Mark
Description
Information
1
Side indicator
2
Door mirror glass
Door mirror glass: Removal - Refitting
3
Door mirror blind spot glass
Door mirror glass: Removal - Refitting
4
Front side door strip
Front side door strip: Removal - Refitting
5
Door mirror
Door mirror: Removal - Refitting
Side indicator: Removal - Refitting
Repair-50x02x21-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
EXTERIOR REAR OPENING ELEMENT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Mark
Description
Information
1
Trim of rear loading door lock barrel
(Car. 1363)
2
Rear loading door exterior handle
(see Rear loading door exterior handle: Removal - Refitting)
3
3rd brake light
3rd brake light: Removal - Refitting
4
Rear loading door strip
Rear badges: Removal - Refitting
5
Badge
Rear badges: Removal - Refitting
6
Rear loading door protection strip
Rear loading door strip: Removal - Refitting
7
Number plate light
8
3rd brake light nut
Repair-50x03x26-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
EXTERIOR REAR SIDE OPENING ELEMENT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Mark
Description
1
End piece of sliding side door centre runner
2
Sliding side door centre runner
3
Trim of sliding side door centre runner
4
Sliding side door strip
5
Sliding side door exterior handle
Information
(see 51A, Side
(see 51A, Side
opening element mechanisms, Sliding side door opening controls: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-50x02x23-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
opening element mechanisms, Sliding side door runners: Removal - Refitting)
EXTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torque, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Front side
assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening elements trim).
opening element
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
Remove the switch plateFront side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view
(72A, Side opening elements trim).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the exterior rear view mirror control switch(2 ) by turning it half a turn(2 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x04x03x16-01x37-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Unclip the door mirror coverExterior
element mechanisms).
front side opening element assembly: Exploded view
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
(51A, Side opening
Remove the exterior air temperature sensor(1 ) from its housing.
Cut the wires(2 ) of the exterior air temperature sensor (see
Wiring).
Wiring: Repair)
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x02x04x13-01x37-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
(Technical Note 6015A, 88A,
FAN ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 61A, Heating,
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Lock the airbag computer using the
Airbags and pretensioners).
Diagnostic tool(see Fault finding - Replacement of components)
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) (80A, Battery).
Remove the dashboardDashboard: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment),
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-1-
(88C,
Disconnect the fan assembly connector(1 ) .
Unclip the blower unit wiring(2 ) .
-2-
Remove:
the bolts(3) from the fan assembly,
the blower unit in accordance with the direction of the arrow.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Refit the fan assembly.
-3-
Clip the fan assembly wiring.
Connect the fan assembly connector.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x02x01x03-01x37-1-42-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
FILTER UNIT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front axle assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the shock absorber(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle assembly: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Separate the various components of the " spring - shock absorber " assembly(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front axle assembly: Exploded view) .
Visually check the condition of the component parts of the filter unit.
All faulty components must always be replaced.
-1-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-13x02x04x08-01x37-1-6-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FIXED ROOF GLASS: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Protect the periphery of the roof fixed window.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Cut the cement beadWindow detachment: Description (Technical Note 0560A, 54A, Windows) (this
operation requires two people).
Remove the fixed roof glass.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the thickness shims.
For preparation and the bondingWindow bonding: Description (Technical Note 0560A, 54A, Windows).
-2-
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Bond the fixed roof glass.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Remove the masking tape.
Repair-50x04x20x02-01x37-1-5-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FLAP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
1- REAR FLAP
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting (35A, Wheels and tyres).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- FRONT FLAP
-1-
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the front flap.
2- REAR FLAP
-2-
Drill out the rivets(2 ) .
Remove:
the bolts(3) ,
the rear flap.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-3-
Always replace the rivets of the flaps.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x05x04x05-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
FLOOR CARPET: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
1- FRONT SECTION FLOOR CARPET
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the front seat(see Front seat: Exploded view) ,
the front bench seat(see Front bench seat: Exploded view) ,
the central consoleCentre console: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment),
the B-pillar linings(see 71A, Body internal trim, B-pillar trim: Removal - Refitting) ,
the door sills(see 71A, Body internal trim, Door sill: Removal - Refitting) ,
the bonnet release controlBonnet release control: Removal - Refitting (51A, Non-side opening element
mechanisms),
the front door sill linings(see 71A, Body internal trim, Front door sill lining: Removal - Refitting) .
Note:
Set the wheels straight and centre the steering wheel, then lock the ignition switch.
Remove the universal joint boltSteering
assembly: Exploded view
Slide the steering column rod.
-1-
(36A, Steering assembly).
H62(H62)
1- REAR SECTION FLOOR CARPET
Remove:
the B-pillar linings(see 71A, Body internal trim, B-pillar trim: Removal - Refitting) ,
the rear side door sills(see 71A, Body internal trim, Rear side door sill: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove Rear bench seat assembly: Exploded view :
the bolts from the side casings of the rear bench seat base,
the side casings of the rear bench seat base.
-2-
Cut the retaining clips(1 ) of the rear seat belt buckles.
Extract the rear seat belt buckles of the rear bench seat.
Remove the bolts from the rear bench seat frameRear
Remove the rear bench seat.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
bench seat assembly: Exploded view
.
1- FRONT SECTION FLOOR CARPET
Remove:
the clip(2) using a pair of unclipping pliers,
the front section floor carpet partially at(3) .
-4-
Remove:
the clip(4) using a pair of unclipping pliers,
the front section floor carpet.
-5-
H62(H62)
1- REAR SECTION FLOOR CARPET
Remove the rear section of the floor carpet.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x02x02x09-01x37-1-19-1.xml
-6-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
FLYWHEEL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Flywheel locking tool.
Mot. 1431
Torx male TP 55
Mot. 2013
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the manual gearboxGearbox assembly: Exploded view (21A, Manual gearbox).
the clutch pressure plateClutch assembly: Exploded view (20A, Clutch).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Position the Flywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) (1 ) .
Remove:
the flywheel(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) using the
tool, Torx male TP 55(Mot. 2013 )
theFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) (1) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-2-
Clean the threading of the flywheel bolts on the crankshaft using surface cleanerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Degrease the flywheel bearing face on the crankshaft with surface cleanerVehicle:
for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Parts and
Parts and consumables
Check the condition of the flywheel.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Coat the new flywheel bolts with FRENETANCHVehicle: Parts and consumables for
Consumables - Products).
the repair
(04B,
Position the Flywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) .
Refit the flywheel(see 10A, Engine and
the toolTorx male TP 55(Mot. 2013 ) .
cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view)
Remove the toolFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x03x03x06-01x37-1-68-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
using
FLYWHEEL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Flywheel locking tool.
Mot. 1431
Torx male TP 55
Mot. 2013
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the manual gearboxGearbox assembly: Exploded view (21A, Manual gearbox).
the clutch pressure plateClutch assembly: Exploded view (20A, Clutch).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Position the Flywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) (1 ) .
Remove:
the flywheel(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) using the
tool, Torx male TP 55(Mot. 2013 )
theFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) (1) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-2-
Clean the threading of the flywheel bolts on the crankshaft using surface cleanerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Degrease the flywheel bearing face on the crankshaft with surface cleanerVehicle:
for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Parts and
Parts and consumables
Check the condition of the flywheel.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Coat the new flywheel bolts with FRENETANCHVehicle: Parts and consumables for
Consumables - Products).
the repair
(04B,
Position the Flywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) .
Refit the flywheel(see 10A, Engine and
the toolTorx male TP 55(Mot. 2013 ) .
cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view)
Remove the toolFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x03x03x06-01x37-1-68-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
using
FLYWHEEL : CHECK
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Flywheel locking tool.
Mot. 1431
Torx male TP 55
Mot. 2013
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) .
CHECK
1. PREPARATION OPERATION FOR CHECK
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove:
the manual gearboxGearbox assembly: Exploded view .
the clutch pressure plateClutch assembly: Exploded view .
-1-
Position the tool Flywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) (1 ) .
Remove:
the flywheel using the toolTorx male TP 55(Mot. 2013 ) (see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder
block assembly: Exploded view) ,
the toolFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) .
2. CHECK
1- ANGULAR CLEARANCE OF THE FLYWHEEL
Put the flywheel on a workbench.
-2-
Rotate the flywheel using both hands and check that there are no hard point between stops.
Note:
if there is one or more hard point, replace the flywheel.
Draw a mark(5 ) using indelible pencil on the secondary flywheel(2 ) .
Rotate the secondary flywheel(2 ) using a finger in a direction and release.
-3-
Draw a mark(4 ) on the primary flywheel(3 ) aligned with the secondary flywheel mark(5 ) .
Rotate the secondary flywheel using a finger in the opposite direction and release.
Draw a second mark(6 ) using indelible pencil on the primary flywheel aligned with the secondary
flywheel mark.
Measure between both marks of the primary flywheel.
-4-
CAUTION
Measurement must be between 4,5mm and 36mm.
2- LATERAL CLEARANCE OF THE FLYWHEEL (TEST FEASIBLE ON VEHICLE)
Move the secondary flywheel in relation to the primary flywheel by pressing either side to the
secondary flywheel.
-5-
CAUTION
Primary and secondary flywheels must not touch
Note:
the running clearance(7 ) must be between 1,5mm and 3mm.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x03x03x06-01x58-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
FOOT PANEL: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Foot panel
Mild steel
0.95
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-50x07x24-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FORK SHAFT BEARING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
ZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit
Bvi. 1950
Equipment required
component support
indelible pencil
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the manual gearboxGearbox
Position the gearbox on the
assembly: Exploded view
component support(see
.
21A, Manual gearbox ,
-1-
Gearbox support equipment: Use)
.
Remove the gearshift lever(1 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
view ) .
-2-
Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded
Mark the position of the selector lever using a
indelible
Remove the selector lever(3 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
view ) .
-3-
pencil(2 ) .
Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) :
the selector shaft protective cap(4) ,
the gearshift shaft protective cap(5) .
-4-
Remove the gearshift plate(6 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Exploded view ) .
-5-
Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly:
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) :
the gearshift shaft(7) ,
the selector shaft(8) .
-6-
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) :
the gearshift shaft roll pin(9) ,
the gearshift arm.
-7-
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) :
the selector shaft roll pin(10) ,
the selector arm.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-8-
Remove from the gearshift plate(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded
view ) :
the selector shaft sealing ring(11) ,
the gearshift shaft sealing ring(12) ,
the selector shaft needle bearing(13) ,
the gearshift shaft needle bearing(14) .
-9-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit on the gearshift plate(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) :
the selector shaft needle bearing using toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) F (15) ,
- 10 -
the gearshift shaft needle bearing using toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) F (16) .
Refit on the gearshift(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) :
the gearshift shaft sealing ring,
the selector shaft sealing ring.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x01x11x01-01x37-1-14-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
Technical Note 3175A
Fault finding
Cooling circuit
Vehicles concerned: see list on the following page
Subsections concerned: 19A
Fault finding procedures for various
faults affecting the cooling system and
water pumps
77 11 293 182
Edition 3 - OCTOBER 2005
" The repair procedures given by the Manufacturer in this document are based on the
technical specifications current when it was prepared.
The procedures may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the
manufacturer in the production of the various component units and accessories from
which his vehicles are constructed. "
EDITION ANGLAISE
All rights reserved by RENAULT s.a.s.
Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part
reference numbering system is prohibited without the prior written authority of
RENAULT s.a.s.
© RENAULT s.a.s. 2005
Vehicle
Twingo
Type
X06X
Renault 4
Renault 5
X40X
Express
F40X
Kangoo
XCXX
Kangoo phase II
XCXX
Clio I
X57X
Clio II
XBXX
Clio II phase II
XBXX
Clio V6
CB1A
Clio V6 phase II
CB1A
Clio Internationale
XB1R
Clio III
XRXX
Renault 19
X53X
Renault 21
X48X
Modus
XPXX
Logan
LS0X
Mégane
XAXX
Mégane II
XMXX
Scénic
JAXX
Scénic II
JM0X
Laguna
X56X
Laguna II
XGXX
Laguna II phase II
XGXX
Renault 25
X29X
Safrane
X54X
Vel Satis
XJXX
Vel Satis phase II
XJXX
Avantime
DE0X
Espace
J11X
Espace II
J63X
Espace III
JE0X
Espace IV
JK0X
Espace IV phase II
JK0X
Trafic
T/PVXX
Trafic II
XL0X
Master propulsion
XHXX
Master propulsion phase II
XHXX
Master
FB/FC
Master
Q/Rxxx
Master II
XDXX
Master II phase II
XDXX
Spider
EF0H
AIpine
D50X
Contents
Page
19A COOLING
Cooling circuit: operation
Cooling circuit: operating diagram
Water pump: operation
Water pump: operating diagram
Precautions for fault finding
Cooling system: tools and equipment
Cooling system: customer complaints
Cooling system: fault finding charts
19A-1
19A-2
19A-3
19A-4
19A-5
19A-6
19A-7
19A-9
COOLING 119A
SYSTEM
Cooling circuit - Operation
19A
All combustion engines in operation produce energy which is divided up as follows:
– part of this energy is mechanical and drives the engine,
– part is heat energy in the form of exhaust gas which is removed in the form of heated coolant which is partly used
to heat the passenger compartment. But the heat from the coolant must be removed to maintain the correct
operating temperature of the engine.
This is achieved by using a liquid cooling system.
Coolant circulates in (or around) the components to be cooled. This liquid, which has been heated following contact
with the hot engine components, is transferred quickly by a pump into a radiator where it cools down and returns to
the engine.
The cooling circuit, which must be completely sealed for it to operate properly, is principally composed of:
– an engine block and cylinder head,
– a radiator and engine cooling fan,
– temperature sensors (thermostat, temperature switch),
– a coolant pump,
– an expansion bottle,
– hoses,
– a bleed screw (if fitted to the vehicle),
– a heater matrix,
– coolant,
– and various other components depending on the vehicle model.
A centralised coolant temperature management system has been developed following the development of engine
computers. This system uses information provided by a single temperature sensor located on the engine block. This
sensor operates the fan unit either at high or low speed via an injection computer. It also operates the coolant
temperature warning light located on the instrument panel. When dealing with a vehicle displaying a fault, it is
advisable to establish whether the vehicle is fitted with this system or not. This is established by checking whether
the temperature switch is at the bottom of the radiator. If a temperature switch is found, there is no centralised
coolant temperature management system.
The cooling circuit is fitted with a valve which protects the system from overpressure. The colour of this valve
indicates its rating (in bars):
Note:
Reminder of the ratings for the expansion bottle valve:
Expansion bottle valve with:
– a brown spot
– a blue spot
– a yellow hand
– a white hand
– a grey hand
1.2
1.4
1.4
1.6
1.8
bars
bars
bars
bars
bars
19A-1
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling circuit - Operating diagram
Operating diagram: See MR for the vehicle concerned.
19A-2
19A
COOLING SYSTEM
Water pump - Operation
19A
Water pump - Description
The water pump's function is to create sufficient flow to dissipate some of the heat generated by combustion,
exhaust gases and friction.
Its operating principle involves the conversion of mechanical energy generated by the engine into hydraulic energy
to circulate the coolant.
The pump operates as a generator. The flow rate depends on the pressure differential created by the pump and the
ease with which water can pass through the cooling system.
General description of a water pump
The operating principle of a centrifugal pump consists of converting mechanical energy into hydraulic energy.
The conversion takes place in two stages:
● the first consists of the conversion of mechanical energy into kinetic energy by the vanes of the impeller;
● the second step is the conversion of the kinetic energy into pressure energy by the spiral form of the pump body
(shell + impeller).
The mechanical energy required to rotate the impeller is provided by the pulley via the bearing spindle. By reaction,
the vanes of the impeller transfer a certain amount of motion to the fluid. The fluid is then thrown out by the impeller
and collected by an arrangement called a volute. The junction between the volute and the cylinder block water inlet
also affects the pump performance.
The role of the dynamic seal is to provide a seal between the ambient air under the bonnet and the cooling system
during engine operation or when the engine is stopped.
To avoid damage in operation, there is a film of coolant between sealing ring and counterface. The purpose of this
film is to provide lubrication and cooling of these two components. However, a very small amount of liquid can work
its way to the outside of the pump. This liquid is discharged via the lower vent hole and is known as a " cosmetic
leak " . This leakage is normal and necessary for correct operation of the dynamic seal.
19A-3
COOLING SYSTEM
Water pump - Operating diagram
upper vent
19A
body
pulley
shaft bearing
impeller
lower vent
dynamic seal
reservoir
static seal
19A-4
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling circuit - Precautions for fault finding
19A
IMPORTANT
– Be aware of high temperatures when dealing with circuits that have been designed to be under pressure (risk of
severe burns).
– Never remove the expansion bottle valve when the engine is hot.
– When working under the bonnet, be aware that the radiator ventilation fan(s) may operate unexpectedly.
– Do not undo the bleed screw(s) with the engine running.
Preliminary test:
When a vehicle displaying a fault arrives, before carrying out fault finding, check:
– the coolant fluid level in the tank (marked by a line) and colour,
– the condition and tension of the coolant pump drive belt,
– that the engine cooling fan, radiator and radiator grille are not blocked by any object that could disrupt air
movement,
– that there is no signs of coolant leakage in the engine compartment.
19A-5
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling circuit - Equipment and tooling
Special tooling required
Mot. 1700
Cooling circuit diagnostic and filling
tool
Equipment required
Cylinder head testing tool
19A-6
19A
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling circuit - Customer complaints
19A
TRACES OF LIQUID
ON THE GROUND
ALP 1
IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ALP 1
IN THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
ALP 2
SMOKE EMISSION
FROM THE EXHAUST (WHITE SMOKE FROM WARM ENGINE)
ALP 3
IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ALP 1
IN THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
ALP 2
TEMPERATURE OR WARNING INDICATOR
TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT:
WARNING LIGHT LIT WHEN DRIVING
ALP 4
THE WARNING LIGHT LIGHTS UP INTERMITTENTLY WHEN THE
VEHICLE IS IN MOTION
ALP 5
WATER TEMPERATURE NEEDLE:
THE NEEDLE MOVES UP INTO THE RED AREA WHEN DRIVING
ALP 4
THE NEEDLE INDICATES OVERHEATING JUST AFTER STARTING
OFF
ALP 5
THE NEEDLE POSITION FLUCTUATES WHEN DRIVING
ALP 5
19A-7
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling circuit - Customer complaints
19A
OTHERS:
THERE IS A BUBBLING NOISE UNDER THE DASHBOARD
ALP 6
FLUID LEVEL IN THE TANK DECREASES
ALP 1
LIQUID IN THE TANK HAS CHANGED COLOUR
Technical
Note 2675 A
THERE IS NO HEATING IN THE VEHICLE
ALP 7
HEAVY CONDENSATION ON THE WINDSCREEN (INTERIOR)
ALP 2
WATER PUMP CHECK
ALP 8
19A-8
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
ALP 1
NOTES
– Traces of liquid on the ground
– Traces of liquid in the engine compartment
– Smoke emission in the engine compartment
– Fluid level in the tank decreases
– Check that it is definitely coolant.
– Ask the customer if they have topped up the coolant fluid level before contacting the
RENAULT network.
Cold engine.
Check the coolant fluid level in the tank.
Are there any signs of fluid leaks?
yes
no
Locate the leak. Repair the leak or replace the
defective part.
Leak-test the reservoir and its cap using tool
Mot. 1700.
yes
Pressurise the system to its rated pressure with tool
Mot. 1700.
Does the pressure drop?
yes
Are there any signs of fluid leaks?
yes
Locate the leak. Repair the leak or replace the
defective part.
no
no
Smoke is most likely to be caused by the release of coolant. This can be the result of:
– a blocked fan unit:
● run the fan unit command on vehicles fitted with centralised coolant temperature management,
● if the vehicle is not fitted with centralised coolant temperature management, short circuit the temperature
switch to force the fan unit to start.
If the fan unit does not start, replace the fan unit motor.
– faulty temperature control. Apply the T2 test procedure.
– a faulty coolant pump. Check that it is operating correctly (ALP 8).
19A-9
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
ALP 2
NOTES
– Traces of liquid in the passenger compartment
– Smoke emission in the passenger compartment
– Heavy condensation on the windscreen (interior)
– Check that it is definitely coolant.
– Ask the customer if they have topped up the coolant fluid level before contacting the
RENAULT network.
Check the coolant fluid level in the tank.
Check that the heating in the passenger compartment is not switched on. Run a warm engine at idle speed for
1 minute.
Turn the heating on in the passenger compartment.
Is there an odour in the passenger compartment?
yes
no
Replace the heater matrix because it is leaking.
Check that the cooling system is not leaking
in the engine compartment using tool
Mot. 1700.
Are there any signs of fluid leaking in the engine
compartment?
yes
no
Replace the heater matrix.
Locate the leak.
Repair the leak or replace the defective part.
19A-10
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
ALP 3
– Smoke emission from the exhaust (white smoke, warm engine)
NOTES
Ask the customer if they have topped up the coolant fluid level before contacting the
RENAULT network.
Cold engine.
Check the coolant fluid level in the tank.
Pressurise the system to its rated pressure with tool Mot. 1700.
Does the pressure drop?
yes
no
The cooling circuit is not sealed. Look for a leak in the
passenger compartment (ALP 2), or a leak in the
engine compartment (ALP 1) or an internal engine
leak (T1 test).
Start the engine.
Depress the accelerator pedal quickly a few times
until the fan unit has started.
The warning light must remain off.
Does the fan unit start and the warning light remain
off?
yes
There is a temperature control fault.
Apply the T2 test procedure.
Remove the cylinder head
Check the level of the cylinder head. Test the
cylinder head.
Is the cylinder head sealed?
no
no
yes
Replace the cylinder
head.
The smoke fault may be the result of an internal
engine leak.
19A-11
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
ALP 4
NOTES
19A
– The warning light remains lit when driving
– The needle moves up into the red area when driving
Ask the customer about the conditions when the fault appears.
Start the engine when it is cold.
Maintain an idling speed.
What is the temperature of the heater and radiator hoses?
Cold heater matrix input hose,
Cold radiator input hose.
Hot heater matrix input hose,
Cold radiator input hose.
Check the circuit coolant level.
There is no engine coolant circulation.
Check that the coolant pump is operating correctly
(ALP 8) and check the belt drive.
The temperature of the heater input hose and
radiator input hose must increase. If this does not
occur, check that the coolant pump and thermostat
are operating correctly (ALP 8) and check the
coolant fluid level in the reservoir.
Is the temperature warning light on?
yes
Apply the T2 test procedure.
If the test is not successful, the fault is not due to the
actual cooling circuit itself:
– perform fault finding on the centralised coolant
temperature management (depending on
version),
– check the warning light wiring.
no
Accelerate to start the fan unit.
Has the fan unit started?
yes
no
Does the warning light come on?
no
Depress the accelerator pedal quickly a few times
and check that the warning light does not light up.
19A-12
yes
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
19A
ALP 4
CONTINUED
For vehicles not fitted with centralised coolant temperature management:
– Disconnect the temperature switch and short circuit it to activate the two fan unit speeds (high and low).
● For vehicles fitted with centralised coolant temperature management:
– Run the command mode of the two speeds (high and low) of the fan unit using the diagnostic tool.
In both cases, the two speeds of the fan unit must be activated.
If this is does not occur:
– check the fan unit wiring if one of the two speeds is not obtained,
– replace the fan unit if it does not operate correctly.
●
the fan unit operates normally.
● For vehicles not fitted with centralised coolant temperature management:
– replace the temperature switch.
● For vehicles fitted with centralised coolant temperature management:
– check the temperature sensor,
– perform fault finding on the injection computer.
For vehicles not fitted with centralised coolant temperature management:
– Disconnect the temperature switch and short circuit it to trigger fan unit high-speed operation.
● For vehicles fitted with centralised coolant temperature management:
– Activate the high-speed command mode using a diagnostic tool.
In both cases, the fan unit high-speed operation must be activated.
If this does not occur, check that the radiator, engine cooling fan and radiator grille are not blocked by an object
which could disrupt air movement. Check the fan unit wiring.
If the wiring is correct, carry out a temperature control test.
●
If the test is successful, the coolant temperature warning light fault is not due to the cooling system.
– Check the instrument panel wiring.
– Perform a centralised coolant temperature management test.
19A-13
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
ALP 5
– The warning light lights up intermittently when the vehicle is in
motion
– The needle indicates overheating just after starting
– The needle position fluctuates when driving
Carry out a preliminary check on the cooling system using tool Mot. 1700.
Is the cooling circuit functioning?
yes
no
The fault is not due to the cooling circuit.
Check by:
– running the coolant temperature warning light
command (depending on version),
– carrying out fault finding on the instrument panel.
19A-14
Replace the parts necessary for the circuit to
function properly.
If the source of the fault is the water pump, follow the
procedure on ALP 8.
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
ALP 6
NOTES
There is a bubbling noise under the dashboard.
Ask the customer if they have topped up the coolant fluid level before contacting the
RENAULT network.
Cold engine.
Check the coolant fluid level.
Is the coolant fluid at maximum level?
no
yes
Add some coolant and bleed the circuit using
Mot. 1700.
Bleed the coolant circuit using Mot. 1700.
Start the engine and depress the accelerator pedal quickly
a few times.
Is there still a bubbling noise?
yes
What has happened to the coolant fluid level?
It has risen
It has not moved
It has dropped
For vehicles fitted with a hot tank, fit a ∅ 3 nozzle in the radiator tank output hose towards the expansion bottle
(secure it near the output unit with a clip). If the fault is still present or for vehicles fitted with a cold tank, check the
thermostat and replace the parts necessary for it to operate properly.
19A-15
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
ALP 6
CONTINUED 1
Are there any signs of fluid leaks?
yes
no
Locate the leak.
Repair the leak or replace the defective part.
Leak-test the reservoir and its cap using tool
Mot. 1700.
no
Pressurise the circuit using Mot. 1700
(to the valve rating).
Does the pressure drop?
yes
Are there any signs of fluid leaks?
no
yes
Replace the defective part.
Are there any signs of water in the engine oil or in the
automatic transmission oil?
yes
no
19A-16
no
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
ALP 6
CONTINUED 2
Is white smoke being emitted from the exhaust?
no
yes
Is there a leak in the heater matrix?
Apply the T1 test procedure.
Was the test OK?
no
yes
no
Replace the heater
matrix.
The cylinder head gasket is no
longer tight.
Replace the cylinder head
gasket.
Check the level of the cylinder
head.
Test the cylinder head.
Is there a leak where the hoses connect?
no
yes
yes
Replace the hose.
The likely cause of the air intake may be:
– A loose bleed screw.
– Check all of the bleed screws.
The air intake fault can be the result of an internal
engine leak.
19A-17
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
ALP 7
There is no heating in the vehicle
NOTES
Ask the customer if they have topped up the coolant fluid level before contacting the
RENAULT network. Check the operation of the fan unit heating and air flow circuit.
Check the coolant fluid level in the tank.
Start the engine.
Is the coolant pump driven correctly by the engine?
yes
no
Cold engine. Maintain an idling speed.
Check the condition of the belt and replace it if
necessary.
Check that the belt has the correct tension.
The heater matrix input hose must be hot and
the radiator input hose must be cold. Is this
correct?
yes
no
Clean the cooling circuit and
replace the coolant using
Mot. 1700.
The two hoses are hot: replace the thermostat.
The two hoses are cold: replace the coolant
pump.
19A-18
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
ALP 8
NOTES
●
●
19A
Water pump check
●
●
Never start the engine without the timing cover.
Always disconnect tool Mot. 1700 before removing any cooling system component.
When the engine is cold, top up the coolant in the expansion bottle to the maximum level.
Carry out fault finding on the cooling system using tool Mot. 1700 (see Technical Note 3857A, page 19A-5).
Wait 3 minutes. Does the pressure in the cooling system drop?
no
yes
Carry out a visual inspection of the cylinder block below the water pump.
Are there signs of leakage, drips, seepage or beads of moisture?
no
yes
The fault is not caused by the water
pump. Locate the leak (ALP 1).
Repair the leak or replace the
defective part.
If the water pump is driven by the timing belt,
remove the timing cover.
Is the leak coming from the seal between the
water pump and the cylinder block?
no
The leak is coming
from the water
pump. Change the
water pump.
19A-19
yes
Change the seal and
repeat the test from
the beginning.
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
ALP 8
CONTINUED
●
●
●
●
●
Disconnect tool Mot. 1700 and refit the cap on the expansion bottle.
Start the engine and hold the engine speed at 2500 rpm.
Accelerate several times with no load, every 2 or 3 minutes, until the fan switches on.
Switch off the ignition.
– If the water pump is driven by the timing belt, wait 15 minutes before removing the timing cover.
Carry out a visual inspection of the water pump.
Is there leakage from the water pump, drips, seepage or beads of moisture?
no
yes
It is normal to find a build-up of crystalline material at
the dynamic seal of the water pump.
Is there an abnormal amount* of play in the water
pump pulley when you try to move it?
no
The fault is not caused by the
water pump. Locate the leak
(ALP 1). Repair the leak or
replace the defective part.
yes
Change the
water pump.
* The repairer will be allowed to make his own judgement on this point
19A-20
Change the water pump.
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
Test to detect CO2 in the cooling circuit
TEST 1
NOTES
Engine stopped for at least 5 hours.
Examine the radiator input hose.
Is the hose hard?
yes
This is an indication that CO2 may be present.
Replace the hose.
no
Take a sample of coolant and test it with a CO 2
liquid reagent.
Does the reagent change colour?
no
yes
The test for the presence of
CO 2 is negative. There is no
internal engine leak.
The test for the presence of CO 2 is positive.
Exhaust gas is leaking into the cooling circuit.
19A-21
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
TEST 2
Temperature control test
Cold engine. Start the engine.
Idling speed for 5 minutes, with short bursts of acceleration.
What is the temperature of the heater hoses and radiator hoses?
Cold heater matrix input hose,
Cold radiator output hose.
Warm heater matrix input hose,
Warm radiator output hose.
Hot heater matrix input hose,
Cold radiator output hose.
There is no engine coolant circulation.
Check that the coolant pump is
operating correctly (ALP 8) and check
the belt drive. Check the circuit coolant
level.
The thermostat is not sealed.
Replace the thermostat.
19A-22
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
TEST 2
CONTINUED 1
Depress the accelerator pedal quickly a few times to raise the temperature.
The temperature of the heater input hose must increase and the radiator output hose
must stay cold. If this does not occur, check that the coolant pump is operating
correctly (ALP 8) and check the coolant fluid level and all the hoses and their clips.
Is the temperature warning light lit?
yes
no
Is the heater input hose hot?
no
yes
There is no engine coolant circulation.
Check that the coolant pump is operating
correctly (ALP 8) and check the belt drive.
Check the fluid level in the tank.
Is the radiator output hose cold?
yes
Check the thermostat.
For vehicles fitted with centralised coolant
temperature management:
– carry out fault finding on the centralised coolant
temperature management,
– run the temperature warning light command
(depending on version).
● For vehicles without centralised coolant
temperature management:
– Check the temperature sensor.
Carry out fault finding on the instrument panel.
●
no
For vehicles fitted with centralised coolant
temperature management:
– carry out fault finding on the centralised coolant
temperature management,
– run the fan unit command (low and high speed),
– check the temperature sensor.
For vehicles not fitted with centralised coolant
temperature management:
– Short circuit the temperature switch to trigger the
two fan unit speeds.
19A-23
COOLING SYSTEM
19A
Cooling circuit - Fault Finding chart
TEST 2
CONTINUED 2
Depress the accelerator pedal quickly a few times until the fan unit has started.
The instrument panel indicator must remain off.
Has the fan unit started?
yes
no
The control test is correct.
For vehicles without centralised coolant temperature management:
– Disconnect the temperature switch and short circuit it to activate the two fan unit speeds (high and low).
● For vehicles fitted with centralised coolant temperature management:
– Run the command mode of the two speeds (high and low) of the fan unit using the diagnostic tool.
In both cases, the two speeds of the fan unit must be activated.
If this is does not occur:
– check the fan unit wiring if one of the two speeds is not obtained,
– replace the fan unit if it does not operate correctly.
●
19A-24
Technical Note 3700A
XXXX
FAULT FINDING LOG
Content: Fault Finding Log
Edition 12 - February 2010
" The repair procedures given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the technical
specifications current
when it was prepared.
The procedures may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the manufacturer in the
production of the various component units and accessories from which its
vehicles are constructed " .
EDITION ANGLAISE
All copyrights reserved by Renault.
Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part
reference numbering system is prohibited without the prior written authority of
RENAULT.
© Renault s.a.s. 2010
IMPORTANT!
WARNING
All problems involving a system must be subject to thorough diagnostics with the appropriate
tools.
The FAULT FINDING LOG is an aid in the fault finding process. It allows you to have and keep
a record of the fault finding carried out, and is an essential aspect in communication with the
manufacturer.
IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT,
AND FROM THE START OF THE OPERATION.
This log may be requested:
– when requesting technical assistance from Techline,
– for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is mandatory,
– which must be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. It is therefore used to
decide whether a reimbursement will be made under warranty and leads to improved analysis of the
removed parts.
Temp.mif
V12
2
FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE
Repair Order:
CUSTOMER
COMPLAINT
IDENTIFICATION
ICM
(Technical and administrative edition)
Message for the vehicle:
Yes
History relating to the customer complaint:
Code
1.
Symptom
Vehicle under warranty or service contract:
Yes
No
No
Yes
Actis fault
code
CUSTOMER COMPLAINT CONFIRMED
No
OTS to be carried out:
RC
Warnings: Actis
solution, Guided
fault finding,
Recurrence
Yes
No
2.
PRIOR TO FAULT
FINDING
(Visual and audible inspection,
battery voltage, fuel level,
determine what operates and
what does not operate, etc.)
Temp.mif
V12
3
Yes
No
Normal
operation
Symptom code confirmed
Context
Yes
No
3.
ACTIS CONSULTATION AND CONSULTATION OF TECHLINE INFORMATION BEGIN BY RECORDING THE
FAULTS IN THE COMPUTERS IF THE FUNCTION HAS FAULT FINDING.
– If a fault is stored in a computer: apply the occurrence conditions described in the technical documentation. On the CLIP tool,
also consult the fault occurrence context and the fault occurrence counter.
Computer
number
DEF
Fault designation
STATUS
Present
Stored
OBSERVE THE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS DESCRIBED IN DIALOGYS FOR THE OPERATIONS YOU ARE
PERFORMING.
4.
APPLY THE ACTIS SOLUTION OR THE OTS (If an operation concerns the fault)
5. Fault finding without
CLIP with Dialogys (*1)
5. Visu Schéma fault
finding (*2)
5. Clip Bornéo 2 / ASDE
5. Bornéo 3 fault finding
(See following page)
(See following page)
(*1): Consult Dialogys, except with Bornéo 3. Examples: Technical Note 6511A for manual gearboxes, Technical Note 3701A for
radios, Technical Note 5164A for noises, etc.
(*2): Except with Bornéo 3, for systems not having any fault finding procedure, perform a fault search using Visu Schéma.
Examples: the instrument panel lighting dimmer, beam adjustment of headlights other than discharge bulb types, etc.
Workshop
Repair
Manual
Fault
Finding
Manual
Technical
Notes
Wiring
Diagram Note
Clip Version
Vdiag
Program No.
Software
version
Temp.mif
V12
4
5. BORNEO 2 / ASDE (Without guided fault finding)
INTERPRETATION OF
FAULTS (If no fault,
carry out a conformity
check)
CONFORMITY
CHECK
(Statuses / parameters /
command modes)
SEARCH BY
CUSTOMER
COMPLAINT
5. BORNEO 3 (With guided fault finding)
If the fault is not resolved after dealing with the symptom code, carry out fault finding by dealing with the other DTCs present.
SYMPTOM CODES USED
FAULT FINDING ASSOCIATED WITH THE FAULT
UNGUIDED FAULT FINDING
FAULT FINDING BY FUNCTION
IF THE FAULT FINDING LASTS 2 HOURS, PLEASE SEND A CIR TO THE TECHLINE.
6.
IDENTIFY THE ORIGIN OF THE FAULT (Check everything that could have generated the fault. Example: An
oxidised terminal causes an electric malfunction, but the oxidation is due to moisture, which must be eliminated.)
7.
BEFORE REPAIR (With guided fault finding: Apply the before repair procedure / Without guided fault finding:
consult the repair procedures to determine the computer configurations to record, the measurements to be made
on the part before dismantling, etc.)
8.
REPAIR (Perform the repairs, applying the manufacturer's procedures, the tightening torques. etc.)
9.
AFTER REPAIR (With guided fault finding: Apply the after repair procedure / without guided fault finding:
Configure the computers, carry out system programming procedures, etc.)
10. CONFIRM THE REPAIR
The system is working properly
No warning light illuminated
No fault in the computers
Radio operational
Windows and sunroof initialised
Customer notified
Test certificate completed
Temp.mif
V12
5
'Alert CIR' for fault investigation or for the
improvement of fault finding procedures
WARRANTY (information to be submitted)
Describe the cause of the fault
Associated symptom code
Approval of fault search time
Notes:
Temp.mif
V12
6
Approval granted
FRONT ANTI-ROLL BAR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front axle assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the engine undertray,
the lower nuts from the front anti-roll bar tie rods(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) .
Move aside the anti-roll bar tie rods.
-1-
Remove the wiring channel bolts(1 ) on the battery.
Move aside the battery wiring channel.
-2-
Loosen the rear bolt(2 ) on the front left-hand driveshaft lower arm.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the bolts from the front anti-roll bar bearings(see 31A, Front axle components,
Exploded view ) .
-3-
Front axle assembly:
Remove the bearings from the anti-roll bar by pressing at(3 ) .
-4-
Remove the rubber pads of the anti-roll bar(4 ) .
-5-
Remove the anti-roll bar over the left-hand driveshaft.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products)
to clean the surfaces of the subframe in contact with the anti-roll bar bearings.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-6-
Repair-13x02x04x04-01x37-1-30-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
FRONT ARMREST: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
1- FRONT SEAT ARMREST SUPPORT
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) (80A, Battery).
Remove: (see Front seat: Exploded view)
the front seat,
the front seatback " foam - cover " assembly,
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- FRONT SEAT ARMREST
-1-
seat: Exploded
Put the front seat armrest in the horizontal position as indicated in the illustration.
Separate the locking spring of the front seat armrest using a flat-blade screwdriver at(1 ) .
-2-
Keep the locking spring to one side, then pull the front seat armrest at(2 ) .
2- FRONT SEAT ARMREST TRIM
-3-
Unclip the lower retaining section of the front seatback cover(3 ) .
Unclip the trim of the front seat armrest by pressing the locking clips(4 ) .
Remove the trim of the front seat armrest at(5 ) .
3- FRONT SEAT ARMREST SUPPORT
Remove (see Front seat: Exploded view) :
the rivets of the front seat armrest support,
the front seat armrest support.
-4-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Carry out a function test.
Repair-70x18x02x12-01x37-1-6-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Front anti-roll bar
Front anti-roll bar: Removal - Refitting
2
Front anti-roll bar tie rod
Front anti-roll bar: Removal - Refitting
3
Front shock absorber
Front shock absorber and spring: Removal - Refitting
4
Shock absorber spring
Front shock absorber and spring: Removal - Refitting
5
Front axle subframe
(see Front axle subframe: Removal - Refitting)
6
Front axle subframe bolts
7
Front driveshaft lower arm nut
8
Front axle subframe bolts
9
Front driveshaft lower arm nut
10
Front driveshaft lower arm
11
Front driveshaft lower arm ball joint nut
12
Shock absorber gaiter
Front shock absorber and spring: Removal - Refitting
13
Impact stop
Front shock absorber and spring: Removal - Refitting
14
Upper spring support
Front shock absorber and spring: Removal - Refitting
15
Rotating stop
Front shock absorber and spring: Removal - Refitting
16
Filter unit
Front shock absorber and spring: Removal - Refitting
17
Support cap
Front shock absorber and spring: Removal - Refitting
18
Front shock absorber rod nut
Front shock absorber and spring: Removal - Refitting
Front driveshaft lower arm: Removal - Refitting
Repair-13x02x01-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT AXLE SUBFRAME: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
component jack
safety strap(s)
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front axle assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the engine undertray.
-1-
Remove the wiring channel bolts(1 ) on the battery.
Move aside the battery wiring channel.
Unclip the battery wiring from the front axle subframe.
-2-
Remove the bolts(4 ) of the catalytic converter bracket.
Remove the nuts from the upper ball joints of the anti-roll bar(see 31A, Front axle components,
assembly: Exploded view) .
Tilt the anti-roll bar towards the rear of the vehicle.
Remove the steering box bolts(see Steering
assembly: Exploded view) .
-3-
Front axle
Attach the steering box to the front right-hand shock absorber.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the nuts from the ball joints of the front driveshaft lower arm(see 31A, Front axle components,
Front axle assembly: Exploded view) .
-4-
Remove the ball joints of the front driveshaft lower arm using a ball joint extractor.
Strap the gearbox to the vehicle chassis using a safety strap(s).
Remove the gearbox supportAND
Fit a
component jackunder
(M9T) M9T.
the front axle subframe.
-5-
Strap the front axle subframe to the
component jackusing
a safety strap(s).
Remove the front axle subframe(see 31A, Front axle components,
Front axle assembly: Exploded view)
.
In the event of replacement, remove(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle assembly: Exploded view) :
the anti-roll bar,
the lower arms from the front driveshaft.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Degrease the surfaces of the body in contact with the front axle subframe using surface cleaner(see
Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Check the axle geometry(see Axle
assemblies: Check) .
Adjust the front axle, if necessary(see Front axle system: Adjustment) .
Repair-13x02x02-01x37-2-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
FRONT AXLE SYSTEM: ADJUSTMENT
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
flywheel
immobiliser
1. PREPARATION FOR ADJUSTMENT
Check the geometry(see 30A, General
information, Axle assemblies: Check)
2. ADJUSTMENT OPERATION
1- WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Lock the steering wheel using a
flywheel immobiliser.
-1-
.
Loosen the wheel alignment adjustment lock nut(1 ) .
Turn the track rod sleeve(2 ) to the required value.
After adjustment, torque tighten the wheel alignment adjustment lock nutsSteering
view .
2- CASTOR ANGLE
Not adjustable.
-2-
assembly: Exploded
3- CAMBER
Not adjustable.
4- PIVOT
Not adjustable.
Calibrate the steering wheel angle sensor.
Apply the after repair procedure:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Braking computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " Steering wheel angle sensor " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-13x02x01-01x67-2-13-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT AXLE
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
The geometry values for commercial vehicles are now available via a calculator. This new calculator can
obtain geometry values for a loaded vehicle.
The use of this calculator eliminates:
VODM (vehicle in working order) trim-setting (unloading the vehicle, filling the tank),
loosening the suspension.
1. WHEEL ALIGNMENT SYMBOL MEANINGS
TOE-OUT: MINUS SIGN
-1-
CAUTION
Symbols used by RENAULT:
toe-out: toe-in: +
TOE-IN: PLUS SIGN
CAUTION
Symbols used by RENAULT:
toe-out: toe-in: +
2. ACCESS TO VALUES VIA THE CALCULATOR
To consult the geometry values:
-2-
connect to the " INFOTECH " site,
select the " DOCUMENTATION " tab,
choose the vehicle,
select " Axle adjustment values " .
Enter the following in the calculator:
the vehicle,
the vehicle variant (use ICM if necessary),
the 8 right-hand and left-hand measurements R1, R2, W1, W2.
Click on " CALCULATE " to obtain the geometry values for the vehicle.*
*: The values obtained take into account the vehicle load status (front/back & left/right).
If INFOTECH cannot be accessed, use the following values calculated with VODM. This method involves ensuring the
vehicle conforms to VODM (Vehicle in working order):
Vehicle empty,
Fuel tank full.
3. VALUES CALCULATED WITH VODM
1- WHEEL ALIGNMENT
-3-
Value
Tolerance
Position of vehicle
+11'
Vehicle in running order
-11'
2- CASTOR ANGLE
Not adjustable.
-4-
Value
Tolerance
Position of vehicle
+45'
+4º14'
Vehicle in running order
-45'
3- CAMBER
Not adjustable.
-5-
Value
Tolerance
Position of vehicle
+35'
-0º14'
Vehicle in running order
-35'
4- PIVOT
Not adjustable.
-6-
Value
Tolerance
Position of vehicle
+35'
+11º7'
Vehicle in running order
-35'
Repair-13x02x01-02x13-6-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
FRONT BENCH SEAT BASE TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
Exploded view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the front bench seat(see Front
bench seat: Exploded view) .
-1-
bench seat:
Remove the seat belt inertia reel housing of the front bench seat at(1 ) and (2 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Unclip the rear retaining sections(5 ) .
-3-
Unclip the front retaining sections(6 ) .
-4-
Partially unclip the cover of the front bench seat base.
-5-
Remove the " foam - cover " assembly from the front bench seat base.
-6-
Remove the cover of the front bench seat base.
-7-
CAUTION
To avoid any risk of damaging the foam, separate the cover from the foam by holding
the velcro strips.
REFITTING
-8-
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
To avoid any risk of detaching or creating folds in the cover, check that the velcro
strips are secured correctly on the foam. If the velcro strips tear, replace the foam.
-9-
Align the velcro strips with the marks.
Note:
The pre-markings on the foam are a guide for positioning the ends of the velcro strips.
2. FINAL OPERATION
- 10 -
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x11x02x02-01x37-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
FRONT BRAKE CALLIPER ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
(see Illustration key: Description) Key.
-1-
Mark
Description
1
Brake calliper guide pin cap
2
Brake calliper guide pin
3
Brake calliper bleed screw
4
Information
Brake pad wear warning light tab
(FRE1190-01)
5
Brake calliper
(see 31A, Front
axle components, Front brake calliper: Removal - Refitting)
(see 31A, Front
6
Brake calliper guide pin gaiter
7
Brake calliper piston
8
Dust seal of brake calliper piston
9
Brake pad
10
Brake pad tab
11
Brake pad
12
Brake calliper mounting
13
Brake calliper mounting bolt
14
axle components, Front brake calliper: Repair)
Brake disc
(see 31A, Front
axle components, Front brake pads: Removal - Refitting)
(see 31A, Front
axle components, Front brake pads: Removal - Refitting)
(see 31A, Front
axle components, Front brake calliper mounting: Removal - Refitting)
(see 31A, Front
axle components, Front brake disc: Removal - Refitting)
(see 31A, Front axle
Repair-13x03x03x09-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
components, Front brake disc: Description)
FRONT BRAKE CALLIPER ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
(see Illustration key: Description) Key.
-1-
Mark
Description
1
Brake calliper guide pin cap
2
Brake calliper guide pin
3
Brake calliper bleed screw
4
Information
Brake pad wear warning light tab
(FRE1190-01)
5
Brake calliper
(see 31A, Front
axle components, Front brake calliper: Removal - Refitting)
(see 31A, Front
6
Brake calliper guide pin gaiter
7
Brake calliper piston
8
Dust seal of brake calliper piston
9
Brake pad
10
Brake pad tab
11
Brake pad
12
Brake calliper mounting
13
Brake calliper mounting bolt
14
axle components, Front brake calliper: Repair)
Brake disc
(see 31A, Front
axle components, Front brake pads: Removal - Refitting)
(see 31A, Front
axle components, Front brake pads: Removal - Refitting)
(see 31A, Front
axle components, Front brake calliper mounting: Removal - Refitting)
(see 31A, Front
axle components, Front brake disc: Removal - Refitting)
(see 31A, Front axle
Repair-13x03x03x09-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
components, Front brake disc: Description)
FRONT BRAKE CALLIPER MOUNTING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
In order not to damage the brake hose:
do not tension the hose,
do not twist the hose,
check that there is no contact with the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove (see 31A, Front axle components, Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the front brake pads,
the upper guide pin bolt cap,
the upper guide pin bolt.
Attach the rear brake calliper to the suspension spring.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the front brake calliper mounting(see 31A, Front axle components,
Exploded view ) .
Front brake calliper assembly:
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean using a
Products):
the
the
the
wire brush and brake cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables front brake calliper mounting,
front brake calliper,
front hub carrier.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the front brake calliper mounting(see 31A, Front axle components,
Exploded view ) .
Front brake calliper assembly:
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x03x02-01x37-1-21-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT BRAKE CALLIPER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Brake calliper piston return tool.
Fre. 1190-01
Equipment required
pedal press
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Position a
pedal presson
the brake pedal to limit the outflow of brake fluid.
Remove the front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the front brake pad wear warning light.
-2-
Unclip the wiring of the front brake pad wear warning light from the brake calliper at(2 ) .
-3-
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Mark the position of the front brake hose cap(3 ) on the shock absorber base using an
Unclip the front brake hose cap(3 ) from the shock absorber base.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
indelible
pencil.
Undo the front brake hose union(4 ) on the front brake calliper.
Remove (see 31A, Front axle components, Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the guide pin bolt caps of the front brake calliper,
the guide pin bolts of the front brake calliper,
the front brake calliper from the front brake calliper mounting,
the front brake hose union from the front brake calliper,
the front brake calliper.
REFITTING
-5-
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Check:
the condition of the calliper gaiter,
the condition of the calliper if it has any deep scratches or cracks.
Replace any faulty parts(see 31A, Front axle components,
Front brake calliper: Repair)
.
Clean using a wire brush and brake cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables Products):
the front brake calliper,
the front brake calliper mounting.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Push back the front brake calliper pistons to the bottom of their housings using the toolBrake calliper
piston return tool.(Fre. 1190-01) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the front brake hose union on the front brake calliper17 N.m.
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Clip the front brake hose cap on to the base of the shock absorber, aligning the marks made using a
indelible pencil .
Bleed the braking circuit(see Braking
circuit: Bleed) .
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x03x05-01x37-1-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
FRONT BRAKE CALLIPER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Brake calliper piston return tool.
Fre. 1190-01
Equipment required
pedal press
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Position a
pedal presson
the brake pedal to limit the outflow of brake fluid.
Remove the front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the front brake pad wear warning light.
-2-
Unclip the wiring of the front brake pad wear warning light from the brake calliper at(2 ) .
-3-
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Mark the position of the front brake hose cap(3 ) on the shock absorber base using an
Unclip the front brake hose cap(3 ) from the shock absorber base.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
indelible
pencil.
Undo the front brake hose union(4 ) on the front brake calliper.
Remove (see 31A, Front axle components, Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the guide pin bolt caps of the front brake calliper,
the guide pin bolts of the front brake calliper,
-5-
the front brake calliper from the front brake calliper mounting,
the front brake hose union from the front brake calliper,
the front brake calliper.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Check:
the condition of the calliper gaiter,
the condition of the calliper if it has any deep scratches or cracks.
Replace any faulty parts(see 31A, Front axle components,
Front brake calliper: Repair)
.
Clean using a wire brush and brake cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables Products):
the front brake calliper,
the front brake calliper mounting.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Push back the front brake calliper pistons to the bottom of their housings using the toolBrake
calliper piston return tool.(Fre. 1190-01) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-6-
Torque tighten the front brake hose union on the front brake calliper17 N.m.
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Clip the front brake hose cap on to the base of the shock absorber, aligning the marks made
using a indelible pencil.
Bleed the braking circuit(see Braking
circuit: Bleed) .
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x03x05-01x37-1-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
FRONT BRAKE CALLIPER: REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
pedal press
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
CAUTION
Prepare for brake fluid outflow to prevent damage to the mechanical parts and
bodywork around the braking system.
REMOVAL
Fit the
pedal pressto
the brake pedal to limit the outflow of brake fluid.
Remove the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the brake calliper(see 31A, Front axle components,
-1-
Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view)
.
Remove the piston using compressed air, making sure to insert a wooden block between the calliper
and the piston to prevent damage. Any trace of impact on the end panel will render it unusable.
-2-
Remove the dust seal.
-3-
Remove the rectangular section seal from the calliper groove with a round edged spring blade (feeler
gauge).
CAUTION
The whole calliper must systematically be replaced if there are any scratches in the
calliper bore.
Clean the parts using methylated spirit.
-4-
REFITTING
Refit:
the rectangular section seal in the calliper groove,
the piston after coating it with brake fluid,
the dust seal.
Refit the brake calliper(see 31A, Front axle components,
-5-
Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view)
.
Refit the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
CAUTION
Replace all faulty parts with new original parts.
Bleed the brake circuit(see Braking
circuit: Bleed) .
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x03x05-01x22-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
FRONT BRAKE DISC: DESCRIPTION
1. PREPARATION OPERATION FOR CHECK
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) .
Remove the wheel in questionWheel: Removal - Refitting .
2. CHECKING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Note:
Use a Palmer type tool to check the thickness of the disc.
-1-
Position the Palmer tool(1 ) to measure the disc thickness.
-2-
Measure the thickness of the disc at 4 points in order (90 apart).
Compare the values with those recommended by the manufacturer(see Brake:
Specifications) .
3. FINAL OPERATION
Replace the discs if necessary(see 31A, Front axle components,
Refit the wheel in questionWheel: Removal - Refitting .
-3-
Front brake disc: Removal - Refitting)
.
Repair-13x03x03x03-02x21-1-25-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
FRONT BRAKE DISC: DESCRIPTION
1. PREPARATION OPERATION FOR CHECK
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Remove the wheel in questionWheel: Removal - Refitting .
2. CHECKING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Note:
Use a Palmer type tool to check the thickness of the disc.
-1-
Position the Palmer tool(1 ) to measure the disc thickness.
-2-
Measure the thickness of the disc at 4 points in order (90 apart).
Compare the values with those recommended by the manufacturerBrake:
Specifications
.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Replace the discs if necessary(see 31A, Front axle components,
-3-
Front brake disc: Removal - Refitting)
.
Refit the wheel in questionWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Repair-13x03x03x03-02x21-1-25-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
FRONT BRAKE DISC: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Brake discs cannot be reground. If there is excessive wear or scoring, the brake discs must be replaced
(see Brake: Specifications) .
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove (see 31A, Front axle components, Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the front brake pads,
the front brake calliper mounting.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the brake disc(see 31A, Front axle components,
Front hub carrier assembly: Exploded view)
.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean the discs using brake cleaner(see Vehicle:
Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B,
-1-
Consumables -
Products).
Dry the surface of the discs.
Clean the mating faces of the disc on the hub using a wire brush and brake cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts
and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the brake disc with a new bolt(see 31A, Front axle components,
view ) .
Front hub carrier assembly: Exploded
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x03x03-01x37-1-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT BRAKE DISC: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Brake discs cannot be reground. If there is excessive wear or scoring, the brake discs must be replaced
Brake: Specifications .
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Front
assembly: Exploded view .
hub carrier
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view :
the front brake pads,
the front brake calliper mounting.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the brake discFront
hub carrier assembly: Exploded view
.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean the discs using brake cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for
-1-
the repair
(04B, Consumables -
Products).
Dry the surface of the discs.
Clean the mating faces of the disc on the hub using a wire brush and brake cleanerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Parts and
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the brake disc with a new boltFront
hub carrier assembly: Exploded view
.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x03x03-01x37-1-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT BRAKE HOSE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
pedal press
WARNING
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before
carrying out any repair(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions
for the repair) .
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Place:
the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting ,
the wheels straight-ahead,
a pedal presson the brake pedal to limit the outflow of brake fluid.
Remove the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-1-
Loosen the hose union(1 ) on the rigid pipe union.
Remove the retaining(2 ) fork from the hose.
To avoid the premature damage of the brake hose by friction, observe the following procedure before
unclipping the hose:
Set the wheels straight ahead.
If the vehicle is equipped:
mark the position of the cap on the base of the shock absorber using a permanent marker,
unclip the brake hose cap(3) from the shock absorber base.
-2-
Loosen the hose union on the brake calliper.
Remove the brake hose.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
CAUTION
In order not to damage the brake hose:
do not tension the hose,
do not twist the hose,
check that there is no contact with the surrounding components.
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Refit the brake hose at the calliper end.
Torque tighten the brake hose union on the calliperBrake circuit: Tightening torque .
Clip the brake hose cap onto the base of the shock absorber by aligning the marks made with the
indelible marker pen (if the vehicle is equipped).
Refit:
the brake hose on the rigid pipe union,
the hose retaining fork.
Torque tighten the brake hose union on the rigid pipe unionBrake circuit: Tightening torque .
2. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the pedal
pressfrom
the brake pedal.
Bleed the brake circuitBraking
circuit: Bleed
.
-3-
Repair-13x03x09x02-01x37-1-28-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
FRONT BRAKE PADS: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Brake calliper piston return tool.
Fre. 1190-01
Equipment required
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
In order not to damage the brake hose:
do not tension the hose,
do not twist the hose,
check that there is no contact with the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Mark the position of the front brake hose cap(1 ) on the base of the shock absorber using a
pencil .
Unclip the front brake hose cap(1 ) from the shock absorber base.
-2-
indelible
Disconnect the connector(2 ) of the front brake pad wear warning light.
-3-
Unclip the cable of the front brake pad wear warning light at(3 ) .
Remove (see 31A, Front axle components, Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the cap of the lower guide pin bolt,
the bolt of the lower guide pin.
Tip the front brake calliper.
Remove the front brake pads(see 31A, Front axle components,
-4-
Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view)
.
Remove the noise reducing fins(4 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Measure the thickness of the brake pads and compare them with the minimum values(see Brake:
-5-
Specifications ) .
Do not allow friction materials to come into contact with grease, oil or other lubricants and
cleaning products which are mineral oil based.
Clean using a wire brush and brake cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables Products):
the front calliper mountings,
the front callipers.
Push the front brake calliper piston fully into its housing using the toolBrake calliper piston return
tool. (Fre. 1190-01) .
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit (see 31A, Front axle components, Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the noise-reducing fins,
the front brake pads.
Fit the front brake calliper.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Clip the front brake hose cap on to the base of the shock absorber, aligning the marks made
using a indelible pencil.
-6-
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x03x01-01x37-1-31-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
FRONT BUMPER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting ,
the headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting (80B, Headlights).
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the bolts(1 ) .
-2-
Remove the bolts(2 ) .
-3-
Remove the bolts(3 ) .
-4-
Unclip the side sections of the front bumper by(4 ) .
-5-
Partially remove the front bumper by(5 ) (this operation requires two people).
Disconnect the fog light connectors.
Remove the front bumper (this operation requires two people).
-6-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x05x02-01x37-1-21-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
FRONT CAMERA : REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Target screen for rear view camera adjustment
Target screen for front view camera adjustment
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
Remove:
the centre trim(1) ,
the side trims(2) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the front camera connector(3 ) .
Remove (5 ) the front camera bracket by unclipping with care the clips(4 ) .
Note:
Unclip carefully the front camera bracket from the windscreen support; damage on windscreen support causes a replacement of the windscreen.
-2-
Remove:
the front camera screws(6) ,
the front camera.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Part always to be replaced:
the front camera screws.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the front camera on its bracket,
the front camera screws.
Torque tighten the front camera screws on the front camera bracket1.75 N.m .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
3. CALIBRATION
Position the vehicle on a level horizontal working area.
Ensure that:
the luggage compartment is empty,
the tyre pressure is set to the standard tuning.
During the calibration operation, no passenger must be in the vehicle.
-3-
Mark the central axis of the vehicle on the bumper by fitting the plumb line on the front bumper pin(7 )
Position the gaugeTarget screen for rear view camera adjustment on the ground ahead and parallel to the vehicle, aligning the central axis of the vehicle with the central black line(8 ) of
the gauge.
Move the gaugeTarget screen for rear view camera adjustment forward so that the two front wheels are in contact with the gauge, ensuring that the two wheels touch the gauge at(9 ) .
Check that the central axis of the vehicle is correctly aligned with the central black line of the gauge(8 ) .
Note:
Incorrect alignment of the two marks prevents the image from being adjusted correctly.
If the marks are not aligned, align them before unrolling the gauge.
Unroll the gauge completely ahead the vehicle, ensuring that the axes have not moved.
-4-
From the front wheel axle(10) , measure the3000
mm (11) each
side of the vehicle, parallel to the central black line of the gauge(8) .
make a mark(12) on the gauge, perpendicular to the central black line of the gauge,
position the right foot of theTarget screen for front view camera adjustment on the central black line of the gauge at(8)
Note:
The two targets plane shall be located at a distance of 3000 mmof the front axle vehicle.
The right target shall be aligned with the vehicle center line with a maximum tolerance of +/- 50 mm.
Adjust the targets height(X1 ) to 1.45 musing the foot height adjustment screws.
Note:
The maximum height position deviation of the left/right foot of theTarget screen for front view camera adjustment is +/- 9 mm(wich stands for +/- 1 of roll angle between
the two targets and the horizontal line).
Switch on the ignition.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select Front camera computer ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-80x03x03x13-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT CENTRE SEAT BELT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
Exploded view ) (75A, Front seat frames and mechanisms).
bench seat:
Note:
The seat belt must be handled by the inertia reel mechanism (risk of damaging the
strap).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Note:
If the vehicle is equipped with a passenger frontal airbag, the front centre seat belt is
equipped with a pyrotechnic system. The battery must be disconnected before the
operation.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a passenger frontal airbag, the front centre seat belt
is equipped with a mechanical inertia reel. It is not necessary to disconnect the
battery.
Remove the complete front bench seat(see Front
bench seat: Exploded view) (75A,
-1-
Front seat frames and
mechanisms).
Remove the casing of the front bench seat belt inertia reel(see Front
Front seat frames and mechanisms).
Remove the casing for the seat belt return mechanism(see Front
seat frames and mechanisms).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
bench seat: Exploded view) (75A,
bench seat: Exploded view) (75A,
Front
Unclip the front bench seat belt casing by(1 ) .
Slide the seat belt casing of the front bench seat at(2 ) in order to release the retaining sections of the
front bench seatback cover.
-3-
Detach the closure strip of the front bench seat belt strap guide at(3 ) .
Extract the front bench seat belt from its guide.
Remove the front bench seat belt(see Front
mechanisms).
bench seat: Exploded view) (75A,
REFITTING
-4-
Front seat frames and
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the mountings of the front centre seat belt
Detach the double-sided adhesive tape from the closure strip of the front bench seat belt strap guide.
Use a LINT-FREE CLOTHsoaked in heptane(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B,
Consumables - Products) to clean the two parts in contact with the front bench seat belt strap guide.
Use a clean and dry LINT-FREE CLOTH(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B,
Consumables - Products) to wipe the two parts in contact with the front bench seat belt strap guide.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the front bench seat belt(see Front
mechanisms).
bench seat: Exploded view) (75A,
Front seat frames and
Insert the front bench seat belt strap in its guide.
Note:
Check that the seat belt is not twisted between the inertia reel and the front bench
seat belt return mechanism.
Note:
Check that the seat belt is not twisted between the front bench seat belt return
mechanism and the seat belt lower fitting on the bench seat.
-5-
Bond:
double-sided adhesive tapes(10) on the closure strip of the front bench seat belt strap guide,
the closure strip of the front bench seat belt strap guide on the strap guide.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-6-
-7-
Refit:
the front bench seat belt casing,
the retaining strips at(11) then (12) .
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-8-
WARNING
To eliminate the risk of any accident, do not reuse pyrotechnic components.
It is essential to destroy pretensioners or airbags before scrapping a vehicle or a part
only (see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Airbags and pretensioners: Recycling - Destruction) .
4. CHECKING AFTER REPAIR
Check for correct operation 2 times by unreeling the front bench seat belt 300 mmand allowing it to
return.
Check that the front bench seat belt locks correctly by pulling the front bench seat belt strap with
increasing speed 200to 300mmmaximum until the inertia reel locks.
Repair-31x02x01x27-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-9-
FRONT CROSS MEMBER UNDER FRONT SEAT: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Front cross member under front seat
THLE
1.2
(2 )
Front seat mounting bracket
HLE
1.5
-2-
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x03x18x02-02x49-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT DOOR SILL LINING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Remove:
the front side door seal partially at(1) ,
the bonnet release controlBonnet release control: Removal - Refitting (52A, Non-side opening element
mechanisms).
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the front door sill lining(2 ) at (3 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
-2-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x02x06x04-01x37-1-20-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT DRIVESHAFT HUB CARRIER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Hub locking tool.
Rou. 604-01
Ball joint extractor.
Tav. 476
Universal driveshaft push back tool (plate and claws without ram).
Tav. 1050-04
Equipment required
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front axle assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
In order not to damage the brake hose:
do not tension the hose,
do not twist the hose,
check that there is no contact with the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
-1-
Remove the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Mark the position of the front brake hose cap(1 ) on the shock absorber base using an
Unclip the front brake hose cap(1 ) from the shock absorber base.
SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE LEFT-HAND SIDE
-2-
indelible
pencil.
Disconnect the connector(2 ) from the front brake pad wear warning light.
-3-
Unclip the wiring of the front brake pad wear warning light from the brake calliper at(3 ) .
Remove the calliper mounting bolts(see 31A, Front axle components,
view ) .
Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded
Attach the " brake calliper mounting - brake calliper " assembly to the shock absorber spring.
Remove the front brake disc(see 31A, Front axle components,
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
Front hub carrier assembly: Exploded view)
.
Remove the bolt from the front wheel speed sensor(see 31A, Front axle components,
assembly: Exploded view) .
Front hub carrier
Remove the wheel speed sensor from its housing.
CAUTION
In order to prevent irreversible damage to the front hub bearing:
Do not loosen or tighten the driveshaft nut when the wheels are on the ground.
Do not place the vehicle with its wheels on the ground when the driveshaft has been
loosened or removed.
Remove:
the hub nutDriveshaft assembly: Exploded view using theHub locking tool.(Rou. 604-01) ,
the track rod end nut(see Steering assembly: Exploded view) ,
the track rod end protector.
-5-
Detach the track rod end from the front driveshaft hub carrier using the toolBall joint extractor.(Tav.
476 ) .
Remove the nut from the front driveshaft lower arm ball joint(see 31A, Front axle components,
assembly: Exploded view) .
-6-
Front axle
Detach:
the ball joint of the front driveshaft lower arm using a ball joint extractor,
the driveshaft from the front driveshaft hub carrier using the toolUniversal driveshaft push back tool (plate and
claws without ram).(Tav. 1050-04) .
Remove (see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle assembly: Exploded view) :
the shock absorber base bolts,
the front driveshaft hub carrier.
When replacing the front driveshaft hub carrier, remove the lower arm ball joint(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) .
-7-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Refit the lower arm ball joint(see 31A, Front axle components,
Front hub carrier assembly: Exploded view)
.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
CAUTION
In order to prevent irreversible damage to the front hub bearing:
Do not loosen or tighten the driveshaft nut when the wheels are on the ground.
Do not place the vehicle with its wheels on the ground when the driveshaft has been
loosened or removed.
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Clip the front brake hose cap on to the base of the shock absorber, aligning the marks made using a
indelible pencil .
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x02x03x12-01x37-1-30-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
FRONT DRIVESHAFT LOWER ARM BALL JOINT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Front
assembly: Exploded view .
hub carrier
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the front driveshaft hub carrierFront hub carrier assembly: Exploded view .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Fit the front driveshaft hub carrier in a vice equipped with jaws.
Note:
" Hub carrier/lower ball joint " assembly specification (right-hand side):
The screwing direction of the lower arm ball joint on the right-hand hub carrier may be
left or right.
Remove the front driveshaft lower arm ball joint before ordering new:
lower arm ball joint with a left pitch: order the lower arm ball joint according to the criteria:
produced before 07/23/2010.
lower arm ball joint with a right pitch: order the lower arm ball joint according to the criteria:
produced after 07/23/2010.
Remove the front driveshaft lower arm ball joint using a 46 mmlong socketFront
Exploded view .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
hub carrier assembly:
Remove any glue residue on the threadings of the hub carrier.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the front driveshaft lower arm ball jointFront
Lock the front driveshaft lower arm ball joint at(1 ) .
-2-
hub carrier assembly: Exploded view
.
Repair-13x02x03x10-01x37-1-15-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT DRIVESHAFT LOWER ARM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front axle assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
Remove the nut from the front driveshaft lower arm ball joint(see 31A, Front axle components,
assembly: Exploded view) .
Front axle
Remove the ball joint of the front driveshaft lower arm from the front driveshaft lower arm using a ball
joint extractor.
Remove:
the bolts of the front driveshaft lower arm on the front axle subframe(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle
assembly: Exploded view) ,
the front driveshaft lower arm.
REFITTING
-1-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-13x02x03x02-01x37-1-28-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT ELECTRIC WINDOW SWITCH ON PASSENGER DOOR: REMOVAL REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-1-
Remove the front window winder switch plate on the passenger door using theSet of trim removal
levers. (Car. 1363 ) by pressing on the clips(1 ) and (2 ) .
Disconnect the connector.
Remove switch.
REMOVAL
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
-2-
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Clip the switch.
Connect the connector.
Clip the front window winder switch plate onto the passenger door.
Repair-30x04x03x26-01x37-1-5-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT ELECTRIC WINDOW SWITCHES ON DRIVER'S DOOR: REMOVAL REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-1-
Remove the front window switch plate on the driver's door using theSet of trim removal levers.(Car.
1363 ) by pressing on the clips(1 ) .
Disconnect the connectors.
Unclip the switches.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
-2-
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Clip on the switches.
Connect the connectors.
Clip the front window switch plate onto the driver's door.
Repair-30x04x03x25-01x37-1-6-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT END PANEL MOUNTING CENTRE LOWER SUPPORT: REMOVAL REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment),
the headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting (80B, Headlights),
the front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the centre lower mounting support of the front end panel.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-40x06x04x07-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT END PANEL SIDE SUPPORT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. INTERMEDIATE SIDE SUPPORT OF FRONT END PANEL
1- REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the
the
the
the
radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment),
headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting (80B, Headlights),
front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection),
front end panel(see 42A, Front upper structure, Front end panel: Removal - Refitting) .
-1-
Drill out the rivets(1 ) .
Remove the front bumper support.
2- REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Remove:
the bolts(2) ,
the intermediate side support of the front end panel.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the rivets of the front bumper mounting
-3-
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
REMOVAL
1. LOWER SIDE SUPPORT OF FRONT END PANEL
1- REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment),
the headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting (80B, Headlights).
2- REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
Remove:
the bolts(3) ,
the lower side support of the front end panel.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-5-
Repair-40x06x06x08-01x37-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
FRONT END PANEL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment),
the headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting (80B, Headlights),
the front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection),
the lower side supports of the front end panel(see 42A, Front upper structure, Front end panel side support:
Removal - Refitting) ,
the audible warningAudible warning: Removal - Refitting (82B, Horn).
-1-
Remove:
the bonnet lock bolts(1) ,
the permanent shim(2) .
Release the bonnet catch.
Unclip the bonnet opening control cable.
-2-
Remove:
the retaining clip(3) of the power-assisted steering fluid reservoir,
the power-assisted steering fluid reservoir partially.
Remove the bolt from the air filter unit air inlet pipeAir
Move aside the air inlet pipe from the air filter unit.
-3-
inlet assembly: Exploded view
(12A, Fuel mixture).
Remove:
the rivets(4) of the front bumper mounting,
the front bumper support.
Remove the oil filler neck boltsEngine
assembly).
oil circuit assembly: Exploded view
Move aside the oil filler neck.
-4-
(10A, Engine and cylinder block
Unclip the connector(5 ) .
Unclip the connector.
Keep the bonnet open.
Clip the bonnet stay onto the front end panel.
-5-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove:
the bolts(6) ,
the front end panel.
-6-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the rivets of the front bumper mounting.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the bonnet catch bolts8 N.m.
Repair-40x06x04-01x37-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
FRONT END SIDE CROSS MEMBER: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Front end side cross member
Mild steel
1.2
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x02x02x10-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT FOG LIGHT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the front section of the front wheel arch linerFront wheel arch liner: Removal - Refitting (55A,
Exterior protection).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the front fog light connector(1 ) .
Remove:
the bolts(2) from the front fog light,
the front fog light.
1- WHEN REPLACING THE FRONT FOG LIGHT
-2-
Remove the front fog light bulb(see 80B, Headlights ,
Front fog light bulb: Removal - Refitting)
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x02x02x06-01x37-1-22-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
.
FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the front section of the front wheel arch linerFront wheel arch liner: Removal - Refitting (55A,
Exterior protection).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the front fog light connector(1 ) .
Remove the front fog light bulb by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise(2 ) .
REFITTING
-2-
Note:
If the bulbs are changed, only use approved bulbs.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x02x02x05-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT FOG LIGHT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the front section of the front wheel arch linerFront wheel arch liner: Removal - Refitting (55A,
Exterior protection).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the front fog light connector(1 ) .
Remove:
the bolts(2) from the front fog light,
the front fog light.
1- WHEN REPLACING THE FRONT FOG LIGHT
-2-
Remove the front fog light bulb(see 80B, Headlights ,
Front fog light bulb: Removal - Refitting)
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x02x02x06-01x37-1-22-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
.
FRONT FOOTWELL AIR DISTRIBUTION DUCT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 61A, Heating,
distribution circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
1- LEFT-HAND SIDE
Remove:
the gloveboxGlovebox: Removal - Refitting ( 57A, Interior equipment),
the central consoleCentre console: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment).
2- RIGHT-HAND SIDE
Remove:
the dashboard lower trimDashboard lower trim: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment),
the central consoleCentre console: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the A-pillar air duct on the side concerned(see 61A, Heating,
Exploded view ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x02x01x37-01x37-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
Air distribution circuit assembly:
Air
FRONT HEADREST: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Raise the front seat headrest fully.
-1-
seat: Exploded
Press the unlocking buttons on each front seat headrest guide at(1 ) .
Remove the front seat headrest at(2 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x18x02x06-01x37-1-6-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT HUB CARRIER ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
(see Illustration key: Description) .
-1-
Marks
Designations
Informations
1
Bearing of front knuckle
2
Knukle of front half axle
3
Lower ball joint
4
Protector of disc
5
Hub of front axle
(see 31A,
Front axle components, Front driveshaft hub carrier: Removal - Refitting)
6
Nut of hub
(see 31A,
Front axle components, Front driveshaft hub carrier: Removal - Refitting)
7
Front disc
8
Wheel support
9
Hide hub
(see 31A,
Front axle components, Front hub carrier bearing: Removal - Refitting)
10
Spring ring of front knuckle's bearing
(see 31A,
Front axle components, Front hub carrier bearing: Removal - Refitting)
11
Spindle
(see 31A,
Front axle components, Front hub carrier bearing: Removal - Refitting)
12
Ball joint protector
13
Screw of protector disc
14
ABS sensor
(see 31A,
(see 31A,
(see 31A,
Front axle components, Front hub carrier bearing: Removal - Refitting)
Front axle components, Front driveshaft hub carrier: Removal - Refitting)
Front axle components, Front driveshaft lower arm ball joint: Removal - Refitting)
(see 31A,
(see 31A,
Front axle components, Front brake disc: Removal - Refitting)
Front axle components, Front driveshaft lower arm ball joint: Removal - Refitting)
(see Wheel speed sensor: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-13x02x03x21-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT HUB CARRIER BEARING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 31A, Front axle
components , Front hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
In order not to damage the brake hose:
do not tension the hose,
do not twist the hose,
check that there is no contact with the surrounding components.
CAUTION
In order to prevent irreversible damage to the front hub bearing:
Do not loosen or tighten the driveshaft nut when the wheels are on the ground.
Do not place the vehicle with its wheels on the ground when the driveshaft has been
loosened or removed.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove (see 31A, Front axle components, Front brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the front brake pads,
-1-
the front brake calliper mounting.
Remove (see 31A, Front axle components, Front hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) :
the front brake disc,
the front driveshaft hub carrier.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the elastic ring from the front driveshaft hub carrier(see 31A, Front axle components,
carrier assembly: Exploded view ) .
Front hub
Remove the hub with a press, applying pressure with a tube with an external diameter of 54 mm.
-2-
Place the extractor jaws(1 ) in the groove of the internal bush(2 ) .
Remove the internal bush from the hub, applying pressure to the hub with a tube with an external
diameter of 54 mm.
-3-
Remove the bearing from the front driveshaft hub carrier by applying pressure to the internal bush with
a tube with an external diameter of 84 mm.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean:
the internal and external surfaces of the bearing, in contact with the hub carrier and the hub,
-4-
the hub carrier surfaces in contact with the bearing,
the hub surfaces in contact with the bearing.
CAUTION
To ensure that the wheel speed sensor works properly, do not mark the sensor target
on the bearing.
CAUTION
Do not press the bearing's internal bush so as to avoid damaging the bearing (very
high shrink-fitting force).
Check the condition of the hub surface and the bore of the hub carrier in contact with the bearing.
Replace any component whose contact surfaces have deep scratches or cracks.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-5-
-6-
CAUTION
To ensure that the wheel speed sensor works properly, do not mark the sensor target
(3 ) on the bearing.
Position the sensor target on the wheel side of the bearing on the hub carrier.
-7-
Apply pressure to the external bush with a tube with an external diameter of 89 mmand an
internal diameter of 84 mm(old bearing).
Apply a fitting force of 50,000 Nto ensure that the bearing is correctly fitted on the hub carrier
shoulder.
Refit:
-8-
the hub using a tube with an external diameter of
70 mm,
the elastic ring on the front driveshaft hub carrier.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x02x03x15-01x37-1-33-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-9-
FRONT IMPACT CROSS MEMBER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the front impact cross member.
REFITTING
-2-
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the front impact cross member,
the bolts.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection).
Repair-40x02x02x01-01x37-1-8-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT JACKING POINT: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
-2-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Jack support front closure panel component
HLE
1.0
(2 )
Front jacking point
HLE
1.5
(3 )
Jack support rear closure panel component
Mild steel
1.0
(4 )
Jack support reinforcement
HLE
1.5
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Use a repair bench to ensure the positioning of the points and the geometry of the
axle assemblies.
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x04x08-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT LIGHTING: LIST AND LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
1. LIST OF COMPONENTS
1- THE FRONT LIGHTING CONSISTS OF:
headlights(see 80B, Headlights, Headlight: Removal - Refitting)
headlight bulbs(see 80B, Headlights, Headlight bulb: Removal - Refitting)
headlight beam adjustment actuators(see 80B, Headlights, Remote headlight beam adjustment actuator:
Removal - Refitting)
a remote headlight beam adjustment control(see 80B, Headlights, Remote headlight beam adjustment control:
Removal - Refitting)
side indicators(see 80B, Headlights, Side indicator: Removal - Refitting)
front fog lights(see 80B, Headlights, Front fog light: Removal - Refitting)
front fog light bulbs(see 80B, Headlights, Front fog light bulb: Removal - Refitting)
2. LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
HEADLIGHTS
-1-
(1) Direction indicator bulb
(2) side light bulb
(3) main beam headlight bulb
(4) dipped beam headlight bulb
REMOTE HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT ACTUATOR
-2-
REMOTE HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT CONTROL
-3-
SIDE INDICATOR
-4-
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
-5-
FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB
-6-
Repair-80x02x02-02x51-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
FRONT SEAT BASE TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
view ) .
seat: Exploded
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for repair) (88C, Airbags and pretensioners),
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
Never handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioners or airbags) near to a source of
heat or naked flame - they may be triggered.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove the front seat(see Front
seat: Exploded view)
-1-
Remove the front seat base exterior casing(see Front
seat: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Unclip the lower retaining section of the front seat base cover.
-2-
Unclip the side retaining sections of the front seat base cover.
-3-
Unclip the front seat base cover.
Remove the " foam - cover " assembly.
-4-
Remove the front seat base cover.
-5-
CAUTION
To avoid any risk of damaging the foam, separate the cover from the foam by holding
the velcro strips.
REFITTING
-6-
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
To avoid any risk of detaching or creating folds in the cover, check that the velcro
strips are secured correctly on the foam. If the velcro strips tear, replace the foam.
-7-
Align the velcro strips with the marks.
Note:
The pre-markings on the foam are a guide for positioning the ends of the velcro strips.
2. FINAL OPERATION
-8-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x10x02x02-01x37-1-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-9-
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
view ) (75A, Front seat frames and mechanisms).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
seat: Exploded
Cut the plastic clip(1 ) .
Disconnect the connector for the front seat belt buckle using a shim(2 )
Remove the front seat belt buckle(see Front
mechanisms).
seat: Exploded view) (75A,
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-31x02x01x19-01x37-1-9-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
Front seat frames and
FRONT SEAT FRAME: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
view ) .
seat: Exploded
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for repair) (88C, Airbags and pretensioners),
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
Never handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioners or airbags) near to a source of
heat or naked flame - they may be triggered.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove (see Front seat: Exploded view) :
the front seat,
the seat belt buckle of the front seat,
the front seat runner bolts on the front seat frame,
the front seat runner,
the seat belt stalk mounting of the front seat.
-1-
Remove (see Front seat: Exploded view) :
the trim of the front seat height adjustment control,
the front seat height adjustment control.
Remove the front seat exterior casing(see Front
seat: Exploded view) .
Remove the " foam - cover " assembly from the front seat base(see Front
seat: Exploded view) .
Remove (see Front seat: Exploded view) :
the rivets of the front seat height adjustment mechanism,
the front seat height adjustment mechanism.
CAUTION
To prevent any risk of damaging the covers and mechanisms, recover any metal
residues when cutting the seat trim clips and/or drilling out the rivet.
Remove the front seat armrest(see Front
seat: Exploded view) .
Remove (see Front seat: Exploded view) :
the front seat headrest,
the front seatback angle control,
the front seatback " foam - cover " assembly,
the front seat headrest guides.
Remove the front seat chest-level side airbag(see Front
Remove (see Front seat: Exploded view) :
the rivets of the front seat armrest support,
-2-
seat: Exploded view) .
the front seat armrest support.
Remove (see Front seat: Exploded view) :
the front seat lumbar pad,
the retaining clip,
the front seat electrical wiring.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x08x02-01x37-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT SEAT LOWER CASING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
1- FRONT SEAT BASE EXTERIOR CASING
-1-
seat: Exploded
-2-
Remove the front seat base exterior casing.
2- FRONT SEAT BASE INTERIOR CASING
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x10x02x18-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT SEAT LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove (see Front seat: Exploded view) :
the front seat,
the front seat headrest.
Remove the front seat armrest(see Front
seat: Exploded view) .
Remove the front seatback " foam - cover " assembly(see Front
seat: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Note:
For this operation, the lumbar pad must be loose.
-1-
seat: Exploded
Drill the front seat lumbar adjustment mechanism rivet(see Front
seat: Exploded view) .
CAUTION
To prevent any risk of damaging the covers and mechanisms, recover any metal
residues when cutting the seat trim clips and/or drilling out the rivet.
Unclip the lumbar pad of the front seat(see Front
seat: Exploded view) .
Remove the " lumbar adjustment mechanism - lumbar pad " assembly(see Front
seat: Exploded view) .
Note:
The Parts Department supplies the lumbar adjustment mechanism assembled with
the lumbar pad.
REFITTING
Note:
The lumbar pad springs are positioned on the front seatback frame with the hook
towards the rear
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x08x04x10-01x37-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT SEAT REAR MOUNTING EXTERIOR UNIT: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Seat exterior rear mounting bracket
HLE
1.8
(2 )
Seat exterior rear mounting reinforcement
HLE
1.8
-2-
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x03x18x07-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT SEATBACK TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Front
view ) .
seat: Exploded
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for the repair (88C, Airbag and pretensioners),
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
Never handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioners or airbags) near to a source of
heat or naked flame - they may be triggered.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove (see Front seat: Exploded view) :
the front seat,
the front seat headrest.
-1-
Remove the front seat armrest(see Front
seat: Exploded view) .
-2-
Unclip:
the lower retaining sections of the front seatback cover at(3) ,
the casing of the front seat lumbar adjustment control at(4) .
Remove the casing of the front seat lumbar adjustment control(5 ) .
-3-
-4-
Remove the front seatback angle control by pulling it energetically at(6 ) .
CAUTION
To avoid any risk of the front seatback angle control not being held securely, check
that the locking clips are in good condition. If damaged (clip broken, bleached, etc.),
replace the front seatback angle control.
-5-
Partially remove the front seatback cover at(7 ) .
-6-
Remove the front seatback cover.
-7-
CAUTION
To avoid any risk of damaging the foam, separate the cover from the foam by holding
the velcro strips.
Remove the front seat headrest guides(see Front
-8-
seat: Exploded view) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
To avoid any risk of detaching or creating folds in the cover, check that the velcro
strips are secured correctly on the foam. If the velcro strips tear, replace the foam.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-9-
Align the velcro strips with the marks.
Note:
The pre-markings on the foam are a guide for positioning the ends of the velcro strips.
3. FINAL OPERATION
- 10 -
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x10x02x06-01x37-1-29-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
FRONT SECTION OF FRONT SIDE MEMBER CLOSURE PANEL:
REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Front section of front side member closure panel
HLE
2.1
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x02x06x10-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT SECTION OF FRONT SIDE MEMBER REAR CLOSURE PANEL:
REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Front left-hand side member impact reinforcement
THLE
1.8
(2 )
Front left-hand side member interior reinforcement
Mild steel
1.3
-2-
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x02x06x11-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND SPRING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
spring compressor
spanner for shock absorber rod nut
indelible pencil
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety
instructions (see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 31A,
assembly: Exploded view) .
Front axle components, Front axle
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation recommendations before
carrying out any repair:
(see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
In order not to damage the brake hose:
do not tension the hose,
do not twist the hose,
check that there is no contact with the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Move the coolant reservoirCoolant
circuit assembly: Exploded view
(19A, Cooling).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Mark the position of the front brake hose cap on the base of the shock absorber using a
Unclip the front brake hose cap(1 ) from the shock absorber base.
-2-
indelible
pencil.
Unclip the wiring of the wheel speed sensor from the base of the shock absorber at(2 ) .
Remove the nut from the anti-roll bar tie rod on the base of the shock absorber(see 31A,
.
Front axle components, Front axle
assembly: Exploded view)
Move the anti-roll bar tie rod away from the base of the shock absorber.
Remove the shock absorber bolts(see 31A,
Front axle components, Front axle assembly: Exploded view)
Attach the hub carrier to the subframe.
Remove (see 31A, Front axle components, Front axle assembly: Exploded view) :
the rebound cup,
the " spring - shock absorber " assembly.
-3-
.
Position the appropriate cups on the
Position the
spring compressoron
spring compressor.
the spring.
Put the " spring compressor - spring " assembly in a vice equipped with jaws.
Compress the spring using the
spring compressoruntil
the spring is released.
-4-
Remove the shock absorber rod nut using the spanner
for shock absorber rod nut.
Separate the various components which make up the " spring/shock absorber " assembly.
Decompress the spring.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-5-
Replace any faulty filter unit components(see 31A,
Front axle components, Front axle assembly: Exploded view)
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Place the spring compressor in a vice equipped with jaws.
Compress the spring.
-6-
.
Insert the spring in the neck of the cup.
-7-
Check that the the spring is correctly positioned on the cup(3 ) .
Respect the order and direction of fitting for the constituent parts.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Clip the front brake hose cap on to the base of the shock absorber, aligning the marks made using a
-8-
indelible
pencil.
Repair-13x02x04x03-01x37-1-30-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-9-
FRONT SIDE DOOR ELECTRIC WINDOW MECHANISM: REMOVAL REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 51A, Side
element mechanisms, Front side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove Front side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side
opening elements trim):
the front side door interior handle,
the front side door trim,
the door sealing film.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the bolt(1 ) .
Secure the window in the raised position using masking tape.
Unclip the window from the front side door electric window mechanism by(2 ) .
Partially remove the front side door electric window mechanism(see 51A, Side
mechanisms , Front side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening element
Disconnect the electric window motor connector.
Remove the front side door electric window mechanism(see 51A, Side
-2-
opening element mechanisms, Front
side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view)
.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Carry out a function test.
Repair-50x02x06x02-01x37-1-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT SIDE DOOR FIXED WINDOW: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Front
element box section internal assembly: Exploded view .
side opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove Front side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening
elements trim):
the front side door interior handle,
the front side door trim,
the door sealing film.
Remove the front side door electric window mechanism .
Remove :
the
the
the
the
front side door interior weatherstrip,
front door window run channel, as necessary,
front side door sliding window,
support of the front side door run channel.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the front side door fixed window.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x04x06x02-01x37-1-8-1.xml
-1-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT SIDE DOOR INTERIOR OPENING CONTROL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Front side opening
element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening elements trim).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the blanking cover of the front side door interior handleFront side opening
passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening elements trim).
element assembly on the
Partially remove the front side door interior handle.
Unclip the front side door interior opening control cable(see 51A, Side
side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
Remove the front side door interior handleFront side opening
side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening elements trim).
element assembly on the passenger compartment
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x02x04x06-01x37-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
opening element mechanisms, Front
FRONT SIDE DOOR LOCK BARREL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
parts always to be replaced:
front side opening element lock barrel locking ring
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 51A, Side
element mechanisms, Front side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the front side door interior handleFront side opening
side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening elements trim).
element assembly on the passenger compartment
Remove the trim of the front side door lock barrel(see 51A, Side
opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
-1-
opening element mechanisms, Front side
Remove the blanking cover(1 ) .
Remove Front side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening
elements trim):
the front side door trim.
the door sealing film.
Remove the front side door channel(see 51A, Side
box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening element mechanisms, Front side opening element
-2-
Unlock the lock barrel locking ring(2 ) by (3 ) .
Unclip the exterior locking linkage(4 ) of the lock barrel locking ring by(5 ) .
Separate the clips on the lock barrel locking ring using a screwdriver.
Remove the lock barrel locking ring.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
-4-
Unlock the front side door lock barrel by(7 ) using a locally produced hook(8 ) .
Remove the front side door lock barrel(see 51A, Side
element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
REFITTING
-5-
opening element mechanisms, Front side opening
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
front side opening element lock barrel locking ring
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x02x02x10-01x37-1-26-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
.
FRONT SIDE DOOR LOCK: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 51A, Side
element mechanisms, Front side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove Front side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening
elements trim):
the front side door interior handle,
the front side door trim,
the door sealing film.
Remove the front side door channel(see 51A, Side
box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening element mechanisms, Front side opening element
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Partially remove the front side door lock(see 51A, Side
element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening element mechanisms, Front side opening
Disconnect the connector from the front side door lock.
Unclip the front side door exterior opening control cable(see 51A, Side
side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
Remove the front side door lock(see 51A, Side
section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening element mechanisms, Front
opening element mechanisms, Front side opening element box
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-1-
Repair-50x02x02x08-01x37-1-23-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT SIDE DOOR MANUAL WINDOW WINDER MECHANISM: REMOVAL REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 51A, Side
element mechanisms, Front side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove Front side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side
opening elements trim):
the
the
the
the
front side door window winder handle,
front side door interior handle,
front side door trim,
door sealing film.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the bolt(1 ) .
Secure the window in the raised position using masking tape.
Unclip the window from the front side door manual window winder mechanism by(2 ) .
Remove the front side door manual window winder mechanism(see 51A, Side
mechanisms , Front side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
-2-
opening element
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Carry out a function test.
Repair-50x02x06x04-01x37-1-14-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT SIDE DOOR SLIDE MOUNTING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 51A, Side
element mechanisms, Front side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove Front side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening
elements trim):
the front side door interior handle,
the front side door trim,
the door sealing film.
Remove the front side door electric window mechanism .
Remove (see 51A, Side opening element mechanisms, Front side opening element box section internal assembly:
Exploded view ) :
the front side door interior weatherstrip,
the front door window run channel, as necessary,
the front side door sliding window.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the support of the front side door run channel(see 51A, Side
side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-1-
opening element mechanisms, Front
Repair-50x02x06x10-01x37-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT SIDE DOOR TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 72A, Side
element trim , Front side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view ) .
opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove (see 72A, Side opening element trim, Front side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side:
Exploded view ) :
the front side door interior handle,
the door mirror cover,
the blanking covers,
the interior handle trim,
the front electric window switch.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the front side door trim(see 72A, Side opening element trim,
the passenger compartment side: Exploded view) .
REFITTING
Always replace the clips on the front side door trim.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x03x02x02-01x37-1-24-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
Front side opening element assembly on
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW WINDER HANDLE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Front side opening
element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening elements trim).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Pull the ring(1 ) towards the vehicle interior(2 ) .
-2-
-3-
Unclip the clip(3 ) .
Remove the front side door window winder handleFront side
compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening elements trim).
opening element assembly on the passenger
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x02x06x06-01x37-1-3-1.xml
-4-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT SIDE MEMBER, FRONT SECTION: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
1- LEFT-HAND SIDE
-1-
-2-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Front left-hand side member
HLE
2.3
(2 )
Front left-hand side member impact reinforcement
HLE
2.3
(3 )
Closure panel component of left hand A-pillar impact absorber unit
HLE
2.3
(4 )
Front bumper left-hand foot panel bracket
HLE
2.3
(5 )
Front left-hand wheel arch bracket
Mild steel
1.5
(6 )
Rear left-hand spacer
HLE
2.0
(7 )
Left-hand earth nut holder plate
Mild steel
1.0
(8 )
Left hand A-pillar multifunction mounting support
HLE
2.0
(9 )
Subframe front left-hand mounting plate
HLE
2.0
(10 )
Rear closure panel component of front left-hand side member
HLE
2.1
(11 )
Left-hand A-pillar hose support bracket
Mild steel
2.0
(12 )
Front left-hand side member reinforcement bracket
HLE
1.8
2- RIGHT-HAND SIDE
-3-
-4-
No.
(13 )
(14 )
(15 )
(16 )
(17 )
(18 )
(19 )
(20 )
(21 )
(22 )
(23 )
Description
Type
Thickness
(mm)
Closure panel component of A-pillar front impact absorber unit
HLE
2.3
Threaded bush
Mild
steel
4.0
Front tow hitch support
THLE
2.5
Front right-hand side member
HLE
2.3
Right-hand earth nut holder plate
Mild
steel
1.0
Rear height adjuster of engine rubber pad support
HLE
1.9
Closure panel component of height adjuster of engine rubber pad
support
HLE
2.0
Subframe front right-hand mounting plate
HLE
2.0
Brake hose support bracket
Mild
steel
1.9
Front towing ring
Mild
steel
10.0
Front bumper right-hand foot panel bracket
HLE
2.3
-5-
(24 )
(25 )
(26 )
(27 )
Front height adjuster of engine rubber pad support
HLE
1.9
Rear closure panel component of front right-hand side member
HLE
2.1
Rear mounting bracket of engine rubber pad support
Mild
steel
3.0
Engine rubber pad support
HLE
2.0
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
The options for replacing this part are as follows:
complete replacement AD,
partial replacement AB,
partial replacement AC.
-6-
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
-7-
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT LEFT-HAND SIDE AD
WARNING
Use a repair bench to ensure the positioning of the points and the geometry of the
axle assemblies.
1)PART IN POSITION
-8-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
2- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT RIGHT-HAND SIDE AD
WARNING
Use a repair bench to ensure the positioning of the points and the geometry of the
axle assemblies.
1)PART IN POSITION
-9-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
- 10 -
3- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT AB
WARNING
Use a repair bench to ensure the positioning of the points and the geometry of the
axle assemblies.
1)PART IN POSITION
DETAILED VIEW B
- 11 -
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
Make a butt weld using a bead of chain weld at(B) Connections by arc welding under shielding gas: Description
(MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
4- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT AC
- 12 -
WARNING
Use a repair bench to ensure the positioning of the points and the geometry of the
axle assemblies.
1)PART IN POSITION
DETAILED VIEW C
- 13 -
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
Make a butt weld using a bead of chain weld at(C) Connections by arc welding under shielding gas: Description
(MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
Repair-40x02x06x08-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 14 -
FRONT SIDE MEMBER, REAR SECTION: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Front side member rear part
THLE
1.5
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Use a repair bench to ensure the positioning of the points and the geometry of the
axle assemblies.
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x02x06x16-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT SIDE OPENING ELEMENT ASSEMBLY ON THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT SIDE: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Storage compartment
2
Door mirror cover
3
Door mirror cover clips
4
Door mirror sealing film
5
Blanking cover of front door interior opening control
6
Front side door interior opening control
7
Front blanking cover of front side door trim
8
Lower door light
Lower door light: Removal - Refitting
9
Interior handle trim
(Car. 1363)
10
Rear blanking cover of front side door trim
11
Front side door trim
12
Front electric window switch
13
Door sealing film
(Car. 1363)
Door sealing film: Removal - Refitting
Front side door interior opening control: Removal - Refitting
(see 72A,
Side opening element trim, Front side door trim: Removal - Refitting)
Door sealing film: Removal - Refitting
Repair-70x03x02x25-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT SIDE OPENING ELEMENT BOX SECTION INTERNAL ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
-1-
Mark
Description
1
Front side door striker panel
2
Front side door lock
3
Front side door exterior opening control cable
4
Front side door exterior handle module
5
Front side door lock barrel
6
Lock barrel locking ring
7
Front side door interior opening control cable
8
Blanking cover of front door interior opening control
9
Front side door interior opening control
10
Front side door check strap
11
Rivet of front side door exterior handle module
12
Exterior door handle
13
Information
Trim of front side door lock barrel
(see 51A,
Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door striker panel: Removal - Refitting)
(see 51A,
Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door lock: Removal - Refitting)
(see Front side door opening linkage: Removal - Refitting)
(see 51A,
(see 51A,
Side opening element mechanisms, Exterior door handle: Removal - Refitting)
Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door lock barrel: Removal - Refitting)
(see Front side door opening linkage: Removal - Refitting)
(see 51A,
Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door interior opening control: Removal - Refitting)
(see 51A,
Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door check strap: Removal - Refitting)
(see 51A,
Side opening element mechanisms, Exterior door handle: Removal - Refitting)
(Car. 1363)
Repair-50x02x22-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FRONT SIDE SEAT BELT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
parts always to be replaced:
Front seat belt inertia reel bolt
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for the
repair ) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
Never handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioners or airbags) near to a source of
heat or naked flame - they may be triggered.
Note:
The seat belt must be handled by the inertia reel mechanism (risk of damaging the
strap).
REMOVAL
-1-
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Note:
If the vehicle is equipped with a passenger frontal airbag, the passenger side seat belt
is equipped with a pyrotechnic system. The battery must be disconnected before the
operation.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a passenger frontal airbag, the passenger side seat
belt is equipped with a mechanical inertia reel. It is not necessary to disconnect the
battery.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the lower B-pillar trimB-pillar trim: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
-3-
Mark the wiring routing at the front side seat belt inertia reel.
Unlock at (1 ) the connector(2 ) of the front side seat belt inertia reel.
Disconnect the connector of the front side seat belt inertia reel.
-4-
Remove:
the front side seat belt inertia reel bolt(3) ,
the front side seat belt.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-5-
WARNING
After a seat belt pyrotechnic component is triggered, it is essential to replace certain
parts (see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for the repair) .
parts always to be replaced:
Front seat belt inertia reel bolt
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-6-
.
Position the indexing brackets(4 ) of the front side seat belt inertia reel in the notches on the body.
Refit the front side seat belt.
Torque tighten the front side seat belt inertia reel bolt30 N.m.
Connect the connector of the front side seat belt inertia reel.
Lock the connector of the front side seat belt inertia reel.
Refit the wiring in the position marked during the removal operation.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the B-pillar trimB-pillar trim: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
Note:
Check that the seat belt is not twisted between the inertia reel and the front side seat
belt return mechanism.
Torque tighten the bolt of the front side seat belt return mechanism30 N.m.
Driver's side:
Index the front side seat belt lower fitting on the driver's seat.
Passenger side:
Index the front side seat belt lower fitting on the passenger bench seat.
Note:
Check that the seat belt is not twisted between the front side seat belt return
mechanism and the lower fitting on the seat.
Torque tighten the bolt of the front side seat belt lower fitting30 N.m.
-7-
Connect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
WARNING
To eliminate the risk of any accident, do not reuse pyrotechnic components.
It is essential to destroy pretensioners or airbags before scrapping a vehicle or a part
only (see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Airbags and pretensioners: Recycling - Destruction) .
4. CHECKING AFTER REPAIR
Check for correct operation 2 times by unreeling the front side seat belt 300 mmand allowing it to
return.
Check that the front side seat belt locks correctly by pulling the front side seat belt with increasing
speed 200to 300 mmmaximum until the inertia reel locks.
Switch on the ignition.
Check that there are no faults on the instrument panel.
Repair-31x02x01x23-01x37-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
FRONT SPEAKERS: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (parts always to be replaced, etc.)Front side opening
passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening elements trim).
element assembly on the
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
Remove the front side door trimFront side opening
Exploded view (72A, Side opening elements trim).
element assembly on the passenger compartment side:
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the front speaker connector(1 ) .
Remove:
the rivets(2) (see MR 400),
the front speaker.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-2-
Always replace the front speaker rivets.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x04x06x05-01x37-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
FRONT STORAGE COMPARTMENT UNDER THE ROOF: REMOVAL REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the sun visors(see 57A, Interior equipment ,
Sun visor: Removal - Refitting)
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
.
Remove the blanking cover(1 ) .
-2-
-3-
Remove:
the bolt(2) ,
the front storage compartments under the roof by(3) .
-4-
Remove the supports of the front storage compartments under the roof(4 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-5-
Repair-50x08x06x10-01x37-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
FRONT SUBFRAME REAR MOUNTING UNIT: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
-2-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Battery tray interior support
HLE
1.5
(2 )
Front side member rear reinforcement
HLE
1.8
(3 )
Rear subframe mounting reinforcement
HLE
2.0
(4 )
Front side member front reinforcement
THLE
1.8
(5 )
Subframe rear mounting plate
HLE
2.0
(6 )
Housing of subframe rear mounting floating nut
HLE
1.5
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
-3-
WARNING
Use a repair bench to ensure the positioning of the points and the geometry of the
axle assemblies.
1)PART IN POSITION
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
-4-
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
Repair-40x02x06x23-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT WHEEL ARCH LINER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note:
The front and rear sections of the front wheel arch liner can be removed independently.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
FRONTMUD-FLAPS(BAVAVT)
Remove the front flaps(see 55A, Exterior
protection, Flap: Removal - Refitting)
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- FRONT WHEEL ARCH LINER, FRONT SECTION
-1-
.
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the clips(2) using an unclipping tool.
-2-
Remove:
the bolts(3) ,
the front wheel arch liner, front section.
2- FRONT WHEEL ARCH LINER, REAR SECTION
-3-
Remove:
the clips(4) using the unclipping tool,
the front wheel arch liner, rear section.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-4-
Repair-50x06x02x06-01x37-1-17-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT WHEEL ARCH, FRONT SECTION: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Front wheel arch, front section
Mild steel
1.2
(2 )
Front wheel arch closure panel
Mild steel
1.5
-2-
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
Note:
For complete replacement of the front wheel arch front section, it is also necessary to
order the front wheel arch closure panel.
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
-4-
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
Repair-40x06x08x06-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT WHEEL ARCH: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
-2-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Front shock absorber cup height adjuster
HLE
1.5
(2 )
Blanking cover of front shock absorber cup height adjuster
HLE
1.0
(3 )
Front shock absorber cup reinforcement
HLE
1.8
(4 )
Front shock absorber cup
HLE
2.3
(5 )
Shock absorber turret reinforcement
HLE
2.0
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Use a repair bench to ensure the positioning of the points and the geometry of the
axle assemblies.
-3-
1)PART IN POSITION
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x06x08-02x49-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Front
assembly: Exploded view .
hub carrier
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 38C, Anti-lock braking system, ABS: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector(1 ) .
-2-
-3-
-4-
Unclip the wiring from the wheel speed sensor at(2 ) .
Remove Front hub carrier assembly: Exploded view :
the front wheel speed sensor bolt,
the front wheel speed sensor.
-5-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the wheel speed sensor cable:
Do not tension the cable,
Do not twist the cable,
Check that there is no contact with the surrounding components,
Do not use tools that may damage the cable.
Repair-13x03x10x14-01x37-1-9-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
FRONT WING REAR MOUNTING SUPPORT: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Front wing rear mounting support
Mild steel
1.0
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x06x02x01-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FRONT WING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment),
the headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting (80B, Headlights),
the front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection).
-1-
-2-
Unclip the scuttle panel grille side trims in the direction(1 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.
(Car. 1363 ) .
-3-
Then remove the scuttle panel grille side trims in the directions(2 ) and (3 ) .
-4-
Drill out the rivets(4 ) .
Remove the front bumper support.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
Remove:
the bolts(5) ,
the front wing.
-9-
Remove:
the bolts(6) ,
the front wing upper mounting.
- 10 -
Remove:
the bolts(7) ,
the front wing lower mounting.
REFITTING
- 11 -
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the rivets of the front bumper mounting.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the clearances and flush fittingVehicle
specifications).
panel gaps: Adjustment value
Repair-40x06x02-01x37-1-18-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 12 -
(01C, Vehicle bodywork
FUEL FILLER FLAP COVER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Open the fuel filler flap cover.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Unclip the rear section of the fuel filler flap cover using a flat-blade screwdriver at(1 ) to release the lugs
(2 ) .
-2-
-3-
Remove the fuel filler flap cover at(3 ) to release the lugs(4 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-4-
Repair-40x10x07-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FUEL FILLER FLAP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Open the front left-hand side door.
Open the fuel filler cap.
-1-
Place a cloth in the neck.
Remove the bolts(1 ) .
-2-
Unclip the fuel filler neck at(2 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
Remove:
the bolts(3) ,
the fuel filler flap.
REFITTING
-4-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-40x10x22-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FUEL FILTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair .
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
WARNING
During this operation, it is essential to:
refrain from smoking or bringing hot objects close to the working area,
beware of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
CAUTION
The part removed is subject to customer safety controls, the safety instructions
detailed in this procedure must be observed when removing and refitting.
Note:
Make sure you have a new diesel filter before opening the fuel circuit.
REMOVAL
-1-
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Clean the quick-release unions before opening themDiesel
injection: Precautions for the repair
Disconnect:
the fuel filter connector(1) ,
the high pressure pump fuel supply pipe on the fuel filter(2) ,
the fuel supply pipe on the fuel filter(3) .
Fit blanking plugs.
-2-
.
CAUTION
Keep the pipe unions away from contaminated areas.
CAUTION
To avoid any corrosion or damage, protect the areas on which fuel is likely to run.
-3-
Remove:
the clip(4) ,
the clip(5) .
Remove the diesel filter assembly(see 13A, Fuel supply,
Exploded view ) .
Fuel supply assembly in engine compartment:
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Note:
Be careful not to pinch or damage the fuel pipes.
Switch on the ignition reapetedly for to fill the fuel circuit.
Start the vehicle.
2. DRAINING THE WATER INSIDE THE FUEL FILTER
Periodically drain any water contained in the diesel filter.
For filters without a water presence sensor:
-4-
open the drain plug,
let the water flow out,
close the plug.
Repair-11x03x01x05-01x37-1-55-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FUEL FILTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 13A, Fuel supply,
Fuel supply assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view ) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
During this operation, it is essential to:
refrain from smoking or bringing hot objects close to the working area,
beware of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
-1-
CAUTION
Do not blast with compressed air once the fuel circuit is open, otherwise impurities
may enter the system. Only use cleaning cloths.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Clean the quick-release unions before opening themDiesel
injection: Precautions for the repair
.
Disconnect (see 13A, Fuel supply, Fuel supply assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) :
the connector of the fuel filter cover,
the high pressure pump fuel supply pipe to the fuel filter,
the fuel supply pipe on the fuel filter.
Fit blanking plugs.
CAUTION
Keep the pipe unions away from contaminated areas.
CAUTION
To avoid any corrosion or damage, protect the areas on which fuel is likely to run.
-2-
Mark the position of the cover on the bowl.
Unclip the fuel filter unit at(1 ) .
Remove (see 13A,
the fuel
the fuel
the seal
Fuel supply, Fuel supply assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view) :
filter cover,
filter,
of the fuel filter bowl.
REFITTING
-3-
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Note:
Align the marking on the cover fitted with anti-contamination caps with the marking on
the bowl.
CAUTION
The unions must be correctly positioned on the filter.
Note:
Be careful not to pinch or damage the fuel pipes.
1- BLEEDING THE CIRCUIT
Turn the air bleed screw(see 13A, Fuel supply,
360 degrees.
Fuel supply assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view )
Activate the manual priming pump(see 13A, Fuel supply,
Exploded view ) until the fuel runs without air bubbles.
Fuel supply assembly in engine compartment:
Tighten the air bleed screw.
Prime the fuel circuit once more using the manual priming pump.
2. DRAINING THE WATER INSIDE THE FUEL FILTER
Periodically drain any water contained inside the fuel filter:
open the water bleed screw(see 13A, Fuel supply, Fuel supply assembly in engine compartment: Exploded
view ) ,
let the water flow out,
close the water bleed screw.
-4-
Repair-11x03x01x05-01x37-1-34-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR MODULE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Universal spanner for removing fuel gauge nuts.
Mot. 1397
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair .
WARNING
During this operation, be sure to:
refrain from smoking or bringing red hot objects close to the working area,
be careful of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
WARNING
Wear goggles with side protectors for this operation.
CAUTION
To avoid any corrosion or damage, protect the areas on which fuel is likely to run.
-1-
CAUTION
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
CAUTION
To prevent the surrounding components from overheating, do not damage (tear, pierce,
bend, etc.) a heat shield.
Any damaged heat shields must be replaced.
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19C, Tank,
tank assembly: Exploded view ) .
Fuel
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Drain the fuel tank(see 19C, Tank,
Fuel tank: Draining)
Remove the fuel tank(see 19C, Tank,
.
Fuel tank assembly: Exploded view )
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect (see 19C, Tank, Fuel tank assembly: Exploded view) :
the fuel supply pipe union from the fuel level sensor module,
the fuel return pipe union from the fuel level sensor module.
Fit blanking plugs on the fuel pipe unions.
CAUTION
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
-2-
Unclip the following from the fuel supply support(see 19C, Tank, Fuel tank assembly: Exploded view) :
the fuel supply pipe for the fuel level sensor module,
the fuel return pipe for the fuel level sensor module.
Remove the following from the fuel tank(see 19C, Tank, Fuel tank assembly: Exploded view) :
the fuel supply pipe for the fuel level sensor module,
the fuel return pipe for the fuel level sensor module.
Remove the fuel level sensor module nut using theUniversal spanner for removing fuel gauge nuts.
(Mot. 1397 ) (1 ) .
-3-
Let the fuel drain from the fuel level sensor module.
CAUTION
To prevent the tank from deforming, refit the fuel sender unit nut to the tank well
immediately.
Remove (see 19C, Tank, Fuel tank assembly: Exploded view) :
the fuel level sensor module, taking care not to damage the float,
the fuel level sensor module seal.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Note:
The fuel level sensor module is equipped with a foolproofing device, to stop it in
rotation.
Tighten the nut until the mark on the nut is aligned with the mark on the fuel tank and with the mark on
the fuel level sensor module.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-11x08x02x04-01x37-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
FUEL SUPPLY ASSEMBLY IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT: EXPLODED VIEW
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
-1-
Precautions for the repair
M9T, 670 672 676 678 680 870 872 876 880(670 OR 672 OR 676 OR 678 OR 680 OR 870 OR 872 OR 876 OR 880)
Illustration key: Description
No.
Description
1
Manual priming pump
2
Fuel filter air bleed screw
3
Fuel filter cover
4
Fuel filter
5
Fuel filter cartridge seal
6
Fuel filter bowl
7
Water in diesel fuel sensor
8
Water bleed screw
9
Water in diesel fuel sensor seal
10
Fuel temperature sensor
11
Fuel supply pipe neck
Key.
Information
(see 13A,
Fuel supply, Manual priming pump: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13A,
Fuel supply, Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13A,Fuel supply,
Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13A,
Fuel supply, Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13A,Fuel supply,
Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
-2-
12
Fuel supply pipe clip
-3-
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892 OR 896 OR 898)
Illustration key: Description
Mark
Description
1
Fuel supply pipe clip
2
Fuel temperature sensor
3
Fuel supply pipe clip
Key.
Information
Cannot be separated from the fuel pipe
-4-
4
Manual priming pump
(see 13A,
Fuel supply, Manual priming pump: Removal - Refitting)
5
Fuel filter air bleed screw
(see 13A,
Fuel supply, Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13A,Fuel supply,
Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
6
Fuel filter cover
(see 13A,
Fuel supply, Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13A,Fuel supply,
Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
7
Fuel filter
(see 13A,
Fuel supply, Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13A,Fuel supply,
Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
8
Fuel filter cartridge seal
(see 13A,
Fuel supply, Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13A,Fuel supply,
Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
9
Fuel filter bowl
(see 13A,
Fuel supply, Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13A,Fuel supply,
Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
10
Fuel supply pipe clip
11
Water in diesel fuel sensor seal
12
Water in diesel fuel sensor
13
Water bleed screw
(see 13A,
Fuel supply, Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13A,Fuel supply,
Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
14
Fuel supply pipe clip
M9T, 700 702 870 890(700 OR 702 OR 870 OR 890)
Illustration key: Description
-5-
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Fuel supply pipe clip
2
Fuel supply pipe neck
3
Fuel filter bowl
4
Water in diesel fuel sensor
5
Water in diesel fuel sensor seal
6
Fuel filter
7
Fuel filter cartridge seal
8
Fuel filter cover
(see 13A,
(see 13A,
Repair-11x03x01x01-02x50-1-1-1.xml
-6-
Fuel supply, Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13A,
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
Fuel supply, Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
Fuel supply, Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting)
FUEL SUPPLY ASSEMBLY IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
No.
Description
Information
1
Manual priming pump
2
Fuel filter air bleed screw
3
Fuel filter cover
4
Fuel filter
5
Fuel filter cartridge seal
6
Fuel filter bowl
7
Water in diesel fuel sensor
8
Water bleed screw
9
Water in diesel fuel sensor seal
10
Fuel temperature sensor
11
Fuel supply pipe neck
12
Fuel supply pipe clip
(see 13A, Fuel supply,
Manual priming pump: Removal - Refitting)
Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting
Fuel filter: Removal - Refitting
Repair-11x03x01x01-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
FUEL SUPPLY HOSES: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
WARNING
During this operation, be sure to:
refrain from smoking or bringing red hot objects close to the working area,
be careful of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
CAUTION
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- HOSE BETWEEN FUEL TANK AND METERING PUMPS
-1-
Disconnect the fuel tank hose union at(1 ) .
-2-
Unclip the self-contained heater fuel supply hose.
-3-
Disconnect the self-contained heater fuel supply hose union at(2 ) .
Unclip the self-contained heater fuel supply hose.
Remove the self-contained heater fuel supply hose.
Insert the blanking plugs.
2- HOSE BETWEEN METERING PUMPS AND SELF-CONTAINED HEATER
-4-
Disconnect from the metering pump the fuel supply hose union at(3 ) .
-5-
Disconnect the self-contained heater fuel supply hose at(4 ) .
Drill rivets.
Cut clips at(5 ) .
Remove the self-contained heater fuel supply hose.
-6-
Insert the blanking plugs.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
1- HOSE BETWEEN FUEL TANK AND METERING PUMPS
-7-
Make pass the self-contained heater fuel supply hose by the hole(6 ) of the rear side member.
-8-
-9-
Push the self-contained heater fuel supply hose to see it at the level of the condenser(7 ) .
Make go out the self-contained heater fuel supply hose by the hole of the condenser(7 ) and
through the rear floor cross member hole(8 ) .
Clip the self-contained heater fuel supply hose.
- 10 -
Remove the blanking plugs.
Refit:
the self-contained heater fuel supply hose clip to the metering pumps union,
the fuel tank hose union clip.
2- HOSE BETWEEN METERING PUMPS AND SELF-CONTAINED HEATER
Refit the self-contained heater fuel supply hose.
Remove the blanking plugs.
Refit:
the self-contained heater fuel supply hose clip,
the metering pump fuel supply hose clip,
Replace:
clips,
rivets.
Repair-30x02x03x18-01x37-2-9-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
FUSES: LIST AND LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
1. LIST OF COMPONENTS
The vehicle has several fuse boxes:
Protection and Switching Unit fuses
Engine compartment fuses and relays
passenger compartment fuse and relay box
battery protection fuses
2. POSITION OF THE COMPONENTS
PROTECTION AND SWITCHING UNIT FUSES
-1-
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSES AND RELAYS
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FUSE AND RELAY BOX
-2-
BATTERY PROTECTION FUSES
-3-
-4-
Repair-32x05x01x26-02x51-1-20-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
GEAR CONTROL ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle:
Precautions for the repair)
(see Illustration key: Description) Key.
Mark
Description
Information
3
Centre floor front extension
Mark
Description
Information
1
Gearbox
AND (ZF4) ZF4
2
Gear lever
4
Gear control cable
(see 37A, Mechanical
component controls, Gear control unit: Removal - Refitting)
(see Gear selection control cable: Removal - Refitting)
-1-
Repair-12x11-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
GEAR CONTROL UNIT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Gear
Exploded view .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the centre consoleCentre console: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
control assembly:
-2-
-3-
Unclip the anchoring ball joints(1 ) using an open-jawed spanner.
Unclip the sheath stops of the gear control cables(2) by:
pressing the tab(3) ,
pulling the retaining ring of the control cables at(4) .
Remove the gear control unitGear
control assembly: Exploded view
REFITTING
-4-
.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the gear control cables(see Mechanical
gear control cable: Adjustment) .
Check that the system and gear selection are working correctly.
Repair-12x10-01x37-1-45-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
MECHANISM HOUSING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
component support
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Manual gearbox: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the manual gearboxGearbox
Position the gearbox on the
assembly: Exploded view
component support(see
.
21A, Manual gearbox ,
Gearbox support equipment: Use)
.
Remove:
the gearshift plate(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) ,
the reverse gear switchGearbox assembly: Exploded view .
Remove the clutch housingGearbox
assembly: Exploded view
-1-
.
Remove the shaft unit(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Gearbox shaft: Removal - Refitting)
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the mechanism housingGearbox
assembly: Exploded view
.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean all the removed partsVehicle:
Parts and consumables for the repair
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x01x03x03-01x37-1-14-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
(04B, Consumables - Products).
GEARBOX OUTPUT FLANGE SEAL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Hub locking tool.
Rou. 604-01
Inertia seal extractor
Bvi. 1948
Tool for fitting driveshaft coupling output seal
Bvi. 1946
parts always to be replaced:
Gearbox output flange seal
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the
safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Gearbox
Exploded view .
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Towing and lifting).
Remove the longitudinal driveshaftDriveshaft
assembly: Exploded view
-1-
.
assembly:
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Fit the toolHub locking tool.(Rou.
604-01) (1 ) on
the gearbox output flange.
-2-
Remove the bolt(2 ) from the gearbox output flange.
-3-
Remove the gearbox output flange using a three-claw extractor(3 ) .
-4-
Remove the gearbox output flange seal(4 ) using the toolInertia seal extractor(Bvi. 1948 ) (5 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-5-
parts always to be replaced:
Gearbox output flange seal
.
Use SURFACE CLEANERVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean and
degrease:
the gearbox output flange seal housing,
the gearbox output flange joint face.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-6-
Refit a new seal using the toolTool for fitting driveshaft coupling output seal(Bvi. 1946 ) (6 ) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x01x15-01x37-1-1-1.xml
-7-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
GLOVEBOX: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the bolts(1 ) .
Open the glovebox.
-1-
Remove:
the bolts(2) ,
the glovebox by(3) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-50x08x02x11-01x37-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
GRAB HANDLE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Rear side opening
element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view (72A, Side opening elements trim).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Unclip the side sections(1 ) of the rear side door pull handle using the toolSet of trim removal levers.
(Car. 1363 ) .
-2-
Remove the bolts of the rear side door pull handle(2 ) .
Remove the rear side door pull handle(72A, Side opening elements trim).
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-3-
Repair-50x08x06x08-01x37-1-14-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
HANDS-FREE ACCESS COMPUTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
Remove the gloveboxGlovebox:
Removal - Refitting
(57A, Interior equipment).
-1-
Remove the bolts(1 ) from the support for the hands-free access computer.
Disconnect the connector(2 ) of the hands-free access computer.
Remove the " support - hands-free access computer " assembly.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Remove the bolt(3 ) from the hands-free access computer.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x06x01x12-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS AND CENTRAL DOOR CONTROL: REMOVAL REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Remove (1 ) the interior light trim(2 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) by (3 ) .
Disconnect:
the interior lighting connector,
the connector of the hazard warning light and central door locking switch.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (4 ) the hazard warning light and central door locking control by pressing the clips(5 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-30x04x03x22-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
HEADLIGHT BULB: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- DIRECTION INDICATOR BULB
-1-
Remove the sealing cover(1 ) .
-2-
Unlock the bulb holder by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise(2 ) .
Remove:
the bulb holder from the headlight,
the direction indicator bulb from the bulb holder.
2- SIDE LIGHT BULB
-3-
Remove the sealing cover(3 ) .
-4-
Unclip:
the bulb holder from the headlight by(4) ,
the side light from the bulb holder.
3- MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT BULBS
-5-
Remove the sealing cover(5 ) .
-6-
Disconnect the connector from the main beam headlight bulb by(6 ) .
Release the main beam headlight bulb from the headlight by unclipping the pins(7 ) .
Remove the main beam headlight bulb.
4- DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT BULB
-7-
Remove the sealing cover(8 ) .
-8-
Unlock the headlight bulb holder by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise(9 ) .
Remove the bulb holder from the headlight.
Unclip the dipped beam headlight bulb from the bulb holder.
-9-
1- ADDITIONAL CORNERING LIGHT BULB
Remove the sealing cover(10 ) .
- 10 -
Unlock the headlight bulb holder by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise(11 ) .
Remove the bulb holder from the headlight.
Unclip the additional cornering light bulb from the bulb holder.
- 11 -
REFITTING
Note:
If the bulbs are changed, only use approved bulbs.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x02x02x07-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 12 -
HEADLIGHT BULB: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- DIRECTION INDICATOR BULB
-1-
Remove the sealing cover(1 ) .
-2-
Unlock the bulb holder by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise(2 ) .
Remove:
the bulb holder from the headlight,
the direction indicator bulb from the bulb holder.
2- SIDE LIGHT BULB
-3-
Remove the sealing cover(3 ) .
-4-
Unclip:
the bulb holder from the headlight by(4) ,
the side light from the bulb holder.
3- MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT BULBS
-5-
Remove the sealing cover(5 ) .
-6-
Disconnect the connector from the main beam headlight bulb by(6 ) .
Release the main beam headlight bulb from the headlight by unclipping the pins(7 ) .
Remove the main beam headlight bulb.
4- DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT BULB
-7-
Remove the sealing cover(8 ) .
-8-
Unlock the headlight bulb holder by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise(9 ) .
Remove the bulb holder from the headlight.
Unclip the dipped beam headlight bulb from the bulb holder.
-9-
REFITTING
Note:
If the bulbs are changed, only use approved bulbs.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x02x02x07-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
HEADLIGHT BULB: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- DIRECTION INDICATOR BULB
-1-
Remove the sealing cover(1 ) .
-2-
Unlock the bulb holder by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise(2 ) .
Remove:
the bulb holder from the headlight,
the direction indicator bulb from the bulb holder.
2- SIDE LIGHT BULB
-3-
Remove the sealing cover(3 ) .
-4-
Unclip:
the bulb holder from the headlight by(4) ,
the side light from the bulb holder.
3- MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT BULBS
-5-
Remove the sealing cover(5 ) .
-6-
Disconnect the connector from the main beam headlight bulb by(6 ) .
Release the main beam headlight bulb from the headlight by unclipping the pins(7 ) .
Remove the main beam headlight bulb.
4- DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT BULB
-7-
Remove the sealing cover(8 ) .
-8-
Unlock the headlight bulb holder by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise(9 ) .
Remove the bulb holder from the headlight.
Unclip the dipped beam headlight bulb from the bulb holder.
-9-
REFITTING
Note:
If the bulbs are changed, only use approved bulbs.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x02x02x07-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
HEADLIGHT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
Remove the radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment).
-1-
Cut the plastic clip(1 ) of the air deflector.
Unclip the air deflector at(2 ) .
Remove the air deflector at(3 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Remove the bolts(4 ) from the headlight.
-3-
Unclip:
the top of the headlight(5) ,
the bottom of the headlight(6) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
Move the headlight towards the front of the vehicle(7 ) .
Disconnect the headlight connectors.
Remove the headlight.
1- WHEN REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT
-4-
Remove the headlight bulbs(see 80B, Headlights ,
Headlight bulb: Removal - Refitting)
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the headlights(see 80B, Headlights ,
Headlight: Adjustment )
Repair-80x02x02x01-01x37-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
.
.
HEADLINING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Trim removal lever.
Car. 1597
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the windscreen pillar trims(see 71A, Body internal trim, Windscreen pillar trim: Removal - Refitting) ,
the B-pillar lining(see 71A, Body internal trim, B-pillar trim: Removal - Refitting) ,
the sun visorsSun visor: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment),
the front storage compartments under the roofFront storage compartment under the roof: Removal - Refitting
(57A, Interior equipment) (depending on the equipment),
the headlining lightHeadlining light: Removal - Refitting (81B, Interior lighting),
Remove the displayDisplay: Removal - Refitting (86A, Radio).
Remove the tachographTachograph: Removal - Refitting (83A, Instrument panel).
-1-
WITH GLASSES STORAGE(RGTLU)
Unclip the locking blanking covers at(1 ) using the toolTrim removal lever.(Car. 1597 ) .
-2-
Remove the glasses storage compartment by pressing on the clips at(2 ) using a flat-blade
screwdriver.
-3-
Unclip the storage compartment at(3 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
Remove the storage compartment.
-4-
Unclip the support plate of the headlining light at(4 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 )
.
Disconnect the connectors.
Remove the support plate from the headlining light.
-5-
Remove the bolts(5 ) .
Unclip the centre console under the roof at(6 ) .
Remove the centre console under the roof.
-6-
Unclip the blanking cover for the grab handle at(7 ) .
-7-
Remove the grab handle at(8 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-8-
Remove:
the clips(9) ,
the headlining.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x02x04x02-01x37-1-23-1.xml
-9-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
HEATED SEAT PAD SWITCH: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
Remove the support from the heated seat pad switch(1 ) .
-1-
Disconnect the heated seat pad switch connector.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the heated seat pad switch(3 ) by pressing on the clips(2 ) .
REFITTING
-2-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x18x02x15-01x37-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
HEATER MATRIX: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 61A, Heating,
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
Remove:
the gloveboxGlovebox: Removal - Refitting ( 57A, Interior equipment),
the central consoleCentre console: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment).
Unclip the glovebox refrigerant pipe.
Remove the left-hand A-pillar air distribution duct(see 61A, Heating,
Exploded view ) .
-1-
Air distribution circuit assembly:
Unclip the wiring(1 ) from the dashboard cross member reinforcement (if fitted to the vehicle).
Move the wiring away from the dashboard cross member reinforcement (if fitted to the vehicle).
Remove:
the bolts(2) of the dashboard cross member reinforcement,
the dashboard cross member reinforcement(3) .
Fit the toolPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) on the heater matrix hoses on the engine side.
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Remove (see 61A, Heating, Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly: Exploded view)
the heater matrix pipe bracket,
the heater matrix pipe clips.
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
Put a protective cover on the floor carpet.
Position a container to collect the coolant under the heater matrix pipes.
Move the heater matrix pipes aside(see 61A, Heating,
assembly: Exploded view) .
Remove the heater matrix(see 61A, Heating,
Exploded view ) .
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly:
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the clips of the heater matrix pipes.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fill up and bleed the cooling systemCooling system: Draining - Refilling (19A, Cooling).
Repair-30x02x01x01-01x37-1-46-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
HEATER UNIT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
WARNING
During this operation, be sure to:
refrain from smoking or bringing red hot objects close to the working area,
be careful of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
CAUTION
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
Note:
There are two heater units at each side of the underfloor.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- UNDER THE VEHICLE
-2-
Remove the exhaust support bolts(1 ) and (2 ) .
-3-
Remove the air inlet pipe(3 ) .
Loosen the clip from the exhaust pipe(4 ) .
-4-
Remove:
the fuel supply hose(5) ,
the heater unit bolts(6) on air inlet side.
Disconnect the exhaust pipe(7 ) .
-5-
Remove:
the exhaust support,
the heater unit bolts(8) on exhaust side.
2- IN THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
-6-
Remove:
the bolts,
the heater unit cover.
Disconnect:
the trunking following the arrows,
-7-
the heater unit connector.
Remove the heater unit.
REFITTING
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x02x03x02-01x37-1-14-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
HEATING: LIST AND LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
1. LIST OF COMPONENTS
1- THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM IS COMPOSED OF:
a control panel(see 61A, Heating, Control panel: Removal - Refitting)
an external air temperature sensor(see 61A, Heating, Exterior temperature sensor: Removal - Refitting)
2. POSITION OF THE COMPONENTS
EXTERNAL AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
-1-
Repair-30x02x01-02x51-1-26-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
HEATING RESISTORS: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 61A, Heating,
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the centre consoleCentre console: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment).
Remove the gloveboxGlovebox:
Removal - Refitting
(57A, Interior equipment).
Remove the left-hand A-pillar air distribution duct(see 61A, Heating,
Exploded view ) .
Air distribution circuit assembly:
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the heating resistor connector.
Remove the heating resistor(see 61A, Heating,
Exploded view ) .
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly:
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x02x01x05-01x37-1-30-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
HIGH LEVEL BRAKE LIGHT BULB: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exterior
element assembly: Exploded view (52A, Non-side opening element mechanisms).
rear opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the high level brake lightExterior
opening element mechanisms).
rear opening element assembly: Exploded view
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
(52A, Non-side
Unclip the high level brake light bulb at(1 ) .
REFITTING
Note:
If the bulb is changed, only use an approved bulb.
-2-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x02x06x20-01x37-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
HIGH PRESSURE PUMP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
High pressure pump pinion locking tool
Mot. 1906
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before carrying out any
repair:
(see 13B, Diesel injection, Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
During this operation, be sure to:
refrain from smoking or bringing red hot objects close to the working area,
be careful of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
-1-
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
CAUTION
Do not blast with compressed air once the fuel circuit is open, otherwise impurities
may enter the system. Only use cleaning cloths.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the " engine and gearbox " assemblyAND (M9T) AND (700) M9T, 700,
the injector rail protector(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the oil decanterAND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702,
the high pressure pump protector(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the rail(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded
view ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
CAUTION
To avoid any corrosion or damage, protect the areas on which fuel is likely to run.
WARNING
Wear goggles with side protectors for this operation.
-3-
CAUTION
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
Disconnect:
the
the
the
the
high pressure pump pressure regulator connector(1) ,
diesel supply pipe(2) of the exhaust fuel injector,
diesel supply pipe(3) from the high pressure pump,
diesel return pipe(4) from the high pressure pump.
Insert the blanking plugs.
Remove (see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) (see 13B,Diesel injection, Injection assembly:
Exploded view ) :
the high pressure pump,
the high pressure pump seal.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
1- IF REPLACING THE HIGH PRESSURE PUMP
-4-
Put the high pressure pump in a vice with jaws.
-5-
Using the toolHigh pressure pump pinion locking tool(Mot. 1906 ) (5 ) , lock the high pressure pump
pinion.
Fit:
the washers of theHigh pressure pump pinion locking tool(Mot. 1906 ) on the high pressure pump,
the nuts of theHigh pressure pump pinion locking tool(Mot. 1906 ) on the high pressure pump.
Tighten the nuts on the high pressure pump.
-6-
Remove:
the high pressure pump pinion nut(6) ,
the nuts of the toolHigh pressure pump pinion locking tool(Mot. 1906 ) ,
the washers of theHigh pressure pump pinion locking tool(Mot. 1906 ) from the high pressure pump,
theHigh pressure pump pinion locking tool(Mot. 1906 ) .
-7-
Fit a separator(7 ) under the high pressure pump pinion(8 ) .
-8-
-9-
Fit an arm(9 ) on the separator.
Remove:
the high pressure pump pinion,
the separator and the arm.
Refit:
the pinion to the new high pressure pump,
the high pressure pump nut.
Put the high pressure pump in a vice with jaws.
Fit:
theHigh pressure pump pinion locking tool(Mot. 1906 ) ,
the washers of theHigh pressure pump pinion locking tool(Mot. 1906 ) on the high pressure pump,
the nuts of theHigh pressure pump pinion locking tool(Mot. 1906 ) on the high pressure pump.
Tighten the nuts on the high pressure pump.
Torque tighten the high pressure pump pinion nut70 N.m.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
- 10 -
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Prime the fuel circuit using the manual priming pump.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select the " Diesel injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " injection pump " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-11x05x04-01x37-1-94-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
HIGH PRESSURE PUMP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Offset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.
Mot. 1746
Tool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump
Mot. 2047
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
parts always to be replaced:
High pressure pipe between the pump and rail
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before carrying out any
repair:
(see 13B, Diesel injection, Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) .
-1-
WARNING
During this operation, be sure to:
refrain from smoking or bringing red hot objects close to the working area,
be careful of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
CAUTION
Do not blast with compressed air once the fuel circuit is open, otherwise impurities
may enter the system. Only use cleaning cloths.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) .
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove:
the " engine and gearbox " assemblyAND (ZA4 OR ZF4) ZA4 ZF4AND (M9T) AND (700) M9T, 700,
the injector rail protector ,
the oil decanter ,
-2-
Unclip the fuel collector pipe clip(1 ) from the high-pressure pump protector.
-3-
Unclip the coolant temperature sensor wiring clip(2 ) from the high-pressure pump protector.
Remove :
the
the
the
the
high-pressure pump protector bolts,
high-pressure pump protector.
nut of the high-pressure pipe between the pump and the rail,
high-pressure pipe between the pump and the rail.
-4-
CAUTION
When loosening the nut on the high pressure pipe between the pump and the rail, it is
essential to hold the intermediate union on the high pressure pump side firm using a
lock spanner.
CAUTION
refit the protector of the high pressure pump pipe nut.
-5-
Remove the bolt(3 ) of the gauging opening from the cylinder head.
Fit the setting pin(4 ) of the toolTool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump(Mot.
2047 ) in the gauging opening of the cylinder head.
Turn the crankshaft slowly while pushing on the setting pin of the toolTool for removal - refitting
pignon and high pressure pump(Mot. 2047 ) until the high-pressure pump is blocked.
-6-
Mark the position of the crankshaft accessories pulley.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect from the high-pressure pump:
the high-pressure pump pressure regulator connector(5) ,
-7-
the fuel return pipe(6) ,
the fuel supply pipe(7) .
CAUTION
To avoid any corrosion or damage, protect the areas on which fuel is likely to run.
WARNING
Wear goggles with side protectors for this operation.
CAUTION
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
Fit blanking plugs.
Remove :
the high-pressure pump bolts,
the high-pressure pump.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-8-
parts always to be replaced:
High pressure pipe between the pump and rail
parts always to be replaced: high-pressure pump sprocket seal
1- IF REPLACING THE HIGH-PRESSURE PUMP
Put the old high-pressure pump in a vice with jaws.
-9-
Fit the toolTool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump(Mot. 2047 ) (8 ) on the old
high-pressure pump to lock the high-pressure pump sprocket.
Loosen the high-pressure pump sprocket nut .
Remove the toolTool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump(Mot. 2047 ) from the old
high-pressure pump.
Remove :
the high-pressure pump sprocket nut,
the high-pressure pump sprocket,
the high-pressure pump sprocket seal.
Fit on the new high-pressure pump :
the high-pressure pump sprocket seal,
the high-pressure pump sprocket,
the high-pressure pump sprocket nut.
- 10 -
Adjust the position of the high-pressure pump sprocket nut with the mark(9 ) .
Put the new high-pressure pump in a vice with jaws.
Fit the toolTool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump(Mot. 2047 ) on the new
high-pressure pump to lock the high-pressure pump sprocket nut.
- 11 -
Torque tighten the high-pressure pump sprocket nut .
Remove the toolTool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump(Mot. 2047 ) .
Remove the high-pressure pump sprocket from the vice.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit :
the high-pressure pump.
the high-pressure pump bolts,
Torque tighten the high-pressure pump bolts .
Refit :
the high-pressure pipe between the pump and the rail.
the nut of the high-pressure pipe between the pump and the rail,
Torque tighten using the toolOffset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.(Mot. 1746 )
the nut of the high-pressure pipe between the pump and the rail .
Fit the setting pin of the toolTool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump(Mot. 2047 )
in the gauging opening of the cylinder head.
Check that:
- 12 -
the setting pin of the toolTool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump(Mot. 2047 ) is fully
engaged,
the markings on the crankshaft accessories pulley are still aligned.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Prime the fuel circuit using the manual priming pump.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool(see Diagnostic tool : Use ) :
-Computer concerned by the After repair procedure:
" Injection computer " .
-Component affected by the After repair procedure:
" high-pressure pump " .
Repair-11x05x04-01x37-1-109-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 13 -
AUDIBLE WARNING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment).
Cut the plastic clip(1 ) of the left-hand air deflector.
-1-
Unclip the left-hand air deflector at(2 ) .
Remove the left-hand air deflector at(3 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the horn connector(4 ) .
Remove:
the horn bolt(5) ,
the horn.
-2-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Parts always to be replaced: plastic clip on the air deflector.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the horn.
Torque tighten the horn bolt21 N.m.
Connect the horn connector.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x03x02-01x37-1-26-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
HYDRAULIC BRAKE UNIT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 38C, Anti-lock braking system, ABS: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply the before repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the diagnostic tool,
select " ABS-ESP computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " ABS-ESP computer " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
-1-
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
Disconnect the hydraulic unit computer connector(1 ) .
-2-
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
Loosen in the order the brake pipe unions of the hydraulic unit.
Fit blanking plugs on the hydraulic unit openings and on the brake pipe unions.
-3-
Undo the hydraulic unit nuts(2 ) on its support.
Remove the hydraulic brake unit.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
-4-
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
Check that the rubber seal is on the hydraulic unit support.
Fit the hydraulic unit on its support.
-5-
Torque tighten the nuts of the hydraulic unit on its supportBrake circuit: Tightening torque .
Torque tighten in order the brake pipe unions on the hydraulic unitBrake circuit: Tightening torque .
2. FINAL OPERATION
-6-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the diagnostic tool,
select " ABS-ESP computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " ABS-ESP computer " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Bleed the brake circuitBraking
circuit: Bleed
.
Repair-13x03x10x01-01x37-1-48-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
HYDRAULIC BRAKE UNIT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 38C, Anti-lock braking system, ABS: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply the before repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the diagnostic tool,
select " ABS-ESP computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " ABS-ESP computer " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
-1-
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
Disconnect the hydraulic unit computer connector(1 ) .
-2-
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
Loosen in the order the brake pipe unions of the hydraulic unit.
Fit blanking plugs on the hydraulic unit openings and on the brake pipe unions.
-3-
Undo the hydraulic unit nuts(2 ) on its support.
Remove the hydraulic brake unit.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
-4-
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
Check that the rubber seal is on the hydraulic unit support.
Fit the hydraulic unit on its support.
-5-
Torque tighten the nuts of the hydraulic unit on its supportBrake circuit: Tightening torque .
Torque tighten in order the brake pipe unions on the hydraulic unitBrake circuit: Tightening torque .
2. FINAL OPERATION
-6-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the diagnostic tool,
select " ABS-ESP computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " ABS-ESP computer " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Bleed the brake circuitBraking
circuit: Bleed
.
Repair-13x03x10x01-01x37-1-48-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
IDENTIFICATION
1. LOCATION OF VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE (A)
2. LOCATION OF THE VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (B)
-1-
3. DETAILED VIEW OF THE VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE
PLATE (A)
-2-
(1) Vehicle type and chassis number, this information is repeated on marking (B)
(2) MGVW (Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight)
(3) GTW (Gross train weight, Vehicle under load with trailer)
(4) Maximum permissible front axle load
(5) Maximum permissible rear axle load
(6) Vehicle technical specifications
(7) Paintwork reference number
(8) Equipment level
-3-
(9) Vehicle type
(10) Upholstery code
(11) Additional equipment details
(12) Production number
(13) Interior trim code
4. COLD-MARKING OF THE BODY (C)
Note:
If the complete body is being replaced, it must be marked in compliance with the
current regulations.
-4-
Repair-00x01x01-02x07-2-26-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
IGNITION SWITCH: REMOVAL - REFITTING
parts always to be replaced:
Ignition switch bolt
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Put the steering column into the lower position.
Remove the upper steering column cover at(1 ) .
-2-
Place the steering column in the upper position.
Remove:
the bolts(2) on the lower steering column cover,
the lower steering column cover at(3) .
-3-
Disconnect the connector(4 ) of the transponder ring.
1- WHEN REPLACING THE IGNITION SWITCH
Remove the antenna/transponder ring(see 82A, Engine
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Put the steering column into the lower position.
-4-
immobiliser, Transponder ring: Removal - Refitting)
.
Unlock the ignition switch connector(5 ) .
Disconnect the ignition switch connector(5 ) .
-5-
Remove the shear bolt(6 ) using a punch.
-6-
-7-
Position the ignition key to a position another than position " 0 " (7 ) .
Press the retaining lug at(8 ) .
Remove the ignition switch at(9 ) .
-8-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
Ignition switch bolt
.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Note:
To protect against tampering, always secure the ignition switch with a shear bolt.
Be sure to recover the sheared-off part of the bolt after it has been tightened.
Position the ignition key to a position another than position " 0 " .
Press the retaining lug.
Fit the ignition switch.
-9-
Tighten the shear bolt(10 ) until the bolt head shears off.
Connect the ignition switch connector.
Lock the ignition switch connector.
- 10 -
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x04x04x04-01x37-1-17-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
ILLUSTRATIONKEY:DESCRIPTION
LEGEND FOR ICONS
-1-
LEGEND FOR ICONS
a
No.
b
Part number
c
A tightening order must be respected
D
Non-standard tightening torque / angle
f
[Initial torque] tightening torque / tightening angle +/- tightening angle tolerance
g
Part always to be replaced
h
Product / Consumable
i
Special tooling / Equipment required
j
Safety precaution
k
Front of the vehicle
l
Tightening units
m
Special tooling / Equipment required to use on all of the assembled parts
n
Tightening order to be respected
The following icons represent the adjustment possibilities for the bodywork components:
- the black dot in the centre represents the body of the bolt,
- the grey section represents the component to be adjusted,
- the white section represents the adjustment area.
o
No adjustment possible
p
Adjustment possible along all axis
q
Adjustment possibly only along vertical axis
r
Adjustment possibly only along horizontal axis
s
Adjustment possible along all axis
Repair-00x01x03-02x21-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
TECHNICAL NOTE
5037A
July 2012
77 11 344 642
EDITION ANGLAISE
Service 0465
Type
All types
XXX
S/Section
X
82A
This note cancels and replaces Technical Note 3315E, part no. 77 11 206 336 and
previous versions of Technical Note 5037A
01B-82A-87B-86A-86C
●
●
Engine:
Gearbox:
CODE SUPPLY PROCEDURE
Basic manual:
XXX
XXX
" The repair procedures given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the
technical specifications current when it was prepared.
The procedures may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the
manufacturer in the production of the various component units and accessories from
which his vehicles are constructed. "
All rights reserved by Renault s.a.s.
Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part
reference numbering system is forbidden without the prior written authority of Renault
s.a.s.
© Renault s.a.s. 2012
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
CONTENTS
Page
0
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
1
Access to code management............................................................................................................................ 5
2
Searching for a code in GDC ............................................................................................................................ 5
2.1 Immobiliser code .............................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1.1 Old procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.2 New procedure......................................................................................................................................... 7
2.1.3 Error messages and procedures to follow ............................................................................................... 8
2.1.4 Emergency procedure............................................................................................................................ 10
2.2 Radio code ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
2.2.1 " Enter pre-code " error screen ................................................................................................................ 12
2.2.2 Finding the radio pre-code ..................................................................................................................... 13
2.2.3 The code supplied is not correct ............................................................................................................ 13
2.2.4 Old radios without pre-code ................................................................................................................... 14
2.3 Video control code ......................................................................................................................................... 16
2.4 Tool reprogramming key ................................................................................................................................ 17
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 2
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
0) Introduction
Since 1st June 2005 there has been a single service available for supplying the following codes:
• Engine immobiliser
• Radio
• Video network
• Reprogramming key (NRE)
This service is Code Management (GDC) on RENAULT NET or importers' RENAULT NET.
Information required for use:
Immobiliser code:
VIN (17 characters)
number marked on the key head (old vehicles, 8 characters maximum)
Programming key supplied by diagnostic tool (new vehicles, 24 characters)
Note:
The programming key is obligatory from CLIP CD65, i.e. from June 2006.
Radio code:
VIN (17 characters)
Pre-code or serial number of the radio
Radio pre-code if the first code obtained using the VIN is not correct
Pre-code = 1 letter + 3 digits
Refer to the detailed procedure §2.2.2 " Finding the radio pre-code "
Radio without pre-code:
Radio manufacturer: Philips/Blaupunkt/Pioneer/Alpine/Becker
Video control code specific to Vel Satis:
VIN of the vehicle (17 characters)
Four-digit code supplied by the video control
Refer to the corresponding repair manual.
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 3
82A
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
Reprogramming key (only in disconnected mode):
*Note: this key is an authorisation code provided by the diagnostic tool to the operator in order to obtain the
reprogramming key from the code server.
VIN of the vehicle (17 characters)
Reprogramming key supplied by the diagnostic tool
WARNING
Access to the " code management " application is restricted to authorised personnel.
To use the code server, access rights are required.
These access rights (certificate) are integrated into the Tokens.
All code requests are recorded in a database. This database can be accessed by the police authorities.
Any member of personnel found to be making fraudulent use of management codes will be subject to
corporate and legal proceedings.
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 4
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
Using the Code Management server to find codes:
1) Main menu in Renault Net, under Applications you will find Code Management:
PUBLICATIONS
PERSONNEL
APPLICATIONS
ACTIVE
Code Management
Immobiliser codes
Radio codes
Reprogramming codes
Video codes
ICM
ICM Assistance
About the main
page
2) Finding a code in Code Management:
2.1 Immobiliser code:
Note:
To find out whether a vehicle is governed by the old or the new procedure, just start the programming procedure
using your diagnostic tool. If the tool displays a programming key, this vehicle is governed by the new procedure.
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 5
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
Code Management
Help
CODE MANAGEMENT
Code Management
IMMOBILISER CODE
VIN (17 characters)
Number marked on key head or programming key
provided by the diagnostic tool
Search
Versions of
Code Management
The immobiliser code for this vehicle is:
2.1.1 Old procedure
– Enter the VIN
– Confirm with the " Search " button
– Immobiliser code supplied in the following form:
4 digits (old vehicles)
8 digits (MEGANE 1 and AVANTIME only)
12 characters (digits and letters for other vehicles)
If the immobiliser code supplied is not correct and you have the key head number, resubmit your request with the
same VIN and key head number:
Note:
The key head number is required for old vehicles; if the four-digit code supplied by the code server does not
correspond to the vehicle, the key head code is used to recalculate the new four-digit code.
– Re-enter the VIN of the vehicle
– Enter the key head number (marked on the key head) 8 characters maximum (5 figures or 7 alphanumeric
characters, or even 8 alphanumeric characters)
– Confirm with the " Search " button
– The immobiliser code (4 figures) is supplied
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 6
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
2.1.2 New procedure:
This new procedure affects vehicles from LAGUNA II, and new vehicles.
This has been compulsory since June 2006.
In disconnected mode:
– Enter the VIN + programming key supplied by the diagnostic tool.
– Confirm with the " Search " button
– The immobiliser code is supplied in the form of programming keys of 24, 40 or 28 characters, then supplied in the
form of 13, 34 or 39 characters
In connected mode:
– The immobiliser code can be searched for and supplied automatically via the diagnostic tool.
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 7
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
2.1.3 Error messages and procedure to follow
MANAGEMENT CODE ERROR MESSAGE
PROCEDURE TO FOLLOW
All vehicles
The VIN is not found on the World Vehicle Database
Re-enter the VIN.
If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.
The diagnostic tool programming key is compulsory.
The vehicle corresponding to the VIN entered is subject
to the new procedure described in paragraph 2.1.2.
CLIP version 65 or a more recent version is required.
A new code cannot be supplied.
contact your technical assistance network
Old procedure
The immobiliser code cannot be obtained by entering
the VIN alone.
For old vehicles with a four-digit security code, you must
enter the code marked on the key head in addition to the
VIN. If no number is marked on the key head, contact
your technical assistance network
The immobiliser code cannot be obtained from the
server; the key head code is required to calculate the
immobiliser code.
Open the key head to obtain the key head code.
If the code does not appear on the key head, check the
customer documents (e.g. invoice) to find the code.
If this number cannot be found, contact your technical
assistance network quoting the error message.
The immobiliser code cannot be obtained with values
entered. Check that the values are correct. If they are
correct, contact your technical assistance network
If the key head code is incorrect, the immobiliser code
cannot be calculated by the server.
Check the key head code.
New procedure
1. Check the programming key.
2. Check that the VIN from the CLIP main menu is
correct.
5037A_eng.mif
V3
The programming key does not correspond to the VIN
entered.
1. Check the programming key (6 x 4 characters); the
programming key does not contain:
the letters O and Q as these may be confused with
the number 0
the letter I as it may be confused with the number 1.
2. In the CLIP main menu, enter the correct VIN of
the vehicle (17 characters)
82A - 8
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
2.1.3 Error messages and procedure to follow (continued)
MANAGEMENT CODE ERROR MESSAGE
PROCEDURE TO FOLLOW
New procedure (continued)
The Renault card (or key) stored by CLIP in the
" insertion " section of the programming scenario cannot
be found on the server.
1. Check the programming key.
2. Check that the Renault card (or key) was ordered
directly by the production workshop in France with
the VIN (new procedure).
3. Check that the Renault card (or key) corresponds
to the vehicle (the VIN is included on the document
supplied with the part).
1. Check the programming key.
2. Renault cards and keys must be ordered according
to the new procedure:
from June 2006,
directly from the central manufacturing workshop
(in France),
with the vehicle's VIN.
The Renault cards and keys can only be used with the
VIN for which they have been ordered.
The VIN is written on the sheet attached to the packet
containing the part.
3. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.
The immobiliser code is not available on the database.
follow the emergency procedure (see 2.1.4)
Check the VIN and the programming key.
If the fault is still present, follow the emergency
procedure (see 2.1.4).
Another immobiliser chain computer has recently been
programmed on this vehicle. You are not authorised to
perform this operation.
Follow the emergency procedure (see 2.1.4).
1. Check the programming key.
2. Restart the procedure with CLIP.
3. If the fault is still present, follow the emergency
procedure (see 2.1.4)
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 9
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
2.1.4 Emergency procedure
From 2007, the help mail will be replaced by a text file.
Once the code has been requested, a button will appear: " create a text file " .
This creates a text file which can be saved to the hard drive or to a mobile device.
In the event of a fault, this text file contains all the information needed by the Techline :
The VIN
the key head code or programming key
the message displayed
It is recommended that you use this text file to contact your technical assistance network.
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 10
82A
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
2.2 Radio code:
– Enter the VIN only
– Confirm with the " Search " button
– Radio code supplied
Code Management
Help
CODE MANAGEMENT
RADIO CODE
Code Management
Enter the VIN to obtain the radio code. Entry of the pre-code is optional.
VIN
Radio pre-code
Search
Versions of
Code Management
The radio code for this vehicle is:
WARNING
It is not possible to obtain more than three radio codes for a single VIN.
The error message reads " A new code cannot be supplied " .
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 11
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
2.2.1 " Enter pre-code " error screen
Code Management
Help
CODE MANAGEMENT
Code Management
RADIO CODE
The VIN alone cannot be used to obtain the radio code. We request that you enter the radio pre-code in addition
to the VIN.
(1 letter + 3 figures). If this information cannot be obtained, contact the Techline.
1. Back to entry
2. Find radio code using its part number (old server procedure)
Versions of
Code Management
The radio code cannot be supplied by the server; the radio pre-code is required to calculate the radio code.
To find the radio pre-code, see paragraph 2.2.2.
Once you have obtained the pre-code:
– Select option no. 1: " Return to entry "
– Enter the radio pre-code
– Confirm with the " Search " button
– Radio code supplied
Option no. 2, " Find radio code using its part number (old server procedure) " refers to old radios without a pre-code,
see paragraph 2.2.4.
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 12
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
2.2.2 Finding the radio pre-code
Depending on the type of radio, recover the pre-code, either:
• from the radio display using the self-test procedure,
• by removing the radio; the pre-code is found on the label affixed to the radio.
• Vehicles with ITS Navigation: it is necessary to use the diagnostic tool obtain the pre-code
Note:
The pre-code consists of a letter and three digits (example below, N557).
MADE IN GERMANY
Typ:
Model No:
Serial No:
6200178157
NAVIGATION
The pre-code is found after the Renault part number (8200 XXX XXX or 7700 XXX XXX) and the letter T
Example above: 8200178157TN557
2.2.3 The code supplied is not correct
If the code supplied from the first request with the vehicle VIN alone is not accepted by the radio,
resend your request with the radio pre-code (paragraph 2.2.2).
– Re-enter the VIN of the vehicle
– Enter the radio pre-code
– Confirm with the " Search " button
– New radio code supplied
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 13
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
2.2.4 Old radios without pre-code:
To find a radio code using the radio part number (old minitel and voice server procedures), select:
" Find radio code using its part number (old server procedure) " .
Code Management
Help
CODE MANAGEMENT
Code Management
RADIO CODE
A similar search has already been performed for this vehicle in the last 12 hours
1. Display the radio code available in the database
2. Display the radio code obtained using the VIN and the radio pre-code
3. Find the radio code using its part number reference (old server procedure)
Versions of
Code Management
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 14
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
Code Management
Help
CODE MANAGEMENT
Code Management
RADIO CODE
You must enter the radio part number. The part number is the string of characters (letters and digits) which
appears on the radio unit. If you cannot obtain this information, please send the Help procedure message to the
assistance unit.
VF1ABCD1234567890
VIN
Radio part no.
Versions of
Code Management
Search
The radio code for this vehicle is:
– Enter the radio part number in the " Radio part number " field
Example:
Radio part no.:
Philips = RN + 3 digits + 2 letters + 7 digits
Blaupunkt = BP + 4 digits + 1 letter + 7 digits
Pioneer = RN2006 + 1 letter + 7 digits or 1 letter + 7 digits (old models)
Alpine = AL + 9 digits
Becker = B or E + 7 digits
– Confirm with the " Search " button
– Radio code supplied
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 15
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
2.3 Video network code
–
–
–
–
Enter the VIN of the vehicle
Enter the four-digit code generated by the vehicle's video control
Confirm with the " Calculate " button
Four-digit code supplied by the code server
Code Management
Help
CODE MANAGEMENT
Code Management
Video network code supplied
VIN (17 characters)
Code supplied by the Network
Calculate
Versions of
Code Management
The Video Network's unlocking code is:
Please protect the network by entering your anti-theft code in the video network.
Back_Contents
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 16
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Code delivery
82A
2.4 Tool reprogramming key:
–
–
–
–
Enter the VIN of the vehicle
Enter the six-digit code generated by the diagnostic tool
Confirm with the " Calculate " button
Six-character (letters and digits) reprogramming key supplied, to be entered in the diagnostic tool.
Code Management
Help
CODE MANAGEMENT
Code Management
Tool reprogramming key supplied
VIN (17 characters)
Tool reprogramming key
Calculate
Versions of
Code Management
The diagnostic tool reprogramming key is:
Back_Contents
5037A_eng.mif
V3
82A - 17
INHIBITOR SWITCH: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for the
repair )
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply the procedure for deactivating the safety systems.(see 88C, Airbags
pretensioners: Precautions for the repair)
-1-
and pretensioners, Airbag and
Partially remove the front side door seal (if equipped).
Unclip the dashboard side panel(1 ) using the Set of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
Disconnect the inhibitor switch connector.
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-2-
Remove the inhibitor switch by pressing on the clips(2 ) and pushing towards(3 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Apply the procedure for activating the safety systems(see 88C, Airbags
pretensioners: Precautions for the repair) .
and pretensioners, Airbag and
3. CHECKING AFTER REPAIR
Perform an operational check by moving the switch from the " ON " position to the " OFF " position.
-3-
In the " OFF " position, check the appearance of the " airbag OFF " message on the instrument panel.
Repair-31x02x01x25-01x37-1-18-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
INJECTION ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
(see Illustration key: Description) Key.
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair)
.
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Injector rail protector
2
Wiring channel upper spacer
3
Wiring channel
4
Diesel injector fuel return rail
5
High pressure pump protector
6
Injector clamp
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Diesel injector: Removal - Refitting)
7
Diesel injector
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Diesel injector: Removal - Refitting)
8
Heat protection washer
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Diesel injector: Removal - Refitting)
9
Injector rail
10
Diesel return pipe
11
High pressure pipe between the pump and rail
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Injector rail: Removal - Refitting)
12
High pressure pipe between the rail and injector
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Injector rail: Removal - Refitting)
13
Wiring channel lower spacer
14
High pressure pump sprocket nut
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, High pressure pump: Removal - Refitting)
15
High pressure pump sprocket
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, High pressure pump: Removal - Refitting)
16
High pressure pump sprocket seal
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, High pressure pump: Removal - Refitting)
17
High pressure pump
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, High pressure pump: Removal - Refitting)
18
Fuel collector
19
Fuel collector pipe
(see 13B,
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Injector rail protector: Removal - Refitting)
Diesel injection, Diesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, High pressure pump: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Injector rail: Removal - Refitting)
(see Diesel return pipe: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-11x11-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
INJECTION ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Special tooling required
Offset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.
Mot. 1746
Injector well cleaning kit
Mot. 1817
M9R/M9T injector extractor
Mot. 1966
Tool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump
Mot. 2047
-1-
M9T, 700(700)
(see Illustration key: Description) .
For fastenings with no specified tightening torque values, refer to the Table of Standard Torques(see
Marks
Designations
1
Diesel return pipe
2
Injector rail protector
3
High pressure pipe between the pump and rail
4
Fuel collector
5
High pressure pump bracket
6
Guide pin
7
High pressure pump protector
8
Guide pin
9
Fuel collector pipe
10
Heat protection washer
Tightening torques: General information) .
Informations
Offset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.(Mot. 1746 )
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, High pressure pump: Removal - Refitting)
Injector well cleaning kit(Mot. 1817 )
-2-
11
Injector clamp
12
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Diesel injector: Removal - Refitting)
Diesel injector
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Diesel injector: Removal - Refitting)
M9R/M9T injector extractor(Mot. 1966 )
(see 13B,
13
Diesel injection, High pressure pump: Removal - Refitting)
High pressure pump
Tool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump(Mot. 2047 )
14
High pressure pump sprocket seal
15
High pressure pump sprocket
16
High pressure pump sprocket nut
17
High pressure pipe between the rail and injector
18
Injector rail
19
Diesel injector fuel return rail
20
Injector rail protector bolts
Tool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump(Mot. 2047 )
Offset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.(Mot. 1746 )
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Diesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting)
M9T, 702(702)
(see Illustration key: Description) .
For fastenings with no specified tightening torque values, refer to the Table of Standard Torques(see
-3-
Tightening torques: General information) .
Marks
Designations
Informations
1
Diesel return pipe
2
Injector rail protector
3
High pressure pipe between the pump and rail
4
Fuel collector
5
Fuel collector pipe
6
High pressure pump
Offset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.(Mot. 1746 )
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, High pressure pump: Removal - Refitting)
Tool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump(Mot. 2047 )
7
High pressure pump sprocket seal
8
High pressure pump sprocket
9
High pressure pump sprocket nut
10
Heat protection washer
11
Injector clamp
12
Diesel injector
Tool for removal - refitting pignon and high pressure pump(Mot. 2047 )
Injector well cleaning kit(Mot. 1817 )
(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Diesel injector: Removal - Refitting)
M9R/M9T injector extractor(Mot. 1966 )
13
High pressure pipe between the rail and injector
14
Diesel injector fuel return rail
15
Injector rail bolt
16
Offset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.(Mot. 1746 )
Injector rail
(see 13B,
Repair-11x11-02x50-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
Diesel injection, Diesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting)
INJECTION ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair
.
-1-
No.
Description
Information
1
Injector rail protector
2
Wiring channel upper spacer
3
Wiring channel
4
Diesel injector fuel return rail
5
Injector clamp
6
Diesel injector
7
Heat protection washer
8
Injector rail
10
Diesel return pipe
11
High pressure pipe between the pump and rail
12
High pressure pipe between the rail and injector
13
Wiring channel lower spacer
14
High pressure pump sprocket nut
15
High pressure pump sprocket
16
High pressure pump sprocket seal
17
High pressure pump
18
Fuel collector
19
Fuel collector pipe
(see 13B, Diesel
(see 13B, Diesel
injection, Injector rail protector: Removal - Refitting)
injection, Diesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13B, Diesel
injection, Diesel injector: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13B, Diesel
injection, Injector rail: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13B, Diesel
injection, Injector rail: Removal - Refitting)
(see 13B, Diesel
Repair-11x11-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
injection, High pressure pump: Removal - Refitting)
INJECTOR EXTRACTION TOOL: USE
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
M9R/M9T injector extractor
Mot. 1966
parts always to be replaced:
Diesel injector
CONTENTS OF KIT
(1) Tapped pull rod (for piezoelectric injectors)
(2) Threaded pull rod (for solenoid injectors)
-1-
(3) Support legs
(4) Pin
(5) Hexagonal end piece (for solenoid injectors)
(6) Pressure plate
(7) Ball nut
Note:
There are two types of injectors, " piezoelectric " injectors and " solenoid injectors " . The tool fitting
procedure differs depending on the injector type.
USE
1. FITTING THE TOOL (MOT 1966) ON THE INJECTOR
Unclip the brake servo pipe.
Move aside the brake servo pipe.
Unclip the vacuum tank(12 ) from the scoop under the scuttle panel grille.
Move aside the vacuum tank.
-2-
1- PIEZOELECTRIC TYPE INJECTOR
-3-
Fit the tapped pull rod(1 ) on the high pressure pipe union.
2- SOLENOID TYPE INJECTOR
-4-
-5-
-6-
Remove:
the diesel injector assembly(13) ,
the internal nut of the diesel injector using the hexagonal end piece(5) of the toolM9R/M9T injector extractor(Mot. 1966 ) .
Fit the threaded pull rod(2 ) in place of the solenoid.
2. FITTING THE TOOL (MOT 1966) ON THE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAP COVER AND EXTRACTION
-7-
Remove the bolts(14 ) from the rocker cover according to the diesel injector concerned.
-8-
Fit the support legs(3 ) on the rocker cover in place of the bolts(14 ) .
Torque tighten the support legs on the rocker cover15 N.m.
-9-
Fit the pull rod(1 ) on the diesel injector.
Note:
Tapped pull rod for " piezoelectric " type diesel injectors.
Threaded pull rod for " solenoid " type diesel injectors.
- 10 -
Fit the pressure plate(6 ) .
- 11 -
Fit the pin(4 ) to prevent the pull rod from rotating.
Grease the threads of the pull rod using BR2 + greaseVehicle:
Products).
Parts and consumables for the repair
(04B, Consumables -
ATTENTION
Failure to observe the following procedure can lead to the destruction of the toolM9R/M9T injector
extractor (Mot. 1966 ) .
Fit the ball nut(7 ) .
- 12 -
Tighten the ball nut until the diesel injector detaches.
parts always to be replaced:
Diesel injector
Always clean the well of the removed injectorInjector
injection).
if removing with the toolM9R/M9T injector extractor(Mot. 1966 ) .
well cleaning tool: Use
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-11x05x06x13-01x79-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 13 -
(Technical Note 6040A, 13B, Diesel
INJECTOR RAIL PROTECTOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
WARNING
Systematically refit the injector rail protector and the high pressure pump protections
before starting the engine to avoid any risk of projections of fuel in case of
high-pressure circuit leakage.
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove AND (ZA4 OR ZF4) ZA4 ZF4:
the turbocharger air inlet pipe,
the intercooler air inlet pipe.
-1-
Disconnect the pipe (1 ) from the sensor.
Disconnect the connectors(2 ) from the sensor.
-2-
Disconnect the sensor (3 ) .
Unclip the fuel return pipe(4 ) .
-3-
Unclip from the injector rail protector:
the engine wiring(5) ,
the pipes(6) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove :
the injector rail protector mounting bolts,
the injector rail protector.
-4-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit :
the injector rail protector,
the injector rail protector mounting bolts.
Torque tighten the injector rail protector mounting bolts .
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-11x05x06x09-01x37-1-35-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
INJECTOR RAIL PROTECTOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Unclip the engine wiring(1 ) from the injector rail protector.
Remove the injector rail protector(see 13B, Diesel
injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view)
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
.
Repair-11x05x06x09-01x37-1-28-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
INJECTOR RAIL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Tool for removing high pressure pipes.
Mot. 1566
Offset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.
Mot. 1746
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before carrying out any
repair:
(see 13B, Diesel injection, Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
During this operation, be sure to:
refrain from smoking or bringing red hot objects close to the working area,
be careful of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
-1-
CAUTION
Do not blast with compressed air once the fuel circuit is open, otherwise impurities
may enter the system. Only use cleaning cloths.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) (80A, Battery).
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the injector rail protector(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the oil decanterAND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702,
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors from the injector rail(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors from the diesel injectors(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVING THE HIGH PRESSURE PIPE OF INJECTOR 1
-2-
Remove the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors(see 13B, Diesel
assembly: Exploded view) (see 13B,Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
injection, Injection
Remove:
the exhaust fuel injector solenoid valveAND (M9T) AND (670 OR 680 OR 880) M9T, 670 680 880AND (M9T)
AND (690 OR 698 OR 890 OR 898) M9T, 690 698 890 898,
the bolts of the high pressure pump protector(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
Move aside the high pressure pump protector.
-3-
Remove (see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) :
the fuel collector,
the nut of the high pressure pipe between the pump and the rail from the high pressure pump using the toolTool
for removing high pressure pipes.(Mot. 1566 ) and the toolOffset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.
(Mot. 1746 ) ,
the nut of the high pressure pipe between the pump and the rail from the injector rail using the toolTool for
removing high pressure pipes.(Mot. 1566 ) and the toolOffset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.(Mot.
1746 ) .
Remove:
the bolt(1) from the the bracket of the high pressure pipe between the pump and the rail,
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the rail(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded
view ) (see 13B,Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
-4-
Remove the bolts(2 ) from the engine wiring harness channel.
Move aside the engine wiring channel.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-5-
Disconnect:
the heater plug connectorsAND (M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702,
the connector(5) from the rail pressure sensor(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
Remove the bolt from the engine oil dipstick guideAND
Move the engine oil dipstick guide to one sideAND
Remove the injector rail(see 13B, Diesel
(M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702.
(M9T) AND (700 OR 702) M9T, 700 702.
injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view)
-6-
.
CAUTION
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
Insert the blanking plugs.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
1- WHEN REPLACING THE INJECTOR RAIL:
Remove the rail pressure sensor on the old injector rail(see 13B, Diesel
Exploded view ) .
Refit the rail pressure sensor to the injector rail(see 13B, Diesel
view ) .
injection, Injection assembly:
injection, Injection assembly: Exploded
2. REFITTING OPERATION
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Prime the diesel circuit using the manual priming pump.
Repair-11x05x06x07-01x37-1-82-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
INJECTOR RAIL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Offset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.
Mot. 1746
Set of high pressure pipe removal wrenches (diameter 14,17,19)
Mot. 2022
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before carrying out any
repair:
(see 13B, Diesel injection, Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
During this operation, be sure to:
refrain from smoking or bringing red hot objects close to the working area,
be careful of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
-1-
CAUTION
Do not blast with compressed air once the fuel circuit is open, otherwise impurities
may enter the system. Only use cleaning cloths.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) (80A, Battery).
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the injector rail protector(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the oil decanter(see Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OEPRATION
Remove:
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors from the injector rail(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the nut of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the high pressure pump from the injector rail(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors from the diesel injectors(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
-2-
Remove the injector rail mounting nuts.
Remove the injector rail(see 13B, Diesel
injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view)
.
CAUTION
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
-3-
Insert blanking plugs.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
Refit the injector rail.
Refit the injector rail mounitng bolts.
Torque tighten the injector rail mounting bolt10 N.m.
Refit:
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors from the injector rail(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the nut of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the high pressure pump from the injector rail(see 13B,
Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors from the diesel injectors(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
-4-
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors from the diesel injector34 N.m
using the toolOffset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.(Mot. 1746 ) (see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) (see 13B,Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
-5-
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors from the injector rail34 N.m
using the toolSet of high pressure pipe removal wrenches (diameter 14,17,19)(Mot. 2022 ) (see 13B,
Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) (see 13B,Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
-6-
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the high pressure pipe from the injector
rail 34 N.musing the toolSet of high pressure pipe removal wrenches (diameter 14,17,19)(Mot. 2022 )
(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) (see 13B,Diesel injection, Injection assembly:
Exploded view ) ,
2. FINAL OPERATION
Process in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-11x05x06x07-01x37-1-95-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
INJECTOR RAIL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Tool for removing high pressure pipes.
Mot. 1566
Offset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.
Mot. 1746
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
IMPORTANT
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before carrying out any
repair:
Diesel injection: Precautions for the repair ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
IMPORTANT
During this operation, be sure to:
refrain from smoking or bringing red hot objects close to the working area,
be careful of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
IMPORTANT
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
WARNING
Do not blast with compressed air once the fuel circuit is open, otherwise impurities
may enter the system. Only use cleaning cloths.
-1-
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the air outlet pipe from the air filter box(see 12A, Fuel
mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view)
Remove:
the injector rail protector(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the oil decanterEngine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view ,
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors from the injector rail(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the nuts of the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors from the diesel injectors(see 13B, Diesel
injection , Injection assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVING THE HIGH PRESSURE PIPE OF INJECTOR 1
-2-
.
Remove the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors(see 13B, Diesel
assembly: Exploded view) .
injection, Injection
Remove (see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) :
the fuel collector,
the nut of the high pressure pipe between the pump and the rail from the high pressure pump using the toolTool
for removing high pressure pipes.(Mot. 1566 ) and the toolOffset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.
(Mot. 1746 ) ,
the nut of the high pressure pipe between the pump and the rail from the injector rail using the toolTool for
removing high pressure pipes.(Mot. 1566 ) and the toolOffset wrench for tightening High Pressure pump pipes.(Mot.
1746 ) .
-3-
Remove:
the bolt(1) from the the bracket of the high pressure pipe between the pump and the rail,
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the rail(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded
view ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
Disconnect:
the heater plug connectors(see 11A, Top and front of engine, Cylinder head assembly: Exploded view) ,
the connector(3) from the rail pressure sensor(see 13B, Diesel injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view) ,
the fuel return pipe union(4) from the injector rail.
Remove the bolt from the engine oil dipstick guideEngine
Move the engine oil dipstick guide to one sideEngine
Remove the injector rail(see 13B, Diesel
oil circuit assembly: Exploded view
oil circuit assembly: Exploded view
injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view)
-5-
.
.
.
WARNING
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
Insert the blanking plugs.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
1- WHEN REPLACING THE INJECTOR RAIL:
Remove the rail pressure sensor on the old injector rail(see 13B, Diesel
Exploded view ) .
Refit the rail pressure sensor to the injector rail(see 13B, Diesel
view ) .
injection, Injection assembly:
injection, Injection assembly: Exploded
2. REFITTING OPERATION
WARNING
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Prime the diesel circuit using the manual priming pump.
Repair-11x05x06x07-01x37-1-82-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
INLET DISTRIBUTOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
parts always to be replaced:
inlet distributor seal
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exhaust
circuit assembly: Exploded view .
gas recirculation
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the engine undertray.
Remove the intercooler air outlet pipe(see 12A, Fuel
mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view)
Remove :
the
the
the
the
damper valve,
exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe at the exhaust gas cooler outlet,
exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve,
exhaust gas circuit temperature sensor.
-1-
.
Disconnect the air inlet pressure sensor connector(1 ) .
Remove :
the air inlet pressure sensor bolt,
the air inlet pressure sensor.
-2-
Unclip the water circulation control solenoid valve vacuum pipe at(2 ) .
Disconnect the water circulation control solenoid valve vacuum pipes(3 ) .
-3-
Remove the bolt(5 ) of the remote battery plug bracket.
Move aside the remote battery plug with its bracket(4 ) .
Remove :
the
the
the
the
the
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
oil
oil
oil
oil
oil
dipstick,
dipstick guide bolts,
filler neck bolts,
" filler neck - dipstick guide " assembly,
dipstick guide seal.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
Remove the inlet distributor bracket bolt(6 ) .
Remove :
the inlet distributor bolts,
the inlet distributor,
-5-
the inlet distributor seals,
the water circulation control solenoid valve bolts,
the water circulation control solenoid valve.
3. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
inlet distributor seal
Parts always to be replaced: engine oil dipstick guide seal.
Clean and degrease using surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair :
the joint face between the inlet distributor and the cylinder head,
the joint face between the inlet distributor and the EGR solenoid valve,
the joint face between the inlet distributor and the damper valve.
4. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit :
the inlet distributor seals.
the inlet distributor,
the inlet distributor bolts,
Torque tighten in order the inlet distributor bolts .
-6-
Refit the inlet distributor bracket bolt.
5. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x07x01x06-01x37-1-119-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
INNER REAR WHEEL ARCH: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Inner rear wheel arch
Mild steel
0.75
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld area(see Earths on body: List and location of components) .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weld(see Connections by arc welding
under shielding gas: Description) (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections
(GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x09x16x04-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Input shaft lip seal
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view
2
Clutch shaft stop ring
3
Input shaft bearing on clutch housing
4
Clutch shaft
5
Cylindrical roller bearing stop ring
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
6
Cylindrical roller bearing
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
7
Stop ring of the 5th and 6th synchroniser hub
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
8
6th clutch hub
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
9
6th synchroniser ring
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
10
Locking ball and spring of the 5th and 6th synchroniser hub
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
11
5th and 6th synchroniser hub
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
12
5th and 6th synchroniser
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
13
5th synchroniser ring
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
14
5th clutch hub
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
15
5th idle gear
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
16
5th idle gear needle bearing
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
17
Primary shaft
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Gearbox shaft: Removal - Refitting)
18
2nd idle gear needle bearing
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
19
2nd idle gear
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
20
2nd synchroniser rings
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
21
1st and 2nd synchroniser hub
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
22
Locking ball cartridge of the 1st and 2nd synchroniser hub
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
23
1st and 2nd synchroniser
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
24
1st synchroniser rings
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
25
1st idle gear spacer
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
26
1st idle gear needle bearing
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
27
1st idle gear
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
28
Reverse gear idle gear washer
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
29
Reverse gear idle gear spacer
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
30
Reverse gear idle gear needle bearing
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Clutch housing: Removal - Refitting)
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
-2-
Clutch housing: Removal - Refitting)
31
Reverse gear synchroniser hub and idle gear
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
32
Locking ball and spring of the reverse gear synchroniser hub
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
33
Reverse gear synchroniser
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
34
Reverse gear synchroniser ring
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
35
Reverse gear clutch hub
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
36
Stop
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view
37
Input shaft bearing on mechanism housing
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view
38
Gearbox output flange seal
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view
39
Gearbox output flange
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view
Repair-12x01x04x12-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
INPUT SHAFT LIP SEAL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Inertia seal extractor
Bvi. 1948
Tool for fitting the ZF4 primary shaft seal
Bvi. 1947
Washer of compensation for installation primary shaft seal.
Bvi. 1985
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the
safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 21A, Manual
gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view ) .
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the manual gearbox(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) ,
the clutch forkClutch assembly: Exploded view ,
the clutch thrust bearing guide(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the input shaft lip seal using the toolInertia seal extractor(Bvi. 1948 ) (1 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Coat vaseline around the outside edges of the new input shaft lip seal.
Fill the space between the input shaft lock ring and the input shaft lip seal with greaseVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
-2-
Parts and
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Fit a new seal using the toolTool for fitting the ZF4 primary shaft seal(Bvi. 1947 ) (2 ) .
Note:
For a good installation, use the additional toolWasher of compensation for installation
primary shaft seal.(Bvi. 1985 ) .
-3-
Refit a new seal using the toolsTool for fitting the ZF4 primary shaft seal(Bvi. 1947 ) and Washer of
compensation for installation primary shaft seal.(Bvi. 1985 ) (3 ) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x01x04x17-01x37-1-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
INPUT SHAFT: STRIPPING - REBUILDING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
ZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit
Bvi. 1950
Equipment required
component support
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Manual gearbox: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
STRIPPING
1. STRIPPING PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the manual gearboxGearbox
Position the gearbox on the
assembly: Exploded view
component support(see
.
21A, Manual gearbox ,
Gearbox support equipment: Use)
.
Remove:
the gearshift plate(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) ,
the reverse gear switchGearbox assembly: Exploded view .
Remove the clutch housingGearbox
assembly: Exploded view
Remove the shaft unit(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
.
Gearbox shaft: Removal - Refitting)
.
Remove the assembly of gearbox control shafts and forks(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
-1-
Selector shafts and
gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view )
from the shaft unit.
2. STRIPPING OPERATION
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the 6th clutch hub(1) ,
the 6th synchroniser ring(2) .
-2-
Remove the cylindrical roller bearing stop ring(3 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
view ) .
-3-
Input shaft assembly: Exploded
Use a hydraulic press, an extractor and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) F (4 ) to
remove the cylindrical roller bearing(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) .
-4-
Remove the stop ring of the 5th and 6th synchroniser hub(5 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
assembly: Exploded view) .
Input shaft
CAUTION
The three pressure parts with a pressure spring and a ball respectively will be
released.
Immobilise the parts with a cloth so that they do not jump out.
-5-
-6-
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the 5th and 6th synchroniser(6) ,
the locking ball and spring(7) of the 5th and 6th synchroniser hub.
-7-
-8-
Use a hydraulic press and an extractor to remove(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the 5th and 6th synchroniser hub(8) ,
the 5th synchroniser ring(9) ,
the 5th clutch hub(10) .
-9-
Remove the 5th idle gear(11 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
- 10 -
Input shaft assembly: Exploded view)
.
Remove the 5th idle gear needle bearing(12 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
view ) .
Rotate the input shaft.
- 11 -
Input shaft assembly: Exploded
Use a hydraulic press, an extractor and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) A to remove
the reverse gear clutch hub(13 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) .
- 12 -
- 13 -
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the reverse gear synchroniser ring(14) ,
the reverse gear synchroniser(15) ,
the locking ball and spring of the reverse gear synchroniser hub(16) .
- 14 -
Remove the reverse gear synchroniser hub and idle gear(17 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
assembly: Exploded view) .
- 15 -
Input shaft
Remove the reverse gear idle gear needle bearing(18 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Exploded view ) .
- 16 -
Input shaft assembly:
Use a hydraulic press and an extractor to remove(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the reverse gear idle gear spacer(19) ,
the reverse gear idle gear washer(20) ,
the 1st idle gear(21) .
- 17 -
Remove the 1st idle gear needle bearing(22 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
view
).
- 18 -
Input shaft assembly: Exploded
- 19 -
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the 1st synchroniser ring(23) ,
the 1st and 2nd synchroniser(24) ,
the locking ball cartridge of the 1st and 2nd synchroniser hub(25) .
- 20 -
Use a hydraulic press, an extractor to remove(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the 1st idle gear spacer(26) ,
the 1st and 2nd synchroniser hub(27) .
- 21 -
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the 2nd synchroniser ring(28) ,
the 2nd idle gear(29) .
- 22 -
Remove the 2nd idle gear needle bearing(30 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
view
).
REBUILDING
1. REBUILDING PREPARATION OPERATION
- 23 -
Input shaft assembly: Exploded
Clean all the removed partsVehicle: Parts and consumables for
Products).
the repair
(04B, Consumables -
Always replace:
the cylindrical roller bearing,
the 5th idle gear needle bearing,
the reverse gear idle gear needle bearing,
the 1st idle gear needle bearing,
the 2nd idle gear needle bearing.
2. REBUILDING OPERATION
Lightly oil the 2nd idle gear needle bearing(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
view
Input shaft assembly: Exploded
).
Refit a new 2nd idle gear needle bearing(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
view ) on the input shaft.
Input shaft assembly: Exploded
Refit the 2nd idle gear on the input shaft so that the synchroniser drive teeth are facing the
gearbox output end(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) .
Check the wear on the synchromesh parts.
Input
Refit the 2nd synchroniser rings on the 1st and 2nd synchroniser hub(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
shaft assembly: Exploded view) .
- 24 -
Use a hydraulic press and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) D to refit:
the assembly on the input shaft(31) ,
the 1st idle gear spacer(32) (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) .
Refit (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
- 25 -
the locking ball cartridge of the 1st and 2nd synchroniser hub,
the 1st and 2nd synchroniser on the 1st and 2nd synchroniser hub.
Note:
The notches of the 1st and 2nd synchroniser (inner side) must line up exactly with the
synchroniser hub recesses.
Refit the 1st synchroniser rings(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft assembly: Exploded view)
Lightly oil the 1st idle gear needle bearing(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
view
.
Input shaft assembly: Exploded
).
Refit a new 1st idle gear needle bearing(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
on the input shaft.
- 26 -
Input shaft assembly: Exploded view)
Use a hydraulic press and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) D to refit:
the 1st idle gear(33) ,
the reverse gear idle gear washer(34) ,
the reverse gear idle gear spacer(35) .
- 27 -
Lightly oil the reverse gear idle gear needle bearing(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Exploded view ) .
Input shaft assembly:
Refit (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
a new reverse gear idle gear needle bearing,
the reverse gear synchroniser on the reverse gear synchroniser hub and idle gear,
the locking balls and springs of the reverse gear synchroniser hub on the reverse gear synchroniser hub and
idle gear,
the reverse gear synchroniser hub and idle gear,
the reverse gear synchroniser ring.
- 28 -
Use a hydraulic press and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) D to refit the reverse
gear clutch hub(36 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) .
Rotate the input shaft(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft assembly: Exploded view)
Oil the 2nd idle gear needle bearing(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
- 29 -
.
Input shaft assembly: Exploded view)
.
Refit (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
a new 2nd idle gear needle bearing,
the 5th idle gear. The helical 5th clutch hub must be facing the gearbox input end.
Check the wear on the synchromesh parts.
Refit (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) the " 5th clutch hub - 5th
synchroniser ring " assembly on the 5th and 6th synchroniser hub.
- 30 -
Use a hydraulic press and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) D to refit the " 5th
clutch hub - 5th synchroniser ring - 5th and 6th synchroniser hub " assembly on the input shaft(37 ) (see
21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) .
- 31 -
Note:
The 6th hub stop ring must go right to the bottom of the groove in the main shaft.
The stop ring end float must be 0to 0.1 mm.
Aim for 0.0 mm.
Refit the stop ring of the 5th and 6th synchroniser hub(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
assembly: Exploded view) .
Refit the 5th and 6th synchroniser(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Input shaft
Input shaft assembly: Exploded view)
.
Note:
The notches of the 5th and 6th synchroniser (inner side) must line up exactly with the
synchroniser hub recesses.
Refit (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the locking ball and spring of the 5th and 6th synchroniser hub,
the 6th synchroniser ring.
Note:
The synchroniser ring teeth must be above the pressure parts in the 5th and 6th
synchroniser hub.
Refit the 6th clutch hub(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
- 32 -
Input shaft assembly: Exploded view)
.
Use a hydraulic press and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) A to refit a new
cylindrical roller bearing(38 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Input shaft assembly: Exploded view) .
Refit the cylindrical roller bearing stop ring(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
view
).
3. FINAL OPERATION
- 33 -
Input shaft assembly: Exploded
Proceed in the reverse order to stripping.
Repair-12x01x04x11-01x31-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 34 -
INSTRUMENT PANEL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
In the event of replacement, apply the Before repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Instrument panel " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Switch off the ignition.
-1-
Move away the upper corner of the centre front panel using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car.
1363 ) by (1 ) .
-2-
Unclip the instrument panel visor by(2 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
Unclip the instrument panel by(3 ) .
-4-
Disconnect the connector(4 ) from the instrument panel.
Unclip the instrument panel by(5 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
2. FINAL OPERATION
-5-
Switch on the ignition.
In the event of a replacement, apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Instrument panel " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-30x04x01-01x37-1-28-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
INTERCOOLER AIR OUTLET PIPE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
parts always to be replaced:
turbocharger air cooler air outlet pipe seal
Damper valve seal
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Air
Exploded view .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Remove the engine undertray.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
inlet assembly:
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Separate the clip (1 ) on the intercooler air outlet pipe.
Undo the clip on the intercooler air outlet pipeAir
inlet assembly: Exploded view
M9T, 700(700)
-2-
.
Disconnect the air inlet temperature sensor connector(1 ) .
Unclip the air inlet temperature sensor cable(2 ) from the intercooler air outlet pipe.
-3-
Disconnect the damper valve connectors(3 ) .
Move aside the damper valve connectors.
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
Move aside the clip(4 ) of the intercooler air outlet pipe on the damper valve side.
-8-
CAUTION
Make sure to follow the instructions to properly remove the clip:
push the pipe towards the damper valve,
while pushing the pipe, lever up the clip with using a flat-blade screwdriver to
unlock the clip from its 3 notches,
disconnect the pipe from the intercooler.
Disconnect the intercooler air outlet pipe from the damper valve.
-9-
- 10 -
- 11 -
- 12 -
Move aside the clip(5 ) of the intercooler air outlet pipe on the intercooler side.
- 13 -
CAUTION
Make sure to follow the instructions to properly disconnect the pipe:
push the pipe towards the intercooler,
while pushing the pipe, lever up the clip with using a flat-blade screwdriver to
unlock the clip from its 3 notches,
disconnect the pipe from the intercooler.
Disconnect the intercooler air outlet pipe from the intercooler.
- 14 -
Remove the nut(6 ) of the intercooler air outlet pipe bracket.
Remove :
the intercooler air outlet pipe,
the intercooler air outlet pipe seals.
- 15 -
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
turbocharger air cooler air outlet pipe seal
parts always to be replaced:
Damper valve seal
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit :
the intercooler air outlet pipe new seals,
the intercooler air outlet pipe.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Note:
Check that the intercooler air outlet pipe is correctly connected on both sides by
" pulling and pushing " the intercooler air outlet pipe.
Repair-10x09x04x03-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 16 -
INTERCOOLER : REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Air
Exploded view .
inlet assembly:
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the
the
the
the
the
engine undertray,
radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment),
headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting (80B, Headlights),
front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection),
intercooler air outlet pipe.
Remove the intercooler air inlet pipe clip at the intercooler end.
Disconnect the intercooler air inlet pipe from the intercooler.
Remove the seal at the intercooler end of the intercooler air inlet pipe.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the intercooler deflectors(1 ) .
-2-
Unclip the intercooler at(2 ) using two screwdrivers.
-3-
Remove the intercooler in the direction of the arrow.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x09x04-01x37-1-59-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
INTERIOR LIGHT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- SINGLE LIGHT
Unclip the courtesy light(1 ) using the tool atSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
Disconnect the courtesy light connector.
Remove the courtesy light.
-1-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Note:
Use an approved bulb for replacement.
Connect the courtesy light connector.
Clip on the courtesy light.
Repair-80x02x08x08-01x37-1-18-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
INTERIOR LIGHTING: LIST AND LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
1. LIST OF COMPONENTS
1- THE INTERIOR LIGHTING CONSISTS OF:
headlining lights(see 81B, Interior lighting, Headlining light: Removal - Refitting)
2. LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
FRONT HEADLINING LIGHT
-1-
CENTRE HADLINING LIGHT
REAR HEADLINING LIGHT
-2-
Repair-80x02x08-02x51-1-17-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
HIGH LEVEL BRAKE LIGHT BULB: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exterior
element assembly: Exploded view (52A, Non-side opening element mechanisms).
rear opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the high level brake lightExterior
opening element mechanisms).
rear opening element assembly: Exploded view
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
(52A, Non-side
Unclip the high level brake light bulb at(1 ) .
REFITTING
Note:
If the bulb is changed, only use an approved bulb.
-2-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x02x06x20-01x37-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
LATERAL ACCELERATION AND YAW SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 38C, Anti-lock braking system, ABS: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the centre consoleCentre console: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment).
Remove the floor carpet.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the lateral acceleration and yaw sensor connector(1 ) .
Remove:
the(2) lateral acceleration and yaw sensor nuts,
the lateral acceleration and yaw sensor.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
-2-
Refit the lateral acceleration and yaw sensor.
Torque tighten the lateral acceleration and yaw sensor nuts8 N.m.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the floor carpet.
Refit the centre consoleCentre console: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment).
Repair-13x03x10x05-01x37-1-22-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
LEFT-HAND SUSPENDED ENGINE MOUNTING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly
Mot. 1390
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19D, Engine
mounting, Engine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the nut of the electric coolant pump support at the turbocharger outletCoolant circuit assembly: Exploded view .
Move the electric coolant pump away from the turbocharger outlet.
-1-
Unclip the wiring(1 ) from the engine mounting.
Remove the bolt of the power-assisted steering return pipePower-assisted
from the engine mounting (36B, Power-assisted steering).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
steering assembly: Exploded view
Position the Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly(Mot. 1390 ) under the engine.
Remove the following from the engine mounting(see 19D, Engine mounting, Engine-gearbox unit support assembly:
Exploded view ) :
the bolt of the front left-hand rubber pad,
the bolt of the front right-hand rubber pad.
-3-
Remove the engine mounting bolts(2 ) .
Move the engine mounting aside.
Remove the left-hand rubber pad(see 19D, Engine mounting,
view ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-4-
Engine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded
Torque tighten the engine mounting bolts62 N.m.
Repair-10x04x01x02-01x37-1-89-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
LEFT-HAND SUSPENDED ENGINE MOUNTING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly
Mot. 1390
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19D, Engine
mounting, Engine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the nut of the electric coolant pump support at the turbocharger outletCoolant circuit assembly: Exploded view .
Move the electric coolant pump away from the turbocharger outlet.
-1-
Unclip the wiring(1 ) from the engine mounting.
Remove the bolt of the power-assisted steering return pipePower-assisted
from the engine mounting (36B, Power-assisted steering).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
steering assembly: Exploded view
Position the Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly(Mot. 1390 ) under the engine.
Remove the following from the engine mounting(see 19D, Engine mounting, Engine-gearbox unit support assembly:
Exploded view ) :
the bolt of the front left-hand rubber pad,
the bolt of the front right-hand rubber pad.
-3-
Remove the engine mounting bolts(2 ) .
Move the engine mounting aside.
Remove the left-hand rubber pad(see 19D, Engine mounting,
view ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-4-
Engine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded
Torque tighten the engine mounting bolts62 N.m.
Repair-10x04x01x02-01x37-1-89-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
LIFTING EYES: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION FOR THE LIFTING EYE ON THE INLET SIDE
-1-
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Remove (see 11A, Top and front of engine, Cylinder head assembly: Exploded view) :
the lifting eye bolts on the inlet side,
the lifting eye on the inlet side.
M9T, 700(700)
Unclip the wiring at(1 ) .
Remove :
-2-
the lifting eye bolts on the inlet side,
the lifting eye on the inlet side.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Refit (see 11A, Top and front of engine, Cylinder head assembly: Exploded view) :
the lifting eye on the inlet side,
the lifting eye bolts on the inlet side.
Torque tighten the lifting eye bolts on the inlet side(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
assembly: Exploded view) .
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION FOR THE LIFTING EYE ON THE EXHAUST SIDE
-3-
Cylinder head
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Remove the bolt(1 ) from the exhaust gas pressure sensor support.
Move aside the exhaust gas pressure sensor support.
M9T, 700(700)
-4-
Unclip the exhaust gas pressure sensor wiring at(2 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION FOR THE LIFTING EYE ON THE EXHAUST SIDE
Remove (see 11A, Top and front of engine, Cylinder head assembly: Exploded view) :
the lifting eye bolts on the exhaust side,
the lifting eye on the exhaust side.
REFITTING
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-5-
Refit (see 11A, Top and front of engine, Cylinder head assembly: Exploded view) :
the lifting eye on the exhaust side,
the lifting eye bolts on the exhaust side.
Torque tighten the lifting eye bolts on the exhaust side(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
assembly: Exploded view) .
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x04x03-01x37-1-8-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
Cylinder head
LOADING DOOR SILL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Unclip the loading door sill at(1 ) .
Remove the loading door sill.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-70x02x03x02-01x37-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
LONGITUDINAL DRIVESHAFT INPUT SEAL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Hub locking tool.
Rou. 604-01
Tool for fitting crankshaft seal (timing end)
Mot. 1560
Inertia seal extractor
Bvi. 1948
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
indelible pencil
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
-1-
Mark the position of the longitudinal driveshaft bracket using a
indelible
pencilat (1 ) .
Remove the bolts and nuts from the universal joint on the final drive sideDriveshaft
view .
-2-
assembly: Exploded
Attach the longitudinal driveshaft to the body using a safety strap(s).
-3-
Fit the toolHub locking tool.(Rou.
604-01) (2 ) on
the rear final drive bracket.
Remove the nut(3 ) from the rear final drive bracket.
-4-
Remove the bracket from the rear final drive using a three-claw extractor(4 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-5-
Remove the longitudinal driveshaft input seal(5 ) using the toolInertia seal extractor(Bvi. 1948 ) (6 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the longitudinal driveshaft input seal.
-6-
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to
clean and degrease the housing of the longitudinal driveshaft inlet seal.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the longitudinal driveshaft input seal using the toolTool for fitting crankshaft seal (timing end)
(Mot. 1560 ) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x06x01x08-01x37-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
LONGITUDINAL DRIVESHAFT RELAY BEARING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Tool for removing and refitting rear final drive - driveshaft cross pieces
Bvi. 1945
Equipment required
sliding two-claw extractor
roll pin punch
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 29A, Driveshafts ,
Driveshaft assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the longitudinal driveshaft(see 29A, Driveshafts ,
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Driveshaft assembly: Exploded view)
.
Remove the circlips(1 ) of the universal joint cross piece(see 29A, Driveshafts ,
Exploded view ) .
Driveshaft assembly:
Use grey abrasive pads(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products) to
clean the surface of the bushings of the universal joint cross piece.
-2-
-3-
Gently push out the bushings of the universal joint cross piece(see 29A, Driveshafts , Driveshaft
assembly: Exploded view) using the toolTool for removing and refitting rear final drive - driveshaft cross
pieces (Bvi. 1945 ) (2 ) and a press.
Note:
This operation requires three people.
Remove (see 29A, Driveshafts , Driveshaft assembly: Exploded view) :
-4-
the universal joint cross piece,
the bushings of the universal joint cross piece using a roll pin punch.
-5-
Fit the universal joint yoke in a vice equipped with jaws.
Remove (see 29A, Driveshafts , Driveshaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the yoke nut(3) ,
the universal joint yoke,
the dust seal of the universal joint yoke(4) .
-6-
Remove the longitudinal driveshaft relay bearing using a
external diameter of 44 mm(5 ) .
REFITTING
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace:
the universal joint cross piece,
the bushings of the universal joint cross piece,
-7-
sliding two-claw extractorand
a tube with an
the circlips of the universal joint cross piece,
the yoke nut,
the dust seal of the universal joint yoke.
-8-
Clean using grey abrasive pads(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) :
the housings of the bushings of the universal joint cross piece(6) ,
the mating surface of the longitudinal driveshaft relay bearing on the universal joint yoke.
-9-
Note:
Check that there are no burrs on the housings of the bushings of the universal joint
cross piece.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
- 10 -
Refit:
the longitudinal driveshaft relay bearing on the universal joint yoke using a tube with an external diameter
of
35 mm(7) and
a tube with an external diameter of
51 mmand
an internal diameter of
48 mm(8) ,
the dust seal of the universal joint yoke(see 29A, Driveshafts , Driveshaft assembly: Exploded view) ,
the universal joint yoke,
the yoke nut(see 29A, Driveshafts , Driveshaft assembly: Exploded view) .
- 11 -
Fit (see 29A, Driveshafts , Driveshaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the universal joint cross piece,
the bushings of the universal joint cross piece one by one while keeping them vertical using the toolTool
for removing and refitting rear final drive - driveshaft cross pieces(Bvi. 1945 ) (9) and a press.
Note:
This operation requires three people.
Refit the circlips of the universal joint cross piece(see 29A, Driveshafts ,
view
).
- 12 -
Driveshaft assembly: Exploded
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x06x04x01-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 13 -
LOWER COVER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Removes housing with silicone seals.
Mot. 1716
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
Wear goggles with side protectors for this operation.
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine undertray.
Drain the engine oil(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
-1-
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the sump bolts(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view)
.
Cut the silicone seal on the sump using theRemoves housing with silicone seals.(Mot. 1716 ) from (A)
to (B) .
-2-
Cut the rest of the silicone seal by removing the sump.
Note:
Gradually detach the sump with small alternating movements to prevent damaging the
sump.
Remove the sump(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view)
-3-
.
REFITTING
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face
will result in a risk of leaks.
CAUTION
Applying excess sealant could cause it to be squeezed out when parts are tightened.
A mixture of sealant and fluid could damage certain components (engine, radiator,
etc.).
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
Use super cleaning agent for joint facesVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products)
and a wooden spatula to clean the mating faces:
of the sump,
the cylinder block.
-4-
Apply a bead of silicone adhesive sealVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B,
Consumables - Products) with a diameter of 5 mm ± 2 mmto the sump in order to ensure a good seal.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-5-
Fill up the engine oil(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
Repair-10x03x01x01-01x37-1-124-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
.
LOWER COVER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Removes housing with silicone seals.
Mot. 1716
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Cylinder
Exploded view .
block assembly:
IMPORTANT
Wear goggles with side protectors for this operation.
IMPORTANT
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine undertray.
Drain the engine oil(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
-1-
.
Unclip the breather pipe from the sump(1 ) .
Move the breather pipe away from the sump.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the sump boltsCylinder
block assembly: Exploded view
-2-
.
Cut the silicone seal on the sump using theRemoves housing with silicone seals.(Mot. 1716 ) from (A)
to (B) .
-3-
Cut the rest of the silicone seal by removing the sump.
Note:
Gradually detach the sump with small alternating movements to prevent damaging the
sump.
Remove the sumpCylinder
block assembly: Exploded view
-4-
.
REFITTING
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
WARNING
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face
will result in a risk of leaks.
WARNING
Applying excess sealant could cause it to be squeezed out when parts are tightened.
A mixture of sealant and fluid could damage certain components (engine, radiator,
etc.).
WARNING
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
Use super cleaning agent for joint facesVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) and
a wooden spatula to clean the mating faces:
of the sump,
the cylinder block.
-5-
Apply a bead of silicone adhesive sealVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B,
Consumables - Products) with a diameter of 5 mm ± 2 mmto the sump in order to ensure a good seal.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-6-
Fill up the engine oil(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
Repair-10x03x01x01-01x37-1-124-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
.
LOWER ENGINE TIE-BAR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly
Mot. 1390
Adapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.
Mot. 1709
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19D, Engine
mounting, Engine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine undertray.
-1-
Unclip the heater matrix outlet coolant pipe from the gearbox(1 ) .
Move the heater matrix outlet coolant pipe away from the gearbox.
-2-
Fit the toolSupport for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly(Mot. 1390 ) equipped with the
tool Adapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.(Mot. 1709 ) under the engine.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (see 19D, Engine mounting, Engine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded view) :
the rear rubber pad bolt from the front axle assembly subframe,
the bolts of the rear rubber pad on the gearbox,
the rear rubber pad.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x04x01x05-01x37-1-76-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
MAINTENANCEOPERATIONALINSTRUCTIONS :SERVICE
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
Electronic check tool
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness
instructions and operation recommendations before carrying out any repairVehicle:
Precautions for the repair
The Renault maintenance programme includes all checks, top-ups, adjustments, and part replacements
necessary for vehicle maintenance. For information on the specific service intervals for the vehicle, refer
to the maintenance booklet or to ICM.
1. CONTENT OF THE DIFFERENT TYPES OF SERVICES AND THE ANNUAL INTERMEDIATE VISIT:
1- SERVICES:
The types of service (Maintenance Service, General Service, Renault Service) and the operations to be
performed may vary depending on the vehicle and the date of manufacture. To find out which specific
checks and operations should be performed on the vehicle, refer to the vehicle maintenance booklet.
1- ANNUAL INTERMEDIATE VISIT:
For vehicles for which the oil change is to be performed no later than every 2 years, a non-obligatory visit including the
following operations is advised:
check the engine oil level,
check the level, condition, and sealing of the brake fluid circuit,
check the coolant level,
check the level, condition, and sealing of the power-assisted steering circuit,
check the washer fluid level,
electronic fault finding of the battery with the test tool,
electronic fault finding of the computers,
condition of the windscreen and rear view mirrors,
-1-
wear of the windscreen wiper and rear wiper blades,
check the exterior lighting and signals,
condition and pressure of the tyres (including emergency spare wheel or tyre repair aerosol),
condition of gaiters, rubber mounting bushes, and ball joints,
exhaust system check,
sealing of the front and rear shock absorbers,
wear of the front and rear brake pads and brake discs.
NOTE: the content of the intermediate visit, as well as its commercial name, may vary from one country
to another. Thus additional checks and / or operations could be added to this list. For more information,
please contact the manufacturer's technical teams in your country
2. SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CUSTOMER USE AND MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE
OCS (OIL CONTROL SYSTEM) FOR GERMANY, ANDORRA, AUSTRIA, BELGIUM, DENMARK, SPAIN, ESTONIA, FINLAND,
FRANCE, GREAT BRITAIN, GREECE, HUNGARY, IRELAND, ICELAND, ITALY, LATVIA, LIECHTENSTEIN, LITHUANIA,
LUXEMBOURG, NORWAY, NETHERLANDS, POLAND, PORTUGAL, CZECH REPUBLIC, SLOVAKIA, SLOVENIA, SWEDEN,
SWITZERLAND, CROATIA, ISRAEL:
Definitions:
What does it mean that a vehicle is operated under normal conditions of customer use?
A vehicle is operated under normal conditions of customer use if it is not operated under the special
conditions of customer use (see below). In this case, observe the standard maintenance programme
provided in the maintenance booklet or ICM (Shared World Information).
What does it mean that a vehicle is operated under special conditions of customer use?
A special condition of customer use affects the replacement frequency of one or several parts of the
maintenance programme (service, air filter replacement, fuel filter replacement, etc.). The vehicle is said
to operate under special conditions of customer use if:
The instrument panel displays that a service is required (change engine oil and oil filter), only for
vehicles equipped with the OCS (Oil Control System) oil quality control device. See " List of vehicles
equipped with OCS or information in ICM (Shared World Information) " ,
At least 50% of the vehicle operating time is with the engine idling (example: constant door-to-door
driving without stopping the engine),
At least 50% of trips are at an average speed of less than 18 mph (30 km/h) (primarily urban use, taxi,
etc.),
At least 30% of the miles driven involve towing a trailer, caravan, etc. weighing more than 500 kg
(condition only for passenger vehicles),
-2-
Use in a dusty environment (work-site, + than 600 miles (1000 km)/year on unpaved roads, etc.),
Extended use (+ than 3000 miles (5000 km)/year) at temperatures continuously below -15 C.
What is the OCS (Oil Control System) and what does it detect?
The OCS is a device that evaluates oil degradation by calculations, taking into account the severe
engine operating conditions that affect the oil. Thus, under certain driving conditions, the instrument
panel indicates to the customer that a service is required.
Which vehicles are equipped with the OCS device?
THE MODELS EQUIPPED WITH THE OCS ARE FOR THE COUNTRIES OF
GERMANY, ANDORRA, AUSTRIA, BELGIUM, DENMARK, SPAIN, ESTONIA,
FINLAND, FRANCE, GREAT BRITAIN, GREECE, HUNGARY, IRELAND, ICELAND,
ITALY, LATVIA, LIECHTENSTEIN, LITHUANIA, LUXEMBOURG, NORWAY,
NETHERLANDS, POLAND, PORTUGAL, CZECH REPUBLIC, SLOVAKIA, SLOVENIA,
SWEDEN, SWITZERLAND, CROATIA, AND ISRAEL:
-3-
Note :
For the Dacia vehicles consult the ICM for the vehicles manufactured starting from 14/06/2011, before
consulting the table.
For the Renault vehicles consult the ICM for the vehicles manufactured starting from 01/01/2010,
before consulting the table.
Model
engine
Engine suffix
Vehicles affected:
Dacia
K9K emission control
standard Euro 5
all
all
WIND
D4F, K4M
All
All
TWINGO II
D4F turbocharged
All
All
TWINGO II
K4M emission control
standard Euro 5
All
All
TWINGO II
K9K
718
All
TWINGO II
K9K
740
Vehicles with oil service every 18
000 miles (30 000 Km) /2 years
TWINGO II
K9K emission control
standard Euro 5
All
All
CLIO III phase 1
K9K
764
Vehicles with oil service every
18,000 miles (30,000 Km) / 1 year
CLIO III phase 2
K9K emission control
standard Euro 5
All
All
CLIO III
D4F turbocharged
All
All
-4-
CLIO III
D4F
742
Vehicles with oil service every
18,000 miles (30,000 Km) / 1 year
CLIO III
K4M
862
All
MODUS
D4F turbocharged
All
All
MODUS
D4F
742
All
MODUS
K9K
764
Vehicles with oil service every
18,000 miles (30,000 Km) / 1 year
MODUS
K9K without particle
filter
All
Vehicles with oil service every 18
000 miles (30 000 Km) /2 years
MODUS
K9K emission control
standard Euro 5
All
All
KANGOO II
K4M emission control
standard Euro 5
All
All
KANGOO II
K9K
All
All
MEGANE II and
SCENIC II
K9K
732
Vehicles with oil service every
18,000 miles (30,000 Km) / 1 year
MEGANE II and
SCENIC II
M9R
700,721,722
Vehicles with oil service every
18,000 miles (30,000 Km) / 1 year
MEGANE II
M9R
724
Vehicles with oil service every
12,000 miles (20,000 Km) / 1 year
MEGANE II and
SCENIC II
F9Q
816,818
Vehicles with oil service every
18,000 miles (30,000 Km) / 1 year
-5-
FLUENCE and
MEGANE III/SCENIC
III
K9K
830
Vehicles with oil service interval
every 2 years
FLUENCE and
MEGANE III/SCENIC
III
K9K
832, 834,
836, 837
All
FLUENCE and
MEGANE III/SCENIC
III
K9K emission control
standard Euro 5
All
All
MEGANE III/SCENIC
III
F9Q, M9R, H4J, F4R,
R9M
All
All
Koleos
M9R emission control
standard Euro 5
All
All
LAGUNA III
K9K,M9R,V9X
All
All
LAGUNA III
M4R
726
All
ESPACE IV
M9R
All
Vehicles with oil service every
18,000 miles (30,000 Km) / 1 year
LATITUDE
Diesel
All
All
MASTER II phase 3
G9U
All
All
TRAFIC phase 2 and 3
M9R
All
Vehicles manufactured from
01/12/06
TRAFIC phase 2 and 3
G9U
All
All
MASTER III
All
All
All
1- FOR TURKEY, ROMANIA AND BULGARIA :
-6-
For the vehicles sold starting from 01/01/2011, consult the ICM.
1- MANAGEMENT OF VEHICLE MAINTENANCE IN CASE OF DRIVING UNDER SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CUSTOMER USE:
It is ESSENTIAL to read the instructions:
Depending on whether the vehicle is fitted with OCS or not, refer to the corresponding table below.
The tables below contain X's or notes to specify the maintenance operations to be performed depending
on the special conditions of customer use.
For the other maintenance programme parts that need not be replaced early, the maintenance interval is
the same as recommended for normal conditions of customer use (see the maintenance booklet or
ICM). If this interval will be reached before the next customer visit, replace this part ahead of schedule.
If the vehicle is operated under several of these special conditions of customer use, apply the most
stringent recommendation for replacement specified for the special conditions of use concerned.
FOR MODELS WITHOUT OCS:
-7-
Replace
the belts
and rollers Replace
the cabin
18,000
filter
miles
during
(30,000
every
km)
service for
sooner
normal
than for
conditions
normal
of use (1)
use
Time
conditions
(1)(2)
Divide by 2 the
Divide by 2 the Divide by 2 the air
diesel filter
engine oil and oil filter replacement
replacement
filter service
interval for normal
interval for normal
interval for normal conditions of use
conditions of use
conditions of use
(1)
(1)
Distance
(kilometres
or miles)
At least 50%
of the vehicle
operating
time with the
engine idling
(e.g.
constant doorto-door
driving
without
stopping the
engine)
X
At least 50%
of trips at an
average
speed of less
than 18 mph
(30 km/h)
(primarily
urban use,
taxi, etc.),
X
Distance
Time (kilometres
or miles)
X
X
Distance
Time (kilometres
or miles)
X
X
X
X
-8-
X
X
X
X
At least 30%
of the miles
driven while
towing a
trailer,
caravan, etc.
weighing
more than
500 kg
(condition
only for
passenger
vehicles),
X
Use in a
dusty
environment
(work-site, +
than 600
miles (1000
km)/year on
unpaved
roads, etc.),
X
Extended
use (+ than
3000 miles
(5000 km)
/year) at
temperatures
continuously
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(1) If the recommended interval will be reached before the next customer visit, replace the part
concerned ahead of schedule.
(2) Certain pulleys of certain engines must be replaced when replacing the accessories belt. See the
" Supplementary operations " section.
FOR MODELS WITH OCS (SEE THE TABLE OF MODELS EQUIPPED WITH THE
-9-
OCS AND THE COUNTRIES CONCERNED):
- 10 -
Replace
the belts
and rollers Replace
the cabin
18,000
filter
miles
during
(30,000
every
km)
service for
sooner
normal
than for
conditions
normal
of use (1)
use
Time
conditions
(1)(2)
Divide by 2 the
Divide by 2 the
Divide by 2 the air
engine oil and oil
diesel filter
filter replacement
filter service
replacement
interval for normal
interval for normal
interval for normal
conditions of use
conditions of use
conditions of use
(1)
(1)
(1)
Distance
(kilometres
or miles)
Distance
Time (kilometres
or miles)
Distance
Time (kilometres
or miles)
Instrument
Observe the
panel display
message on the
that a service
vehicle instrument
is required
panel and perform
(engine oil
the service
and oil filter
(engine oil and oil
service) due
filter service)
to the OCS
when it is
(Oil Control
requested(1).
System).
At least 50%
of the vehicle
operating
time with the
engine idling
(e.g.
constant doorto-door
driving
without
stopping the
engine)
X
X
- 11 -
X
X
X
At least 50%
of trips at an
average
speed of less
than 18 mph
(30 km/h)
(primarily
urban use,
taxi, etc.),
X
X
X
Use in a
dusty
environment
(work-site, +
than 600
miles (1000
km)/year on
unpaved
roads, etc.),
X
X
- 12 -
X
X
At least 30%
of the miles
driven while
towing a
trailer,
caravan, etc.
weighing
more than
500 kg
(condition
only for
passenger
vehicles),
X
X
X
X
Extended
use (+ than
3000 miles
(5000 km)
/year) at
temperatures
continuously
X
(1) If the recommended interval will be reached before the next customer visit, replace the part
concerned ahead of schedule.
(2) Certain pulleys of certain engines must be replaced when replacing the accessories belt. See the
" Supplementary operations " section.
3. SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CUSTOMER USE (OIL CONTROL SYSTEM) FOR THE COUNTRIES NOT MENTIONED ABOVE:
See the vehicle's maintenance booklet.
4. PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING OPERATIONS AND CHECKS DURING THE MAINTENANCE OR SERVICE:
The customer must be warned if a check reveals a fault.
Checks marked with an asterisk depend on the vehicle or the country.
1- BODYWORK: ANTICORROSION CHECK
Visually inspect the condition of the:
vehicle,
underside of the vehicle,
wheel arches.
Indicate any damage to the underbody protection, and all cuts, ruptures, scratches or corrosion
anywhere on the vehicle.
This inspection contributes to the validity of the anticorrosion warranty. It is therefore necessary to
complete the maintenance sheets in the maintenance booklet.
2- BODYWORK: CLEANING THE DEFLECTOR ARMS AND PANORAMIC SUNROOF MOBILE PANEL
- 13 -
Use a dry, lint-free cloth to clean the sunroof deflector arms (1) and the section of the mobile panel with
which they come into contact.
3- BODYWORK: CHECKING THE BONNET LOCK LUBRICATION AND OPERATION
1)GUILLOTINE TYPE LOCK
- 14 -
As specified in the photo above, apply silicone-free lubricantVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
(04B, Consumables - Products), placing it between the body of the lock (2) and the lock blade (3) in the
direction of the lock blade hinge shaft (4).
Let it set for1 minute, then manoeuvre 10 times from the bonnet release catch in the passenger
compartment.
2)OTHER TYPES OF LOCK
- 15 -
Apply silicone-free lubricantVehicle: Parts and consumables for
the catch assembly.
the repair
(04B, Consumables - Products) to
Let it set for1 minute, then manoeuvre 10 times from the bonnet release catch in the passenger
compartment.
4- GREASING OF THE REAR DOOR HINGES AND THE UPPER STRIKER PANEL HOOK OF THE SLIDING SIDE DOOR(MASTER II PHASE 3)
Apply opening element greaseto the rear door hinges and the upper striker panel hook of the sliding side
door (see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair)
- 16 -
5- ENGINE: DRAINING THE ENGINE OIL
The oil grade is essential for maintaining the service life of the engine. Carefully follow the manufacturer's
recommendations specified in the Technical NoteEngine oil: Specifications (Technical Note 6013A, 04A,
Lubricants).
Use the correct quantity of oil and the correct sump plug sealing washerEngine oil: Draining - Refilling (10A,
Engine and peripherals).
After topping up, let the oil run for approximately 10 minutes before checking the level. The oil level
maximum mark on the dipstick must never be exceeded (risk of damage to the engine).
6- ENGINE: REPLACING THE OIL FILTER
Replace the engine oil filter after each oil serviceOil filter: Removal - Refitting (10A, Engine and peripherals).
7- ENGINE: CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually inspect:
that there is no corrosion, piercing or impact to the silencer, expansion chamber, catalytic converter and particle
filter*,
that the rubber mounting bushes are not torn or cracked,
that the exhaust pipe is not in contact with the underside of the vehicle.
8- ENGINE: BLEEDING WATER FROM THE FUEL FILTER* (IF THE PART HAS NOT REACHED ITS REPLACEMENT INTERVAL)
Bleed the water from the fuel filter by unscrewing the water bleed cap and letting the water run into a
suitable container.
9- ENGINE: CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLAY* FOR LOGAN-SANDERO (EXCEPT FOR AUTOMATIC COMPENSATION)
(Logan and Sandero only) Use the recommended checking procedureClutch control: Adjustment (37A,
Mechanical component controls).
10- CHECKING THE LEVELS, CONDITION AND SEALING OF THE HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS: HYDRAULIC POWER-ASSISTED STEERING*
Check the hydraulic steering fluid level: it should be between the minimum and maximum level on the
reservoir.
Visually check the sealing, ensuring that there are no leaks, or any abnormal loss of fluid.
Top up, if necessary.
- 17 -
11- CHECKING THE LEVEL, CONDITION AND SEALING OF THE HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS: COOLING
Check the coolant level: it should be between the minimum and maximum level on the reservoir.
Visually check the circuit sealing, ensuring that there are no leaks, or any abnormal loss of fluid.
Top up, if necessary.
12- CHECKING THE LEVEL, CONDITION AND SEALING OF THE HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS: HYDRAULIC BRAKE/CLUTCH*
Visually check the circuit sealing, checking the condition and that there are no leaks around the engine
compartment, under the vehicle or at the unions.
Check the brake fluid level:
If the level is between the minimum and maximum, do not add brake fluid as wear on the discs, pads, drums and
linings leads to a progressive drop in the brake fluid level in the tank which will usually be rectified once these
components are replaced. However, the brake fluid level should never drop below the minimum mark.
If there is an abnormal loss of fluid, the cause of which cannot be found with this check, advise the customer.
13- CHECKING THE LEVEL, CONDITION AND SEALING OF THE HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS: SEQUENTIAL GEARBOX HYDRAULIC UNIT*
Check the hydraulic unit oil level: it should be between the minimum and maximum level on the reservoir.
Visually check the sealing, ensuring that there are no leaks, or any abnormal loss of fluid.
Top up, if necessary.
14- CHECKING THE LEVEL, CONDITION AND SEALING OF THE HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS: SEQUENTIAL GEARBOX HYDRAULIC CLUTCH*
Check the hydraulic clutch fluid level, it should be at the middle level of the reservoir.
Visually check the sealing, ensuring that there are no leaks, or any abnormal loss of fluid.
Top up, if necessary.
15- CHECKING THE CHASSIS: CONDITION OF THE GAITERS, RUBBER MOUNTING BUSHES AND BALL JOINTS
Check the condition of the driveshaft and steering rubber gaiters, all ball joints and the rubber mounting
bushes. There must not be any signs of tearing or cracks.
16- CHECKING THE CHASSIS: TYRE CONDITION AND PRESSURE (INCLUDING EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL OR PRESENCE OF TYRE-REPAIR AEROSOL)
- 18 -
Check that the tread depth of the tyres has not reached the wear warning strips, explain the degree of
tyre wear to the customer.
Check that there is no abnormal tyre wear, and no bulges, blisters, tears or foreign objects (sharp
object, screw, etc.).
Check and readjust the tyre inflation pressure when cold according to the type of driving.
Check the pressure and condition of the emergency spare wheel, or if not supplied with the vehicle,
check that there is a tyre repair aerosol in the vehicle.
Respect the recommended pressure shown on the label on the door (if the vehicle does not have one,
refer to the Driver's Handbook or.
17- CHECKING THE CHASSIS: PRESENCE OF THE WHEEL VALVE CAPS
Check that each valve cap is present.
18- CHECKING THE CHASSIS: SEALING OF THE FRONT AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS
Visually check that there is no oil leaking along the length of the shock absorbers.
19- CHECKING THE CHASSIS: WEAR OF THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE PADS AND BRAKE DISCS*, AND SWAPPING THE FRONT AND REAR WHEELS
In order to perform a quality check, always remove the wheels (an electric impact wrench or a pneumatic
wrench can be used to loosen the wheel bolts and nuts).
Check the thickness of the brake pads and compare to the minimum authorised value. In case of partial
wear, advise the customer of the degree of wear to the brake pads.
Check the thickness of the front brake discs and the thickness of the rear brake discs and compare to
the minimum authorised value. In case of partial wear, advise the customer of the degree of wear to the
brake discs.
Refit the wheels. For Duster 4X4, swap the front and rear wheels.
When refitting the wheels, an electric impact wrench set at low speed can be used to fit the wheel bolts
and nuts until contact, then torque tighten them.
20- CHECKING VISIBILITY: EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS
Check the side lights, dipped headlights, main beam headlights, front and rear fog lights, the direction
- 19 -
indicators and side mounted indicators, the reversing lights, the hazard warning lights, the brake lights,
the registration plate lighting and the additional cornering lights*.
21- CHECKING VISIBILITY: INTERIOR LIGHTING
Checking door lighting, interior lights and sun visors, glovebox and luggage compartment lights.
22- CHECKING VISIBILITY: CONDITION OF THE WINDSCREEN AND DOOR MIRRORS
Check that there are no cracks or chips.
23- CHECKING VISIBILITY: WEAR ON THE FRONT AND REAR WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES
Check the quality of the wiping function and check that the wiper blades are not torn or cracked.
24- CHECKING VISIBILITY: FRONT AND REAR WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID LEVEL
Check that there is windscreen washer fluid present.
Top up, if necessary.
25- LABELS: CHECKING THE AIRBAG SAFETY AND ENGINE COMPARTMENT LABELS ARE PRESENT AND CORRECTLY POSITIONED
Check that the vehicle has the following original safety labels:
airbag, located on the windscreen, sun visor and passenger side of the dashboard,
battery, oil, cooling system, heating and air conditioning system, engine cooling fan located in the engine
compartment.
26- ELECTRONIC CHECK: BATTERY
Check the condition of the battery with the tool " Midtronics R330 " .
27- ELECTRONIC CHECK: COMPUTERS
Note:
Always check the condition of the battery before checking the computers as
insufficient voltage can affect the computers.
The purpose of this procedure is to see if any of the computers are faulty.
- 20 -
The following tools are essential for carrying out fault finding on these systems:
an approved Renault Electronic check tool(QUEST) with the latest update,
an approved Renault Diagnostic tool(CLIP) with the latest update,
a CAN probe.
Running fault finding on the computers highlights possible faults not displayed by the system self-test
procedure, and allows them to be analysed and deleted
28- CHECKING CHARGING CORD (ONLY TWIZY):
Visually check the charging cord without removing.
29- CHECKING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (ONLY KANGOO AND FLUENCE):
Electronic check :
Select the symptome in MCS (Modulate Targeting Symptome): R201, integrate it into the order of repair.
Make a electronic check of computers, see " Electronic check : computers " .
Make the checks of symptome R201: " Maintenance Range " .
NB :
Do not control the system Quick Dropbecause it is canceled.
30- ELECTRONIC FAULT FINDING: OPERATION OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING LIGHTS
Check that the following warning lights come on when the ignition is switched on:
STOP warning light,
SERVICE warning light.
31- REINITIALISATION: MAINTENANCE/OIL SERVICE DISPLAY*
Reset the maintenance/oil service interval display (see Driver's Handbook).
32- SERVICE SHEETS: AFFIXING THE SERVICE LABEL IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT*
Fill in the maintenance label and affix it in the engine compartment.
- 21 -
5. SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATIONS:
The removal and refitting procedures and some of the checks to be carried out during maintenance are
set out in the repair manuals or the technical notes. The information and repair methods given below are
specific to the maintenance programme.
For an exhaustive description of the operations to be carried out during the maintenance operation, refer
to the vehicle maintenance booklet.
1- REPLACEMENT OF THE ACCESSORIES BELT, ROLLERS, AND PULLEYS (PULLEY TO BE REPLACED DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE)
When replacing the belt, it is essential to replace the tensioning rollers and fixed rollers across the
whole range. It is also necessary to replace the damper pulley (also known as the crankshaft
accessories pulley) or the alternator pulley on certain engines, see below.
Table of pulleys to be replaced during maintenance only according to the accessories belt replacement
frequency. The vehicles concerned are those for which the maintenance booklets mention a replacement
for certain engines. The detail of the vehicle variants concerned is given below (vehicles manufactured
after June 2006):
1)FOR GERMANY, ANDORRA, AUSTRIA, BELGIUM, DENMARK, SPAIN, ESTONIA, FINLAND, FRANCE, GREAT BRITAIN, GREECE, HUNGARY, IRELAND, ICELAND, ITALY, LATVIA, LIECHTENSTEIN, LITHUANIA,
LUXEMBOURG, NORWAY, NETHERLANDS, POLAND, PORTUGAL, CZECH REPUBLIC, SLOVAKIA, SLOVENIA, SWEDEN, SWITZERLAND, CROATIA, ISRAEL:
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR REPLACING THE DAMPER PULLEY (CRANKSHAFT
ACCESSORIES PULLEY):
- 22 -
Engine type
Recommendation for replacing
the damper pulley during
maintenance operations
Engine suffix
714,
765,
786,
811,
F4R
715,
766,
787,
820,
720,
767,
792,
830,
760, 761,
770, 771,
794, 795,
867, 870,
897.
762,
774,
796,
886,
763,
776,
797,
887,
764,
784,
800,
896,
F9Q
260, 262, 264, 660, 664, 670, 674, 680,
755, 757, 758, 759, 800, 803, 804, 808,
812, 814, 816, 818, 820.
M9R
610, 700, 720, 721, 722, 740, 760, 761,
780, 812.
G9T equipped
with air
conditioning
600 ,605, 606, 607, 642, 645, 702, 703,
706, 707, 710, 712, 720, 722, 742, 743,
750.
G9U equipped
with air
conditioning
630, 632, 650, 720, 724, 730, 750, 754.
V9X
All
To be replaced each time the
accessories belt and its rollers are
scheduled for replacement
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR REPLACING THE ALTERNATOR PULLEY:
Engine
type
Engine
suffix
Recommendations for replacing the alternator pulley during
maintenance
F4R
802, 813.
To be replaced each time the accessories belt and its rollers are
scheduled for replacement
2)OTHER COUNTRIES:
- 23 -
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR REPLACING THE DAMPER PULLEY (CRANKSHAFT
ACCESSORIES PULLEY):
- 24 -
Engine type
K4J equipped
with air
conditioning
Recommendation for replacing
the damper pulley
Engine suffix
730, 732, 740, 770, 780.
K4M equipped
with air
conditioning
604,
744,
780,
812,
606,
745,
782,
813,
680, 690, 694, 696, 697,
760, 761, 762, 764, 766,
788, 790, 791, 794, 800,
814, 824, 830, 831, 834,
854, 856, 862, 866.
K4M equipped
with air
conditioning
838, 839, 848, 858
K9K
782
- 25 -
698,
768,
801,
835,
716,
770,
804,
844,
To be replaced each time the
accessories belt and its rollers
are scheduled for replacement
To be replaced every other time
the accessories belt and its
rollers are scheduled for
replacement
F4R
714, 715, 720, 760, 761, 762, 763, 764, 765,
766, 767, 770, 771, 774, 776, 784, 786, 787,
792, 794, 795, 796, 797, 800, 811, 820, 830,
867, 870, 886, 887, 896, 897.
K9K
278, 282, 288, 292, 732, 734, 764, 772, 780,
804, 806, 832, 836.
F9Q
260, 262, 264, 660, 664, 670, 674, 680, 755,
757, 758, 759, 794, 800, 803, 804, 808, 812,
814, 816, 818, 820.
G9T equipped
with air
conditioning
600 ,605, 606, 607, 642, 645, 702, 703, 706,
707, 710, 712, 720, 722, 742, 743, 750.
G9U equipped
with air
conditioning
630, 632, 650, 720, 724, 730, 750, 754.
M9R
610, 700, 720, 721, 722, 740, 742, 760, 761,
780, 812.
V9X
To be replaced each time the
accessories belt and its rollers
are scheduled for replacement
All
M9R
M9T
802, 803, 805, 809, 816, 830, 832, 833.
To be replaced every other time
the accessories belt and its
rollers are scheduled for
replacement
All
To be replaced every other time
the accessories belt and its
rollers are scheduled for
replacement
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR REPLACING THE ALTERNATOR PULLEY:
- 26 -
Engine
type
Engine
suffix
Recommendations for replacing the alternator pulley during
maintenance
F4R
802, 813
To be replaced each time the accessories belt and its rollers are
scheduled for replacement
2- REPLACING THE TIMING BELT AND ROLLERS
When replacing the belt, it is essential to replace the tensioning and fixed rollers across the whole
range. Certain vehicle/engine specifications require associated parts to be replaced, therefore it is
necessary to consult the repair procedure for the vehicle and engine for further details.
3- CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE LININGS FOR VEHICLES FITTED WITH DRUMS
Check the wheel cylinders for any possible leaks.
Remove any dust from the brake linings using a brake cleaning product.
Check the thickness of the drum linings and compare it to the minimum authorised thickness..
4- CLEANING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
The air conditioning system is cleaned by cleaning the evaporator.
6. STANDARD OF PROFESSIONAL ACTIVITY
The Standard of Professional Activity is a tool which describes the operation to perform in an optimised
order favouring time and quality. This way of working allows for the elimination and reduction of
unnecessary actions, the grouping together of operations by operation area and a reduction in down time.
- 27 -
Order of
performance
Principal steps
Key points
Preparing the vehicle:
1
Consult the repair order and ICM editions to
find out:- The works to be performed and
additional operations- The presence of OTS
2
Check that the driver's protections are in
place (front seat, steering wheel, floor
carpet, gear lever)
3
Check for the maintenance booklet and the
wheel anti-theft key (if equipped) on the
passenger seat
4
Check the instrument panel warning lights
with the ignition on
Warning light (STOP and SERVICE)
5
Start the vehicle and check that all the
warning lights go out
No warning light lit
6
Move the vehicle to the workstation, leave
the engine running
Passenger compartment checks:
7
Step out of the vehicle and connect the
exhaust gas extraction system
- 28 -
8
9
Check the exterior signals and lights:
Side lights,
Dipped headlights,
Main beam headlights,
Front and rear fog lights,
direction indicators and side mounted
indicators,
Front and rear hazard warning lights,
Brake lights,
number plate lighting,
Reversing lights,
Additional cornering lights,
Use a mirror
If not done whilst walking around the
vehicle
Check the interior lighting:
Courtesy lights,
Sun visors,
Glovebox.
10
Release the bonnet, and remove the
diagnostic socket cover
11
Reset the distance before oil
change/maintenance display
12
Switch off the engine and switch on the
ignition again
13
Step out of the vehicle, take the wheel antitheft key
Front visibility check:
14
Check the condition of the windscreen wiper
blades
15
Check the condition of the windscreen
Engine compartment checks:
16
Open the bonnet
- 29 -
17
Run fault finding on the battery with the
" MIDTRONICS R330 " tool.
18
Grease the bonnet catch using silicone-free
lubricant
19
Go back into the passenger compartment,
switch on the ignition and connect the
Diagnostic tool " Clip " or Electronic check tool
" Quest " and run the computer scan
20
Release the bonnet 10 times using the
control in the driver's position
Check the levels and sealing of the
hydraulic circuits in the engine
compartment:
21
the coolant circuit,
of the hydraulic power-assisted steering
circuit (depending on the version),
of the brake fluid and clutch circuit
(depending on the version),
hydraulic unit of the sequential gearbox
(depending on the version).
22
Check the washer fluid level.
23
Remove the oil filler cap
24
Loosen the oil filter if accessible from above.
25
Check the clutch clearance (Logan version)
26
Bleed the water from the fuel filter (if
accessible)
Do not top up the brake fluid level
- 30 -
Bleed the fuel filter if it has not
reached its replacement interval
27
Check for the presence of the
" Manufacturer's Recommendations " label
located in the engine compartment
The " manufacturer's
recommendations " labels include:
oil, battery, cooling circuit, fan, air
conditioning.
Check the condition of the bodywork on the driver's side:
28
Check the lighting of the front door sill
29
Read and retain the tyre pressure
30
Check the condition of the rear view mirror
31
Visually inspect the condition of the
bodywork
32
Check the lighting of the rear door sill (if
equipped)
33
Position the arms or pads of the lift
(depending on the type of lift)
34
Take the pressure gauge (if it is not present
in the kit)
Rear vehicle checks:
35
Check the lighting of the luggage
compartment
36
Check the level of wear of the emergency
spare wheel (if accessible through the
luggage compartment)
37
Check the pressure and the presence of the
valve cap
- 31 -
38
Check the condition of the rear screen wiper
blade
Check the condition of the bodywork on the passenger's side:
39
Visually inspect the condition of the
bodywork
40
Check the lighting of the rear door sill
41
Check the lighting of the front door sill
42
Check the presence of the airbag label on
the passenger's side
43
Check the condition of the rear view mirror
44
Position the arms or pads of the lift
(depending on the type of lift)
Computer checks
45
46
Record the scan results of Diagnostic tool
" Clip " or Electronic check tool " Quest "
Disconnect the
Diagnostic tool " Clip "
Electronic check tool
or
" quest "
Panoramic sunroof check
47
Clean the arms of the sunroof deflector and
the section of the mobile panel which
comes into contact with them (if equipped)
48
Raise the vehicle to chest height
- 32 -
Check on driver's side front wheel
49
Check the level of wear of the tyre +
presence of foreign bodies (blisters, tears,
foreign objects)
Wheel: Removal - Refitting
50
Remove the wheel
(35A, Wheels and tyres)
51
Check the level of brake pad wear
52
Check the brake disc wear
53
Check the condition of the brake hose
54
Check the condition of the rubber mounting
bushes and suspension arm ball joint
55
Check the sealing of the shock absorber
56
Check for corrosion on wheel arch, the
condition of the spring, shock absorber
cups and shock absorber
57
Check the condition of the driveshaft gaiters
and steering gaiters
58
Note the degree of wear on the test
certificate
Check the level of power-assisted steering
fluid (Laguna 3)
Check on driver's side rear wheel:
59
Check the level of wear of the tyre +
presence of foreign bodies (blisters, tears,
foreign objects)
- 33 -
Wheel: Removal - Refitting
60
Remove the wheel
(35A, Wheels and tyres)
61
Check the level of wear of the brake pads,
depending on the version
62
Check the brake disc wear (if equipped)
63
Check the condition of the brake hose
64
Check the sealing of the shock absorber.
65
Note the degree of wear on the test
certificate
Check for corrosion on wheel arch, the
condition of the spring, shock absorber
cups and shock absorber
Check on passenger's side rear wheel:
66
Check the level of wear of the tyre +
presence of foreign bodies (blisters, tears,
foreign objects)
Wheel: Removal - Refitting
67
Remove the wheel
(35A, Wheels and tyres)
68
Check the level of wear of the brake pads,
depending on the version
69
Check the brake disc wear (if equipped)
70
Check the condition of the brake hose
71
Check the sealing of the shock absorber.
- 34 -
Note the degree of wear on the test
certificate
72
Check for corrosion on wheel arch, the
condition of the spring, shock absorber
cups and shock absorber
Check on passenger's side front wheel
73
Check the level of wear of the tyre +
presence of foreign bodies (blisters, tears,
foreign objects)
Wheel: Removal - Refitting
74
Remove the wheel
(35A, Wheels and tyres)
75
Check the level of brake pad wear
76
Check the brake disc wear
77
Check the condition of the brake hose
78
Check the condition of the rubber mounting
bushes and suspension arm ball joint
79
Check the sealing of the shock absorbers.
80
Check for corrosion on wheel arch, the
condition of the spring, shock absorber
cups and shock absorber
81
Check the condition of the driveshaft gaiters
and steering gaiters
82
Bleed the water in the fuel filter (if
accessible through wheel arch) according to
the maintenance programme)
- 35 -
Note the degree of wear on the test
certificate
83
Raise the vehicle to the upper position
Underbody operations
84
Remove the protection plate underneath the
engine and position the oil collector
85
Remove the drain plug
86
Remove the oil filter (version accessed from
underneath)
87
Check the exhaust system: Corrosion,
contact with body and condition of the
rubber mounting bushes
88
Check the condition of the catalytic
converter
89
Check the condition of the spring, shock
absorber cups and shock absorber on the
right-hand and left-hand sides (if accessible
from underneath)
90
Check the condition of the underbody brake
pipes
91
Check the condition and pressure of the
emergency spare wheel (if accessible from
underneath)
92
Check the engine components using a lamp:
Cooling system hoses,
Coolant pump,
Engine block,
Turbocharger
- 36 -
Let the oil flow for 10 minutes
93
Parts are supplied using Dialogys and the
physical values should be noted (tightening
torque, oil grade and quantity)
94
Refit the new oil filter (if accessible)
95
Refit the drain plug
Lubricate the seal, tighten to torque
depending on the model
With new seal and according to
recommended part number, for
copper seals, the lips should be on
the plug side (panel cover)
Torque tighten depending on the
model
96
Clean the oil residues
97
Drain the oil collector.
Supplementary operation: replacement of
fuel filter
98
Refit the protection plate underneath the
engine
99
Read the tyre pressure on the label on the
driver's side door (if equipped)
100
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Lower the vehicle to chest height
Pressure to be applied depends on
customer's driving type
Operations on driver's side front wheel
Wheel: Removal - Refitting
101
Refit the wheel
(35A, Wheels and tyres)
- 37 -
102
Check the tyre pressure and the presence
of the valve cap
Operations on driver's side rear wheel
Supplementary operation: remove dust and
check the drum brake (if equipped)
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Wheel: Removal - Refitting
103
Refit the wheel
(35A, Wheels and tyres)
104
Check the tyre pressures and the presence
of the valve cap
Operations on passenger's side rear wheel
Supplementary operation: remove dust and
check the drum brake (if equipped)
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Wheel: Removal - Refitting
105
Refit the wheel
(35A, Wheels and tyres)
106
Check the tyre pressures and the presence
of the valve cap
Operations on passenger's side front wheel
Remove - refit diesel filter (depending on the
version)
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Wheel: Removal - Refitting
107
Refit the wheel
(35A, Wheels and tyres)
- 38 -
108
Check the tyre pressures and the presence
of the valve cap
109
Lower the vehicle to the low position
Operations in the engine compartment
110
Refit the new oil filter (if accessible)
Lubricate the seal, tighten by hand
or to torque depending on the model
111
Fill the engine oil
Respect the grade and quantity of
engine oil.
112
Replace the oil filler cap
Supplementary operation: replacement of
diesel filter (depending on the version)
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Supplementary operation: replacement of
fuel filter (depending on the version)
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Supplementary operation: replacement of
air filter
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Supplementary operation: replacement of
spark plugs
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Supplementary operation: replacement of
brake fluid
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Supplementary operation: replacement of
coolant
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Supplementary operation: replacement of
accessories belt and rollers
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
- 39 -
Supplementary operation: replacement of
damper pulley/alternator pulley (depending
on the version)
See Technical Note
6018/Maintenance booklet
Supplementary operation: replacement of
timing belt and rollers
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Supplementary operation: check and clean
air conditioning system
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Supplementary operation: replacement of
cabin filter (depending on the version)
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Internal vehicle operation
113
Start the vehicle
114
Switch off the ignition
Supplementary operation: replacement of
cabin filter (depending on the version)
See ICM/Maintenance booklet
Wheel torque tightening
115
Consult the tightening torque in the
technical documentation
116
Torque tighten the front wheel on the driver's
side and refit the trim (if equipped)
Refitting the trim confirms the
tightening operation.
117
Torque tighten the rear wheel on the driver's
side and refit the trim (if equipped)
Refitting the trim confirms the
tightening operation.
118
Torque tighten the rear wheel on the
passenger's side and refit the trim (if
equipped)
Refitting the trim confirms the
tightening operation.
- 40 -
119
Torque tighten the front wheel on the
passenger's side and refit the trim (if
equipped)
Refitting the trim confirms the
tightening operation.
Administrative operations
120
Fill in the test certificate
121
Indicate, according to the degree of
importance, the next works to be performed
in order to ensure vehicle conformity.
Final inspection in the engine compartment:
122
Fill in and position the maintenance label
123
After waiting at least 10 minutes after the
last top-up or starting the engine, check the
oil level using the dipstick
124
Top up if necessary
125
Clean the engine cover and the battery cover
Repair-00x01x01x28-02x32-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 41 -
MAINTENANCEVALUES:DESCRIPTION
Special tooling required
Brake calliper piston return tool.
Fre. 1190-01
Support plate for pushing back the brake calliper piston
Fre. 1939
1. ENGINE MAINTENANCE SUMMARY
M9T, 670 680 702 870 880, PARTICLE FILTER(670 OR 680 OR 702 OR 870 OR 880)
OIL
Engine oil capacity with oil filter replacement
8 litres
M9T, 690 698 700 890 898, PARTICLE FILTER(690 OR 698 OR 700 OR 890 OR 898)
OIL
Engine oil capacity with oil filter replacement
8.9 litres
Tool
Oil change end piece with an 8 mm square drive
Tightening torque
50 N.m
Tool
27 mm spanner
Tightening torque
25 N.m
DRAIN PLUG
OIL FILTER
Coolant grade
GLACEOL RX type D
Cooling system capacity
11 litres
COOLANT
-1-
2. CHASSIS MAINTENANCE SUMMARY
WHEELS
Tightening torque
235 N.m
FOR THE FOLLOWING COUNTRIES: GERMANY, ANDORRA, AUSTRIA, BELGIUM,
DENMARK, SPAIN, ESTONIA, FINLAND, FRANCE, GREAT BRITAIN, GREECE,
HUNGARY, IRELAND, ICELAND, ITALY, LATVIA, LIECHTENSTEIN, LITHUANIA,
LUXEMBOURG, NORWAY, NETHERLANDS, POLAND, PORTUGAL, CZECH
REPUBLIC, SLOVAKIA, SLOVENIA, SWEDEN, SWITZERLAND, CROATIA, ISRAEL.
BRAKE FLUID
Brake fluid grade
DOT 4, ISO CLASS 6, RENAULT Standard: 03-50-006
FOR OTHER COUNTRIES.
BRAKE FLUID
Brake fluid grade
DOT 4, ISO CLASS 6, RENAULT Standard: 03-50-006
FRONT BRAKES
Tools
Tightening
torques
Tool
Brake calliper piston return tool.(Fre. 1190-01) and Support plate
for pushing back the brake calliper piston(Fre. 1939 )
Front guide pin
bolts
85 N.m
Front calliper
support bolts
195 N.m
-2-
Front disc diameter
302 mm
Minimum front brake disc thickness
24.5 mm
Minimum front brake pad thickness
10 mm
Measurement
REAR BRAKES
Tool
Brake calliper piston return tool.(Fre. 1190-01) and Support plate
for pushing back the brake calliper piston(Fre. 1939 )
Rear disc bolts
68 N.m
Rear guide pin
bolts
85 N.m
Rear calliper
support bolts
180 N.m
Tools
Tightening
torques
Rear disc diameter
302 mm
Minimum rear brake disc thickness
15 mm
Minimum rear brake pad thickness
10 mm
Measurement
Repair-00x01x01x27-02x21-2-46-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
MAINTENANCEVALUES:DESCRIPTION
Special tooling required
Brake calliper piston return tool.
Fre. 1190-01
Support plate for pushing back the brake calliper piston
Fre. 1939
1. ENGINE MAINTENANCE SUMMARY
Note:
(*) The engine oil grade and viscosity only applies to the following countries:
Germany, Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Spain, Estonia, Finland, France,
Great Britain, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Iceland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania,
Luxembourg, Norway, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Czech Republic, Slovakia,
Slovenia, Sweden, Switzerland, Croatia, Israel.
Important: for vehicles in countries which are not listed above, please refer to
Technical Note 6013AEngine oil: Specifications .
-1-
M9T, 670 680 700 870 880, PARTICLE FILTER(670 OR 680 OR 700 OR 870 OR 880)
Engine oil grade (*)
RN720
t & gt; -20 C 5W30 or 5W40
OIL
Oil viscosity (*) depending on external temperature
t & gt; -25 C 5W30 or 5W40
t & gt; -30 C 0W30 or 0W40
Engine oil capacity with oil filter replacement
8 litres
M9T, 690 698 702 890 898, PARTICLE FILTER(690 OR 698 OR 702 OR 890 OR 898)
Engine oil grade (*)
RN720
t & gt; -20 C 5W30 or 5W40
OIL
Oil viscosity (*) depending on external temperature
t & gt; -25 C 5W30 or 5W40
t & gt; -30 C 0W30 or 0W40
Engine oil capacity with oil filter replacement
8.9 litres
Tool
Oil change end piece with an 8 mm square drive
Tightening torque
50 N.m
Tool
27 mm spanner
Tightening torque
25 N.m
DRAIN PLUG
OIL FILTER
-2-
Coolant grade
GLACEOL RX type D
Cooling system capacity
11 litres
COOLANT
2. CHASSIS MAINTENANCE SUMMARY
WHEELS
Tightening torque
235 N.m
FOR THE FOLLOWING COUNTRIES: GERMANY, ANDORRA, AUSTRIA, BELGIUM,
DENMARK, SPAIN, ESTONIA, FINLAND, FRANCE, GREAT BRITAIN, GREECE,
HUNGARY, IRELAND, ICELAND, ITALY, LATVIA, LIECHTENSTEIN, LITHUANIA,
LUXEMBOURG, NORWAY, NETHERLANDS, POLAND, PORTUGAL, CZECH
REPUBLIC, SLOVAKIA, SLOVENIA, SWEDEN, SWITZERLAND, CROATIA, ISRAEL.
BRAKE FLUID
Brake fluid grade
DOT 4, ISO CLASS 6, RENAULT Standard: 03-50-006
FOR OTHER COUNTRIES.
BRAKE FLUID
Brake fluid grade
DOT 4, ISO CLASS 6, RENAULT Standard: 03-50-006
FRONT BRAKES
-3-
Tool
Brake calliper piston return tool.(Fre. 1190-01) and Support plate
for pushing back the brake calliper piston(Fre. 1939 )
Front guide pin
bolts
85 N.m
Front calliper
support bolts
195 N.m
Tools
Tightening
torques
Front disc diameter
302 mm
Minimum front brake disc thickness
24.5 mm
Minimum front brake pad thickness
10 mm
Measurement
REAR BRAKES
Tightening
torques
Tool
Brake calliper piston return tool.(Fre. 1190-01) and Support plate
for pushing back the brake calliper piston(Fre. 1939 )
Rear disc bolts
Tools
68 N.m
Rear guide pin
bolts
85 N.m
Rear calliper
support bolts
180 N.m
-4-
Rear disc diameter
302 mm
Minimum rear brake disc thickness
15 mm
Minimum rear brake pad thickness
10 mm
Measurement
Repair-00x01x01x27-02x21-2-46-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
Technical Note 6511A
PKX, PFX, TL4, NDX, JBX, JCX, JHX, JR5
Sub-section concerned: 01E
Manual gearbox fault finding
All vehicles with PK4, PK5, PK6, PK7, PK9, PF1, PF6,
TL4, JB0, JB1, JB2, JB3, JB4, JB5, JB9, JC5, JC7,
JH1, JH3, JR5, ND0 manual gearboxes
Fault finding procedures for incorrect gear changes
77 11 399 122
Edition 1 - APRIL 2007
" The repair procedures given by the Manufacturer in this document are based on the
technical specifications current when it was prepared.
The procedures may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the
manufacturer in the production of the various component units and accessories from
which its vehicles are constructed. "
Edition Anglaise
All rights reserved by RENAULT.
Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part
reference numbering system is forbidden without the prior written authority of
RENAULT.
© Renault s.a.s. 2007
Contents
Page
01E FAULT FINDING INTRODUCTION
Fault finding - Introduction
Fault finding - Customer Complaints
Fault finding - Fault finding chart
01E-1
01E-4
01E-5
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
101E
Fault finding - Introduction
01E
1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT
This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications:
Vehicle(s): All 2 wheel drive vehicles
Function concerned: Manual gearboxes
2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING
Documentation type
Fault finding procedures (this manual):
– MR for the vehicle concerned.
– MR of the gearbox concerned:
*
Gearbox
Technical Note No.
PA6 - PK5 - PK6
Technical Note 6003A
TL4
Technical Note 6019A
JBX - JCX
MR-BV-JB-JC
PF6 - PK4
Technical Note 6021A
JA3, JH1, JH3, JR5
Technical Note 6029A
ND0
Technical Note 6034A
3. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE
– Identify the type of gear change discrepancy using the definitions given (see definition of symptoms).
– Use the ALPs (fault finding charts) to identify the cause of the fault
4. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Safety rules must be observed during any work on a component to prevent any damage or injury:
The road tests referred to in this document should be carried out in accordance with Road Traffic Regulations (speed
limits must be obeyed).
IMPORTANT
When carrying out road tests, obey Road Traffic Regulations, especially speed limits.
It may be necessary to carry out the road test with the customer to observe the driving habits of the customer
(insufficient movement when changing gear, clutch not disengaged sufficiently etc.). The fault stated by the customer
is due to ignorance or unfamiliarity with the normal operation of the gearbox.
01E-1
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Introduction
01E
5. DEFINITION OF SYMPTOMS
Engaging direction
Direction of Selection
A. Gear change hitch:
Definition:
One or several points of resistance felt when moving the lever which stop or at least slow down movement. It appears
randomly with regard to the gear being selected and how often it appears.
Appearance context:
● More likely to appear when the gearbox is cold (aggravating factor), for example in the first few miles of a journey
(not on the motorway).
● Gear change sticks when changing up or down a gear.
B. Gear jumps:
Definition:
One or several of the gears selected jumps out of gear without touching the control lever.
Appearance context:
Generally occurs in only one of the following cases:
– at a stable engine speed,
– when accelerating
– when decelerating
– when lifting off the accelerator.
Note: the gear may jump in inverse proportion to torque or at a stable engine speed.
01E-2
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Introduction
01E
C. Hard or impossible to engage a gear (gear selected)
Definition:
Temporary difficulty in engaging a gear or impossible to do so.
Appearance context:
When engaging the gear, having already selected the gear (when all conditions making it possible for the gear to be
engaged are present: clutch disengaged, gear selected, etc.).
D. Gear control blocked or inoperative:
Definition:
Impossible to engage or disengage a gear on one or several lines (as soon as the action begins and in the direction
of selection) or with the gear engaged, the vehicle acts as though it is still in neutral.
Appearance context:
All conditions making it possible for the gear to be engaged are present: clutch disengaged, gear selected, etc.
01E-3
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Customer complaints
01E
JAMMING WITH CABLE OPERATED GEARBOXES
ALP 1
JAMMING WITH ROD OPERATED GEARBOXES
ALP 2
CABLE OPERATED GEARBOXES JUMPING OUT OF GEAR
ALP 3
ROD OPERATED GEARBOXES JUMPING OUT OF GEAR
ALP 4
DIFFICULT OR IMPOSSIBLE TO ENGAGE GEARS FOR CABLE
OPERATED GEARBOXES
ALP 5
DIFFICULT OR IMPOSSIBLE TO ENGAGE GEARS FOR ROD
OPERATED GEARBOXES
ALP 6
GEARBOX LOCKED OR INEFFECTIVE FOR CABLE OPERATED
GEARBOXES
ALP 7
GEARBOX LOCKED OR INEFFECTIVE FOR ROD OPERATED
GEARBOXES
ALP 8
01E-4
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 1
Jamming with cable operated gearboxes
NOTES
– Before any operations, it is ESSENTIAL to read the entire ALP and the
information library (ACTIS solution) relating to the customer complaints.
– Check that the clutch pedal travel is not obstructed by the floor carpet.
– If there is jamming in 2 nd AND 3 rd with the ND gearbox:
see Technical Note 4559A, gears jamming when engaging 2 nd or 3 rd gear.
– The customer notices a difference between the functions changed and those
that were retained. Inform the customer of the importance of running in a
gearbox.
External control check
Visually inspect:
● The condition of the control (gaiter end (1) incorrectly
fixed, cables clipped, etc.).
Not
correct
Replace the faulty part or parts and/or
clean the travel of the external control.
Ensure the area surrounding the gearbox selector is
correct (no foreign bodies etc.).
The positioning of the gaiter of the control unit.
Not
correct
Ensure the conformity of the Initial
Setting (see 37A, Mechanical
component controls, Manual gear
control: Adjustment).
●
●
01E-5
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 1
CONTINUED 1
Check the conformity of the " initial setting " (RI) of the
external control (shim plus RI) (see 37A, Mechanical
component controls, Manual gear control:
Adjustment).
External control correct
Gearbox environment check.
Not
correct
Check the gearbox oil level.
Check the appearance of the oil:
● Oil which is dark in colour is not a fault.
● Oil which smells burnt is caused by a hot gearbox
(insufficient oil level or hard use).
● The presence of bronze-coloured rings is not a fault.
● The presence of aluminium coloured particles in the
oil indicates serious internal destruction of the
gearbox.
Not
correct
– If over a litre of oil is missing (0.5 l for
J gearboxes), replace the gearbox
and check there are no leaks after a
road test.
– If less than a litre of oil is missing
(0.5 l for J gearboxes), top up the oil
(see 21A, manual gearbox, Manual
gearbox oils: Draining - Refilling).
If the fault is still present, go on to the
next step.
– Drain the oil (see 21A, manual
gearbox, Manual gearbox oils:
Draining - Refilling).
– If there are aluminium coloured
particles in the oil, replace the
gearbox.
Disconnect the external control and check that the
cables slide properly.
Gearbox environment
correct
Not correct
Replace the complete external control
(see 37A, Mechanical component
controls, Manual gearbox control:
Removal - Refitting).
01E-6
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 1
CONTINUED 2
Clutch check
Check that the clutch operates correctly (see MR-394,
20A, Clutch, Fault finding chart).
Not correct
Check there is no clutch drag by checking its
disengagement point (see Technical Note 3451A,
Clutch: Fault finding).
Carry out the corrective actions.
Gearbox environment
correct
Remove and open the gearbox.
In the case of a complaint about jamming when shifting
from 5 th to 4 th on a cable operated J gearbox.
01E-7
Not
correct
Replace the latch kit (2) for reverse
gear (see Technical Note 6029A,
manual gearbox, manual gearbox
control shaft: Removal - Refitting).
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 1
CONTINUED 3
Check:
● The locking shafts slide correctly (3)
● The locking shafts are correct (3)
Not
correct
– Replace the locking shafts
(see Technical Note Gearbox*,
manual gearbox, shafts and
synchronisers: Refitting).
– If the sliding fault is still present,
contact Techline (clutch cover fault).
Locking shafts correct
In all other cases and for all other gearboxes
Replace the function of the gear or gears corresponding to the customer complaint (pinion, hub, selector rod,
blocking ring and engaging ring).
* see introduction
01E-8
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
ALP 2
NOTES
01E
Jamming with rod operated gearboxes
– Before any operations, it is ESSENTIAL to read the entire ALP and the
information library (ACTIS solution) relating to the customer complaints.
– Check that the clutch pedal travel is not obstructed by the floor carpet.
– If there is jamming in 2 nd AND 3 rd with the ND gearbox: see Technical
Note 4559A, gears jamming when engaging 2nd or 3 rd gear.
The customer notices a difference between the
functions changed and those that were retained. Inform the customer of the
importance of running in a gearbox.
01E-9
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 2
CONTINUED 1
External control check
Visually inspect:
● The presence of grease (33 medium) on the control
lever / selector linkage joint (1).
●
●
The presence of grease (transmission grease) on the
selector linkage / gearbox linkage joint (2) (detach the
gaiter and remove the plastic clip if necessary).
The presence of grease (33 medium) at the gearbox
output lever / linkage joint (3).
01E-10
Not
correct
Grease the parts that have insufficient
grease
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 2
CONTINUED 2
Check the setting of the external control (see 37A,
Mechanical component controls, Manual gearbox
control: Adjustment).
External control
correct
01E-11
Not
correct
Ensure the conformity of the setting
(see 37A, Mechanical component
controls, Manual gear control:
Adjustment).
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 2
CONTINUED 3
Not
correct
– If more than 0.5 l of oil is missing,
replace the gearbox and check that
there are no leaks after a road test.
– If less than 0.5 l of oil is missing, top
up the level (see 21A, manual
gearbox, Manual gearbox oils:
Draining - Refilling). If the fault is
still present, go on to the next step.
Not
correct
– Drain the oil (see 21A, manual
gearbox, Manual gearbox oils:
Draining - Refilling).
– If there are aluminium coloured
particles in the oil, replace the
gearbox.
Check there is no clutch drag by checking its
disengagement point (see Technical Note 3451A,
Clutch: Fault finding).
Not
correct
Carry out the corrective actions.
Check the value of the movement of the clutch fork
(see MR-394, 20A, Clutch, Fault finding chart).
Not
correct
Ensure the conformity of the clutch
cable and the automatic pedal
adjustment system.
Gearbox environment check
Check the gearbox oil level.
Check the appearance of the oil:
● Oil which is dark in colour is not a fault.
● Oil which smells burnt is caused by a hot gearbox
(insufficient oil level or hard use).
● The presence of bronze-coloured rings is not a fault.
● The presence of aluminium coloured particles in the
oil indicates serious internal destruction of the
gearbox.
Gearbox environment
correct
Clutch check
Clutch
correct
01E-12
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 2
CONTINUED 4
Remove and open the gearbox.
In the case of a complaint about jamming when shifting
from 5 th to 4 th on a JH gearbox.
01E-13
Not
correct
Replace the latch kit for reverse
gear (4) (see Technical Note 6029A,
manual gearbox, manual gearbox
control shaft: Removal - Refitting).
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 2
CONTINUED 5
Check:
● The locking shafts slide correctly (5)
● The locking shafts are correct (5)
Not
correct
Locking shafts correct
Replace the function of the gear or gears corresponding
to the customer complaint (pinion, hub, selector rod,
blocking ring and engaging ring).
* see introduction
01E-14
– Replace the locking shafts
(see Technical Note Gearbox*,
manual gearbox, shafts and
synchronisers: Refitting).
– If the sliding fault is still present,
contact the Techline for information
on the clutch cover.
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 3
Cable operated gearboxes jumping out of gear
NOTES
– Before any operations, it is ESSENTIAL to read the entire ALP and the
information library (ACTIS solution) relating to the customer complaints.
– Check that the clutch pedal travel is not obstructed by the floor carpet.
– The customer notices a difference between the functions changed and those
that were retained. Inform the customer of the importance of running in a
gearbox.
External control check:
Check there are no foreign bodies at the external control
(control unit and gearbox side) which inhibit its
operation.
Not
correct
Check that the cables move freely (sheath grommets,
" corrugated sheaths " , bulkhead grommets, etc.) for
example, after a previous operation under the bonnet
(incorrect refitting).
Not
correct
Check that there is no significant or abnormal play at the
lever (in the direction of the gear change).
● Unit side:
– no play at the cable sleeve stop,
– no play at the cable ball joint (in the direction of the
gear change).
● Gearbox side:
– no play at the cable sleeve stop,
– no play at the cable ball joint (in the direction of the
gear change),
– no play at the dampers (rubber particles indicating
destruction of the dampers).
01E-15
Not
correct
External
control
correct
– Clean the external control cable
routing.
– If there is no damage: correct the
routing.
– If there is damage: replace the
external control (see 37A,
Mechanical component controls,
Manual gearbox control:
Removal - Refitting).
– Replace the external control
(see 37A, Mechanical component
controls, Manual gearbox control:
Removal - Refitting).
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 3
CONTINUED 1
Engine and transmission assembly suspended
mountings check:
Check the suspended mountings on the engine and
gearbox sides and the engine tie-bar (broken,
damaged, incorrectly tightened, incorrectly positioned,
etc.).
Not
correct
Replace the damaged suspended
engine mounting or engine tie-bar
(see 19D, Engine mounting).
Check the suspended mounting rubber pads on the
engine and gearbox sides and engine tie-bar (torn,
damaged, incorrectly positioned, missing, etc.).
Not
correct
Replace the damaged rubber pad
(see 19D, Engine mounting).
Not
correct
Replace the 5 th gear, gear supporting
rings and fork assembly.
Engine and
transmission assembly
suspended mountings
Checking the 5th gear nut on the input shaft (1)
(only on J gearbox)
If the vehicle is fitted with a J gearbox and is only
jumping out of gear in 5 th.
5 th gear
nut
correct
01E-16
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 3
CONTINUED 2
Remove and open the gearbox.
Check the locating balls (missing, jammed, etc.)
(only for J and ND gearboxes).
Not
correct
Replace the 5 th gear, gear supporting
rings and fork assembly.
Check the layers (missing washers, etc.).
Locating balls and
layers correct
Not correct
Replace the complete function of the gear concerned
(pinion, selector rod, hub, synchroniser ring and
the fork).
01E-17
carry out repairs.
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 4
Rod operated gearboxes jumping out of gear
NOTES
– Before any operations, it is ESSENTIAL to read the entire ALP and the
information library (ACTIS solution) relating to the customer complaints.
– Check that the clutch pedal travel is not obstructed by the floor carpet.
– The customer notices a difference between the functions changed and those
that were retained. Inform the customer of the importance of running in a
gearbox.
External control check
Check there are no foreign bodies at the external control
(control unit and gearbox side) which inhibit its
operation.
Not
correct
Clean the external control cable route.
Check that there are no signs of impact on the gear
selector rod.
Not
correct
Replace the gear selector rod.
Check that there is no play at the lever (in the direction
of the gear change).
● Module on the end of the selector rod (1) (see
Technical Note 3439A, Mechanical component
controls).
Not
correct
01E-18
– If there is a fault on the unit side:
replace the control lever or the
complete function if one unit
(see 37A, Mechanical component
controls, Manual gear control:
Removal - Refitting).
– If there is a fault on the gearbox side:
replace the selector rod (and spacer
if required).
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 4
CONTINUED 1
●
Control unit side:
– no play at the lever ball joint (2),
– no play at the joint at the foot of the lever or the
selector rod mounting (3),
– check that there is no tension at the gear lever
gaiter (if necessary check without the gaiter).
01E-19
Not
correct
– If there is a fault on the unit side:
replace the control lever or the
complete function if it is not sold
separately (see 37A, Mechanical
component controls, Manual gear
control:
Removal - Refitting).
– If there is a fault on the gearbox side:
replace the selector rod (and spacer
if required).
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 4
CONTINUED 2
●
Gearbox side:
– no play at the linkage - selector rod connection (4),
– no play at the manual gearbox lever ball joints (5).
External control correct
Engine and transmission assembly suspended
mountings check:
Check the suspended mountings on the engine and
gearbox sides and the engine tie-bar (broken,
damaged, incorrectly tightened, incorrectly positioned,
etc.).
01E-20
Not
correct
Replace the damaged suspended
engine mounting or engine tie-bar
(see 19D, Engine mounting).
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 4
CONTINUED 3
Check the suspended mounting rubber pads on the
engine and gearbox sides and engine tie-bar
(torn, damaged, incorrectly positioned, missing, etc.).
Not
correct
Replace the damaged rubber pad
(see 19D, Engine mounting).
Not
correct
Replace the 5 th gear, gear supporting
rings and fork assembly.
Engine and
transmission assembly
suspended mountings
Checking the 5th gear nut on the input shaft
(only on J gearbox)
If the vehicle is fitted with a J gearbox and is only
jumping out of gear in 5 th.
5th gear nut
correct
01E-21
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 4
CONTINUED 4
Remove and open the gearbox.
Check the locating balls (missing, jammed, etc.)
(only for J gearbox).
Not
correct
Replace the 5 th gear, gear supporting
rings and fork assembly.
Check the layers (missing washers, etc.).
Locating balls and
layers correct
Not correct
Replace the complete function of the gear concerned
(pinion, selector rod, hub, synchroniser ring and
the fork).
01E-22
carry out repairs.
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 5
Difficult or impossible to engage gears for
cable operated gearboxes
NOTES
– Before any operations, it is ESSENTIAL to read the entire ALP and the
information library (ACTIS solution) relating to the customer complaints.
– Check that the clutch pedal travel is not obstructed by the floor carpet.
– The customer notices a difference between the functions changed and those
that were retained. Inform the customer of the importance of running in a
gearbox.
Not
correct
If over a litre of oil is missing (0.5 l for
the J range), replace the gearbox
and check there are no leaks after a
road test.
If less than a litre of oil is missing
(0.5 l for the J range), top up the oil
(see 21A, manual gearbox, Manual
gearbox oils:
Draining - Refilling).
If the fault is still present, go on to the
next step.
Check that there are no foreign bodies at the external
control (control unit and gearbox side) that inhibit its
operation.
Not
correct
Correct the routing manually.
Check that the " initial setting " (RI) of the external control
(shim plus RI) (see 37A, Mechanical component
controls, Manual gear control: Adjustment).
Not
correct
Ensure the conformity of the Initial
Setting (see 37A, Mechanical
component controls, Manual gear
control: Adjustment).
Oil level check
Check the gearbox oil level before any operations.
Oil level correct
External control check
Check there is no significant or abnormal play at the
lever (in the direction of selection).
External control correct
Not correct
Replace the external control (see 37A,
Mechanical component controls,
Manual gearbox control:
Removal - Refitting).
01E-23
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 5
CONTINUED 1
Gearbox oil check
Check the appearance of the oil:
● Oil which is dark in colour is not a fault.
● Oil which smells burnt is caused by a hot gearbox
(insufficient oil level or hard use).
● The presence of bronze-coloured rings is not a fault.
● The presence of aluminium coloured particles in the
oil indicates serious internal destruction of the
gearbox.
Not
correct
Drain the oil (see 21A, manual
gearbox, manual gearbox oils:
Draining - Refilling).
If there are aluminium coloured
particles in the oil, replace the gearbox.
Not
correct
Carry out the necessary corrective
action.
Not
correct
– Check the condition of the clutch
cable and the automatic pedal
adjustment system.
– For Logan: ensure the conformity of
the adjustment of the cable
(see 20A, Clutch, Clutch thrust
bearing: Removal - Refitting).
Gearbox oil
correct
Clutch check
Check that there is no clutch drag by checking its
disengagement point (see Technical Note 3451A,
Clutch: Fault finding).
For hydraulic clutches, check that the clutch is operating
correctly (see MR-394, 20A, Clutch, Fault finding
chart).
For cable operated clutches, check:
● The movement value of the clutch fork
(see 20A, Clutch).
● For Logan: check the adjustment of the cable
(see 20A, Clutch, Clutch thrust bearing:
Removal - Refitting).
Clutch correct
01E-24
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 5
CONTINUED 2
Gearbox shaft check
Not
correct
Check the layers (missing washers, etc.).
carry out repairs.
Shafts correct
Replace the complete function of the gear concerned (pinion, selector rod, hub, synchroniser ring
and the fork).
01E-25
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 6
Difficult or impossible to engage gears for rod operated
gearboxes
NOTES
– Before any operations, it is ESSENTIAL to read the entire ALP and the
information library (ACTIS solution) relating to the customer complaints.
– Check that the clutch pedal travel is not obstructed by the floor carpet.
– The customer notices a difference between the functions changed and those
that were retained. Inform the customer of the importance of running in a
gearbox.
Not
correct
– If more than 0.5 l of oil is missing,
replace the gearbox and check that
there are no leaks after a road test.
– If less than 0.5 l of oil is missing, top
up the level (see 21A, manual
gearbox, Manual gearbox oils:
Draining - Refilling).
– If the fault is still present, go on to the
next step.
Check that there are no foreign bodies at the external
control (control unit and gearbox side) that inhibit its
operation.
Not
correct
Correct the routing manually.
Check the setting of the external control (see 37A,
Mechanical component controls, Manual gearbox
control: Adjustment).
Not
correct
Replace the selector rod.
Oil level check
Check the gearbox oil level before any operations.
Oil level correct
External control check
01E-26
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 6
CONTINUED 1
Check that there is no play at the lever (in the direction
of the gear change).
● Module on the end of the selector rod (1)
(See Technical Note 3439A, Mechanical
component controls).
01E-27
Not
correct
– If there is a fault on the unit side:
replace the control lever or the
complete function if it is not sold
separately (see 37A, Mechanical
component controls, Manual gear
control: Removal - refitting).
– If there is a fault on the gearbox side:
replace the selector rod (and spacer
if required).
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 6
CONTINUED 2
●
Control unit side:
– no play at the lever ball joint (2),
– no play at the joint at the foot of the lever or the
selector rod mounting (3),
– check that there is no tension at the gear lever
gaiter (if necessary check without the gaiter).
01E-28
Not
correct
– If there is a fault on the unit side:
replace the control lever or the
complete function if it is not sold
separately (see 37A, Mechanical
component controls, Manual gear
control: Removal - refitting).
– If there is a fault on the gearbox side:
replace the selector rod (and spacer
if required).
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 6
CONTINUED 3
●
Gearbox side:
– no play at the linkage - selector rod connection (4)
– no play at the manual gearbox lever ball joints (5)
Gearbox oil check
Check the appearance of the oil:
● Oil which is dark in colour is not a fault.
● Oil which smells burnt is caused by a hot gearbox
(insufficient oil level or hard use).
● The presence of bronze-coloured rings is not a fault.
● The presence of aluminium coloured particles in the
oil indicates serious internal destruction of the
gearbox.
Gearbox oil
correct
01E-29
Not
correct
– Drain the oil (see 21A, manual
gearbox, Manual gearbox oils:
Draining - Refilling).
– If there are aluminium coloured
particles in the oil, replace the
gearbox.
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 6
CONTINUED 4
Clutch check
Check that there is no clutch drag by checking its
disengagement point (see Technical Note 3451A,
Clutch: Fault finding).
Not
correct
Not
correct
– Check the condition of the clutch
cable and the automatic pedal
adjustment system.
– For Logan: ensure the conformity of
the adjustment of the cable
(see 20A, Clutch, Clutch thrust
bearing: Removal - Refitting).
Not
correct
Check:
● The movement value of the clutch fork
(see 20A, Clutch).
● For Logan: check the adjustment of the cable
(see 20A, Clutch, Clutch thrust bearing:
Removal - Refitting).
Carry out the necessary corrective
action.
Carry out repairs.
Clutch
correct
Shaft check
Check the layers (missing washers, etc.).
Shafts
correct
Replace the complete function of the gear concerned (pinion, selector rod, hub, synchroniser ring
and the fork).
01E-30
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 7
Gearbox locked or ineffective for cable operated gearboxes
NOTES
– Before any operations, it is ESSENTIAL to read the entire ALP and the
information library (ACTIS solution) relating to the customer complaints.
– Check that the clutch pedal travel is not obstructed by the floor carpet.
– The customer notices a difference between the functions changed and those
that were retained. Inform the customer of the importance of running in a
gearbox.
Oil level check
Not
correct
Check the gearbox oil level before any operations.
Oil level
correct
01E-31
– If over a litre of oil is missing (0.5 l for
the J range), replace the gearbox
and check there are no leaks after a
road test.
– If less than a litre of oil is missing
(0.5 l for the J range), top up the oil
(see 21A, manual gearbox,
Manual gearbox oils:
Draining - Refilling).
– If the fault is still present, go on to the
next step.
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 7
CONTINUED 1
Control unit side external control check
Check that there are no foreign bodies at the external
control (control unit and gearbox side) which inhibit its
operation.
Not
correct
Correct the routing manually.
Check:
● that the gearbox external control cable is not cut
● that the gearbox external control cable is not jammed
● that the gearbox external control cable is connected
correctly on the gearbox and control unit sides
● that the initial setting (RI) is locked
(see 37A, Mechanical component controls).
Not
correct
– Ensure the conformity of the gearbox
external control cable or its connection.
– If the cable is damaged, replace the
gearbox external control (see 37A,
Mechanical component controls,
Manual gear control: Removal refitting).
Check that the external gearbox control unit is correctly
fixed.
Not
correct
Unit side external
control correct
01E-32
– Refix the gearbox external control
unit.
– If the operation is not possible,
replace the gear control (see 37A,
Mechanical component controls,
Manual gear control:
Removal - Refitting).
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 7
CONTINUED 2
Driveshaft inspection
– Engage a gear.
– Position the vehicle on the lift.
– Block the rotation of the front right-hand wheel with
a screwdriver.
– Attempt to rotate the front left-hand wheel.
– Repeat the test blocking the front left-hand wheel.
Not
correct
– If the non-blocked wheel rotates on
its own without driving the complete
driveshaft, replace the defective
driveshaft.
– If the non-blocked wheel rotates the
complete driveshaft when rotated,
replace the manual gearbox
(see 21A, manual gearbox, manual
gearbox: Removal - Refitting).
Not
correct
Replace the clutch kit
(see 20A, Clutch,
Pressure plate/drive plate:
Removal - Refitting).
Driveshafts
correct
Clutch check
Check that the clutch is not centrifuged by looking
through the starter window to see if any traces of the
lining are stuck to it.
Clutch
correct
01E-33
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 7
CONTINUED 3
Gearbox check:
For J gearboxes, put the gear lever in the neutral
position:
●
●
●
Not
correct
Remove the 5th gear cover.
Check the alignment of the fork shafts.
Check that there are no jammed gears.
Unblock the jammed gears (possible
information library (ACTIS solution).
Not
correct
Unblock the gearbox and change the
internal control (forks, internal selector
shaft, locating balls).
Remove the manual gearbox.
Check:
● That two gears are not engaged simultaneously.
● That the selector finger is not jammed across the
dogs.
In all
other cases
Replace the gearbox (see 21A, manual gearbox, manual gearbox:
Removal - Refitting).
01E-34
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 8
Gearbox locked or ineffective for rod operated gearboxes
NOTES
– Before any operations, it is ESSENTIAL to read the entire ALP and the
information library (ACTIS solution) relating to the customer complaints.
– Check that the clutch pedal travel is not obstructed by the floor carpet.
– The customer notices a difference between the functions changed and those
that were retained. Inform the customer of the importance of running in a
gearbox.
Oil level check
Not
correct
Check the gearbox oil level before any operations.
Oil level
correct
01E-35
– If more than 0.5 l of oil is missing,
replace the gearbox and check there
are no leaks after a road test.
– If less than 0.5 l of oil is missing, top
up the level (see 21A, manual
gearbox, Manual gearbox oils:
Draining - Refilling). If the fault is
still present, go on to the next step.
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 8
CONTINUED 1
Control unit side external control check
Check that there are no foreign bodies at the external
control (control unit and gearbox side) which inhibit its
operation.
Not
correct
Correct the routing manually.
Check that the connection or dampening end piece is
properly fitted to the bar.
Not
correct
Change the rod and the connection or
dampening end piece.
Check that the selector rod is correct (not damaged by
a large shock, bent, etc.).
Not
correct
Change the rod and the connection or
dampening end piece.
Not
correct
Replace the clip or the complete control
lever (see 37A, Mechanical
component controls, Manual
gearbox control:
Removal - Refitting).
Unit side external
control correct
Gearbox side external control check
Check that the control lever is still clipped.
External control on the
gearbox side is correct
01E-36
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 8
CONTINUED 2
Driveshaft inspection
– Engage a gear.
– Position the vehicle on the lift.
– Block the rotation of the front right-hand wheel with
a screwdriver.
– Attempt to rotate the front left-hand wheel.
– Repeat the test blocking the front left-hand wheel.
Not
correct
– If the non-blocked wheel rotates on
its own without driving the complete
driveshaft, replace the defective
driveshaft.
– If the non-blocked wheel rotates the
complete driveshaft when rotated,
replace the manual gearbox.
(21A Manual gearbox, manual
gearbox: Removal - Refitting)
Driveshafts
correct
Clutch check
Check the clutch is not centrifuged by looking through
the starter window to see if any traces of the lining are
stuck to it.
Clutch
correct
01E-37
Not
correct
– Replace the clutch kit
(see 20A, Clutch,
Pressure plate/drive plate:
Removal - Refitting).
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT FINDING
Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart
01E
ALP 8
CONTINUED 3
Gearbox check
Put gear lever in the neutral position:
●
●
●
Remove the 5th gear cover.
Check the alignment of the fork shafts.
Check that there are no jammed gears.
Not
correct
Unblock the jammed gears (possible
information library (ACTIS solution)).
Not
correct
Unblock the gearbox and change the
internal control (forks, internal selector
shaft, locating balls).
Remove the manual gearbox.
Check:
● That two gears are not engaged simultaneously.
● That the selector finger is not jammed across the
dogs.
In all
other cases
Replace the gearbox (see 21A, manual gearbox, manual gearbox:
Removal - Refitting).
01E-38
MANUALGEARBOXOIL:SPECIFICATIONS
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair .
1. GEARBOX TYPE/OIL TYPE CORRELATIONS:
-1-
GEARBOX TYPE
TYPE OF OIL FOR GEARBOX
JBX
JCX
JEX
TRANSELF TRJ 75W80
JRX
or
JHX
TRANSELF NFJ 75W80
JSX
NDX
TLX
PKX
PFX
VMX
TRANSELF TRX 75W80
NEX
or
NGX
TRANSELF NFP 75W80
N0X
UNX
ZFX
TRANSELF LD 75W80
Component identification:
The third character Xcorresponds to the figure written on the identification plate and therefore covers the
entire manual gearbox range.
2. STANDARDS AND PART NUMBERS OF THE VARIOUS RECOMMENDED OILS:
-2-
DESIGNATION
STANDARD
PART NUMBER
APIGL4,
7711573523
MIL-L-2105 C or D
(5 litres)
APIGL4,
7711226421
MIL-L-2105 C or D
(1 litre)
TRANSELF
TRX 75W80
or
TRANSELF
NFP 75W80
TRANSELF
TRJ 75W80
or
TRANSELF
NFJ 75W80
TRANSELF
APIGL4,
May be ordered from ELF
LD 75W80
MIL-L-2105
3. IDENTIFICATION OF OIL FOR STANDARD EXCHANGE PK1 GEARBOXES:
Note:
For standard exchange PK1 gearboxes, the oil type (TRZ or TRP) is shown on a label.
These two oils are replaced by TRX 75W80 or NFP 75W80.
Repair-12x01x02x04-02x08-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
MANUAL GEARBOX OILS: DRAINING - FILLING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
torque wrench
oil recovery tray
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the
safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 21A, Manual
gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view ) .
Gearbox type
Capacity (litres)
ZF4,ZA4
2.2
ZF4 PTO
2.4
1. PARTS AND CONSUMABLES FOR THE REPAIR
Consumables for repair:
Manual gearbox oilManual gearbox oil: Specifications (Technical Note 6012A, 04A, Lubricants).
2. DRAINING OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Position the
oil recovery trayunder the gearbox.
Remove the drain plug(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view )
-1-
.
Let the oil run into the
oil recovery tray.
Refit the drain plug(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view )
using a
torque wrench.
3. FILLING
Remove the filler cap(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view )
Fill the gearbox using a syringe containing recommended oilManual gearbox
Note 6012A, 04A, Lubricants) until the oil overflows out of the filler cap hole.
Refit the filler cap(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view )
Wipe any oil run-off with a cloth.
Remove the oil
recovery tray.
Repair-12x01x02x04-01x73-1-34-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
.
oil: Specifications
using a
(Technical
torque wrench.
MANUAL GEARBOX: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Ball joint extractor.
Tav. 476
Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly
Mot. 1390
Adapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.
Mot. 1709
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
oil recovery tray
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the
safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 21A, Manual
gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view ) .
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove:
-1-
the
the
the
the
engine undertray,
front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting (35A, Wheels and tyres),
longitudinal driveshaftPropshaft: Removal - Refitting ,
exhaust silencer(19B, Exhaust).
M9T, 690 696 698(690 OR 696 OR 698)
Remove the particle filter(see Exhaust
assembly under body: Exploded view) (19B,
Exhaust).
M9T, 686 692 694(686 OR 692 OR 694)
Remove the catalytic converter(see Exhaust
assembly under body: Exploded view) (19B,
Exhaust).
Remove the subframeFront axle subframe: Removal - Refitting (31A, Front axle components).
Fit a
oil recovery trayunder
the power-assisted steering pipes of the steering box.
Remove the power-assisted steering pipe bracket bolt on the steering boxPower-assisted steering
assembly: Exploded view (36B, Power-assisted steering).
Disconnect the power-assisted steering pipes.
Insert the blanking plugs.
Remove the universal joint boltPower-assisted
steering).
steering assembly: Exploded view
Remove the nuts from the track rod endsSteering
steering).
assembly: Exploded view
-2-
(36B, Power-assisted
(36B, Power-assisted
Extract the track rod ends using the toolBall joint extractor.(Tav. 476 ) .
Remove:
the safety strap(s)from the steering box,
the steering box.
Unclip Gear control assembly: Exploded view (37A, Mechanical component controls):
the gear control cables from the selector ball joints using an open-jawed spanner,
the gear control cables from their support.
-3-
Unclip the gearbox coolant pipe(1 ) .
Remove the starterCylinder
block assembly: Exploded view
(10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly).
Remove the bolts from the clutch slave cylinder support(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Exploded view ) .
-4-
Gearbox assembly:
Remove:
the bolt(4) of the wiring support,
the nut(5) of the wiring support,
the wiring support.
-5-
Remove:
the bolts(6) of the high pressure pump protector tie-rod,
the tie-rod of the high pressure pump protector.
-6-
Disconnect the reverse gear switch(7 ) .
-7-
Unclip the wiring from the gearbox at(8 ) .
IF FITTED
-8-
Disconnect the speed sensor(9 ) .
Unclip the speed sensor wiring.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the upper bolts of the gearbox(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
-9-
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view )
.
Fit the toolSupport for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly(Mot. 1390 ) equipped with
the toolAdapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.(Mot. 1709 ) under the gearbox.
Using a safety strap(s), strap the gearbox on theSupport for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox
assembly (Mot. 1390 ) .
Remove the safety strap(s)from the gearbox.
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the gearbox lower bolts,
the gearbox.
- 10 -
Remove the clutch thrust bearingClutch
assembly: Exploded view
.
If replacing the gearbox, remove(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the reverse gear switch,
the speed sensor.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
If replacing the gearbox, refit(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the reverse gear switch,
the speed sensor.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Note:
Before refit the clutch actuator moduleClutch
clutch thrust bearing is fitted well.
- 11 -
assembly: Exploded view
, check that the
Repair-12x01-01x37-1-94-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 12 -
MANUAL GEARBOX: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Ball joint extractor.
Tav. 476
Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly
Mot. 1390
Adapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.
Mot. 1709
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
oil recovery tray
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the
safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 21A, Manual
gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view ) .
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove:
-1-
the
the
the
the
engine undertray,
front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting (35A, Wheels and tyres),
longitudinal driveshaftPropshaft: Removal - Refitting ,
exhaust silencer(19B, Exhaust).
M9T, 690 696 698(690 OR 696 OR 698)
Remove the particle filter(see Exhaust
assembly under body: Exploded view) (19B,
Exhaust).
M9T, 686 692 694(686 OR 692 OR 694)
Remove the catalytic converter(see Exhaust
assembly under body: Exploded view) (19B,
Exhaust).
Remove the subframeFront axle subframe: Removal - Refitting (31A, Front axle components).
Fit a
oil recovery trayunder
the power-assisted steering pipes of the steering box.
Remove the power-assisted steering pipe bracket bolt on the steering boxPower-assisted steering
assembly: Exploded view (36B, Power-assisted steering).
Disconnect the power-assisted steering pipes.
Insert the blanking plugs.
Remove the universal joint boltPower-assisted
steering).
steering assembly: Exploded view
Remove the nuts from the track rod endsSteering
steering).
assembly: Exploded view
-2-
(36B, Power-assisted
(36B, Power-assisted
Extract the track rod ends using the toolBall joint extractor.(Tav. 476 ) .
Remove:
the safety strap(s)from the steering box,
the steering box.
Unclip Gear control assembly: Exploded view (37A, Mechanical component controls):
the gear control cables from the selector ball joints using an open-jawed spanner,
the gear control cables from their support.
-3-
Unclip the gearbox coolant pipe(1 ) .
Remove the starterCylinder
block assembly: Exploded view
(10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly).
Remove the bolts from the clutch slave cylinder support(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Exploded view ) .
-4-
Gearbox assembly:
Remove:
the bolt(4) of the wiring support,
the nut(5) of the wiring support,
the wiring support.
-5-
Remove:
the bolts(6) of the high pressure pump protector tie-rod,
the tie-rod of the high pressure pump protector.
-6-
Disconnect the reverse gear switch(7 ) .
-7-
Unclip the wiring from the gearbox at(8 ) .
IF FITTED
-8-
Disconnect the speed sensor(9 ) .
Unclip the speed sensor wiring.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the upper bolts of the gearbox(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
-9-
Gearbox assembly: Exploded view )
.
Fit the toolSupport for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly(Mot. 1390 ) equipped with
the toolAdapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.(Mot. 1709 ) under the gearbox.
Using a safety strap(s), strap the gearbox on theSupport for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox
assembly (Mot. 1390 ) .
Remove the safety strap(s)from the gearbox.
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the gearbox lower bolts,
the gearbox.
- 10 -
Remove the clutch thrust bearingClutch
assembly: Exploded view
.
If replacing the gearbox, remove(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the reverse gear switch,
the speed sensor.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
If replacing the gearbox, refit(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the reverse gear switch,
the speed sensor.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Note:
Before refit the clutch actuator moduleClutch
clutch thrust bearing is fitted well.
- 11 -
assembly: Exploded view
, check that the
Repair-12x01-01x37-1-94-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 12 -
MASTER CYLINDER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 37A, Mechanical
component controls , Braking control assembly: Exploded view ) .
CAUTION
Always replace the master cylinder if it is dropped or in the event of an impact (risk of
malfunction).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Drain the brake fluid reservoir with a syringe.
Position a container to catch any brake fluid remaining in the master cylinder which may run out.
-1-
Disconnect the supply pipe from the clutch master cylinder(1 ) .
-2-
Disconnect the brake fluid level sensor connector(2 ) .
Remove (see 37A, Mechanical component controls, Braking control assembly: Exploded view) :
the brake fluid reservoir retaining pin,
the brake fluid reservoir.
Fit blanking plugs on the openings of the master cylinder and the brake pipes.
Remove (see 37A, Mechanical component controls, Braking control assembly: Exploded view) :
the rigid pipe unions,
the master cylinder.
-3-
REFITTING
Fit the brake pipe unions on the master cylinder without tightening them.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Bleed the braking circuit(see Braking
circuit: Bleed) .
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
Note:
The brake fluid level sensor connector is correctly connected when the " locking click "
sound is heard.
Repair-13x03x01x09-01x37-1-44-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
MECHANISM HOUSING BEARING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
ZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit
Bvi. 1950
Equipment required
component support
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Manual gearbox: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the manual gearboxGearbox
Position the gearbox on the
assembly: Exploded view
component support(see
.
21A, Manual gearbox ,
Gearbox support equipment: Use)
.
Remove:
the gearshift plate(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) ,
the reverse gear switchGearbox assembly: Exploded view .
-1-
Remove the clutch housingGearbox
assembly: Exploded view
Remove the shaft unit(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Remove the mechanism housingGearbox
.
Gearbox shaft: Removal - Refitting)
assembly: Exploded view
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove Gearbox assembly: Exploded view :
the stops bolts(1) ,
the stops(2) ,
-2-
.
.
Remove the input shaft bearing on the mechanism housing use toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit
(Bvi. 1950 ) D (3 ) Gearbox assembly: Exploded view .
-3-
Remove the outer bush of the output shaft bearing on the mechanism housing(4 ) Gearbox
Exploded view .
-4-
assembly:
Remove the ball bearing(5 ) Gearbox
assembly: Exploded view
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-5-
.
Clean all the removed partsVehicle: Parts and consumables for
Products).
the repair
Always replace:
the ball bearing,
the outer bush of the output shaft bearing on the mechanism housing,
the input shaft bearing on the mechanism housing,
the stops bolts.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-6-
(04B, Consumables -
Use an hydraulic press and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) F (6 ) to refit the ball
bearing Gearbox assembly: Exploded view .
-7-
-8-
Use an hydraulic press and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) (C) + (D) (7 ) to refit
the outer bush of the output shaft bearing on the mechanism housingGearbox assembly: Exploded view .
-9-
- 10 -
Use an hydraulic press and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) (D) + (B) (8 ) to refit
the input shaft bearing on the mechanism housingGearbox assembly: Exploded view .
Refit Gearbox assembly: Exploded view :
the new stops bolts,
- 11 -
the stops.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x01x04x13-01x37-1-17-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 12 -
METERING PUMP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
WARNING
During this operation, be sure to:
refrain from smoking or bringing red hot objects close to the working area,
be careful of fuel splashes when disconnecting the union.
CAUTION
To prevent impurities from entering the circuit, place protective plugs on all fuel circuit
components exposed to the open air.
Note:
There are two metering pumps at each side under the vehicle.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove:
the metering pump connector(1) ,
the metering pump bolt(2) ,
the fuel hoses clips(3) .
Disconnect from the metering pump the fuel supply hoses.
Remove the metering pump.
REFITTING
-2-
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the fuel supply hose clips.
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the metering pump,
the fuel hoses with new clips.
Connect the metering pump connector.
Repair-30x02x03x06-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
MIXING MOTOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 61A, Heating,
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the dashboard lower trimDashboard lower trim: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment),
the front air distribution duct(see 61A, Heating, Air distribution circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the air mixing motor connector.
Remove the mixing motor(see 61A, Heating,
Exploded view ) .
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly:
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Climate control computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " front air mixing flap actuator " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
-1-
Repair-30x02x04x08-01x37-1-30-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
MOTORISED SLIDING SIDE OPENING ELEMENT DRIVE BELT : REMOVAL REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Fit the tool DOOR SUPPORT.
Note:
It is necessary to hold the sliding side door using the tool DOOR SUPPORT.
Number of Renault agreement: 661000.
Part no.: SUP 01.
Remove the end piece of sliding side door centre runner(see 51A, Side
Exterior rear side opening element assembly: Exploded view) .
Remove the sliding side door carriage(see 51A, Side
element drive mechanism: Removal - Refitting) .
opening element mechanisms,
opening element mechanisms, Rear side opening
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Note: observe the drive belt routing on the sliding side door carriage for a correct
reffiting
-2-
Remove:
the drive belt rear mounting support bolt(1) ,
the drive belt rear mounting support.
-3-
Remove:
the sliding side door carriage nut(2) ,
the sliding side door carriage axis(3) .
-4-
Remove:
the sproket protector housing bolts(4) ,
the sproket protector housing.
Note:
Mark the drive belt routing on the sliding side door carriage before removing it.
Extract (5 ) the " sprocket - drive belt " assembly from the sliding side door carriage.
-5-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Replace the sliding side opening element drive belt all the 15 000 cycles.
Always replace the sliding side opening element drive belt and the assembly components that relate to it :
the bearings ,
the rollers ,
the circlips,
the dust seal ,
the belt guide,
the roller axle .
WARNING
Always replace the side door carriage all the 50 000 cycles.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
During the refitting ,handle the belt with care,do not bend in two
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-6-
Torque tighten:
the sproket protector housing bolts3
the sliding side door carriage nut8
N.m,
N.m,
the drive belt rear mounting support bolt5
Adjust the drive belt tension(see 51A, Side
mechanism: Adjustment ) .
N.m.
opening element mechanisms, Rear side opening element drive
Note:
Apply the sliding side door initialisation procedure after carrying out work.(see 51A,
Side opening element mechanisms, Rear side opening element drive mechanism: Adjustment)
-7-
Repair-50x02x14x23-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
MULTIFUNCTION SUPPORT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
refrigerant charging station
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Engine
assembly: Exploded view .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove the engine undertray.
Remove :
the accessories belt,
the power-assisted steering pump,
the alternator protector,
the alternator.
Remove the dummy pulley.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
accessories
Remove the multifunction support.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fill and bleed the power-assisted steering circuitPower-assisted
Power-assisted steering).
steering circuit: Bleeding
Repair-10x04x02x01-01x37-1-112-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
(36B,
NAVIGATION SCREEN: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
In the event of replacement, apply the Before repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select Navigation computer ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Switch off the ignition.
CAUTION
To prevent damaging the navigation system, wait 1 minuteafter switching off the +
after ignition feed.
CAUTION
Do not press on the screen as this may damage it.
-1-
Take the SD card(1 ) out of its housing.
Note:
When replacing the computer, mark the removed SD card and give it back to the
customer when they come to collect the vehicle.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Unclip the navigation screen rear trim using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) (2 ) .
-3-
Disconnect the navigation screen connector(3 ) .
Unclip the navigation screen wiring.
Mark the position of the aerials.
-4-
CAUTION
To ensure correct operation:
do not pinch the aerial cable,
do not bend the aerial cable,
do not force the aerial cable when refitting.
Disconnect the aerials(4 ) .
Remove:
the navigation screen bolts(5) from its support,
-5-
the navigation screen.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
When replacing the navigation computer, always replace the SD card.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
CAUTION
Do not press on the screen as this may damage it.
Insert the SD card in its housing.
When replacing the navigation computer, insert the new SD card in its housing.
3. CHECKING AFTER REPAIR
Switch on the ignition.
In the event of a replacement, apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select Navigation computer ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
When replacing the navigation computer, always hand the following over the customer:
the new card located in the housing of the navigation screen,
the SD card used with the old computer so that the customer can recover their personal data and transfer it over to
the new card.
Check the operation of navigation system, if the satellites can be accessed.
-6-
Repair-30x04x09x01-01x37-1-20-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
Unclip the number plate light(1 ) using a flat-blade screwdriver.
-1-
Disconnect the connectors(2 ) from the number plate lights.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
When replacing bulbs, use approved W5Wbulbs.
Connect the number plate light connectors.
-2-
Clip on the number plate lights.
Repair-80x02x06x16-01x37-1-8-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
OFFSET MULTIMEDIA SOCKET COMPUTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
In the event of replacement, apply the Before repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Mobile connectivity computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the gloveboxGlovebox:
Removal - Refitting
(57A, Interior equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Unclip the offset multimedia socket computer towards the rear(1 ) .
-2-
Disconnect the offset multimedia socket computer connectors.
Remove the offset multimedia socket computer.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Connect the offset multimedia socket computer connectors.
-3-
Clip the offset multimedia socket computer onto its mounting.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the gloveboxGlovebox:
Removal - Refitting
(57A, Interior equipment).
Connect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Switch on the ignition.
In the event of a replacement, apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Mobile connectivity computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-30x04x06x24-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
OIL DECANTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Engine
assembly: Exploded view .
oil circuit
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the air filter unit air outlet pipe(see 12A, Fuel mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view) .
Remove the injector rail protector(see 13B, Diesel
injection, Injection assembly: Exploded view)
Unclip the wiring from the turbocharger air inlet pipe(see 12A, Fuel
view ) .
.
mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded
Remove (see 12A, Fuel mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view) :
the turbocharger air inlet pipe bolts on the turbocharger,
the turbocharger air inlet pipe seal.
Unclip (see 12A, Fuel mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view) :
the intercooler air inlet pipe clip on the turbocharger,
the vacuum pipe on the intercooler air inlet pipe.
Disconnect the intercooler air inlet pipe from the turbocharger(see 12A, Fuel
Exploded view ) .
Remove (see 12A, Fuel mixture, Air inlet assembly: Exploded view) :
the intercooler air inlet pipe bolt on the inlet distributor,
the intercooler air inlet pipe seal at the turbocharger end.
-1-
mixture, Air inlet assembly:
Disconnect the diesel injector connectors(1 ) .
Unclip the diesel injector wiring(2 ) on the oil decanter.
Move aside the diesel injector wiring.
-2-
Separate the oil vapour rebreathing pipe clip(3 ) on the oil decanter using the toolRemote operation
pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) .
Disconnect the oil vapour rebreathing pipe from the oil decanter.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the oil decanter,
the oil decanter seals.
-3-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
WARNING
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean and degrease:
the oil decanter seal housings, if they are being reused,
the rocker cover joint faces.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-11x04x06x22-01x37-1-54-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
OIL FILTER UNIT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
refrigerant charging station
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
CAUTION
Always check the oil level using the engine oil dipstick.
Do not exceed the maximum level on the engine oil dipstick (as this could damage
the engine).
Correct the engine oil level if necessary before delivering the vehicle to the customer.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove the engine undertray.
Drain the cooling systemCooling system: Draining - Refilling .
-1-
Remove Engine accessories assembly: Exploded view :
the accessories belt,
the power-assisted steering pump,
the alternator protector,
the alternator.
Remove:
the multifunction support,
the engine oil dipstick(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded
view ) .
Unclip the fuel return pipe(1 ) from the engine oil dipstick guide.
-2-
Remove:
the engine oil dipstick guide(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly:
Exploded view ) ,
the oil filter(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Separate the clip of the coolant pump inlet pipe on the oil filter unitCoolant
circuit assembly: Exploded view
.
Disconnect the coolant pump inlet pipe from the oil filter unitCoolant
circuit assembly: Exploded view
.
Separate the clip of the exhaust gas cooler coolant outlet pipe on the oil filter unitCoolant circuit
assembly: Exploded view .
Disconnect the exhaust gas cooler coolant outlet pipe from the oil filter unitCoolant
Exploded view .
Separate the clip of the cooling radiator outlet pipe on the oil filter unitCoolant
view .
Disconnect the cooling radiator outlet pipe from the oil filter unitCoolant
Disconnect the oil pressure sensor connector(see 10A, Engine
circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
circuit assembly:
circuit assembly: Exploded
circuit assembly: Exploded view
.
and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil
Remove (see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the oil filter unit,
the oil filter unit seal.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean and degrease:
the cylinder block gasket face,
the oil filter unit seal housings and gasket faces.
-3-
1- IF REPLACING THE OIL FILTER UNIT
Remove the oil pressure sensor from the old oil filter unit(see 10A, Engine
Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
Refit the oil pressure sensor on the new oil filter unit(see 10A, Engine
oil circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
and cylinder block assembly,
and cylinder block assembly, Engine
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Top up the engine oil level(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
.
CAUTION
Always check the oil level using the engine oil dipstick.
Do not exceed the maximum level on the dipstick (could destroy the engine).
Correct the engine oil level if necessary before delivering the vehicle to the customer.
Before refitting the engine undertray, fill and bleed the engine cooling systemCooling
Refilling .
Fill and bleed the power-assisted steering circuitPower-assisted
Power-assisted steering).
steering circuit: Bleeding
Repair-10x05x05x08-01x37-1-33-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
system: Draining -
(36B,
OIL LEVEL SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Locations and specifications (tightening torques, parts always be replaced, etc.)(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the intercooler air inlet pipe.
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the duct between the low pressure turbocharger and the turbo-manifold,
the low pressure turbocharger.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the oil level sensor connector(1 ) .
Remove the oil level sensor .
REFITTING
1. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-10x05x04x03-01x37-1-90-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
OIL LEVEL SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Locations and specifications (tightening torques, parts always be replaced, etc.)(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the intercooler air inlet pipeAir
inlet assembly: Exploded view
.
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the duct between the low pressure turbocharger and the turbo-manifold,
the low pressure turbocharger.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the oil level sensor connector(1 ) .
Remove the oil level sensor(see 10A, Engine
Exploded view ) .
and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly:
REFITTING
1. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-10x05x04x03-01x37-1-90-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
OIL PRESSURE: CHECK
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
22 mm socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors.
Mot. 1495-01
Set of replacement unions for kit Mot.836-05.
Mot. 836-06
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
OIL PRESSURE TABLES:
Minimum oil pressure (bar)
Engine
M9T
Engine
suffix
Idling
speed
at 2000
rpm
at 3000
rpm
at 4000
rpm
1.4
-
4.7
Maximum oil pressure
(bar)
-
All
6.4
END PIECES TO BE USED:
Engine
End pieces
M9R
(C) + (F)
1. PREPARATION OPERATION FOR CHECK
-1-
CAUTION
Always check the oil level using the dipstick.
Do not exceed the maximum level on the dipstick (could destroy the engine).
Correct the engine oil level if necessary before delivering the vehicle to the customer.
Note:
When topping up the engine oil, always leave at least 10 minutesbefore checking
the level with a dipstick.
2. CHECKING
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine undertray.
-2-
Remove the oil pressure sensor(see 10A, Engine
Refitting) .
and cylinder block assembly, Oil pressure sensor: Removal -
-3-
In place of the oil pressure sensor(1 ) , fit the toolSet of replacement unions for kit Mot.836-05.(Mot.
836-06 ) with suitable adapters using the tool22 mm socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors.(Mot.
1495-01 ) or a 22 mmlong socket.
Start the vehicle.
Monitor the engine oil pressure as the oil temperature rises (approximately 80 Cor the first time the
engine cooling fan is activated); it should not be less than the pressure at idle speed.
If the oil pressure is lower than the pressure at idle speed, check that:
the oil filter is not clogged,
-4-
dirt or swarf is not present in the engine oil,
the oil pump is in good condition and being correctly driven.
Check the oil pressure in comparison with the values given in the table above.
Switch off the engine.
Remove the Set of replacement unions for kit Mot.836-05.(Mot.
Refit the oil pressure sensor(see 10A, Engine
Refitting) .
836-06) with
the end pieces.
and cylinder block assembly, Oil pressure sensor: Removal -
Wipe any oil run-off with a cloth.
Wait at least 10 minutes.
Check the oil level using the dipstick.
Top up the oil level if necessary(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil: Draining - Refilling)
Start the vehicle and check that there are no oil leaks at the oil pressure sensor.
Repair-10x05x05x07-01x58-1-44-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
.
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
22 mm socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors - 1/2 square drive and 24 mm hexagonal ext.
Mot. 1495
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
CAUTION
Always check the oil level using the engine oil dipstick.
Do not exceed the maximum level on the dipstick (could destroy the engine).
Correct the engine oil level if necessary before delivering the vehicle to the customer.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine undertray.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the oil pressure sensor connector(1 ) .
Remove the oil pressure sensor using the22 mm socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors - 1/2
square drive and 24 mm hexagonal ext.(Mot. 1495 ) (see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil
circuit assembly: Exploded view) (see 10A,Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded
view ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-10x05x04x02-01x37-1-92-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
OPENING AERIAL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
1- UPPER OPENING AERIAL
-1-
Remove the interior light at(1 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
2- LOWER OPENING AERIAL
Remove:
the central consoleCentre console: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment),
the passenger side door sill liningFront door sill lining: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim),
partially remove the floor carpet.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
1- UPPER OPENING AERIAL
Disconnect the connector(2 ) from the opening aerial.
Remove the opening aerial by pressing on the clips(3 ) .
2- LOWER OPENING AERIAL
-3-
Disconnect the connector(4 ) from the opening aerial.
Extract the opening aerial(5 ) from the soundproofing under the distribution unit.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-4-
Repair-30x06x01x01-01x37-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
OPENING ELEMENTS MANAGEMENT: LIST AND LOCATION OF
COMPONENTS
1. LIST OF COMPONENTS
1- THE OPENING ELEMENTS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CONSISTS OF:
an ignition key
a central door locking switch on the front left-hand handleExterior door handle: Removal - Refitting (51A, Side
opening element mechanisms)
opening aerials(see 87C, Opening element management, Opening aerial: Removal - Refitting)
a hands-free transmitter
a hands-free access computer(see 87C, Opening element management, Hands-free access computer: Removal
- Refitting)
2. LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
IGNITION KEY
-1-
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING SWITCH ON THE FRONT LEFT-HAND DOOR HANDLE
-2-
LOWER OPENING AERIAL
-3-
The lower opening aerial is located on the soundproofing, under the distribution unit.
UPPER OPENING AERIAL
-4-
The upper opening aerial is located on the interior light.
HANDS-FREE TRANSMITTER
-5-
HANDS-FREE ACCESS COMPUTER
-6-
The hands-free access computer is located on the dashboard cross member, behind the glovebox.
Repair-30x06-02x51-1-13-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
OUTER REAR WHEEL ARCH: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
-2-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Outer rear wheel arch
Mild steel
0.7
(2 )
Outer rear wheel arch, front section
Mild steel
1.5
(3 )
Outer rear wheel arch, rear section
Mild steel
1.5
(4 )
Side panel vertical stiffener
Mild steel
0.8
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
The options for replacing this part are as follows:
Complete replacement
Partial replacement 1+2+4,
Partial replacement 1+3+4,
Partial replacement 2+3.
-3-
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld area(see Earths on body: List and location of components) .
-4-
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
-5-
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weld(see Connections by arc welding
under shielding gas: Description) (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections
(GMAW)).
2- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT 1+2+4
1)PART IN POSITION
-6-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weld(see Connections by arc welding
under shielding gas: Description) (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections
(GMAW)).
3- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT 1+3+4
1)PART IN POSITION
-7-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weld(see Connections by arc welding
under shielding gas: Description) (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections
(GMAW)).
-8-
4- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT 2+3
1)PART IN POSITION
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
-9-
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weld(see Connections by arc welding
under shielding gas: Description) (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections
(GMAW)).
Repair-40x09x16x02-02x49-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
OUTPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Tapered roller bearing at the clutch housing end
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
2
6th fixed gear stop ring
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
3
6th fixed gear
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
4
5th fixed gear
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
5
3rd idle gear needle bearing
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
6
3rd idle gear
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
7
Stop ring of the 3rd and 4th synchroniser hub
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
8
3rd synchroniser rings
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
9
3rd and 4th synchroniser hub
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
10
Locking ball cartridge of the 3rd and 4th synchroniser hub
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
11
3rd and 4th synchroniser
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
12
4th synchroniser rings
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
13
4th idle gear needle bearing
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
14
4th idle gear
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
15
Output shaft
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Gearbox shaft: Removal - Refitting)
16
Tapered roller bearing at the mechanism housing end
(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft: Stripping - Rebuilding)
17
Intermediate gear
(see Output shaft: Removal - Refitting)
18
Intermediate gear shaft
(see Output shaft: Removal - Refitting)
19
Intermediate gear needle bearing
(see Output shaft: Removal - Refitting)
20
Half-seal
(see Output shaft: Removal - Refitting)
21
Washer
(see Output shaft: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-12x01x04x10-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
OUTPUT SHAFT: STRIPPING - REBUILDING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
ZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit
Bvi. 1950
Equipment required
component support
sliding two-claw extractor
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Manual gearbox: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
STRIPPING
1. STRIPPING PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the manual gearboxGearbox
Position the gearbox on the
assembly: Exploded view
component support(see
.
21A, Manual gearbox ,
Gearbox support equipment: Use)
.
Remove:
the gearshift plate(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Selector shafts and gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view) ,
the reverse gear switchGearbox assembly: Exploded view .
Remove the clutch housingGearbox
Remove the shaft unit using a
assembly: Exploded view
sliding two-claw extractor.
-1-
.
Remove the assembly of gearbox control shafts and forks(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
gearbox forks assembly: Exploded view ) from the shaft unit.
Selector shafts and
2. STRIPPING OPERATION
Use a hydraulic press, toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) F (1 ) and an extractor to
remove the tapered roller bearing at the clutch housing end(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft assembly:
Exploded view ) .
-2-
Remove the 6th fixed gear stop ring(2 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
-3-
Output shaft assembly: Exploded view)
.
Use a hydraulic press, toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) F (3 ) and an extractor to
remove the 6th fixed gear(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft assembly: Exploded view) .
Note:
Because of the high extraction forces, extract the helical gears individually.
-4-
Use a hydraulic press, toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) A (4 ) and an extractor to
remove the 5th fixed gear(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft assembly: Exploded view) .
-5-
Remove the 3rd idle gear(5 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
-6-
Output shaft assembly: Exploded view)
.
Remove the 3rd idle gear needle bearing(6 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
view ) .
-7-
Output shaft assembly: Exploded
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the stop ring of the 3rd and 4th synchroniser hub(7) ,
the 3rd synchroniser rings(8) ,
the 3rd and 4th synchroniser(9) .
-8-
Remove the locking collet(10 ) .
-9-
Remove the locking ball cartridge of the 3rd and 4th synchroniser hub(11 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft assembly: Exploded view) .
- 10 -
Use a hydraulic press, toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) A (12 ) and an extractor to
remove the 3rd and 4th synchroniser hub(13 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft assembly: Exploded
view ) .
- 11 -
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the 4th synchroniser rings(14) ,
the 4th idle gear(15) .
- 12 -
Remove the 4th idle gear needle bearing(16 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Exploded view ) .
- 13 -
Output shaft assembly:
Use a hydraulic press, toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) F (17 ) and an extractor to
remove the tapered roller bearing at the mechanism housing end(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft
assembly: Exploded view) .
REBUILDING
1. REBUILDING PREPARATION OPERATION
- 14 -
Clean all the removed partsVehicle: Parts and consumables for
Products).
Always replace bearings.
2. REBUILDING OPERATION
- 15 -
the repair
(04B, Consumables -
Use a hydraulic press and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) A (18 ) to refit the
tapered roller bearing at the mechanism housing end(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft assembly:
Exploded view )
Oil the 4th idle gear needle bearing(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft assembly: Exploded view)
.
Refit (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the 4th idle gear needle bearing,
the 4th idle gear.
Check the wear on the synchromesh parts.
Note:
The notches of the 3rd and 4th synchroniser (inner side) must line up exactly with the
recesses of the 3rd and 4th synchroniser hub.
Output
Refit the 4th synchroniser rings on the 3rd and 4th synchroniser hub(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
shaft assembly: Exploded view) .
- 16 -
Use a hydraulic press and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) D (19 ) to refit the 4th
synchroniser rings - 3rd and 4th synchroniser hub assembly(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft
assembly: Exploded view) .
- 17 -
Refit (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the locking ball cartridges of the 3rd and 4th synchroniser hub,
the locking collet(20) ,
the 3rd and 4th synchroniser,
the 3rd synchroniser rings,
- 18 -
the stop ring of the 3rd and 4th synchroniser hub.
Note:
The stop ring of the 3rd and 4th synchroniser hub must go right to the bottom of the
groove in the intermediate shaft.
The end float of the stop ring of the 3rd and 4th synchroniser hub must be 0to 0.1
mm .
Aim for 0.0 mm.
Oil the 3rd idle gear needle bearing(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft assembly: Exploded view)
Refit the 3rd idle gear needle bearing(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Output shaft assembly: Exploded view)
Refit the 3rd idle gear(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft assembly: Exploded view) against the
synchroniser and move the 3rd and 4th synchroniser to the neutral position. You will be able to hear
clearly the pressure parts clicking into place.
- 19 -
.
.
- 20 -
Use a hydraulic press and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) D (21) to refit:
the 5th fixed gear,
the 6th fixed gear.
Refit the 6th fixed gear stop ring(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
- 21 -
Output shaft assembly: Exploded view)
.
Note:
The 6th fixed gear stop ring must go right to the bottom of the groove in the output
shaft.
The end float of the 6th fixed gear stop ring must be 0to 0.1 mm.
Aim for 0.0 mm.
- 22 -
Use a hydraulic press and toolZF4 gearbox internal renovation kit(Bvi. 1950 ) D (22 ) to refit the
tapered roller bearing at the clutch housing end(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Output shaft assembly: Exploded
view ) .
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to stripping.
Repair-12x01x04x07-01x31-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 23 -
OXYGEN SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
22 mm socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors.
Mot. 1495-01
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Exhaust
engine compartment: Exploded view) .
assembly in
CAUTION
Do not use any product designed to improve the electrical contact in the injection
computer and oxygen sensor connectors or on the bodies of the oxygen sensors.
Failure to respect this advice causes the oxygen sensor to malfunction and results in
failure to comply with the emission control standard.
CAUTION
If the connections are corroded, repair the wiring (see
(Technical Note 6015A, 88A, Wiring).
REMOVAL
-1-
Wiring: Precautions for repair)
Disconnect the oxygen sensor connector(1 ) .
Unclip the oxygen sensor wiring(2 ) .
Remove the oxygen sensor(see Exhaust assembly in engine compartment:
socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors.(Mot. 1495-01) .
Exploded view) using
the 22 mm
REFITTING
Refit the oxygen sensor(see Exhaust assembly in engine compartment:
socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors.(Mot. 1495-01) .
-2-
Exploded view) using
the tool22 mm
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-11x05x07x08-01x37-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
PARKING BRAKE CABLES: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Parking brake
assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- PARKING BRAKE CABLES BETWEEN THE INTERMEDIATE LINKAGE AND THE REAR BRAKE CALLIPERS
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Loosen the adjusting nut of the parking brake cables(see Parking
-1-
brake assembly: Exploded view) .
Detach the parking brake cables(1 ) from the compensator.
-2-
Unclip the parking brake cables(2 ) from the body.
-3-
Remove the parking brake cables(3 ) from the rear brake callipers.
Unclip the parking brake cables from the sheath stops at(4 ) .
-4-
Unclip the parking brake cables from their support at(5 ) .
Remove the parking brake cables, noting their routing.
2- PARKING BRAKE CABLE BETWEEN THE LINKAGE AND THE PARKING BRAKE LEVER
-5-
Loosen the adjusting nut of the parking brake cables(see Parking
Remove the parking brake cable(6 ) from the compensator.
-6-
brake assembly: Exploded view) .
Remove the covers(7 ) of the parking brake lever.
-7-
Remove (see Parking brake assembly: Exploded view) :
the clip(8) of the parking brake cable pin on the parking brake lever,
the parking brake cable pin on the parking brake lever,
the parking brake cable from the parking brake lever.
-8-
Unclip from the body:
the sheath stop(9) of the parking brake cable,
the parking brake cable.
Remove the parking brake cable between the intermediate linkage and the parking brake lever.
-9-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the clip of the pin for the parking brake cable between the linkage and the parking
brake lever on the parking brake lever.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the parking brake cables(see 37A, Mechanical
Adjustment ) .
component controls, Parking brake lever:
Repair-13x03x11x03-01x37-1-32-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
PARKING BRAKE LEVER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Parking brake
assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the parking brake cable between the intermediate linkage and the parking brake control lever
(see 37A, Mechanical component controls, Parking brake cables: Removal - Refitting) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the parking brake switch connector(1 ) .
Remove the parking brake lever(see Parking
brake assembly: Exploded view) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the parking brake cables(see 37A, Mechanical
-2-
component controls, Parking brake lever: Adjustment)
.
Repair-13x03x11x01-01x37-2-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
PARKING BRAKE LEVER: ADJUSTMENT
Note:
A poorly adjusted parking brake:
prevents correct operation of the automatic compensation system for the brake shoes,
causes premature wear of brake shoes.
ADJUSTMENT
1. ADJUSTMENT PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) .
Apply the parking brake five times to condition the cables for normal use.
Put the parking brake lever into the released position.
Check that the rear wheels turn freely. If they do not, check the following components and if necessary repair:
the parking brake cables,
the calliper piston,
the automatic compensation system,
calliper.
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
2. OPERATION FOR ADJUSTMENT OF PART CONCERNED
-1-
Loosen the nut(1 ) to release the cables.
Position the parking brake lever at the 2nd notch.
Move the adjustment nut until the disc or drum can no longer be turned by hand.
Pull the brake lever several times.
Put the parking brake lever into the released position.
The disc or the drum must be able to turn freely. If not, move the nut gradually until the disc or drum
-2-
can turn freely.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Repair-13x03x11x01-01x67-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL BUZZER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the dashboard lower trimDashboard lower trim: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the parking distance control buzzer.
Remove:
the bolts(2) of the parking distance control buzzer,
the parking distance control buzzer.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x03x03x06-01x37-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL COMPUTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
In the event of replacement, apply the Before repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Parking distance control computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/After repair procedure " ,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Switch off the ignition.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the gloveboxGlovebox:
Removal - Refitting
(57A, Interior equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the parking distance control computer connector(1 ) .
Undo the parking distance control computer bolts(2 ) .
Remove the parking distance control computer from its support by releasing its bolts from the oblong
holes.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
-2-
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Connect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
In the event of a replacement, apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Parking distance control computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/After repair procedure " ,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-80x03x03x04-01x37-1-19-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
PARTICLE FILTER PRESSURE SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 19B, Exhaust, Exhaust: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
To prevent the surrounding components from overheating, do not damage (tear, pierce,
bend, etc.) a heat shield.
Any damaged heat shields must be replaced.
WARNING
Wear heat protective gloves during the operation.
-1-
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Remove the undertray.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
M9T, 670 680 690 696 698 870 880 882 890 896 898(670 OR 680 OR 690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 870 OR 880 OR 882 OR 890
OR 896 OR 898)
Disconnect the particle filter pressure sensor connector(1 ) .
-3-
Remove the particle filter pressure sensor nut(2 ) .
Undo the union nut of the particle filter pressure sensor(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exploded view ) .
Remove the particle filter pressure sensor(see 19B, Exhaust ,
.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
-4-
Exhaust assembly under body:
Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view)
Disconnect the particle filter pressure differential sensor connector(1 ) .
Unclip the particle filter pressure sensor cables at(3 ) .
Remove the particle filter pressure differential sensor nut(2 ) .
-5-
Unclip the particle filter pressure sensor cables at(4 ) .
Disconnect the particle filter pressure sensors(5 ) .
Remove the " particle filter pressure differential sensor - particle filter pressure sensors " assembly
(see 19B, Exhaust , Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-6-
If reusing the sensor, coat it with COPPER-ALUMINIUM LUBRICANTVehicle:
the repair .
Note:
Do not lubricate a new sensor.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-7-
Parts and consumables for
M9T, 670 680 690 696 698 870 880 882 890 896 898(670 OR 680 OR 690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 870 OR 880 OR 882 OR 890
OR 896 OR 898)
Refit the particle filter pressure sensor(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view)
.
Fit the rigid section(3 ) of the particle filter pressure sensors then turn it so that it is at an angle of +
to the exhaust pipe longitudinal axis.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Refit the particle filter pressure sensors(see 19B, Exhaust ,
-8-
Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view)
.
Fit the rigid section(6 ) of the particle filter pressure sensors then turn it so that it is at an angle of +
to the exhaust pipe longitudinal axis.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic toolDiagnostic tool : Use :
-Computer concerned by the after repair procedure:
" Injection computer "
-Component affected by the after repair procedure:
" Particle filter pressure sensor "
-9-
Repair-10x08x04x01-01x37-1-32-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
PARTICLE FILTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Pliers for removing exhaust pipe rubber mounting bushes
Mot. 1857
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 19B, Exhaust, Exhaust: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
To prevent the surrounding components from overheating, do not damage (tear, pierce,
bend, etc.) a heat shield.
Any damaged heat shields must be replaced.
-1-
WARNING
Wear heat protective gloves during the operation.
The catalytic converter is integrated into the particle filter.
For the removal of the catalytic converter, see the removal of the particle filter(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine undertray.
-2-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (see 19B, Exhaust, Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view) :
the union nut of the particle filter pressure sensor,
the union nut of the particle filter temperature sensor,
the union nut of the catalytic converter temperature sensor,
the particle filter exhaust clip,
the particle filter bracket nuts,
the particle filter bracket seal,
the particle filter from the rubber mounting bushes of the front axle subframe,
the particle filter.
Note:
In case of difficulty removing the rubber mounting bushes, use the toolPliers for
removing exhaust pipe rubber mounting bushes(Mot. 1857 ) .
If necessary, spray brake cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables Products):
inside the particle filter mounts,
on the welded threads of the particle filter.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean
and degrease the bearing faces between the exhaust flange and the particle filter.
Coat with COPPER-ALUMINIUM LUBRICANTVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products):
the union nut of the particle filter pressure sensor,
the union nut of the particle filter temperature sensor,
the union nut of the catalytic converter temperature sensor.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " Particle filter " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
-3-
Start the engine.
Check that there are no leaks and deal with them if necessary.
Refit the engine undertray.
Repair-10x08x04-01x37-1-31-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
PARTICLE FILTER TEMPERATURE SENSORS: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 19B, Exhaust, Exhaust: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
To prevent the surrounding components from overheating, do not damage (tear, pierce,
bend, etc.) a heat shield.
Any damaged heat shields must be replaced.
WARNING
Wear heat protective gloves during the operation.
REMOVAL
-1-
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the catalytic converter temperature sensor connector(see 19B, Exhaust ,
under body: Exploded view ) .
Exhaust assembly
Unclip the catalytic converter temperature sensor wiring.
Loosen the union nut of the catalytic converter temperature sensor(see 19B, Exhaust ,
under body: Exploded view ) .
Remove the catalytic converter temperature sensor(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exploded view ) .
Exhaust assembly
Exhaust assembly under body:
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
If reusing the sensor, coat it with COPPER-ALUMINIUM LUBRICANTVehicle:
the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Parts and consumables for
Note:
Do not lubricate a new sensor.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
-2-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the connector(1 ) of the particle filter temperature sensor(see 19B, Exhaust ,
assembly under body: Exploded view ) .
Exhaust
Unclip the wiring(2 ) of the particle filter temperature sensor.
Loosen the union nut of the particle filter temperature sensor(see 19B, Exhaust ,
body: Exploded view ) .
Remove the particle filter temperature sensor(see 19B, Exhaust ,
-3-
Exhaust assembly under
Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded
view
).
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
If reusing the sensor, coat it with COPPER-ALUMINIUM LUBRICANTVehicle:
the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Note:
Do not lubricate a new sensor.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x08x04x02-01x37-1-30-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
Parts and consumables for
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FAN ASSEMBLY CONTROL UNIT: REMOVAL REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 61A, Heating,
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove the dashboard lower trimDashboard lower trim: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the connector of the passenger compartment fan assembly control unit.
Remove the passenger compartment blower unit control unit(see 61A, Heating,
heating and ventilation assembly: Exploded view ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x02x01x26-01x37-1-45-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
Passenger compartment
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING AND VENTILATION ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
(01D, Mechanical introduction).
Mark
Description
Information
1
Distribution unit
2
Dashboard cross member
3
Mixer motor
4
Upper cabin filter
(see 61A, Heating,
Cabin filter: Removal - Refitting)
5
Cabin filter adjusting strip
(see 61A, Heating,
Cabin filter: Removal - Refitting)
6
Lower cabin filter
(see 61A, Heating,
Cabin filter: Removal - Refitting)
7
Cabin filter flap
(see 61A, Heating,
Cabin filter: Removal - Refitting)
8
Passenger compartment fan assembly control unit
9
Distribution motor
(see 61A, Heating,
Distribution unit: Removal - Refitting)
(see Dashboard cross member: Removal - Refitting) (42A, Upper
(see 61A, Heating,
(see 61A, Heating,
Mixing motor: Removal - Refitting)
Passenger compartment fan assembly control unit: Removal - Refitting)
(see 61A, Heating,
-1-
front structure)
Distribution motor: Removal - Refitting)
Illustration key: Description
Key.
Mark
Description
Information
1
Recirculation motor
2
Insulating absorber
3
Heater matrix pipe retaining guide
4
Heater matrix pipe
(see 61A, Heating,
Heater matrix: Removal - Refitting)
5
Heater matrix pipe
(see 61A, Heating,
Heater matrix: Removal - Refitting)
6
Heater matrix pipe bracket
(see 61A, Heating,
Heater matrix: Removal - Refitting)
7
Heater matrix pipe clip
(see 61A, Heating,
Heater matrix: Removal - Refitting)
8
Heater matrix pipe clip
(see 61A, Heating,
Heater matrix: Removal - Refitting)
9
Heating resistors
10
Fan assembly
(see 61A, Heating,
Fan assembly: Removal - Refitting)
11
Heater matrix
(see 61A, Heating,
Heater matrix: Removal - Refitting)
(see 61A, Heating,
Recirculation motor: Removal - Refitting)
(see 61A, Heating,
-2-
Heating resistors: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-30x02x07-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT PARTITION TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the B-pillar trims(see 71A, Body internal trim,
-1-
B-pillar trim: Removal - Refitting)
.
F62(F62)
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the supports(1) .
-2-
U62(U62)
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the supports(1) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
F62(F62)
Remove:
the clips using an unclipping tool,
the rear panel trim at(2) and at (3) then at (4) .
-4-
U62(U62)
1- PASSENGER COMPARTMENT PARTITION TRIM UPPER SECTION
Remove:
the clips,
the passenger compartment partition trim upper section.
-5-
2- PASSENGER COMPARTMENT PARTITION TRIM LOWER SECTION
Remove:
the clips,
the passenger compartment partition trim lower section.
-6-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-40x03x20x01-01x37-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
PASSENGERCOMPARTMENTPARTITION:REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Glazed van partition
Mild steel
0.8
(2 )
Lower reinforcement of van partition window
Mild steel
1.5
(3 )
Lower reinforcement of van partition
Mild steel
1.2
-2-
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x03x20-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the centre consoleCentre console: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Unclip the passenger compartment temperature sensor connector from the centre console.
Remove:
the passenger compartment temperature sensor bolts,
the passenger compartment temperature sensor.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x02x04x12-01x37-1-14-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
PASSENGER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
parts always to be replaced:
Passenger's frontal airbag mounting on dashboard cross member
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for the
repair ) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
Never handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioners or airbags) near to a source of
heat or naked flame - they may be triggered.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Remove the gloveboxGlovebox:
Removal - Refitting
(57A, Interior equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the front passenger airbag bolts(1 ) .
-2-
Move away the upper corner of the centre front panel using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car.
1363 ) by (2 ) .
-3-
-4-
Partially remove the " support - passenger frontal airbag " assembly(3 ) by pressing on the clips(4 )
using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) (5 ) .
Mark the wiring routing of the passenger frontal airbag.
-5-
Unlock the passenger frontal airbag connector at(6 ) .
Disconnect the passenger frontal airbag connector.
Remove the " support - passenger frontal airbag " assembly.
-6-
Unclip the passenger frontal airbag from its support at(7 ) by pressing carefully on the support to
release the hooks(8 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
Remove the passenger frontal airbag.
WARNING
To prevent the any component from being thrown upwards, store the airbag with the
inflatable cushion facing upwards.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-7-
parts always to be replaced:
member
Passenger's frontal airbag mounting on dashboard cross
.
WARNING
After a pyrotechnic component is triggered, it is essential to replace certain parts
(see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for the repair)
WARNING
When the passenger front airbag is triggered, the consequent damage caused to the
mountings always requires the dashboard to be replaced. Affix the label warning
against fitting a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat to the passenger
side of the dashboard.
Note:
Check the points where the passenger frontal airbag clips onto its support.
Replace the passenger frontal airbag support if one of the clipping points is weakened.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-8-
Clip the passenger frontal airbag onto its support as shown in the illustration.
Note:
Check that all the hooks of the passenger airbag module are correctly fitted in the
support.
Connect the passenger frontal airbag connector.
Lock the passenger frontal airbag connector.
-9-
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiring harness when refitting, observe the original routing.
Refit the wiring of the passenger frontal airbag connector in the position marked during removal.
Clip the " support - passenger frontal airbag " assembly on the dashboard.
Torque tighten the passenger frontal airbag bolts21 N.m.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
WARNING
To eliminate the risk of any accident, do not reuse pyrotechnic components.
It is essential to destroy pretensioners or airbags before scrapping a vehicle or a part
only (see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Airbags and pretensioners: Recycling - Destruction) .
4. CHECKING AFTER REPAIR
Switch on the ignition.
Check that there are no faults on the instrument panel.
- 10 -
Repair-31x02x01x16-01x37-1-25-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
PEDAL ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
(see Illustration key: Description) .
For fastenings with no specified tightening torque values, refer to the Table of Standard Torques(see Tightening torques: General information) .
Marks
Designations
1
Clutch pedal hinge nut
Marks
Designations
2
Clutch pedal switch
Informations
Informations
(see 37A, Mechanical
-1-
component controls, Pedal switches: Adjustment)
Marks
Designations
3
Clutch pedal return spring
4
Hinge bushing
5
Clutch pedal
6
Clutch pedal cover
7
Clutch pedal yoke
Marks
Designations
8
Brake pedal hinge nut
Marks
Designations
9
Clutch pedal yoke bolt
10
Clutch pedal hinge
Marks
Brake pedal switch
12
Brake pedal - servo rod connecting pin
13
Brake pedal cover
14
Brake pedal hinge
15
Brake pedal yoke
16
Hinge bushing
17
Brake pedal
18
Accelerator pedal
Informations
Informations
Designations
11
Informations
Informations
(see 37A, Mechanical
Repair-30x03-02x50-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
component controls, Pedal switches: Adjustment)
PEDAL SWITCHES: ADJUSTMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 37A, Mechanical component controls, Pedal assembly mechanism: Precautions for
the repair) ,
(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair) .
1. VIMERCATI AND BITRON SWITCH (GENERATION 1)
-1-
SWITCH BEFORE FITTING
-2-
Using a ruler, check that the dimension X is 28 mm.
If necessary, pull carefully on the notched rod to adjust the switch.
If adjusting the brake pedal switch, check that the brake servo pushrod is connected to the brake
pedal.
If adjusting the clutch pedal switch, check that the master cylinder or the clutch cable is clipped onto
the pedal.
Depress the pedal by hand.
-3-
Refit the switch
Lock the switch by turning it a quarter of a turn clockwise.
At the same time, carefully return the pedal.
Note:
The switch is automatically adjusted by fully depressing the pedal.
The automatic adjustment makes a clicking noise when in operation.
-4-
-5-
Check that the flange(1 ) is not visible (otherwise, repeat the adjustment).
Connect the switch connector.
1- CLUTCH PEDAL
Check that the master cylinder or the clutch cable is clipped onto the pedal.
-6-
Depress the pedal by hand.
Refit the switch.
Lock the switch by turning it a quarter of a turn clockwise.
At the same time, carefully return the pedal.
Note:
The switch is automatically adjusted by fully depressing the pedal.
The automatic adjustment makes a clicking noise when in operation.
Connect the switch connector
2. BITRON SWITCH (GENERATION 2)
3. METHODE ELECTRONICS (GENERATION 4)
Repair-30x03x05x01-01x67-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
PEDAL YOKE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Pedal
Exploded view ) .
assembly:
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the driver's frontal airbagDriver's frontal airbag: Removal - Refitting (88C, Airbags and pretensioners),
the steering wheelSteering assembly: Exploded view ,
the steering column switch assemblySteering column switch assembly: Removal - Refitting (84A, Control Signals),
the A-pillar air ductAir distribution circuit assembly: Exploded view ,
the steering columnSteering assembly: Exploded view ,
the clutch circuit bleed plug.
Connect a transparent pipe to the bleed hole running to an empty container placed under the bleed
hole.
-1-
Turn the clutch slave cylinder bleed tap(1 ) one turn anti-clockwise.
Depress the clutch pedal by hand to empty the clutch circuit.
Disconnect the transparent pipe and the container from the bleed hole of the clutch slave cylinder.
-2-
Disconnect the clutch master cylinder supply pipe(2 ) from the brake fluid reservoir.
-3-
Pull the clip(3 ) of the clutch master cylinder.
Disconnect the hydraulic clutch control pipe from the clutch master cylinder.
Fit blanking plugs into all openings.
-4-
Unclip the clutch master cylinder supply pipe from the bulkhead at(4 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-5-
Disconnect the brake pedal switch connector(5 ) .
-6-
Disconnect the connector(6 ) from the clutch pedal switch.
-7-
Remove the following from the brake pedal(see Pedal assembly: Exploded view) :
the rubber ring(7) from the dual safety connecting shaft,
the dual safety connecting shaft.
-8-
Remove:
the nuts(8) of the pedal yoke,
the pedal yoke.
1- IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT:
-9-
Remove the following from the pedal yoke(see 37A, Mechanical component controls, Pedal assembly: List and
location of components) :
the brake pedal,
the clutch pedal.
Remove the clutch master cylinderClutch
assembly: Exploded view
- 10 -
.
Remove the brake pedal switch by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise(9 ) .
Remove the clutch pedal switch by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise(10 ) .
- 11 -
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Correctly position the seal of the clutch master cylinder supply pipe on the bulkhead at(11 ) .
WARNING
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
- 12 -
Adjust the pedal switchesPedal
switches: Adjustment
.
Bleed the clutch circuitClutch circuit: Bleed .
Repair-30x03x07-01x37-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 13 -
PISTON - CON ROD: CHECK
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Dial gauge support.
Mot. 251-01
Pressure plate for measuring piston liner protrusion.
Mot. 252-01
Depth gauge for measuring the height of crankpins.
Mot. 1319
Depth gauge for measuring the height of crankpins M9R engine.
Mot. 1799
Depth gauge for measuring the height of crankpins M9R engine.
Mot. 1799
Equipment required
component support
external micrometer
radial play measuring tape
compressed air nozzle
internal micrometer
set of feeler gauges
1. PREPARATION OPERATION FOR CHECK
CAUTION
It is strictly forbidden to apply any pressure to the engine oil sump. Damage to the sump will irreparably
damage the engine by:
blocking the strainer,
raising the oil level above maximum, with a risk of engine racing.
-1-
Note:
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before
carrying out any repair(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine: Precautions
the repair) .
for
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Position the engine on the
equipment: Use ) .
component support(see
10A, Engine
Remove the con rod - piston assemblies(see 10A, Engine
Removal - Refitting) .
and cylinder block assembly, Engine support
and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod:
Separate the con rod from the piston, if required by the check(see 10A, Engine
Piston - Con rod: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove the segments, if required by the check(see 10A, Engine
Removal - Refitting) .
and cylinder block assembly,
and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod:
Before any checks:
clean the part with surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products)
and dry using a compressed air nozzle,
check that the part does not have any scratches, any trace of impact or abnormal wear (if necessary replace the
part).
2. PISTON
1- PISTON IDENTIFICATION
1)PISTON MARKINGS
-2-
(1 ) : Date of manufacture
(2 ) : Gudgeon pin height class which corresponds to the height between the gudgeon pin and the piston
crown
(3 ) : Modification in production suffix
(4 ) : Piston fitting direction towards the flywheel
(5 ) : Piston axis of symmetry
(6 ) : Axis of the gudgeon pin hole
-3-
2)GUDGEON PIN HEIGHT CATEGORY
PISTON WITHOUT GUDGEON PIN BRONZE RING
PISTON WITH GUDGEON PIN BRONZE RING
-4-
(H1) gudgeon pin height
(7) gudgeon pin bronze ring
Note:
There are two types of piston:
piston without gudgeon pin bronze ring,
piston with gudgeon pin bronze ring.
The gudgeon pin bronze ring cannot be replaced.
-5-
Diameter of gudgeon
pin D = 30 mm
Diameter of gudgeon
pin D = 32 mm
Engine type
Piston
category
25/06/2007
Gudgeon
pin height in
mm
47.895 to
47.937
-
-
B
up until
Piston
category
A
M9R
700-740-742-746-780-782-784
Gudgeon
pin height in
mm
47.938 to
47.979
-
-
C
47.980 to
48.021
-
-
D
48.022 to
48.063
-
-
E
48.064 to
48.105
-
-
-6-
F
-
-
H
47.979 to
48.020
-
-
48.021 to
48.062
-
-
48.063 to
48.105
-
-
-
-
A
47.86 to
47.90
-
M9T
670-672-676-678-680-686-690-692694-696-698-700-702-870-872-876-880-882890-892-896-898
47.937 to
47.978
K
11/05/2006
-
J
up until
-
G
M9R
720-721-722-724-760-761
47.895 to
47.936
-
B
47.90 to
47.94
-
-
C
47.94 to
47.98
-
-
D
47.99 to
48.03
-
-
E
48.03 to
48.07
-7-
-
47.90 to
47.94
-
G
47.94 to
47.98
-
-
H
47.98 to
48.02
-
-
J
48.02 to
48.06
-
-
K
48.06 to
48.10
-
-
R
47.90 to
47.94
-
M9R
610-615-630-692-804-814-815-817820-824-828-839-844-846-850-854-855-856857-858-859-862-864-865-866
F
M9R
700-721-722-724-740-742-744-746748-754-756-760-761-762-763-780-782-784786-788-800-802-803-805-806-808-809-811812-816-830-832-833-834-835-836-838-845849
-
-
S
47.94 to
47.98
-
-
T
47.98 to
48.02
-
-
U
48.02 to
48.06
-
-
X
48.06 to
48.10
-8-
Note:
For a 30 mmdiameter gudgeon pin, there is no longer available a con rod in aftersale.
Only con rods for a 32 mmdiameter gudgeon pin are available.
When replacing a piston or a con rod corresponding to a
30 mmdiameter
gudgeon pin by a
32
mm diameter
gudgeon pin, apply the fallowing method :
order a set of 4 con rods,
mesure the height of the crankpin for the 4 cylindres(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block
assembly , Piston - Con rod: Check) ,
calculate the height of the gudgeon pin(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly,
Piston - Con rod: Check) ,
32 mmdiameter gudgeon pin after
value of the 32 mmdiameter gudgeon
replace the 4 pistons by ordering new pistons with a
the piston pin height has been determined, take the
pin, piston category F, G, H, J, K.
2- PISTON CHECK
1)GUDGEON PIN CHECK
-9-
Check that the pin slides freely in the piston before checking it.
Measure using an external micrometer:
the diameter(X3) of the gudgeon pin,
the length(L4) of the gudgeon pin.
Gudgeon pin
diameter X3
in mm
Engine type
M9R
700-740-742-746-780-782-784
M9R
720-721-722-724-760-761
up until 25/06/2006
Gudgeon pin
length L4 in
mm
30 +0 /
-0.005
65 +0 / -0.3
up until 11/05/2006
M9T 672-676-678-680-686-690-692-694-696-698-700-702-870670872-876-880-882-890-892-896-898
M9R
610-615-630-692-700-721-722-724-740-742-744-746-748-75432 +0 / -0.01 65 +0 / -0.3
756-760-761-762-763-780-782-784-786-788-800-802-803-804-805-806808-809-811-812-814-815-816-817-820-824-828-830-832-833-834-835836-838-839-844-845-846-849-850-854-855-856-857-858-859-862-864865-866
2)CHECKING THE PISTON DIAMETER
- 10 -
Measure using an
external micrometerthe
piston diameter(X6 ) along dimension(X5 ) = 44 mm.
Engine type
Piston
diameter X6
(mm)
M9R 610, 615, 630, 692, 700, 721, 722, 724, 740, 742, 744, 746, 748, 754, 756, 760,
761, 762, 763, 780, 782, 784, 786, 788, 800, 802, 803, 804, 805, 806, 808, 809, 811,
812, 814, 815, 816, 817, 820, 824, 828, 830, 832, 833, 834, 835, 836, 838, 839, 844,
845, 846, 849, 850, 854, 855, 856, 857, 858, 859, 862, 864, 865, 866
83.79 to
83.80
M9T 670, 672, 676, 678, 680, 686, 690, 692, 694, 696, 698,700,702, 870, 872, 876,
880, 882, 890, 892, 898, 896
84.79 to
84.80
3)CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS
- 11 -
Measure using an external micrometerthe ring thickness:
2.5 mm(for information,
2 mm- 0.03- 0.01,
2 mm- 0.03- 0.01.
compression ring(X7) =
sealing ring(X8) =
scraper ring(X9) =
cannot be measured),
- 12 -
X62, M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Measure using an external micrometerthe ring thickness:
2 mm(for information, cannot be measured),
sealing ring(X8) = 1,75 mm- 0.03- 0.01,
scraper ring(X9) = 2 mm- 0.03- 0.01.
compression ring(X7) =
4)CHECKING THE CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE PISTON AND RING
- 13 -
(A) Set of shims incorrectly positioned
(B) Set of shims correctly positioned
5)CHECKING PLAY AT THE RING SECTION
- 14 -
Place the piston ring(8 ) to be checked in the cylinder.
Push the ring to the centre of the cylinder using the piston.
Measure the ring end clearance using a set of feeler gauges:
0.23 to 0.38 mm,
0.6 to 0.8 mm,
0.25 to 0.50 mm.
compression - clearance of
sealing - clearance of
scraper - clearance of
- 15 -
X62, M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Place the piston ring(8 ) to be checked in the cylinder.
Push the ring to the centre of the cylinder using the piston.
Measure the ring end clearance using a set of feeler gauges:
0.25 to 0.40 mm,
sealing - clearance of 0.7 to 0.9 mm,
scraper - clearance of 0.2 to 0.4 mm.
compression - clearance of
3. CON ROD
1- IDENTIFICATION OF THE CON ROD
- 16 -
The marking includes:
big end's diameter value(1) ,
day(2) ,
weighty class(3) ,
year(4) ,
team(5) ,
centre-to-centre distance(6) ,
class of centre-to-centre distance(7) .
- 17 -
Con rod category
Diameter of the big end (mm)
A
56.587
B
56.588
C
56.589
D
56.590
E
56.591
F
56.592
G
56.593
H
56.594
I
56.595
J
56.596
K
56.597
L
56.598
M
56.599
N
56.600
O
56.601
P
56.602
- 18 -
Q
56.603
R
56.604
S
56.605
T
56.606
- 19 -
(X10 ) centre-to-centre distance between the big end and small end
The first figure of the marking(9 ) corresponds to the class of centre-to-centre distance between the big
end and the small end.
Engine type
Class of centre-to-centre distance
Centre-to-centre distance X10 (mm)
1
143.47 ± 0.01
2
143.48 ± 0.01
3*
143.50 ± 0.01
4
143.51 ± 0.01
4
157.25 ± 0.02
M9R
M9T
Note:
*The Parts Department only sells type 3 con rods in sets of four con rods.
2- CHECKING THE CON ROD
1)CHECKING THE DIAMETERS OF THE BIG END AND SMALL END
- 20 -
Measure using an
internal micrometerthe
diameter(X11 ) of the small end.
Engine type
Diameter X11 (mm)
M9R
32.02 ± 0.01 mm
M9T
32.02 ± 0.01 mm
- 21 -
Note:
The replacement of the big end ring is not authorised.
2)CHECK THE THICKNESS OF THE BIG END
Measure using an
external micrometerthe
thickness(X13 ) of the big end flank = 24 ± 0.03 mm.
- 22 -
3- IDENTIFICATION OF THE CON ROD BEARING SHELLS
- 23 -
Upper bearing shell class
Thickness (mm) (X15 )
Width (mm) (X16 )
Identification
1
1.768 to 1.772
19.00 to 19.25
Yellow
2
1.772 to 1.776
19.00 to 19.25
Blue
3
1.776 to 1.780
19.00 to 19.25
Red
4
1.780 to 1.784
19.00 to 19.25
Black
Lower bearing shell class
Thickness (mm) (X15 )
Width (mm) (X16 )
Identification
1
1.770 to 1.774
18.75 to 19.00
Yellow
2
1.774 to 1.778
18.75 to 19.00
Blue
3
1.778 to 1.782
18.75 to 19.00
Red
4
1.782 to 1.786
18.75 to 19.00
Black
4- CHECKING THE DIAMETRIC CLEARANCE OF THE BIG ENDS
- 24 -
Cut pieces of
radial play measuring tape.
Insert the wire(10 ) into the axis of the crankshaft crankpins (avoiding the bearing lubrication holes).
Note:
Do not rotate the con rod or crankshaft during the following steps.
Refit the con rod - piston assembly(see 10A, Engine
Refitting) .
and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Removal -
- 25 -
Remove the con rod - piston assembly(see 10A, Engine
- Refitting) .
and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Removal
Measure the flattening of the cable which must be between 0.05 and 0.1 mmusing the printed pin
gauge on the wrapping paper(11 ) of the cable.
Clean off of any remaining parts of the measuring wire on the crankshaft and bearing shells.
5- DETERMINATION OF THE THICKNESS CLASS OF THE CON ROD BEARING SHELL
- 26 -
Note:
Any clearances of the crankshaft crankpin outside the tolerances can cause engine
damage.
When replacing the crankshaft, con rods or con rod bearing shells, always use the following method to
identify the con rod bearing shell thickness classto refit on each con rod:
Determine:
the diameter category of the crankpin(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Crankshaft: Check ) ,
the piston crown diameter class(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) .
Determine the thickness class of the upper and lower con rod bearing shells to refit on the con rod using
the following table:
LOWER BEARING SHELL THICKNESS CATEGORY
- 27 -
Con rod class
A
B
C
D
E
A
F
N
O
P
Q
R
S
N
R
B
N
R
B
N
R
B
R
B
J
R
B
J
T
N
B
I
O
M
R
H
N
L
N
B
G
M
K
R
F
L
J
N
B
E
K
I
R
D
Crankpin
H
R
B
C
G
R
B
J
R
B
J
R
B
J
R
B
J
R
B
- 28 -
P
Q
R
S
T
U
J
B
J
B
J
B
J
B
J
B
J
UPPER BEARING SHELL THICKNESS CATEGORY
- 29 -
B
Con rod class
A
B
A
C
D
E
F
J
K
L
M
R
N
O
P
R
E
F
B
N
R
B
R
B
R
B
J
N
R
B
N
N
R
B
M
N
R
B
L
N
R
B
K
T
N
R
J
S
N
R
I
R
N
R
H
Q
N
D
O
I
N
C
Crankpin
H
R
B
G
G
R
B
- 30 -
R
P
Q
R
S
J
B
J
R
B
J
R
B
J
T
U
R
B
J
B
J
B
Bearing shell colour mark:
B = Blue
R = Red
J = Yellow
N = Black
6- CHECKING THE LATERAL PLAY OF THE CON ROD
- 31 -
Use a set of feeler gaugesto check that the clearance(J2 ) between the con rod and the crankshaft is
between 0.02 and 0.48 mm.
4. DETERMINATION OF THE GUDGEON PIN HEIGHT CLASS
When replacing the con rods, crankshaft or cylinder block always identify the piston pin height classto
guarantee the piston protrusion in relation to the cylinder block remains within the tolerances, before
refitting the piston - con rod assemblies.
- 32 -
Note:
A piston protrusion outside the tolerances in relation to the cylinder block can lead to:
-an engine malfunction (incorrect start, pollution, poor performance),
- engine damage (piston in contact with the cylinder head or valves).
1- MEASURING THE PROTRUSION USING THE GAUGE OF THE MOT. 1799 IN RELATION TO THE CYLINDER HEAD FACE OF THE CYLINDER BLOCK
- 33 -
- 34 -
(H) = distance between the crankshaft crankpin at Top Dead Centre and the cylinder head face of the cylinder block
(L) = length of the depth gauge (12) of Mot. 1799
(X) = protrusion or retraction of the depth gauge in relation to the cylinder head face of the cylinder block
Degrease the crankshaft crankpins and the upper surface of the cylinder block.
Insert the depth gauge(12 ) of theDepth gauge for measuring the height of crankpins M9R engine.(Mot.
1799 ) in the dummy piston(13 ) of theDepth gauge for measuring the height of crankpins M9R engine.
(Mot. 1799 ) (position the light on the depth gauge opposite the locking bolt(14 ) ).
Tighten the locking bolt.
Check that the depth gauge slides freely in the dummy piston.
Move the crankshaft crankpins of cylinders 1 and 4 to Top Dead Centre.
Place:
the " depth gauge - dummy piston " assembly in cylinder No. 1 (gauge in contact with the crankshaft crankpin),
the dial gauge support(15) of theDepth gauge for measuring the height of crankpins.(Mot. 1319 ) on the dummy
piston,
the dial gauge(16) of theDepth gauge for measuring the height of crankpins.(Mot. 1319 ) on the support,
the " support - dial gauge " assembly at the centre of the depth gauge at(C) .
Look for the top lifting point of the crankpin (Top Dead Centre) using the dial gauge.
Calibrate the dial gauge to zero setting the mid-point between the points(A) and (B) on the cylinder block.
Move the dial gauge support to the centre of the depth gauge at(C) .
Note the value(X) of cylinder 1.
Repeat the previous measurement operations for cylinder No. 4.
Note the value(X) of cylinder 4.
Bring the crankshaft crankpin for cylinder No. 2 to top dead centre.
Place:
the " depth gauge - dummy piston " assembly in cylinder No. 2 (gauge in contact with the crankshaft crankpin),
the support - dial gauge assembly onto the dummy piston.
Look for the top lifting point of the crankpin (Top Dead Centre) using the dial gauge.
Repeat the previous measurement operations for cylinders 2 and 3.
Note the values(X) of cylinders 2 and 3.
- 35 -
2- CALCULATING THE HEIGHT OF THE CRANKPIN
Calculate the crankpin heights H using the following formula:
H=L-X
For L, note the value
indicatedon
the depth gauge.
For example:
L = 166.01 mm,
protrusion of the depth gauge for cylinder No. 1 X = 0.98 mm,
H = 166.01 - 0.98 = 165.03 mm.
value indicated on the gauge:
Note:
Where there is a recess of the depth gauge in relation to the cylinder block, apply the
formula:
H=L+X
3- CALCULATING THE GUDGEON PIN HEIGHT
- 36 -
Calculate the gudgeon pin heights(X14 ) using the following formula:
H14 = H + V - E
H=
crankpin height in mmcalculated previously.
= variable in mmdepending on thickness of the crushed cylinder head gasket (see the following
formulas).
V
= centre-to-centre distance in mmbetween the big end and small end (use the nominal value
corresponding to the classes indicatedon the con rod (see III Con rod - 1 Con rod identification).
E
- 37 -
X43, M9R, 756 804 811 817 824 839 844 846(756 OR 804 OR 811 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (830 OR
832 OR 833 OR 834 OR 835 OR 836 OR 838 OR 850 OR 855 OR 856 OR 862 OR 864 OR 865 OR 866) AND (670 OR 672 OR
676 OR 678 OR 680 OR 686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 870 OR 872 OR 876 OR 880 OR 882 OR 890 OR
892 OR 896 OR 898) AND (760 OR 762 OR 763) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815 OR
858 OR 859) AND (630 OR 692) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (754 OR 800 OR 802 OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR
809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR 858) AND (610 OR 615)
Note:
With cylinder head gasket 1.15 mm(thickness of the crushed gasket)(see
10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Check) .
H14 = H + 26.45 - E
For example:
crankpin height calculated for cylinder No. 1:
H = 165.03 mm,
centre-to-centre distance of the original con rod ( marking class 2) of cylinder No.1:
Con rod - 1 Con rod identification),
E = 143.48 mm(see
III
1.17 mm,
H14 = 165.03 + 26.47 - 143.48 = 48.02 mm,
cylinder head gasket with crushed thickness of
Refer to the table of the gudgeon pin height classes (see II Piston - 1 Piston identification - B - Gudgeon pin height
class ) to determine the piston class of cylinder no. 1 (corresponds to piston class C).
5. CHECKING THE PISTON PROTRUSION
When replacing the con rods, crankshaft, cylinder block or piston, always check that the protrusion
piston in relation to the face cylinder head of the cylinder block remains within the tolerances, after
the piston - con rod assemblies.
of every
refitting
Note:
A piston protrusion outside the tolerances in relation to the cylinder head face of the
cylinder block can lead to:
-an engine malfunction (incorrect start, pollution, poor performance),
- engine damage (piston in contact with the cylinder head or valves).
- 38 -
- 39 -
Degrease the piston crowns.
Position the support plate(17 ) of thePressure plate for measuring piston liner protrusion.(Mot.
the straightedge(19 ) on the cylinder block.
252-01) or
Note:
The measurement is taken along the longitudinal axis of the crankshaft to eliminate play caused by the
movement of the piston.
- 40 -
Fit the Dial gauge support.(Mot. 251-01) - dial gauge assembly(18 ) on the support plate(17 ) or the " dial
gauge - support " assembly(20 ) on the ruler(19 ) .
Move the pistons of cylinders No. 1 and No. 4 to Top Dead Centre.
Position the dial gauge feeler against the piston at(A) .
Look for the top lifting point of the piston (Top Dead Centre) using the dial gauge.
Note:
The dial gauge feeler must not be in a valve clearance area.
Calibrate the dial gauge to zero.
Position the dial gauge feeler against the cylinder block at(B) .
Check the piston protrusion value which should be between:
X43, M9R, 756 804 811 817 824 839 844 846(756 OR 804 OR 811 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (830 OR
832 OR 833 OR 834 OR 835 OR 836 OR 838 OR 850 OR 855 OR 856 OR 862 OR 864 OR 865 OR 866) AND (670 OR 672 OR
676 OR 678 OR 680 OR 686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 870 OR 872 OR 876 OR 880 OR 882 OR 890 OR
892 OR 896 OR 898) AND (760 OR 762 OR 763) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815 OR
858 OR 859) AND (630) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (754 OR 800 OR 802 OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR
814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR 858) AND (610 OR 615)
Note:
With cylinder head gasket 1.15 mm(thickness of the crushed gasket)(see
10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Check) .
0.31 to 0.47 mm.
Repeat the previous operations for cylinders No 2 and No. 3.
6. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the piston rings (if removed)(see 10A, Engine
Refitting) .
and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Removal -
- 41 -
Assemble the con rod and the piston (if separated)(see 10A, Engine
rod: Removal - Refitting) .
Refit the con rod - piston assemblies(see 10A, Engine
Refitting) .
Remove the engine from
equipment: Use ) .
component support(see
and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con
and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Removal -
10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine support
Refit the engine - gearbox assembly.
Repair-10x03x02-02x58-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 42 -
PISTON - CON ROD: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Flywheel locking tool.
Mot. 1431
Equipment required
component support
piston ring compressor
indelible pencil
compressed air nozzle
parts always to be replaced:
con rod cap bolts
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
It is strictly forbidden to apply any pressure to the engine oil sump. Damage to the sump will irreparably
damage the engine by:
blocking the strainer,
raising the oil level above maximum, with a risk of engine racing.
Note:
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before
carrying out any repair(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine: Precautions
the repair) .
-1-
for
Remove:
the engine - gearbox assembly,
the EGR pipe at the EGR cooler inlet.
Position the engine on the
equipment: Use ) .
component support(see
10A, Engine
Drain the engineEngine oil: Draining - Refilling .
Remove:
the accessories beltAccessories belt: Removal - Refitting ,
the coolant pumpCoolant pump: Removal - Refitting .
-2-
and cylinder block assembly, Engine support
Immobilise the flywheel or the drive plate while fitting theFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) on the
cylinder block.
Remove:
the crankshaft accessories pulleyCrankshaft accessories pulley: Removal - Refitting ,
the crankshaft seal on the timing sideCrankshaft seal on timing end: Removal - Refitting ,
the timing chain(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting) .
X43, M9R, 804 811 817 824 839 844 846(804 OR 811 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (678 OR 680 OR 696
OR 880 OR 896 OR 898) AND (760 OR 762 OR 763) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815 OR
858 OR 859) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR 802 OR 803 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 824
OR 828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR 858) AND (610 OR 615)
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust gas pressure
sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Remove:
the damper valve,
depending on version, the turbocharger outlet catalytic pre-converter or catalytic converterCatalytic preconverter: Removal - Refitting orCatalytic converter: Removal - Refitting ,
the turbocharger oil pipesTurbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls),
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal
- Refitting ,
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting) ,
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) ,
the oil filter unitOil filter unit: Removal - Refitting .
Remove:
the clutch disc and pressure platePressure plate - Disc: Removal - Refitting (20A, Clutch),
the flywheelFlywheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the flywheel locking toolFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) .
Remove:
the gearbox side crankshaft sealCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting ,
the sumpLower cover: Removal - Refitting ,
the cylinder block base plate(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block base plate:
Removal - Refitting) .
Remove the oil pumpOil pump: Removal - Refitting .
-3-
2. PISTON - CON ROD ASSEMBLY REMOVAL OPERATION
1- OPERATION FOR REMOVING THE PISTON - CON ROD ASSEMBLY
-4-
CAUTION
Do not use a punch or an etching tool to mark the con rod caps to match their bodies,
to prevent incipient breakage of the con rod.
Use an indelible marker pen.
Mark the con rod bodies and caps in relation to the cylinders using an
end).
Remove:
the con rod cap bolts,
the con rod cap,
the con rod cap bearing shell.
Mark the bearing shell in relation to the con rod cap.
-5-
indelible
pencil(cylinder
1 timing
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during every operation.
Remove the " con rod - piston " assembly through the cylinder head side of the cylinder block.
-6-
Note:
Do not damage the piston base cooling jet nozzles(4 ) when extracting the " con rod piston " assembly.
Replacing the piston base cooling jet is not authorised.
Remove the con rod body bearing shell.
Mark the bearing in relation to the con rod body.
Repeat the above operations on the other cylinders.
2- PISTON RING REMOVAL OPERATION
Operation only to be carried out when replacing or checking the piston rings(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) .
-7-
Remove the piston rings using a
piston ring compressor.
Note:
Take care not to damage the piston when removing the rings. Do not open the rings
too much as they risk becoming damaged.
If reusing, mark the piston rings in relation to the piston.
-8-
3- OPERATION TO SEPARATE THE CON ROD AND PISTON
Operation only to be carried out when replacing or checking the piston or con rod(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) .
Mark the piston in relation to the cylinder using a
indelible
pencil.
Remove the locking spring ring from the gudgeon pin using a flat screwdriver (apply pressure in the
piston groove (5 ) ).
Remove the gudgeon pin by hand.
Mark the pin in relation to the piston using an
indelible
-9-
pencil.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
con rod cap bolts
.
Note:
Do not knock or lean against the cap mating faces and the con rod body to prevent
damaging the con rod.
Clean the " piston - con rod " assembly with surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Dry the " piston - con rod " assembly using a
consumables for the repair
compressed air nozzle.
WARNING
Wear goggles with side protectors for this operation.
1- PISTON RING REFITTING OPERATION
Operation only to be carried out when replacing or checking the piston rings(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) .
- 10 -
Refit the piston rings using a
piston ring compressor.
Note:
Respect the fitting direction of the piston rings by positioning the
the piston head.
TOPmarking
towards
Position the space in the " top compression ring " (6 ) opposite the space in the " second compression
ring " (7 ) (same axis as gudgeon pin).
- 11 -
Position the space in the " oil ring " (8 ) opposite the space in the " second compression ring " (7 ) (same
axis as gudgeon pin).
2- PISTON AND CON ROD ASSEMBLY OPERATION
Operation only to be carried out when replacing or checking the piston or con rod(see 10A, Engine and
cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) .
When replacing con rods or the piston, identify the new piston class to fit on the engine by calculating
the height(h) of the gudgeon pin(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) to
- 12 -
guarantee a piston protrusion in relation to the cylinder block within the tolerances.
Note:
A piston protrusion outside the tolerances in relation to the cylinder head face of the
cylinder block can lead to:
-an engine malfunction (incorrect start, pollution, poor performance),
- engine damage (piston in contact with the cylinder head or valves).
- 13 -
Lubricate gudgeon pin with engine oil.
Position the con rod in relation to the piston (piston marking(9 ) " V " is opposite the machined bosses
(10 ) on the big end).
Engage the pin in the piston and in the small end.
Note:
Check that the gudgeon pin slides and rotates easily in the piston and the small end.
- 14 -
Refit the locking spring ring to the gudgeon pin using a flat screwdriver (apply pressure in the groove
(11 ) ).
Note:
Position the opening in the locking spring ring towards the piston crown.
3- FITTING THE CON ROD BEARING SHELLS
- 15 -
Note:
Do not knock or lean against the cap mating faces and the con rod body to prevent
damaging the con rod.
Place:
the con rod body on the bench,
the con rod upper bearing shell (width =
19 mm)
on the bench.
Secure the flush bearing shell of the con rod body mating face on side(12 ) and push from the
opposite side until the con rod body mating face is flush.
Place:
the con rod cap on the bench,
the con rod lower bearing shell (width =
19 mm)
on the bench.
Secure the flush bearing shell of the con rod cap mating face on side(13 ) and push from the other
side until the con rod cap mating face is flush.
- 16 -
X62, M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Note:
Do not knock or lean against the cap mating faces and the con rod body to prevent
damaging the con rod.
Place:
the con rod body on the bench,
the con rod upper bearing shell (width =
20,1 mm)
on the bench.
Secure the flush bearing shell of the con rod body mating face on side(16 ) and push from the
opposite side until the con rod body mating face is flush.
Place:
the con rod cap on the bench,
the con rod lower bearing shell (width =
20,1 mm)
- 17 -
on the bench.
Secure the flush bearing shell of the con rod cap mating face on side(17 ) and push from the other
side until the con rod cap mating face is flush.
Measure the distance(X) between the edge of the bearing shell and the wall of the con rod body at
points (A) , (B) and (C) .
- 18 -
Centre the bearing shell on the con rod body.
Adjust the position of the bearing shell at points(A) , (B) and (C) using a set of feeler gauges (thickness
of the gauge = X: 2 ± 0.1 mm).
Repeat the previous operations on the remaining con rod bodies and caps.
2. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PISTON - CON ROD ASSEMBLY
Lubricate with engine oil:
the cylinder block barrels,
the piston rings,
the piston skirts,
the crankshaft crankpins.
Orient the piston rings on the gudgeon pin axis (see
I Refitting preparation, 1-Piston ring refitting operation).
- 19 -
Check that the piston rings are correctly engaged in the piston grooves.
Place the piston in the piston mounting ring (allow the piston skirt to protrude by approximately 1 cm).
Compress the piston rings by tightening the bolt(18 ) .
Check that the pistons correspond to the cylinder block barrels (No. 1 timing end).
Place the " con rod - piston " assembly in the cylinder.
- 20 -
Note:
Position the point of the " V " (19 ) engraved on the piston towards the flywheel end.
Gradually insert the " con rod - piston " assembly in the cylinder (
the piston base cooling jet).
Position the big end on the crankshaft crankpin.
- 21 -
avoid any contact between the con rod and
Refit the con rod cap, ensuring that the con rod caps and bodies correspond.
Screw on without tightening the
newcon
rod cap bolts.
Note:
Check that the con rod cap and body are in contact before tightening the bolts.
Torque tighten to angle the conrod cap bolts25 N.m + 55 ± 6 .
Check that the rotating parts turns freely, with no resistance.
Repeat the previous operations for the remaining cylinders.
- 22 -
When replacing the con rod or piston, always check the piston protrusion in relation to the cylinder
block (see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Piston - Con rod: Check) .
Note:
A piston protrusion outside the tolerances in relation to the cylinder block can lead to:
-an engine malfunction (incorrect start, pollution, poor performance),
- engine damage (piston in contact with the cylinder head or valves).
- 23 -
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the oil pumpOil pump: Removal - Refitting .
Refit:
the cylinder block base plate(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder block base plate:
Removal - Refitting) ,
the sumpLower cover: Removal - Refitting ,
the gearbox side crankshaft sealCrankshaft seal, gearbox end: Removal - Refitting .
Refit:
the flywheelFlywheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the clutch disc and pressure platePressure plate - Disc: Removal - Refitting (20A, Clutch).
Refit:
the oil filter unitOil filter unit: Removal - Refitting ,
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) ,
the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting) ,
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal
- Refitting ,
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls),
the turbocharger oil pipesTurbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
depending on version, the turbocharger outlet catalytic pre-converter or catalytic converterCatalytic preconverter: Removal - Refitting orCatalytic converter: Removal - Refitting ,
the damper valve.
X43, M9R, 804 811 817 824 839 844 846(804 OR 811 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (678 OR 680 OR 696
OR 880 OR 896 OR 898) AND (760 OR 762 OR 763) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815 OR
858 OR 859) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR 802 OR 803 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 824
OR 828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR 858) AND (610 OR 615)
Refit the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Refit:
the timing chain(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting) ,
the crankshaft seal on the timing sideCrankshaft seal on timing end: Removal - Refitting .
- 24 -
Immobilise the flywheel or the drive plate while fitting theFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) on the
cylinder block.
Refit:
the crankshaft accessories pulleyCrankshaft accessories pulley: Removal - Refitting ,
the coolant pumpCoolant pump: Removal - Refitting ,
the accessories beltAccessories belt: Removal - Refitting .
Remove:
the toolFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) ,
the engine from the component support(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine support
equipment: Use) .
Refit:
the EGR pipe at the EGR cooler inlet,
the engine - gearbox assembly.
Top up the engine oilEngine oil: Draining - Refilling .
Repair-10x03x02-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 25 -
PLASTIC MATERIAL BODYWORK COMPONENT: REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
1. PROCEDURES FOR REPAIRING PLASTICS
WARNING
Always wear protective gear (gloves, goggles and breathing masks).
Use extra ventilation source.
Use a supplied air mask if the area is not ventilated.
1- SPECIAL NOTES FOR REPAIRING PLASTICS
Procedure 1
: repairing a
deep scratchon
a plastic chassis element.
Procedure 2
: repairing a
crackon
Procedure 3
: repairing a
holeon
Procedure 4
: repairing a
mounting bracketon
Procedure 5
:
partial
replacementof
an element by cuting.
Procedure 6
:
partial
replacementof
an element by cuting with patcht drilling.
a plastic chassis element.
a plastic chassis element.
a plastic chassis element.
2. PROCEDURE 1
Repairing a deep scratch on a plastic chassis element
1- BONDING METHOD
-1-
Note:
Before any repairs, check the reparability of components made from plastic materials.
(see 50A, General
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components: Description)
.
(see 50A, General
information, Plastic material bodywork component: Precautions for the repair)
.
Wash the component in soapy water and rinse in clean water.
-2-
Clean the area to be repaired with a LINT-FREE CLOTHsoaked in
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Wipe the area with a clean, dry
Consumables - Products).
ANTISTATIC THINNERVehicle: Parts and
LINT-FREE CLOTHVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
Surface the scratch using the orbital sander with a
P 150.
-3-
(04B,
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the cleaner included in the
Apply the
adhesive primerincluded
Leave the adhesive
Prepare the
primerto
in the
dry (see
Plastic repair kitto
the damaged area.
product technical sheet).
bi-component repair mastic(see
components: Description )
Plastic repair kit.
50A, General
.
-4-
information, Products for plastic material bodywork
Apply the
bi-component repair masticto
the component.
-5-
Smooth using a mastic block creating a dome shape.
Leave the bi-component
repair masticto
dry (see
product technical sheet).
-6-
Surface with a
P 150then
finish with a
P 240.
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the cleaner included in the
-7-
Plastic repair kit.
If necessary, apply a finishing mastic(see
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Sand the
finishing masticwith
a
P 150then
product technical sheet) Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
finish with a
-8-
P 240.
Follow the paint application procedure according to the material concerned:
SMC bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A, Paint application
procedure on plastic),
Polypropylene / polyethylene bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A,
Paint application procedure on plastic),
Noryl bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A, Paint application
procedure on plastic),
ABS bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A, Paint application
procedure on plastic).
2- RESIN EPOXY METHOD
-9-
Note:
Method apply only on RTM component.
Chamfering 20 to 30mm around the crack using the orbital sander with a
- 10 -
P 150.
Sand the paint around the zone to be repaired using the orbital sander with a
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the
Prepare the Epoxy
Description ) .
resin(see
50A, General
P 150
Acetone(see product techincal sheet).
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components:
- 11 -
Wet the chamfer using à brush soaked with
Epoxy resin.
- 12 -
Add short fibres with resin(
50 % maxi.).
Apply the mixture using a spatula.
Note:
After 15 minutes,accelerate the hardening in drying oven or in infrared drying device(
maxi at a distance of 70 cm).
- 13 -
Sand using the orbital sander with a
Apply if necessary a
P 80then
with a
P180and P240.
finishing mastic(see product technical sheet). (see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the
repair )
Sand the
finishing masticusing
a
P 150then
finish using a
3. PROCEDURE 2
Repairing cracks on a plastic chassis element.
- 14 -
P240.
1- BONDING METHOD
Note:
Before any repairs, check the reparability of components made from plastic materials.
(see 50A, General
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components: Description)
.
(see 50A, General
information, Plastic material bodywork component: Precautions for the repair)
.
Wash the component in soapy water and rinse in clean water.
- 15 -
Clean the area with a clean, dry
Consumables - Products).
LINT-FREE CLOTHVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
(04B,
Wipe the area with a clean, dry
Consumables - Products).
LINT-FREE CLOTHVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
(04B,
Drill the end of the crack using a 4 mmdrill bit to stop it spreading.
- 16 -
Extend the length of the crack by 2 mmusing an
angle grinderor
- 17 -
a sharp tool.
Chamfer the crack on the exterior side using an
abrasive pad.
angle grinderor
- 18 -
a
belt sanderequipped
with a P
120
Surface the interior and exterior areas to be repaired with a
- 19 -
P 150.
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the cleaner included in the
box.
Apply the
adhesive primerincluded
Leave the adhesive
primerto
in the
dry (see
plastic repair kitto
the interior and exterior areas.
product technical sheet).
- 20 -
plastic repair kit
Adjust a piece of
Prepare the
reinforcing film (cloth)suitable
bi-component repair mastic(see
components: Description )
for repairing the inside of the component.
50A, General
information, Products for plastic material bodywork
.
Extrude a narrow bead around the area to be repaired on the inside of the component and apply
reinforcing film (cloth).
- 21 -
Extrude a thick bead on the
reinforcing filmat
the crack.
- 22 -
Smooth using a spatula.
- 23 -
Extrude a thick bead in the chamfer on the exterior side.
- 24 -
Smooth using a spatula.
Leave the bi-component
repair masticto
Surface on the exterior side with a
dry (see
P 150then
product technical sheet).
finish with a
P 240.
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the cleaner included in the
- 25 -
Plastic repair kit.
If necessary, apply a finishing mastic(see
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Sand the
finishing masticwith
a
P 150then
product technical sheet) Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
finish with a
P 240.
- 26 -
Follow the paint application procedure according to the material concerned:
SMC bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A, Paint application
procedure on plastic),
Polypropylene / polyethylene bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A,
Paint application procedure on plastic),
Noryl bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A, Paint application
procedure on plastic),
ABS bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A, Paint application
procedure on plastic).
2- WELDING METHOD
- 27 -
Note:
Before any repairs, check the reparability of components made from plastic materials.
(see 50A, General
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components: Description)
.
(see 50A, General
information, Plastic material bodywork component: Precautions for the repair)
.
Wash the component in soapy water and rinse in clean water.
Clean the area to be repaired with a
LINT-FREE CLOTHsoaked
- 28 -
in
ANTISTATIC THINNERVehicle: Parts and
consumables for the repair
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Wipe the area with a clean, dry
Consumables - Products).
Strip the paint with a
LINT-FREE CLOTHVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
P 150over a width of
50 mm.
- 29 -
(04B,
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with a LINT-FREE CLOTHsoaked in
THINNER Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
ANTISTATIC
Wipe the area with a clean, dry
Consumables - Products).
(04B,
LINT-FREE CLOTHVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
Preheat the soldering iron.
- 30 -
Cut the stainless steel mesh wider at the start of the crack.
- 31 -
Adjust the stainless steel mesh according to the shape of the support.
- 32 -
Spot-weld the start of the crack with the tip of the soldering iron in order to maintain the shape.
- 33 -
Cool the spot weld, for two seconds, vigorously with the coolerVehicle: Parts and
(04B, Consumables - Products).
- 34 -
consumables for the repair
Repeat this operation along the length of the crack.
Cool each spot weld, for two seconds, vigorously with the coolerVehicle:
repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
- 35 -
Parts and consumables for the
Position the stainless steel mesh and hold it using a dedicated tool.
- 36 -
Spot-weld the stainless steel mesh.
Cool each spot weld, for two seconds, vigorously with the coolerVehicle:
repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
- 37 -
Parts and consumables for the
Enclose the stainless steel mesh in the plastic material along the length of the crack.
Cool the whole of the repaired area for two seconds, vigorously with the coolerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
- 38 -
Parts and
Weld the exterior part of the bumper.
- 39 -
Add material by preheating the welding rod with the tip of the soldering iron (except for
Polycarbonate type materials).
ABS, ASAand
Note:
For
ABS, ASAand
Polycarbonate,
fill the crack with the surrounding material
Cool the whole of the repaired area for two seconds, vigorously with the coolerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
- 40 -
Parts and
Surface with a P
80to P 150then
finish with a
P 240.
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with a LINT-FREE CLOTHsoaked in
THINNER Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
ANTISTATIC
Wipe the area with a clean, dry
Consumables - Products).
(04B,
LINT-FREE CLOTHVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
- 41 -
If necessary, apply a finishing mastic(see
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Sand the
finishing masticwith
a
P 150then
product technical sheet) Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
finish with a
P 240.
- 42 -
Follow the paint application procedure according to the material concerned:
Polypropylene / polyethylene bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A,
Paint application procedure on plastic),
ABS bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A, Paint application
procedure on plastic).
3- EPOXY RESINE METHOD
- 43 -
Note:
Method apply only on RTM component.
Open the crack to let a hole of 10 mmwide.
Chamfering between 30to
40 mmaround
the crack using the orbital sander with a
Sand the paint around the zone to be repaired using the orbital sander with a
- 44 -
P80.
P 150
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the
Align the borders of the component using a
screws.
Cut 2
strips of materialwith
plate pad(local
manufactured)and fix them with plate
repair length, first of 50mmwide and second of 100 mmwide.
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the
Prepare the Epoxy
Description ) .
Acetone(see product techincal sheet).
resin(see
50A, General
Acetone(see product techincal sheet).
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components:
- 45 -
Fit the
strip of materiel.
Soaked the component interior with
Epoxy resin.
Note:
After 15 minutes,accelerate the hardening in drying oven or in infrared drying device(
maxi at a distance of 70 cm).
Remove the plate
pads.
- 46 -
Cut a
stripcovering the chamfer.
Chamfering the screws holes.
Fit the strip soaking with resin.
- 47 -
Note:
Pay particular attention at output screw area and at strips junction reinforcement to
prevent the air bubbles form.
Add short fibres with resin(
50 % maxi.).
Apply the mixture using a spatula.
Note:
After 15 minutes,accelerate the hardening in drying oven or in infrared drying device(
maxi at a distance of 70 cm).
Sand using the orbital sander with a
Apply if necessary a
P 80then
with a
P180and P240.
finishing mastic(see product technical sheet). (see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the
repair )
Sand the
finishing masticusing
a
P 150then
finish using a
P240.
4. PROCEDURE 3
Repairing a hole on a plastic chassis element.
1- BONDING METHOD
Note:
Before any repairs, check the reparability of components made from plastic materials.
(see 50A, General
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components: Description)
.
(see 50A, General
information, Plastic material bodywork component: Precautions for the repair)
.
- 48 -
Wash the component in soapy water and rinse in clean water.
Clean the area to be repaired with a LINT-FREE CLOTHsoaked in
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Wipe the area with a clean, dry
Consumables - Products).
ANTISTATIC THINNERVehicle: Parts and
LINT-FREE CLOTHVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
- 49 -
(04B,
Chamfer on the exterior side using an
angle grinderor
a
- 50 -
belt sanderequipped
with a P
120abrasive
pad.
Surface the interior and exterior areas with the orbital sander using a
- 51 -
P 150.
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the cleaner included in the
box.
Apply the
adhesive primerincluded
Leave the adhesive
primerto
in the
dry (see
plastic repair kitto
the interior and exterior areas.
product technical sheet).
- 52 -
plastic repair kit
Adjust a piece of
Prepare the
reinforcing film (cloth)suitable
bi-component repair mastic(see
components: Description )
for repairing the inside of the component.
50A, General
information, Products for plastic material bodywork
.
Extrude a narrow bead around the areas to be repaired on the inside of the component and apply
reinforcing film (cloth).
- 53 -
Extrude a thick bead on the
reinforcing film (cloth)at
the hole.
- 54 -
Smooth using a spatula.
- 55 -
Extrude a thick bead on the
reinforcing film (cloth)at
the hole on the exterior.
- 56 -
Smooth using a spatula.
Leave the bi-component
repair masticto
dry (see
product technical sheet).
- 57 -
Surface on the exterior side with a
P 150then
finish with a
- 58 -
P 240.
If necessary, apply a finishing mastic(see
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Sand the
finishing masticwith
a
P 150then
product technical sheet) Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
finish with a
P 240.
- 59 -
Follow the paint application procedure according to the material concerned:
SMC bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A, Paint application
procedure on plastic),
Polypropylene / polyethylene bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A,
Paint application procedure on plastic),
ABS bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A, Paint application
procedure on plastic),
Noryl bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A, Paint application
procedure on plastic).
2- WELD METHOD
- 60 -
Note:
Before any repairs, check the reparability of components made from plastic materials.
(see 50A, General
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components: Description)
.
(see 50A, General
information, Plastic material bodywork component: Precautions for the repair)
.
Note:
This repair cannot be carried out on
ABS, ASAand
- 61 -
Polycarbonateplastics.
Wash the component in soapy water and rinse in clean water.
Clean the area to be repaired with a LINT-FREE CLOTHsoaked in
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Wipe the area with a clean, dry
Consumables - Products).
ANTISTATIC THINNERVehicle: Parts and
LINT-FREE CLOTHVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
- 62 -
(04B,
Strip the paint with a
P 150over a radius of
100 mm.
- 63 -
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with a LINT-FREE CLOTHsoaked in
THINNER Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
ANTISTATIC
Wipe the area with a clean, dry
Consumables - Products).
(04B,
LINT-FREE CLOTHVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
Preheat the soldering iron.
- 64 -
Cut the stainless steel mesh suitable for the repair.
- 65 -
Adjust the stainless steel mesh and hold it using a dedicated tool.
- 66 -
Spot weld around the edge of the stainless steel mesh frame with the tip of the soldering iron.
Note:
For noryl:
Add material around the edge of the hole by preheating the welding rod with the tip of
the soldering iron.
Enclose the stainless steel mesh in the additional material.
- 67 -
Cool each spot weld, for two seconds, vigorously with the coolerVehicle:
repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
- 68 -
Parts and consumables for the
Enclose the stainless steel frame in the plastic material.
Cool the whole of the repaired area for two seconds, vigorously with the coolerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
- 69 -
Parts and
Add material by preheating the welding rod with the tip of the soldering iron.
Cool the whole of the repaired area for two seconds, vigorously with the coolerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
- 70 -
Parts and
Add material to the exterior by preheating the welding rod with the tip of the soldering iron.
Cool the whole of the repaired area for two seconds, vigorously with the coolerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
- 71 -
Parts and
Surface with a P
80to P 150then
finish with a
P 240.
- 72 -
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with a LINT-FREE CLOTHsoaked in
ANTISTATIC THINNER Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Wipe the area with a clean, dry
Consumables - Products).
LINT-FREE CLOTHVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
- 73 -
(04B,
repair
If necessary, apply a finishing mastic(see
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Sand the
finishing masticwith
a
P 150then
product technical sheet) Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the
finish with a
- 74 -
P 240.
Follow the paint application procedure according to the material concerned:
Polypropylene / polyethylene bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A,
95A, Paint application procedure on plastic),
Noryl bodywork component: Preparation and paint range (Technical Note 592A, 95A, Paint application
procedure on plastic).
- 75 -
3- EPOXY RESINE METHOD
Note:
Method apply only on RTM component.
Chamfering around a radius between
30to 40 mmusing
- 76 -
the orbital sander with a
P80.
Sand the paint around the zone to be repaired using the orbital sander with a
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the
Cut a
P 150
Acetone(see product techincal sheet).
piece of materielrecovering the chamfering.
Prepare the Epoxy
Description ) .
resin(see
50A, General
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components:
- 77 -
Wet the chamfer with
Epoxy resin.
Position the reinforcement a poket.
Soak the reinforcement with
Epoxy resin.
Note:
After 15 minutes,accelerate the hardening in drying oven or in infrared drying device(
maxi at a distance of 70 cm).
- 78 -
Prepare the Epoxy
Description ) .
resin(see
50A, General
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components:
Add short fibres with resin and well mix.
Fill the pocket with mixture.
- 79 -
Note:
After 15 minutes,accelerate the hardening in drying oven or in infrared drying device(
maxi at a distance of 70 cm).
Sand using the orbital sander with a
Apply if necessary a
P 80then
with a
P180and P240.
finishing mastic(see product technical sheet). (see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for
the repair)
Sand the
finishing masticusing
a
P 150then
finish using a
P240.
5. PROCEDURE 4
Repairing a mounting bracket on a plastic chassis element
1- BONDING METHOD
Note:
Before any repairs, check the reparability of components made from plastic materials.
(see 50A, General
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components: Description)
.
(see 50A, General
information, Plastic material bodywork component: Precautions for the repair)
.
- 80 -
Chamfer the two sections of the mounting bracket on both sides using a
member .
Blast and clean the inside and outside of the component with the
grinder with an angular
cleanerincluded
in the
Plastic repair
kit box.
Apply the
component.
adhesive primerincluded
in the
Plastic repair kitbox
- 81 -
to the inside and outside of the
Leave the adhesive
Adjust a piece of
Prepare the
primerto
dry (see
product technical sheet).
reinforcing film (cloth)adapted
bi-component repair mastic(see
components: Description )
to repairing the internal and external faces.
50A, General
.
- 82 -
information, Products for plastic material bodywork
Maintain pressure on the two parts with pliers.
Extrude
bi-component repair masticbetween
Smooth the
bi-component repair masticon
Leave the bi-component
repair masticto
the two parts.
the internal and external faces.
dry (see
product technical sheet).
- 83 -
Surface the exterior side with a
P 150then
finish with a
Retouch the paintwork if necessary.
2- WELDING METHOD
- 84 -
P 240.
Note:
Before any repairs, check the reparability of components made from plastic materials.
(see 50A, General
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components: Description)
.
(see 50A, General
information, Plastic material bodywork component: Precautions for the repair)
.
Note:
This repair cannot be carried out on
ABS, ASAand
- 85 -
Polycarbonateplastics.
Wash the component in soapy water and rinse in clean water.
Clean the area to be repaired with a LINT-FREE CLOTHsoaked in
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Wipe the area with a clean, dry
Consumables - Products).
ANTISTATIC THINNERVehicle: Parts and
LINT-FREE CLOTHVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
- 86 -
(04B,
Strip the paint with
P 150on
the repair area.
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with a LINT-FREE CLOTHsoaked in
ANTISTATIC THINNER Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Wipe the area with a clean, dry
Consumables - Products).
LINT-FREE CLOTHVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
- 87 -
(04B,
Preheat the soldering iron.
Cut the stainless steel mesh according to the shape of the support.
Spot-weld with the tip of the soldering iron on the ends in order to hold the mounting bracket.
- 88 -
the
Cool each spot weld, for two seconds, vigorously with the coolerVehicle:
repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Position the stainless steel mesh and hold it using a dedicated tool.
- 89 -
Parts and consumables for
- 90 -
Enclose the stainless steel frame in the plastic material.
Cool the whole of the repaired area for two seconds, vigorously with the coolerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Add material by preheating the welding rod with the tip of the soldering iron.
- 91 -
Parts and
Cool the whole of the repaired area for two seconds, vigorously with the coolerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Surface with a P
80to P 150then
finish with a
Parts and
P 240.
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with a
- 92 -
LINT-FREE CLOTHsoaked
in
ANTISTATIC THINNER Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Adjust the shape of the part to return it to its original appearance.
Retouch the paintwork if necessary.
- 93 -
6. PROCEDURE 5
Partial replacement of an element by cuting.
Note:
Method apply only on RTM component.
Note:
The components are manufactured by the method referred to as " contact " .
The reparation is performed by the interne face of the component.
Cut the damaged component beyond the cracks.
Cut and adjust the new component.
Prepare a space from 5to
10mm
between the two components.
- 94 -
Chamfering the interne face of components on
100 mmwide.
- 95 -
Position the new component.
Hold the new component by the externe face using a
with plate screws.
Check the clearance and the flush fitting.
- 96 -
plate pad(local
manufactured)and fix them
Bond a masking tape on externe face on all reparation length.
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the
Cut a
Acetone(see product techincal sheet).
piece of materielrecovering the reparation assembly.
Prepare the Epoxy
resin(see
50A, General
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components:
- 97 -
Description )
.
Put the material strip by soaking with resin.
Note:
Pay particular attention at output screw area and at strips junction reinforcement to
prevent the air bubbles form.
- 98 -
Note:
After 15 minutes,accelerate the hardening in drying oven or in infrared drying device(
maxi at a distance of 70 cm).
Remove the pads.
Prepare the reinforcement strips(
material, cloth)by
- 99 -
cuting then in a growing order 10
to 15 mm
Note:
According with the component width, the reinforcement strips number is variable, the
purpose is to conserve the characteristic similar to the original.
Sand the zone to be repaired using the orbital sander with a
P 40
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the
Prepare the Epoxy
Description ) .
resin(see
50A, General
Acetone(see product techincal sheet).
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components:
- 100 -
Put the material strip by soaking with resin.
Pass the spiked roller.
- 101 -
Note:
After 15 minutes,accelerate the hardening in drying oven or in infrared drying device(
maxi at a distance of 70 cm).
Chamfering the components junction.
- 102 -
Countersink the screws holes.
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the
Prepare the Epoxy
Description ) .
resin(see
50A, General
Acetone(see product techincal sheet).
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components:
Add short fibres with resin and well mix.
- 103 -
Fill the chamfer and the holes using a spatula.
Note:
After 15 minutes,accelerate the hardening in drying oven or in infrared drying device(
maxi at a distance of 70 cm).
Apply if necessary a
finishing mastic(see product technical sheet). (see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for
the repair)
Sand the
finishing masticusing
a
P 150then
finish using a
P240.
7. PROCEDURE 6
Partial replacement of an element by cuting with patcht drilling.
Note:
Method apply only on RTM component.
Note:
The components are manufactured by the method referred to as " contact " .
The reparation is performed by the interne face of the component.
- 104 -
Cut the damaged component for facilitate the patcht drilling.
Cut and adjust the new component.
- 105 -
Drill the component on the vehicle.
Temporary fit on the vehicle the patch drilling with plate screws.
Position the new comonent on the vehicle.
- 106 -
Fit on the vehicle the patch drilling with plate screws.
If necessary hold the new components with locking pliers.
Check the new component position.
Remove all components.
- 107 -
Do the grooves(A) , in the intern al side of patch drilling for adjust to the curve of component on
the vehicle.
Drill the holes(B) with a 8 mmdiameter.
Countersink the holes fron external side.
Sand the zone to be repaired using the orbital sander with a
P 40
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the
Prepare the Epoxy
Description ) .
resin(see
50A, General
Acetone(see product techincal sheet).
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components:
- 108 -
Band the half way of patcht drillingand fit on the component on the vehicle using plate screws.
- 109 -
Band the second half way of patcht drilling.
Note:
After 15 minutes,accelerate the hardening in drying oven or in infrared drying device(
maxi at a distance of 70 cm).
- 110 -
Remove the plate screws.
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the
Prepare the Epoxy
Description ) .
resin(see
50A, General
Acetone(see product techincal sheet).
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components:
Apply the reinforcement by soaking of resin.
- 111 -
Note:
After 15 minutes,accelerate the hardening in drying oven or in infrared drying device(
maxi at a distance of 70 cm).
Sand the zone to be repaired using the orbital sander with a
P 40
Blow the component and clean the area to be repaired with the
Prepare the Epoxy
Description ) .
resin(see
50A, General
Acetone(see product techincal sheet).
information, Products for plastic material bodywork components:
Add short fibres with resin and well mix.
Apply the mixture on reparation zone.
- 112 -
Sand using the orbital sander with a
Apply if necessary a
P 80then
with a
P180and P240.
finishing mastic(see product technical sheet). (see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for
the repair)
Sand the
finishing masticusing
a
P 150then
finish using a
- 113 -
P240.
Repair-40x01x45x10-01x22-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 114 -
POWER TAKE-OFF ACTUATOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the
safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 21A, Manual
gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the clutch slave cylinder mounting bolts(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) .
Move the clutch slave cylinder mounting.
-1-
Remove the wiring bolts(1 ) .
Move aside the wiring.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Disconnect the power take-off actuator connector(2 ) .
Detache the power take-off actuator wiring(3 ) .
-3-
Undo the power take-off actuator bracket bolts(4 ) .
-4-
Tilt the power take-off actuator bracket(5 ) .
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the power take-off actuator,
the power take-off actuator seal.
-5-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the power take-off actuator seal.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x01x14x02-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
PROPULSION TRANSMISSION, EMISSION CONTROL EURO 04 WITH OBD(E04A-Euro 04 with OBD)
Illustration key: Description
(01D, Mechanical introduction).
Mark
Description
Information
1
Power-assisted steering fluid reservoir
2
Power-assisted steering return pipe
(see 36B,
Power assisted steering, Power-assisted steering pipes: Removal - Refitting)
3
Power-assisted steering pump
(see 36B,
Power assisted steering, Power-assisted steering pump: Removal - Refitting)
4
Power-assisted steering low pressure pipe
(see 36B,
Power assisted steering, Power-assisted steering pipes: Removal - Refitting)
5
Steering box
6
Power-assisted steering pipes
Steering box: Removal - Refitting
(see 36B,
-1-
Power assisted steering, Power-assisted steering pipes: Removal - Refitting)
PROPULSION TRANSMISSION, EMISSION CONTROL EURO 05 WITH OBD(E05A-Euro 05 with OBD)
Illustration key: Description
(01D, Mechanical introduction).
Mark
Description
Information
1
Power-assisted steering fluid reservoir
2
Power-assisted steering return pipe
(see 36B,
Power assisted steering, Power-assisted steering pipes: Removal - Refitting)
3
Power-assisted steering low pressure pipe
(see 36B,
Power assisted steering, Power-assisted steering pipes: Removal - Refitting)
4
Power-assisted steering pump
(see 36B,
Power assisted steering, Power-assisted steering pump: Removal - Refitting)
5
Power-assisted steering high pressure pipe
(see 36B,
Power assisted steering, Power-assisted steering pipes: Removal - Refitting)
6
Steering box
Steering box: Removal - Refitting
Repair-13x04x06-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING CIRCUIT: BLEEDING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
BLEEDING
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Raise the vehicle until the front wheels are lifted off the ground.
-1-
Fill the power-assisted steering fluid reservoir(1 ) .
Start the vehicle.
Top up the power-assisted steering fluid.
-2-
CAUTION
To prevent damaging the power-assisted steering system, do not keep the steering at
full lock.
Repeat the following operation three times:
turn the steering wheel to the left to lock the steering,
turn the steering wheel to the right to lock the steering.
Top up the power-assisted steering fluid.
CAUTION
The level must be between the " MIN " and " MAX " markings on the reservoir.
Repair-13x04x04-01x76-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING PUMP ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
oil recovery tray
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before
carrying out any repairSteering: Precautions for the repair .
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 36B, Power
assisted steering , Power-assisted steering assembly: Exploded view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove:
-1-
the front left-hand wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the front left-hand wheel arch linerFront wheel arch liner: Removal - Refitting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect:
the power-assisted steering pump power connector(1) ,
the power-assisted steering pump signal connector(2) ,
Position an
oil recovery trayunder
the power-assisted steering pump.
-2-
Clamp the power-assisted steering low-pressure pipe using the toolPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) (3 ) .
Move aside the power-assisted steering low-pressure pipe clip(4 ) using the toolRemote operation
pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) .
Disconnect the power-assisted steering low-pressure pipe from the power-assisted steering pump.
Drain the remaining oil of the power-assisted steering pump reservoir.
Fit blanking plugs.
Move aside the power-assisted steering low-pressure pipe.
-3-
Remove the power-assisted steering high-pressure pipe bolt(see 36B, Power
Power-assisted steering assembly: Exploded view ) .
assisted steering,
Disconnect the the power-assisted steering high-pressure pipe from the power-assisted steering pump
(see 36B, Power assisted steering, Power-assisted steering assembly: Exploded view) .
Remove (see 36B, Power assisted steering, Power-assisted steering assembly: Exploded view) :
the power-assisted steering pump assembly bolts,
the power-assisted steering pump assembly,
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit (see 36B, Power assisted steering, Power-assisted steering assembly: Exploded view) :
the power-assisted steering pump assembly,
the power-assisted steering pump assembly bolts,
Torque tighten the power-assisted steering pump assembly bolts(see 36B, Power
Power-assisted steering assembly: Exploded view ) .
assisted steering,
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fill the pump assembly reservoir with power-assisted steering fluidVehicle:
repair .
Parts and consumables for the
Check that there are no leaks.
If the power-assisted steering pump assembly is replaced, apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool
Diagnostic tool : Use :
-computer concerned by the after repair procedure:
power-assisted steering pump assembly computer
-component affected by the after repair procedure:
power-assisted steering pump assembly
Repair-13x04x04x09-01x37-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING PUMP PULLEY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Engine
assembly: Exploded view .
accessories
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
Steering: Precautions for the repair ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the front right-hand wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the engine undertray.
Loosen the power-assisted steering pump pulley bolts.
Remove the accessories belt.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the power-assisted steering pump pulley.
-1-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-13x04x04x03-01x37-1-22-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
POWER-TAKE-OFF: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the
safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 21A, Manual
gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Drain the gearbox(see 21A, Manual gearbox ,
Manual gearbox oils: Draining - Filling)
.
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the clutch slave cylinder mounting bolts(see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) .
Move the clutch slave cylinder mounting.
-1-
Remove the wiring bolts(1 ) .
Move aside the wiring.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the power take-off output accessory.
-2-
Disconnect the power take-off actuator connector(2 ) .
Detache the power take-off actuator wiring(3 ) .
-3-
Disconnect the power take-off switch connector(4 ) .
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the power take-off nuts,
the power take-off,
the power take-off seal.
1- IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT:
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the power take-off actuator,
the power take-off switch.
-4-
Remove :
the power take-off output flange(5) ,
the power take-off output flange seal(6) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the power take-off seal.
Always replace the power take-off plug seal.
1- IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT:
Always replace the power take-off output flange seal.
Refit (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the power take-off actuator,
the power take-off switch.
-5-
Remove the power take-off output seal(7 ) .
-6-
Fit:
the power take-off output flange seal(8) ,
the power take-off output flange(9) .
2- IN THE EVENT OF FIRST ASSEMBLY
-7-
Remove the power take-off output seal(10 ) .
-8-
Fit:
the power take-off output flange seal(11) ,
the power take-off output flange(12) .
-9-
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the cover bolts(13) ,
the cover,
the cover seal.
- 10 -
Fit the power take-off studs.
Note:
Fit the small power take-off studs in(14 ) .
- 11 -
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Remove (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the power take-off plug(15) ,
the power take-off plug seal.
- 12 -
Check the power take-off drive pinion clearance.
Refit (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view) :
the new power take-off plug seal,
the power take-off plug.
Repair-12x01x14-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 13 -
PRECAUTIONS FOR THE REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see 01D, Mechanical introduction, Vehicle:
Precautions for the repair) .
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
All information contained in these manuals is intended exclusively for automotive industry professionals.
The documentation is intended to cover all vehicles in theRENAULTrange throughout the world, but may
not cover equipment designed for use in specific countries.
The procedures and fault finding procedures recommended and described in this manual have been
designed by automotive industry repair professionals.
1- GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
Observe basic principles of vehicle repair.
The quality of repair depends first and foremost on the care exercised by the person in carrying it out.
To ensure good repair:
protect the sensitive areas of the vehicle (seats, steering wheel, wings, etc.),
unless otherwise indicated, all repairs must be done with the ignition off,
when welding on the vehicle, it is advisable to remove or disconnect components near the repair area that could
be affected by the heat,
use recommended professional products and original parts,
observe the tightening torques,
replace roll pins, self-locking or bonded nuts or bolts every time they are removed,
take care with electrical and electronic components which cannot withstand excess voltage and improper
handling; replace any electrical and electronic components which have experienced a voltage drop,
make sure that the connectors are correctly clipped,
do not pull on the wiring,
-1-
WITH STOP AND START(STOSTA)
Disable the Stop & Start system for all operations requiring the opening of the bonnet by the command
located in the cockpit.
To ensure good repair:
check for the sealing plugs on the connectors,
do not just replace parts one after the other, carry out detailed fault finding beforehand,
carry out a final check before returning the vehicle to the customer (set the clock, check the alarm operation,
check the lights and indicators etc.),
clean and degrease the sections to be bonded (threads, stub axle splines) to ensure proper adherence.
Desactivate the start and stop mode for all interventions requiring the bonnet opening.
Protect the accessories and timing belts, the electrical accessories (starter, blanking cover, electric
power assisted steering pump) and the mating face to prevent diesel fuel spilling onto the clutch friction
plate.
The design quality of our vehicles demands that nothing is left to chance in making a good repair, and it
is essential to refit parts or components exactly as they were originally (for instance: heat shields, wiring
routing, pipe routing, particularly in the area of the orange high-voltage wirings).
Do not blow away dust (brakes, etc.), vacuum them up or clean the component with a cleaning agent
(such as a brake cleaning product).
Use professional products and apply them with care, for example do not apply too much sealing paste
to the sealing surface.
Exhaust gases (petrol and diesel) are pollutants. Operate engines or self-contained heaters with care
and always use exhaust gas extractors.
Ensure that there is no risk of a short circuit occurring when the electrical connections are reconnected
(e.g. charger, converter, traction battery and 12V battery, etc.). Some points need greasing, others do
not, therefore particular attention should be paid during refitting operations to ensure that they work
properly under all conditions.
2- SPECIAL TOOLING - EASE OF USE
The repair procedures have been designed using special tools; they must therefore be carried out using
these tools to ensure a high degree of working safety and quality of repair.
The equipment we have approved has undergone careful research and testing, and must be used and
maintained with care.
-2-
3- RELIABILITY - UPDATING
New repair procedures are constantly being developed in the interests of repair quality, either with new
products (emission control, injection, electronics, etc.), or in fault finding. Be sure to consult the
Workshop Repair Manuals or Technical Notes or fault finding summaries before any servicing operation.
Since vehicle specifications are subject to change during their commercial life, it is essential to check
whether there are any updated Technical Notes when seeking information.
4- SAFETY
Operations on certain equipment and certain parts (for instance: spring-shock absorber assembly,
electric traction reduction gearing, brake system, ABS, airbag, etc.) require particular attention to be
paid to safety, cleanliness and care.
The safety symbol used in this manual indicates that special attention must be paid to the procedure or
the tightening torque values.
Working safely:
use suitable tools which are in good condition (use of " multi-purpose " tools, such as adjustable pliers, etc., should
be avoided wherever possible),
use supports and adopt a correct posture when performing heavy work or raising loads,
make sure that the procedure used is not dangerous,
do not wear any jewellery or other small objects during an operation,
use personal protection (gloves, safety glasses, work shoes, masks, skin barrier creams, etc.),
always follow the safety instructions associated with the operation to be performed,
do not smoke when working on vehicles,
use smoke extractors (welding, exhaust gases, etc.),
do not use harmful products in unventilated rooms,
do not overstrain yourself or attempt inappropriate work operations,
use axle stands when working under a vehicle raised on a jack,
do not ingest any chemicals (brake fluid, coolant, etc.),
do not open the cooling circuit when it is hot and pressurised,
take care with components that are liable to start up suddenly (engine cooling fan, etc.).
Respecting the environment:
do not allow waste refrigerants to escape into the atmosphere,
do not dispose of waste vehicle fluids (oil, brake fluid, etc.) in drains,
do not burn discarded products (tyres, etc.).
5- CONCLUSION
The procedures contained in this document merit your attention. Please read them carefully in order to
reduce the risk of injury, and avoid using incorrect procedures that could damage the vehicle or make it
dangerous in use.
Following the recommended procedures will help you to provide a quality of service which will ensure the
-3-
vehicles achieve the highest levels of performance and reliability.
Maintenance and repair operations must be carried out under the proper conditions to ensure that our
vehicles run safely and reliably.
Repair-00x01x01-02x60-2-9-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
PRESSURE AT END OF COMPRESSION: CHECK
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Flexible end piece for taking end of compression pressure measurements.
Mot. 1772
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
diesel compression gauge
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
CHECK
1. PREPARATION OPERATION FOR CHECK
Remove the preheater plugs(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Cylinder head assembly: Exploded view)
.
Fit the hose end pieceFlexible end piece for taking end of compression pressure measurements.(Mot.
1772 ) in place of one of the removed plugs.
Moderately tighten the hose end pieceFlexible end piece for taking end of compression pressure
measurements. (Mot. 1772 ) using an open-jawed spanner.
Screw the conversion hose end pieceFlexible end piece for taking end of compression pressure
measurements. (Mot. 1772 ) of the diesel compression gaugeonto the hose.
-1-
Connect the diesel compression
measurements. (Mot. 1772 ) .
gaugeto
theFlexible end piece for taking end of compression pressure
Run command with Diagnostic tool:
RZ003 : " ADAPTATIFS MOTEUR " ,
VP036 : " INHIBITION ALIMENTATION CARBURANT " .
Put the vehicle under the starting conditions with the gear lever in neutral.
2. TEST OPERATION
Turn the engine ignition key to trigger the engine starting phase.
Note:
The engine will be driven for 20 swithout starting.
Check the compression of cylinder no. 1.
-2-
Note:
Put the vehicle back in forced + after ignition feed as soon as the starter has stopped
(in order to maintain engine start inhibition and to measure the compression of the
other cylinders).
Note:
It is necessary to wait for at least 10 secondsbefore starting the engine each time
(the starter will not run due to its thermal protection).
Measure the compression of the other cylinders.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Refit the heater plugs(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Cylinder head assembly: Exploded view)
Repair-10x02x05-01x58-1-60-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
.
PRESSURE PLATE - DISC: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Flywheel locking tool.
Mot. 1431
Set of clutch plate centring mandrels.
Emb. 1780
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 20A, Clutch,
Clutch assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the manual gearboxGearbox
assembly: Exploded view
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
.
Fit the toolFlywheel locking tool.(Mot. 1431 ) (1 ) on the flywheel.
Remove (see 20A, Clutch, Clutch assembly: Exploded view) :
the clutch pressure plate,
the clutch plate.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-2-
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean and degrease:
the clutch shaft splines,
the flywheel friction face.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Centre the clutch plate using the toolSet of clutch plate centring mandrels.(Emb. 1780 ) .
Refit the clutch pressure plate(see 20A, Clutch,
Clutch assembly: Exploded view)
-3-
.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x03x01x02-01x37-1-77-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
PRESSURE SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
parts always to be replaced:
Tyre valve
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see Tyre pressure monitor: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair .
-1-
-2-
No.
Description
1
pressure sensor
2
pressure sensor bolt
3
tyre valve
4
type valve cap
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Remove:
the wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the tyresTyres: Removal - Refitting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
Remove the pressure sensor mounting bolt using a screwdriver as shown in the picture.
-4-
Carefully remove by pulling the pressure sensor as shown in the picture.
Remove the tyre valve.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the pressure sensor bolt.
-5-
parts always to be replaced:
Tyre valve
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the tyre valve,
the pressure sensor.
Make sure that the sensor is correctly positioned on the wheel rim:
correctly fitted(5) .
incorrectly fitted(6) ,
-6-
Note:
Position the pressure sensor so you can see the mounting bolt from above.
Make sure that the sensor is correctly positioned on the wheel rim:
correctly fitted(7) ,
incorrectly fitted(8) .
Note:
There is no contact between the pressure sensor and the wheel rim.
-7-
-8-
Make sure that the sensor is correctly positioned on the wheel rim:
incorrectly fitted(9) ,
correctly fitted(10) .
Check that the cup is completely pressed around the wheel hole.
Refit the pressure sensor bolt.
Torque tighten the pressure sensor bolt1.4 N.m .
3. FINAL OPERATION
-9-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
1- WHEN REPLACING THE PRESSURE SENSOR
Adjust the tyres to the recommended pressure(see Tyre pressure: Identification) .
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic toolDiagnostic tool : Use :
-Computer concerned by the after repair procedure:
" UCH "
-Component affected by the after repair procedure:
" Pressure sensor "
Repair-13x05x03x01-01x37-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
PROPSHAFT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 29A, Driveshafts ,
Driveshaft assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
-1-
Loosen the bolts(1 ) of the safety bracket.
Undo (see 29A, Driveshafts , Driveshaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the relay bearing bolts on the engine side,
the relay bearing bolts on the final drive side.
-2-
Fit a
safety strap(s)under
the fuel tank.
-3-
-4-
Fit safety strap(s)on the longitudinal driveshaft.
Remove (see 29A, Driveshafts , Driveshaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the relay bearing bolts on the engine side,
the relay bearing bolts on the final drive side.
-5-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Mark (2 ) the driveshaft and the gearbox output yoke using an
-6-
indelible
pencil.
Mark (3 ) the driveshaft and the final drive output yoke using an
Remove the safety ring.
Remove (see 29A, Driveshafts , Driveshaft assembly: Exploded view) :
the universal joint bolts and nuts on the gearbox side,
-7-
indelible
pencil.
the universal joint bolts and nuts on the final drive side,
the propshaft.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean the
bearing faces:
of the longitudinal driveshaft,
of the final drive output yoke,
of the gearbox output yoke.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x06x04-01x37-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
PROTECTION AND SWITCHING UNIT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
In the event of replacement, apply the Before repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Protection and Switching Unit " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Switch off the ignition.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Remove the bolt(1 ) from the expansion bottle.
-2-
Move aside the expansion bottle at(2 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
Remove the Protection and Switching Unit cover bolts(3 ) .
-4-
Remove the Protection and Switching Unit cover(4 ) .
-5-
Unclip the Protection and Switching Unit by moving the clip(5 ) in the direction(6 ) .
Remove the Protection and Switching Unit(7 ) .
Rotate the Protection and Switching Unit.
-6-
Unlock the Protection and Switching Unit connector(8 ) .
Disconnect the Protection and Switching Unit connectors.
Remove the Protection and Switching Unit.
-7-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Note:
If the Protection and Switching Unit does not clip on correctly, check the condition of
the wiring of the Protection and Switching Unit connectors.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Connect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
In the event of a replacement, apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Protection and Switching Unit " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-32x05x01x24-01x37-1-9-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
PROXIMITY RADAR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
CAUTION
The proximity sensors are fragile. Handle with care as the external part cannot
withstand impacts.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the rear bumperRear bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the connectors(3 ) from the proximity sensors.
Unclip the proximity sensors(4 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
-2-
Clip the proximity sensors into place.
Connect the proximity sensor connectors.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the rear bumperRear bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection).
Repair-80x03x03x09-01x37-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
RADIATOR GRILLE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the radiator grille by(2) .
REFITTING
-2-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x07x10x02-01x37-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
RAIL UNIT: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
Note:
The Parts Department only supplies runner units for the " wheelbase 20 " version. It is
necessary to perform a conversion when replacing them on " wheelbase 10 " versions.
Cut the end of the runner unit as follows:
(X1) =
1230.2 mm.
-2-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Lower rail unit
Mild steel
0.8
(2 )
Rail mounting bridge piece
Mild steel
1.5
-3-
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-4-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-5-
Repair-40x04x12-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
RAIN AND LIGHT SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
Note:
The rain and light sensor also controls the solar radiation function depending on the
vehicle equipment level.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
-1-
Unclip the cover of the rain and light sensor by(1 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- REPLACING THE RAIN AND LIGHT SENSOR
-2-
Disconnect the rain and light sensor connector(2 ) .
-3-
Unclip the two side clips(3 ) from the rain and light sensor using theSet of trim removal levers.(Car.
1363 ) ,
Remove the rain and light sensor.
2- REPLACE THE WINDSCREEN
-4-
Note:
After the rain and light sensor has been removed, do not reuse the old adhesive base.
Use a new adhesive base.
Disconnect the rain and light sensor connector.
Unclip the side clips(4 ) of the rain and light sensor from the base of the windscreen, using the toolSet
of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
-5-
Unclip the rain and light sensor's printed circuit unit by pressing on the clips(5 ) using a small
flat-bladescrewdriver.
-6-
Remove the rain and light sensor's printed circuit unit.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-7-
CAUTION
The rain sensor should be removed and refitted in totally clean conditions: any dust or
cloth residue could cause a malfunction.
Do not touch the electronic part of the sensor. Fit the sensor to the vehicle
immediately after removing it from its packaging.
1- REPLACING THE RAIN AND LIGHT SENSOR
-8-
Clean:
the sensor mounting ring(6) on the inside of the windscreen using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car.
1363 ) ,
the outside of the windscreen in the area covered by the rain and light sensor.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Note:
The audible locking of the side clips fixing the rain and light sensor into its mounting
ring on the windscreen confirm that it is correctly held and positioned.
Note:
To avoid damaging the adhesive base, do not turn the rain and light sensor once it is
positioned on the windscreen.
Note:
Wait 5 minutes before connecting the rain and light sensor to allow air bubbles
between the adhesive base and the windscreen to disperse.
1- REPLACING THE RAIN AND LIGHT SENSOR
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Wait 5 minutes before connecting the rain and light sensor.
2- REPLACE THE WINDSCREEN
-9-
Position the new adhesive base with the transparent light guide(7 ) towards the bottom.
Position the rain and light sensor's printed circuit unit with the connector at the top.
Clip on:
the rain and light sensor's printed circuit unit onto the new adhesive base,
- 10 -
the rain and light sensor onto the windscreen mounting base using the side clips.
Wait 5 minutes before connecting the rain and light sensor.
Connect the rain and light sensor connector.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
In the event of a replacement, apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " UCH " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " Rain and light sensor " in the " List of components stored by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-80x04x02x11-01x37-1-19-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Suspension cup
2
Rear suspension spring
3
Suspension shackle nut
4
Suspension shackle support
5
Suspension spring nut
6
Anti-roll bar tie-rod mounting yoke
7
Upper nut of the anti-roll bar tie-rod
8
Yoke mounting bolts
9
Shackle support bolt
10
Lower nut of the anti-roll bar tie-rod
11
Rear anti-roll bar tie rod
12
Anti-roll bar mounting bolts
13
Rear anti-roll bar
14
Suspension spring calliper nut
15
Shock absorber lower mounting nut
(see 33A,
Rear axle components, Shock absorber: Removal - Refitting)
16
Shock absorber
(see 33A,
Rear axle components, Shock absorber: Removal - Refitting)
17
Shock absorber upper mounting nut
18
Spring support bolt
19
Spring support
20
Spring support nut
21
Suspension shackle
22
Rear shock absorber impact stop
23
Suspension spring clamp
24
Suspension spring calliper
(see 33A,
Rear axle components, Rear suspension spring: Removal - Refitting)
Tighten in a cross sequence
(see 33A,
Repair-13x02x05-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
Rear axle components, Rear shock absorber impact stop: Removal - Refitting)
REAR AXLE OIL: DRAINING - FILLING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
oil recovery tray
Applicability
Capacity (litres)
Twin wheels
3
Single wheels
2.7
DRAINING
1. DRAINING PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
2. DRAINING OPERATION
Position an
oil recovery trayunder the vehicle.
WARNING
Wear leaktight gloves (Nitrile type) for this operation.
Remove the rear final drive drain plugDriveshaft
assembly: Exploded view
Let the oil drain from the rear final drive.
-1-
.
FILLING
Refit the drain plug of the rear final driveDriveshaft
Remove the rear final drive filler capDriveshaft
assembly: Exploded view
assembly: Exploded view
.
.
Fill the rear final drive until it overflows using the oil recommended by the manufacturer
drive oil: Specification) (Technical Note 6012A, 04A, Lubricants).
Refit the rear final drive filler capDriveshaft
assembly: Exploded view
Wipe away any run-off.
Repair-12x06x01x18-01x73-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
.
(see Rear final
REAR AXLE
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
1. WHEEL ALIGNMENT: MEANING OF SYMBOLS
CAUTION
Symbols used by RENAULT:
toe-out: toe-in: +
2. WHEEL ALIGNMENT
-1-
Value
Tolerance
Position of vehicle
+10'
Vehicle in running order
-10'
3. CAMBER
Not adjustable.
-2-
Value
Tolerance
Position of vehicle
+10'
Vehicle in running order
-10'
Repair-13x02x05-02x13-6-31-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
REAR BADGES: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exterior
element assembly: Exploded view .
rear opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the rear left-hand loading door trimRear opening
Exploded view (73A, Non-side opening elements trim).
Remove the rear loading door stripExterior
element assembly on the passenger compartment side:
rear opening element assembly: Exploded view
Disconnect the license plate light connectors.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
.
Unclip the rear badge by pressing the clips(1 ) .
-2-
Remove the rear badge by(2 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x07x14x04-01x37-1-9-1.xml
-3-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
REAR BENCH SEAT HEADREST: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Press the unlocking buttons of the rear bench seat headrest guides.
Remove the rear bench seat headrest.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the rear bench seat headrest into the guides to the safety notch position.
Carry out a function test.
WARNING
To prevent the headrest coming away from the guide during a collision, check that
headrest guide locking system is functioning correctly.
Adjust the rear bench seat headrest to the low position.
Repair-70x18x04x05-01x37-1-6-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
REAR BRAKE CALLIPER ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Mark
Description
1
Brake calliper guide pin plug
2
Brake calliper guide pin
3
Brake calliper bleed screw
4
Information
Brake calliper
(FRE1190-01)
(see 33A, Rear
5
Brake calliper guide pin gaiter
6
Rear brake pad
7
Brake pad tab
8
Brake pad
9
Brake calliper piston
10
Dust seal of brake calliper piston
11
Brake calliper mounting
12
Brake calliper mounting bolt
13
axle components, Rear brake calliper: Removal - Refitting)
Brake disc
(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear brake pads: Removal - Refitting)
(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear brake pads: Removal - Refitting)
(see 33A, Rear
(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear brake calliper mounting: Removal - Refitting)
(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear brake disc: Removal - Refitting)
(see 33A, Rear
Repair-13x03x04x13-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
axle components, Rear brake calliper: Repair)
axle components, Rear brake disc: Description)
REAR BRAKE CALLIPER ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
01D, Mechanical introduction.
Brake circuit: Precautions for the repair
-1-
Mark
Description
1
Brake calliper guide pin plug
2
Brake calliper guide pin
3
Brake calliper bleed screw
4
Rear brake calliper
5
Brake calliper guide pin gaiter
6
Rear brake pads
7
Brake pad tab
8
Rear brake pads
9
Brake calliper piston
10
Dust seal of brake calliper piston
11
Brake calliper yoke
12
Brake calliper mounting bolt
13
Information
Rear brake disc
(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear brake calliper: Removal - Refitting)
(see 33A, Rear
(see 33A, Rear
Repair-13x03x04x13-02x50-1-2-1.xml
-2-
axle components, Rear brake pads: Removal - Refitting)
(see 33A, Rear
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
axle components, Rear brake pads: Removal - Refitting)
axle components, Rear brake disc: Removal - Refitting)
REAR BRAKE CALLIPER MOUNTING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view ) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the rear brake pads,
the upper guide pin bolt cap,
the upper guide pin bolt.
Attach the rear brake calliper to the rear spring.
CAUTION
In order not to damage the brake hose:
do not tension the hose,
do not twist the hose,
check that there is no contact with the surrounding components.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the rear brake calliper mounting(see 33A, Rear
Exploded view ) .
axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly:
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean using a
the
the
the
wire brush and brake cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products):
rear brake calliper mounting,
rear brake calliper,
rear hub.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x04x07-01x37-1-21-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
REAR BRAKE CALLIPER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Support plate for pushing back the brake calliper piston
Fre. 1939
Equipment required
pedal press
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view ) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the parking brake cable protectors and causing premature wear of
the system, do not handle the cables with a tool.
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Release the parking brake.
Position a
pedal presson
the brake pedal to limit the outflow of brake fluid.
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE RIGHT-HAND SIDE
-2-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the rear brake pad wear warning light.
Unclip the wiring of the rear brake pad wear warning light at(2 ) .
-3-
Unclip the parking brake cable from the rear brake calliper at(3 ) .
-4-
Mark the position of the rear brake hose cap(4 ) on the rear axle using an
Unclip the rear brake hose cap(4 ) from the rear axle.
-5-
indelible
pencil.
Undo the rear brake hose union(5 ) from the rear brake calliper.
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the guide pin bolt caps of the rear brake calliper,
the guide pin bolts of the rear brake calliper,
the rear brake calliper from the rear brake calliper mounting,
the rear brake hose union from the rear brake calliper,
the rear brake calliper.
Insert the blanking plugs.
-6-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean using a wire brush and brake cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products):
the rear brake calliper,
the rear brake calliper mounting.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Push the rear brake calliper piston to the end of its housing using the toolSupport plate for pushing
back the brake calliper piston(Fre. 1939 ) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the rear brake hose union on the rear brake calliper17 N.m.
Bleed the braking circuitBraking
circuit: Bleed
.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x04x08-01x37-1-34-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
REAR BRAKE CALLIPER: REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Support plate for pushing back the brake calliper piston
Fre. 1939
Equipment required
pedal press
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Rear
assembly: Exploded view .
brake calliper
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Release the parking brake.
Position a
pedal presson
the brake pedal to limit the outflow of brake fluid.
Remove:
the rear wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting ,
-1-
the rear brake calliperRear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the piston using compressed air, making sure to insert a wooden block between the calliper
and the piston.
Remove the dust seal.
-2-
Remove the rectangular section seal from the calliper groove with a round edged spring blade (feeler
gauge).
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Replace the complete calliper in if there is:
a scratch in the calliper bore,
a scratch or crack on the calliper piston.
-3-
Clean using a wire brush and BRAKE CLEANERVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables Products):
the calliper mounting,
the brake calliper.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the new rectangular section seal in the calliper groove,
the piston (after having smeared it with the grease supplied in the repair kit) using theSupport plate for pushing
back the brake calliper piston(Fre. 1939 ) ,
the dust seal.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Bleed the brake circuitBraking
circuit: Bleed
.
-4-
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x04x08-01x22-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
REAR BRAKE CALLIPER: REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Support plate for pushing back the brake calliper piston
Fre. 1939
Equipment required
pedal press
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view ) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Release the parking brake.
Position a
pedal presson
the brake pedal to limit the outflow of brake fluid.
Remove:
the rear wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting ,
-1-
the rear brake calliper(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the piston using compressed air, making sure to insert a wooden block between the calliper
and the piston.
Remove the dust seal.
-2-
Remove the rectangular section seal from the calliper groove with a round edged spring blade (feeler
gauge).
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Replace the complete calliper in if there is:
a scratch in the calliper bore,
a scratch or crack on the calliper piston.
-3-
Clean using a wire brush and BRAKE CLEANERVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables Products):
the calliper mounting,
the brake calliper.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the new rectangular section seal in the calliper groove,
the piston (after having smeared it with the grease supplied in the repair kit) using theSupport plate for pushing
back the brake calliper piston(Fre. 1939 ) ,
the dust seal.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Bleed the brake circuitBraking
circuit: Bleed
.
-4-
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x04x08-01x22-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
REAR BRAKE DISC: DESCRIPTION
1. PREPARATION OPERATION FOR CHECK
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Remove the wheel in questionWheel: Removal - Refitting .
2. CHECKING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Note:
Use a Palmer type tool to check the thickness of the disc.
-1-
Position the Palmer tool(1 ) to measure the disc thickness.
-2-
Measure the thickness of the disc at 4 points in order (90 apart).
Compare the values with those recommended by the manufacturerBrake:
Specifications
.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Replace the discs if necessary(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear brake disc: Removal - Refitting)
-3-
.
Refit the wheel in questionWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Repair-13x03x04x06-02x21-1-21-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
REAR BRAKE DISC: DESCRIPTION
1. PREPARATION OPERATION FOR CHECK
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Remove the wheel in questionWheel: Removal - Refitting .
2. CHECKING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Note:
Use a Palmer type tool to check the thickness of the disc.
-1-
Position the Palmer tool(1 ) to measure the disc thickness.
-2-
Measure the thickness of the disc at 4 points in order (90 apart).
Compare the values with those recommended by the manufacturerBrake:
Specifications
.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Replace the discs if necessary(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear brake disc: Removal - Refitting)
Refit the wheel in questionWheel: Removal - Refitting .
-3-
.
Repair-13x03x04x06-02x21-1-21-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
REAR BRAKE DISC PROTECTOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Mark the position of the rear brake hose cap(1 ) on the rear axle using an
Unclip the rear brake hose cap(1 ) from the rear axle.
SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE RIGHT-HAND SIDE
-2-
indelible
pencil.
Disconnect the connector(2 ) from the rear brake pad wear warning light.
-3-
Unclip the wiring of the rear brake pad wear warning light at(3 ) .
Remove the calliper mounting bolts of the rear brake calliper(see 33A, Rear
calliper assembly: Exploded view) .
axle components, Rear brake
Move aside the " calliper mounting - brake calliper " assembly.
Attach the " calliper mounting - brake calliper " assembly to the rear leaf spring.
Remove the rear brake discs(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view)
-4-
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the rear brake disc protector(see 33A, Rear
view ) .
axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean the brake discs using brake cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for
- Products) and a wire brush.
the repair
(04B, Consumables
Dry the surface of the discs.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x04x09-01x37-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
REAR BRAKE DISC: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Brake discs cannot be reground. If there is excessive wear or scoring, the brake discs must be replaced
Brake: Specifications .
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the rear brake pads,
the rear calliper mountings.
Remove the hub carrier(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view)
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the brake discs(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view)
-1-
.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean the discs using brake cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for
Products).
the repair
(04B, Consumables -
Dry the surface of the discs.
Clean the mating faces of the disc on the hub using a wire brush and brake cleanerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Parts and
Always replace the brake disc bolts.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x04x06-01x37-1-22-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
REAR BRAKE DISC: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Brake discs cannot be reground. If there is excessive wear or scoring, the brake discs must be replaced
Brake: Specifications .
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Rear
assembly: Exploded view .
hub carrier
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view :
the rear brake pads,
the rear calliper mountings.
Remove the hub carrierRear
hub carrier assembly: Exploded view
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the brake discsRear
hub carrier assembly: Exploded view
-1-
.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean the discs using brake cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for
Products).
the repair
(04B, Consumables -
Dry the surface of the discs.
Clean the mating faces of the disc on the hub using a wire brush and brake cleanerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Parts and
Always replace the brake disc bolts.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x04x06-01x37-1-22-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
REAR BRAKE DISC: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Brake discs cannot be reground. If there is excessive wear or scoring, the brake discs must be replaced
Brake: Specifications .
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the rear brake pads,
the rear calliper mountings.
Remove the hub carrier(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view)
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the brake discs(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view)
-1-
.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean the discs using brake cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for
Products).
the repair
(04B, Consumables -
Dry the surface of the discs.
Clean the mating faces of the disc on the hub using a wire brush and brake cleanerVehicle:
consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
Parts and
Always replace the brake disc bolts.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x04x06-01x37-1-22-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
REAR BRAKE HOSE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
pedal press
indelible pencil
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Position a
pedal presson
the brake pedal to limit the outflow of brake fluid.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
If reusing the hose, mark the position of the rear brake hose cap(1 ) on the rear axle using an
pencil .
Unclip the rear brake hose cap(1 ) from the rear axle.
-2-
indelible
Undo the rear brake hose union(2 ) from the rigid pipe union.
Remove the rear brake hose retaining fork(3 ) .
-3-
Undo the rear brake hose union(4 ) from the rear brake calliper.
Insert the blanking plugs.
Remove the rear brake hose.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
-4-
Remove the blanking plugs.
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
CAUTION
In order not to damage the brake hose:
do not tension the hose,
do not twist the hose,
check that there is no contact with the surrounding components.
Refit the rear brake hose at the rear brake calliper end.
Torque tighten the rear brake hose union on the rear brake calliper17 N.m.
Refit:
the rear brake hose retaining fork,
the rear brake hose on the rigid pipe union.
Torque tighten the rear brake hose union on the rigid pipe union14 N.m.
-5-
Clip the rear brake hose cap onto the rear axle, aligning the marks made using an
2. FINAL OPERATION
Remove the pedal
pressfrom
the brake pedal.
Refit the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Bleed the braking circuitBraking
circuit: Bleed
.
Repair-13x03x09x03-01x37-1-23-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
indelible
pencil.
REAR BRAKE PADS: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Support plate for pushing back the brake calliper piston
Fre. 1939
Equipment required
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view ) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
In order not to damage the brake hose:
do not tension the hose,
do not twist the hose,
check that there is no contact with the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Mark the position of the rear brake hose cap(1 ) on the rear axle using an
Unclip the rear brake hose cap(1 ) from the rear axle.
SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE RIGHT-HAND SIDE
-2-
indelible
pencil.
Disconnect the connector(2 ) of the rear brake pad wear warning light.
-3-
Unclip the cable of the rear brake pad wear warning light at(3 ) .
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the lower guide pin bolt cap,
the lower guide pin bolt.
Tilt the rear brake calliper.
Remove the rear brake pads(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view )
-4-
.
Remove the noise reducing fins(4 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Measure the thickness of the brake pads and compare them with the minimum valuesBrake:
-5-
Specifications
.
Do not allow friction materials to come into contact with grease, oil or other lubricants and
cleaning products which are mineral oil based.
Always replace the noise reducing fins of the rear brake pads.
Clean using a wire brush and brake cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables Products):
the rear calliper mountings,
the rear callipers.
Push the rear brake calliper piston to the end of its housing using the toolSupport plate for
pushing back the brake calliper piston(Fre. 1939 ) .
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
new noise reducing fins,
the rear brake pads.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Clip the rear brake hose cap onto the rear axle, aligning the marks made using an
-6-
indelible
pencil.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x04x05-01x37-1-31-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
REAR BRAKE PADS: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Support plate for pushing back the brake calliper piston
Fre. 1939
Equipment required
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view ) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
In order not to damage the brake hose:
do not tension the hose,
do not twist the hose,
check that there is no contact with the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Mark the position of the rear brake hose cap(1 ) on the rear axle using an
Unclip the rear brake hose cap(1 ) from the rear axle.
SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE RIGHT-HAND SIDE
-2-
indelible
pencil.
Disconnect the connector(2 ) of the rear brake pad wear warning light.
-3-
Unclip the cable of the rear brake pad wear warning light at(3 ) .
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the lower guide pin bolt cap,
the lower guide pin bolt.
Tilt the rear brake calliper.
Remove the rear brake pads(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view )
-4-
.
Remove the noise reducing fins(4 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Measure the thickness of the brake pads and compare them with the minimum valuesBrake:
-5-
Specifications
.
Do not allow friction materials to come into contact with grease, oil or other lubricants and
cleaning products which are mineral oil based.
Always replace the noise reducing fins of the rear brake pads.
Clean using a wire brush and brake cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables Products):
the rear calliper mountings,
the rear callipers.
Push the rear brake calliper piston to the end of its housing using the toolSupport plate for
pushing back the brake calliper piston(Fre. 1939 ) .
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
new noise reducing fins,
the rear brake pads.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Clip the rear brake hose cap onto the rear axle, aligning the marks made using an
-6-
indelible
pencil.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x04x05-01x37-1-31-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
REAR BUMPER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Open the rear loading doors.
-1-
Partially detach the lower section of the rear loading door seal(1 ) .
-2-
-3-
Unclip the protective strips of the sill panel rear section by(2 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.
(Car. 1363 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- SIDE SECTIONS OF THE REAR BUMPER
-4-
Remove:
the bolts(3) ,
the plastic rivets(4) .
Unclip the side sections of the rear bumper at(5 ) .
-5-
2- CENTRE SECTION OF THE REAR BUMPER
Remove the bolt(6 ) .
Unclip the centre section of the rear bumper at(7 ) .
Disconnect the rear proximity radar connectors.
-6-
Remove the centre section of the rear bumper.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x05x04-01x37-1-29-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
REAR CENTRE SEAT BELT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the rear seat base.
-1-
Unclip the blanking covers(2 ) .
Remove the bolts(2 ) .
Note:
Mark the length of the mounting bolts when they are removed.
Remove the backrest assembly at(3 ) .
-2-
Remove:
the bolts(4) ,
the side housing.
-3-
Remove:
the bolts(5) ,
the rear seat belt guide.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
Open the zip fastener(6 ) .
Remove the bolt(7 ) .
-5-
Remove:
the seat belt return mechanism bolt(8) ,
the rear center seat belt.
REFITTING
-6-
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace:
the seat belt return mechanism bolt,
the seat belt inertia reel bolt.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Tighten to torque:
the seat belt return mechanism bolt37
the seat belt inertia reel bolt37
N.m,
N.m.
Repair-31x02x01x26-01x37-1-13-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
REAR CENTRE SEAT BELT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
parts always to be replaced:
Rear seat belt inertia reel bolt
rear centre seat belt mounting
Note:
The rear seat belt must be handled by the inertia reel (risk of damaging the strap).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the trim of the single unit rear bench seatbackSingle
Refitting (78A, Rear seat trim).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
unit rear bench seatback trim: Removal -
Remove:
the rear centre seat belt inertia reel bolt(1) ,
the rear centre seat belt.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-2-
parts always to be replaced:
Rear seat belt inertia reel bolt
.
parts always to be replaced:
rear centre seat belt mounting
.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the bolt of the rear centre seat belt inertia reel30 N.m.
Note:
Ensure that the rear centre seat belt strap is not twisted between the inertia reel and
the lower mounting of the rear centre seat belt.
3. CHECKING AFTER REPAIR
Check for correct operation twice by unreeling the rear central seat belt 300 mmand allowing it to
return.
Check that the rear central seat belt locks correctly by pulling the rear central seat belt strap with
increasing speed 200to300 mmmaximum until the inertia reel locks.
Repair-31x02x01x26-01x37-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
REAR CROSS MEMBER UNDER FRONT SEAT: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
-2-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Rear cross member under front seat
THLE
1.2
(2 )
Centre seat rear interior mounting
HLE
1.5
(3 )
Centre seat rear interior reinforcement
HLE
1.77
(4 )
Parking brake mounting bracket
HLE
1
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x03x18x04-02x49-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
REAR DOOR SILL LINING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the side trim of the passenger compartment partition(see 71A, Body internal trim,
compartment partition trim: Removal - Refitting) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Passenger
Remove:
the bolt,
the rear door sill lining.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-70x02x06x08-01x37-1-15-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
REAR END PANEL: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Rear end panel
HLE
1.4
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld area(see Earths on body: List and location of components) .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weld(see Connections by arc welding
under shielding gas: Description) (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections
(GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x09x26x01-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
REAR END PILLAR LINING: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
-2-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Rear end pillar lining
Mild steel
0.9
(2 )
Upper bracket of side roof rail rear lining
Mild steel
1.5
(3 )
Upper lining reinforcement of rear end pillar
Mild steel
1.5
(4 )
Rear upper end pillar lining
Mild steel
1.2
(5 )
Rear door check strap reinforcement
HLE
1
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
The options for replacing this part are as follows:
Complete replacement
partial replacement of the lower section(1) .
-3-
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld area(see Earths on body: List and location of components) .
-4-
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
-5-
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weld(see Connections by arc welding
under shielding gas: Description) (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections
(GMAW)).
2- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT OF THE LOWER SECTION
1)PART IN POSITION
-6-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weld(see Connections by arc welding
under shielding gas: Description) (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections
(GMAW)).
Repair-40x09x13x07-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
REAR FINAL DRIVE DIFFERENTIAL: ADJUSTMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
Dial gauge
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Rear
Exploded view .
final drive assembly:
IMPORTANT
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 26A, Rear axle , Rear final drive: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
Do not mix up the differential adjusting shims.
ADJUSTMENT
1. ADJUSTMENT PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the rear final driveRear
final drive assembly: Exploded view
-1-
.
Strap the rear final drive on a workbench using a safety strap(s).
Note:
The rear final drive is very heavy.
Remove the rear anti-roll barRear
axle assembly: Exploded view
Remove the rear brake discsRear
(33A, Rear axle components).
hub carrier assembly: Exploded view
(33A, Rear axle components).
Remove:
the rear wheel driveshaftsRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the rear final drive housingRear final drive assembly: Exploded view .
2. ADJUSTMENT OPERATION
-2-
1- CHECKING THE PRETENSIONING TORQUE OF THE INPUT SHAFT
Remove the differentialRear
final drive assembly: Exploded view
.
Turn the input shaft 20 timesto correctly position the bearings.
Check the pretensioning torque of the bearings using a spring balance(1 ) .
The input shaft must turn under a force between 78 Nand 130 N.
If the pretensioning torque is not correct, decrease or increase the thickness of the adjusting shims
behind the input shaft bearing cages.
-3-
Note:
A kit of 8 and 10 shims is available. The shims are machined from 0.04 mmin 0.04
mm increments.
2- CHECKING THE PRETENSIONING TORQUE OF THE DIFFERENTIAL
Remove the input shaft.
Refit the differentialRear
final drive assembly: Exploded view
.
Turn the differential 20 timesto correctly position the bearings.
-4-
Check the pretensioning torque of the bearings using a spring balance(2 ) .
The differential must turn under a force between 17 Nand 27 N.
If the pretensioning torque is not correct, increase or decrease the thickness of the adjusting shims
behind the differential bearing cages.
-5-
Note:
A kit of 10 shims is available. The shims are machined from 0.04 mmin 0.04 mm
increments.
Refit the input shaft.
3- CHECKING THE CONICAL DISTANCE
Lightly spray with white revealing spray along the side faces of 3 to 4 differential crownwheel teeth
-6-
of the rear final drive, distributing the product at three different positions 120 apart.
Leave the revealing spray to work or blow on it very gently until it sticks to and completely covers the
side faces of the teeth.
Turn the differential crownwheel several times in both directions in order to check the mating face
between the drive pinion and the differential crownwheel of the rear final drive.
If the mating face is in the centre of the teeth side faces, the timing is correct.
-7-
If the mating face is above the sides of the teeth, the drive pinion is too far away from the differential
shaft of the rear final drive, increase the thickness of the adjusting shim behind the bearing cage of the
rear final drive input shaftRear final drive assembly: Exploded view .
-8-
If the mating face is below the sides of the teeth, the drive pinion is too close to the shaft of the rear
final drive differential, decrease the thickness of the adjusting shim behind the large bearing cage of the
rear final drive input shaftRear final drive assembly: Exploded view .
4- CHECKING THE TEETH BACKLASH
-9-
Fit a
Dial gauge(3 ) .
Put the movable part of the
the rear final drive.
Dial gaugein
contact on the edge of a tooth of the differential crownwheel of
Measure the backlash by slightly pivoting the differential of the rear final drive.
Perform about ten rotations, the backlash must be between 0.18 mmand 0.24 mm.
If the backlash is not correct, increase or decrease the thickness of the shims behind the differential
bearing cages Rear final drive assembly: Exploded view .
- 10 -
To reduce the backlash, increase the thickness of the shim on the differential crownwheel side of the
rear final drive and decrease the shim on the unit side by the same thickness to retain the same
pretensioning torque of the rear final drive differential bearings.
To increase the backlash, decrease the thickness of the shim on the differential crownwheel side of
the rear final drive and increase the shim on the unit side by the same thickness to retain the same
pretensioning torque of the rear final drive differential bearings.
Remove the Dial
gauge.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x06x01x03-01x67-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
REAR FINAL DRIVE DIFFERENTIAL BEARING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Tool for removal - refitting of the lower arm bearing.
Tav. 1486
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
parts always to be replaced:
Rear final drive differential bearing
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Rear
Exploded view .
final drive assembly:
IMPORTANT
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 26A, Rear axle , Rear final drive: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the rear final driveRear
final drive assembly: Exploded view
-1-
.
Strap the rear final drive on a workbench using a safety strap(s).
Note:
The weight of the rear final drive is very important.
Remove the rear anti-roll barRear
axle assembly: Exploded view
(33A, Rear axle components).
Remove:
the rear wheel driveshaftsRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the rear final drive housingRear final drive assembly: Exploded view ,
the rear final drive differentialRear final drive assembly: Exploded view .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Fit an extractor(1 ) on the rear final drive differential.
-3-
Remove the bearings from the rear final drive differential using a cylinder with a diameter of 57 mm(2 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
Rear final drive differential bearing
-4-
.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the bearings of the rear final drive differential using the toolTool for removal - refitting of the lower
arm bearing.(Tav. 1486 ) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the rear final drive differential(see 26A, Rear axle ,
-5-
Rear final drive differential: Adjustment)
.
Repair-12x06x01x02-01x37-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
REAR FINAL DRIVE DIFFERENTIAL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Kit for extracting and refitting rear final drive differential
Bvi. 1944
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Rear
Exploded view .
final drive assembly:
IMPORTANT
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 26A, Rear axle , Rear final drive: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the rear final driveRear
final drive assembly: Exploded view
-1-
.
Strap the rear final drive on a workbench using a safety strap(s).
Note:
The weight of the rear final drive is very important.
Remove the rear anti-roll barRear
axle assembly: Exploded view
Remove the rear brake discsRear
(33A, Rear axle components).
hub carrier assembly: Exploded view
(33A, Rear axle components).
Remove:
the rear wheel driveshaftsRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the rear final drive housingRear final drive assembly: Exploded view .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Remove the half bearings of the rear final drive differentialRear
Mark the position:
of the exterior differential bearing cages(1) ,
of the differential adjusting shims(2) .
-3-
final drive assembly: Exploded view
.
-4-
Fit the toolKit for extracting and refitting rear final drive differential(Bvi. 1944 ) (3 ) on an inertia extractor
(4 ) .
Strap the inertia extractor equipped with the toolKit for extracting and refitting rear final drive
differential (Bvi. 1944 ) on the differential using a safety strap(s)(5 ) .
Remove the rear final drive differential.
Note:
Do not mix up:
- the differential adjusting shims,
- the exterior differential bearing cages.
-5-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
1- IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
Remove the bearings of the rear final drive differentialRear
Refit the bearings of the rear final drive differentialRear
final drive assembly: Exploded view
final drive assembly: Exploded view
.
.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the rear final drive differential with its original adjusting shims.
Adjust the rear final drive differential(see 26A, Rear axle ,
Rear final drive differential: Adjustment)
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x06x01x03-01x37-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
.
REAR FINAL DRIVE HOUSING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Removes housing with silicone seals.
Mot. 1716
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Rear
Exploded view .
final drive assembly:
IMPORTANT
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 26A, Rear axle , Rear final drive: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the rear final driveRear
final drive assembly: Exploded view
-1-
.
Strap the rear final drive on a workbench using a safety strap(s).
Note:
The weight of the rear final drive is very important.
Remove the rear anti-roll barRear
axle assembly: Exploded view
(33A, Rear axle components).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the bolts from the rear final drive housingRear
final drive assembly: Exploded view
.
Cut the silicone sealant of the rear final drive housing using the toolRemoves housing with silicone
seals. (Mot. 1716 ) .
Remove the rear final drive housing.
-2-
Note:
Gradually detach the rear final drive housing with small alternating movements to
prevent damaging the rear final drive housing.
REFITTING
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
WARNING
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face
will result in a risk of leaks.
WARNING
Applying excess sealant could cause it to be squeezed out when parts are tightened.
A mixture of sealant and fluid could damage certain components (engine, radiator,
etc.).
WARNING
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
Use super cleaning agent for joint facesVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) and
a wooden spatula to clean the mating faces:
of the rear final drive housing,
of the rear final drive.
-3-
Apply a bead of silicone adhesive sealVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables Products) with a diameter of 5 mm ± 2 mmto the rear final drive housing in order to ensure a good seal.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-4-
Repair-12x06x01x20-01x37-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
REAR FINAL DRIVE INPUT SHAFT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Rear
Exploded view .
final drive assembly:
IMPORTANT
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 26A, Rear axle , Rear final drive: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the rear final driveRear
final drive assembly: Exploded view
-1-
.
Strap the rear final drive on a workbench using a safety strap(s).
Note:
The weight of the rear final drive is very important.
Remove the rear anti-roll barRear
axle assembly: Exploded view
Remove the rear brake discsRear
(33A, Rear axle components).
hub carrier assembly: Exploded view
(33A, Rear axle components).
Remove:
the
the
the
the
rear wheel driveshaftsRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
rear final drive housingRear final drive assembly: Exploded view ,
rear final drive differentialRear final drive assembly: Exploded view ,
longitudinal driveshaft input sealRear final drive assembly: Exploded view ,
-2-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the rear final drive input shaft.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
1- IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
Remove the bearing of the rear final drive input shaftRear
Refit the bearing of the rear final drive input shaftRear
final drive assembly: Exploded view
final drive assembly: Exploded view
.
.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the rear final drive differential(see 26A, Rear axle ,
Rear final drive differential: Adjustment)
Repair-12x06x01x21-01x37-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
.
REAR FINAL DRIVE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly
Mot. 1390
Adapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.
Mot. 1709
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Rear
Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components).
axle assembly:
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting (35A, Wheels and tyres).
-1-
Mark the position of the longitudinal driveshaft bracket at(1 ) .
Remove the bolts and nuts from the universal joint on the final drive sideDriveshaft
view .
-2-
assembly: Exploded
Attach the longitudinal driveshaft to the body using a safety strap(s).
-3-
Disconnect the connector(2 ) from the rear brake pad wear warning light.
Unclip the wiring of the rear brake pad wear warning light.
Remove Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components):
the plugs of the brake calliper guide pin.
the brake calliper guide pins.
Attach the rear brake callipers to the body.
Remove the ABS sensor boltRear
hub carrier assembly: Exploded view
-4-
(33A, Rear axle components).
Move the ABS sensor to one side.
Remove the bolt(3 ) from the handbrake cable support.
Move the support away from the handbrake cable.
-5-
Disconnect the breather pipe(4 ) from the rear final drive.
Remove Rear axle assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components):
the rear shock absorbers,
the anti-roll bar tie rod upper bolt and nut.
-6-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Make a mark between the suspension spring brackets and the rear suspension springs using a
indelible pencil .
Fit the toolSupport for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly(Mot. 1390 ) equipped with
the toolAdapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.(Mot. 1709 ) under the rear final drive.
-7-
Attach the rear final drive to the toolSupport for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly
(Mot. 1390 ) equipped with the toolAdapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.(Mot. 1709 ) using a safety strap(s).
Remove Rear axle assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components):
the nuts of the suspension spring calliper,
the rear final drive.
When replacing the rear final drive, remove:
the rear anti-roll barRear axle assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the brake calliper mountingsRear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the rear wheel driveshaftsRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the rear hubRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the brake disc guardRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components).
REFITTING
When replacing the rear final drive, refit:
the brake disc guardRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the rear hubRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the rear wheel driveshaftsRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the brake calliper mountingsRear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
-8-
the rear anti-roll barRear axle assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components).
-9-
Note:
Position the rear final drive(6 ) on the pin(7 ) of the rear suspension springs.
Refit the suspension spring brackets on the marks made during removal.
- 10 -
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x06x01-01x37-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
REAR FINAL DRIVE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly
Mot. 1390
Adapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.
Mot. 1709
Equipment required
safety strap(s)
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Rear
Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components).
axle assembly:
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from falling, lash it to the vehicle lift using a strap.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting (35A, Wheels and tyres).
-1-
Mark the position of the longitudinal driveshaft bracket at(1 ) .
Remove the bolts and nuts from the universal joint on the final drive sideDriveshaft
view .
-2-
assembly: Exploded
Attach the longitudinal driveshaft to the body using a safety strap(s).
-3-
Disconnect the connector(2 ) from the rear brake pad wear warning light.
Unclip the wiring of the rear brake pad wear warning light.
Remove Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components):
the plugs of the brake calliper guide pin.
the brake calliper guide pins.
Attach the rear brake callipers to the body.
Remove the ABS sensor boltRear
hub carrier assembly: Exploded view
-4-
(33A, Rear axle components).
Move the ABS sensor to one side.
Remove the bolt(3 ) from the handbrake cable support.
Move the support away from the handbrake cable.
-5-
Disconnect the breather pipe(4 ) from the rear final drive.
Remove Rear axle assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components):
the rear shock absorbers,
the anti-roll bar tie rod upper bolt and nut.
-6-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Make a mark between the suspension spring brackets and the rear suspension springs using a
indelible pencil .
Fit the toolSupport for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly(Mot. 1390 ) equipped with
the toolAdapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.(Mot. 1709 ) under the rear final drive.
-7-
Attach the rear final drive to the toolSupport for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly
(Mot. 1390 ) equipped with the toolAdapter for engine support tool Mot.1390.(Mot. 1709 ) using a safety strap(s).
Remove Rear axle assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components):
the nuts of the suspension spring calliper,
the rear final drive.
When replacing the rear final drive, remove:
the rear anti-roll barRear axle assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the brake calliper mountingsRear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the rear wheel driveshaftsRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the rear hubRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the brake disc guardRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components).
REFITTING
When replacing the rear final drive, refit:
the brake disc guardRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the rear hubRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the rear wheel driveshaftsRear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
the brake calliper mountingsRear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components),
-8-
the rear anti-roll barRear axle assembly: Exploded view (33A, Rear axle components).
-9-
Note:
Position the rear final drive(6 ) on the pin(7 ) of the rear suspension springs.
Refit the suspension spring brackets on the marks made during removal.
- 10 -
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-12x06x01-01x37-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
REAR HEADLINING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the B-pillar trim(see 71A, Body internal trim, B-pillar trim: Removal - Refitting) ,
the headlining lightHeadlining light: Removal - Refitting (81B, Interior lighting).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove:
the clips(1) ,
the rear headlining.
-1-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x02x04x10-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
REAR HEIGHT SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the rear height sensor connector.
-1-
Remove:
the rear height sensor bolt(1) from the body,
the rear height sensor bolt(2) from the rear axle,
the rear height sensor.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the rear height sensor.
-2-
Torque tighten:
the rear height sensor bolt on the body12
the rear height sensor bolt on the rear
N.m,
axle12 N.m.
Connect the rear height sensor connector.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-13x02x09x08-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
REAR HUB CARRIER ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
(see 33A,
(01D, Mechanical introduction).
Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair)
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Rear axle
Rear final drive: Removal - Refitting
2
Rear wheel speed sensor
3
Rear brake calliper mounting
4
Rear brake disc protector
5
ABS target
6
Rear hub carrier bearing
7
Thrust washer
8
Rear wheel hub
9
Seal
10
Driveshaft bolt
11
Hub mounting nut
12
Rear brake disc
13
Wheel bolts
14
Driveshaft
(see 33A,
Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier bearing: Removal - Refitting)
Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
When refitting, add high strength thread lock
(ROU. 1924)
(see 33A,
Rear axle components, Rear brake disc: Removal - Refitting)
Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair
Repair-13x02x05x24-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
When refitting, add SILICONE ADHESIVE SEALANT
REAR HUB CARRIER BEARING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
roll pin punch
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear brake calliper assembly: Exploded view) :
the rear brake pads,
the rear brake calliper mounting.
Remove the rear driveshaft(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view)
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) :
the rear brake disc,
the rear wheel arch.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
.
Remove the exterior cages from the rear hub carrier bearings(see 33A, Rear
carrier assembly: Exploded view ) using a roll pin punch.
axle components, Rear hub
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean:
the internal and external surfaces of the bearing, in contact with the hub and the rear axle,
the rear axle surfaces in contact with the bearing,
the hub surfaces in contact with the bearing.
CAUTION
To ensure that the wheel speed sensor works properly, do not mark the sensor target
on the bearing.
CAUTION
Do not press the bearing's internal bush so as to avoid damaging the bearing (very
high shrink-fitting force).
Check the condition of the surfaces of the hub and the rear axle bore in contact with the bearing.
Replace any component whose contact surfaces have deep scratches or cracks.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the exterior cages of the rear hub carrier bearings(see 33A, Rear
assembly: Exploded view) using a roll pin punch.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
axle components, Rear hub carrier
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x02x05x16-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
REAR IMPACT LOWER CROSS MEMBER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1.
-1-
Remove:
the bolts(1) and (2) ,
the rear impact lower cross member.
REFITTING
-2-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-40x09x28-01x37-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
REAR LIGHT BULB: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the rear light on the wing(see 81A, Rear lighting,
Remove the bolts(1 ) from the bulb holder.
-1-
Rear wing light: Removal - Refitting)
.
Remove the bulb holder at(2 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Remove the bulbs from the following lights:
direction indicator at(3) ,
brake light and side light at(4) ,
reversing light(5) ,
fog light at(6) .
REFITTING
Note:
If the bulbs are changed, only use approved bulbs.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x02x06x09-01x37-1-33-1.xml
-3-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
REAR LIGHT BULB: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the rear light(see 81A, Rear lighting,
Rear light: Removal - Refitting)
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-1-
Remove:
the
the
the
the
the
fog light bulb(1) ,
reversing light bulb(2) ,
side light bulb(3) ,
brake light bulb(4) ,
direction indicator bulb(5) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Refit:
the
the
the
the
the
P21Wdirection indicator bulb,
P21Wbrake light bulb,
R10Wside light bulb,
P21Wreversing light bulb,
fog light P21Wbulb.
2. FINAL OPERATION.
Refit the rear light(see 81A, Rear lighting,
Rear light: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-80x02x06x09-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
.
REAR LIGHT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Note:
On equipped vehicles, it is necessary to remove the rear light protection grille.
-1-
Remove:
the rivets(1) of the protection grille (see
the rear light protection grille.
MR 400),
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
Disconnect the connector(s) of the rear light.
Remove:
the rear light bolts,
the rear light.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Refit:
the rear light,
the rear light bolts.
Connect the connector(s) of the rear light.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the rear light protection grille, if fitted to the vehicle.
Replace the rivets of the rear light protection grille (see MR 400).
Repair-80x02x06x01-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
REAR LIGHTING: LIST AND LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
1. LIST OF COMPONENTS
1- THE " REAR LIGHTING " EQUIPMENT CONSISTS OF:
F62 J62(F62 OR J62)
the rear lights on the wing(see 81A, Rear lighting, Rear wing light: Removal - Refitting)
a high-level brake light(see 81A, Rear lighting, 3rd brake light: Removal - Refitting)
a high level brake light bulb(see 81A, Rear lighting, High level brake light bulb: Removal - Refitting)
E62 H62 U62(E62 OR H62 OR U62)
rear lights(see 81A, Rear lighting, Rear light: Removal - Refitting)
rear light bulbs(see 81A, Rear lighting, Rear light bulb: Removal - Refitting) (see 81A,Rear lighting, Rear light
bulb: Removal - Refitting)
the number plate lights(see 81A, Rear lighting, Number plate light: Removal - Refitting) (see 81A,Rear lighting,
Number plate light: Removal - Refitting)
2. LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
-1-
F62 J62(F62 OR J62)
REAR LIGHTS ON THE WING
REAR LIGHT BULBS ON THE WING
-2-
(1) Direction indicator bulb
(2) brake light and side light bulb
(3) reversing light bulb
(4) fog light bulb
HIGH LEVEL BRAKE LIGHT
-3-
HIGH LEVEL BRAKE LIGHT BULB
-4-
NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS
-5-
E62 H62 U62(E62 OR H62 OR U62)
REAR LIGHTS
-6-
REAR LIGHT BULBS
-7-
(1) Direction indicator bulb
(2) Brake light bulb
(3) Side light bulb
(4) Reversing light bulb
(5) Fog light bulb
NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS
-8-
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB
-9-
Repair-80x02x06-02x51-1-13-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
REAR LOADING DOOR HINGE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 52A, Non-side
opening element mechanisms, Rear opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove Rear opening element
opening elements trim):
assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view
(73A, Non-side
the rear right-hand loading door trim,
the rear left-hand loading door trim.
Remove the blanking cover of the rear loading door upper hinge nut(see 52A, Non-side
mechanisms , Rear opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
-1-
opening element
This operation can be carried out by one person using the DOOR SUPPORTtool. Otherwise this
work requires two people.
Number of Renault agreement: 661000
Part no.: SUP 01
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the door hinge(see 52A, Non-side
opening element mechanisms, Rear opening element box section
-2-
internal assembly: Exploded view)
.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x03x06x02-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
REAR LOADING DOOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Rear
section internal assembly: Exploded view (52A, Non-side opening element mechanisms).
opening element box
Note:
This operation can be carried out by one person using the DOOR SUPPORTtool.
Otherwise two people are required.
Number of Renault agreement: 661000.
Part no.: SUP 01.
1. REMOVAL WITHOUT THE HINGES
1- REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the rear right-hand loading door trimRear right-hand loading door trim: Removal - Refitting or the rear
left-hand loading door trimRear left-hand loading door trim: Removal - Refitting (73A, Non-side opening elements
trim).
Remove the blanking cover of the rear loading door upper hinge.
-1-
Remove:
the blanking cover of the rear loading door upper hinge,
the C-pillar trim.
Disconnect the connector from the rear loading door wiring.
Unlock the rear loading door stop runner.
2- REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove Rear opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view (52A, Non-side opening element
-2-
mechanisms):
the rear loading door hinge nuts on the door box section side,
the rear loading door hinge bolts on the door box section side,
the rear loading door (this operation requires two people).
2. REFITTING WITHOUT HINGES
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the clearances and flush fitting of the rear loading door(see 48A, Non-side opening elements,
loading door: Adjustment) .
Carry out a function test.
3. REMOVAL WITH HINGES
1- REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-3-
Rear
Remove the C-pillar trim.
Disconnect the connector from the rear loading door wiring.
Unlock the rear loading door stop runner.
2- REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove Rear opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view (52A, Non-side opening element
mechanisms):
the rear loading door bolts on the door box section,
the rear loading door (this operation requires two people).
-4-
4. REFITTING WITH HINGES
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the clearances and flush fitting of the rear loading door(see 48A, Non-side opening elements,
loading door: Adjustment) .
Carry out a function test.
Repair-40x10x16-01x37-1-6-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
Rear
REAR OPENING ELEMENT ASSEMBLY ON THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT SIDE: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
(01D, Mechanical introduction)
Mark
Description
1
Rear right-hand loading door trim clip
2
Rear right-hand loading door trim
3
3rd brake light access blanking cover
4
Rear loading door interior handle
5
Rear loading door locking control
6
Interior opening control of rear loading door
7
Rear left-hand loading door trim clip
8
Rear left-hand loading door trim
Information
(see 73A, Non-side opening elements trim,
Rear right-hand loading door trim: Removal - Refitting)
(see 73A, Non-side opening elements trim,
Rear left-hand loading door trim: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-70x04x01-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
(71A, Body internal trim)
(71A, Body internal trim)
REAR OPENING ELEMENT BOX SECTION INTERNAL ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Right-hand upper lock striker panel of rear loading door
2
Left-hand upper lock of rear loading door
3
Left-hand upper lock control cable of rear loading door
4
Internal opening control plate
5
Internal opening control
6
Bolt of internal opening control plate
7
Rear loading door stop cam
8
Rear loading door upper hinge
9
Right-hand upper lock of rear loading door
10
Right-hand upper lock control cable of rear loading door
11
Rear loading door exterior handle
12
Rivet of rear loading door exterior handle module
13
Rear loading door exterior opening control cable
14
Rear loading door exterior handle module
15
Rear loading door control plate
16
Rear loading door central lock
17
Rear loading door stop runner
18
Rear loading door lower hinge
19
Interior opening control of rear loading door
20
Rear loading door locking control
21
Rear loading door central striker panel
22
Reinforcement of rear loading door central striker panel
23
Left-hand lower lock control cable of rear loading door
24
Left-hand lower lock of rear loading door
(see 52A, Non-side
(see 52A, Non-side
opening element mechanisms, Loading door lock: Removal - Refitting)
opening element mechanisms, Rear loading door hinge: Removal - Refitting)
(see 52A, Non-side
opening element mechanisms, Loading door lock: Removal - Refitting)
(see Rear loading door exterior handle: Removal - Refitting)
(see 52A, Non-side
(see 52A, Non-side
opening element mechanisms, Rear loading door hinge: Removal - Refitting)
(see 52A, Non-side
Repair-50x03x27-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
opening element mechanisms, Loading door lock: Removal - Refitting)
opening element mechanisms, Loading door lock: Removal - Refitting)
REAR RIGHT-HAND LOADING DOOR TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 73A, Non-side
opening elements trim, Rear opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Remove the interior handle of the rear right-hand loading door at(1 ) using the toolSet of trim removal
levers. (Car. 1363 ) .
-2-
Remove:
the loading door locking control at(2) ,
the locking clip of the loading door interior opening control(3) at (4) using a flat-blade screwdriver,
the interior opening control of the rear loading door(5) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the rear loading right-hand door trim(see 73A, Non-side opening elements trim,
assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view ) .
-3-
Rear opening element
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x04x02x04-01x37-1-5-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
REAR ROOF: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Rear roof
Mild steel
0.75
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-1-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
Repair-40x07x08-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
by arc welding under
REAR SCREEN: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
F62(F62)
Protect the area around the rear screen with masking tape.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
F62(F62)
Cut the cement beadWindow detachment: Description (Technical Note 560A, 54A, Windows) (this
operation requires two people).
-1-
H62 U62(H62 OR U62)
Detach the rear screen (this operation requires two people).
Remove the rear screen.
REFITTING
F62(F62)
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
For the preparation and the bondingWindow bonding: Description (Technical Note 560A, 54A, Windows).
1. REFITTING OPERATION
-2-
F62(F62)
Bond the rear screen (this operation requires two people).
Secure the rear screen in position using masking tape.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
1. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x04x12x02-01x37-1-31-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
REAR SEAT BASE TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
parts always to be replaced:
Seat trim clip
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Remove the bolts(1 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove:
the clips,
the " foam and cover " assembly.
Detach the cover from the foam.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
Seat trim clip
.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x16x02x02-01x37-1-13-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
parts always to be replaced:
Rear seat belt buckle bolt
rear centre seat belt mounting
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Tilt the single unit rear bench seat base.
-1-
Remove:
the stud(1) ,
the rear centre seat belt lower mounting.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Remove:
the nuts(3) ,
the bolts,
the rear seat belt buckles.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
.
parts always to be replaced:
Rear seat belt buckle bolt
parts always to be replaced:
rear centre seat belt mounting
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-3-
.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten:
the nuts of the rear seat belt buckles27
the lower mounting of the rear centre
N.m,
seat belt30 N.m.
Repair-31x02x01x20-01x37-1-13-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
REAR SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the complete rear bench seat(see 76A, Rear seat frames and mechanisms, Complete rear bench
seat: Removal - Refitting) (see 76A,Rear seat frames and mechanisms, Complete rear bench seat: Removal - Refitting)
or the complete rear seat(see 76A, Rear seat frames and mechanisms, Complete rear seat: Removal - Refitting) .
-1-
REMOVABLE SEAT(SGAMOV)
Remove:
the bolts(1) and (2) ,
the seat locking system.
-2-
Remove the mounting plate(3 ) .
-3-
Remove:
the bolts(4) ,
the locking assembly protector.
-4-
Remove:
the bolts(5) and (6) ,
the locking supports.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-5-
Remove:
the bolts(7) ,
the seat height adjuster.
REFITTING
-6-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Tighten to torque:
the bolts of the seat height adjuster64
the bolts of the locking supports19
the bolts of the locking supports6
N.m(7) ,
N.m(6) ,
N.m(5) ,
the bolts of the locking assembly protector8
N.m(4) ,
the bolts of the seat locking system37
N.m(2) ,
the bolts of the seat locking system7,5
N.m (1) .
Repair-70x14x04x10-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
REAR SEATBACK TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the complete rear bench seatComplete rear bench seat: Removal - Refitting or the complete rear
seat Complete rear seat: Removal - Refitting .
Remove:
-1-
the bolts(1) ,
the rear seat base.
Unclip the blanking cover(2 ) .
Remove the bolts(2 ) .
Note:
Mark the lenght of the mounting bolts when they are removed.
-2-
Remove the backrest assembly at(3 ) .
Remove:
the bolts(4) ,
the side housing.
-3-
Remove:
the bolts(5) ,
the rear seat belt guide,
the seat belt return mechanism bolt.
-4-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Unclip the rear retaining sections.
Open the zip fastener.
Lift the rear seatback cover at(6 ) .
-5-
Extract retaining strip(7 ) .
Remove the rear seatback cover.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-6-
Always replace the bolt of the rear seat belt return mechanism.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the bolt of the rear seat belt return mechanism37 N.m.
Repair-70x16x02x04-01x37-1-11-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
REAR SECTION OF FRONT SIDE MEMBER CLOSURE PANEL:
REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Front side member closure panel, rear section
THLE
1.5
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x02x06x18-02x49-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER IMPACT STOP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Place the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove (1 ) the rear shock absorber impact stop.
Note:
Do not use sharp tool to avoid damaging the rear shock absorber impact stop.
Remove the rear shock absorber impact stop cup(2 ) .
-2-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the rear shock absorber impact stop cup bolt62 N.m.
Refit the rear shock absorber impact stop until hearing the " clac " .
2. FINAL OPERATION
-3-
Check the fitting of the rear shock absorber impact stop by turning and pulling it downward.
Repair-13x02x06x11-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
REAR SIDE DOOR LOCK: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 51A, Side
element mechanisms, Rear side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the rear side door interior opening control(see 51A, Side
opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening element mechanisms, Rear side
Remove the rear side door trim (72A, Side opening element trim).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the rear side door lock partially(see 51A, Side
element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening element mechanisms, Rear side opening
Disconnect the connector of the rear side door lock.
Unclip the rear side door exterior opening control cable(see 51A, Side
side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
Remove the front side door lock(see 51A, Side
section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening element mechanisms, Rear
opening element mechanisms, Rear side opening element box
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x02x08x08-01x37-1-15-1.xml
-1-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
REAR SIDE DOOR SILL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the side trim of the passenger compartment partition(see 71A, Body internal trim, Passenger compartment
partition trim: Removal - Refitting) ,
the rear door sill lining(see 71A, Body internal trim, Rear door sill lining: Removal - Refitting) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the retaining bar.
-1-
Remove the rear side door sill.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-2-
-3-
Check the bonding and condition of the velcro strips, and replace them if necessary.
Check the positioning and bonding of the shims.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x02x03x01-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
REAR SIDE DOOR SILL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove:
the blanking covers(1) ,
the bolts(2) ,
the rear side door sill.
-1-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x02x03x01-01x37-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
REAR SIDE DOOR SLIDING WINDOW: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exterior
element assembly: Exploded view .
rear side opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Detach the opening window assembly of the rear side doorExterior
Exploded view .
rear side opening element assembly:
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Position the fitting cord in the groove of the frame of the opening window assembly of the rear side
door.
Fit the opening window assembly of the rear side door.
Repair-50x04x08x06-01x37-1-19-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
REAR SIDE DOOR TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 72A, Side opening
element trim , Rear side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view ) (72A, Side
opening elements trim).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the rear loading door interior opening control(see 72A, Side opening element trim, Rear side
opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side: Exploded view) (72A, Side opening elements trim).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (see 72A, Side opening element trim, Rear side opening element assembly on the passenger compartment side:
Exploded view ) (72A, Side opening elements trim):
the clips of the rear loading door trim,
the rear loading door trim.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x03x02x04-01x37-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
REAR SIDE DOOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exterior
element assembly: Exploded view (51A, Side opening element mechanisms).
rear side opening
Note:
This operation can be carried out by one person using the DOOR SUPPORTtool.
Otherwise two people are required.
Number of Renault agreement: 661000.
Part no.: SUP 01.
-1-
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-2-
Unclip the sheath stop of the rear side door lower unlocking cable.
Unclip the stop of the rear side door lower unlocking cable.
Remove the trim of the rear side door central runnerExterior
view (51A, Side opening element mechanisms).
rear side opening element assembly: Exploded
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove Rear side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view (51A, Side opening element
mechanisms):
-3-
the bolts of the rear side opening element upper slide,
the bolts of the rear side opening element lower slide,
the rear side door by sliding the central slide.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the rear side door clearances and flush fittings(see 47A, Side
Adjustment ) .
Carry out a function test.
Repair-40x10x04-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
opening elements, Rear side door:
REAR SIDE OPENING ELEMENT ASSEMBLY ON THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT SIDE: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Mark
Description
Information
1
Rear side door interior opening control
Sliding side door opening controls: Removal - Refitting
2
Clip of rear side door interior opening control
3
Trim of rear side door interior opening control
4
Rear side door locking control
5
Rear side door trim
6
Rear side door trim clip
7
Rear side door seal
(see 72A, Side opening element trim,
Repair-70x03x02x26-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-1-
Sliding side door trim: Removal - Refitting)
REAR SIDE OPENING ELEMENT BOX SECTION INTERNAL ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Sliding side door upper drive mechanism
2
Sliding side door upper stop
3
Upper female centring device of sliding side door
4
Upper male centring device of sliding side door
5
Trim of rear side door interior opening control
6
Clip of rear side door interior opening control
7
Rear side door interior opening control
8
Rear side door locking control
9
Sliding side door male switch
10
Sliding side door female switch
11
Lower male centring device of sliding side door
12
Lower female centring device of sliding side door
13
Sliding side door lower drive mechanism
14
Sliding side door lower stop
15
Sliding side door lower runner
16
Sliding side door stop striker panel
17
Sliding side door stop
18
Striker panel of sliding side door centre lock
19
Sliding side door control plate
20
Sliding side door exterior handle module
21
Sliding side door centre lock
22
Sliding side door centre drive mechanism
(see 51A, Side
opening element mechanisms, Sliding side door carriage: Removal - Refitting)
23
Sliding side door centre runner
(see 51A, Side
opening element mechanisms, Sliding side door runners: Removal - Refitting)
24
Sliding side door upper runner
(see 51A, Side
opening element mechanisms, Sliding side door runners: Removal - Refitting)
(see 51A, Side
opening element mechanisms, Sliding side door carriage: Removal - Refitting)
(see 51A, Side
opening element mechanisms, Sliding side door carriage: Removal - Refitting)
(see 51A, Side
opening element mechanisms, Sliding side door runners: Removal - Refitting)
(see Sliding side opening element actuator: Removal - Refitting)
(see 51A, Side
Repair-50x02x24-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
opening element mechanisms, Sliding side door lock: Removal - Refitting)
REAR SIDE OPENING ELEMENT DRIVE MECHANISM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note:
Apply the sliding side door initialisation procedure after carrying out work(see 51A,
Side opening element mechanisms, Rear side opening element drive mechanism: Adjustment)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the battery
Battery: Removal - Refitting
.
Remove:
the complete rear seatComplete rear seat: Removal - Refitting ,
the side access railSide access rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the rear side opening element trimRear side opening element trim: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Partially remove the upper body rear trim(1 ) .
Unclip the B-pillar lower trim(2 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- ELECTRIC LOCKING STRICKER PLATE
-2-
Remove:
the reinforcement pillar plate bolts(3) ,
the reinforcement pillar plate.
-3-
-4-
Remove the electric locking stricker plate bolts(4 ) .
Rotate the electric locking stricker plate actuator(5 ) to disconnect the actuator connector(6 ) .
Remove the electric locking stricker plate.
2- ANTI-PINCH SENSOR
-5-
Disconnect the anti-pinch sensor connector(8 ) .
Remove the anti-pinch sensor rivets(7 ) .
Remove the anti-pinch sensor.
3- EMERGENCY INTERIOR HANDLE
-6-
Unclip the sheath stop(9 ) .
Remove:
the cable stop(10) ,
the emergency handle bolts(11) ,
the emergency handle with its cable.
4- " CONTROL PLATE " ASSEMBLY
-7-
Disconnect the side opening element lock connector(12 ) .
Unclip the sheath stop(13 ) of the side opening element lock manual control cable.
Remove:
the side opening element lock manual control cable stop(14) ,
the control plate bolts(15) .
Move aside the control plate.
-8-
Remove the spring(16 ) .
Extract the reinforcement plate at(17 ) from the control plate.
-9-
Return the control plate to get access to the cables.
Unclip the sheath stop(18 ) of the clutch motor cable.
Remove the clutch motor cable stop(19 ) .
Unclip the sheath stop of the exterior opening control cable.
Remove the exterior opening control cable stop(21 ) .
Remove the control plate.
- 10 -
5- EMERGENCY EXTERIOR HANDLE
Move aside the " control plate " assembly
Unclip the sheath stop(22 ) .
Remove:
the cable stop(23) ,
the emergency handle bolts(24) ,
the emergency handle with its cable.
- 11 -
6- ELECTRIC SLIDING SIDE DOOR COMPUTER
Disconnect the connectors.
Remove:
the computer bolts(25) ,
the electric sliding side door computer.
7- ROLLER SWITCH
- 12 -
Remove:
the wiring bolts(26) ,
the roller switch bolts(27) ,
the roller swith.
8- ACTUATOR
- 13 -
Disconnect the actuator connector(28 ) .
Unclip the sheath stop(29 ) of the actuator control cable.
Remove:
the actuator control cable stop(30) ,
the electric door computer support plate bolts(31) .
Extract and return the electric door computer support plate.
Remove:
- 14 -
the actuator bolts(32) ,
the actuator.
9- ELECTRIC DOOR MOTOR
Cut the retaining clips at(33 ) .
- 15 -
Remove the electric door motor support plate bolts(34 ) .
Lower the electric door motor support plate slightly.
Unclip the sheath stop(35 ) of the electric door motor cable.
- 16 -
Remove the electric door motor cable stop from the lever(36 ) .
Remove:
the electric door motor bolts(37) ,
the electric door motor.
10- REAR SIDE OPENING ELEMENT LOCK
- 17 -
Remove the rear side opening element lock(38 ) (see 51A, Side
opening element lock: Removal - Refitting) .
11- DOOR REMOVING TOOL
Fit the tool DOOR SUPPORT(39 ) .
- 18 -
opening element mechanisms, Rear side
Note:
It is necessary to hold the sliding side door using the tool DOOR SUPPORT.
Number of Renault agreement: 661000.
Part no.: SUP 01.
12- SLIDING SIDE DOOR CARRIAGE
Remove the end piece of sliding side door centre runner(see 51A, Side
Exterior rear side opening element assembly: Exploded view) .
- 19 -
opening element mechanisms,
Remove:
the reinforcement carriage plate bolts(40) ,
the reinforcement carriage plate(41) .
- 20 -
Remove the reinforcement carriage spacer.
- 21 -
Remove:
the drive belt clip holder bolts(42) ,
the drive belt clip holder.
- 22 -
Extract (43 ) from the runner the " drive belt rear mounting support " assembly(44 ) .
Slide the door carriage out of the runner.
13- SLIDING SIDE DOOR CENTERING PLATES
- 23 -
Remove:
the centering plate bolts(45) ,
the centering plate from the sliding side door.
Remove:
the centering plate bolts(46) ,
the centering plate from the body
14- SLIDING SIDE DOOR WIRING
- 24 -
Drill the rivets(47 ) .
Cut the retaining clips(48 ) .
Disconnect the sliding side door wiring connector(49 ) .
15- WIRING ROUTING TIE-BAR AND WIRING ROUTING PLATE
- 25 -
Drill the rivets(50 ) .
Move aside the wiring routing tie-bar.
Extract the sliding side door wiring.
- 26 -
Unclip the wiring mountings in the door box section.
Remove:
the wiring routing plate clips(51) ,
the wiring routing plate.
- 27 -
16- SLIDING SIDE DOOR STOP
- 28 -
Remove the sliding side door stop bolt(52 ) behind the threaded rod.
Extract from the rail the sliding side door stop.
REFITTING
- 29 -
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
1- ANTI-PINCH SENSOR
In the event of a replacement, bond the new anti-pinch sensor on the two mounting supports.
2- ELECTRIC DOOR COMPUTER
Replace the electric door computer after 100 000 cycles.
3- SLIDING SIDE DOOR CARRIAGE
Check all the 50 000 cycles the sliding side door carriage at the centre runner area, replace it if
necessary.
1)END PIECE OF SLIDING SIDE DOOR CENTRE RUNNER REPLACEMENT
- 30 -
Cut the face(53 ) in contact with the centre runner.
Deburr the cutting area.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
1- ELECTRIC LOCKING STRICKER PLATE
Torque tighten:
the electric locking stricker plate bolts15
the reinforcement pillar plate bolts9
N.m,
N.m.
2- EMERGENCY HANDLE
Adjust the cable tension before refitting the emergency handle(see 51A, Side
mechanisms , Rear side opening element drive mechanism: Adjustment) .
Torque tighten the emergency handle bolts7 N.m.
3- " CONTROL PLATE " ASSEMBLY
Torque tighten the control plate bolts8 N.m.
4- ELECTRIC SLIDING SIDE DOOR COMPUTER
- 31 -
opening element
Torque tighten the computer bolts9 N.m.
5- ROLLER SWITCH
Torque tighten the roller switch bolts2 N.m.
6- ACTUATOR
Torque tighten the actuator bolts9 N.m.
7- ELECTRIC DOOR MOTOR
Torque tighten:
the electric door motor bolts9
N.m,
the electric door motor support plate bolts9
N.m.
8- SLIDING SIDE DOOR CARRIAGE
Torque tighten:
the drive belt clip holder bolts2
N.m,
the reinforcement carriage plate bolts22
N.m.
9- SLIDING SIDE DOOR CENTERING PLATES
Torque tighten the centering plate bolts on the sliding side door9 N.m.
- 32 -
Torque tighten the centering plate bolts on the body9 N.m.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Rear
Adjust the rear side opening element drive mechanism(see 51A, Side
side opening element drive mechanism: Adjustment) .
Initialise the system (see 51A, Side
mechanism: Adjustment ) .
opening element mechanisms,
opening element mechanisms, Rear side opening element drive
Repair-50x02x14x05-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 33 -
REAR SIDE SEAT BELT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
parts always to be replaced:
Rear seat belt inertia reel bolt
Note:
The rear seat belt must be handled by the inertia reel (risk of damaging the strap).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the trim of the single unit rear bench seatbackSingle
Refitting (78A, Rear seat trim).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
unit rear bench seatback trim: Removal -
Remove:
the bolt(1) of the rear side seat belt inertia reel,
the rear side seat belt.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-2-
parts always to be replaced:
Rear seat belt inertia reel bolt
.
Always replace the bolt of the rear side seat belt lower mounting.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the rear side seat belt inertia reel bolt30 N.m.
Note:
Ensure that the rear side seat belt strap is not twisted between the inertia reel and the
lower mounting of the rear side seat belt.
3. CHECKING AFTER REPAIR
Check for correct operation twice by unreeling the rear side seat belt 300 mmand allowing it to return.
Check that the rear side seat belt locks correctly by pulling the rear side seat belt with increasing
speed 200 to 300 mmmaximum until the inertia reel locks.
Repair-31x02x01x24-01x37-1-18-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
REAR SPEAKERS: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
Turn the rear speaker grille(1 ) a quarter turn clockwise.
-1-
Remove the bolts(2 ) .
Remove the speaker.
Disconnect the connector.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x04x06x08-01x37-1-23-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
REAR SUSPENSION SPRING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
component jack
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear axle assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Remove:
the bolt(1) of the parking brake cable support,
the bolt(2) of the brake pad warning light support.
-2-
Disconnect the connector(4 ) of the rear brake pad wear warning light.
-3-
Unclip the wiring of the rear brake pad wear warning light from the brake calliper at(5 ) .
-4-
Disconnect the connector(8 ) of the rear wheel speed sensor.
Unclip the connector of the rear wheel speed sensor at(9 ) .
-5-
Unclip the wiring of the rear wheel speed sensor from the body at(10 ) .
1- IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH AN ANTI-ROLL BAR
Remove the bolt of the rear anti-roll bar tie rod from the body(see 33A, Rear
assembly: Exploded view) .
Fit a
component jackunder
Strap the rear axle to the
axle components, Rear axle
the rear axle.
component jack.
Remove the lower bolt of the rear shock absorber(see 33A, Rear
Exploded view ) .
axle components, Rear axle assembly:
Loosen the upper bolt of the rear shock absorber(see 33A, Rear
Exploded view ) .
axle components, Rear axle assembly:
-6-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Mark the position of the leaf spring clamp plates on the suspension springs using an
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle assembly: Exploded view) :
the leaf spring U-bolts,
the leaf spring clamp.
Lower the rear axle approximately 20 cm.
Undo (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle assembly: Exploded view) :
the bolts of the suspension leaf springs,
the suspension shackle bolt.
-7-
indelible
pencil.
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle assembly: Exploded view) :
the suspension shackle,
the suspension leaf springs.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-8-
Note:
Correctly position the leaf spring centring pin on the rear axle.
Refit the leaf spring clamp plates in the position marked during removal.
Repair-13x02x06x07-01x37-1-31-1.xml
-9-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
REAR SUSPENSION SPRING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
component jack
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear axle assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) of the rear brake pad wear warning light.
-2-
Unclip the wiring of the rear brake pad wear warning light from the brake calliper at(2 ) .
-3-
Remove:
the support bolt(3) ,
the support.
-4-
Disconnect the connector(4 ) from the rear wheel speed sensor.
Unclip the connector from the rear wheel speed sensor at(5 ) .
-5-
Unclip the wiring of the rear wheel speed sensor from the body at(6 ) .
IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH AN ANTI-ROLL BAR
-6-
Remove the bolt(7 ) of the rear anti-roll bar tie rod from the body.
Fit a
component jackunder
Strap the rear axle to the
the rear axle.
component jack.
Remove the lower bolt of the rear shock absorber(see 33A, Rear
-7-
axle components, Rear axle assembly:
Exploded view
).
Loosen the upper bolt of the rear shock absorber(see 33A, Rear
Exploded view ) .
Lower the rear axle approximately 20 cm.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-8-
axle components, Rear axle assembly:
Mark the position of the leaf spring clamp plates on the suspension springs using an
indelible
.
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle assembly: Exploded view) :
the leaf spring U-bolts,
the leaf spring clamp.
Undo (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle assembly: Exploded view) :
the suspension leaf spring bolts,
the suspension shackle bolt.
Remove the suspension leaf spring(see 33A, Rear
view
).
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-9-
axle components, Rear axle assembly: Exploded
pencil
- 10 -
Note:
Correctly position the leaf spring centring pin on the rear axle.
Refit the leaf spring clamp plates in the position marked during removal.
- 11 -
Repair-13x02x06x07-01x37-1-30-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 12 -
REAR WHEEL ARCH EXTENSION: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Rear wheel arch extension
Mild steel
1
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
The option for replacing this part is as follows:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weld(see Connections by arc welding
under shielding gas: Description) (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections
(GMAW)).
1- POSITION OF ELECTRIC EARTHS
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Earth screw connection: Description) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaAND
(F62) F62.
2- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
-3-
Repair-40x09x16x08-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
REAR WHEEL HUB: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Mark the position of the rear brake hose cap on the rear axle using an
Unclip the rear brake hose cap from the rear axle.
-2-
indelible
pencil.
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the rear brake pad wear warning light.
-3-
Unclip the wiring of the rear brake pad wear warning light at(2 ) .
Remove the rear brake calliper mounting bolts(see 33A, Rear
assembly: Exploded view) .
axle components, Rear brake calliper
Move aside the " calliper mounting - brake calliper " assembly.
Attach the " calliper mounting - brake calliper " assembly to the leaf springs.
Remove the rear brake disc(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view)
-4-
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) :
the rear driveshaft,
the rear wheel hub equipped with the seal.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use SURFACE CLEANERVehicle:
clean the rear hub.
Parts and consumables for the repair
(04B, Consumables - Products) to
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Clip the rear brake hose cap onto the axle, aligning the marks made during removal.
Repair-13x02x05x09-01x37-1-5-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
REAR WHEEL HUB: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
indelible pencil
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the rear wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Mark the position of the rear brake hose cap(1 ) on the rear axle using an
Unclip the rear brake hose cap(1 ) from the rear axle.
SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE RIGHT-HAND SIDE
-2-
indelible
pencil.
Disconnect the connector(2 ) from the rear brake pad wear warning light.
-3-
Unclip the wiring of the rear brake pad wear warning light at(3 ) .
Remove the rear brake calliper mounting bolts(see 33A, Rear
assembly: Exploded view) .
axle components, Rear brake calliper
Move aside the " calliper mounting - brake calliper " assembly.
Attach the " calliper mounting - brake calliper " assembly to the leaf springs.
Remove the rear brake discs(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view)
-4-
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (see 33A,
the rear
the rear
the rear
Rear axle components, Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) :
wheel hub cover plug,
wheel hub nut,
wheel hub.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleanerVehicle:
the rear hub carrier.
Parts and consumables for the repair
(04B, Consumables - Products) to clean
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Clip the rear brake hose cap onto the rear axle, aligning the marks made using an
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-13x02x05x09-01x37-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
indelible
pencil.
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Rear
assembly: Exploded view .
hub carrier
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 38C, Anti-lock braking system, ABS: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the rear wheel speed sensor.
-2-
-3-
-4-
Unclip the wiring from the wheel speed sensor at(2 ) .
Remove Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view :
the rear wheel speed sensor bolt,
the rear wheel speed sensor.
-5-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the wheel speed sensor cable:
Do not tension the cable,
Do not twist the cable,
Check that there is no contact with the surrounding components,
Do not use tools that may damage the cable.
Repair-13x03x10x04-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
REAR WING LIGHT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Unclip the upper grille to access the rear wing light by pressing on the clips(1 ) using the toolSet of
trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) (2 ) .
Separate the upper grille to access the rear wing light.
-2-
-3-
Remove the lower grille to access the rear wing light by pressing on the clips(3 ) using the tool
Set of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) (4 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
Remove the upper butterfly nut of the rear wing light.
-5-
Remove the lower butterfly nut of the rear wing light.
Note:
When extracting the rear light on the body wing, the loading door must be closed.
-6-
Partially remove the rear wing light at(5 ) .
Disconnect the connector from the rear light on the wing.
Remove the rear light on the wing.
-7-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to refitting.
Repair-80x02x06x02-01x37-1-36-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
RECIRCULATION MOTOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 61A, Heating,
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the gloveboxGlovebox:
Removal - Refitting
(57A, Interior equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the recirculation motor connector.
Remove the recirculation motor(see 61A, Heating,
Exploded view ) .
Passenger compartment heating and ventilation assembly:
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Place the recirculation flap in the open position.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Climate control computer " ,
go to repair mode,
-1-
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " Air recirculation flap actuator " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-30x02x04x07-01x37-1-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT: DRAINING - FILLING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
refrigerant charging station
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before
carrying out any repair(see 62A, Air conditioning, Air conditioning: Precautions for the repair) .
CAUTION
Consult the device's operating manual to avoid incorrect use.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the cold loop components (corrosions, etc.), do not use dye if the
traces reveal that some product has already been injected.
-1-
Note:
A summary table gives the quantities of refrigerant in the system according to the
engine type (see 62A, Air conditioning, Air conditioning: Parts and consumables for the repair) .
1. RECOVERING REFRIGERANT FLUID
Note:
If the air conditioning circuit is fitted with a single filler valve, some filling equipment only
requires the use of the high pressure pipe (refer to the filling station instructions).
Depending on the situation, run the system for a few minutes before recovering the coolant
to improve drainage.
Note:
It is essential to follow these procedures to prevent:
- gas escaping when the circuit is opened,
- pollution of the environment through the release of gas into the atmosphere when the
circuit is opened or when a vacuum is created.
When draining
the
the
the
or checking the refrigerant fill load, three scenarios are to be taken into account:
engine is running and the air conditioning is in operation (A),
engine is running but the air conditioning is not in operation (B),
engine is not running nor is the air conditioning in operation (C).
Scenario A:
Operate the air conditioning until the cooling fan assembly is triggered twice,
Switch off the engine,
drain for the first time (note down the original value),
wait
15 minutes,
check that the relative pressure is no more than
0 bar,
repeat the cycles until the relative pressure is equal to or less than 0 bar,
add together the values of the various draining operations; the fill is confirmed as being correct if the volume of
refrigerant fluid is the specified fill
+35gor -100g.
Scenario B:
run the engine until the cooling fan is triggered twice,
Switch off the engine,
drain for the first time (note down the value),
-2-
wait 15 minutes,
run the engine until the cooling fan is triggered twice,
Switch off the engine,
drain for the second time (note down the value),
repeat the cycles until the relative pressure is equal to or less than 0 bar,
add together the values of the various draining operations; the fill is confirmed as being correct if the volume of
refrigerant fluid is the specified fill
+35gor -100g.
Scenario C:
drain for the first time (note down the value),
wait
2 hours,
repeat the cycles until the relative pressure is equal to or less than 0 bar,
add together the values of the various draining operations; the fill is confirmed as being correct if the volume of
refrigerant fluid is the specified fill
+35gor -100g.
2. CREATING A VACUUM
It is essential to carry out vacuum extraction correctly before loading, otherwise the air conditioning
will not work properly.
There are two scenarios to consider:
vacuum created immediately after discharge (scenario A),
vacuum created after an interval of several hours or days (scenario B).
Scenario A:
creation of a vacuum takes
20 minutes.
Scenario B:
creation of a vacuum takes
45 minutesto
eliminate any trace of moisture.
Test the seal once the vacuum has been created (some stations do this automatically).
3. FILLING
Fill up the refrigerant circuit using the
refrigerant charging station.
Top up the oil with the recommended type and volume of oil and refrigerant, depending on the work
carried out (see 62A, Air conditioning, Air conditioning: Parts and consumables for the repair) .
Check there are no leaks using
the electronic detector(see
-3-
62A, Air conditioning,
Refrigerant circuit: Check)
.
CAUTION
After injecting dye into the refrigerant, be sure to indicate this on a label (supplied with
the dye capsule), and the date of the operation.
Position the label so it is visible near to the cold loop filler valve.
Check that the air conditioning system is operating correctly(see 62A, Air conditioning,
Check ) .
Repair-30x02x02x02-01x73-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
Air conditioning:
REFRIGERANT PIPE SEAL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
Equipment required
refrigerant charging station
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 62A, Air conditioning, Air conditioning: Precautions for the repair)
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Drain the refrigerant circuit using the
Draining - Filling ) .
refrigerant charging station(see
62A, Air conditioning,
Refrigerant circuit:
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the connecting pipe concerned:
(see Condenser - evaporator connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see 62A, Air conditioning, Condenser - expansion valve connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
-1-
(see 62A, Air conditioning, Rear condenser - front condenser connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see Evaporator - dehydrator reservoir connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see 62A, Air conditioning, Compressor - rear condenser connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see Condenser - evaporator connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see Compressor - dehydrator reservoir connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see Dehydrator reservoir - rear expansion valve connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see Main expansion valve - additional expansion valve pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see 62A, Air conditioning, Expansion valve - intermediate pipe connecting pipe at the expansion valve outlet:
Removal - Refitting)
(see Dehydrator reservoir - expansion valve connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see Condenser - dehydrator reservoir connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see Expansion valve - compressor connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see 62A, Air conditioning, Expansion valve - rear expansion valve connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see Rear expansion valve - compressor connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see 62A, Air conditioning, Compressor - condenser connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
(see 62A, Air conditioning, Compressor - intermediate pipe connecting pipe: Removal - Refitting)
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-2-
Remove the seal from the connecting pipe using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
Fit blanking plugs.
-3-
Clean the surface of the pipe(see 62A, Air conditioning,
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Refit the seal on the connecting pipe.
-4-
Refrigerant circuit pipe seal: Cleaning)
.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Note:
A summary table gives the quantities of refrigerant in the system according to the
engine types (see 62A, Air conditioning, Air conditioning: Parts and consumables for the repair)
.
Connect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Perform the following operations:
refill the refrigerant circuit using the refrigerant charging station(see 62A, Air conditioning, Refrigerant circuit:
Draining - Filling) ,
check for leaks(see 62A, Air conditioning, Refrigerant circuit: Check) .
Check that the air conditioning system is operating correctly(see 62A, Air conditioning,
Check ) .
Repair-30x02x02x52-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
Air conditioning:
REMOTE HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT ACTUATOR: REMOVAL REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
Disconnect the headlight beam adjustment actuator connector.
-1-
Tighten the beam adjustment bolt(1 ) by a few turns.
Turn the headlight beam adjustment actuator an eighth of a turn clockwise.
Disconnect the ball joint from the headlight reflector shell clip by gently tilting the headlight beam
adjustment actuator upwards.
REFITTING
-2-
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Note:
When refitting a new headlight beam adjustment motor, tighten the beam adjustment
bolt by a few turns.
2. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
-3-
Remove the cover(2 ) of the dipped beam headlight bulb.
Keep the reflector shell towards the rear of the lens unit.
Connect the ball joint with the headlight reflector shell clip by gently tilting the headlight beam
adjustment actuator downwards.
Note:
The ball joint should not just be in contact with the clip; it must be fitted into it.
Refit the headlight beam adjustment actuator by turning it an eighth of a turn anti-clockwise.
Refit the dipped beam headlight bulb cover.
Connect the headlight beam adjustment motor connector.
Check and inflate the tyresTyre pressure: Identification (35A, Wheels and tyres).
Adjust the headlight beam(see 80B, Headlights ,
Headlight: Adjustment )
Repair-80x02x02x12-01x37-1-13-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
.
REMOTE HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT CONTROL: REMOVAL REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Unclip the plate using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) (1 ) .
Disconnect the connectors from the plate.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (2 ) the remote headlight beam adjustment control by pressing on the clips(3 ) .
-2-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x04x03x14-01x37-1-18-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
REVERSE GEAR SWITCH: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Socket for removing/refitting reverse gear switch
Bvi. 1934
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the
safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 21A, Manual
gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view ) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) from the reverse gear switch.
Remove the reverse gear switch using the toolSocket for removing/refitting reverse gear switch(Bvi.
1934 ) (see 21A, Manual gearbox , Gearbox assembly: Exploded view ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-12x01x10-01x37-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
RIGHT-HAND SUSPENDED ENGINE MOUNTING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly
Mot. 1390
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19D, Engine
mounting, Engine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the nut from the electric coolant pump support at the turbocharger outletCoolant circuit assembly: Exploded
view .
Move the electric coolant pump away from the turbocharger outlet.
-1-
Unclip the wiring(1 ) from the engine mounting.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Position the Support for removal - refitting of engine - gearbox assembly(Mot. 1390 ) under the engine.
Remove the following from the engine mounting(see 19D, Engine mounting, Engine-gearbox unit support assembly:
Exploded view ) :
the bolt of the front left-hand rubber pad,
the bolt of the front right-hand rubber pad.
-3-
Remove the engine mounting bolts(2 ) .
Move the engine mounting aside.
Remove the front right-hand rubber pad(see 19D, Engine mounting,
Exploded view ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-4-
Engine-gearbox unit support assembly:
Torque tighten the engine mounting bolts62 N.m.
Repair-10x04x01x03-01x37-1-81-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
RIGID BRAKE PIPE: REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
compressed air nozzle
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
Precautions for the repair
This procedure applies to copper pipes diameter 4.7 mm.
Note:
This procedure does not apply to:
hybrid pipes (pipe + hose),
pipes with diameters
6 mmand 8 mm.
The tightening torques specified in this method only apply to refitted pipes. In the case of factory-fitted pipes (pipes not refitted), refer to the tightening torque procedure(see 30A, General
information, Brake circuit: Tightening torque) .
REPAIR
1. PIPE PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
To avoid causing a breakdown in hydraulic brake circuit , do not squash or bend the rigid pipe when cutting.
Cut the pipe at the desired length using a pipe cutter.
-1-
Put the nuts or bolts on the pipe before forming the rivets.
2. MAKING THE RIVETS
Note:
To make the rivets, fit the rivet press in a vice.
Fit the pipe in the rivet press.
Adjust the length of the pipe to be shaped.
Torque tighten the press end piece ( 40 N.m).
3. CHECKING THE RIVETS
-2-
Visually inspect:
the uniformity of the rivets' diameter,
the rivet centring in relation to the pipe shaft.
Visually check that the internal diameter of the pipe is not oval-shaped.
-3-
Check that the diameter of the end panel is not oval shaped using a sliding calliper.
Correct diameter if(X1 ) = (X2 )
4. PREPARATION OF THE PIPE BEFORE BENDING
Note:
Impurities may spread inside the pipe while the rivets are being made.
Blow inside the pipe in both directions using a
compressed air nozzle.
Put plugs on the bolts or nuts at the ends of the pipe.
Put the original pipe on a flat base plate that is the length of the pipe.
Measure the dimensions(X3 ) (in mm) curve after curve, between each curve radius " centre " (1 ) of the old pipe.
-4-
CAUTION
To avoid weakening the pipe, either bend once or bend progressively by increasing the bend (that is, by continually decreasing the curve radius). Do not install a rigid
pipe on a vehicle that may have been bended and then unbended alternatively to reach the correct curve radius.
Note:
During the bending operation, the required angle should be passed slightly in order to compensate for material elasticity.
Shape the pipe using a bender, curve after curve, while respecting the original shape of the pipe.
5. CHECKING BENDING
-5-
Check the out-of-roundness of the outer diameter at the centre of the curve radius(2) using a sliding calliper (the out-of-roundness of the outer diameter is correct if it is less than 10% flattening):
nominal diameter of the pipe:
4.75 mm,
minimum diameter after bending:
4.30 mm.
6. REFITTING THE PIPE
Note:
When refitting the rigid brake pipe:
respect the original routing as much as possible,
adjust the pipe routing by hand when fitting inside the clips.
CAUTION
Contact points between the rigid brake pipe and the surrounding components could cause damage to the pipe. In order to avoid these contacts, adjust the pipe routing
by hand.
-6-
Torque tighten the brake pipe bolts14 N.m.
Torque tighten the underbody unions (female/male)10 N.m.
Repair-13x03x09x01-01x22-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
ROCKER COVER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Top dead centre locating pin.
Mot. 1766
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Remove the timing chain(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
.
EMISSION CONTROL EURO 05 WITH OBD(E05A-Euro 05 with OBD)
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Remove:
the
the
the
the
the
the
vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls),
high pressure pipe between the pump and the rail(see High pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal - Refitting) ,
oil decanter(see 11A, Top and front of engine, Oil decanter: Removal - Refitting) ,
diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors(see High pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal - Refitting) ,
diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the bolts(1 ) and (2 ) of the fuel collector outlet pipe of the cylinder head.
Disconnect the fuel collector outlet pipe from the cylinder head at(3 ) .
Move aside the fuel collector outlet pipe from the cylinder head.
-1-
Precautions for the repair
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove the high pressure pump .
Remove the turbocharger strut(13 ) .
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensor mounting bolt(14 ) .
-2-
Remove the pipe(15 ) from the exhaust manifold.
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensor.
Remove the lifting eye bolts(16 ) .
Remove the lifting eye.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
Remove the rocker cover bolts.
Position a protective shim on the cylinder head.
Detach the rocker cover using a flat-blade screwdriver, using the shim for leverage.
Remove the rocker cover - camshafts assembly.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use super cleaning agent for joint facesVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean:
the rocker cover gasket face,
the cylinder head joint face.
CAUTION
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face will result in a risk of leaks.
CAUTION
Clean the cylinder head carefully to avoid any foreign bodies entering the oil return and supply pipes.
Failure to follow this advice could lead to the blocking of the various oil inlet galleries, which would quickly result in engine damage.
-4-
Remove the residue using a plastic spatula.
Finish cleaning the joint faces using a Grey Abrasive PadVehicle:
Parts and consumables for the repair
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Use SURFACE CLEANERVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean:
the rocker cover gasket face,
the cylinder head joint face.
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy (avoid any finger marks).
CAUTION
Applying excess sealant could cause it to be squeezed out when parts are tightened. A mixture of sealant and fluid could damage certain components (engine, radiator,
etc.).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Apply a bead of SILICONE ADHESIVE SEALANT(see Vehicle:
(4 ) , (5 ) , (6 ) .
Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B,
Consumables - Products) with a diameter of 1.5 ± 1 mmto the cylinder head at
Fit two studs (M6 - length 60 mm) into the holes(7 ) and (8 ) on the cylinder head to guide the rocker cover.
-5-
Position:
the groove on the exhaust side of the camshaft(9) horizontally (large clearance(10) facing upwards),
the groove on the inlet side of the camshaft(11) facing towards the rocker cover boss(12) .
Check that cylinders 1 and 4 are at Top Dead Centre using theTop dead centre locating pin.(Mot. 1766 ) (see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Refit the rocker cover - camshafts assembly.
-6-
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
.
Tighten in order and successively, the rocker cover bolts (12),
(15), (18)and (21)to
gradually fit the rocker cover on the cylinder head.
Remove the two rocker cover guide studs.
Fit without tightening the remaining rocker cover bolts.
Loosen bolts
(12), (15), (18)and (21).
Fit without tightening bolts (12),
(15), (18)and (21).
Tighten the rocker cover bolts in order.
Clean the excess silicone adhesive sealant on the timing and coupling faces using a plastic spatula.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Connect the fuel collector outlet pipe of the cylinder head.
Tighten the bolts of the fuel collector outlet pipe of the cylinder head.
-7-
Refit:
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectors(see High pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal - Refitting) ,
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil decanter(see 11A, Top and front of engine, Oil decanter: Removal - Refitting) ,
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the rail(see High pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal - Refitting) ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls).
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Refit the hight pressure pump .
EMISSION CONTROL EURO 05 WITH OBD(E05A-Euro 05 with OBD)
Refit the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
Refit the timing chain(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
.
.
Refit the engine and gearbox assembly.
Repair-10x02x01x09-01x37-1-72-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
ROCKER COVER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Top dead centre locating pin.
Mot. 1766
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Remove the timing chain(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
.
X74, M9R, 760(760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR 802 OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 845 OR 849 OR 858)
AND (E05A-Euro 05 with OBD)
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Remove:
the
the
the
the
the
the
vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls),
high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal - Refitting ,
oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal - Refitting ,
diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the bolts(1 ) and (2 ) of the fuel collector outlet pipe of the cylinder head.
Disconnect the fuel collector outlet pipe from the cylinder head at(3 ) .
Move aside the fuel collector outlet pipe from the cylinder head.
-1-
X62, M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove the high pressure pump .
Remove the turbocharger strut(13 ) .
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensor mounting bolt(14 ) .
-2-
Remove the pipe(15 ) from the exhaust manifold.
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensor.
Remove the lifting eye bolts(16 ) .
Remove the lifting eye.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-3-
Remove the rocker cover bolts.
Position a protective shim on the cylinder head.
Detach the rocker cover using a flat-blade screwdriver, using the shim for leverage.
Remove the rocker cover - camshafts assembly.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use super cleaning agent for joint facesVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean:
the rocker cover gasket face,
the cylinder head joint face.
CAUTION
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face will result in a risk of leaks.
CAUTION
Clean the cylinder head carefully to avoid any foreign bodies entering the oil return and supply pipes.
Failure to follow this advice could lead to the blocking of the various oil inlet galleries, which would quickly result in engine damage.
-4-
Remove the residue using a plastic spatula.
Finish cleaning the joint faces using a Grey Abrasive PadVehicle:
Parts and consumables for the repair
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Use SURFACE CLEANERVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean:
the rocker cover gasket face,
the cylinder head joint face.
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy (avoid any finger marks).
CAUTION
Applying excess sealant could cause it to be squeezed out when parts are tightened. A mixture of sealant and fluid could damage certain components (engine, radiator,
etc.).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Apply a bead of SILICONE ADHESIVE SEALANT(see Vehicle:
(4 ) , (5 ) , (6 ) .
Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B,
Consumables - Products) with a diameter of 1.5 ± 1 mmto the cylinder head at
Fit two studs (M6 - length 60 mm) into the holes(7 ) and (8 ) on the cylinder head to guide the rocker cover.
-5-
Position:
the groove on the exhaust side of the camshaft(9) horizontally (large clearance(10) facing upwards),
the groove on the inlet side of the camshaft(11) facing towards the rocker cover boss(12) .
Check that cylinders 1 and 4 are at Top Dead Centre using theTop dead centre locating pin.(Mot. 1766 ) (see 10A, Engine
Refit the rocker cover - camshafts assembly.
-6-
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
.
Tighten in order and successively, the rocker cover bolts (12),
(15), (18)and (21)to
gradually fit the rocker cover on the cylinder head.
Remove the two rocker cover guide studs.
Fit without tightening the remaining rocker cover bolts.
Loosen bolts
(12), (15), (18)and (21).
Fit without tightening bolts (12),
(15), (18)and (21).
Tighten the rocker cover bolts in order.
Clean the excess silicone adhesive sealant on the timing and coupling faces using a plastic spatula.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Connect the fuel collector outlet pipe of the cylinder head.
Tighten the bolts of the fuel collector outlet pipe of the cylinder head.
-7-
Refit:
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting (37A, Mechanical component controls).
X62, M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Refit the hight pressure pump .
X74, M9R, 760(760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR 802 OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 845 OR 849 OR 858)
AND (E05A-Euro 05 with OBD)
Refit the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust
Refit the timing chain(see 10A, Engine
gas pressure sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
.
Refit the engine and gearbox assembly.
Repair-10x02x01x09-01x37-1-72-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
FRONT BRAKE CALLIPER: REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
pedal press
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
CAUTION
Prepare for brake fluid outflow to prevent damage to the mechanical parts and
bodywork around the braking system.
REMOVAL
Fit the
pedal pressto
the brake pedal to limit the outflow of brake fluid.
Remove the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the brake calliperFront
brake calliper assembly: Exploded view
-1-
.
Remove the piston using compressed air, making sure to insert a wooden block between the calliper
and the piston to prevent damage. Any trace of impact on the end panel will render it unusable.
-2-
Remove the dust seal.
-3-
Remove the rectangular section seal from the calliper groove with a round edged spring blade (feeler
gauge).
CAUTION
The whole calliper must systematically be replaced if there are any scratches in the
calliper bore.
-4-
Clean the parts using methylated spirit.
REFITTING
Refit:
the rectangular section seal in the calliper groove,
-5-
the piston after coating it with brake fluid,
the dust seal.
Refit the brake calliperFront
brake calliper assembly: Exploded view
.
Refit the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
CAUTION
Replace all faulty parts with new original parts.
Bleed the brake circuitBraking
circuit: Bleed
.
WARNING
To avoid any accident, bring the pistons, brake pads and brake discs into contact by
depressing the brake pad several times.
Repair-13x03x03x05-01x22-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
ROOF: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Wire insertion tool for removing bonded mirror glass.
Car. 1033
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the windscreen pillar trimsWindscreen pillar trim: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim),
the B-pillar trimB-pillar trim: Removal - Refitting (71A, Bodywork interior trim),
the sun visorsSun visor: Removal - Refitting (57A, Interior equipment),
the front storage compartments under the roofFront storage compartment under the roof: Removal - Refitting
(57A, Interior equipment) (depending on the equipment),
the headlining lightHeadlining light: Removal - Refitting (81B, Interior lighting).
Remove the tachographTachograph: Removal - Refitting (83A, Instrument panel).
Remove:
the headlining (71A, Body internal trim),
the cab roof stiffener(see 45A, Top of body, Cab roof stiffener: Removal - Refitting) .
-1-
Remove the clips(1 ) .
-2-
Remove the bolts(2 ) .
Raise the cab upper tray at(3 ) .
Remove the cab upper tray at(4 ) and at (5 ) .
-3-
Move the electrical wiring(6 ) to one side.
Protect the edge of the roof with masking tape.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
Remove the bolts(7 ) .
-5-
Remove the bolts(8 ) .
-6-
Pass:
the toolWire insertion tool for removing bonded mirror glass.(Car. 1033 ) in the rear right-hand or left-hand
section of the roof(9) ,
the cutting wire in the toolWire insertion tool for removing bonded mirror glass.(Car. 1033 ) .
Fit the cutting handles on the two sections of the cutting wire.
-7-
Cut the cement bead of the roof along the lengths and the rear, taking care to slide a protective
shim between the panel and the roof progressively whilst cutting (this operation requires two operators).
Cut the front section cement bead using the pneumatic tool, taking care to bypass the indexing
pin (10 ) .
Remove the roof (this operation requires 4 to 5 operators).
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-8-
Note:
Use 3 or 4 adhesive kits (part number: 60 25 170 306) depending on the length of the
cement bead.
Note:
When replacing, use P 120 to sand the bonding area on the roof.
Level the cement bead on the roof and the top of the vehicle.
Blow and degrease the bonding line (see product technical sheet).
Prime the bonding areas (see product technical sheet).
Extrude a cement bead on the top of the vehicle (see product technical sheet).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the front section of the roof (this operation requires 4 to 5 operators) using the indexing pin,
the bolts.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-9-
Repair-40x07x02-01x37-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
ROTARY SWITCH: ADJUSTMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 84A, Control - Signals, Control - Signals: Precautions for repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair .
This method is used to put the rotary switch in the neutral position.
1. PRELIMINARY CONDITIONS FOR THE ADJUSTMENTS
The wheels are set straight ahead.
The rotary switch is refitted on the steering column.
The steering wheel is removed.
2. ADJUSTMENT
Note:
Certain rotary switch models are equipped with a locking device.
To perform the adjustment, it is essential to unlock the rotary switch when handling.
Turn the movable part of the rotary switch fully to the left.
Turn the movable part of the rotary switch fully to the right, counting the number of turns.
Divide the number of turns counted by 2.
Turn the movable part of the rotary switch to the left by the number of turns calculated.
-1-
The rotary switch is now within the turn of its neutral position.
Example:
5 turns were counted between the full left and full right position of the rotary switch.
Turn the movable stop of the switch 2.5 turns to the left to find neutral again.
Continue the rotation until the marks are aligned.
The switch is now in the neutral position.
Repair-30x04x03x33-01x67-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
SCOOP UNDER THE SCUTTLE PANEL GRILLE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the windscreen wiper armsWindscreen wiper arm: Removal - Refitting (85A, Wiping - Washing),
the scuttle panel grille(see 56A, Exterior equipment , Scuttle panel grille: Removal - Refitting) .
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the scoop under the scuttle panel grille(2) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-50x07x06x08-01x37-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
SCREEN WASHER PUMP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the front section of the front right-hand wheel arch linerFront wheel arch liner: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior
protection).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Note:
When disconnecting the front jet supply pipe, use a container to collect the
windscreen washer fluid which will flow out of the bottle.
-1-
Disconnect:
the connector(1) from the windscreen washer pump,
the front jet supply pipe(2) .
Remove the windscreen washer pump.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Fill up the windscreen washer bottle.
Repair-80x04x06x02-01x37-1-21-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
SCUTTLE SIDE PANEL UPPER REINFORCEMENT: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Scuttle side panel upper reinforcement
Mild steel
0.8
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x06x06x02-02x49-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
SCUTTLE SIDE PANEL: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
A-pillar lining
HLE
0.8
(2 )
Degassing tank mounting support
Mild steel
1.5
(3 )
Side mounting reinforcement of dashboard frame
Mild steel
1.2
-2-
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
The options for replacing this part are as follows:
Complete replacement
replacement along cut B-C.
-3-
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-4-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-5-
2- PARTIAL REPLACEMENT A-B
1)PART IN POSITION
DETAILED VIEW B
-6-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-7-
Repair-40x06x06-02x49-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
TECHNICAL NOTE
Edition Anglaise
488A
77 11 199 769
MAY 1998
Type
All types
79
Service 0422
S/Section
X
79
XXX
HEAD RESTRAINT FOR COMFORT AND SAFETY
INFORMATION
This note will provide you with all the information and instructions required to remove and replace the new head restraints
and the special sleeves fitted on the front
seatbacks.
13315S
" The repair methods given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the
technical specifications current when it was prepared.
The methods may be modified as a result of changes by the manufacturer in the
production of the various component units and accessories from which his vehicles
are constructed " .
C
Renault 1998
All copyrights reserved by Renault.
Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part
reference numbering system is forbidden without the prior written authority of
RENAULT.
SEAT ACCESSORIES
Head restraint for comfort and safety
79 A
Each seat has a sleeve with a retention mechanism
and a simple sleeve, mounted in dowels (C) in the
seatback fittings.
INTRODUCTION
IMPORTANT : In order to ensure that the sleeves
are not damaged when the head restraint is removed, it is essential to follow the instructions given
below.
PRJ7901
This new type of head restraint will allow you:
-
Height adjustment over a greater range so
that it can be adjusted for passengers of all
heights.
-
A reduction in the distance between the head
and the head restraint which will provide better support for the head if an impact occurs.
These head restraints consist of curved metal rods
(A) fitted into plastic sleeves (B). These sleeves ensure that the restraint remains in place securely
and that it can be adjusted.
NOTE: These sleeves must be removed and refit-
ted with great care. This is to ensure that the head
restraint retains its safety functions.
79-1
SEAT ACCESSORIES
Head restraint for comfort and safety
REMOVING THE HEAD RESTRAINT
79 A
REFITTING
Position the two head restraint rods in the movable sleeve caps.
Press down on the head restraint to insert the
sleeves but do not use force.
As soon as the sleeves have locked in position (a
click will be heard), lower the head restraint, still
keeping it pushed towards the front.
ATTENTION
When the rods have been taken out or inserted,
be very careful how they are fitted into the
sleeves until they lock in position.
When the ends of the rods are inserted, the movable tops of the sleeves must be aligned with the
guides secured to the seatback fittings in such as
way that the rods can be extracted or inserted.
13316R
Sit on the back seat of the vehicle.
If any force is applied during these dismantling or
refitting operations it may damage the sleeves irreparably .
Tilt the seatback slightly.
Move the head restraint to its highest position (1),
pushing it slightly towards the front.
Lift the plastic retention mechanism (2) and hold
it in that position.
Raise the head restraint whilst pushing it firmly
towards the front (3), in the same way as for adjusting the head restraint height.
Let go of the plastic retention mechanism (2) as
soon as you feel the head restraint has been released.
Keep lifting the head restraint (4) until the rods
have been completely released.
79-2
SEAT ACCESSORIES
Head restraint for comfort and safety
REMOVING THE SLEEVES
79 A
REFITTING THE SLEEVES
Photo 14 419
14444R1
Remove:
- the head restraint (as specified above),
- the seat.
First make sure that the two arms of the spring (E)
are properly fitted into the inner cap (F) and clipped onto the body of the sleeve at (G).
Unclip the upper caps on the sleeves.
Remove the seat back trim.
If this is not the case, push the inner cap (F), (moving hinged section) towards the front to fit the
spring at (G).
Apply pressure to the two retaining lugs (D) (see
illustration in next column).
When the assembly has been fitted, push the inner cap back towards the rear.
Release the sleeves from the metal dowels in the
seat fittings by pushing them upwards
Insert each sleeve in the relevant dowel into the
seatback fittings without using any tools and without applying any force.
NOTE: Each sleeve has locating rib (J) which will
ensure that no mistake can be made when fitting
the sleeves in the dowels.
Apply pressure until the retaining lugs (D) have
clicked into the dowel.
Each sleeve must have tabs (I) which fit each side
of the dowel along its entire length .
IMPORTANT : If one of the tabs (I) is broken, the
sleeve must be replaced.
Refit the seat trim and fit the head restraint back
into position.
79-3
SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING LIGHT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
Unclip the switch plate(1 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
Disconnect the connectors.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove the seat belt reminder warning light by pressing on the clips(2 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
2. CHECKING AFTER REPAIR
Switch on the ignition
Check that the warning light on the display illuminates.
Fasten the seat belts.
Check that the warning light on the display goes out.
Repair-31x02x02x03-01x37-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
SELECTOR SHAFTS AND GEARBOX FORKS ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Selector lever
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
2
Selector shaft protective cap
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
3
Selector shaft sealing ring
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
4
Selector shaft needle bearing
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
5
Selector shaft
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
6
Selector shaft roll pin
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
7
Selector arm
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
8
Gearshift plate
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
9
Gearshift lever
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
10
Gearshift shaft protective cap
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
11
Gearshift shaft sealing ring
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
12
Gearshift shaft needle bearing
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
13
Gearshift shaft
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
14
Gearshift shaft roll pin
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
15
Gearshift arm
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
16
Breather
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Fork shaft bearing: Removal - Refitting)
-2-
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-3-
Mark
Description
Information
1
1st and 2nd fork shaft
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
2
1st and 2nd shift finger pin
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
3
1st and 2nd shift finger
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
4
Blanking plug of the 1st and 2nd fork shaft
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
5
Locking finger of the 1st and 2nd fork shaft
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
6
Locking spring of the 1st and 2nd fork shaft
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
7
1st and 2nd fork pin
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
8
1st and 2nd fork
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
9
Reverse gear selector fork shaft
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
10
Blanking plug of the reverse gear fork shaft
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
11
Locking finger of the reverse gear fork shaft
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
12
Locking spring of the reverse gear fork shaft
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
13
5th and 6th fork shaft
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
14
5th and 6th shift finger
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
15
Selector shaft blanking plug
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
16
Selector shaft locking finger
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
17
Selector shaft locking spring
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
18
3rd and 4th fork shaft
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
19
3rd and 4th shift finger pin
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
20
3rd and 4th shift finger
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
21
Blanking plug of the 3rd and 4th fork shaft
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
22
Locking finger of the 3rd and 4th fork shaft
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
23
Locking spring of the 3rd and 4th fork shaft
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
24
5th and 6th fork
(see Input shaft: Removal - Refitting)
25
Reverse gear fork pin
26
5th and 6th fork retaining bolt
27
Reverse gear fork
28
5th and 6th fork shoe
29
3rd and 4th fork
30
3rd and 4th fork retaining bolt
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
(see 21A,
(see 21A,
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
Manual gearbox
Manual gearbox
,
,
Clutch housing: Removal - Refitting)
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
(see Output shaft: Removal - Refitting)
(see 21A,
-4-
Manual gearbox
,
Clutch housing: Removal - Refitting)
31
3rd and 4th fork shoe
32
Locking rod plugs
33
Gear control shaft
34
Control selector
35
Control shaft bearings
36
Reverser pin
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
37
Reverser
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
38
Locking rod
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Clutch housing: Removal - Refitting)
39
Control shaft locking plug
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Clutch housing: Removal - Refitting)
40
Retaining clip pin
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
41
Retaining clip
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
42
Control shaft locking finger
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Clutch housing: Removal - Refitting)
43
Control shaft locking spring
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
,
Clutch housing: Removal - Refitting)
(see 21A,
(see 21A,
Manual gearbox
(see 21A,
(see 21A,
Repair-12x01x11x07-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
Manual gearbox
,
,
Clutch housing: Removal - Refitting)
Manual gearbox selector shaft: Removal - Refitting)
Manual gearbox
Manual gearbox
,
,
Clutch housing: Removal - Refitting)
Clutch housing bearing: Removal - Refitting)
SELF-CONTAINED HEATER CONTROL PANEL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
-1-
Unclip the self-contained heater control panel usingSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) .
Disconnect the self-contained heater control panel connector.
Remove the self-contained heater control panel from the dashboard.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Connect the self-contained heater control panel connector.
Fit the self-contained heater control panel to the dashboard.
Repair-30x02x03x03-01x37-1-5-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
TECHNICAL NOTE
77 11 301 842
DECEMBER 2011
EDITION ANGLAISE
3485A
Service 0422
Type
All types
XXX
S/Section
X
04
This note cancels and replaces Technical Note n° 3452A
04
●
●
SERVICING PROGRAMME
Engine: XXX
Gearbox: XXX
Basic manual:
All Workshop Repair Manuals
NEW SERVICING PROGRAMME WITH EFFECT FROM 1 JANUARY 2012
From this date, the majority of vehicles in the range will have a service interval of 18 000 miles (30 000
kilometres) (petrol and diesel engines).
This note only describes the procedures linked to this new interval; for other vehicles, refer to Technical
Note 3399E.
The new servicing programme will involve the use of high technology oil complying with ACEA standards,
A1, A3 or A5 for petrol engines and B3 or B4 for diesel engines.
This servicing schedule (engine oil change) requires the engine oil level to be topped up carefully during
services and safety checks.
The Servicing booklet is now separate from the Warranty booklet and will be placed in vehicles on the
production line.
" The repair methods given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the
technical specifications current when it was prepared.
The methods may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the manufacturer
in the production of the various component units and accessories from which his
vehicles are constructed. "
All copyrights reserved by Renault.
Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part
reference numbering system is forbidden without the prior written authority of Renault.
© RENAULT 2000
SERVICING
104
Service intervals
04
A SERVICE INTERVAL (.... miles (... km))
Vehicles
Interval
TWINGO
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
CLIO (except CLIO 2L 16V, CLIO V6, CLIO 1.9D)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
KANGOO (except 1.9D)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
MEGANE (except 1.9D)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
SCENIC (EXCEPT 1.9D)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
LAGUNA
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
ESPACE
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
AVANTIME
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
MASTER (2.2 dCi)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
CLIO (2L 16V and V6)
12 000 miles (20 000 km) (see Technical Note 3399E)
MASTER (1.9 dTi and 2.8 dTi)
12 000 miles (20 000 km) (see Technical Note 3399E)
CLIO (1.9D)
9 000 miles (15 000 km) (see Technical Note 3399E)
KANGOO (1.9D)
9 000 miles (15 000 km) (see Technical Note 3399E)
MEGANE (1.9D)
9 000 miles (15 000 km) (see Technical Note 3399E)
SCENIC (1.9D)
9 000 miles (15 000 km) (see Technical Note 3399E)
Or every 2 YEARS depending on which is reached first.
B SERVICE INTERVAL (.... miles (....km))
Interval
ALL VEHICLE TYPES
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
04-1
SERVICING
Service intervals
04
THE RECOMMENDED SERVICE PLAN FOR THE NEW 18 000 mile (30 000 km) SERVICING POLICY IS AS
FOLLOWS:
●
A free Renault safety check after 6 000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months.
An A service after 18 000 miles (30 000 km) or 2 years.
●
A free Renault safety check after 28 000 miles (45 000 km) or 3 years.
●
A B service after 36 000 miles (60 000 km) or 4 years.
●
A free Renault safety check after 45 000 miles (75 000 km) or 5 years.
●
An A service after 55 000 miles (90 000 km) or 6 years.
●
A free Renault safety check after 63 000 miles (105 000 km) or 7 years.
●
A B service after 75 000 miles (120 000 km) or 8 years.
and so on...
Whichever deadline is reached first.
●
Renault safety checks (except the first) are only free if the preceding service was carried out by the Renault
network.
Complete all the coupons in the Servicing booklet correctly to avoid any dispute.
04-2
SERVICING
Service plans
04
The first visit to Renault (free)
This visit enables the Renault network to carry out various checks and top up various fluids (details on page 04-4).
The second and subsequent Renault visits (free)
This visit has the same principles as the first visit. It is carried out free by the Renault network 9 000 miles
(15 000 km) or 1 year after the last service if it was carried out by the Renault network (the corresponding coupon
must be filled in) (details on page 04-4).
The A service
During this service, service operations and parts replacement will be carried out, depending on the mileage of your
vehicle.
The A service is based on a list of operations including an oil change, replacement of the oil filter, inspections and
topping up the levels (details on page 04 - 5).
Added to this list are extra operations that are carried out at the appropriate times, as set out on page 04 - 6.
The B service
This service follows the same principles as the A service, but the operations list is longer as more checks are carried
out. The list includes an oil change and a road test as well as specific checks and topping up (details on page 04 - 5).
Added to this list are extra operations that are carried out at the appropriate times, as set out on page 04 - 6.
04-3
SERVICING
Servicing programme
04
OPERATIONS FOR THE 1st RENAULT SAFETY CHECK
Listed below are the operations carried out during the first (free) Renault safety check, scheduled for when the car
has been driven 6 000 miles (10 000 km) or after 6 months (whichever is reached first):
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Top up the engine oil (up to 2.l).
Top up the washer fluid (up to 2 l).
Check the coolant level.
Check the brake fluid level.
Check the power steering fluid level.
Check the condition of the windscreen.
Check the condition of the rear-view mirrors.
Check the wiper blades.
Check the indicator lights.
Check the condition and pressure of the tyres.
Visual inspection of shock absorbers.
Computer fault finding.
OPERATIONS FOR THE 2nd AND SUBSEQUENT RENAULT SAFETY CHECKS
Listed below are operations carried out on any subsequent (free*) visits to Renault safety checks:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Top up the engine oil (up to 2.l).
Top up the washer fluid (up to 2 l).
Check the coolant level.
Check the brake fluid level.
Check the power steering fluid level.
Check the condition of the windscreen.
Check the condition of the rear-view mirrors.
Check the wiper blades.
Check the indicator lights.
Check the condition and pressure of the tyres.
Check the brake pads.
Visual inspection of shock absorbers.
* These checks are only free on the condition that the previous service was carried out by the Renault network.
04-4
SERVICING
Servicing programme
04
SERVICE OPERATIONS (PETROL AND DIESEL ENGINES)
THE A *
SERVICE
THE B *
SERVICE
OPERATIONS
Body
– Examination of underside of the car, wheel arches, doors and windows...
Engine
– Oil change.
– Replacement of oil filter.
– Visual inspection of exhaust pipe
Brakes
– Visual inspection of pads.
– Circuit tightness.
– Check the brake fluid level.
– Check condition of trim and remove dust (including removal/refitting drums).
Check fluid levels and tightness of circuits
– Hydraulic clutch.
– Power assisted steering.
– Front/rear screen washers.
– Coolant circuit.
– Sequential gearbox hydraulic unit (TWINGO)
Steering/front and rear axle geometry
– Check ball joint play - Condition of rubber gaiters.
Tyres
– Check condition and pressure of tyres (including spare wheel).
– Visual inspection and tightness check of front and rear shock absorbers.
Equipment
– Check bulbs (headlights, indicators, brakelights).
– Check condition of the car battery (1).
– Check the condition of the windscreen and rear-view mirrors.
– Check condition of front and rear wiper blades.
Delivery
– Check safety and service labels are in correct positions.
– Road test.
* N.B.: services are compulsory during the car's warranty period and for all cars under the Service Contract.
(1) if possible, this battery check will be carried out using the MIDTRONICS tool.
04-5
SERVICING
Servicing programme
04
OPERATIONS ADDITIONAL TO THE A AND B SERVICES
Components to be replaced (every ... miles/km)
SPARK PLUG
AIR FILTER (1)
PARTICLE FILTER
(if fitted)
TWINGO
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
-
CLIO (not 2L 16V or V6)
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
KANGOO
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
MEGANE (not 2L 16V
IDE)
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
MEGANE 2L 16V IDE
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
SCENIC
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
LAGUNA (not V6 24V)
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
LAGUNA V6 24V
75 000 miles (120 000 km)
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
ESPACE (not V6 24V)
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
ESPACE V6 24V
75 000 miles (120 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
AVANTIME 2L 16V
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
AVANTIME V6 24V
75 000 miles (120 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
AIR FILTER (1)
PARTICLE FILTER
(if fitted)
CLIO (not 1.9D)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
KANGOO (except 1.9D)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
MEGANE (except 1.9D)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
SCENIC (not 1.9D)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
LAGUNA
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
ESPACE
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
MASTER 2.2 dCi
36 000 miles (60 000 km)
18 000 miles (30 000 km)
PETROL engines
Components to be replaced (every ... miles/km)
DIESEL engines
(1) or every 4 years whichever is reached first.
04-6
SERVICING
Servicing programme
04
OPERATIONS ADDITIONAL TO THE A AND B SERVICES
PETROL and DIESEL engines
Components to be replaced (every ...)
Timing belt (1)
petrol and diesel engines: 75 000 miles (120 000 km) or 5
years. N.B.: 45 000 miles (75 000 km) or 5 years for 1.9 dTi
diesel engines
Accessories belt
petrol and diesel engines: 75 000 miles (120 000 km) or 5
years. N.B.: 45 000 miles (75 000 km) or 5 years for 1.9 dTi
diesel engines
Fuel filters (petrol and diesel)
36 000 miles (60 000 km). N.B.: 95 000 miles (150 000 km) for
the petrol engine Laguna and 75 000 miles (120 000 km) for
the Avantime
The diesel filter must have any water drained from it if it is not
replaced during the course of the service
Brake fluid
75 000 miles (120 000 km) or every 4 years
Remote control door locking batteries *
Every 2 years
Air conditioning circuit *; check and top up
refrigerant fluid
Every 4 years
Coolant
75 000 miles (120 000 km) or every 4 years
Tyre pressure monitoring system batteries *
Every 10 years
Air bags and pretensioners pyrotechnic system
Every 10 years
* if fitted
(1) Belts
The mileages and intervals for belt replacement listed above must be respected. The customer should consult his
nearest Renault Dealer for advice on when a timing belt should be replaced depending on his individual driving style
and how he uses the car. This is particularly important when the car is being used for:
– constant door to door journeys,
– urban driving,
– repeated short journeys, with cold engine at low temperatures, etc.
04-7
SERVICING
LPG special notes
04
ADDITIONAL OPERATIONS TO BE CARRIED OUT DURING SERVICING
Servicing periods are the same for LPG-equipped cars as those for equivalent models with petrol engines.
Also:
All services must include:
– a check on the safety solenoid valve,
– a check for the presence of a blanking cover on the pressure relief valve.
All services must include:
– a gas filter change.
Every eight years:
– a hydraulic test must be performed on the LPG tank.
Vehicles
Replace spark plugs
KANGOO - CLIO II - TWINGO - ESPACE
every 18 000 miles (30 000 km)
04-8
Check/adjust the valve
clearances
every 18 000 miles (30 000 km)
except for 16V engines
SERVICING
Engine oil
04
CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL
Renault engines are designed and built to the highest technological standards, and naturally need a little oil for
optimum running.
For this reason, and to avoid any potential engine failure, the engine oil level must be regularly checked in
particular before long journeys.
It may be necessary to top up the oil once or twice between changes and especially during the running in period; do
this when the oil is level with the minimum mark on the gauge.
The level should be checked with the car on a flat surface, with the engine stopped and cold (e.g.: before the engine
is started for the first time of the day).
Let the oil settle after refilling (approximately 2 minutes), (15 minutes for Master vehicles) before checking the level
with the dipstick.
It is very important not to exceed the maximum mark on the gauge (in this case oil consumption is greater; it can
also cause engine damage).
04-9
SERVICING
Engine oil
04
The service has been designed for regular use of your vehicle.
In the event of use in certain difficult conditions, such as:
– constant door to door journeys,
– urban driving,
– repeated short journeys, with cold engine at low temperatures, etc.
Renault recommends that your oil is changed every 9 000 miles (or 15 000 km) or at least once a year.
Only ACEA standard oils may be used for an 18 000 mile (30 000 km) change interval.
The tables below show the oil grades which must be used to ensure correct operation of the engine (for European
Union countries and Turkey):
PETROL ENGINE
* Oil for fuel economy. This type of oil is not recommended for 2L 16V F4R Renault Sport engines.
DIESEL ENGINE
ACEA B1 (diesel) oils must not be used for diesel engines.
ACEA A1 oils (petrol) allow a reduction in fuel consumption, Renault recommends this oil for all engines with the
exception of the 2L 16V Renault Sport.
Observe the recommendation on the label located on the engine for diesel vehicles with automatic gearboxes.
04-10
Technical Note 3867A
XXXX
Subsection concerned: 09A
Shock absorber noise fault finding
Fault finding on gurgling, banging, knocking and grating of shock absorbers.
77 11 332 262
APRIL 2004
" The repair methods given by the Manufacturer in this document are based on the
technical specifications current when it was prepared.
EDITION ANGLAISE
All copyrights reserved by RENAULT.
The methods may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the Manufacturer
in the production of the various component units and accessories from which his
vehicles are constructed. "
Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part
reference numbering system is forbidden without the prior written authority of
RENAULT.
© RENAULT 2004
NOISES AND VIBRATIONS
109A
Fault finding
Shock absorber noises
09A
FOREWORD
1 - Replacing each shock absorber must be justified by the fault finding attached.
2 - Noises heard when descending a pavement ( " Cannon shot " ) are linked to the shock absorber definition:
The shock absorber is compliant: do not replace the shock absorbers.
3 - Hissing noises (normal hydraulic noise of shock absorber) or cracking (micro-displacement of the tightened rear
brake pads) caused when passengers get into or out of the vehicle are never linked to a shock absorber fault.
Confirm the customer complaint in the same conditions without tightening the parking brake:
If the noise has disappeared, the shock absorber is not to blame.
4 - Noises heard during parking manoeuvres are never due to the shock absorber - & gt;
Do not replace the shock absorbers.
5 - Before replacing any shock absorbers due to gurgling, make sure that the noise does not come from the end
rubber pad, the stabiliser bar tie rods (and other ball joints) or shock absorber turret rubber mountings + check
tightness of the turret and the shock absorber axle.
BEFORE WORK
Ask the customer for information regarding the conditions in which the noise occurs as soon as the Repair Order
is issued.
Description
Gurgling
Noise similar to tapping on a small
drum - beat caused by internal
valves in the shock absorber
X
Burst of small dry banging noises
similar to metal impacts
Banging/Knocking
X
Noise caused by contact between a
metal part and a rubber part
Noise appearing on a bad road or
deformed road at low speed
(6-19 mph (10-30 km/h)).
Grating
X
X
X
X
Before any road tests, check the tightening and clearance of the shock absorber front and rear axle mountings,
linkage, ball joints and bearing clearances.
Shock absorber noises v1.0
09A-1
Shock absorber noises
NOISES AND VIBRATIONS
Fault finding
09A
GURGLING from shock absorbers
Origin: Noise caused by shock absorber piston valves reversing their direction.
Check tightness and clearance for all the mountings, linkage and ball joints of the front and
rear axles and the shock absorbers as well as the state of the sub-frame rubber mountings.
Do a road test on a bad or deformed road at
low speed (6-19 mph (10-30 km/h)).
no
End of the operation.
Is the customer complaint reproduced?
yes
Is the noise identified at the front?
yes
Can the noise be heard when starting the engine and/
or when stopping the engine warm?
no
no
Is there play in the stabiliser bar tie rod ball
joints?
yes
Consult the " engine mounting and exhaust "
information.
yes
Replace the defective stabiliser bar tie rod.
no
Is there play in the lower ball joint or the
steering rack?
yes
Replace the defective part.
no
Is there play in the bearings?
yes
Replace the defective part.
no
Check the state of the shock absorber turrets
(shock absorber upper mounting).
yes
Replace the defective part.
no
Replace the front shock absorber on the noisy
side.
End of the operation.
Shock absorber noises v1.0
09A-2
Shock absorber noises
NOISES AND VIBRATIONS
Fault finding
09A
BANGING/KNOCKING from shock absorbers
Origin: Noise caused by a faulty component or incorrect assembly of the suspension.
Check tightness and clearance for all the mountings, linkage and ball joints from the front and
rear axles and the shock absorbers as well as the state of the sub-frame rubber mountings.
Make sure that the spring is correctly
positioned in upper and lower parts:
no
Reposition the spring.
Is the spring positioned correctly?
yes
Are the stabiliser bar mountings and bearings
in good condition?
no
Replace the faulty bearings or mountings.
yes
Do a road test on a bad or deformed road at
low speed (6-19 mph (10-30 km/h)).
no
End of the operation.
Is the customer complaint reproduced?
yes
Is the noise identified at the front?
yes
Can the noise also be heard when the rear axle passes
over a vehicle retarder?
no
no
Is there play in the lower ball joint or the
steering rack?
yes
Consult the " engine mounting and exhaust "
information.
yes
Replace the defective part.
no
Is there play in the bearings?
Check the state of the shock absorber turrets
(shock absorber upper mounting).
yes
not OK
Replace the defective part or carry out necessary
adjustments.
Replace the defective part or carry out necessary
adjustments.
OK
Replace the front shock absorber on the noisy
side.
End of the operation.
Shock absorber noises v1.0
09A-3
NOISES AND VIBRATIONS
Fault finding
Shock absorber noises
09A
GRATING of shock absorbers
Origin: Noise caused by contact between a metallic part and a rubber part.
Check tightness and clearance for all the mountings, linkage and ball joints from the front and
rear axles and the shock absorbers as well as the state of the sub-frame rubber mountings.
Can the noise be heard when static
(engine start and/or stop, idle speed or
at a specific engine speed)?
yes
Consult the " Exhaust noises " information, " Engine
mounting " .
Check the position of the
suspension spring.
Can the noise be heard when pressing
the vehicle down on the noisy side?
yes
Is it in place? Are there
signs of jamming?
Do the necessary repairs
and adjustments.
Check the gaiters,
ball joints,
stabiliser bar
bearings.
OK
no
not OK
Replace the shock absorber.
Do a road test on a bad or deformed
road at low speed
(6-19 mph (10-30 km/h)).
Is the customer complaint reproduced?
Replace any faulty parts.
no
End of the operation.
yes
Do a test by uncoupling the stabiliser
bar.
Has the noise disappeared?
yes
Replace the bearings or mountings on the defective
stabiliser bar.
no
Check the position of the suspension
spring.
Is it in place? Are there any signs of
jamming or wear in the high and low
protections?
Do the necessary repairs and
adjustments.
Replace the front shock absorber on the
noisy side.
End of the operation.
Shock absorber noises v1.0
09A-4
SHOCK ABSORBER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
component jack
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 33A, Rear axle
components , Rear axle assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 33A, Rear axle components, Rear axle components: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
To prevent any suspension asymmetry, replace both of the shock absorbers on the
same axle.
CAUTION
To prevent the components of the rear axle from deteriorating (rubber bushes, brake
hoses, etc.) do not remove the two shock absorbers at the same time. Proceed one
side at a time.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
-1-
1- IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH AN ANTI-ROLL BAR
Remove the bolt of the rear anti-roll bar tie rod from the body(see 33A, Rear
assembly: Exploded view) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
axle components, Rear axle
Fit a
component jackunder
the rear axle.
Remove the rear shock absorber(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear axle assembly: Exploded view)
REFITTING
Fit the rear shock absorber on the body.
Fit without tightening the bolt of the shock absorber on the body.
Fit a
component jackunder
the rear axle.
-3-
.
Adjust using the
component jackthe
dimension(X) 473 mm .
Note:
The vehicle must be in " half-empty - load " position when tightening the rubber bushes
of the shock absorbers.
Refit the rear shock absorber(see 33A, Rear
axle components, Rear axle assembly: Exploded view)
-4-
.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-13x02x06x09-01x37-1-29-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
SIDE ACCESS HANDLE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove B-pillar trimB-pillar trim: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
2. FITTING OPERATION
-1-
Remove:
the bolts(1) ,
the side acces handle(2) .
REFITTING
Refitting the side acces handle.
Torque tighten the bolts of the side acces handle29 N.m.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x08x06x14-01x37-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
parts always to be replaced:
Side impact sensors
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 88C, Airbags and pretensioners, Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for the
repair ) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
WARNING
To avoid any risk of triggering when working on or near a pyrotechnic component
(airbags or pretensioners), lock the airbag computer using the diagnostic tool.
When this function is activated, all the trigger lines are inhibited and the airbag
warning light on the instrument panel lights up continuously (ignition on).
Lock the airbag computer by applying the " Before repair procedure " using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Airbag computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the lower B-pillar trimB-pillar trim: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Undo the side impact sensor bolt(1 ) by six turns.
Remove the side impact sensor from the slot on the B-pillar.
Disconnect the connector(2 ) from the side impact sensor.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-3-
parts always to be replaced:
Side impact sensors
.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Connect the side impact sensor connector.
Refit the side impact sensor in the slot on the B-pillar.
Torque tighten the side impact sensor bolt8 N.m.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Connect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Unlock the airbag computer by applying the " After repair procedure " using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Airbag computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-31x02x01x21-01x37-1-20-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
SIDE INDICATOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torque, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exterior
element assembly: Exploded view (51A, Side opening element mechanisms).
front side opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Adjust the door mirror glass to access the side indicator bolt in the outer lower corner of the door
mirror.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Remove:
the side indicator bolt(1) ,
partially the side indicatorExterior front side opening element assembly: Exploded view (51A, Side opening
element mechanisms).
-2-
Unlock the side indicator bulb holder by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise(2 ) .
Remove the side indicator.
REFITTING
-3-
Note:
When replacing the bulb, only use an approved bulb.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x02x04x04-01x37-1-18-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
SIDE LOADING DOOR EXTERIOR HANDLE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 51A, Side
element mechanisms, Exterior rear side opening element assembly: Exploded view) .
opening
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove (72A, Side opening elements trim):
the rear side door interior handle,
the rear side door trim.
Remove the side loading door lock barrel(see 51A, Side
barrel: Removal - Refitting) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
opening element mechanisms, Side loading door lock
Remove the side loading door exterior handle by(1 ) and (2 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Check the presence and condition of the seal, and replace it if necessary.
-2-
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x02x10x09-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
SIDE LOADING DOOR LOCK BARREL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove (72A, Side opening elements trim):
the rear side door interior handle,
the rear side door trim.
-1-
Unlock the lock barrel locking ring(1 ) by (2 ) .
Unclip the exterior locking linkage(3 ) of the lock barrel locking ring by(4 ) .
Remove the lock barrel locking ring.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Unlock the side loading door lock barrel by(5 ) .
Remove the side loading door lock barrel.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-50x02x13x04-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
SIDE OPENING ELEMENTS: ADJUSTMENT
1. HINGED SIDE DOOR
Check that the peripheral components are adjusted correctly.
Refit the heavy door fittings (closing system, window winder system).
Before carrying out the adjustments, release the striker panel and fit the hinges, pre-tightening in the
middle of the adjustment.
Note:
For information about the adjustment zones, refer to the MR for the vehicle concerned.
1- ADJUSTMENT CHRONOLOGY
-1-
Adjust the centring of the door.
-2-
Adjust the side alignment of the door.
-3-
Adjust the alignment of the door height.
-4-
Adjust the front flush fitting of the door.
-5-
Adjust the rear flush fitting of the door, as well as the contact and the closure firmness.
Check the adjustment and the correct operation then tighten into position.
2. SLIDING SIDE DOOR
-6-
Check that the peripheral components are adjusted correctly.
Refit the heavy door fittings (closing system, window winder system).
Before carrying out the adjustments, release the striker panel and fit the hinges, pre-tightening in the
middle of the adjustment.
Note:
For information about the adjustment zones, refer to the MR for the vehicle concerned.
1- ADJUSTMENT CHRONOLOGY
-7-
Adjust the centring of the door.
-8-
Adjust the side alignment of the door.
-9-
Adjust the alignment of the door height.
- 10 -
Adjust the flush fitting of the bottom section of the door.
- 11 -
Adjust the flush fitting of the top section of the door.
- 12 -
Adjust the rear flush fitting of the door.
- 13 -
Adjust the front flush fitting of the door.
Check the adjustment and the correct operation then tighten into position.
Repair-40x10x01-01x67-1-1-1.xml
- 14 -
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 15 -
SIDE POSITION INDICATOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Partially remove the side position indicator using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 ) by (1 ) .
Unlock the side position indicator bulb holder by turning it a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise.
Remove the side position indicator.
REFITTING
-2-
Note:
When replacing the bulb, only use an approved bulb.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-80x02x04x06-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
SILENCER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Pliers for removing exhaust pipe rubber mounting bushes
Mot. 1857
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19B, Exhaust ,
Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 19B, Exhaust, Exhaust: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
CAUTION
To prevent the surrounding components from overheating, do not damage (tear, pierce,
bend, etc.) a heat shield.
Any damaged heat shields must be replaced.
WARNING
Wear heat protective gloves during the operation.
-1-
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (see 19B, Exhaust, Exhaust assembly under body: Exploded view) (see 19B,Exhaust , Exhaust assembly under
body: Exploded view) :
the silencer clamp,
the silencer front rubber mounting bush from the body,
the silencer rear rubber mounting bushes from the body,
the silencer.
Note:
In case of difficulty removing the rubber mounting bushes, use the toolPliers for
removing exhaust pipe rubber mounting bushes(Mot. 1857 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Check:
that there is no contact with the underbody,
that all exhaust pipe heat shields are present.
Start the vehicle.
Check that there are no leaks.
Repair-10x08x02x02-01x37-1-50-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
SILL PANEL CLOSURE PANEL: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
F62(F62) SLIDING SIDE DOOR VERSION
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Sill panel closure panel
HLE
0.9
VERSION WITHOUT SLIDING SIDE DOOR
-2-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(2 )
Sill panel closure panel
Mild steel
0.9
Type
Thickness (mm)
E62(E62)
No.
Description
-3-
(3 )
Sill panel closure panel
Mild steel
0.9
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld areaEarth
screw connection: Description (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldElectrical resistance spot welding
connection with indirect access: Description (MR 400, 40B, Electrical resistance welded
connections).
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-4-
F62(F62) SLIDING SIDE DOOR VERSION
VERSION WITHOUT SLIDING SIDE DOOR
-5-
E62(E62)
-6-
Repair-40x04x02x02-02x49-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
SILL PANEL: REPLACEMENT
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. COMPOSITION OF THE SPARE PART
-1-
No.
Description
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Sill panel
Mild steel
0.9
2. IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
There is only one way of replacing this part:
-2-
complete replacement.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicles electric and electronic components, the earths of any
wiring harness near the weld area must be disconnected.
Position the earth of the welding machine as close as possible to the weld area(see
Bolted connection for earth: Fitting) (MR 400, 40H, Bolted connections).
Locate the earths located near to the weld areaEarths on body: List and location of components .
1- COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
1)PART IN POSITION
-3-
2)SPECIAL NOTES ON MATING
CAUTION
If the mating faces of the parts to be welded are not accessible, use a GMAW plug
weld in place of the original electrical resistance weldConnections by arc welding under
shielding gas: Description (MR 400, 40C, Gas metal arc welded connections (GMAW)).
-4-
Repair-40x04x02-02x49-1-4-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
SLIDING SIDE DOOR RUNNERS: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 51A, Side
element mechanisms, Rear side opening element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening
Note:
For partial removal of the sliding side door runners, it is not necessary to remove the
sliding side door.
It is necessary to hold the sliding side door using the tool DOOR SUPPORT.
Number of Renault agreement: 661000.
Part no.: SUP 01.
-1-
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the sliding side doorRear side door: Removal - Refitting (47A, Side opening elements),
the rear panel trim(71A, Body internal trim).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- SLIDING SIDE DOOR LOWER RUNNER
-2-
Remove the sliding side door lower runner(see 51A, Side
element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening element mechanisms, Rear side opening
2- SLIDING SIDE DOOR CENTRE RUNNER
Remove the sliding side door centre runner(see 51A, Side
element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening element mechanisms, Rear side opening
3- SLIDING SIDE DOOR UPPER RUNNER
Remove the sliding side door upper runner(see 51A, Side
element box section internal assembly: Exploded view) .
opening element mechanisms, Rear side opening
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x02x14x04-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
VEHICLE:
SPECIFICATIONS
1. VEHICLE MEASUREMENTS
-1-
F62, PROPULSION TRANSMISSION(F62)
DIMENSIONS IN METRES:
Rear Wheel Drive Van
Medium
Type of rear wheels
Long
Single wheels
Twin wheels
(A)
Twin wheels
0.842
(B)
3.682
4.332
(C)
1.674
(D)
6.198
6.848
(E)
1.750
(F)
2.527
2.549
2.557
(G)
1.730
1.612
1.612
(H)
2.470
E62(E62)
DIMENSIONS IN METRES:
Flat-bed truck
Front wheel drive L1
Roof height
H1
Front wheel drive L2
H1
Front wheel drive L3
H2
(A)
H1
H2
0.842
(B)
3.182
3.682
(C)
4.332
1.006
(D)
5.030
5.530
(E)
6.180
1.750
(F)
2.276
2.270
2.463
(G)
2.457
1.730
(H)
2.264
2.470/2.654*
* with long door mirror arms
E62(E62)
DIMENSIONS IN METRES:
Vehicle base
Front wheel drive L2
(A)
(B)
Front wheel drive L3
8.250
3.682
(C)
4.332
1.006
-2-
(D)
5.513
6.163
(E)
1.750
(F)
1.687
1.685
(G)
1.730
(H)
2.470/2.654*
* with long door mirror arms
H62, PROPULSION TRANSMISSION(H62)
DIMENSIONS IN METRES:
Double cab
chassis
Rear wheel drive L2 - Single
wheels
Rear wheel drive L3 - Single
wheels
(A)
Rear wheel drive L3 - Twin wheels Rear wheel drive L4 - Twin wheels
0.842
(B)
3.682
4.332
(C)
3.682
4.332
1.025
(D)
5.643
1.575
6.293
6.193
2.301
(E)
6.843
2.286
1.750
(F)
2.295
2.285
(G)
1.730
1.612
(H)
2.470/2.654*
* with long door mirror arms
U62, PROPULSION TRANSMISSION(U62)
DIMENSIONS IN METRES:
Cab chassis
Rear wheel drive L2 - Single wheels
Rear wheel drive L3 - Single wheels
(B)
3.682
4.332
1.025
5.643
1.575
6.293
6.193
(G)
(H)
6.843
2.283
(E)
(F)
4.332
0.842
(C)
(D)
Rear wheel drive L4 - Twin wheels
3.682
(A)
Rear wheel drive L3 - Twin wheels
2.273
1.750
2.284
2.276
1.730
1.612
2.470/2.654*
* with long door mirror arms
2. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
-3-
Engine
Gearbox
Emissions standard
Engine type
Engine suffix
Cubic capacity (cm³)
Gearbox type
Gearbox suffix
017
018
PF6
019
670
020
EURO 5
011
PA0
012
672
017
676
018
EURO 4
019
678
PF6
020
017
018
019
680
EURO 5
020
013
PA0
M9T
2298
014
686
EURO 4
690
EURO 5
000
692
ZF4
001
EURO 4
694
698
696
ZA4
700
000
ZF4
006
007
055
702
056
PF6
870
032
034
035
872
036
-4-
EURO 5
Engine
Gearbox
Emissions standard
Engine type
Engine suffix
Cubic capacity (cm³)
Gearbox type
Gearbox suffix
034
035
876
EURO 4
036
037
PF6
036
880
037
036
882
037
M9T
2298
EURO 5
000
890
001
002
000
892
ZF4
001
EURO 4
002
000
898
001
002
Repair-00x01x01-02x08-1-44-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
EURO 5
STARTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Cylinder
Exploded view .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove the engine undertray.
-1-
block assembly:
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Remove the battery wiring nut(1 ) .
Move aside the battery wiring.
-2-
Remove the nut(2 ) of the thermoplunger unit support.
Move the heating element unitto one side.
M9T, 700(700)
Remove the intercooler air outlet pipe .
Remove :
the
the
the
the
the
damper valve,
exhaust gas recirculation rigid pipe at the exhaust gas cooler outlet,
exhaust gas recirculation solenoid valve,
exhaust gas circuit temperature sensor,
inlet distributor.
-3-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-4-
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Remove:
the nut(3) from the starter excitation terminal,
the nut on the positive terminal of the starter(4) .
Move aside the engine wiring.
Remove the starterCylinder
block assembly: Exploded view
.
M9T, 700(700)
-5-
Unclip Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the coolant pipes on the coolant pipes bracket,
the coolant circuit switchover valve control pipe on the coolant circuit switchover valve support.
Remove:
the coolant circuit switchover valve pipe bolt on the coolant circuit switchover valve bracket(2) ,
the coolant circuit switchover valve bolts(1) .
Move aside the coolant circuit switchover valve.
-6-
Remove:
the coolant circuit switchover valve bracket bolts(3) ,
the coolant circuit switchover valve bracket.
-7-
Remove:
the starter excitation terminal nut(4) ,
the starter positive terminal nut(5) .
Move aside the engine wiring.
-8-
Remove:
the engine wiring nut(7) ,
the thermoplunger unit support nut(6) .
Move aside:
the engine wiring,
-9-
the thermoplunger unit with its bracket.
Remove Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view :
the starter bolts,
the starter.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Check that the starter centring dowel is in place.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view :
the starter,
the starter bolts.
- 10 -
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Refit the starter cables in accordance with the positions above:
the excitation cable terminal flange(5) to be aligned with the flange facing the solenoid,
the starter cable terminal flange(6) to be aligned with the flange facing the solenoid.
M9T, 700(700)
- 11 -
Refit the starter cables in accordance with the positions above:
the excitation cable terminal flange(8) to be aligned with the flange facing the solenoid,
the starter cable terminal flange(9) to be aligned with the flange facing the solenoid.
Torque tighten:
- 12 -
the starter bolts44
N.m,
the starter excitation terminal nut5
the starter positive terminal nut8
N.m,
N.m.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-32x04x01x01-01x37-1-147-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 13 -
STEERING ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Track rod end nut
(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Track rod: Removal - Refitting)
2
Track rod end nut
(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Track rod: Removal - Refitting)
3
Track rod end protector
(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Track rod: Removal - Refitting)
4
Track rod end protector
(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Track rod: Removal - Refitting)
5
Steering box bolts
(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Steering box: Removal - Refitting)
6
Steering box bolts
(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Steering box: Removal - Refitting)
7
Steering box
8
Intermediate shaft
9
Universal joint bolt
10
Steering gaiter clip
11
Axial ball joint linkage
12
Steering box gaiter
13
Steering gaiter rubber clip
14
Track rod
15
Upper yoke bolt
16
Steering column
(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Steering column: Removal - Refitting)
17
Steering wheel
(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Steering wheel: Removal - Refitting)
18
Steering wheel bolt
(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Steering box: Removal - Refitting) (DIR1926)
(see Intermediate shaft: Removal - Refitting)
(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Axial ball joint linkage: Removal - Refitting) (DIR1923)
(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Repair-13x04-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
Track rod: Removal - Refitting)
STEERING ASSEMBLY : CHECK
Equipment required
flywheel
immobiliser
Note:
This steps are made two sides of the vehicle.
1. STEP NO.1
Center the steering wheel and fit the
flywheel immobiliser.
Remove the wheel.
-1-
Control the clearance of the steering by exerting, on the track rod, translational movements at a high
frequency in the direction of the arrow.
If a clearance is detected:
remove the track rod nut,
remove the gaiter clips,
move the track rod gaiter to access at the axial ball joint.
2. STEP NO.2
Pinch the ball joint.
-2-
Carry out movements in translation along the direction of arrows.
If a clearance in the ball joint is detected, remove the track rod(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Removal - Refitting) .
3. STEP NO.3
Check the clearance of the axial ball joint:
fit the thumb in contact with the ball joint,
tighten the rod in the hand,
carry out movements in translation along the direction of arrows.
If no clearance is detected:
refit the gaiter,
refit new clips.
If a clearance in the ball joint are detected:
replace the track rod axial ball jointAxial ball joint linkage: Removal - Refitting ,
tighten the wheel alignment adjusting lock nut,
tighten the track rod nut.
-3-
Track rod:
4. STEP NO.4
Control the clearance of the steering by exerting, on the track rod, translational movements at a
high frequency in the direction of the arrow.
If a clearance are detected and that the track rod are not replace, replace the track rod.
Check the axle geometryAxle
assemblies: Check
.
Repair-13x04-01x58-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
STEERING BOX GAITER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 36A, Steering
assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
Remove (see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) :
the track rod,
the lock nut of the track rod.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Cut off the steering rack gaiter securing clip(1 ) .
Remove:
the steering box gaiter clip(2) ,
the steering box gaiter(see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-2-
Coat the bearing face of the steering box gaiter with silicone greaseVehicle: Parts and
repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to facilitate fitting on the axial ball joint linkage.
Clean the " gaiter - steering box " contact surfaces using surface cleanerVehicle:
the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
consumables for the
Parts and consumables for
Note:
Be sure to centre the steering to ensure the air in the gaiters is equalised.
Note:
Be careful not to damage the gaiters: risk of irreversible damage.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the front axleFront axle system: Adjustment .
Repair-13x04x03x02-01x37-1-18-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
STEERING BOX: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Ball joint extractor.
Tav. 476
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 36A, Steering
assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the front wheelsWheel: Removal - Refitting ,
the engine undertray.
-1-
Remove the wiring channel bolts(1 ) on the battery.
Move aside the battery wiring channel.
-2-
Remove the bolt(2 ) from the electric coolant pump.
Move aside the electric coolant pump.
M9T, 676(676)
Remove the catalytic converterCatalytic converter:
Removal - Refitting
(19B, Exhaust).
M9T, 670(670)
Remove the particle filterParticle filter: Removal - Refitting (19B, Exhaust).
-3-
Fit a toolPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) on the power-assisted steering low pressure pipe(3 ) .
Remove the bolt of the power-assisted steering pipe bracket from the steering boxPower-assisted
steering assembly: Exploded view .
Insert the blanking plugs.
Remove:
the bolt from the universal joint(see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) ,
the upper nuts from the anti-roll bar tie rodsFront axle assembly: Exploded view .
Tilt the anti-roll bar towards the rear of the vehicle.
-4-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove (see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) :
the track rod nuts,
the track rod end protectors.
Extract the track rod ends using theBall joint extractor.(Tav. 476 ) .
Remove:
-5-
the front axle sub-frameFront axle assembly: Exploded view ,
the steering box.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products) to clean
the surfaces of the subframe in contact with the steering box.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the front axleFront axle system: Adjustment .
Repair-13x04x03-01x37-1-27-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
STEERING COLUMN: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 36A, Steering
assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove:
the driver's frontal airbagDriver's frontal airbag: Removal - Refitting (88C, Airbags and pretensioners),
the steering wheel(see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) .
-1-
-2-
Remove:
the bolts(1) of the cowlings under the steering wheel,
the cowlings under the steering wheel,
the steering column switch assemblySteering column switch assembly: Removal - Refitting (84A, Control Signals),
the A-pillar air ductAir distribution circuit assembly: Exploded view .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the universal joint bolt(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
-3-
Steering assembly: Exploded view)
.
Disconnect:
the transponder ring connector(2) ,
the ignition switch connector(3) .
Unclip the steering column wiring.
Remove the steering column(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
IN THE EVENT OF REPLACEMENT
-4-
Steering assembly: Exploded view)
.
Remove the transponder ring from the steering column.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-5-
Note:
Check that the secured locking system of the connectors is correctly engaged.
Check:
that the steering wheel is properly aligned,
the axle geometryAxle assemblies: Check .
Adjust the front axle, if necessaryFront axle system: Adjustment .
Repair-13x04x01x02-01x37-1-33-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
STEERING COLUMN SWITCH ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Note:
The steering column switch assembly comprises:
the windscreen wiper switch,
the signalling light switch,
the rotary switch,
the steering wheel angle sensor.
These parts cannot be separated.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
CAUTION
Incorrect wheel alignment may damage the rotary switch.
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Remove the bolts(1 ) from the shells under the steering wheel.
Put the steering column into the lower position.
Remove the upper cover.
Place the steering column in the upper position.
Remove the lower cover.
Remove:
the driver's front airbagDriver's frontal airbag: Removal - Refitting ,
-2-
the steering wheelSteering wheel: Removal - Refitting (36B, Power-assisted steering).
CAUTION
To prevent damaging the rotary switch, do not turn the mobile section of the rotary
switch.
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
Undo the bolt(2 ) without removing it.
-3-
Use a flat-blade screwdriver at(3 ) to release the steering column switch assembly.
Remove the steering wheel control assembly.
Disconnect the steering column switch assembly connectors.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-4-
In the event of a replacement operation, do not remove the pin(4 ) from the steering column switch
assembly.
CAUTION
Incorrect wheel alignment may damage the rotary switch.
Ensure that the wheels are set straight ahead.
2. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
CAUTION
To prevent damaging the rotary switch, do not turn the mobile section of the rotary
switch.
Connect the steering column switch assembly connectors.
Refit the steering column switch assembly on the steering column until the lock clicks.
Secure the steering column switch assembly on the steering column using the built-in bolt(2 ) .
3. FINAL OPERATION
Clip on the steering column wiring.
-5-
Check that the index(5 ) is aligned with the clips(6 ) .
-6-
Check that the index(7 ) appears in the little window.
Place the steering column in the upper position.
Refit the lower cover.
-7-
Put the steering column into the lower position.
Refit:
the upper cover,
the bolts to the covers under the steering wheel.
In the event of a replacement operation, remove the pin.
Check that the index(5 ) is aligned with the clips(6 ) .
Check that the index(7 ) appears in the little window.
Refit:
the steering wheelSteering wheel: Removal - Refitting (36B, Power-assisted steering),
the driver's front airbagDriver's frontal airbag: Removal - Refitting .
Connect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
4. CHECKING AFTER REPAIR
Switch on the ignition.
Check the operation of the rotary switch:
turn the steering wheel to the left until it stops,
turn the steering wheel to the right until it stops,
-8-
bring the steering wheel back to the central position,
check that there are no faults on the instrument panel.
Repair-30x04x03x19-01x37-1-20-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-9-
STEERING: PRECAUTIONS FOR THE REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
1. SAFETY
1- ADVICE TO BE FOLLOWED BEFORE ANY OPERATION
For an operation requiring the use of a lift, follow the safety adviceVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting
equipment).
2- INSTRUCTION TO BE FOLLOWED DURING THE OPERATION
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
2. CLEANLINESS
1- ADVICE TO BE FOLLOWED BEFORE ANY OPERATION
Use a cover to protect any chassis elements that may be contaminated with power-assisted steering
fluid.
2- INSTRUCTION TO BE FOLLOWED DURING THE OPERATION
Clean around the power-assisted steering system using BRAKE CLEANERVehicle:
for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
-1-
Parts and consumables
3. JOB GROUP RECOMMENDATIONS
To ensure correct operation and performance of the system, do not attempt to repair any components
other than those supplied in After-Sales.
To ensure the quality of the repair, only use the tooling recommended by the manufacturer.
1- POWER ASSISTED STEERING CIRCUIT:
1)POWER-ASSISTED STEERING FLUID
Only use the fluid recommended by the manufacturer, in order to ensure correct system performance
Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
2)BLANKING PLUGS
To prevent impurities from entering the power assisted steering circuit, use blanking plugs on the various
dismantled parts.
2- SEALS
To ensure a sound power-assisted steering circuit seal, replace the power-assisted steering pipe seals
each time a pipe is removed.
3- STEERING COLUMN
CAUTION
In order not to damage the steering wheel or steering column, the steering
wheel-column foolproofing devices must be aligned.
Do not rest the steering column on the adjustment handle.
Do not handle the steering column by the adjustment handle or by the wiring.
Manoeuvre the " steering column - intermediate shaft " assembly by holding each section (one hand on
the column and the other on the intermediate shaft). If the steering column is not handled correctly,
there is a risk that the steering column or intermediate shaft could fall, which could destroy the system.
Always replace the steering column if it is dropped or in the event of an impact.
-2-
4- STEERING BOX
The steering box should not be carried by the gaiters or pipes, as this may damage them.
When the vehicle is positioned with the wheels suspended, the steering rack must not be subjected to
violent movements from lock to lock.
Risks: Damage to the teeth of the steering rack and pinion may cause a safety riskrelating to the
steering unexpectedly locking.
5- AXIAL BALL JOINT
The axial ball joint limiters(1 ) are colour coded for foolproofing purposes. When removing or replacing the
axial ball joint, check that the limiter with the correct colour code is refitted.
6- POWER-ASSISTED STEERING PUMP
Do not run the engine without steering fluid in the circuit.
-3-
7- PUMP ASSEMBLY
Do not run the engine without steering fluid in the circuit.
8- WIRING HARNESSES
Ensure that the electrical wiring is clean and correctly routed.
Repair-13x04-02x60-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
STEERING: PRECAUTIONS FOR THE REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
1. SAFETY
1- ADVICE TO BE FOLLOWED BEFORE ANY OPERATION
For an operation requiring the use of a lift, follow the safety adviceVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting
equipment).
2- INSTRUCTION TO BE FOLLOWED DURING THE OPERATION
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
2. CLEANLINESS
1- ADVICE TO BE FOLLOWED BEFORE ANY OPERATION
Use a cover to protect any chassis elements that may be contaminated with power-assisted steering
fluid.
2- INSTRUCTION TO BE FOLLOWED DURING THE OPERATION
Clean around the power-assisted steering system using BRAKE CLEANERVehicle:
for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
-1-
Parts and consumables
3. JOB GROUP RECOMMENDATIONS
To ensure correct operation and performance of the system, do not attempt to repair any components
other than those supplied in After-Sales.
To ensure the quality of the repair, only use the tooling recommended by the manufacturer.
1- POWER ASSISTED STEERING CIRCUIT:
1)POWER-ASSISTED STEERING FLUID
Only use the fluid recommended by the manufacturer, in order to ensure correct system performance
Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
2)BLANKING PLUGS
To prevent impurities from entering the power assisted steering circuit, use blanking plugs on the various
dismantled parts.
2- SEALS
To ensure a sound power-assisted steering circuit seal, replace the power-assisted steering pipe seals
each time a pipe is removed.
3- STEERING COLUMN
CAUTION
In order not to damage the steering wheel or steering column, the steering
wheel-column foolproofing devices must be aligned.
Do not rest the steering column on the adjustment handle.
Do not handle the steering column by the adjustment handle or by the wiring.
Manoeuvre the " steering column - intermediate shaft " assembly by holding each section (one hand on
the column and the other on the intermediate shaft). If the steering column is not handled correctly,
there is a risk that the steering column or intermediate shaft could fall, which could destroy the system.
Always replace the steering column if it is dropped or in the event of an impact.
-2-
4- STEERING BOX
The steering box should not be carried by the gaiters or pipes, as this may damage them.
When the vehicle is positioned with the wheels suspended, the steering rack must not be subjected to
violent movements from lock to lock.
Risks: Damage to the teeth of the steering rack and pinion may cause a safety riskrelating to the
steering unexpectedly locking.
5- AXIAL BALL JOINT
The axial ball joint limiters(1 ) are colour coded for foolproofing purposes. When removing or replacing the
axial ball joint, check that the limiter with the correct colour code is refitted.
6- POWER-ASSISTED STEERING PUMP
Do not run the engine without steering fluid in the circuit.
-3-
7- PUMP ASSEMBLY
Do not run the engine without steering fluid in the circuit.
8- WIRING HARNESSES
Ensure that the electrical wiring is clean and correctly routed.
Repair-13x04-02x60-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
STEERING WHEEL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
parts always to be replaced:
Steering wheel bolt
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering: Precautions for the repair) ,
Control - Signals: Precautions for repair ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply the procedure for deactivating the safety systemsAirbag and pretensioners: Precautions for the repair .
Remove the driver's frontal airbagDriver's frontal airbag: Removal - Refitting .
Set the wheels straight ahead.
Disconnect the connectors.
-1-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the steering wheel bolt.
Remove the steering wheel.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
Steering wheel bolt
.
Check the alignment of the rotary switchRotary switch: Adjustment .
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-2-
CAUTION
In order not to damage the steering wheel or steering column, the steering wheelcolumn foolproofing devices must be aligned.
Refit the steering wheel.
Connect the connectors.
Refit a new steering wheel bolt.
-3-
When replacing the steering wheel, torque tighten the
Loosen the bolt
180
steering wheel bolt (72 N.m).
.
Torque tighten the steering wheel bolt(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Steering assembly: Exploded view)
.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the driver's front airbagDriver's frontal airbag: Removal - Refitting .
Apply the procedure for activating the safety systemsAirbag and pretensioners: Precautions for the repair .
4. CHECKING AFTER REPAIR
Switch on the ignition.
Check the operation of the rotary switch:
turn the steering wheel to the left until it stops,
turn the steering wheel to the right until it stops,
check that there are no faults on the instrument panel.
Repair-13x04x01x01-01x37-1-24-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
Airbag and pretensioners: Precautions for the repair ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
WARNING
Never handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioners or airbags) near to a source of
heat or naked flame - they may be triggered.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply the before repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " Cruise control and speed limiter switch " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Switch off the ignition.
-1-
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the driver's frontal airbagDriver's frontal airbag: Removal - Refitting .
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-2-
CAUTION
To prevent any risk of noise, premature wear, short circuits, etc. after the refitting
operation, mark the wiring routing and how to connect the connectors.
Mark the routing of the wiring of the cruise control and speed limiter switches in the steering wheel at
(3 ) .
Disconnect the connector(4 ) from the wiring of the cruise control and speed limiter switches.
Unclip the wiring of the cruise control and speed limiter switches.
-3-
Remove the cruise control and speed limiter switches using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car.
1363 ) by positioning it at(5 ) then at (6 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
If the bolts of the audible warning brackets were removed, it is necessary to clean them as well as the
-4-
thread holes in the steering wheel.
It is necessary to:
clean the thread holes in the steering wheel to remove any swarf residues,
clean the threading of the audible warning bracket bolts,
apply threadlock to the bolt bodiesVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products).
2. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Refit the cruise control and speed limiter switches on the steering wheel.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiring harness when refitting, observe the original routing.
Clip on the wiring of the cruise control and speed limiter switches in the position marked during
removal.
Connect the connector of the wiring of the cruise control and speed limiter switches.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the driver's frontal airbagDriver's frontal airbag: Removal - Refitting
Connect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
-5-
display the " Before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " Cruise control and speed limiter switch " in the " List of components controlled by this computer "
section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-30x04x08x04-01x37-1-14-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS TO BE POSITIONED ON THE REPAIR BENCH: DESCRIPTION
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
1. PARTS REQUIRING THE USE OF A BODY JIG BENCH
(1) Front side member
(2) Front wheel arch
(3) Rear side member, front section
(4) Rear floor rear cross member
(5) Rear section of rear side member
(6) Rear axle assembly mounting unit
(7) Front subframe rear mounting unit
(8) Front jacking point
(9) Front side member rear part
2. REFERENCE POINTS FOR POSITIONING THE PARTS REPLACED
1- FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER UPPER MOUNTING
-1-
The jig rests under the shock absorber cup and is centred in the hole(F) of the shock absorber cup.
It should be used with the mechanical components removed for replacement of:
the front wheel arch.
It is also used when straightening.
WARNING
This/these point(s) help to ensure the correct axle assembly geometry.
2- END OF FRONT SIDE MEMBER
-2-
The jig rests under the front side member and is centred in the hole(H) of the front side member front section.
It should be used with the mechanical components removed for replacement of:
the front side member front section.
3- FRONT IMPACT CROSS MEMBER MOUNTING
The jig rests vertically against the closure panel component of the front impact absorber unit closure panel component of the front side member front section and is centred in the threaded
holes (K1) and (K2) of the front impact cross member mounting.
It should be used with the mechanical components removed for replacement of:
the front side member front section.
4- ENGINE MOUNTING
-3-
The jig rests against the engine mounting and is centred on the threaded holes(P1 ) and (P2 ) of the engine mounting.
It should be used with the mechanical components removed for replacement of:
the front wheel arch liner.
5- FRONT SUB-FRAME FRONT MOUNTING
The jig rests under the front side member front section and is centred in the threaded hole(C1) of the front subframe mounting.
It should be used with the mechanical components removed for replacement of:
the front side member front section.
-4-
WARNING
This/these point(s) help to ensure the correct axle assembly geometry.
6- SUBFRAME REAR MOUNTING
The jig rests against the front subframe rear mounting unit and is centred in the hole(A) .
It should be used with the mechanical components removed for replacement of:
the front subframe rear mounting unit,
front side member, rear section.
WARNING
This/these point(s) help to ensure the correct axle assembly geometry.
7- REAR END LEADER PIN OF REAR SIDE MEMBER FRONT SECTION
-5-
The jig rests against the rear side member front section and is centred in the square hole(M ) .
It is to be used when replacing:
Rear side member, front section.
WARNING
This/these point(s) help to ensure the correct axle assembly geometry.
8- REAR SHOCK ABSORBER MOUNTING
-6-
The jig is centred and attached inside the shock absorber shaft(E) .
It should be used with the mechanical components removed for replacement of:
the rear side member, rear section.
9- REAR IMPACT CROSS MEMBER MOUNTINGS
The jig rests under the rear floor rear cross member and is centred in the hole(L) .
It is to be used when replacing:
the rear floor rear cross member.
10- REAR AXLE MOUNTINGS
-7-
The jig rests under the rear axle assembly mounting unit and is centred in the threaded holes(B1) of the rear axle bearing mounting.
It should be used with the mechanical components removed for replacement of:
the rear axle assembly mounting unit.
WARNING
This/these point(s) help to ensure the correct axle assembly geometry.
Repair-40x01x42-02x21-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
SUBFRAME:
SPECIFICATIONS
-1-
-2-
Description
X (mm)
Y (mm)
Z (mm)
Diameter (mm)
(Ag)
Front subframe rear mounting, without mechanical components
402
-501
158
Ø28.5 / M16
(Ag)
Rear mounting of front subframe with mechanical components (against the cup)
402
-501
14
M16
(Ag)
Front subframe rear mounting with mechanical components (against the bolt head)
402
-501
5.4
M16
(Ad)
Front subframe rear mounting, without mechanical components
402
501
158
Ø28.5 x 35.5 / M16
(Ad)
Rear mounting of front subframe with mechanical components (against the cup)
402
501
14
M16
(Ad)
Front subframe rear mounting with mechanical components (against the bolt head)
402
501
5.5
M16
(C)
Front subframe leader pin
-30
520
284.5
30x30
(C1)
Front subframe front mounting without mechanical components
51.5
518
284.5
M14
(C1)
Front subframe front mounting with mechanical components
51.5
518
229.5
M14
(C1)
Front subframe front mounting with mechanical components (against the bolt head)
51.5
518
210.5
M14
(F)
Front shock absorber upper mounting
51.5
675
793
Angle
40.5
X: 4 30
Y: 2 45
(G)
Front side member rear end leader pin
949
469.5
228.5
30x30
(H)
Front side member front end leader pin
-677.5
544.75
284.5
10.2
(H1)
Front side member front end mounting
-601
540.5
284.5
M8
(K1)
Exterior upper mounting of front end cross member
-704
603.5
417
M10
(K2)
Interior lower mounting of front end cross member
-704
492.2
253
M10
(N)
Front side jacking point
622
775
87.5
50
(N1)
Cradle centring device
559.5
775
87.5
27
(Q1 )
Engine and transmission assembly mounting
261.5
520
284.5
M12
(Q2 )
Engine and transmission assembly mounting
97.5
514
284.5
M12
-3-
Description
X (mm)
Y (mm)
Z (mm)
Diameter (mm)
(Bg)
Rear axle assembly front mounting, with mechanical components
2884
-649
10.5
21
(Bd)
Rear axle assembly front mounting, with mechanical components
2884
649
10.5
21
(B1)
Rear axle assembly front outer mounting, without mechanical components
2998
717
129.5
M14
(B1)
Rear axle assembly front interior mounting, without mechanical components
2883.5
581
129.5
M14
(E)
Rear shock absorber upper mounting
3345.5
410
214.5
13.8
(D)
Rear axle assembly rear mounting
4289.5
711.5
169.5
M12
(I)
Centre side member rear leader pin
2640
464
131
30x30
(J )
Rear axle assembly rear mounting with mechanical components
4253
586.5
166
12
(J )
Rear axle rear mounting without mechanical components
4253
586.5
169.5
20x20
(L)
Rear end cross member leader pin
4508
649
125.5
12x16.2
(M )
Front end leader pin of centre side member
1490
464
131
30x30
(P1 )
Front engine mounting
-296
511
508
M12
(P2 )
Rear engine mounting
-120.5
511
508
M12
Repair-40x01x01x06-02x08-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
Angle
SUN VISOR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
Unclip the sun visor at(1 ) .
Remove:
the bolt(2) ,
the sun visor,
-1-
Loosen the bolt(3 ) .
Remove the sun visor mounting by(4 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
Repair-50x08x06x06-01x37-1-17-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
TACHOGRAPH: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Tool for removing radios or chronotachographs.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-1-
Remove the tachograph(1 ) using the two toolsTool for removing radios or chronotachographs. .
Disconnect the tachograph connectors starting with the supply connector.
Note:
The battery must be disconnected. To ensure that there is no supply, the supply
connector must be disconnected first and reconnected last. If the gearbox sensor
connector is disconnected first, a fault appears on the instrument panel.
-2-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Connect the tachograph connectors, leaving the supply connector until last.
Refit the tachograph.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Connect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
Note:
When replacing the tachograph, the vehicle must be taken to an approved centre to
ensure the conformity of the vehicle.
Repair-30x04x01x02-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
TAIL LIFT PLATFORM ROLLER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Note:
It is necessary to handle the tail lift in the " closed " position to release the shaft
supporting the roller. There must be play and no strain.
Remove the bolt(1 ) .
-1-
Remove the pin(2 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Remove:
the pin(3) ,
the tail lift platform roller.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
-3-
When refitting the shaft(3 ) , check that the grease fitting is positioned correctly.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x03x23x10-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
TELEMATICS COMPUTER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the 12 V batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove the gloveboxGlovebox:
Removal - Refitting
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the computer connectors.
Remove the telematics computer.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-2-
2. FINAL OPERATION
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic toolDiagnostic tool : Use :
-Computer concerned by the after repair procedure:
" Navigation computer " .
Repair-30x04x13x02-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
THERMOPLUNGER UNIT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) (80A, Battery).
Remove the engine undertray.
-1-
M9T, 870(870)
Drain the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
.
M9T, 670 672 676 678 680(670 OR 672 OR 676 OR 678 OR 680)
Remove the nuts(1 ) on the thermoplunger unit wiring.
Move aside the thermoplunger unit wiring.
-3-
Fit toolsPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) on the thermoplunger unit cooling pipes(2 ) .
Move aside using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly:
Exploded view ) :
the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe clip,
the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe clip.
Disconnect (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe,
the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe.
Remove (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the thermoplunger unit bolts,
the thermoplunger unit.
-4-
M9T, 870(870)
Remove the thermoplunger unit wiring nuts.
Move aside the thermoplunger unit wiring.
Move aside using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly:
Exploded view ) :
the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe clip,
the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe clip.
Disconnect (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe,
the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe.
Separate the following from the coolant circuit switchover valve using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot.
1448 ) :
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe,
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe.
-5-
Disconnect the following from the coolant circuit switchover valve:
the coolant circuit switchover valve inlet cooling pipe,
the coolant circuit switchover valve outlet cooling pipe,
the control pipe from the coolant circuit switchover valve(1) .
Remove the retaining bolt of the hydraulic pipe.
Move the hydraulic pipe.
-6-
Remove:
the " coolant circuit switchover valve - thermoplunger unit " assembly bolts(2) ,
the " coolant circuit switchover valve - thermoplunger unit " assembly.
-7-
Remove:
the thermoplunger unit bolts(3) ,
the thermoplunger unit.
-8-
Remove the nuts on the thermoplunger unit wiring.
Move aside the thermoplunger unit wiring.
-9-
Fit toolsPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) on the thermoplunger unit cooling pipes(2 ) .
Move aside using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit
assembly: Exploded view) :
the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe clip,
the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe clip.
- 10 -
Disconnect (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe,
the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe.
Remove (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the thermoplunger unit bolts,
the thermoplunger unit.
- 11 -
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove the thermoplunger unit wiring nuts(1 ) .
Move aside the thermoplunger unit wiring.
- 12 -
Fit toolsPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) on the thermoplunger unit cooling pipes(2 ) .
Move aside using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit
assembly: Exploded view) :
the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe clip,
the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe clip.
- 13 -
Disconnect (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe,
the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe.
Remove:
the thermoplunger unit bolts(3) ,
- 14 -
the thermoplunger unit.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the thermoplunger unit wiring nuts4 N.m.
2. FINAL OPERATION
M9T, 670 672 676 678 680 686 690 692 694 696 698 700 702(670 OR 672 OR 676 OR 678 OR 680 OR 686 OR 690 OR 692
OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 700 OR 702)
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
M9T, 870(870)
Fill and bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling,
Cooling system: Draining - Refilling)
Repair-30x02x01x34-01x37-1-29-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 15 -
.
THERMOPLUNGER UNIT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 19A, Cooling,
Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) .
IMPORTANT
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
WARNING
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove the engine undertray.
-1-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the nuts(1 ) on the thermoplunger unit wiring.
Move the thermoplunger unit wiring to one side.
-2-
Fit toolsPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) on the cooling pipes of the thermoplunger unit(2 ) .
Separate the following from the thermoplunger unit using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) (see
19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the clip of the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe,
the clip of the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe.
Disconnect the following from the thermoplunger unit(see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
the thermoplunger unit inlet cooling pipe,
the thermoplunger unit outlet cooling pipe.
Remove (see 19A, Cooling, Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view) :
-3-
the thermoplunger unit bolts,
the thermoplunger unit.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque tighten the thermoplunger unit wiring nuts4 N.m.
Perform the following operations:
top up the coolant level,
bleed the cooling system(see 19A, Cooling, Cooling system: Draining - Refilling) .
Repair-30x02x01x34-01x37-1-29-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
TIGHTENING TORQUES: GENERAL INFORMATION
1. TABLE OF STANDARD TORQUES
Fastenings
Standard tightening torque (N.m)
Diameter
Property class
M6
8.8
10
M8
8.8
25
M10
8.8
50
M10
10.9
62
M12
10.9
105
M14
10.9
180
M16
10.9
280
M18
10.9
400
SPECIAL NOTES ON ELECTRICAL EARTHS
-1-
Fastenings
Standard tightening torque (N.m)
Diameter
M6
8
M8
21
M10
44
-2-
The property class is indicated on the bolt(1 ) or (2 ) .
2. FUNCTION OF A BOLTED ASSEMBLY
The bolting system connects parts of an assembly to prevent their separation or sliding when submitted
to exterior forces.
EXTERIOR FORCES
The assembly is submitted to forces that are:
static and / or dynamic,
simple (e.g. simple traction),
-3-
multiple (traction + flexion + torsion).
CREATING TENSION (OR PRELOAD) F0
The assembly is held together by the tension created in the bolt when it is tightened.
A reliable assembly is only possible if the correct tension is used:
insufficient tension: risk of loosening,
too much tension: risk of deformation of the parts to be assembled, or shearing of the bolt.
-4-
(3) Bolt
(4) Assembled components
(5) Extension of the bolt
(6) Non-tightened assembly
(7) Tightened assembly
(X1) Compression of the assembly
(Fo) Sensor
(C) Tightening torque
Customer complaints resulting from incorrect tightening may be, following assembly, a safety issue (fire,
loss of control of the vehicle etc.), an immobilising fault or a noise.
3. TIGHTENING PROCEDURES
The two controlled tightening procedures adapted to automotive repairs because of their low cost and
-5-
simple operation are torque tightening and angle tightening (also called torque and angle).
1- TORQUE TIGHTENING
This is the most commonly used procedure. Is consists of tightening until a given resisting torque is
reached, known as tightening torque.
The tightening torque is distributed in a large part as friction torque (under the head and in the thread)
and in a small part as useful torque (to create the tension).
This practise spreads the tension significantly due to the variation in the friction coefficients from one
assembly to another and the uncertainty of the tightening procedures and methods.
2- ANGLE TIGHTENING
The principle consists of putting the parts of the assembly in contact using a mating torque
(approximately 25 to 30% of the final torque) then to tighten to a determined angle.
This method, which is not dependent on the friction of the tightened assembly, gives more precise
results than torque tightening.
4. OBSERVING THE TIGHTENING TORQUES AND ANGLES
Bolted assemblies whose tightening torques and angles are explicitly specified in the removal / refitting
procedures must be observed using the appropriate tools (torque wrench, angle measuring disc). Failure
to observe this can lead to safety risks, immobilising faults or unwanted noises.
For other bolted assemblies, non-measured tightening (using standard spanners) is acceptable.
Nevertheless, the corresponding tightening torque is indicated in the table of standard tightening torques.
5. RECOMMENDED TIGHTENING TOOLS
For measured tightening, the repairer must have available torque wrenches to tighten from 4 to 400 N.m
as well as an angle measuring disc.
The torque wrenches used may be click type or electronic.
For example:
1 torque wrench
1 torque wrench
4 - 40 N.m,
20 - 100 N.m,
80 - 400 N.m,
1 torque wrench
1 angle measurement disc.
-6-
The torque wrenches used must comply with the ISO 6789standard. They must be calibrated regularly
following the supplier's recommendations using the appropriate procedures.
6. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING A CLICK TYPE TORQUE WRENCH
A click type torque wrench is a manual tightening tool. The trigger mechanism causes a break or
disengagement of the wrench past a force threshold.
This threshold depends on the setting of the wrench but also depends on the way the wrench is handled.
When used following best practises, the accuracy of the tightness when using a click type torque
wrench is ± 15%.
The instructions to be observed are:
-7-
(6) lever arm
- Place the hand in the centre of the handle. An incorrectly positioned hand on the handle will alter the
trigger threshold.
-8-
- Pull the wrench gently and steadily, without applying any torsion. Excessive tightening speed as well
as jerkiness are major causes of overtightening. Any torsion applied to the wrench will alter the trigger
threshold.
- Hold the wrench on the bolt using a minimum of effort. Any effort applied to the wrench head will alter
the trigger threshold.
-9-
- Apply the tightening effort perpendicular to the mounting observing a tolerance of ± 15 relative to the
perpendicularity. If the wrench is not perpendicular to the mounting axis, this will result in insufficient
tightening.
- Stop tightening as soon as the wrench is triggered. Continued tightening after the wrench is triggered
will lead to overtightening.
- 10 -
If the length of the wrench is modified (extending the handle, adapting an end piece) it is essential to
recalibrate the wrench to its new configuration.
Modifying the length of the wrench will modify its trigger threshold.
Use the formula: C1 = CO x L2 / (L1+L2)
CO: torque to apply,
C1: adjustment torque to be displayed on the wrench,
L1: length of the extension,
L2: length of the wrench.
Unless there are special instructions in the repair method, a universal joint (CARDAN joint type) should
be used for measured tightening. Using a universal joint will result in a difference between the set torque
- 11 -
of the wrench and the actual torque applied.
Before storing the wrench, loosen the adjustment spring completely. A wrench stored with a spring
under tension will lose its tightening accuracy.
7. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING ELECTRONIC TORQUE WRENCHES
An electronic torque wrench is a manual tightening tool. The tightening torque and, depending on the
model, the angle is read directly.
When used following best practises, the accuracy of the tightness when using an electronic torque
wrench is ± 5%.
Electronic torque wrenches are not affected by the position of the operator's hand.
It is advisable to handle the wrench with care and to stop tightening when the required value is displayed
on the wrench.
Repair-00x01x02-02x01-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 12 -
TIMING ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Precautions for the repair
Mark
Description
Information
1
Timing assembly
(MOT1431)
2
Timing cover
3
Timing chain sprocket washer on camshaft side
4
Timing chain sprocket on camshaft side
5
Exhaust camshaft timing sprocket
7
Timing cover centring pin
8
Timing hydraulic tensioner
9
Timing chain guide bolt
10
Exhaust camshaft
11
Inlet camshaft
12
Inlet camshaft timing sprocket
13
Inlet camshaft timing sprocket spacer
14
Timing chain guide
15
Oil pump drive sprocket
16
Crankshaft seal on timing end
17
Timing chain sprocket spacer on crankshaft side
18
Chain tensioner guide
19
Timing chain
20
Timing chain sprocket on crankshaft side
21
Oil pump chain
22
Oil pump
23
Crankshaft
(see 11A,
Top and front of engine, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Timing sprocket: Removal - Refitting
(see 11A,
(see 11A,
Top and front of engine, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Top and front of engine, Cylinder head assembly: Exploded view)
Timing sprocket: Removal - Refitting
(see 11A,
Top and front of engine, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Crankshaft seal on timing end: Removal - Refitting
(see 11A,
Top and front of engine, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view
Repair-10x02x04-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
TIMING ASSEMBLY: EXPLODED VIEW
Illustration key: Description
Key.
-1-
Mark
Description
Information
1
Timing assembly
(MOT1431)
2
Timing cover
3
Timing chain sprocket washer on camshaft side
4
Timing chain sprocket on camshaft side
5
Exhaust camshaft timing sprocket
6
Cylinder head suspended mounting
7
Timing cover centring pin
8
Timing hydraulic tensioner
9
Timing chain guide bolt
10
Exhaust camshaft
11
Inlet camshaft
12
Inlet camshaft timing sprocket
13
Inlet camshaft timing sprocket spacer
14
Timing chain guide
15
Oil pump drive sprocket
16
Crankshaft seal on timing end
17
Timing chain sprocket spacer on crankshaft side
18
Chain tensioner guide
19
Timing chain
20
Timing chain sprocket on crankshaft side
21
Oil pump chain
22
Oil pump
Engine oil circuit assembly: Exploded view
23
Crankshaft
Cylinder block assembly: Exploded view
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Timing sprocket: Removal - Refitting
(see 19D, Engine mounting,
Engine-gearbox unit support assembly: Exploded view )
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Cylinder head assembly: Exploded view)
Timing sprocket: Removal - Refitting
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Crankshaft seal on timing end: Removal - Refitting)
(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
Repair-10x02x04-02x50-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
TIMING CHAIN: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Top dead centre locating pin.
Mot. 1766
Camshaft adjusting tool
Mot. 1769
Equipment required
refrigerant charging station
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 11A, Top and front
of engine, Timing assembly: Exploded view) .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine undertray.
Drain:
the engineEngine oil: Draining - Refilling ,
the cooling systemCooling system: Draining - Refilling .
Remove:
the
the
the
the
radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment),
headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting (80B, Headlights),
front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection),
front end panelFront end panel: Removal - Refitting (42A, Upper front structure),
-1-
the engine cooling fan propellerCylinder block assembly: Exploded view ,
the accessories belt(see 11A, Top and front of engine, Engine accessories assembly: Exploded view) ,
the crankshaft accessories pulley(see 11A, Top and front of engine, Engine accessories assembly: Exploded
view ) ,
the coolant pump pulleyCylinder block assembly: Exploded view .
Remove the clip(1 ) for the intercooler air inlet pipe.
Disconnect the intercooler air inlet pipe.
-2-
Move aside the clip(2 ) for the intercooler air outlet pipe.
Disconnect the intercooler air outlet pipe.
Using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) , separate the following from the cooling radiatorCoolant
circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the cooling radiator outlet pipe clip,
the cooling radiator inlet pipe clip,
the cooling radiator degassing pipe clip.
Disconnect the following from the cooling radiatorCoolant circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the cooling radiator outlet pipe,
-3-
the cooling radiator inlet pipe,
the cooling radiator degassing pipe.
Unclip the cooling pipe(6 ) from the engine cooling fan assembly.
Using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) , separate the following from the additional radiatorCoolant
circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the clip of the pipe between the cooling radiator and the additional cooling radiator,
the additional cooling radiator outlet pipe clip.
Disconnect the following from the additional cooling radiatorCoolant circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the pipe between the cooling radiator and the additional cooling radiator,
the additional cooling radiator outlet pipe.
-4-
Unclip the power-assisted steering pipe from the engine cooling fan assembly(7 ) .
-5-
-6-
Remove the bolts(8 ) from the power-assisted steering pipe.
-7-
Unclip the air conditioning pressostat wiring at(10 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the timing cover(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
-8-
Timing assembly: Exploded view)
.
Align the groove(11 ) on the crankshaft with the hole(12 ) on the cylinder block (pistons at mid-stroke).
Remove the TDC plugCylinder
block assembly: Exploded view
-9-
.
Position the Top dead centre locating pin.(Mot. 1766 ) (13 ) .
Turn the crankshaft anti-clockwise until it makes contact with the toolTop dead centre locating pin.
(Mot. 1766 ) .
- 10 -
- 11 -
Loosen the bolts(14 ) of the timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side.
Compress the timing hydraulic tensioner(15 ) with the chain tensioner guide(16 ) .
Lock the timing hydraulic tensioner using a 3 mmAllen key (17 ) .
Remove (see 11A, Top and front of engine, Timing assembly: Exploded view) :
the timing tensioner,
the chain tensioner guide,
the timing chain guide,
the washer of the timing chain sprocked on the camshaft side,
the " timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side - timing chain - timing chain sprocket on the crankshaft
side " assembly.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use super cleaning agent for joint facesVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products)
to clean:
the joint face of the timing cover on the cylinder block and on the cylinder head,
the timing cover.
- 12 -
CAUTION
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face
will result in a risk of leaks.
Remove the residue using a plastic spatula.
Finish cleaning the joint faces using a grey abrasive padVehicle:
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Parts and consumables for the repair
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Set the engine at Top Dead Centre.
Position the Top dead centre locating pin.(Mot. 1766 ) .
- 13 -
Check that:
the mark(18) on the inlet camshaft sprocket is opposite the rocker cover boss(19) ,
the groove on the exhaust camshaft is horizontal (large offset(20) facing upwards).
Refit the timing chain guide(see 11A, Top and front of engine,
- 14 -
Timing assembly: Exploded view)
.
- 15 -
Fit the new timing chain sprocket on the crankshaft side(21 ) .
Note:
The timing chain does not have a direction of fitting.
Position:
the new timing chain on the timing chain sprocket on the crankshaft side (align the sprocket mark with the
copper chain link(22) ),
the timing chain sprocket on the new camshaft side(24) on the chain (align the sprocket mark with the
copper chain link(23) ).
Fit the timing sprocket on the camshaft side(24 ) .
- 16 -
Fit a washer to the timing chain sprocket (camshaft side)(25 ) on the timing chain sprocket
(camshaft side).
Finger tighten the new bolts(26 ) of the timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side.
- 17 -
Note:
Allow the timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side to rotate freely.
Refit (see 11A, Top and front of engine, Timing assembly: Exploded view) :
the chain tensioner guide,
the timing hydraulic tensioner.
- 18 -
- 19 -
Remove the 3 mmAllen key (27 ) .
- 20 -
Engage the collet(28 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) (29 ) into the camshaft groove.
Note:
Do not engage the pins(32 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) in the holes
of the inlet camshaft timing sprocket.
- 21 -
Turn the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) to align the shafts on the spacer(30 ) and the hole
(31 ) .
Detach the collet(28 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) from the camshaft groove.
Engage the pins(32 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) in the holes of the inlet
camshaft timing sprocket.
Note:
Do not fit the collet(28 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) into the camshaft
groove.
Turn the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) to align the shafts on the spacer(30 ) and the hole
(31 ) .
Fit the collet(28 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) (29 ) into the groove on the
camshaft, without forcing it (if necessary, start the previous operations again).
- 22 -
Fit the bolt(33 ) (M6 - 50 mmlong) onto the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) .
Torque tighten the bolts of the timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side(see 11A, Top and front of
engine , Timing assembly: Exploded view) .
Remove:
- 23 -
theCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) ,
theTop dead centre locating pin.(Mot. 1766 ) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Perform the following operations:
fill and bleed the cooling circuitCooling system: Draining - Refilling ,
fill up the engineEngine oil: Draining - Refilling .
Repair-10x02x04x03-01x37-1-30-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 24 -
TIMING CHAIN: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Top dead centre locating pin.
Mot. 1766
Camshaft adjusting tool
Mot. 1769
Equipment required
refrigerant charging station
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Timing
Exploded view .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine undertray.
Drain:
the engineEngine oil: Draining - Refilling ,
the cooling systemCooling system: Draining - Refilling .
Remove:
the
the
the
the
radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment),
headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting (80B, Headlights),
front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection),
front end panelFront end panel: Removal - Refitting (42A, Upper front structure),
-1-
assembly:
the
the
the
the
engine cooling fan propellerCylinder block assembly: Exploded view ,
accessories beltEngine accessories assembly: Exploded view ,
crankshaft accessories pulley,
coolant pump pulleyCylinder block assembly: Exploded view .
Remove the clip(1 ) for the intercooler air inlet pipe.
Disconnect the intercooler air inlet pipe.
-2-
Move aside the clip(2 ) for the intercooler air outlet pipe.
Disconnect the intercooler air outlet pipe.
Using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) , separate the following from the cooling radiatorCoolant
circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the cooling radiator outlet pipe clip,
the cooling radiator inlet pipe clip,
the cooling radiator degassing pipe clip.
Disconnect the following from the cooling radiatorCoolant circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the cooling radiator outlet pipe,
-3-
the cooling radiator inlet pipe,
the cooling radiator degassing pipe.
Unclip the cooling pipe(6 ) from the engine cooling fan assembly.
Using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) , separate the following from the additional radiatorCoolant
circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the clip of the pipe between the cooling radiator and the additional cooling radiator,
the additional cooling radiator outlet pipe clip.
Disconnect the following from the additional cooling radiatorCoolant circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the pipe between the cooling radiator and the additional cooling radiator,
the additional cooling radiator outlet pipe.
-4-
Unclip the power-assisted steering pipe from the engine cooling fan assembly(7 ) .
-5-
-6-
Remove the bolts(8 ) from the power-assisted steering pipe.
-7-
Unclip the air conditioning pressostat wiring at(10 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the timing coverTiming
assembly: Exploded view
-8-
.
Align the groove(11 ) on the crankshaft with the hole(12 ) on the cylinder block (pistons at mid-stroke).
Remove the TDC plugCylinder
block assembly: Exploded view
-9-
.
Position the Top dead centre locating pin.(Mot. 1766 ) (13 ) .
Turn the crankshaft anti-clockwise until it makes contact with the toolTop dead centre locating pin.
(Mot. 1766 ) .
- 10 -
- 11 -
Loosen the bolts(14 ) of the timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side.
Compress the timing hydraulic tensioner(15 ) with the chain tensioner guide(16 ) .
Lock the timing hydraulic tensioner using a 3 mmAllen key (17 ) .
Remove Timing assembly: Exploded view :
the timing tensioner,
the chain tensioner guide,
the timing chain guide,
the washer of the timing chain sprocked on the camshaft side,
the " timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side - timing chain - timing chain sprocket on the crankshaft
side " assembly.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use super cleaning agent for joint facesVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products)
to clean:
the joint face of the timing cover on the cylinder block and on the cylinder head,
the timing cover.
- 12 -
CAUTION
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face
will result in a risk of leaks.
Remove the residue using a plastic spatula.
Finish cleaning the joint faces using a grey abrasive padVehicle:
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Parts and consumables for the repair
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Set the engine at Top Dead Centre.
Position the Top dead centre locating pin.(Mot. 1766 ) .
- 13 -
Check that:
the mark(18) on the inlet camshaft sprocket is opposite the rocker cover boss(19) ,
the groove on the exhaust camshaft is horizontal (large offset(20) facing upwards).
Refit the timing chain guideTiming
assembly: Exploded view
- 14 -
.
- 15 -
Fit the new timing chain sprocket on the crankshaft side(21 ) .
Note:
The timing chain does not have a direction of fitting.
Position:
the new timing chain on the timing chain sprocket on the crankshaft side (align the sprocket mark with the
copper chain link(22) ),
the timing chain sprocket on the new camshaft side(24) on the chain (align the sprocket mark with the
copper chain link(23) ).
Fit the timing sprocket on the camshaft side(24 ) .
- 16 -
Fit a washer to the timing chain sprocket (camshaft side)(25 ) on the timing chain sprocket
(camshaft side).
Finger tighten the new bolts(26 ) of the timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side.
- 17 -
Note:
Allow the timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side to rotate freely.
Refit Timing assembly: Exploded view :
the chain tensioner guide,
the timing hydraulic tensioner.
- 18 -
- 19 -
Remove the 3 mmAllen key (27 ) .
- 20 -
Engage the collet(28 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) (29 ) into the camshaft groove.
Note:
Do not engage the pins(32 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) in the holes
of the inlet camshaft timing sprocket.
- 21 -
Turn the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) to align the shafts on the spacer(30 ) and the hole
(31 ) .
Detach the collet(28 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) from the camshaft groove.
Engage the pins(32 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) in the holes of the inlet
camshaft timing sprocket.
Note:
Do not fit the collet(28 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) into the camshaft
groove.
Turn the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) to align the shafts on the spacer(30 ) and the hole
(31 ) .
Fit the collet(28 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) (29 ) into the groove on the
camshaft, without forcing it (if necessary, start the previous operations again).
- 22 -
Fit the bolt(33 ) (M6 - 50 mmlong) onto the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) .
Torque tighten the bolts of the timing chain sprocket on the camshaft sideTiming
view
.
Remove:
- 23 -
assembly: Exploded
theCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) ,
theTop dead centre locating pin.(Mot. 1766 ) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Perform the following operations:
fill and bleed the cooling circuitCooling system: Draining - Refilling ,
fill up the engineEngine oil: Draining - Refilling .
Repair-10x02x04x03-01x37-1-30-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 24 -
TIMING CHAIN: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Top dead centre locating pin.
Mot. 1766
Camshaft adjusting tool
Mot. 1769
Equipment required
refrigerant charging station
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Timing
Exploded view .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine undertray.
Drain:
the engineEngine oil: Draining - Refilling ,
the cooling systemCooling system: Draining - Refilling .
Remove:
the
the
the
the
radiator grilleRadiator grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment),
headlightsHeadlight: Removal - Refitting (80B, Headlights),
front bumperFront bumper: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior protection),
front end panelFront end panel: Removal - Refitting (42A, Upper front structure),
-1-
assembly:
the
the
the
the
engine cooling fan propellerCylinder block assembly: Exploded view ,
accessories beltEngine accessories assembly: Exploded view ,
crankshaft accessories pulley,
coolant pump pulleyCylinder block assembly: Exploded view .
Remove the clip(1 ) for the intercooler air inlet pipe.
Disconnect the intercooler air inlet pipe.
-2-
Move aside the clip(2 ) for the intercooler air outlet pipe.
Disconnect the intercooler air outlet pipe.
Using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) , separate the following from the cooling radiatorCoolant
circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the cooling radiator outlet pipe clip,
the cooling radiator inlet pipe clip,
the cooling radiator degassing pipe clip.
Disconnect the following from the cooling radiatorCoolant circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the cooling radiator outlet pipe,
-3-
the cooling radiator inlet pipe,
the cooling radiator degassing pipe.
Unclip the cooling pipe(6 ) from the engine cooling fan assembly.
Using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) , separate the following from the additional radiatorCoolant
circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the clip of the pipe between the cooling radiator and the additional cooling radiator,
the additional cooling radiator outlet pipe clip.
Disconnect the following from the additional cooling radiatorCoolant circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the pipe between the cooling radiator and the additional cooling radiator,
the additional cooling radiator outlet pipe.
-4-
Unclip the power-assisted steering pipe from the engine cooling fan assembly(7 ) .
-5-
-6-
Remove the bolts(8 ) from the power-assisted steering pipe.
-7-
Unclip the air conditioning pressostat wiring at(10 ) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the timing coverTiming
assembly: Exploded view
-8-
.
Align the groove(11 ) on the crankshaft with the hole(12 ) on the cylinder block (pistons at mid-stroke).
Remove the TDC plugCylinder
block assembly: Exploded view
-9-
.
Position the Top dead centre locating pin.(Mot. 1766 ) (13 ) .
Turn the crankshaft anti-clockwise until it makes contact with the toolTop dead centre locating pin.
(Mot. 1766 ) .
- 10 -
- 11 -
Loosen the bolts(14 ) of the timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side.
Compress the timing hydraulic tensioner(15 ) with the chain tensioner guide(16 ) .
Lock the timing hydraulic tensioner using a 3 mmAllen key (17 ) .
Remove Timing assembly: Exploded view :
the timing tensioner,
the chain tensioner guide,
the timing chain guide,
the washer of the timing chain sprocked on the camshaft side,
the " timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side - timing chain - timing chain sprocket on the crankshaft
side " assembly.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use super cleaning agent for joint facesVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products)
to clean:
the joint face of the timing cover on the cylinder block and on the cylinder head,
the timing cover.
- 12 -
CAUTION
Do not scrape the joint faces of the aluminium, any damage caused to the joint face
will result in a risk of leaks.
Remove the residue using a plastic spatula.
Finish cleaning the joint faces using a grey abrasive padVehicle:
(04B, Consumables - Products).
Parts and consumables for the repair
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Set the engine at Top Dead Centre.
Position the Top dead centre locating pin.(Mot. 1766 ) .
- 13 -
Check that:
the mark(18) on the inlet camshaft sprocket is opposite the rocker cover boss(19) ,
the groove on the exhaust camshaft is horizontal (large offset(20) facing upwards).
Refit the timing chain guideTiming
assembly: Exploded view
- 14 -
.
- 15 -
Fit the new timing chain sprocket on the crankshaft side(21 ) .
Note:
The timing chain does not have a direction of fitting.
Position:
the new timing chain on the timing chain sprocket on the crankshaft side (align the sprocket mark with the
copper chain link(22) ),
the timing chain sprocket on the new camshaft side(24) on the chain (align the sprocket mark with the
copper chain link(23) ).
Fit the timing sprocket on the camshaft side(24 ) .
- 16 -
Fit a washer to the timing chain sprocket (camshaft side)(25 ) on the timing chain sprocket
(camshaft side).
Finger tighten the new bolts(26 ) of the timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side.
- 17 -
Note:
Allow the timing chain sprocket on the camshaft side to rotate freely.
Refit Timing assembly: Exploded view :
the chain tensioner guide,
the timing hydraulic tensioner.
- 18 -
- 19 -
Remove the 3 mmAllen key (27 ) .
- 20 -
Engage the collet(28 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) (29 ) into the camshaft groove.
Note:
Do not engage the pins(32 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) in the holes
of the inlet camshaft timing sprocket.
- 21 -
Turn the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) to align the shafts on the spacer(30 ) and the hole
(31 ) .
Detach the collet(28 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) from the camshaft groove.
Engage the pins(32 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) in the holes of the inlet
camshaft timing sprocket.
Note:
Do not fit the collet(28 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) into the camshaft
groove.
Turn the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) to align the shafts on the spacer(30 ) and the hole
(31 ) .
Fit the collet(28 ) of the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) (29 ) into the groove on the
camshaft, without forcing it (if necessary, start the previous operations again).
- 22 -
Fit the bolt(33 ) (M6 - 50 mmlong) onto the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) .
Torque tighten the bolts of the timing chain sprocket on the camshaft sideTiming
view
.
Remove:
- 23 -
assembly: Exploded
theCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) ,
theTop dead centre locating pin.(Mot. 1766 ) .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Perform the following operations:
fill and bleed the cooling circuitCooling system: Draining - Refilling ,
fill up the engineEngine oil: Draining - Refilling .
Repair-10x02x04x03-01x37-1-30-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 24 -
TIMING SPROCKET: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Camshaft adjusting tool
Mot. 1769
Tool for adjusting gear play take-up.
Mot. 1773
Equipment required
roll pin punch
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the timing chain(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
2. REMOVAL OPERATION FOR THE TIMING SPROCKETS
-1-
.
Immobilise the camshaft timing sprockets on the inlet side using toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot.
1769 ) (1 ) .
Loosen the camshaft timing sprocket bolt(2 ) on the inlet side.
Remove the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) .
-2-
Place a flat-blade screwdriver in the hole(4 ) , compress the spring of the inlet side camshaft timing
sprocket (3 ) and remove the timing sprocket(5 ) .
Remove:
the
the
the
the
the
camshaft timing sprocket bolt on the exhaust side(5) ,
flat-blade screwdriver,
camshaft timing sprocket bolt on the inlet side(6) ,
spacer(7) on the camshaft timing sprocket on the inlet side,
camshaft timing sprocket(3) on the inlet side.
-3-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Always replace the bolt on the camshaft sprocket on the inlet side.
Clean the sprockets using surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for
the repair
.
Check that the teeth on the sprockets are not broken, chipped or scratched.
Place the base plate of theTool for adjusting gear play take-up.(Mot. 1773 ) in a vice fitted with jaws.
-4-
Fit the key of the camshaft sprocket on the inlet side(8 ) into the tool groove to stop the sprocket hub
from rotating on the inlet side camshaft.
-5-
Place the lever of theTool for adjusting gear play take-up.(Mot. 1773 ) onto the shaft(9 ) of the base plate.
Fit the lever teeth(10 ) into the lower teeth of the camshaft sprocket on the inlet side.
Tighten the butterfly nut of the toolTool for adjusting gear play take-up.(Mot. 1773 ) .
Turn the lever(10 ) anti-clockwise to align the two pinion teeth.
-6-
Place a 4 mmdiameter pin (13 ) (or a roll
pin punch)
in the camshaft sprocket hole(11 ) on the inlet side.
Note:
The Parts Department supplies the new inlet side camshaft sprocket with a locking
pin (12 ) .
Release the lever to lock the pin.
2. REFITTING OPERATION FOR THE TIMING SPROCKETS
-7-
Refit:
the camshaft sprocket(14) on the inlet side camshaft,
the pinion spacer(15) .
Fit without tightening the new bolt(16 ) on the inlet side camshaft sprocket.
Align the pinion mark with the rocker cover boss(17 ) .
-8-
Check that the exhaust side camshaft groove(18 ) is horizontal (large ring(19 ) facing upwards).
-9-
Centre the timing sprocket openings(20 ) on the camshaft hub holes.
Fit the timing sprocket fully onto the camshaft hub.
Remove the locking pin(21 ) .
Refit the Camshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) to immobilise the inlet side camshaft sprocket.
Torque and angle tighten the bolt on the inlet side camshaft sprocket20 N.m. + 35 ± 6 .
Remove the toolCamshaft adjusting tool(Mot. 1769 ) .
- 10 -
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the timing chain(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-10x02x04x11-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
.
TIPPER ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Scattolini stake body
Note:
The stake body assembly is welded to the subframe, it is therefore impossible to
separate them.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Strap the vehicle to the liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the connector(1 ) .
-2-
Remove the rubber bolt(2 ) from the stake body.
-3-
-4-
Remove the bolts from the stake body(3 ) .
Lower the vehicle on the two-post lift.
Unstrap the vehicle from the two-post lift.
-5-
Place the arms of the two-post lift under the stake body.
Remove the stake body.
Note:
Ensure that the stake body is stable when it is lifted using the lift.
-6-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the stake body on the " cab chassis " .
Align the mounting holes of the stake body with those of the " cab chassis. "
Refit:
the bolts of the stake body,
the rubber bolts of the stake body.
Tighten the rubber bolts of the stake body20 N.m.
Tighten the bolts of the stake body68 N.m.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x03x22x30-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
TIPPER CIRCUIT BREAKER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Scattolini tipper
IMPORTANT
To avoid discharging the battery, operate the tipper with the engine running.
WARNING
To avoid any accidents, the tipper must be emptied of its contents before any
operations are carried out on it.
WARNING
To prevent the tipper from lowering once raised, use the safety strut.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Start the engine.
Raise the tipper.
Fit the safety bracket(1 ) .
Switch off the engine.
Remove the front left-hand door sillDoor sill: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
-2-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Put the key of the circuit breaker in the " OFF " position.
Remove the key from the circuit breaker.
Remove:
the bolts of the electrical unit cover(2) ,
the electrical unit cover(3) .
-3-
Partially remove the sealing covers(4 ) .
-4-
Remove the nuts(5 ) from the supply connectors of the tipper circuit breaker(6 ) .
WARNING
To prevent any risk of noise, premature wear, short circuits, etc. after the refitting
operation, mark the wiring routing and how to connect the connectors.
-5-
Disconnect the supply connectors from the tipper circuit breaker.
Remove:
the bolts of the tipper circuit breaker(7) ,
the tipper circuit breaker.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit:
the tipper circuit breaker,
the bolts of the tipper circuit breaker.
Connect the supply connectors of the tipper circuit breaker.
WARNING
Incorrect tightening could cause heating of contacts, starting or charging faults,
sparking, or could cause the battery to explodeBattery: Precautions for the repair (80A,
Battery).
Refit the nuts(5 ) of the supply connectors for the tipper circuit breaker(6 ) .
Tighten the nuts of the supply connectors for the tipper circuit breaker8 N.m.
-6-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x03x22x12-01x37-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
TIPPER ELECTRICAL CONTROL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Scattolini tipper
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the driver's seat as far forward as possible.
Tilt the driver's seatback forward.
Remove the front left-hand door sillDoor sill: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove the front left-hand door sill liningFront door sill lining: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
Remove the bolt from the front seat belt(see Front
mechanisms).
seat: Exploded view) (75A,
Front seat frames and
Remove the left-hand B-pillar trimB-pillar trim: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
-1-
Unclip the fuse flap(1 ) on the left-hand side.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Cut the clip(2 ) .
Disconnect the connector(3 ) .
-3-
Unclip the tipper control wiring(4 ) .
Disconnect the connector from the tipper control wiring(5 ) .
-4-
Move aside the front floor carpet at(6 ) .
Detach the tipper control wiring(7 ) .
Remove the tipper control.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-5-
Repair-50x03x22x14-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
TIPPER HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT: BLEEDING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Scattolini tipper
IMPORTANT
To avoid any accidents, the tipper must be emptied of its contents before any
operations are carried out on it.
IMPORTANT
To prevent the tipper from lowering once raised, use the safety strut.
BLEEDING
Note:
The hydraulic circuit is bled automatically.
-1-
Fit the safety bracket(1 ) .
-2-
Undo the oil filler and level-setting cap(2 ) located on the oil reservoir.
Check the oil level (between the two positions engraved on the filler cap rod).
WARNING
To avoid any risk of a hydraulic system component operating incorrectly (jack,
pumps, hose, etc.), always use SAE 10 or Q8 ELI 1298Lhydraulic oil.
Top up the oil level if necessary.
-3-
Remove the safety bracket.
Perform several cycles of " raising/lowering " the tipper.
Fit the safety bracket(1 ) .
WARNING
To avoid any risk of a hydraulic system component operating incorrectly (jack,
pumps, hose, etc.), always use SAE 10 or Q8 ELI 1298Lhydraulic oil.
Top up the hydraulic pump oil level to the MAX mark.
Remove the safety bracket.
Repair-50x03x22x23-01x76-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
TIPPER LADDER RACK: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Open the rear board.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Unlock the retaining cables of the rear board(1 ) .
Remove:
the bolts of the platform ladder rack(2) ,
the ladder rack of the platform at(3) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x07x34-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
TIPPER REAR POST: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
DUMPER(BENBAS)
1- REAR POST OF THE THREE-WAY TIPPER
Remove the rear board(see 52A, Non-side
opening element mechanisms, Tipper side board: Removal - Refitting)
.
Open the side board.
STAKEBED(PLTRID)
1- REAR POST OF THE STAKE BODY
Open the rear board.
Remove the ladder rack from the tipper(see 56A, Exterior equipment ,
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Tipper ladder rack: Removal - Refitting)
DUMPER(BENBAS)
1- REAR POST OF THE THREE-WAY TIPPER
Remove:
the bolts of the three-way tipper rear post(1) ,
the rear post of the three-way tipper(2) .
STAKEBED(PLTRID)
1- REAR POST OF THE STAKE BODY
-2-
Remove:
the bolts of the stake body rear post(3) ,
the rear post of the stake body(4) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-3-
Repair-50x03x22x31-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
TIPPER SIDE BOARD: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL OPERATION
1- SIDE BOARD
-1-
DUMPER(BENBAS)
1)SIDE BOARD OF THREE-WAY TIPPER
-2-
Unlock the side board of the three-way tipper at(1 ) .
Open the side board of the three-way tipper at(2 ) .
Remove the side board of the three-way tipper at(3 ) with the help of a second operator.
STAKEBED(PLTRID)
1)PLATFORM SIDE BOARD
-3-
Unlock the rear board of the platform.
Open the rear board of the platform.
Unlock the retaining cables of the rear board(4 ) .
-4-
Unlock the front section of the platform side board.
Open the side board of the platform half-way.
Remove the side board of the platform at(5 ) with the help of a second operator.
2- REAR BOARD
-5-
DUMPER(BENBAS)
1)REAR BOARD OF THREE-WAY TIPPER
Unlock the rear board of the three-way tipper at(6 ) and (7 ) .
Remove the rear board of the three-way tipper(8 ) .
STAKEBED(PLTRID)
-6-
1)PLATFORM REAR BOARD
Open the rear board of the platform half-way.
Remove the platform rear board at(9 ) .
3- FIXED FRONT BOARD
-7-
STAKEBED(PLTRID)
1)FIXED FRONT BOARD OF PLATFORM
Remove the platform assembly(see 52A, Non-side
Refitting) .
opening element mechanisms, Tipper assembly: Removal -
Remove the bolt(10 ) .
-8-
Remove:
the bolts(11) ,
the cab protection at(12) with the help of a second operator.
-9-
Remove:
the bolts(13) ,
the fixed front board(14) with the help of a second operator.
REFITTING
- 10 -
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x03x22x28-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 11 -
TIPPER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Scattolini tipper
IMPORTANT
To avoid discharging the battery, operate the tipper with the engine running.
WARNING
To avoid any accidents, the tipper must be emptied of its contents before any
operations are carried out on it.
WARNING
To prevent the tipper from lowering once raised, use the safety strut.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Strap the vehicle to the liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the front left-hand door sillDoor sill: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting (80A, Battery).
Remove the emergency spare wheel.
-1-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
POSITION OF THE COMPONENTS
Note:
The following operations are to be carried out with the three-way tipper in the " lowest "
position using the lift.
Remove:
the mounting bolts of the three-way tipper safety ring(1) ,
-2-
the safety ring of the three-way tipper(2) ,
the safety cord(3) partially,
the mounting bolts of the cylinder articulated clevis(4) .
Remove the two safety shafts(5 ) from the articulated balls.
Lower the vehicle on the two-post lift.
Unstrap the vehicle from the two-post lift.
-3-
Place the arms of the two-post lift under the three-way tipper.
Remove the three-way tipper.
Note:
Ensure that the three-way tipper is stable when lifting using the lift.
-4-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the three-way tipper on its " subframe " .
-5-
Note:
When refitting the three-way tipper, check that the following are correctly positioned:
the cylinder articulated clevis(6) in its housing,
the articulated supports on the balls of the subframe.
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Strap the vehicle to the liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Refit:
the two safety shafts of the articulated balls,
the mounting bolts of the cylinder articulated clevis.
Tighten the mounting bolts of the cylinder articulated clevis83 N.m.
Refit:
the safety ring of the three-way tipper,
the mounting bolts of the three-way tipper safety ring.
Tighten the mounting bolts of the three-way tipper safety ring23 N.m.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-6-
Repair-50x03x22x29-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
TRACK ROD: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Ball joint extractor.
Tav. 476
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see 36A, Steering
assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) .
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering: Precautions for the repair) ,
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair (01D, Mechanical introduction).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the front wheelWheel: Removal - Refitting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Loosen the wheel alignment adjustment lock nut(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
view ) .
Remove (see 36A, Steering assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) :
the track rod ball joint nut,
the track rod ball joint protector.
-1-
Steering assembly: Exploded
Detach the ball joint from the track rod using the toolBall joint extractor.(Tav. 476 ) .
Unscrew the track rod anti-clockwise and note the number of turns for refitting.
Remove the track rod(see 36A, Steering assembly ,
Steering assembly: Exploded view)
.
REFITTING
Screw the track rod back in place by the number of turns noted during removal(see 36A, Steering
assembly , Steering assembly: Exploded view) .
-2-
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Adjust the front axleFront axle system: Adjustment .
Repair-13x04x02x02-01x37-1-18-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
TRACKING UNIT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply the " Before repair procedure " using the
(82A, Immobiliser).
Diagnostic tool(see Fault finding - Replacement of components)
Switch off the ignition.
Remove the gloveboxGlovebox:
Removal - Refitting
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Unclip the tracking unit connector(1 ) .
-2-
Revome:
the tracking unit bolt(2) ,
the tracking unit at(3) ,
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the " After repair procedure " using the
(82A, Immobiliser).
Diagnostic tool(see Fault finding - Replacement of components)
-3-
Repair-31x01x03x01-01x37-1-8-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
TRANSMISSION MODE MANAGEMENT CONTROL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Set of trim removal levers.
Car. 1363
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
-1-
Remove the switch plate(1 ) using the toolSet of trim removal levers.(Car. 1363 )
Disconnect the switch plate connectors.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove the transmission mode management switch(3 ) by pressing on the clips(2 ) .
-2-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-30x04x03x38-01x37-1-2-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
TRANSPONDER RING: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch off the ignition.
Put the steering column into the lower position.
-1-
Remove the upper steering column cover at(1 ) .
Place the steering column in the upper position.
Remove:
the bolts(2) on the lower steering column cover,
the lower steering column cover at(3) .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Disconnect the connector(4 ) of the transponder ring.
-3-
Remove the transponder ring(5 ) by pressing on the clips(6 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-4-
Repair-31x01x02x04-01x37-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-5-
TURBOCHARGER COOLANT PIPE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Coolant
Exploded view .
circuit assembly:
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
-1-
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the
the
the
the
engine undertray,
turbocharger air inlet pipe,
intercooler air inlet pipe,
turbochargerExhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view .
Fit the " turbocharger - turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct " assembly in a vice equipped with jaws.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Separate the clip (1 ) using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) on the coolant
pipe between exhaust fuel injector cooler and the turbocharger coolant pipe.
Disconnect the coolant pipe between the exhaust fuel injector cooler and the turbocharger coolant
pipe from the turbocharger coolant pipe.
Remove Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the turbocharger coolant pipe,
the seal on the turbocharger coolant pipe.
-3-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Using surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products), clean and degrease
the bearing faces of:
the turbocharger,
the turbocharger coolant pipe.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Top up and bleed the cooling systemCooling system: Draining - Refilling .
Repair-10x09x05x03-01x37-1-5-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
TURBOCHARGER OIL PIPE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
parts always to be replaced:
turbocharger oil pipe seal
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exhaust
engine compartment: Exploded view .
assembly in
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Remove the engine undertray.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove the low-pressure turbocharger(see 12B, Turbocharging,
-1-
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting)
.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Move aside the clip of the turbocharger oil return pipe using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose
clips. (Mot. 1448 ) Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view .
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the turbocharger oil pipe bolts,
the hollow bolt of the cylinder block oil supply pipe.
Disconnect the cylinder block oil return pipe.
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the turbocharger oil pipe,
the turbocharger oil pipe seal on the turbocharger side.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Remove Exhaust assembly in
the turbocharger oil
the turbocharger oil
the turbocharger oil
engine compartment: Exploded view :
pipe bolts,
pipe seal,
pipe.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
turbocharger oil pipe seal
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-2-
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Refit Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the turbocharger oil pipe seal on the turbocharger side,
the turbocharger oil pipe.
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Torque
tightenExhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the oil supply pipe bolts,
the hollow bolt of the cylinder block oil supply pipe.
M9T, 700 702(700 OR 702)
Refit Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the new turbocharger oil pipe seal,
the new turbocharger oil pipe,
the turbocharger oil pipe bolts.
Torque tighten the turbocharger oil pipe boltsExhaust
assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
REMOVAL
M9T, 700 702(M9T) AND (700 OR 702)
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Remove the engine undertray.
Remove the turbocharger(see 12B, Turbocharging,
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting)
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the turbo-manifold oil supply pipe hollow bolts,
the turbo-manifold oil supply pipe.
-3-
.
.
REFITTING
M9T, 700 702(M9T) AND (700 OR 702)
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the new turbo-manifold oil supply pipe,
the turbo-manifold oil supply pipe hollow bolts.
Torque tighten the turbo-manifold oil supply pipe hollow boltsExhaust
Exploded view .
2. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
REMOVAL
-4-
assembly in engine compartment:
M9T, 700 702(M9T) AND (700 OR 702)
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
Remove the engine undertray.
Remove the turbocharger(see 12B, Turbocharging,
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting)
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-5-
.
Remove the bolt(1 ) of the turbo-manifold oil return pipe bracket.
Disconnect the turbo-manifold oil return pipe(2 ) to the cylinder block.
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the turbo-manifold oil return pipe bolts,
the turbo-manifold oil return pipe,
the turbo-manifold oil return pipe seals.
REFITTING
M9T, 700 702(M9T) AND (700 OR 702)
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Parts always to be replaced: the turbo-manifold oil return pipe seals.Exhaust
compartment: Exploded view
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the new turbo-manifold oil return pipe seals,
the new turbo-manifold oil return pipe,
the turbo-manifold oil return pipe bolts,
the bolt of the turbo-manifold oil return pipe bracket.
Torque
tightenExhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the turbo-manifold oil return pipe bolts,
the bolt of the turbo-manifold oil return pipe bracket.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-10x09x03x03-01x37-1-63-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
assembly in engine
TURBOCHARGER OUTLET EXHAUST GAS DUCT: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
-1-
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exhaust
engine compartment: Exploded view .
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting .
-2-
assembly in
M9T, 700(700)
Apply the before repair procedure using the Diagnostic toolDiagnostic tool : Use :
-computer concerned by the before repair procedure:
" Injection computer "
-component affected by the before repair procedure:
" Turbocharger "
Disconnect the oil vapour pipe(1 ) on the cylinder head side.
Unclip the engine wiring(2 ) from the turbocharger air inlet pipe.
-3-
Loosen the clip(3 ) of the turbocharger air inlet pipe on the air flowmeter side.
Disconnect the turbocharger air inlet pipe from the air flowmeter.
Remove :
the turbocharger air inlet pipe bolts on the turbocharger side,
the turbocharger air inlet pipe,
the seal of the turbocharger air inlet pipe.
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the oxygen sensor,
the turbocharger heat shield bolts,
the turbocharger heat shield,
the exhaust manifold upper heat shield bolts,
-4-
the exhaust manifold upper heat shield.
M9T, 690 696 698 890 892 896 898(690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 890 OR 892 OR 896 OR 898)
Apply the before repair procedure to discharge the pressure in the system using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " Before repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " Exhaust fuel injection system " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Remove the protective screen of the exhaust fuel injectorExhaust
Exploded view .
-5-
assembly in engine compartment:
Disconnect the fuel pipe(1 ) from the exhaust fuel injector.
Insert the blanking plugs.
Disconnect the exhaust fuel injector connector(2 ) .
Remove the oxygen sensorExhaust
assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view
.
Fit a toolPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) :
on the heater matrix inlet coolant pipe(3) ,
on the coolant pipe between the exhaust fuel injector cooler and the turbocharger coolant pipe(4) .
-6-
Using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) , separate the clip on:
the heater matrix coolant inlet pipe,
on the coolant pipe between the exhaust fuel injector cooler and the turbocharger coolant pipe.
Disconnect:
the heater matrix coolant inlet pipe,
the coolant pipe between the exhaust fuel injector cooler and the turbocharger coolant pipe.
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the nuts of the exhaust fuel injector cooler,
the " exhaust fuel injector cooler - exhaust fuel injector " assembly,
the seal of the exhaust fuel injector cooler.
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Remove :
the exhaust flange nuts,
the studs of the exhaust flange on the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
the seal at the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct outlet.
Move the exhaust pipe to one side.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-7-
M9T, 700(700)
Remove the nuts(4 ) of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct.
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the bolt of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
the jubilee clip of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct seal.
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
-8-
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the upper bolt on the bracket of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
the exhaust gas duct at the turbocharger outlet,
the seal from the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Using surface
the
the
the
cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair clean and degrease the bearing faces of:
turbocharger,
turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
exhaust flange.
M9T, 700(700)
Parts always to be replaced:
turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct jubilee clip,
turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct seal.
Clean and degrease using surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair the joint face of:
the outlet exhaust gas duct,
the exhaust flange of the turbocharger
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
-9-
M9T, 700(700)
Refit Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct new seal.
the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct.
the bolt of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
the new jubilee clip of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
Refit the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct nutsExhaust
Torque
assembly under body: Exploded view
.
tightenExhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the bolt of the jubilee clip,
the bolt of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct.
Torque tighten the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct nutsExhaust
assembly under body: Exploded view
M9T, 686 690 692 694 696 698 882 890 892 896 898(686 OR 690 OR 692 OR 694 OR 696 OR 698 OR 882 OR 890 OR 892
OR 896 OR 898)
Refit Exhaust
the
the
the
assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
seal from the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct.
exhaust gas duct at the turbocharger outlet,
upper bolt on the bracket of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
M9T, 690 696 698 890 892 896 898(690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 890 OR 892 OR 896 OR 898)
- 10 -
.
(5) Exhaust injector heat shield
(A) Metal inserts (numbered 1 to 3)
(B) Clip
INCORRECT FITTING
CORRECT FITTING
- 11 -
Pass:
insert 1 under the connector(6) and pin it,
insert 2 behind the fuel union(7) .
INCORRECT FITTING
- 12 -
CORRECT FITTING
- 13 -
Pin insert 2 with the flap(8 ) facing the outside.
Pass insert 3 over the connectorand the fuel union.
- 14 -
Pin insert 3 with the flap(9 ) facing the outside.
Clip the heat shield on to the fuel pipe(10 ) .
Screw the threads of the heat shield mounting nut fully.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic toolDiagnostic tool : Use :
-computer concerned by the after repair procedure:
" Injection computer "
-component affected by the after repair procedure:
" Turbocharger "
- 15 -
Top up and bleed the cooling systemCooling system: Draining - Refilling .
Repair-10x09x01x13-01x37-1-8-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 16 -
TURBOCHARGER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
Pipe clamps.
Ms. 583
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exhaust
engine compartment: Exploded view .
assembly in
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
-1-
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply the before repair procedure to discharge the pressure in the system using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
select " Exhaust fuel injection system " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine undertray.
Remove :
the turbocharger air inlet pipe,
the seal of the turbocharger air inlet pipe,
the intercooler air inlet pipe.
-2-
Remove:
the bolts(1) from the exhaust manifold heat shield,
the exhaust manifold heat shield.
-3-
Disconnect the exhaust fuel injector fuel pipe at(2 ) .
Insert the blanking plugs.
Disconnect the exhaust fuel injector connector(3 ) .
-4-
Disconnect the oxygen sensor connector(4 ) .
Unclip the oxygen sensor wiring.
-5-
Disconnect the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector(5 ) .
Unclip the wiring harness from the exhaust gas temperature sensor at(6 ) .
-6-
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensor bolt(7 ) .
-7-
-8-
Fit the toolPipe clamps.(Ms. 583 ) on:
the heater matrix coolant inlet pipe(8) ,
the coolant pipe between the electric coolant pump and the turbocharger coolant pipe(9) .
Using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view , separate the
clip on:
the heater matrix coolant inlet pipe,
the coolant pipe between the electric coolant pump and the turbocharger coolant pipe.
Disconnect Coolant circuit assembly: Exploded view :
the heater matrix coolant inlet pipe,
the coolant pipe between the electric coolant pump and the turbocharger coolant pipe.
-9-
Unclip the oil level sensor wiring from the turbocharger coolant pipe(10 ) .
Remove:
the turbocharger oil pipe boltsExhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view ,
the turbocharger oil pipe sealExhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view ,
- 10 -
the exhaust flange nuts.
Move the exhaust pipe to one side.
Remove the outlet seal of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the bracket of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
the turbocharger nuts,
the " turbocharger - turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct " assembly,
the turbocharger seal on the exhaust manifold side.
Note:
Apply super releasing agentVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B,
Consumables - Products) to the turbocharger studs to prevent the studs from breaking
when the nuts are loosened.
1- IF REPLACING THE TURBOCHARGER
Fit the " turbocharger - turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct " assembly in a vice equipped with
jaws.
Remove the exhaust gas temperature sensorExhaust
- 11 -
assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view
.
Separate the clip (11 ) on the coolant pipe between the exhaust fuel injector cooler and the
turbocharger coolant pipe using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose clips.(Mot. 1448 ) .
Disconnect the coolant pipe between the exhaust fuel injector cooler and the turbocharger coolant
pipe, from the exhaust fuel injector cooler.
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
- 12 -
the nuts of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
the seal of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Using surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B, Consumables - Products), clean and
degrease the bearing faces of:
the turbocharger,
the exhaust manifold,
the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
the exhaust system.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the after repair procedure to check system sealing using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " Injection computer " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
- 13 -
select " Exhaust fuel injection system " in the " List of components controlled by this computer " section,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Top up and bleed the cooling systemCooling system: Draining - Refilling .
Repair-10x09x01-01x37-1-106-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 14 -
TURBOCHARGER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Remote operation pliers for hose clips.
Mot. 1448
22 mm socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors.
Mot. 1495-01
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)Exhaust
engine compartment: Exploded view .
assembly in
WARNING
Wear cut-resistant gloves during the operation.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, take care as the radiator fan(s) may start
up unexpectedly (risk of being cut).
To avoid any risk of serious burns when the engine is hot:
do not open the expansion bottle cap,
do not drain the cooling system,
do not open the bleed screw(s).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
-1-
Note:
This engine is equipped with two turbochargers:
low-pressure turbocharger,
high-pressure integrated turbo-manifold.
This document concerns the low-pressure turbocharger.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Apply the before repair procedure using the Diagnostic toolDiagnostic tool : Use :
-Computer concerned by the before repair procedure:
" Injection computer " ,
-Component affected by the before repair procedure:
" Injection computer " .
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the intercooler air inlet pipe,
the duct between the low pressure turbocharger and the turbo-manifoldExhaust assembly in engine
compartment: Exploded view .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Disconnect the oil vapour pipe(1 ) on the cylinder head side.
Unclip the engine wiring(2 ) from the turbocharger air inlet pipe.
-3-
Loosen the clip(3 ) of the turbocharger air inlet pipe on the air flowmeter side.
Disconnect the turbocharger air inlet pipe from the air flowmeter.
Remove :
the turbocharger air inlet pipe bolts on the turbocharger side,
the turbocharger air inlet pipe,
the seal of the turbocharger air inlet pipe.
-4-
Disconnect the oxygen sensor connector(4 ) .
Unclip the oxygen sensor wiring at(5 ) .
Remove the oxygen sensor(6 ) using the tool22 mm socket for removal - refitting of oxygen sensors.
(Mot. 1495-01) .
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the turbocharger heat shield bolts,
the turbocharger heat shield,
the exhaust manifold upper heat shield bolts,
the exhaust manifold upper heat shield.
-5-
M9T, 700(700)
Remove the particle filterExhaust
assembly under body: Exploded view
.
Remove the nuts(7 ) of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct.
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the bolt of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
-6-
the jubilee clip of the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct.
Disconnect the turbocharger control hoses at(8 ) .
-7-
Move aside the clip(9 ) of the turbocharger oil pipe using the toolRemote operation pliers for hose
clips. (Mot. 1448 ) .
Remove the hollow bolt of the turbocharger oil pipe(10 ) .
Disconnect the turbocharger oil pipe.
-8-
Remove the bolt(11 ) of the turbocharger strut.
-9-
Lay out a clean cloth under the flange between the turbocharger and the integrated turbo-manifold
to catch the ring(12 ) in case it falls off when removing the turbocharger.
Remove Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view :
the turbocharger nuts,
the turbocharger,
- 10 -
the turbocharger seal.
CAUTION
Make sure to hold the ring(12 ) in its position when removing the turbocharger to avoid
damaging it.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Parts always to be replaced:
seal between exhaust manifold and turbocharger,
turbocharger nut,
turbocharger oil pipe,
turbocharger oil pipe seal,
turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct jubilee clip.
Clean and degrease using surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair :
the turbocharger joint face,
the integrated manifold turbocharger joint face,
the turbocharger outlet exhaust gas duct,
the exhaust system.
- 11 -
CAUTION
To ensure proper sealing, the gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and not greasy
(avoid any finger marks).
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the ring(13 ) if necessary.
- 12 -
CAUTION
Make sure that the ring is correctly positionned before refitting the turbocharger.
Refit Exhaust assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view
the new turbocharger seal,
the turboharger seal,
the new turbocharger nuts.
Torque tighten the turbocharger nutsExhaust
assembly in engine compartment: Exploded view
3. FINAL OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic toolDiagnostic tool : Use :
-Computer concerned by the after repair procedure:
" Injection computer " ,
-Component affected by the after repair procedure:
" Injection computer " .
Repair-10x09x01-01x37-1-130-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 13 -
.
Technical Note 3419A
Vehicles
Engine types
Engine suffixes
Petrol
All turbocharger engine suffixes
Diesel
All turbocharger engine suffixes
All vehicles
TURBOCHARGER FAULT FINDING FOR PETROL AND
DIESEL ENGINES
77 11 295 740
Edition 4 - JANUARY 2011
" The repair procedures given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the technical
specifications current
when it was prepared.
The procedures may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the manufacturer in the
production of the various component units and accessories from which its
vehicles are constructed " .
Edition Anglaise
All copyrights reserved by Renault.
Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part
reference numbering system is prohibited without the prior written authority of
RENAULT.
© Renault s.a.s. 2011
Contents
Page
12B
3419A.mif
V2
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Introduction
Fault finding – Customer complaints
Fault finding – Fault finding chart
Fault finding – Test summary table
Fault finding – Test
12B - 1
12B - 2
12B - 3
12B - 13
12B - 14
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Introduction
12B
This Technical Note provides an entire fault finding procedure which allows components of the turbocharging system
to be either implicated or cleared.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 1
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Customer complaints
NOTES
12B
Information about traces of gas on the turbocharger:
Gas leaks around the turbocharger are often normal. As long as they do not damage
the components surrounding the turbocharger, they cause no customer complaints
other than soiling of the surrounding parts.
They appear when the pressure upstream of the turbocharger is high and do not provide
an explanation for abnormal noises from the turbocharger as they are not located in the
exhaust pipe which is conveying the noise.
Do not replace a turbocharger under the pretext that traces of gas appear on the
body of the turbocharger.
Note the fault finding chart which corresponds to the customer complaint in the
table below.
Oil leaks from the turbocharger
ALP 1
Whistling from the turbocharger
ALP 2
Noise when pedal released quickly on petrol engine
ALP 3
Poor performance or driving pleasure - Smoke from the exhaust
ALP 4
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 2
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Fault finding chart
ALP 1
NOTES
12B
Oil leak from the turbocharger
This ALP concerns the oil leak problem around the turbocharger.
Checking the area around the turbocharger
Note:
In 95% of cases, oil present on the turbocharger casings does not arise from a casing fault but relates to poor
sealing between the interfaces.
First check the area around the turbocharger in order to ensure that oil was not simply poured over the
turbocharger.
The presence of oil in the air ducts is normal; it does not prove that there is a turbocharger leak but is actually the
natural path taken by rebreathing gas. The presence and consumption of oil does not justify removal of the
turbocharger.
Without starting the engine, check the area around the turbocharger and identify the origin of the leaks.
Clean the traces of oil found on the turbocharger and surrounding area (ducts, pipes, etc.)
WARNING
If the air filter had been previously removed, refit it before starting the engine (risk of foreign bodies entering into
the air inlet circuit).
If the turbocharger outlet ducts have been removed, it is important to refit them before starting the engine.
Otherwise, (without outlet counter-pressure) oil will come out of the turbocharger outlet even if it is in perfect
condition.
Start the engine and allow it to warm up for several minutes.
Accelerate several times with no load gradually, prolonging the accelerations before releasing the accelerator
pedal.
Visually inspect the external condition of the oil supply and return pipes of the turbocharger as well as the air ducts
upstream (including the rebreathing pipe) and downstream of the turbocharger.
Identify the origin of any leaks.
A
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 3
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Fault finding chart
12B
ALP 1
CONTINUED 1
A
Are traces of oil present on the interfaces between the turbocharger and the air ducts?
NO
YES
B
Check the interface
Check that the defective interface (inlet or outlet), which is the origin of
the oil leak, is correctly tightened.
Note:
It is normal to find oil inside the pipes at the turbocharger inlet and
outlet, as the air passing through the compressor is loaded with oil from
the engine rebreathing circuit.
Is the interface concerned correctly tightened?
YES
Replace the pipe or seal concerned (see Mechanical MR for the
vehicle, 12B Turbocharging). End of procedure.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 4
NO
Tighten the interface or refit
the pipe concerned (replace
the seal if necessary).
End of procedure.
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Fault finding chart
ALP 1
CONTINUED 2
B
Are traces of oil present on the oil supply or return of the turbocharger?
YES
NO
Check the turbocharger oil supply inlet and outlet.
Check the tightness of the faulty interface (inlet or outlet) at the
origin of the oil leak.
IMPORTANT: As oil is flammable and arrives under pressure,
the oil supply must be perfectly sealed after the operation. (to
avoid the increased risk of oil leaks on the exhaust manifold on
petrol engines).
Is the interface concerned correctly tightened?
The turbocharger is not the cause. The
traces of oil are coming from another engine
component and the oil is running into the
turbocharger.
Note the component causing the oil leak
and refer to the relevant repair manual.
(see the Mechanical MR for the vehicle,
10A Engine and cylinder block
assembly).
End of procedure.
NO
YES
Retighten the pipe concerned.
End of procedure.
C
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 5
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Fault finding chart
12B
ALP 1
CONTINUED 3
C
YES
Replace the seal and if necessary the pipe of the part concerned (petrol engine).
Replace only the seal or the pipe of the part concerned for diesel engines.
(see Mechanical MR for the vehicle, 12B, Turbocharging)
IMPORTANT: The rigid sections of the oil pipes must not be folded during handling. Folded pipes must be replaced
and not unfolded. Before refitting an oil pipe, check that it is not partially obstructed by sludge. Replace it if
necessary.
End of procedure.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 6
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Fault finding chart
ALP 2
12B
Whistling potentially due to the turbocharger
Using the MCS (Symptom Targeting Module) tool, choose the appropriate
symptom, specifying the context, then check for applicable ACTIS solutions.
NOTES
Perform a road test with the customer to reproduce and confirm the symptom
described by the customer
Check that the noise is independent of the environment (road profile and surface in
particular).
Under what conditions (vehicle speed, gear, pedal depressed) does the customer
hear the noise?
Whistling at low speeds, particularly when driving in town, on low or moderate accelerations
(vehicle speed less than 30 mph (50 km/h), engine speed less than 2000 rpm, second
gear often engaged).
YES
A
YES
B
YES
B
YES
C
NO
Whistling on heavy acceleration (pedal fully depressed) in third gear and on the upper
gears when starting from an engine speed below 2000 rpm.
NO
Whistling when the engine is heavily loaded, with the accelerator pedal maintained at over
half of its travel (engine speed greater than 2000 rpm, in second gear or on the upper
gears).
NO
Whistling with the engine partly or heavily loaded, over a wide range of engine speeds
(accelerator pedal maintained at over 25% of its travel).
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 7
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Fault finding chart
12B
ALP 2
CONTINUED 1
A
Whistling at low speeds, particularly when driving in town, on low or
moderate accelerations.
Does the noise change when playing with the accelerator pedal or
is it audible when accelerating but not when stable?
AND
Can the noise be heard less or is it even inaudible during heavy
acceleration when pulling away?
AND
Is the noise more pronounced with the engine cold than a warm
engine?
YES
Perform Test 1 Area surrounding the engine.
Perform Test 6 Turbocharger actuator check.
Perform Test 5 Acoustics at low load.
Contact the Techline.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 8
NO
The turbocharger is not the
source of the noise. Consider
noises from the bearing,
engine or kinematic chain.
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Fault finding chart
12B
ALP 2
CONTINUED 2
B
NO
YES
Does lifting your foot off the pedal (without braking) cause the
noise to disappear immediately?
The turbocharger is not the
source of the noise.
Consider noises from the
bearing, engine or kinematic
chain.
End of procedure.
YES
Perform Test 1 Area surrounding the engine.
Perform Test 6 Turbocharger actuator check.
Check the condition of the pulse damper and remove any oil in
the ducts if necessary.
Check the sealing of the exhaust gas recirculation circuit; repair
it if necessary.
Has the noise disappeared?
NO
Perform Test 7 Turbocharger check and contact the Techline
to make a recording of the noise.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 9
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Fault finding chart
12B
ALP 2
CONTINUED 3
C
Is the noise also accompanied by considerable smoke or poor
performance?
YES
Perform TEST 2 Preliminary check of components other than
the turbocharger.
Perform TEST 3 Air chain check.
Perform TEST 4 Turbocharger solenoid valve check.
Perform TEST 7 Turbocharger check.
Contact the Techline.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 10
NO
The turbocharger is not the
source of the noise.
Consider noises from the
bearing, engine or kinematic
chain.
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Fault finding chart
ALP 3
12B
Noise when pedal released quickly on petrol engine
Using the MCS (Symptom Targeting Module) tool, choose the appropriate
symptom, specifying the context, then check for applicable ACTIS solutions.
NOTES
Perform a road test with the customer to reproduce and confirm the symptom
described by the customer.
Only apply this ALP if the customer is complaining about a releasing noise (hissing or
cannon noise etc.), when the accelerator pedal is released quickly after heavy
acceleration.
Perform TEST 1 Area surrounding the engine check.
Perform TEST 6 Turbocharger actuator check.
Perform TEST 3 Air chain check.
Has the noise disappeared?
YES
NO
Contact the Techline to make a recording of the noise.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 11
End of procedure.
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Fault finding chart
Performance, consumption, driving pleasure, emission control
and smoke from the exhaust
ALP 4
Using the MCS (Symptom Targeting Module) tool, choose the appropriate
symptom, specifying the context, then check for applicable ACTIS solutions.
NOTES
Perform a road test with the customer to reproduce and confirm the symptom
described by the customer.
Perform TEST 2 Preliminary check of components other than the turbocharger.
Perform TEST 3 Air chain check.
Perform TEST 4 Turbocharger solenoid valve check.
Is the customer only complaining about the following problems:
Bad smells or Smoke from the exhaust?
YES
Proceed to smoke fault finding.
3419A.mif
V2
NO
Perform TEST 7 Turbocharger check.
12B - 12
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Summary table of tests
12B
Area around the engine check
TEST 1
Preliminary check of components other than the turbocharger
TEST 2
Air chain check
TEST 3
Turbocharger solenoid valve check
TEST 4
Acoustics at low load
TEST 5
Turbocharger actuator check
TEST 6
Turbocharger check
TEST 7
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 13
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 1
NOTES
12B
Area around the engine check
None.
Switch on the vehicle + after ignition feed following the recommended procedure.
Use the CLIP tool to check for the presence of faults relating to the following components and depending on
the vehicle equipment:
– computer,
– injectors,
– fuel pressure regulation system (pressure sensor, pressure regulator, flow regulator),
– turbocharger solenoid valve,
– EGR system (EGR valve, EGR bypass valve, damper valve),
– turbocharger pressure sensor,
– air temperature sensor,
– fuel temperature sensor,
– water in the diesel presence sensor.
If faults are present, access the corresponding fault finding procedures, using the diagnostic tool interface or
referring to the repair manual (see fault finding MR for the vehicle, 17B, Petrol injection or 13B, Diesel
injection).
If not, move on to the next step.
If there are any doubts about the oil grade (maintenance booklet, noise changes according to the oil temperature),
move on to the next step.
Otherwise, check the oil level and move on to step A.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 14
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Tests
12B
TEST 1
CONTINUED
Perform an engine oil change.
Perform a road test then leave the engine running when stationary until the fan assembly is triggered to
homogenise the oil.
Return to the conditions under which the noise was perceived.
If the noise becomes more marked, replace the turbocharger (see mechanical MR for the vehicle, 12B,
Turbocharging, Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting).
If not, move on to step A.
Step A:
Start the engine before performing the following checks.
Check the sealing of the air line. Adjust the conformity if necessary.
Check the exhaust system tightness. Adjust the conformity if necessary.
Check that the exhaust pipe hooks underneath the body, that all the parts are correctly mounted, and that the
brackets and screens are connected to the ducts. Adjust the conformity if necessary.
Return to the ALP.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 15
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 2
NOTES
12B
Preliminary check of components other than the turbocharger
None.
Check the engine oil level. The oil level must not exceed the maximum level.
If it is not correct, top up the oil level.
To confirm and reproduce the symptom, perform a road test, with accelerations under load by demanding the
turbocharger.
If the customer complaint is " smoke from the exhaust " , check it when driving.
Move on to the next step.
Use the CLIP tool to check for the presence of faults relating to the following components and depending on
the vehicle equipment:
– computer,
– injectors,
– fuel pressure regulation system (pressure sensor, pressure regulator, flow regulator),
– turbocharger solenoid valve,
– EGR system (EGR valve, EGR bypass valve, damper valve),
– turbocharger pressure sensor,
– air temperature sensor,
– fuel temperature sensor,
– water in the diesel presence sensor.
If faults are present, access the corresponding fault finding procedures, using the diagnostic tool interface or
referring to the repair manual (see fault finding MR for the vehicle, 17B, Petrol injection or 13B, Diesel
injection).
If not, move on to the next step.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 16
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 2
CONTINUED
Start the engine and let it run at idle speed for 1 min.
Check the battery voltage using the parameter PR071 Computer feed voltage.
If the value is greater than 13 V, return to the ALP.
If not, move on to the next step.
Check the charge circuit.
Return to the ALP.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 17
12B
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 3
NOTES
12B
Air chain check
None.
Check the condition (pinching, bending, tearing, cut-off, piercing), fitting and sealing of the following components
of the air and exhaust circuit:
Air filter
In particular, check the replacement interval, the direction of fitting and the condition of the filtering part.
For each operation,
– check that no foreign bodies (nuts and bolts, cloths etc.) entered the filter unit.
– take care not to pinch the seals when refitting.
Low pressure air circuit
– the fresh air inlet scoop on the front panel of the vehicle,
– the air inlet pipe to the air filter,
– the air pipes from the filter up to the compressor inlet,
– rebreathing pipes (separation),
– the air flowmeter mountings.
High pressure circuit
– compressor outlet pipe on the turbocharger air cooler,
– the turbocharging air cooler outlet pipe to the inlet manifold,
– the inlet manifold,
– pipes connected to the EGR valve or its cooler (DIESEL engine),
– the temperature and pressure sensors.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 18
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Tests
12B
TEST 3
CONTINUED
Exhaust circuit
– the exhaust manifold circuit to the turbocharger turbine,
– the turbine outlet pipe to the end of the exhaust pipe,
– the inlet manifold up to the EGR valve for DIESEL engines,
– the temperature and pressure sensors present.
If one or more of these components presents a non-conformity, repair or replace the defective part(s) and return
to the ALP.
Otherwise, return to the ALP.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 19
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 4
NOTES
Turbocharger solenoid valve check
None.
Is the engine a petrol engine?
NO
Diesel solenoid valve
YES
Visual inspection of the solenoid valve electrical connector
Note:
These checks are purely visual.
Check that the connector is properly connected and locked.
Check that the electrical wires at the end of the sheath are not damaged.
Disconnect the connector to continue the checks.
Check that there is no heat damage to the unit or mechanical damage to the lock.
Check that the contacts (clips and tabs) are not deformed.
Check that there is no water present in the connector and that the seals are in good condition.
Do the visual checks show any evidence of damage?
NO
YES
Refer to Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring:
Precautions for repair.
Move on to the next step.
B
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 20
B
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Tests
12B
TEST 4
CONTINUED 1
B
Check the electrical resistance of the petrol solenoid valve
Measure the resistance at the terminals of the solenoid valve.
For petrol engines equipped with an EATON solenoid valve (part numbers 77 00 115 002 and 82 00 702 990), the
resistance must be between 25 Ω & lt; X & lt; 45 Ω.
For petrol engines equipped with a PIERBURG solenoid valve (part number 82 00 603 558), the resistance must
be between 15 Ω & lt; X & lt; 35 Ω.
If the resistance measured is correct, return to the ALP.
Otherwise, replace the turbocharger solenoid valve (see MR for vehicle, 12B, Turbocharging, Turbocharger:
Removal - Refitting).
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 21
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Tests
12B
TEST 4
CONTINUED 2
Diesel solenoid valve
Checking the battery voltage with the engine running
Start the engine and let it run at idle speed for 1 min.
Check the battery voltage using the parameter PR071 Computer feed voltage.
Is the value PR071 greater than 13 V?
NO
YES
Check the charging circuit and move on to the next step.
C
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 22
C
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Tests
12B
TEST 4
CONTINUED 3
C
Check the vacuum at the turbocharger inlet (diaphragm)
Start the engine and let it idle.
Check the engine temperature using PR064 Coolant temperature.
Allow the engine to warm up until it reaches a temperature of 80°C.
Disconnect the vacuum pipe connected to the actuator (diaphragm).
Connect a vacuum gauge to the end of the disconnected pipe and set it to vacuum measurement position.
Accelerate quickly by depressing the accelerator pedal completely and releasing it immediately.
The pedal must not be fully depressed for longer than 1 second.
During this acceleration, the engine speed must reach more than 3000 rpm.
Repeat the operation 3 times.
Read the maximum vacuum displayed on the vacuum gauge during acceleration and deceleration and after
returning to idle speed.
Vacuum value tolerance intervals to be respected (negative values):
-1 bar & lt; CORRECT vacuum value & lt; - 0.4 bar
- 0.4 bar & lt; INCORRECT vacuum value & lt; 0 bar
Is the vacuum at the turbocharger actuator inlet correct?
NO
YES
The solenoid valve is in order.
Return to the ALP.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 23
Diesel solenoid
valve
performance
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 4
CONTINUED 4
Diesel solenoid
valve performance
Checking the vacuum at the solenoid valve outlet
With the engine running at idle speed, disconnect the vacuum pipe from the end piece of the solenoid valve outlet.
This pipe connects the solenoid valve to the turbocharger actuator (diaphragm).
Connect a vacuum gauge to the solenoid valve outlet and set it to the vacuum measurement position.
Accelerate quickly by depressing the accelerator pedal completely and releasing it immediately.
The pedal must not be fully depressed for longer than 1 second.
During this acceleration, the engine speed must reach a speed greater than 3000 rpm.
Repeat the operation 3 times.
Read the maximum vacuum displayed on the vacuum gauge during acceleration and deceleration and after
returning to idle speed.
Vacuum value tolerance intervals to be respected (negative values):
-1 bar & lt; CORRECT vacuum value & lt; - 0.4 bar
- 0.4 bar & lt; INCORRECT vacuum value & lt; 0 bar
Is the vacuum displayed at the turbocharger actuator solenoid valve outlet correct?
YES
NO
Replace the vacuum pipe between the solenoid
valve and the turbocharger pressure regulator
(see MR for the vehicle, 12B, Turbocharging,
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting).
Reconnect the vacuum pipe to the turbocharging
pressure regulator and move on to the next step.
E
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 24
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 4
CONTINUED 5
E
Visual inspection of the solenoid valve electrical connector
Note:
These checks are purely visual.
Check that the connector is properly connected and locked.
Check that the electrical wires at the end of the sheath are not damaged.
Disconnect the connector to continue the checks.
Check that there is no heat damage to the unit or mechanical damage to the lock.
Check that the contacts (clips and tabs) are not deformed.
Check that there is no water present in the connector and that the seals are in good condition.
Do the visual checks show any evidence of damage?
NO
YES
Refer to Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring:
Precautions for repair.
F
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 25
F
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 4
CONTINUED 6
F
Checking the vacuum at the solenoid valve inlet
Start the engine and let it idle.
Disconnect the vacuum pipe from the end piece of the solenoid valve inlet.
This pipe connects the vacuum pump to the turbocharger solenoid valve.
Connect a vacuum gauge to the end of the disconnected pipe and set it to vacuum measurement position.
Read the vacuum displayed by the vacuum gauge.
Vacuum value tolerance intervals to be respected (negative values):
-1 bar & lt; CORRECT vacuum value & lt; -0.85 bar
- 0.85 bar & lt; INCORRECT vacuum value & lt; 0 bar
Is the vacuum displayed at the solenoid valve inlet correct?
YES
G
3419A.mif
V2
NO
Carry out the following operations.
– Reconnect the vacuum pipe to the turbocharger solenoid
valve.
– Check that the connection of the vacuum pipe(s) is correct.
Visually check the condition of the vacuum pipes leaving the
vacuum pump to the different supplied components.
Refer to the repair manual (see Mechanical MR for the
vehicle).
12B - 26
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 4
CONTINUED 7
G
Was the vacuum pump pipe correctly connected to the correct solenoid valve take-off pipe?
(inversion noticed sometimes)
YES
NO
Replace the solenoid valve (see Mechanical MR for
the vehicle, 12B, Turbocharging).
Reconnect the pipes correctly
Return to the ALP
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 27
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 5
NOTES
12B
Acoustics at low load
None.
Acoustic check of the turbocharger with the original setting
Note:
These turbocharger noises that can be heard whilst driving can be reproduced in the workshop when accelerating
in neutral.
The principle is to identify whether the noise depends on the turbocharger speed by testing 2 different engine
speeds.
With the vehicle stationary, disengage and perform accelerations without allowing the oil to heat up (cold engine).
Record the original noise.
Move on to the next step.
If the engine is equipped with a regulation solenoid valve, move on to the next step.
If not, move on to step A.
Acoustic check involving forcing the setting under no vacuum
Note:
The principle of this test is to force the turbocharger actuator control setting to the minimum so that the turbine
produces the least amount of energy possible.
Disconnect the pneumatic control of the turbocharger actuator.
Clamp the disconnected pipe using a clip.
With the vehicle stationary, disengage and perform accelerations without allowing the oil to heat up (cold engine).
Compare the noise with the original noise.
If the noise has changed in relation to the original noise, replace the turbocharger (see mechanical MR for the
vehicle, 12B, Turbocharging, Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting).
Otherwise, the turbocharger is not the source of the noise. Return to the ALP.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 28
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Tests
12B
TEST 5
CONTINUED
Step A:
Acoustic check involving forcing the setting under maximum pressure
Note:
The principle of this test is to force the turbocharger actuator control setting to the minimum so that the turbine
produces the least amount of energy possible.
Disconnect the pneumatic control of the turbocharger actuator.
Clamp the disconnected pipe using a clip.
Connect a pressure pump to the diaphragm and apply the necessary pressure until complete opening (feel the
start and end of movement by hand).
With the vehicle stationary, disengage and perform accelerations without allowing the oil to heat up (cold engine).
Compare the noise with the original noise.
If the noise has changed in relation to the original noise, replace the turbocharger (see mechanical MR for the
vehicle, 12B, Turbocharging, Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting).
Otherwise, the turbocharger is not the source of the noise. Return to the ALP.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 29
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 6
Turbocharger actuator
Warning
Never touch the nuts for adjusting the diaphragm rod length.
NOTES
Is the turbocharger actuator rod (diaphragm) perpendicular
to the shaft of the turbocharger (shaft connecting the compressor wheel to the turbine wheel)?
YES
(TGV: Variable Geometry Turbocharger)
NO
(TGF: Fixed Geometry Turbocharger)
ADD
Is the engine a petrol engine?
YES
NO
AEP
Is the engine equipped with a turbocharger regulation solenoid valve?
NO
YES
ADP
Is the diesel engine type of the vehicle one of these:
1/ G9T722 Euro 3?
2/ G9T750 Euro 3?
YES
ADP
3419A.mif
V2
NO
ADD
12B - 30
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 6
CONTINUED 1
ADD
Diesel
Vacuum Actuator
Check the vacuum regulated control system on the diesel engine
Note:
Depending on the vehicle type and accessibility, it may be preferable to connect the pump to the end of the
diaphragm pipe rather than directly to the diaphragm take-off pipe.
Connect a manual vacuum pump to the diaphragm and apply a vacuum of -300 mbar.
Once this pressure is established, wait for 10 seconds.
Read the vacuum variation on the pressure gauge.
Did the vacuum vary by more than 50 mbar?
YES
Check that the fault does not come from the connection or pipes of the
vacuum pump.
If the turbocharger diaphragm alone is the cause, replace the turbocharger
(see mechanical MR of the vehicle, 12B, Turbocharging,
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting)
NO
D
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 31
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 6
CONTINUED 2
D
To follow the check
Warning:
It is preferable to repeat the following tests several times.
Note:
In the rest position, depending on the engine type, the diaphragm rod may be in the inserted or withdrawn position.
Depending on the case, the vacuum applied will cause the rod to be inserted or withdrawn.
It is preferable to repeat the following tests several times.
1/ Connect a manual vacuum pump to the diaphragm, apply a vacuum of -300 mbar and check that the rod left its
initial position and has started to move.
2/ Apply -650 mbar, gradually increase the pressure to atmospheric pressure and check that the rod begins to
return to its initial position when the pressure reaches -350 mbar.
Does the rod movement conform with the description?
YES
NO
Replace the turbocharger (see mechanical MR
for vehicle, 12B, Turbocharging,
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting)
The turbocharger actuator is correct.
Return to the ALP.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 32
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 6
CONTINUED 3
ADP
Diesel Pressure
Actuator
Check the autoregulated pressure control system on diesel TGF or special G9T engines
Note:
Depending on the vehicle type and accessibility, it may be preferable to connect the pump to the end of the
diaphragm pipe rather than directly to the diaphragm take-off pipe.
Connect a manual pressure pump to the diaphragm and apply a pressure of 1500 mbar.
Once this pressure is established, wait for 10 seconds.
Read the pressure variation on the pressure gauge.
Did the pressure value vary by more than 50 mbar?
YES
Replace the turbocharger (see mechanical MR for vehicle,
12B, Turbocharging, Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting)
NO
Is the engine a special G9T type engine?
YES
E
3419A.mif
V2
NO
Return to the ALP
12B - 33
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 6
CONTINUED 4
E
Check the TGF type turbocharger control mechanism actuated under a vacuum
Warning:
Never apply a pressure greater than 2000 mbar.
It is preferable to repeat the following tests several times.
Note:
In the rest position, depending on the engine type, the diaphragm rod may be in the inserted or withdrawn position.
Depending on the case, the pressure applied will cause the rod to be inserted or withdrawn.
It is preferable to repeat the following tests several times.
1/ Connect a manual pressure pump to the diaphragm and gradually apply an increasing pressure until the rod
starts to move.
2/ Note this pressure value P and gradually add 300 mbar and check that the rod continues to move.
3/ Gradually decrease the pressure to the value P + 150 and check that the rod begins to return to its initial position.
Does the rod movement conform with the description?
YES
The turbocharger actuator is correct.
Return to the ALP.
3419A.mif
V2
NO
Replace the turbocharger (see mechanical MR
for vehicle, 12B, Turbocharging,
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting)
12B - 34
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 6
CONTINUED 5
AEP
Petrol
Pressure Actuator
Check the petrol TGF type control system
Note:
Depending on the vehicle type and accessibility, it may be preferable to connect the pump to the end of the
diaphragm pipe rather than directly to the diaphragm.
Connect a manual pressure pump to the diaphragm and apply a pressure of 650 mbar.
Once this pressure is established, wait for 10 seconds.
Read the pressure variation on the pressure gauge.
Did the pressure value vary by more than 50 mbar?
YES
NO
Replace the turbocharger (see mechanical MR for vehicle, 12B,
Turbocharging, Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting)
F
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 35
TURBOCHARGING
12B
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 6
CONTINUED 6
F
Check the TGF type turbocharger control mechanism actuated under a vacuum
Warning:
Never apply a pressure greater than 2000 mbar.
It is preferable to repeat the following tests several times.
Note:
In the rest position, depending on the engine type, the diaphragm rod may be in the inserted or withdrawn position.
Depending on the case, the pressure applied will cause the rod to be inserted or withdrawn.
It is preferable to repeat the following tests several times.
1/ Connect a manual pressure pump to the diaphragm and gradually apply an increasing pressure until the rod
starts to move.
2/ Note this pressure value P and gradually add 300 mbar and check that the rod continues to move.
3/ Gradually decrease the pressure to the value P + 150 and check that the rod begins to return to its initial position.
Does the rod movement conform with the description?
YES
The turbocharger actuator is correct.
Return to the ALP.
3419A.mif
V2
NO
Replace the turbocharger (see mechanical MR
for vehicle, 12B, Turbocharging,
Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting)
12B - 36
TURBOCHARGING
Fault finding – Tests
TEST 7
NOTES
12B
Turbocharger check
IMPORTANT:
Perform these checks with the vehicle ignition switched off and without removing the
turbocharger.
Warning:
Observe the following safety guidelines:
– wear heat-protective gloves when the engine is hot,
– do not wear baggy clothing or hanging jewellery during this operation,
– watch out for possible triggering of the fan assembly and the operation of the
accessories belt or belts.
After having disconnected the turbocharger inlet duct, visually inspect the condition of the compressor fins using a
mirror and a lamp, or an endoscope or video assistance camera.
If the vanes are damaged (twisted or significantly damaged by a foreign body), replace the turbocharger (see
mechanical MR for the vehicle, 12B, Turbocharging, Turbocharger: Removal - Refitting).
Otherwise, return to the ALP.
3419A.mif
V2
12B - 37
TURBOCHARGING: PRECAUTIONS FOR THE REPAIR
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
parts washer
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
1. TURBOCHARGER: GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
For the turbocharging pressure regulator check (see
Fault finding - Tests) (TN 3419A, 12B, Turbocharging).
CAUTION
The turbocharger pressure regulator rod must not be adjusted.
2. TURBOCHARGER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
-1-
(1) Air filter unit
(2) Air flowmeter
(3) Compressor wheel
(4) Intercooler
(5) Inlet distributor
(6) Exhaust manifold
(7) Turbine wheel
(8) Bearing system (bearing + wheel shaft)
-2-
(A) Air filter unit outlet pipe
(B) Turbocharger air outlet pipe
(C) Intercooler air outlet pipe
3. APPLICATION CONDITIONS OF INSTRUCTIONS
The instructions below must be followed when replacing a turbocharger due to mechanical damage:
damage to the bearing system,
broken shaft or turbine wheel,
compressor wheel rubbing against the turbocharger casing,
broken or damaged compressor wheel,
extensive clogging of the turbine wheel casing (hard deposits).
FOR THE AIR CIRCUIT:
-Consequences:
swarf or metal objects in the turbocharger inlet and outlet pipes, oil in the air circuit (collected in the intercooler).
-Risks (after replacing the turbocharger):
metal objects sucked in by the compressor wheel (destruction of the turbocharger).
FOR THE LUBRICATION CIRCUIT:
-Consequences:
swarf found in the engine oil circuit, circulation of swarf within the circuit.
-Risks (after replacing the turbocharger):
premature wear on the bearing system (destruction of turbocharger).
CAUTION
Failure to observe the following instructions will lead to the turbocharger breaking
again.
Metal objects may enter the oil and air circuits as a result of a broken turbocharger.
INSTRUCTIONS:
Drain the engine oilEngine oil: Draining - Refilling
Replace the oil filter.
Replace the seals and fittings,
-Carry out the following only if the compressor wheel is broken or rubbing against the turbocharger casing:
Drain the intercooler, Clean the turbocharger air pipes.
-3-
Note:
When carrying out an operation on the air or lubrication circuit, it is necessary to plug
the open holes to prevent any risk of foreign bodies entering the system.
4. AIR CIRCUIT*: INSTRUCTIONS FOLLOWING MECHANICAL DAMAGE TO THE TURBOCHARGER
Note:
(*) These instructions for the air circuit are only to be followed in the case of:
broken compressor wheel,
compressor wheel rubbing against the turbocharger casing.
Remove the intercooler if fitted to the vehicle.
Turn the intercooler over and allow the oil inside to drain out.
-4-
Note:
If the compressor wheel(9 ) is damaged, metal objects are ejected inside the air pipes.
Check that there are no metal objects inside the air flowmeter(2 ) .
Remove:
the air pipe (between the air filter unit and the turbocharger)(A) ,
the air pipe(B) (between the turbocharger and the intercooler).
-5-
For air pipes comprising several components:
mark(10) the fitting position of each component,
separate all the components.
-6-
One by one, clean the pipes removed with the parts washer:
brush as much of the inside of the pipe as possible (only use brushes with plastic bristles),
wash plenty of cleaning product from the cleaning station through the pipe,
allow the cleaned pipe to drain by standing it upright,
ensure the cleaning product has drained out completely (check areas where liquid may be retained, e.g. gaiters,
resonators etc.).
-7-
Dry the pipes one by one using a compressed air spray gun.
For pipes comprising several components:
assemble the components, taking note of their correct fitting position(10) .
Refit:
the air pipe(between the air filter unit and the turbocharger)(A) ,
the air pipe(B) (between the turbocharger and the intercooler).
Refit the intercooler, if fitted to the vehicle.
-8-
5. LUBRICATION CIRCUIT**: INSTRUCTIONS FOLLOWING MECHANICAL DAMAGE TO THE TURBOCHARGER
Note:
(**) These instructions relating to the lubrication circuit must always be followed in all
cases of mechanical damage as listed above.
Drain the engine oilEngine oil: Draining - Refilling .
Replace the oil filter.
Only fill the engine with a suitable oil typeEngine
oil: Specifications
(TN 6013A, 04A, Lubricants).
6. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED WHEN REMOVING A TURBOCHARGER
Always replace:
all seals that have been removed,
all fittings that have been removed.
-the oil supply pipe:
if the pipe is blocked, even partially (due to scale, carbonised oil etc.), if the pipe is fitted with self-retaining seals.
-the oil return pipe:
if the pipe is blocked, even partially (due to scale, carbonised oil etc.), if the pipe is fitted with self-retaining seals.
CAUTION
Failure to observe the following instructions will lead to the turbocharger breaking
again.
Metal objects may enter the oil and air circuits as a result of a broken turbocharger.
CAUTION
Failure to observe the following procedure may lead to destruction of the turbocharger.
-9-
When starting the engine:
do not accelerate,
allow the engine to run for 1 minute, the time taken for the oil circuit pressure to increase (until the oil pressure
warning light on the instrument panel goes out),
accelerate several times at no load,
check the air circuit and the oil circuit for leaks.
Repair-10x09-02x60-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 10 -
TYRE PRESSURE MONITOR RECEIVER: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
To avoid all risk of damage to the systems, apply the safety and cleanliness instructions and operation
recommendations before carrying out any repair:
(see Tyre pressure monitor: Precautions for the repair)
Vehicle: Precautions for the repair
WARNING
To avoid an unintentional restart of the engine, before carrying out any operation on a
vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructions (see
Vehicle: Precautions for repair).
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the battery(see Battery: Removal - Refitting) .
Remove:
the gloveboxGlovebox: Removal - Refitting ,
the passenger front al airbagPassenger's frontal airbag: Removal - Refitting .
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Disconnect the tyre pressure monitor receiver.
Unclip the tyre pressure monitor receiver by lifting it.
Remove the tyre pressure monitor receiver.
-1-
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-13x05x03x04-01x37-1-3-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
TYRES: REMOVAL - REFITTING
parts always to be replaced:
Tyre valve
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the wheel in question(see 35A, Wheels and tyres, Wheel: Removal - Refitting) ,
the balance weights,
the valve mechanism.
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-1-
Detach:
the bead from the outside of the tyre, starting with the side opposite the valve,
the bead from the inside of the tyre.
-2-
Position the tyre lever approximately 15 cmfrom the valve on the outside of the wheel rim in order to
remove the exterior bead from the tyre.
Remove the exterior bead of the tyre, finishing at the valve.
Position the tyre lever approximately 15 cmfrom the valve on the outside of the wheel rim in order to
remove the bead from inside the tyre.
Remove the interior bead of the tyre, finishing at the valve.
-3-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
Tyre valve
.
Lubricate the two tyre beads correctly using the tyre paste(see Vehicle: Parts and
(04B, Consumables - Products).
consumables for the repair)
2. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Engage the lower tyre bead approximately 15 cmafter the valve.
Finish fitting the tyre at the valve.
Fit the exterior bead approximately 15 cmafter the valve using the tyre lever.
Inflate the tyre to 3.5 barto press the tyre beads against the wheel rim.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the valve mechanism.
Inflate the tyre to the recommended pressure(see Tyre pressure: Identification) .
Note:
It is not necessary to drive the vehicle before and after a new wheel is balanced.
Balance the wheel(see 35A, Wheels and tyres,
Wheel: Balancing)
Refit the wheel in question(see 35A, Wheels and tyres,
.
Wheel: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-13x05x02-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
.
UCH: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Equipment required
Diagnostic tool
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
In the event of replacement, apply the Before repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " UCH " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " Before repair procedure " section.
Switch off the ignition.
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
-1-
Remove the access flap to the passenger compartment fuse and relay box by(1 ) .
-2-
-3-
Remove the passenger compartment fuse and relay box at(2 ) by pressing on the clips(3 ) .
Move aside the passenger compartment fuse and relay box.
-4-
Remove the diagnostic socket at(4 ) by pressing on the clip(5 ) .
Move aside the diagnostic socket.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-5-
CAUTION
To prevent any risk of noise, premature wear, short circuits, etc. after the refitting
operation, mark the wiring routing and how to connect the connectors.
Mark the wiring routing.
Unlock the connectors(6 ) .
Disconnect the connectors(7 ) from the UCH.
Remove the nut from the UCH.
-6-
Remove the UCH by(9 ) .
Extract the UCH through the access flap to the passenger compartment fuse and relay box.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-7-
CAUTION
To guarantee a good electrical connection, make sure that the wiring does not place
any stress on the connectors or the surrounding components.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Connect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
In the event of a replacement, apply the after repair procedure using the Diagnostic tool:
connect the Diagnostic tool,
select " UCH " ,
go to repair mode,
display the " before/after repair procedure " for the computer selected,
carry out the operations described in the " After repair procedure " section.
Repair-32x05x01x06-01x37-1-33-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
UNDERBODY HEIGHTS: ADJUSTMENT VALUE
1. MEASURING POINTS
-1-
(R1) Distance between the ground and the front wheel shaft
(R2) Distance between the ground and the rear wheel shaft
(W1) Height between the ground and the bolt head of the front axle subframe
(W2) Height between the ground and the front bolt shaft of the suspension spring
2. MEASURING PROCEDURE
Note:
For measurements(W1) and (W2) , take into account the height difference between the plates and the lift.
Measure the heights:
R1,
R2,
W1 right-hand and left-hand,
W2 right-hand and left-hand.
Note:
The value of Wx to be entered into the geometry bench is the average of the W1 heights, right-hand and left-hand and of the W2 heights, right-hand and left-hand.
Specific case:
Note:
If the measuring points are located in empty space (between the rails of the lift), use a bar.
-2-
1- PLATE HIGHER THAN THE LIFT:
Measure the heights(1 ) , (2 ) and (3 ) .
Example: (1 ) =13 cm, (2 ) =8 cm,(3 ) =10 cm.
Calculate the height Wx:
Wx = height(1 ) + height(3 ) - height(2 ) ,
Wx = 15 cm.
2- PLATE LOWER THAN THE LIFT:
Measure the heights(1 ) , (2 ) and (3 ) .
Example: (1 ) = 8 cm,(2 ) = 10 cm,(3 ) = 4 cm.
Calculate the height Wx:
Wx = height(1 ) + height(2 ) + height(3 ) ,
Wx = 22 cm.
3. VEHICLE IN RUNNING ORDER POSITION
VODM (Vehicle in working order) position:
Tank full,
Empty vehicle (without luggage, etc.).
-3-
1- WITH TYRE 235/65/R16
(W1) = 235 mm
(W2) = 406 mm
Repair-13x02x11-02x13-1-26-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
UPPER BODY TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the
the
the
the
clips(1) ,
bolt(2) ,
trim(3) ,
complete rear seatComplete rear seat: Removal - Refitting or the complete rear bench seat.
-1-
Remove the speaker grilles(4 ) .
-2-
-3-
Remove:
the bolts(5) ,
the speakers,
the air vents(6) ,
the light diffuser(7) .
Disconnect the connectors.
-4-
Remove:
the bolts(8) ,
the clothes hook.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-5-
Remove the bolts(9 ) .
Unclip the upper body rear trim.
-6-
Remove:
the bolts(10) ,
the clips(11) .
Turn the clips(12 ) .
-7-
Unclip the upper body front trim.
Remove the bolts(13 ) .
Separate the upper body trims.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-70x02x08x06-01x37-1-3-1.xml
-8-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-9-
VACUUM PUMP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Cylinder head
assembly: Exploded view) (11A, Top and front of engine).
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove the engine and gearbox assemblyAND
peripherals).
(M9T) AND (PA0 OR PF6) M9T, PA0 PF6(10A,
Remove the high pressure pump protectorInjection
assembly: Exploded view
-1-
Engine and
(13B, Diesel injection).
Disconnect the vacuum pipe(1 ) from the vacuum pump.
-2-
Disconnect the diesel return pipe(2 ) from the high pressure pump.
Fit blanking plugs on the openings of:
the high pressure pump,
the diesel return pipe.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove AND (M9T) M9T(11A, Top and front of engine):
the vacuum pump,
the vacuum pump seal.
-3-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use SURFACE CLEANER(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables Products) to clean the vacuum pump joint face on the cylinder head.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
Repair-13x03x07-01x37-1-47-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
VACUUM PUMP: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructions(see Vehicle: Precautions for the repair)
Location and specifications (tightening torques, parts always to be replaced, etc.)(see Cylinder head
assembly: Exploded view) .
CAUTION
Prepare for the flow of fluid, and protect the surrounding components.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
-1-
Disconnect the non-return valve pipe(1 ) from the vacuum pump.
-2-
Disconnect the diesel return pipe(2 ) from the high pressure pump.
-3-
Disconnect the diesel supply pipe(3 ) from the high pressure pump.
Fit blanking plugs on the openings of:
the high pressure pump,
the diesel return pipe,
the diesel supply pipe.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Remove AND (M9T) M9T:
the vacuum pump,
-4-
the vacuum pump seal.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Use surface cleaner(see Vehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair) (04B, Consumables - Products)
to clean the vacuum pump joint face on the cylinder head.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
CAUTION
Do not remove the blanking plugs from each component until the last moment.
Also, do not remove the components from their packaging until they are to be fitted to
the vehicle.
Lubricate the end piece of the non-return valve pipe.
Note:
Check that the non-return valve pipe is correctly clipped onto the vacuum pump and
onto the brake servo.
Insert the connector until the locking click sound is heard (risk of poor connection).
Repair-13x03x07-01x37-1-46-1.xml
-5-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
VALVE: CHECK
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Dial gauge support.
Mot. 251-01
Pressure plate for measuring piston liner protrusion.
Mot. 252-01
Equipment required
component support
Dial gauge
dial gauge support
external micrometer
compressed air nozzle
internal micrometer
set of feeler gauges
1. PREPARATION OPERATION FOR CHECK
CAUTION
It is strictly forbidden to apply any pressure to the engine oil sump. Damage to the sump will irreparably
damage the engine by:
blocking the strainer,
raising the oil level above maximum, with a risk of engine racing.
Note:
Consult the safety and cleanliness advice and operation recommendations before
carrying out any repair(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Engine: Precautions
the repair) .
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
-1-
for
Position the engine on the
equipment: Use ) .
component support(see
Remove the valves(see 10A, Engine
10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Engine support
and cylinder block assembly, Valve: Removal - Refitting)
.
Before any checks:
clean the parts to be checked with surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair (04B,
Consumables - Products) and dry them using a compressed air nozzle,
check that the parts are not scratched and do not show signs of impact or abnormal wear (replace the part if
necessary),
check that the valve slides freely in the valve guide.
2. CHECKING THE VALVE
1- VALVE IDENTIFICATION
-2-
Inlet valve
Exhaust valve
Diameter (D) of the valve face
27.7 ± 0.12 mm
26 ± 0.12 mm
Thickness (e ) of the valve head
1.1 mm
0.94 mm
2- CHECKING THE VALVE SIZE
Measure using a external micrometer:
the diameter(d) of the valve stem at(X1) =
the length of the valve(L1) .
35 mm,
-3-
Inlet valve
Exhaust valve
Diameter (d) of the valve stem(X1 )
from 5.97 to 5.99 mm
from 5.96 to 5.98 mm
Length (L1) of the valve
103.89 mm
103.78 mm
3- CLEARANCE CHECK BETWEEN THE VALVE AND THE VALVE GUIDE
The clearance between the valve and the guide can be checked in two ways.
Position the valve head at a distance of(L2) = 25 mmfrom the valve seat.
Fit:
the dial gauge support,
the Dial gaugeon the mounting.
Position the dial gauge feeler against the valve head at a 90 angle in relation to the valve shaft.
-4-
Push the valve head towards the dial gauge.
Calibrate the dial gauge to zero.
Push the valve head towards the side opposite the dial gauge.
Note the value displayed on the dial gauge.
Calculate the actual clearance between the valve and the valve guide by dividing the value measured on
the dial gauge by two.
Or measure:
using a internal micrometer, the internal diameter(1) of the valve guide,
using a external micrometer, the diameter(2) of the valve stem.
Calculate the actual clearance = internal diameter of the valve guide(1 ) - the diameter of the valve stem
(2 ) .
The clearance between the valve and the valve guide must be between:
0.02 and 0.06 mmfor
the inlet valve,
-5-
0.03 and 0.07 mmfor
the exhaust valve.
4- CHECKING VALVE PROTRUSION
Operation to be performed when replacing a valve.
Check that the position of the valve head in relation to the cylinder head joint face is within the tolerance
values to ensure correct engine operation.
Note:
A valve head position that is outside the permitted tolerance values in relation to the
cylinder head joint face may damage the engine.
-6-
Fit the cylinder head with:
the rectified shimDial gauge support.(Mot. 251-01) (3) ,
a Dial gauge(4) on the supportPressure plate for measuring piston liner protrusion.(Mot. 252-01) (5) ,
the support - dial gauge assembly on the rectified shim.
Position the dial gauge on the cylinder head gasket face.
Calibrate the dial gauge to zero.
-7-
Note:
The face of the valve head is not parallel to the cylinder head gasket face (valve guide
shaft at an 87 angle in relation to the cylinder head gasket face).
Find the highest point of the valve head in area(6 ) using the dial gauge.
Record the value displayed.
The value displayed must be between:
+ 0.08 mmand a maximum recess of - 0.03 mmfor the inlet valve,
- 0.08 mmand a maximum recess of - 0.38 mmfor the exhaust valve.
a maximum protrusion of
a minimum recess of
3. CHECKING THE VALVE SPRING
1- VALVE SPRING IDENTIFICATION
The inlet and exhaust valve springs are identical.
-8-
-9-
Internal diameter (X2 )
14.10 ± 0.2 mm
Wire diameter(X3 )
2.80 ± 0.02 mm
Outer diameter(X4 )
19.70 ± 0.2 mm
Free length(X5 )
46.70 mm
2- CHECKING VALVE SPRING WEAR
- 10 -
Use a dynamometer to check the spring wear by measuring the length(X6) which must be:
34.90 mm under
26.90 mm under
a load of
a load of
210 ± 10 N,
370 ± 17 N.
3- CHECKING VALVE SPRING PERPENDICULARITY
- 11 -
On the body jig benchplace:
the valve spring(7) ,
the bracket(8) .
Use a set
of feeler gaugesto
check the play(X7 ) .
The play(X7 ) must be less than 1.4 mm.
4. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the valves(see 10A, Engine
Remove the engine from
equipment: Use ) .
and cylinder block assembly, Valve: Removal - Refitting)
component support(see
10A, Engine
Refit the engine - gearbox assembly.
- 12 -
.
and cylinder block assembly, Engine support
Repair-10x02x03-02x58-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 13 -
VALVE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Special tooling required
Tool for removing the pins from valve stems.
Mot. 1502
Pliers for removing valve stem seals.
Mot. 1335
Additional tool for fitting valve stem seals.
Mot. 1511-01
Slide hammer valve lifter.
Mot. 1849
Equipment required
tweezers
parts always to be replaced:
Valve stem seal
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove the engine - gearbox assembly.
Remove the timing chain(see 10A, Engine
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
.
X43, M9R, 804 817 824 839 844 846(804 OR 817 OR 824 OR 839 OR 844 OR 846) AND (670 OR 678 OR 680 OR 690 OR
696 OR 698 OR 880 OR 896 OR 898) AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815 OR 858 OR 859)
AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800 OR 802 OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR
828 OR 845 OR 849 OR 854 OR 857 OR 858)
Remove the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust gas pressure
sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
Remove:
the damper valve,
the EGR pipe at the EGR cooler inlet,
depending on version, the catalytic pre-converterCatalytic pre-converter: Removal - Refitting or the catalytic
converter at the turbocharger outletCatalytic converter: Removal - Refitting ,
the turbocharger oil pipesTurbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting ,
-1-
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail: Removal Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector: Removal
- Refitting ,
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting) ,
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting) ,
the turbocharger,
the exhaust manifold,
the EGR solenoid valve,
the inlet distributor.
2. VALVE REMOVAL OPERATION
Mark the valve in relation to the cylinder head.
-2-
Compress the valve spring using theTool for removing the pins from valve stems.(Mot. 1502 ) or Slide
hammer valve lifter.(Mot. 1849 ) (1 ) .
Remove:
the valve cotters(2) using tweezers(3) ,
theTool for removing the pins from valve stems.(Mot. 1502 ) or Slide hammer valve lifter.(Mot. 1849 ) ,
the valve spring cup,
the valve spring.
-3-
Note:
Before removing the valve, adjust the valve stem seal refitting tool (Mot. 1511-01).
Position the pushrod of theAdditional tool for fitting valve stem seals.(Mot.
seal.
-4-
1511-01) on
the valve stem
Place the guide tube(4 ) of theAdditional tool for fitting valve stem seals.(Mot.
until it comes into contact with the cylinder head.
Lock the pushrod with the wheel(5 ) .
Remove:
the pushrod - guide tube assembly,
the valve.
Repeat the removal operation for the other valves.
-5-
1511-01) on
the pushrod
Remove the valve stem seals using thePliers for removing valve stem seals.(Mot. 1335 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
Valve stem seal
-6-
Use surface cleanerVehicle: Parts and consumables for the repair to clean:
the valves,
the valve springs,
the valve spring cups,
the valve collets,
the valve guides.
2. VALVE REFITTING OPERATION
Refit the valve in the cylinder head according to the marking made on removal.
Keep the valve pressed against its seat.
-7-
Note:
The diameter of the protector (6) must be the same as that of the valve stem.
Do not lubricate the valve stem seal.
Place the valve stem seal protector(6 ) of toolAdditional tool for fitting valve stem seals.(Mot.
on the valve.
-8-
1511-01)
Fit a new valve stem seal(7 ) on the fitting protector(8 ) .
-9-
Move the valve stem seal(9 ) past the fitting protector(10 ) .
Remove the fitting protector(10 ) .
- 10 -
(Mot.
Place the pushrod(11 ) - guide tube(12 ) assembly of the Additional tool for fitting valve stem seals.
1511-01) , which was pre-adjusted during valve removal.
Push the pushrod(11 ) in with the palm of your hand until the guide(12 ) comes into contact with
the cylinder head.
Repeat these operations for all the valves.
- 11 -
Fit:
the valve spring,
the valve spring cup.
Compress the valve spring using theTool for removing the pins from valve stems.(Mot. 1502 ) or
Slide hammer valve lifter.(Mot. 1849 ) (13 ) .
- 12 -
Place the collets(14 ) onto the valve using a
tweezers(15 ) .
Remove the Additional tool for fitting valve stem seals.(Mot.
(Mot. 1849 ) (13 ) .
1511-01) or
Slide hammer valve lifter.
Repeat these operations for all the valves.
When replacing the valve, check that the position of the valve head in relation to the cylinder head
joint face is within manufacturing tolerances(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Valve: Check ) .
Note:
A valve head position that is outside the permitted tolerance values in relation to the
cylinder head joint face may damage the engine.
3. FINAL OPERATION
Refit:
the inlet distributor,
the EGR solenoid valve without tightening the bolts,
the exhaust manifold,
the turbocharger,
the cylinder head(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Cylinder head: Removal - Refitting)
the rocker cover(see 10A, Engine and cylinder block assembly, Rocker cover: Removal - Refitting) ,
the diesel injectorsDiesel injector: Removal - Refitting ,
- 13 -
the high pressure pipes between the rail and the injectorsHigh pressure pipe between rail and injector:
Removal - Refitting ,
the diesel return railDiesel injector fuel return rail: Removal - Refitting ,
the oil decanterOil decanter: Removal - Refitting ,
the high pressure pipe between the pump and the railHigh pressure pipe between pump and rail:
Removal - Refitting ,
the vacuum pumpVacuum pump: Removal - Refitting ,
the turbocharger oil pipesTurbocharger oil pipe: Removal - Refitting ,
depending on version, the catalytic pre-converterCatalytic pre-converter: Removal - Refitting or the
catalytic converter at the turbocharger outletCatalytic converter: Removal - Refitting ,
the EGR pipe at the EGR cooler inlet,
the damper valve.
X43, M9R, 804 817 824(804 OR 817 OR 824) AND (670 OR 678 OR 680 OR 690 OR 696 OR 698 OR 880 OR 896 OR 898)
AND (760) AND (760 OR 761 OR 762 OR 763 OR 812 OR 814 OR 815 OR 858 OR 859) AND (721 OR 722 OR 724) AND (800
OR 802 OR 803 OR 805 OR 806 OR 808 OR 809 OR 814 OR 815 OR 816 OR 820 OR 845 OR 849 OR 858)
Refit the exhaust gas pressure sensorExhaust gas pressure
Refit the timing chain(see 10A, Engine
sensor: Removal - Refitting
.
and cylinder block assembly, Timing chain: Removal - Refitting)
Refit the engine - gearbox assembly.
Repair-10x02x03-01x37-1-1-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
- 14 -
.
VEHICLE PANEL GAPS: ADJUSTMENT VALUE
-1-
Location
Clearances (mm)
(1 )
Front wing / front bumper
4.5 ± 2
(2 )
Front wing / headlight
3 ± 2.5
(3 )
Front wing / bonnet
4 ± 1.5
(4 )
Bonnet / headlight
4 ± 2.5
(5 )
Front bumper / headlight
3 ± 2.5
(6 )
Front wing / wheel arch
5 ± 1.5
(7 )
Front wing / front side door
5±2
(8 )
Front wing / windscreen pillar
2.5 ± 1.5
(9 )
Front side door / Windscreen pillar
5 ± 1.5
(10 )
Front side door / roof
5 ± 1.5
(11 )
Front side door / B-pillar
5 ± 1.5
(12 )
Front side door / sill panel
5 ± 1.5
(13 )
Front side door / inner sill
5 ± 1.5
(14 )
Fuel filler flap / Sliding side door
6±2
(15 )
Fuel filler flap / B-pillar upper section
5 ± 1.5
(16 )
Fuel filler flap / front side door
5 ± 1.5
(17 )
Fuel filler flap / B-pillar lower section
5 ± 1.5
(18 )
Sliding side door / B-pillar
6±2
(19 )
Sliding side door / side roof rail
5 ± 1.5
(20 )
Sliding side door / panelled rear side panel
7±2
(21 )
Sliding side door / sill panel
7±2
(22 )
Sliding side door / inner sill
5 ± 1.5
-2-
-3-
Location
Clearances (mm)
(23 )
Front clearance of sliding side door window
6±2
(24 )
Upper clearance of sliding side door window
6±2
(25 )
Rear clearance of sliding side door window
7±2
(26 )
Rear clearance of rear side panel window
5 ± 1.5
(27 )
Sliding door rail / rear side panel window
4 ± 1.5
(27 )
Sliding door rail / panelled rear side panel
5±2
(28 )
Rear bumper / sill panel
5±2
(29 )
Rear bumper / rear lights
3±2
(30 )
Rear loading door / rear bumper
9±3
(31 )
Side clearance of rear loading door window
4.5 ± 1.5
(32 )
Rear loading door / body side
5±2
(33 )
Rear loading door / roof
8 ± 3.5
(34 )
Upper clearance between rear loading doors
6±2
(35 )
Upper clearance of rear loading door fixed window
4.5 ± 1.5
(36 )
Upper clearance between rear loading door window
6±2
(37 )
Lower clearance between rear loading doors
6±2
Repair-00x01x01x05-02x13-1-21-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
VEHICLE STRUCTURE, CENTRE SECTION: DESCRIPTION
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
-1-
Precautions for the repair
E62 F62(E62 OR F62)
E62(E62)
No.
Description
Classification
Type
(1 )
Body side
Body side: Replacement
(2 )
A-pillar reinforcement
A-pillar reinforcement: Replacement
(3 )
Sill panel closure panel, front section
Sill panel closure panel, front section: Replacement
(4 )
Sill panel closure panel, rear section
Sill panel closure panel, rear section: Replacement
(5 )
Sill panel closure panel
Sill panel closure panel: Replacement
(6 )
Loading extension mounting reinforcement
(7 )
Rear side panel, front section
Rear side panel, front section: Replacement
(8 )
Upper body, rear section
Upper body, rear section: Replacement
(9 )
B-pillar lining
(see B-pillar lining: Replacement)
(10 )
B-pillar lower lining
(see B-pillar lower lining: Replacement)
(11 )
Trim mounting support
(see B-pillar lining: Replacement)
(see MR
-2-
400, 40A, General information)
Thickness (mm)
(12 )
Rear side foot panel
(see Rear side foot panel: Replacement)
(13 )
Front jacking point
Front jacking point: Replacement
(14 )
Front side foot panel
Front side foot panel: Replacement
(15 )
Central floor front cross member
Centre floor front cross member: Replacement
(16 )
Front cross member under front seat
Front cross member under front seat: Replacement
(17 )
Rear cross member under front seat
Rear cross member under front seat: Replacement
(18 )
Centre floor front side cross member
Centre floor front side cross member: Replacement
(19 )
Front seat rear exterior mounting unit
Front seat rear mounting exterior unit: Replacement
(20 )
Front roof, side section
Front side section of roof: replacement
(21 )
Passenger compartment partition
(see Passenger compartment partition: Replacement)
(22 )
Roof cross member mounting
(see Roof cross member mounting: Replacement)
(26 )
Roof centre cross member
(see Roof centre cross member: Replacement)
(27 )
Rear roof
Rear roof: replacement
(28 )
Front roof
Front roof: Replacement
(29 )
Roof front cross member
Roof front cross member: Replacement
(30 )
Centre floor
Centre floor: Replacement
(31 )
Centre floor front extension
central floor front extension: replacement
(32 )
Bulkhead lower cross member
Bulkhead lower cross member: Replacement
(33 )
Foot panel
Foot panel: Replacement
F62(F62)
No.
Description
Classification
(1 )
Body side
Body side: Replacement
(2 )
A-pillar reinforcement
A-pillar reinforcement: Replacement
(3 )
Sill panel closure panel, front section
Sill panel closure panel, front section: Replacement
(4 )
Sill panel closure panel, rear section
Sill panel closure panel, rear section: Replacement
(5 )
Sill panel closure panel (version without sliding side door)
Sill panel closure panel: Replacement
(9 )
B-pillar lining
B-pillar lining: Replacement
(10 )
B-pillar lower lining
B-pillar lower lining: Replacement
-3-
Type
Thickness (mm)
(11 )
Trim mounting support
B-pillar lining: Replacement
(12 )
Rear side foot panel
Rear side foot panel: Replacement
(13 )
Front jacking point
Front jacking point: Replacement
(14 )
Front side foot panel
Front side foot panel: Replacement
(15 )
Central floor front cross member
Centre floor front cross member: Replacement
(16 )
Front cross member under front seat
Front cross member under front seat: Replacement
(17 )
Rear cross member under front seat
Rear cross member under front seat: Replacement
(18 )
Centre floor front side cross member
Centre floor front side cross member: Replacement
(19 )
Front seat rear exterior mounting unit
Front seat rear mounting exterior unit: Replacement
(20 )
Front roof, side section
Front side section of roof: replacement
(21 )
Passenger compartment partition
Passenger compartment partition: Replacement
(22 )
Roof cross member mounting
Roof cross member mounting: Replacement
(23 )
Roof rear cross member
Roof rear cross member: Replacement
(24 )
Roof rear cross member lining
Roof rear cross member lining: Replacement
(25 )
Rear roof
Rear roof: replacement
(26 )
Roof centre cross member
Roof centre cross member: Replacement
(28 )
Front roof
Front roof: Replacement
(29 )
Roof front cross member
Roof front cross member: Replacement
(30 )
Centre floor
Centre floor: Replacement
(31 )
Centre floor front extension
central floor front extension: replacement
(32 )
Bulkhead lower cross member
Bulkhead lower cross member: Replacement
(33 )
Foot panel
Foot panel: Replacement
(34 )
Sill panel closure panel (sliding side door version)
Sill panel closure panel: Replacement
(35 )
Rail unit
Rail unit: Replacement
-4-
H62 U62(H62 OR U62)
H62(H62)
No.
Description
Classification
Type
(1 )
Body side
Body side: Replacement
(2 )
A-pillar reinforcement
A-pillar reinforcement: Replacement
(3 )
Front side foot panel
Front side foot panel: Replacement
(4 )
Front jacking point
Front jacking point: Replacement
(5 )
Rear side foot panel
Rear side foot panel: Replacement
(6 )
B-pillar lower lining
(see B-pillar lower lining: Replacement)
(7 )
Rear B-pillar
Rear B-pillar: Replacement
(8 )
C-pillar
(9 )
Rear side panel, front section
Rear side panel, front section: Replacement
(10 )
B-pillar lining
B-pillar lining: Replacement
(11 )
B-pillar closure panel
(see MR
(see MR
-5-
400, 40A, General information)
400, 40A, General information)
Thickness (mm)
(12 )
Sill panel closure panel, rear section
Sill panel closure panel, rear section: Replacement
(13 )
Sill panel closure panel
Sill panel closure panel: Replacement
(14 )
Sill panel closure panel, front section
Sill panel closure panel, front section: Replacement
(15 )
Central floor front cross member
Centre floor front cross member: Replacement
(16 )
Front cross member under front seat
Front cross member under front seat: Replacement
(17 )
Rear cross member under front seat
Rear cross member under front seat: Replacement
(18 )
Centre floor front side cross member
Centre floor front side cross member: Replacement
(19 )
Front seat rear exterior mounting unit
Front seat rear mounting exterior unit: Replacement
(20 )
Passenger compartment partition
Passenger compartment partition: Replacement
(21 )
Upper body, rear section
Upper body, rear section: Replacement
(22 )
Roof drip moulding lining
(23 )
Rear roof, rear section
(24 )
Roof cross member
(25 )
Rear roof
Rear roof: replacement
(26 )
Roof centre cross member
(see Roof centre cross member: Replacement)
(27 )
Roof cross member mounting
(see Roof cross member mounting: Replacement)
(28 )
Front roof
Front roof: Replacement
(29 )
Roof front cross member
Roof front cross member: Replacement
(30 )
Centre floor
Centre floor: Replacement
(31 )
Centre floor front extension
central floor front extension: replacement
(32 )
Bulkhead lower cross member
Bulkhead lower cross member: Replacement
(33 )
Foot panel
Foot panel: Replacement
(see MR
400, 40A, General information)
(see Rear roof, rear section: Replacement)
(see MR
400, 40A, General information)
U62(U62)
No.
Description
Classification
(1 )
Body side
Body side: Replacement
(2 )
A-pillar reinforcement
A-pillar reinforcement: Replacement
(3 )
Front side foot panel
Front side foot panel: Replacement
(4 )
Front jacking point
Front jacking point: Replacement
(5 )
Rear side foot panel
(see Rear side foot panel: Replacement)
(6 )
B-pillar lower lining
(see B-pillar lower lining: Replacement)
(9 )
Rear side panel, front section
Rear side panel, front section: Replacement
-6-
Type
Thickness (mm)
(10 )
B-pillar lining
B-pillar lining: Replacement
(14 )
Sill panel closure panel, front section
Sill panel closure panel, front section: Replacement
(15 )
Central floor front cross member
Centre floor front cross member: Replacement
(16 )
Front cross member under front seat
Front cross member under front seat: Replacement
(17 )
Rear cross member under front seat
Rear cross member under front seat: Replacement
(18 )
Centre floor front side cross member
Centre floor front side cross member: Replacement
(19 )
Front seat rear exterior mounting unit
Front seat rear mounting exterior unit: Replacement
(20 )
Passenger compartment partition
Passenger compartment partition: Replacement
(23 )
Rear roof, rear section
(see Rear roof, rear section: Replacement)
(26 )
Roof centre cross member
(see Roof centre cross member: Replacement)
(27 )
Roof cross member mounting
(see Roof cross member mounting: Replacement)
(28 )
Front roof
Front roof: Replacement
(29 )
Roof front cross member
Roof front cross member: Replacement
(30 )
Centre floor
Centre floor: Replacement
(31 )
Centre floor front extension
central floor front extension: replacement
(32 )
Bulkhead lower cross member
Bulkhead lower cross member: Replacement
(33 )
Foot panel
Foot panel: Replacement
Repair-40x01x01x10-02x21-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
VEHICLE STRUCTURE, FRONT SECTION: DESCRIPTION
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
-1-
Precautions for the repair
No.
Description
Classification
(1 )
Front right-hand section of front side member
Front side member, front section: Replacement
(2 )
Spacer
Front side member: Conversion
(3 )
Front side member closure panel, rear section
rear section of front side member closure panel: replacement
(4 )
Bulkhead
Bulkhead: Replacement
(5 )
Front section of front side member rear closure panel
front section of front side member rear closure panel: replacement
(6 )
Front section of front side member closure panel
Front section of front side member closure panel: Replacement
(7 )
Front left-hand section of front side member
Front side member, front section: Replacement
(8 )
Bulkhead side reinforcement
Bulkhead side reinforcement: Replacement
(9 )
Front wheel arch
Front wheel arch: Replacement
(10 )
Front side member rear part
Front side member, rear section: Replacement
(11 )
Front subframe rear mounting unit
Front subframe rear mounting unit: Replacement
(12 )
Front end side cross member
Front end side cross member: Replacement
(13 )
Front wheel arch closure panel
Front wheel arch, front section: Replacement
(14 )
Front wheel arch, front section
Front wheel arch, front section: Replacement
(15 )
Scuttle side panel
Scuttle side panel: Replacement
(16 )
Front wing rear mounting support
Front wing rear mounting support: Replacement
(17 )
Scuttle side panel upper reinforcement
Scuttle side panel upper reinforcement: Replacement
(18 )
Bonnet hinge mounting
Bonnet hinge mounting: Replacement
Repair-40x01x01x08-02x21-1-10-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
Type
Thickness (mm)
VEHICLE STRUCTURE, REAR SECTION: DESCRIPTION
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system, always follow the safety instructionsVehicle:
-1-
Precautions for the repair
E62 F62(E62 OR F62)LOWER REAR SECTION
Description
Classification
Type
Thickness (mm)
(1 )
Rear side member, front section
Rear side member, front section: Replacement
(2 )
Rear floor middle cross member bracket
Rear floor middle cross member bracket: Replacement
(3 )
Front section of rear floor central cross member
Front section of rear floor central cross member: Replacement
(4 )
Rear side stiffener of rear floor front section (sliding side door version)
Front section of rear floor rear side stiffener: Replacement
(5 )
Rear floor stiffener
Rear floor stiffener: Replacement
(6 )
Rear floor centre cross member
Rear floor centre cross member: Replacement
(7 )
Rear floor, front section
Rear floor, front section: Replacement
(8 )
Rear floor extension, front section
front section of rear floor extension: Replacement
(9 )
Rear section of rear floor central cross member
Rear section of rear floor central cross member: Replacement
(10 )
Rear floor, rear section
Rear floor, rear section: Replacement
(12 )
Rear end lower cross member closure panel
(13 )
Rear floor rear cross member
Rear floor rear cross member: Replacement
-2-
(14 )
Rear section of rear side member
Rear side member, rear section: Replacement
(15 )
Rear floor side cross member
Rear floor side cross member: Replacement
(16 )
Rear axle assembly mounting unit
Rear axle mounting unit: Replacement
(17 )
Rear side stiffener of rear floor front section (version without sliding side door)
Front section of rear floor rear side stiffener: Replacement
(18 )
Rear floor, front side section
Rear floor, front side section: Replacement
(19 )
Rear floor front cross member closure panel
Rear floor front cross member closure panel: Replacement
(20 )
Front section of rear floor front side stiffener
Front section of rear floor front side stiffener: Replacement
(21 )
Rear end pillar lower closure panel
H62 U62(H62 OR U62)
Description
(22 )
Classification
Centre floor rear section
Type
Centre floor rear section: Replacement
-3-
Thickness (mm)
(23 )
Rear floor rear cross member closure panel
(see MR
(24 )
Rear floor front cross member closure panel
Rear floor front cross member closure panel: Replacement
(25 )
Front section of rear floor central cross member
Front section of rear floor central cross member: Replacement
(26 )
Rear floor centre cross member
Rear floor centre cross member: Replacement
(27 )
Rear section of rear floor central cross member
(see Rear section of rear floor central cross member: Replacement)
(28 )
Rear side member closure panel
Rear side member closure panel: Replacement
(29 )
Rear side member closure panel, rear section
Rear side member closure panel, rear section: Replacement
(30 )
Rear side foot panel
Rear side foot panel: Replacement
(31 )
Rear side foot panel rear closure panel
Rear side foot panel rear closure panel: Replacement
(32 )
C-pillar lower reinforcement
(see MR
400, 40A, General information)
(33 )
Rear side member closure panel, front section
(see MR
400, 40A, General information)
(34 )
Rear axle assembly mounting unit
(35 )
Rear axle assembly mounting unit closure panel
(see MR
400, 40A, General information)
(36 )
Rear axle assembly mounting side closure panel
(see MR
400, 40A, General information)
(37 )
Rear side member, front section
Rear side member, front section: Replacement
(38 )
Rear section of rear side member
Rear side member, rear section: Replacement
(39 )
Sill panel closure panel
Sill panel closure panel: Replacement
(40 )
Sill panel
Sill panel: Replacement
400, 40A, General information)
Rear axle mounting unit: Replacement
-4-
F62(F62) UPPER REAR SECTION
Description
Classification
Type
Thickness (mm)
(30 )
Rear side panel rear section (glazed version)
(31 )
Rear side panel rear section (panelled version)
Rear side panel, rear section: Replacement
(32 )
Rear side panel front section (glazed version)
Rear side panel, front section: Replacement
(33 )
Rear side panel front section (panelled version)
Rear side panel, front section: Replacement
(34 )
C-pillar closure panel
C-pillar closure panel: Replacement
(35 )
C-pillar
C-pillar: Replacement
(36 )
C-pillar lining
Rear pillar lining: Replacement
(37 )
Rear end pillar lower closure panel
Rear end pillar lower closure panel: Replacement
-5-
(38 )
Outer rear wheel arch
Outer rear wheel arch: Replacement
(39 )
Inner rear wheel arch
Inner rear wheel arch: Replacement
(40 )
Rear end pillar lining
Rear end pillar lining: Replacement
(41 )
Rear end pillar
Rear end pillar: Replacement
(42 )
Rear end panel
Rear end panel: Replacement
(43 )
Rear side roof rail
Rear side roof rail: Replacement
(44 )
Rear side top of panel rear upper stiffener front connection component
Rear side top of panel rear upper stiffener front connecting component: Replacement
(45 )
Rear side back of panel lower horizontal stiffener
Rear side back of panel lower horizontal stiffener: Replacement
(46 )
Rear side top of panel front upper stiffener rear connection component
Rear side top of panel front upper stiffener rear connecting component: Replacement
(47 )
Rear side bottom of panel front upper stiffener rear connection component
Rear side bottom of panel front upper stiffener rear connecting component: Replacement
(48 )
Rear side centre of panel lower horizontal stiffener
Rear side centre of panel lower horizontal stiffener: Replacement
(49 )
Rear side roof rail lining
Side roof rail rear lining: Replacement
(50 )
Front side roof rail lining
Front side roof rail lining: Replacement
(51 )
Rear side panel upper vertical stiffener
Rear side panel upper vertical stiffener: Replacement
(52 )
Rear side panel lower vertical stiffener
Rear side panel lower vertical stiffener: Replacement
(53 )
Rear side top of panel upper horizontal stiffener
Rear side top of panel upper horizontal stiffener: Replacement
(57 )
Rear side bottom of panel upper horizontal stiffener
Rear side bottom of panel upper horizontal stiffener: Replacement
(55 )
Rear side front of panel lower horizontal stiffener
Rear side front of panel lower horizontal stiffener: Replacement
(56 )
Sill panel
Sill panel: Replacement
Repair-40x01x01x11-02x21-1-14-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
WHEEL:BALANCING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
1. PREREQUISITES FOR WHEEL BALANCING
Wheel balancing is a measurement operation.
Several conditions must be met to achieve a reliable result in a single operation.
The wheel balancer must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
It is essential to calibrate the balancer according to the frequency recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not grease the threaded shaft.
Check the condition of the supports, centring components and mountings.
Replace any faulty parts (see manufacturer's instructions).
The wheel and the wheel balancer must be clean.
1- DRIVER'S PERCEPTION
If the wheels are not correctly balanced this causes the steering wheel and/or the vehicle floor to
vibrate.
These vibrations appear between 54 mph (90 km/h)and 90 mph (150 km/h).
2. BALANCING PREPARATION OPERATION
Adjust the tyre pressureTyre pressure: Identification .
Always carry out a road test for a minimum distance of 1 mile (2 km)before balancing the wheels, in
order to remove any flat spots on the tread caused by the vehicle being immobilised.
Actions to be carried out immediately after the test drive:
Position the vehicle on a two-post vehicle liftVehicle: Towing and lifting ,
raise the vehicle,
leave the four wheels hanging free,
release the parking brake.
-1-
Note:
The ring is available from the supplier of the equipment used.
To reproduce the exact vehicle wheel assembly, use a ring(1 ) of diameter:
142 mm
-2-
89 mm
There are three types of weight:
(2) Steel wheel with flange
(3) Alloy wheel with flange
(4) Alloy wheel without flange
In some countries, the use of lead weights is forbidden; in this case it is recommended to use ZAMAK
weights instead.
-3-
Only use weights provided by the Parts Department.
Remove the wheels(see 35A, Wheels and tyres,
Wheel: Removal - Refitting)
.
Always clean the wheel, disc, and hub bearing surfaces.
3. PROCEDURE FOR BALANCING THE WHEEL IN QUESTION
Make sure that the wheel balancer bearing surface and all the centring equipment (ring, thrust plate,
etc.) are kept clean.
Try not to scratch the (alloy) wheel rim with the wheel tightening device.
-4-
The wheel is fitted on the wheel balancer as follows:
(5) ring,
(6) wheel balancer back-plate,
(7) wheel tightening device (certain alloy wheels require a device 200 mm in diameter to ensure that the wheel
has been correctly tightened),
(8) outer wheel plane,
(9) wheel.
-5-
Place the wheel on the wheel balancer, with the valve at the top, then lock the wheel in place.
Remove any stones trapped in the tyre tread.
Enter the specific wheel parameters when starting the wheel balancer.
Start the wheel balancer and check the wheel balance, which should be 0 gon each plane of the
wheel.
If this is not the case, remove the old wheel balancing weights and repeat the wheel balancing
procedure, checking that the wheel balance equals 0on each wheel plane.
-6-
CAUTION
To avoid detachment of the balance weights, use only weights which correspond to
the vehicle wheel rims.
To ensure that the wheels are balanced correctly:
Position a
10 gadhesive weight
(10) on the interior of the wheel rim,
-7-
Repeat the wheel balancing procedure; the wheel balancer should indicate an equivalent weight (
opposite the weight added(11) ,
Repeat the balancing method from the start if this is not the case.
Remove the adhesive weight.
4. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the wheel(see 35A, Wheels and tyres,
Wheel: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-13x05x01-01x80-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
.
± 4 g)
WHEEL:BALANCING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
1. PREREQUISITES FOR WHEEL BALANCING
Wheel balancing is a measurement operation.
Several conditions must be met to achieve a reliable result in a single operation.
The wheel balancer must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
It is essential to calibrate the balancer according to the frequency recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not grease the threaded shaft.
Check the condition of the supports, centring components and mountings.
Replace any faulty parts (see manufacturer's instructions).
The wheel and the wheel balancer must be clean.
1- DRIVER'S PERCEPTION
If the wheels are not correctly balanced this causes the steering wheel and/or the vehicle floor to
vibrate.
These vibrations appear between 54 mph (90 km/h)and 90 mph (150 km/h).
2. BALANCING PREPARATION OPERATION
Adjust the tyre pressure(see Tyre pressure: Identification) .
Always carry out a road test for a minimum distance of 1 mile (2 km)before balancing the wheels, in
order to remove any flat spots on the tread caused by the vehicle being immobilised.
Actions to be carried out immediately after the test drive:
Position the vehicle on a two-post vehicle lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) ,
raise the vehicle,
leave the four wheels hanging free,
release the parking brake.
-1-
Note:
The ring is available from the supplier of the equipment used.
To reproduce the exact vehicle wheel assembly, use a ring(1 ) of diameter:
142 mm
89 mm
-2-
There are three types of weight:
(2) Steel wheel with flange
(3) Alloy wheel with flange
(4) Alloy wheel without flange
In some countries, the use of lead weights is forbidden; in this case it is recommended to use ZAMAK
weights instead.
Only use weights provided by the Parts Department.
-3-
Remove the wheels(see 35A, Wheels and tyres,
Wheel: Removal - Refitting)
.
Always clean the wheel, disc, and hub bearing surfaces.
3. PROCEDURE FOR BALANCING THE WHEEL IN QUESTION
Make sure that the wheel balancer bearing surface and all the centring equipment (ring, thrust plate,
etc.) are kept clean.
Try not to scratch the (alloy) wheel rim with the wheel tightening device.
-4-
The wheel is fitted on the wheel balancer as follows:
(5) ring,
(6) wheel balancer back-plate,
(7) wheel tightening device (certain alloy wheels require a device 200 mm in diameter to ensure that the wheel
has been correctly tightened),
(8) outer wheel plane,
(9) wheel.
Place the wheel on the wheel balancer, with the valve at the top, then lock the wheel in place.
Remove any stones trapped in the tyre tread.
-5-
Enter the specific wheel parameters when starting the wheel balancer.
Start the wheel balancer and check the wheel balance, which should be 0 gon each plane of the
wheel.
If this is not the case, remove the old wheel balancing weights and repeat the wheel balancing
procedure, checking that the wheel balance equals 0on each wheel plane.
CAUTION
To avoid detachment of the balance weights, use only weights which correspond to
the vehicle wheel rims.
-6-
To ensure that the wheels are balanced correctly:
Position a
10 gadhesive weight
(10) on the interior of the wheel rim,
Repeat the wheel balancing procedure; the wheel balancer should indicate an equivalent weight (
opposite the weight added(11) ,
Repeat the balancing method from the start if this is not the case.
Remove the adhesive weight.
-7-
± 4 g)
4. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the wheel(see 35A, Wheels and tyres,
Wheel: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-13x05x01-01x80-1-16-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-8-
.
WHEEL: REMOVAL - REFITTING
The removal - refitting procedure is the same for all wheels.
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post lift(see Vehicle: Towing and lifting) .
Release the parking brake.
Remove the trim .
Position the wheel so that the valve is at the top.
Mark the position of the wheel on the hub.
Note:
This mark is required in order to:
Note the original position of the wheel on the hub,
perform the balancing operation.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Loosen the wheel bolts with the wheel on the ground.
Note:
Use sockets with protective sheaths in order to avoid scratching the alloy wheel rims.
Raise the lift.
Remove:
the wheel bolts,
the wheel.
-1-
1- IF THE WHEEL CANNOT BE REMOVED AFTER THE BOLT HAS BEEN UNDONE:
Position all the wheel bolts.
Tighten the wheel bolts to bring all the bolt heads into contact with the wheel.
Undo the wheel bolts by one turn.
Strike around the edge of the tyre walls(1 ) several times using a mallet on the inner and outer
surfaces of the wheel to detach the wheel.
Remove:
-2-
the wheel bolts,
the wheel.
1)IF THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT WORK:
Strike the inner surface of the wheel(2 ) using a mallet and a wooden block to detach it.
Note:
Do not strike the surface of the wheel using excessive force as this may damage it.
-3-
Remove:
the wheel bolts,
the wheel.
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Clean the hub carrier using a wire brush.
Note:
There are two types of wheel bolts for alloy and steel wheel rims; do not swap them.
Check the condition of the tyre.
Do not move or remove the balance weights.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Clean the mating surfaces between the wheel and the hub carrier using a wire brush.
-4-
Coat the wheel mating face(3 ) with COPPER ANTI-SEIZE GREASE(see Vehicle:
for the repair) .
Parts and consumables
Align the mark on the wheel with the mark made on the hub when it was removed.
Fit the wheel to the vehicle, positioning the valve at the top.
Insert the wheel bolts.
-5-
Tighten the wheel bolts to bring all the bolt heads into contact with the wheel.
Pretighten the wheel bolts to 30 N.m, with the wheel suspended, starting with the bolts at the bottom.
Rotate the wheel through 180 to bring the valve into the bottom position.
Position the vehicle on its wheels.
-6-
Note:
Use sockets with protective sheaths in order to avoid scratching the alloy wheel rims.
Torque tighten the wheel bolts in order:
Front hub carrier assembly: Exploded view ,
(see Rear hub carrier assembly: Exploded view) .
Refit the trim piece.
Repair-13x05x01-01x37-1-12-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-7-
WHEEL RIMIDENTIFICATION
1. IDENTIFICATION
1- MARKING
There are two types of identification marking on the wheel rims:
engraved marking for steel wheel rims,
cast marking for alloy wheel rims.
The marking gives the main dimensional specifications of the wheel rim.
This marking may be:
6 J 15 5 CH 36,
example 6 J 15.
complete, for example
simplified, for
Wheel type
6 J 15
1
Width (in inches)
6
2
Rim edge profile
J
3
Nominal diameter (in inches)
15
4
Number of holes
5
5
Anchorage profile of the tyre
CH
6
Offset (in mm)
36
-1-
There are 3 types of wheel rim edges(2) :
those with two flat edges,
those with two raised edges,
those with one flat edge and one raised edge.
2- INSTALLATION DIAMETER FOR THE WHEEL BOLTS
3- RIM RUN-OUT
-2-
The maximum run-out is measured at the wheel rim edge(7 ) .
4- OUT-OF-ROUNDNESS
The maximum out-of-round value is measured on the tyre bead bearing surface.
Repair-13x05x01x03-02x07-1-17-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-3-
WINDSCREEN PILLAR TRIM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Partially remove the seal at(1 ) .
-1-
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-2-
Separate the windscreen pillar trim at(2 ) .
Remove the windscreen pillar trim at(3 ) .
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
-3-
Repair-70x02x08x02-01x37-1-18-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
WINDSCREEN WASHER RESERVOIR: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Position the vehicle on a two-post liftVehicle: Towing and lifting (02A, Lifting equipment).
Remove:
the engine undertray,
the front section of the front right-hand wheel arch linerFront wheel arch liner: Removal - Refitting (55A, Exterior
protection).
Note:
When removing the windscreen washer pump, use a container to collect the
windscreen washer fluid which will flow out of the bottle.
Remove the windscreen washer pump(see 85A, Wiping - Washing,
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
Cut the plastic clip surrounding the windscreen washer bottle.
-1-
Screen washer pump: Removal - Refitting)
.
Cut the plastic clip(1 ) of the windscreen washer bottle.
-2-
Unclip the windscreen washer bottle by(2 ) , (3 ) , then(4 ) .
Remove the windscreen washer bottle from the bottom.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Fill up the windscreen washer bottle.
-3-
Repair-80x04x06x08-01x37-1-18-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
WINDSCREEN WIPER ARM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Tool for removing wiper arms.
Ele. 1841
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch on the ignition.
CAUTION
To ensure that the wiper arms can travel smoothly, the wiper motor must be initialised.
Turn the wiper stalk from (0) to (1), and then from (1) to (0).
Switch off the ignition.
2. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
-1-
Remove the windscreen wiper arm nuts(2 ) .
-2-
Remove the wiper arms using theTool for removing wiper arms.(Ele. 1841 ) (3 ) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
Switch on the ignition.
-3-
CAUTION
To ensure that the wiper arms can travel smoothly, the wiper motor must be initialised.
Turn the wiper stalk from (0) to (1), and then from (1) to (0).
Switch off the ignition.
2. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
-4-
Fit the wiper arms, aligning them with the screen-printed mark(4 ) on the windscreen.
Torque tighten the wiper arm nuts21 N.m.
Repair-80x04x02x08-01x37-1-15-1.xml
-5-
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
Press the clip(1 ) and simultaneously push downwards(2 ) .
Remove the blade(3 ) from the wiper arm.
-1-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Clip the blade onto the wiper arm.
Repair-80x04x02x06-01x37-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADE: REMOVAL - REFITTING
REMOVAL
1. OPERATION FOR REMOVAL OF PART CONCERNED
Press the clip(1 ) and simultaneously push downwards(2 ) .
Remove the blade(3 ) from the wiper arm.
-1-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION FOR PART CONCERNED
Clip the blade onto the wiper arm.
Repair-80x04x02x06-01x37-1-7-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-2-
WINDSCREEN WIPER MECHANISM: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Disconnect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Remove:
the windscreen wiper arms(see 85A, Wiping - Washing, Windscreen wiper arm: Removal - Refitting) ,
the scuttle panel grilleScuttle panel grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment).
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
-2-
Disconnect the windscreen wiper motor connector(5 ) .
Unclip the windscreen wiper motor wiring(6 ) from the windscreen wiper mechanism.
Remove:
the front windscreen wiper mechanism bolts(7) ,
the windscreen wiper mechanism by(8) .
REFITTING
1. REFITTING OPERATION
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
2. FINAL OPERATION
Refit the scuttle panel grilleScuttle panel grille: Removal - Refitting (56A, Exterior equipment).
-3-
Connect the batteryBattery: Removal - Refitting .
Switch on the ignition.
CAUTION
To ensure that the wiper arms can travel smoothly, the wiper motor must be initialised.
Turn the wiper stalk from (0) to (1), and then from (1) to (0).
Switch off the ignition.
Refit the windscreen wiper arms(see 85A, Wiping - Washing,
Windscreen wiper arm: Removal - Refitting)
Repair-80x04x02x02-01x37-1-30-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
.
WINDSCREEN: REMOVAL - REFITTING
Note, one or more warnings are present in this procedure
Special tooling required
Universal protector
Car. 1847
parts always to be replaced:
Windscreen adjusting shim
rain and light sensor base
WARNING
Before carrying out any operation on a vehicle fitted with the Stop & Start system,
always follow the safety instructionsVehicle: Precautions for the repair
REMOVAL
1. REMOVAL PREPARATION OPERATION
Remove:
the
the
the
the
windscreen wiper armsWindscreen wiper arm: Removal - Refitting (85A, Wiping - Washing),
scuttle panel grilleScuttle panel grille: Removal - Refitting ,
interior rear-view mirrorInterior rear-view mirror: Removal - Refitting ,
windscreen pillar trimsWindscreen pillar trim: Removal - Refitting (71A, Body internal trim).
SAFETY ALARM(AVTSEC)
Remove the front cameraFront camera : Removal - Refitting .
Protect the area around the windscreen with masking tape.
2. REMOVAL OPERATION
-1-
Position the dashboard protectorUniversal protector (Car. 1847 ) .
CAUTION
When cutting the cement bead, take care not to cut the wiring harness.
Cut the cement bead (see
Technical Note 560A).
Remove the windscreen (this operation requires two people).
-2-
REFITTING
1. REFITTING PREPARATION OPERATION
parts always to be replaced:
Windscreen adjusting shim
SAFETY ALARM(AVTSEC)
Refit the front cameraFront camera : Removal - Refitting .
Position the upper seal(1 ) on the windscreen.
For preparation and bonding (see
Technical Note 560A).
-3-
.
2. REFITTING OPERATION
Bond the windscreen (this operation requires two people).
Respect the following clearances and flush fitting:
" windscreen - roof panel " ,
" windscreen - windscreen aperture pillar " .
Hold the windscreen in position with masking tape.
3. FINAL OPERATION
SAFETY ALARM(AVTSEC)
Note:
After any windscreen replacement ,it is recommended to calibrate the front camera
Front camera : Removal - Refitting .
Proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Repair-50x04x02-01x37-1-24-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-4-
WIPING AND WASHING: LIST AND LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
1. LIST OF COMPONENTS
The washing and wiping system comprises:
windscreen wiper blades(see 85A, Wiping - Washing, Windscreen wiper blade: Removal - Refitting)
windscreen wiper arms(see 85A, Wiping - Washing, Windscreen wiper arm: Removal - Refitting)
a windscreen wiper mechanism(see 85A, Wiping - Washing, Windscreen wiper mechanism: Removal - Refitting)
a windscreen washer pump(see 85A, Wiping - Washing, Screen washer pump: Removal - Refitting)
windscreen washer jets(see 85A, Wiping - Washing, Front screen washer jet: Removal - Refitting)
a windscreen washer bottle(see 85A, Wiping - Washing, Windscreen washer reservoir: Removal - Refitting)
2. LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES
WINDSCREEN WIPER ARMS
-1-
WINDSCREEN WIPER MECHANISM
-2-
WINDSCREEN WASHER PUMP
-3-
WINDSCREEN WASHER JETS
-4-
WINDSCREEN WASHER BOTTLE
-5-
Repair-80x04x01-02x51-1-14-1.xml
XSL version : 3.02 du 22/07/11
-6-
Technical Note 6015A
All types
Sub-sections concerned: 88A - 88B - 88C
ELECTRICAL WIRING REPAIR
77 11 332 302
Edition 7 - AUGUST 2011
" The repair procedures given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the
technical specifications current when it was prepared.
The procedures may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the
manufacturer in the production of the various component units and accessories from
which his vehicles are constructed. "
Edition Anglaise
All rights reserved by RENAULT s.a.s.
Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part
reference numbering system is prohibited without the prior written authority of
RENAULT s.a.s..
© Renault s.a.s. 2011
ELECTRICAL WIRING REPAIR
Contents
Page
88A WIRING
Wiring: Precautions for repair
Wiring repair kit: General information
Wiring repair kit: Description
Wiring repair kit: Use
Wiring: Repair
Wiring: Check
Connector: Repair
Connector: Sealing and immobilisation
Connector: Check
88A-1
88A-8
88A-9
88A-12
88A-18
88A-27
88A-30
88A-34
88A-36
88B
MULTIPLEXING
Multiplex network: Repair
88B-1
88C
AIRBAGS AND PRETENSIONERS
Airbag and pretensioner wiring:
Repair
88C-1
188A
WIRING
Wiring: Precautions for repair
WARNING
This note authorises the repair of electrical
wiring in very specific cases only and under
certain conditions.
Check that the repair in question is authorised
and that the repair conditions are respected.
WARNING
If the damaged section is located less than 10 cm
from the connector, replace the defective wiring,
unless a wiring-connector kit (connector with
wires) exists. In this case, use the kit to replace
the damaged section and the connector.
This note does not authorise operations directly
on the connectors and electrical contacts. Only
wiring-connector kits allow the replacement of a
connector. These kits can have associated
procedures.
1 - Result of the fault finding procedure.
Note:
During repair, check that you have the most recently
updated version of the technical note.
Note:
To check whether there is a wiring-connector kit,
consult DIALOGYS. These kits are generally linked
to specific wiring or function diagrams.
A preliminary fault finding procedure has enabled a
wiring fault to be identified. Follow the investigation
procedure below.
Disconnect the battery (see the MR corresponding to
the vehicle, 80A, Battery, Battery: Removal Refitting).
Note:
If the fault is located at the electrical contact (in the
connector) and if it is linked to a corrosion or heating
fault, replace the wiring or fit the wiring-connector kit.
Also check the connector complement.
Remove the components necessary to access the
area to be worked on. The operation area must allow
the pliers and the heat gun to be used, without
blocking visibility.
WARNING
If the damaged section is not sufficiently
accessible, remove the wiring concerned and
repair on the bench.
When the damaged section is sufficiently accessible,
detach the wires to be repaired from the main wiring.
88A
Note:
In all cases, pay particular attention to supply and
earth lines and their tightening (refer to the tightening
torques in the MRs concerned).
After having carried out these checks (outlined in the
Summary flowchart of the operating procedure), if
the repair is authorised, and it does not require a
specific procedure, carry out the generic procedure
(see Wiring: Repair).
WARNING
Check if there is a sensitive line. These cases are
listed in the specific procedures reference table
in this section.
If there is a sensitive line, replace the defective
wiring or apply the specific procedure, if one
exists. These procedures are indicated in the
specific procedures reference table in this
section.
Note:
If you have been referred to this note by a MR, NT or
removal-refitting procedure, apply the repair
procedure adapted to the case in question.
Either the generic repair procedure (see Wiring:
Repair), or a specific procedure listed in the specific
procedures reference table in this section.
Check that the fault is located more than 10 cm from
the connector.
88A-1
WIRING
Wiring: Precautions for repair
88A
2 - Specific procedures reference table.
●
Guidelines for reading the tables below:
– If not otherwise stated, consider all components or electrical connections to have a link with the functions or
equipment listed. For example: For the electric power assisted steering, the function is not specified. It is
prohibited to carry out operations on any wire attached to the electric power assisted steering.
– If one case can be found in both tables, give priority to the Changing the wiring, recommendations, and then
to those for the specific cases:
● Example 1: For a 22-track airbag connector where more than 10 wires are damaged, the specific cases refer
you back to the airbag and pretensioner repair procedure, and the general cases recommend that the wiring
is replaced (as there are more than 10 wires involved). Priority is given to Changing the wiring.
● Example 2: For an operation on a pair of twisted wires (general case) for the airbag function (specific case),
the specific case refers back to the repair procedure for Airbags and pretensioners, and the general cases
refer back to the repair procedure for multiplex lines. Priority is given to the airbag and pretensioner repair
procedure. The recommendations for the specific cases take precedent over the general cases.
88A-2
WIRING
Wiring: Precautions for repair
●
88A
General cases:
Functions or equipment
Wiring harness
Precisions
Instructions
Number of damaged wires 10 or
fewer
(see Wiring: Repair)
Number of damaged wires more
than 10
Change the wiring
Equipment and
predispositions specific to
commercial vehicles and
conversions
/
Change the wiring
Electric vehicles
Wiring and power connectors
Change the wiring
Connections or
associated components
/
(see Connector: Repair)
Splices
Splice with more than 3 wires
Change the wiring
3-wire splice which does not need
sealing
(see Wiring: Repair)
Splice with 3 wires or more, which
needs sealing (engine and
underbody areas and damp areas
of the doors and boot)
Change the wiring
Sheathed wires
Change the wiring
Shielded wires
Change the wiring
Twisted wires
If the wire cross-sections are 0.5 mm2: (see
Multiplex network: Repair)
Flat cable
Change the wiring
Wires with specific thermal
protection
Change the wiring
Copper wires with cross-section
less than 0.35 mm2
Change the wiring
Copper wires with cross-section
greater than 6 mm2
Change the wiring
Damaged wires less than 10 cm
from the connector
(see 88A, Wiring, Connector: Repair)
Wires outside the loom
88A-3
WIRING
Wiring: Precautions for repair
●
88A
Specific cases:
Lines
Device
Instructions
4-wheel steering
/
Change the wiring
ABS
Other ABS lines
Change the wiring
ABS
ABS sensor
Change the wiring
Airbag
Other airbag lines
(see Airbag and pretensioner wiring: Repair)
Airbag
Airbag sensor
(see Airbag and pretensioner wiring: Repair)
Airbag
Airbag computer connector
(see Airbag and pretensioner wiring: Repair)
Airbag
Pretensioner (squib) connector
(see Airbag and pretensioner wiring: Repair)
Airbag
Under seat connector
(see Airbag and pretensioner wiring: Repair)
Airbag
Airbag trigger connectors
(pyrotechnic lines)
(see Airbag and pretensioner wiring: Repair)
Preheating unit
(Diesel)
Heater plug
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol)
Petrol vapour absorber
Change the wiring
Injection computer
Variable camshaft
Change the wiring
Injection computer
Variable inlet camshaft
Change the wiring
Injection computer
Variable exhaust camshaft
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol)
Pencil coil
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol and Diesel)
Motorised throttle body
Change the wiring
Injection computer
Camshaft sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol and Diesel)
Inlet camshaft sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol and Diesel)
Exhaust camshaft sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
Camshaft sensor, row A, B
Change the wiring
Injection computer
Variable exhaust camshaft sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol and Diesel)
Pinking sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Turbine upstream pressure sensor
Change the wiring
88A-4
WIRING
Wiring: Precautions for repair
●
88A
Specific cases (cont. 1):
Lines
Device
Instructions
Injection computer
(Petrol)
Manifold pressure sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Particle filter differential pressure
sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Rail pressure sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol and Diesel)
Turbocharging pressure sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
Accelerator pedal sensor
Change the wiring, except for the connector on
KANGOO
(see Connector: Repair)
Injection computer
(Petrol and Diesel)
TDC sensor
See OTS*
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Particle filter (downstream) output
sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol and Diesel)
Air temperature sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol)
Turbine upstream temperature
sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Fuel temperature sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol and Diesel)
Coolant temperature sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Particle filter inlet temperature sensor
(upstream)
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Injection air flowmeter
Change the wiring
Injection computer
Camshaft shift, row A, B
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Turbocharger control solenoid valve
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Damper solenoid valve
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol and Diesel)
Injectors
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Diesel heater
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Water in diesel sensor
Change the wiring
*OTS: Special Technical Operation
88A-5
WIRING
Wiring: Precautions for repair
●
88A
Specific cases (cont. 2):
Lines
Device
Instructions
Injection computer
(Diesel/particle filter)
Oil level and temperature sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Nitrogen oxide (Nox)
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol and Diesel)
Upstream oxygen sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Petrol and Diesel)
Downstream oxygen sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Proportional oxygen sensor
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
EGR valve
Change the wiring
Injection computer
(Diesel)
Heater plug
Change the wiring
EPAS
/
Change the wiring
ETC (4x4 torque
distributor)
/
Change the wiring
GMV
GMV
Change the wiring
Multiplex network
CAN
(See Multiplex network: Repair)
UPC
(Petrol and diesel)
Air conditioning compressor
Change the wiring
UPC (Petrol)
Oil level sensor
Change the wiring
88A-6
WIRING
Wiring: Precautions for repair
88A
3 - Summary flowchart of the operating procedure defined in this section.
Identify a fault on the wiring.
Disconnect the battery (see MR corresponding to the
vehicle, 80A, Battery, Battery: Removal - Refitting)
Access the area concerned.
NO
Case of referral to Technical
Note 6015A from a MR, a
Technical Note or a removalrefitting procedure.
Sufficient accessibility?
Remove the wiring.
YES
Fault on a sensitive
line or equivalent?
(see table*)
YES
Is there a specific
procedure? (see
table*)
NO
YES
YES
Caused by
connector?
Is there a specific
kit? (DIALOGYS)
NO
NO
NO
Is there a connector
kit? (DIALOGYS)
YES
NO
Fault more than
10 cm from the
connector?
NO
YES
Procedure attached to
connector kit. (see table*)
NO
Fault more than
10 cm from the
connector?
YES
Generic repair procedure.
(see Wiring: Repair)
table*: Specific
procedures reference
table
Specific repair procedure. (see
table*)
Change the wiring
88A-7
YES
WIRING
Wiring repair kit: General information
1 - Purpose and applications.
2 - Terminology.
Description of the content of the Wiring repair kit case
as well as the procedure and the field of application.
88A
●
The kit enables wiring which is damaged or has cut
electrical wires to be repaired whilst ensuring that it will
be fully functional.
It also allows wiring-connector kits to be used.
All electrical cables and wires with cross-sections
between 0.35 mm2 and 6 mm2 except " sensitive lines "
(defined in this document), are affected.
Wiring-connector kit.
Kit usually made up of a connector the cells of which
are populated with crimped wires along with sleeves for
joining.
Multiplex lines or connections.
Principal or secondary CAN network lines link the
computers together and are made up of twisted pairs of
stranded wires.
●
Turns or twists.
For twisted pairs:
One turn (twist) = (A)
●
WARNING
Repair of sensitive lines is prohibited using the
generic procedure alone. It can be authorised
provided that there is an additional appropriate
procedure (see
Wiring: Precautions for repair).
The technical nature and the sensitivity of this type of
operation requires the adapted equipment contained
and described in the Wiring repair kit case.
WARNING
Using tools or components which have not been
recommended is strictly forbidden when
repairing wiring.
3 - Operation time (TM).
WARNING
For sensitive lines, only automotive electricians,
technician agents or cotechs (Level 2 Electricity
as a minimum) can carry out the repair described
in this note.
For each vehicle, an average repair time is given in the
wiring section of the TM.
The corresponding codes are:
– 0500 for replacing a connector (using a connector
kit).
– 0501 for repairing wiring.
This times do not include the time taken to access the
area to be repaired. The time taken to remove and refit
the wiring must be added.
88A-8
WIRING
Wiring repair kit: Description
2 - Tools.
1 - Case and label.
●
88A
Case (77 11 420 544).
●
Stripping pliers (77 11 230 416).
Part no. 77 11 420 544 corresponds to the new
electrical repair case. It replaces case part no. 77
11 229 893.
Both part numbers are authorised for electrical
repair.
The case contains all the components described in this
section. A label lists their part numbers.
●
Label.
The label affixed inside the case is made up of 4
sections in English and French.
On the upper section, at (A) is the title and number of
the note. At (B) are the After-Sales references (for the
network) and MABEC code (for factories) which
enables the kit to be restocked with consumables or
new tools or a new kit to be ordered.
On the lower section, at (C) is a table (not exhaustive)
which helps the right sleeve to be chosen, with a
summary of the recommendations for each case. And
at (D) are the recommendations for use.
These are automatic stripping pliers which enable an
electrical conductor up to a maximum cross-section of
6 mm2 to be cut or stripped.
The length of the stripped section can be adjusted up to
20 mm.
The operating instructions for this kit are described in
this document (see Wiring repair kit: Use).
●
Crimping pliers (77 11 421 296).
Part no. 77 11 421 296 corresponds to the new
crimping pliers in the electrical repair kit. It
replaces the crimping pliers with part no. 77 11 230
417.
Both part numbers are authorised for electrical
repair.
88A-9
WIRING
Wiring repair kit: Description
88A
3 - Consumables.
The crimping pliers have three sizes of jaw (red, blue
and yellow) which correspond to the crimping sleeves.
These pliers are recommended for the crimping the
sleeves provided in the kit.
●
Self-solder sleeves.
The operating instructions for this kit are described in
this document (see Wiring repair kit: Use).
●
Heat gun (77 11 230 415).
There are three sizes of heat shrinkable self-solder
sleeve differentiated by the colour of their rings (G):
– Clear, for a total copper section (sum of the 2
wires) between 0.3 and 0.8 mm2 (packet of 20: 77
11 229 418).
– Red, for a total copper section (sum of the 2 wires)
between 0.8 and 2.0 mm2 (packet of 20: 77 11 229
419).
The heat gun is a hot air blower with 2 nozzles which
enable it to be adapted for different needs:
– Concentrator nozzle (E), (77 11 237 778).
– Heat shield nozzle (F), (77 11 237 777).
It can be used to solder all self-solder sleeves and to
contract the heat-shrinkable parts and sheaths on all
sleeves
Its temperature and flow of air are adjustable and are
indicated on the screen.
Temperature adjustment from 80°C to 650°C in
increments of 5°C.
Air flow adjustment from 200 l/min to 550 l/min at
5 levels displayed on the screen.
– Blue, for a total copper section (sum of the 2 wires)
between 2.0 and 4.0 mm2(packet of 20: 77 11 229
420).
These are sealing sleeves. The seal is formed when
the rings are tightened around the wire when heated.
These sleeves are only to be used for connecting one
wire with another wire (1-to-1).
The operating instructions for this kit are described in
this document (see Wiring repair kit: Use).
88A-10
WIRING
Wiring repair kit: Description
●
Crimping sleeve.
●
88A
Adhesive PVC tape (77 11 170 331).
Use the adhesive PVC tape for taping the wires. Do not
use it to protect or insulate electrical parts.
It is a contact-adhesive high temperature tape.
●
Coil of twisted wires (77 11 229 425).
There are three sizes of heat shrinkable crimp sleeve
differentiated by the colour of their rings:
– Red, for a copper section between 0.5 and
1.5 mm2 (Packet of 20: 77 11 229 410).
– Blue, for a copper section between 1.5 and
2.5 mm2 (Packet of 20: 77 11 229 416).
– Yellow, for a copper section between 3.0 and
6.0 mm2 (Packet of 20: 77 11 229 417).
These are sealing sleeves. The seal is formed by the
inner wall which becomes adhesive when heated.
These sleeves can be used to join one wire with
another wire (1-to-1) or two wires with another wire (2to-1).
This is a coil of a pair of twisted wires
(40 turns/linear m). Ensure these wires remain twisted.
The 2 wires have a 0.5 mm2 cross-section and are of
temperature class T3. It is possible to fit them in all
areas of the vehicle during repairs to twisted wires of
the same cross-section.
In the case where two wires are joined to one wire (2to-1), the seal is no longer guaranteed. Do not use
when a seal is required.
●
Thermal protection (77 11 229 424).
The protective heat shield is a 250 mm by 250 mm
square. It is intended to protect the surrounding area
from the flow of hot air from the heat gun.
88A-11
WIRING
Wiring repair kit: Use
●
Note:
This section is an abridged version of the
instructions for use of the tools in the kit.
88A
Stripping a wire:
This pair of stripping pliers is automatic. It does not
need adjusting to the cross-section of wire to be
stripped (6 mm2 maximum).
1 - Stripping pliers.
To strip a wire, adjust the length to be stripped by
moving the stop (B). Press lightly on the ends to make
it slide. The length to be stripped is read on the scale
(C) in millimetres (mm).
Adjust the stripping pressure by moving the cursor (D).
Press on the cursor to make it slide. The further
forward the cursor is, the greater the force.
WARNING
If the pressure is too weak, the cutting edges will
not grip the wire's insulation. If the pressure is
too strong, the cutting edges can cut through the
copper strands. Start with a medium setting and
then adjust according to results.
●
Place the end of the wire against the stop (B) and
bring it out through the jaws (E).
Description of the stripping pliers:
(A) = Wire cutter.
(B) = Stop for adjusting the length to be stripped.
(C) = Scale (millimetre divisions).
(D) = Pressure adjustment.
(E) = Stripping jaws and cutting edges.
●
Press the handle. The jaws will grip the wire. The
cutting edges will automatically adjust their position in
relation to the section of wire and strip it.
Cutting a wire:
To cut electrical wires up to 6 mm2, insert the wire into
slot (A) and press the handle.
88A-12
WARNING
Check the quality of the stripped wire (insulation
cleanly removed and no cut copper strands).
Start again if necessary.
WIRING
Wiring repair kit: Use
2 - Crimping pliers.
●
88A
Crimping operation:
Squeeze the handles fully together to unlock the pliers
and open the jaws.
On the pliers, find the crimping jaws which correspond
to the sleeve being used.
Insert the wire(s) into one end of the sleeve.
Position the pliers' jaws in the middle of the half of the
metal shaft where the wire(s) are.
Squeeze the handles fully together to crimp the sleeve
onto the wire(s). Crimping is complete once the pliers
are opened again.
Check that the copper of the wire is correctly crimped
and that the plastic part of the sleeve has not been cut.
The crimping pliers are the only pliers recommended
for crimping the crimp sleeves in the kit.
Repeat the crimping operation on the other end of the
sleeve.
They are used on the 3 sizes of crimp sleeve:
– At (F) for crimping the red crimp sleeve.
– At (G) for crimping the blue crimp sleeve.
– At (H) for crimping the yellow crimp sleeve.
Before crimping a sleeve:
– choose the sleeve suitable for the cross-section of
the wire (see Wiring: Repair),
– strip the recommended length of wire.
88A-13
Note:
If the wire is not correctly crimped, cut the wire at the
sleeve and start the operation again with a new
sleeve.
WIRING
Wiring repair kit: Use
3 - Heat gun.
●
88A
Accessories:
(R) = Concentrator nozzle.
(S) = Deflector nozzle.
Note:
The concentrator nozzle (R) is recommended when
using the heat gun on the crimp or self-solder
sleeves in the kit.
WARNING
The heat shield nozzle (S) can be used for
contracting single heat shrinkable sheaths.
Do not use it for contracting the crimp or selfsolder sleeves in the kit.
●
When contracting the sleeves in the kit, use the FREE
program and change the settings as recommended.
A memory function recalls the program and settings
from the last time the gun was used.
WARNING
Before using the gun, the user must familiarise
themselves with the safety advice in the user's
manual provided by the manufacturer.
●
Introduction to the gun:
The heat gun is recommended for contracting heat
shrinkable sleeves.
For other applications, the user must take the
precautions and advice in the user's manual into
account.
●
General information on the setting parameters:
Description of the heat gun:
(I) = On (1)/off (0) switch.
(J) = Display screen.
(K) = SELECT MENU button.
(L) = + button for setting parameters.
(M) = STANDBY button (pause/cooling).
(N) = - button for setting parameters.
(O) = Supports for resting the tool on a bench.
(P) = Tool air inlet.
(Q) = Tool air outlet.
88A-14
WIRING
Wiring repair kit: Use
●
Switching on the gun:
Connect the appliance to the mains electricity supply
(230 Vac - 50 Hz or 60 Hz), respecting all precautions.
Push the switch (I) on (1).
The appliance will come on using the programs and
settings most recently used.
WARNING
The gun starts heating immediately.
WARNING
Before putting the gun away in its case or
anywhere else, leave it to cool down to ambient
temperature.
●
Operating instructions:
The heat gun is used in two ways. It can either be held
in the hand and used directly. Or it can be set down on
its supports (O) on a clean and tidy bench. The latter
has the advantage of leaving the user with both hands
free.
●
Programs:
Always work with the FREE program shown on the
screen (J) at (T). If it is not shown, perform the
following operation:
– press menu selection button (K) once,
– program field (T) on display field (J) flashes,
– select the free program using the + (L) or - (N)
buttons,
– press the menu selection button (K) once, so that
field (T) on display screen (J) stops flashing.
88A-15
88A
WIRING
Wiring repair kit: Use
●
Temperature and air flow settings:
To change the program settings (the FREE program is
recommended), carry out the following operation:
– press menu selection button (K) twice,
– temperature field (U) on display field (J) flashes,
– adjust the temperature using the + (L) or - (N)
buttons,
– press menu selection button (K) once,
– air flow field (V) on display field (J) flashes,
– adjust the air flow using the + (L) or - (N) buttons,
– press menu selection button (K) once, so that the
fields on display screen (J) stop flashing.
Note:
When using the heat gun on crimp or self-solder
sleeves, the air flow is always on the maximum
setting, only the temperature varies.
88A-16
88A
WIRING
Wiring repair kit: Use
●
Special modes (COOL/PAUSE):
After use and before pushing switch (A) off (0), cool
the gun. Similarly, during brief pauses or for lower
power consumption, switch the gun to PAUSE mode
by carrying out the following operation.
Before switching off the heat gun:
– press STANDBY button (M) once,
– program field (T) on display field (J) shows COOL,
– wait until the temperature goes down to 150°C and
push switch (A) off (0).
To switch to economy mode:
–
–
–
–
–
–
press STANDBY button (M) once,
program field (T) on display field (J) shows COOL,
press STANDBY button (M) once,
program field (T) on display field (J) shows WAIT,
the gun is in economy mode,
press STANDBY button (M) once to recover the
previous settings and start heating again.
88A-17
88A
WIRING
Wiring: Repair
88A
If 2 wires and 1 wire (2-to-1), only use crimp sleeves.
In this case, the seal can no longer be guaranteed. Do
not use this solution when a tight seal is needed
(engine and underbody areas and damp areas of the
doors and boot).
Note:
This relates to the generic repair procedure.
1 - Choosing the sleeve.
The are two possible techniques available:
– self-solder sleeves,
– crimp sleeves.
For each technique there are 3 sizes of sleeve.
The choice of sleeve depends on the following criteria:
●
Type of operation.
Note:
This is stage 1 when using the label.
If wire to wire (1-to-1), use crimp sleeves or selfsolder sleeves.
●
Wire cross-sections.
Note:
This is stage 2 when using the label.
See the sleeve choice table taken from the label.
Note:
The columns corresponding to the wire crosssections give a representative overview of the
different cases.
Identify the cross-section of the wire which is the
subject of the operation. Use the diagram which shows
pictures of wires which correspond to the wire crosssections.
Check that the diagram is at scale 1.
Find the stripped section of wire.
88A-18
WIRING
Wiring: Repair
●
88A
Identifying the settings.
Note:
This is stage 3 when using the label.
After having found your case in question, follow the
corresponding line to find the setting parameters.
The settings correspond to the lengths to be stripped
and the temperature of the heat gun.
The column corresponding to these parameters gives
the recommended sleeve.
Note:
If several sleeves are possible for the same
operation, choose the one best adapted for the
number of wires to be repaired, the wiring layout and
the vehicle layout (thickness of the harness,
available room etc.).
Refer to the columns of wire cross-sections to find your
case.
As relates to the previous examples.
Example 1.
2 possible sleeves:
– Either the red self-solder sleeve.
– Or the red crimp sleeve.
Note:
If the case in question is not present, refer to the
special cases.
Example 2.
– Only the blue crimp sleeve is possible.
Example 1.
Joining together 2 wires, each 0.5 mm2 (1-to-1 type
operation). Look at the upper section of the columns
(1-to-1).
Each wire (A and C) has a 0.5 mm2 cross-section.
Refer to the line where:
● column A shows 1 x 0.5 mm2,
2
● and column C shows 1 x 0.5 mm .
●
Special cases.
If the case in question is not shown in the selection
table, apply the following rules to select a sleeve.
Example 2.
Joining 3 wires together (2-to-1 type operation). Look at
the lower section of the columns (2-to-1).
On one side, the 2 wires (A and B) both have a 1 mm2
cross-section. On the other side, wire C has a 2 mm2
cross-section. Refer to the line where:
● columns A & B show 2 x 1 mm2,
2
● and column C shows 1 x 2 mm .
In all cases, identify the cross-section of each wire
(copper strands).
88A-19
WIRING
Wiring: Repair
●
Case of a wire joint between 1 wire and 1 wire
(most common situation).
●
88A
Case of a wire joint between 2 wires and 1 wire
(less common situation).
Conditions for self-solder sleeves:
Conditions for crimp sleeves:
Add together the 2 wire cross-sections (copper
strands):
Add together the 2 wire cross-sections (copper
strands) found on one side of the sleeve to find Sum
side 1.
If 0.3 mm2 ≤ (section 1 + section 2) ≤ 0.8 mm2, use the
self-solder sleeve with clear rings.
Strip 10 mm from each wire.
The temperature setting is 300°C.
If 0.8 mm2 ≤ (section 1 + section 2) ≤ 2 mm2, use the
self-solder sleeve with red rings.
Strip 12 mm from each wire.
The temperature setting is 340°C.
If 2 mm2 ≤ (section 1 + section 2) ≤ 3 mm2, use the
self-solder sleeve with blue rings.
Strip 15 mm from each wire.
The temperature setting is 400°C.
If 0.5 mm2 ≤ Sum sections side 1 ≤ 1.5 mm2.
And if 0.5 mm2 ≤ wire cross-section side 2 only ≤ 1.5
mm2, use the red crimp sleeve.
The temperature setting is 280°C.
If 1.5 mm2 ≤ Sum sections side 1 ≤ 2.5 mm2.
And if 1.5 mm2 ≤ wire cross-section only side 2 ≤ 2.5
mm2, use the blue crimp sleeve.
The temperature setting is 300°C.
If 3 mm2 ≤ Sum sections side 1 ≤ 6 mm2.
And if 3 mm2 ≤ wire cross-section only side 2 ≤ 6 mm2,
use the yellow crimp sleeve.
The temperature setting is 320°C.
Conditions for crimp sleeves:
For stripping the wires:
Consider the section of each wire separately.
7 mm is stripped from the single wire (side 2) for red
and blue crimp sleeves and 8 mm for the yellow
sleeve.
If 0.5 mm2 ≤ each section ≤ 1.5 mm2, use the red crimp
sleeve.
Strip 7 mm from each wire.
The temperature setting is 280°C.
If 1.5 mm2 ≤ each section ≤ 2.5 mm2, use the blue
crimp sleeve.
Strip 7 mm from each wire.
The temperature setting is 300°C.
If 3 mm2 ≤ each section ≤ 6 mm2, use the yellow crimp
sleeve.
Strip 8 mm from each wire.
The temperature setting is 320°C.
If the two wires (side 1) have the same cross-section,
strip 10 mm from them for red and blue crimp sleeves
and 11 mm for the yellow sleeve.
If the 2 wires (side 1) have different cross-sections,
then:
For red and blue crimp sleeves, strip 10 mm from the
smaller cross-section and 7 mm from the larger crosssection.
For the yellow sleeve, strip 11 mm from the smaller
cross-section and 8 mm from the larger cross-section.
WARNING
If no sleeve corresponds to the case in question,
the operator cannot repair the wiring. Replace
the wiring harness.
88A-20
WIRING
Wiring: Repair
●
88A
Settings table (taken from the label).
Sleeves
Self-solder
clear
L (mm)
A
C
blue
C
T
(°C)
10
10
10
300
A
C
T
(°C)
12
12
12
L (mm)
L (mm)
A
C
340
7
7
L (mm)
3 ≤ A+B≤ 62
& 32≤ C≤ 62
L (mm)
280
mm2
mm2
8
8
320
mm2
8
8
320
1x6 mm2
2
C
8
8
320
1x0.35 mm2
1x0.5 mm
1x0.5
2
mm2
1x0.5 mm2
1x1 mm2
12
12
340
7
7
280
1x0.75 mm2
1x0.75 mm2
12
12
340
7
7
280
1x1
mm2
12
12
340
7
7
280
1x1
mm2
12
12
340
C
T
(°C)
A
A
A
T
(°C)
2
1x4
1x0.35 mm
1x0.75
1→1
2
0.5 ≤ A+B≤ 1.5 1.5 ≤ A+B≤ 2.5
& 0.52≤ C≤ 1.52 & 1.52≤ C≤ 2.52
T
(°C)
C
T
(°C)
yellow
2
340
12
22≤ A+C≤ 32
blue
2
300
10
L (mm)
red
2
1x3
1x0.35 mm2
1x0.5
red
0.32≤ A+C≤ 0.82 0.82≤ A+C≤ 22
Wire cross-sections
A
Crimp
1x1
mm2
mm2
15
15
400
7
7
280
1x1 mm2
1x1.5 mm2
15
15
400
7
7
280
1x1.5 mm2
1x1.5 mm2
15
15
400
7
7
280
1x1.5
mm2
2
1x2
7
7
300
mm2
7
7
300
2
7
7
300
1x2 mm
1x2 mm
1x2 mm2
1x2.5 mm2
7
7
300
1x2.5 mm2
1x2.5 mm2
7
7
300
1x3
mm2
1x3
mm2
1x6 mm2
A & B
2x0.5 mm2
1x0.5 mm2 +
2→1 2x1 mm2
2
1x0.5 mm +
1x 1.5 mm2
1x0.5 mm2 +
2x2 mm2
L (mm)
A
B C
L (mm)
L (mm)
L (mm)
L (mm)
L (mm)
T
T
T
T
T
T
(°C) A B C (°C) A B C (°C) A B C (°C) A B C (°C) A B C (°C)
1x1 mm2
10 10 7
280
1x1.5 mm2
10 7
280 10 7
7
300
1x2 mm2
1x1 mm2
1x3 mm2
C
7
10 10 7
300
1x2 mm2
10 7
300
7
1x3 mm2
11 8
1x6 mm2
11
Stripping/Temperature
mm
°C
mm
°C
mm
°C
mm
°C
mm
°C
8
320
11 8 320
mm
°C
In the case of a 1-to-1 type operation, wires A and C denote the wires which are found at either side of the sleeve.
In the case of an operation where 2 wires are joined to 1 (2 to 1), wires A and B denote the 2 wires which are found
at the same side of the sleeve (A is the smaller section). C denotes the single wire on the other side.
88A-21
WIRING
Wiring: Repair
88A
3 - Self-solder sleeves.
2 - Preparation.
To start the preparatory stage, check that the wiring is
sufficiently accessible and that the sleeves have been
chosen.
Note:
Fit the self-solder sleeves (connection and heating)
line by line, sleeve by sleeve.
– Detach the wires from the wiring.
●
– Check that the operating area is sufficiently
spacious and that the sleeves can be fitted
staggered (if there is a number of wires).
Connection.
The equipment necessary and the wires are ready for
the operation:
– Mark the wires to be cut, particularly if there is a
number of wires the same colour.
– Cut the damaged wire(s). Stagger the cuts if a lot
of wires are marked so that the sleeves are not all
on top of each other. The cut must be made at a
distance of no less than 50 mm from the damaged
section and in an area where the sleeve will remain
straight.
– Slip the self-solder sleeve onto one of the wires.
– Connect the wires by twisting the stripped sections
around each other.
– Cut the replacement wire to length(s) identical to
those removed from the harness. If the self-solder
sleeves are being used, add 30 mm for the wire
joints.
WARNING
The cross-section of replacement wire must not
be less than the original cross-section of wire.
WARNING
Use a 0.5 mm2 wire to repair a 0.35 mm2wire.
WARNING
The temperature class of the replacement wire
must be greater than or equal to class T3. For the
repair, use the wires recommended by the parts
department network, checking that they are
suitable for your requirements.
– Strip the ends by the lengths indicated in relation
to the sleeve chosen, using the stripping pliers
(see Wiring repair kit: Use).
– Protect sensitive areas close to the wiring with the
heat shield.
88A-22
– Slide the sleeve over the stripped section. The ring
of solder should end up in the centre of the stripped
and twisted wires (A). The stripped and twisted
section of the wires must be located between the 2
sealing rings (B).
WIRING
Wiring: Repair
88A
WARNING
When twisting the wires, make sure that your
hands are not greasy so that the solder adheres.
WARNING
When the sleeve is positioned, check that all the
copper strands remain flat and subsequently are
not at risk of perforating the sleeve. Start the
operation to join the wires again if necessary.
WARNING
The sealing rings must be clearly located on the
insulated section of the wires (B) and not on the
copper or where the copper and the insulated
section meet. Start the operation to join the wires
again if necessary.
Once the wires are joined, start the heating operation.
●
Note:
Spend the majority of the recommended time on the
ring of solder and the rest of the time on the ends of
the sleeve.
The heating operation takes 30 s ± 10. This time is a
guide only. It can be reduced or increased
depending on how efficient the heating is.
Heating the self-solder sleeve.
– Switch on the heat gun fitted with the concentrator
nozzle after familiarising yourself with the
precautions for use (see Wiring repair kit: Use).
– Adjust the temperature and the air flow to the
values indicated (see Wiring repair kit: Use).
– Check that the sensitive areas close to the sleeve
and the other electrical wires are not at risk of
damage.
– Heat the sleeve starting at the centre,
concentrating the heat on the ring of solder and the
stripped section of the wires.
– When the copper and the ring of solder become
hot enough, the ring of solder melts and runs in
between the copper strands (C).
– When the solder has completely melted, move the
nozzle to the ends of the sleeve to finish shrinking
the sheath.
– The sealing rings of the sleeve tighten around the
insulation of the wires (D).
88A-23
WARNING
Do not try to heat the sheath too quickly, use a
backwards and forwards motion to ensure it
does not burn.
Do not direct the flow of hot air onto the
insulation of the wires so as not to burn it.
WIRING
Wiring: Repair
WARNING
Wait for the sleeve to cool before manipulating it
to maintain the quality of the solder (minimum
waiting period: 1 minute).
Do not bend the sleeve (even when cool) so as to
not damage the quality of the solder or the
sealing properties of the sleeve.
88A
When joining 2 wires to 1 wire, first connect the 2 wires
from the same end in the following way:
– If the 2 wires have identical diameters, twist
together the stripped section of the 2 wires (E),
before putting them into the sleeve.
Note:
– Do not move during installation.
– Do not overheat the sleeve.
– Do not move the sleeve or wires until they have
cooled.
If several self-solder sleeves must be positioned,
repeat the operation sleeve by sleeve.
When the heating operations have finished, move on
to the checking operation (see Wiring: Check).
– If the 2 wires have different diameters, wind the
stripped section of the smaller wire around that of
the larger wire (F) before inserting them in the
sleeve.
4 - Crimp sleeves.
Note:
For a wire-to-wire join, go straight to the crimping
operation.
●
Special notes for joining 2 wires to 1 wire.
WARNING
Do not use if a tight seal is needed (engine and
underbody areas and damp areas of the doors
and boot).
88A-24
WIRING
Wiring: Repair
●
88A
Repeat the crimping operation on the other end of the
sleeve to obtain the result below.
Crimping.
The equipment necessary and the wires are ready for
the crimping operation:
– Take the crimping pliers. Squeeze the handles
fully together to unlock the pliers and open the jaws
(see Wiring repair kit: Use).
– On the pliers, find the crimping jaws which
correspond to the sleeve chosen.
– Insert the wire(s) into one end of the sleeve up to
the stop located inside the metal barrel of the
sleeve.
– Position the pliers' jaws around the middle of the
section of the metal barrel where the wire(s) are.
– Squeeze the handles fully together to crimp the
sleeve onto the wire(s). Crimping is complete once
the pliers are opened again.
The pliers have correctly crimped each wire on the
halves of the metal barrel at (G) without damaging the
plastic.
WARNING
Check that the copper of the wire is correctly
crimped and that the plastic part of the sleeve
has not been cut. If the wire has been stripped by
the correct length and correctly inserted in the
metal barrel, then the copper of the wire should
barely jut out from the shaft.
Note:
If the wire is not correctly crimped, cut the wire
before the sleeve and start the operation again with
a new sleeve.
88A-25
WIRING
Wiring: Repair
●
Heating the crimping sleeve.
– Switch on the heat gun fitted with the concentrator
nozzle after familiarising yourself with the
precautions for use (see Wiring repair kit: Use).
– Set the temperature and the air flow to the values
indicated, following the procedure in this note
(see Wiring repair kit: Use).
– Check that the sensitive areas close to the sleeve
and the other electrical wires are not at risk of
damage.
– Heat the sleeve starting at the centre.
88A
Note:
Spend the majority of the recommended time on the
metal barrel and the rest of the time on the ends of
the sleeve.
The heating operation takes 30 s ± 10. This time is a
guide only. It can be reduced or increased
depending on how efficient the heating is.
WARNING
Do not try to heat the sheath too quickly, use a
backwards and forwards motion to ensure it
does not burn.
Do not direct the flow of hot air onto the
insulation of the wires so as not to burn it.
– When the sheath starts to contract, move the
nozzle to one of the ends.
– The sheath continues to contract and produces a
glue.
– When the end of the sleeve has completely
contracted and the glue has correctly covered the
opening of the sleeve, repeat the operation on the
other end to obtain the result shown at (H).
WARNING
Wait for the sleeve to cool before manipulating it
to ensure that the sealing properties of the
sleeve are not affected (minimum waiting period:
1 minute).
Do not bend the sleeve (even when cool) so as to
not damage the sealing properties of the sleeve.
When the heating operations have finished, move on
to the checking operation (see Wiring: Check).
88A-26
WIRING
Wiring: Check
1 - Visual checks.
88A
Result of a correctly applied crimp sleeve.
●
The insulation of the wires is within the sleeve.
●
(Self-solder sleeves) The sealing rings must be
clearly located on the insulated section of the
wires.
●
(Self-solder sleeves) The solder has completely
melted.
●
(Crimp sleeves) The adhesive of the crimp sleeves
forms a barrier at the ends of the sleeves.
●
The sleeves has completely contracted around the
insulation of the wires.
●
The sleeve is not cut, slit, discoloured or pierced by
a copper strand.
●
The insulation of the wires does not show any sign
of damage caused by overheating.
●
The wiring and the area surrounding it have not
been damaged by the heating operation.
Result of a correctly applied self-solder sleeve.
88A-27
WIRING
Wiring: Check
88A
The protruding strands of the wire have pierced the
self-solder sleeve at (K) during contraction.
WARNING
The various struck-through cases are strictly
forbidden.
The self-solder sleeve has not been correctly shrunk.
At (I), the sealing ring has not contracted around the
insulation of the wire.
The crimp sleeve has not been correctly shrunk. At (L),
the adhesive does not form a barrier at the end of the
sleeve.
The sealing ring of the self-solder sleeve is directly on
the copper of the wire at (J).
The adhesive of the crimp sleeve is directly on the
copper of the wire at (M).
88A-28
WIRING
Wiring: Check
The sleeve and the insulation of the wire show signs of
damage at (N) cause by overheating.
88A
4 - Fitting and protections.
After the operation:
●
●
tape up the main harness using adhesive tape,
●
Note:
Reconnect the battery (see the MR corresponding
to the vehicle, 80A, Battery, Battery: Removal Refitting).
reposition the wires concerned in the main
harness,
protect the harness as it is was originally using
equivalent (noise or anti-damage) or superior
protection with the protections recommended by
the Parts Store network.
The part numbers for the protections are as follows:
– 77 11 237 838 - Protective sheath for wiring,
diameter 7 mm (mechanical)
– 77 11 237 839 - Protective sheath for wiring,
diameter 18 mm (mechanical)
– 77 11 237 840 - Protective sheath for wiring,
diameter 31 mm (mechanical)
– 77 11 237 841 - Velour tape for wiring harness
(sound insulation)
WARNING
Any repair which requires a specific heat shield
for the wiring are forbidden. Replace the wiring
harness.
2 - Check with the diagnostic tool.
When a repaired line can be tested with the diagnostic
tool, run this check.
WARNING
Check that the wiring is correctly maintained and
protected to avoid any wear by rubbing and any
noise disturbance.
3 - Function check.
Check that the component or the function of the
repaired line is working correctly. If the case in
question requires it, carry out a test drive.
5 - Final check.
Note:
Always check for faults after repair.
Refer to the fault finding procedure for the function
concerned.
After any operation on the wiring, check that there are
no faults using the diagnostic tools (Clip).
Refer to the corresponding fault finding procedure.
If a fault is present, pass on the vehicle fault finding to
a qualified operator: automotive electrician, technician
agent or cotech (level 2 minimum).
88A-29
WIRING
Connector: Repair
88A
2 - Using a wiring-connector kit.
WARNING
Apply this procedure when there is a connector
- wiring kit or wire kit. Unless the kit is linked to
one of the sensitive lines listed in the specific
procedures reference table (see Wiring:
Precautions for repair). In this case, apply the
specific procedure for the sensitive line
concerned.
Except in the specific outlined cases, use the wiringconnector kits as follows:
●
check that the kit is complete,
●
check that the conductor configuration (position of
wires in the cells of the connector) corresponds to
your needs,
1 - Wiring-Connector kit.
●
A wiring-connector kit enables repair to be carried out
when the connector is faulty or when the fault is
located less than 10 cm from the connector.
check that the wire cross-sections of the wiringconnector kit are equal to or larger than the crosssection of wires to be repaired,
●
mark the wires to ensure that the tracks are not
reversed,
A wiring-connector kit is generally made up of:
●
●
●
●
●
WARNING
The colour of the wires cannot serve as a marker.
In certain cases, wiring-connector kits can have
different colours to those of the wiring to be
repaired.
at least 1 connector,
crimped wires with corresponding contacts,
sealing components if the connector is sealed,
the self-solder or crimp sleeves necessary for the
repair,
other components specific to the function
concerned (e.g. fuses).
Note:
if there is no kit, it is possible to create a wiring connector kit if the following rules are respected:
– The connector affected by the repair must be
taken from the new wiring provided as a spare
part and intended for this repair.
– The function affected by the repair must not by
covered by a special procedure.
– The connector should not be made up of more
than 10 wires.
– The wires are cut more than 10 cm away from the
connector.
– For each opening, the wires of the connector
taken from the new wiring have a cross-section
which is equal to or greater than that of the original
connector.
– For each opening, the metal contacts of the
connector taken from the new wiring are the same
material (gilded or tinplated) as those of the
original connector.
– The precautions set out in this note are respected
(see Wiring: Precautions for repair).
●
Cut the connector wires to be replaced to a length
greater than 100 mm and stagger the cut wires,
●
shorten the wiring-connector kit wires so as to
provide wires the same lengths as those cut from
the wiring to be repaired. For self-solder sleeves,
add 30 mm for the wire joints,
●
apply the generic repair procedure for the joint
(see Wiring: Repair).
3 - Wire kit.
A wire kit is used to perform a repair when the
connector is not damaged.
A wire kit is generally comprised of:
88A-30
●
●
3 crimp wires
protection on the metal contacts.
WIRING
Connector: Repair
6 - Final check.
4 - Applying a wire kit.
NOTE
Access the electric documentation for the vehicle on
Infotech to obtain the part number of the wire kit
required and the removal procedure for the
connector.
Except in the specific outlined cases, use the wire kits
as follows:
●
check that the kit is complete,
●
check for the presence of protection on the metal
contacts,
●
check that the wire cross-sections of the wire kit
are equal to or larger than the cross-section of
wires to be repaired,
●
mark the wires to ensure that the tracks are not
reversed,
WARNING
The colour of the wires cannot serve as a
marker. Wiring-connector kits may be different
colours to those of the wiring to be repaired.
●
cut the connector wires to be replaced to a length
greater than 100 mm and stagger the cut wires,
●
shorten the kit wires so as to provide wires with the
same lengths as those cut from the wiring to be
repaired. For self-solder sleeves, add 30 mm for
the splices,
Apply the generic repair procedure for the joint
(see Wiring: Repair).
5 - Checking and fitting the repair with wiringconnector kits.
●
Carry out the generic repair procedure check
(see Wiring: Check) or that for the specific
procedures if it is a specific case (see Wiring:
Precautions for repair).
●
88A
Apply the recommendations from the generic
repair procedure concerning the fitting and
protection (see Wiring: Check).
88A-31
After any operation on wiring, check for the absence of
faults using the diagnostic tools (Clip, etc.).
Refer to the corresponding fault finding procedure.
If a fault is present, pass on the vehicle fault finding to
a qualified operator: automotive electrician, technician
agent or cotech (level 2 minimum).
KANGOO
WIRING
Connector: Repair
This section deals with an electrical contact fault on
the connector between the dashboard wiring and the
pedal wiring on KANGOO.
1 - Context.
Customer complaint:
Loss of engine power when driving, with the injection
warning light illuminated on Kangoo vehicles with
K4M, F9Q, D4F, D7F and K9K engines.
88A
Note:
Using the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note or
applying a continuity check, check that it
concerns gangs B1, B2, B3, B4, B5 and B6.
WARNING
The colour of the wires is not same on either side
of the R181 connector.
For each gang, proceed in the following manner:
Possible cause:
Loss of contact on the 16-track R181 connector
(dashboard wiring harness and pedal connection).
●
●
2 - Description of the repair procedure.
Make the R181 connector accessible and unclip it from
its mounting (A).
On the R181 connector and using the Wiring Diagrams
Technical Note corresponding to the vehicle, mark the
gangs related to the accelerator potentiometer.
88A-32
Cut the electrical wire either side of the connector.
Make a wire joint with a red self-solder sleeve
from the wiring repair kit, between the pedal
electrical wire and the passenger compartment
wiring electrical wire (B) (see Wiring: Repair).
KANGOO
WIRING
Connector: Repair
After having shunted all of the wires concerned:
88A
3 - Repair check.
Protect the shunted electrical wires (C) with wiring
protective sheath with a diameter of 18 mm
(77 11 237 839).
Continuity:
●
Cover the ends of the protective sheath with
Adhesive PVC tape (D).
Function check:
●
Refit the R181 connector on the mounting.
●
Secure the shunted lines to the wiring using
Adhesive PVC Tape.
●
●
Check the continuity of each of the shunted lines.
●
Clear the faults.
●
Check the conformity of the pedal sensor
parameters:
– If it is a DDCR computer, see Technical Note
3845A, Injection fault finding: DDCR
VDIAG 04 - 08 - 10 - 0C - 14 - 18 - 20,
Conformity check.
– If it is a DCM 1.2 computer, see Technical
Note 6500A, Fault finding - DCM 1.2 Injection
Program 4C Vdiag 08, Conformity check.
– If it is a SIM 32 computer, see Technical
Note 3878A, Injection fault finding: SIM 32
SOFT D4 - Vdiag 04, Conformity check.
– If it is an EDC15 computer, see Technical
Note 3929A, Injection fault finding: DIESEL
BOSCH EDC15C3 Vdiag 10 - 14 - 18,
Conformity check or Technical Note 3930A,
Injection fault finding: DIESEL BOSCH
EDC15C3 Vdiag 0C, Conformity check
depending on the case.
– If it is a SIRIUS 34 computer, see Technical
Note 3834A, Injection fault finding: SIRIUS
34-E932 - Vdiag 08, Conformity check.
●
Perform a road test.
●
Check the status of the faults (present and stored).
Final check:
●
88A-33
Carry out a complete check with the CLIP tool and
check that there are no faults.
WIRING
Connector: Sealing and immobilisation
– Adhesive 7703 397 035 (cracked cylinder of solid
adhesive).
This section explains how to insulate and immobilise
an unused connector when changing the wiring.
– Wiring repair kit (see Wiring Repair Kit:
Description).
2 cases are dealt with:
– Waterproof wiring in damp areas
– Non-waterproof wiring
Refer to the relevant section.
●
Description of the operation.
Plug preparation:
1 - For waterproof wiring in damp areas.
– Mark the unused connector.
WARNING
This operation is compulsory for any wiring
which is located in damp areas which needs to
be waterproof (engine and underbody areas, and
damp areas of the opening elements).
It applies to all of the unused connectors located
on the wiring.
●
88A
– Count the number of wires to be insulated and note
their total diameter (copper and insulation).
Note:
The coupling of wires must be preserved.
If several wires are connected together in a
connector opening, always preserve this connection.
The electric wires in the same opening will be
connected together using self-solder sleeves or
crimp sleeves from the wiring repair kit (See Wiring
repair kit: Description).
Equipment required.
– Heat shrinkable waterproof sheath:
Part number
of heat
shrinkable
waterproof
sheath
Internal diameter
(E) before
contraction
(mm)
Internal
diameter (F)
after
contraction
(mm)
7701 069 915
4 mm
1 mm
7701 033 055
8 mm
2 mm
7701 033 056
19 mm
4 mm
(E) & lt; Diameter of electrical wire with insulation & lt; (F)
– For every wire, remove 50 mm of heat shrinkable
sheath adapted to each wire diameter. The diameter
of the wire must be less than the internal diameter of
the sheath before contraction (E) and greater than
the internal diameter of the sheath after contraction
(F).
– Heat the end (G) of the pre-cut sheath using the heat
gun included in the wiring repair kit (See Wiring
Repair Kit: Description) and contract it
approximately 15 mm (F).
The heat gun is equipped with the retraction nozzle
and its temperature is adjusted to 120ºC, with
maximum air flow (See Wiring Repair Kit:
Description).
WARNING
To avoid burns, always wear gloves during the
following operation .
– When the end has been contracted, flatten it in order
to bond the surfaces using the internal adhesive of
the sheath (G).
– Allow the sheath to cool for 1 min.
– Check the prepared plug. The contracted length
should not exceed 15 mm and the adhesive should
completely block the end at (H).
Do not remove the surplus adhesive at (H).
88A-34
WIRING
Connector: Sealing and immobilisation
88A
Fitting the plugs:
Note: When replacing the wiring, preferably carry out
the operation before refitting the new wiring.
– Mark the unused connector.
– Mark the wire couplings on this connector (wires
connected together in the same connector opening).
Electric wires in the same opening will be connected
together using the self-solder sleeves or crimp
sleeves from the wiring repair kit (See Wiring:
Repair).
– Cut the other wires of the connector equally.
– Fit a plug on each wire (I) and contract it using the
heat gun included in the wiring repair kit (See Wiring
repair kit: Description).
The heat gun is equipped with the deflector nozzle
and its temperature is adjusted to 120°C, with
maximum air flow (See Wiring repair kit: Use).
WARNING
It is forbidden to place 2 wires of different
connection codes in a single plug. There is a risk
of a short circuit if the wires are live.
2 - For non-waterproof wiring.
For non-waterproof wiring, only apply the
immobilisation procedure.
– Mark the unused connector.
– Secure the connector on the main wiring using a
Colson-type clip. Use several clips if necessary.
– Allow the assembly to cool down for 1 min.
– Check that the sheath is sufficiently contracted on
the wire (J). Repeat the operation with a heat
shrinkable sheath with a smaller diameter if
necessary.
– Check that the assembly does not produce any
interference noises, with the engine running and the
vehicle moving. Fit an audible protector if necessary
(See Wiring: Check).
Note:
Do not remove the surplus adhesive.
WARNING
If there is not enough adhesive released by the
heat shrinkable sheath, repeat the operation and
add some adhesive (see Equipment required)
inside the sheath.
– Tape all of the wires and sheaths using adhesive
tape included in the wiring repair kit (See Wiring
repair kit: Description).
– Fit a wiring protector which is equivalent or better
than the original (See Wiring: Check).
– Secure the assembly to the main wiring using a
Colson-type clip which will be fitted level with the
sleeves. Use several clips if necessary.
88A-35
WIRING
Connector: Check
This section describes how to visually inspect a
connector.
88A
4 - Visual inspection of the metal contacts:
Check that there are no bent contacts (the contact
is not inserted correctly and can come out of the
back of the connector). If the wire is slightly
stressed, the contact will come out.
● Check that there is no damage (folded tabs, clips
open too wide, blackened or melted contact, etc.).
● Check that there is no oxidation on the metal
contacts.
●
Note:
Carry out each requested check visually. Do not
remove a connector if it is not required.
Note:
Repeated connections and disconnections alter the
functionality of the connectors and increase the risk
of poor electrical contact. Limit the number of
connections/disconnections as much as possible.
5 - Visual inspection of the sealing:
(Only for watertight connectors)
The check is carried out on the 2 parts of the
connection. There may be two types of connections:
– Connector / Connector
– Connector / Device
1 - Visual inspection of the connection:
●
Check that the connector is connected correctly
and that the male and female parts of the
connection are correctly coupled.
2 - Visual inspection of the area around the
connection:
Check the condition of the mounting (pin, strap,
adhesive tape, etc.) if the connectors are attached
to the vehicle.
● Check that there is no damage to the wiring trim
(sheath, foam, adhesive tape, etc.) near the wiring.
● Check that there is no damage to the electrical
wires at the connector outputs, in particular on the
insulating material (wear, cuts, burns, etc.).
●
Disconnect the connector to continue the checks.
3 - Visual inspection of the plastic casing:
Check that there is no mechanical damage (casing
crushed, cracked, broken, etc.), in particular to the
fragile components (lever, lock, openings, etc.).
● Check that there is no heat damage (casing
melted, darker, deformed, etc.).
● Check that there are no stains (grease, mud, liquid,
etc.).
●
88A-36
Check for the seal on the connection (between the
2 parts of the connection).
● Check the seal at the back of the connectors:
– For unit joints (1 for each wire), check that the
unit joints are present on each electrical wire
and that they are correctly positioned in the
opening (level with the housing). Check that
plugs are present on openings which are not
used.
– For a grommet seal (one seal which covers
the entire internal surface of the connector),
check that the seal is present.
– For gel seals, check for gel in all of the
openings without removing the excess or any
protruding sections (it does not matter if there
is gel on the contacts).
– For hotmelt sealing (heat-shrink sheath with
glue), check that the sheath has contracted
correctly on the rear of the connectors and
electrical wires, and that the hardened glue
comes out of the side of the wire.
● Check that there is no damage to any of the seals
(cuts, burns, significant deformation, etc.).
●
188B
MULTIPLEXING
Multiplex network: Repair
2 - Necessary equipment.
WARNING
This procedure is relates to the repair of the
multiplex network alone (twisted wires).
For repairing the multiplex network, use the
components of the wiring repair kit (see Wiring repair
kit: Description).
1 - Locating the fault.
Use the diagnostic tool (clip) to test the multiplex
network (see the fault finding procedure corresponding
to the vehicle).
Use the self-solder sleeves with red rings (A) for
making the joints.
The diagnostic tool can detect the following short
circuits on the multiplex network:
●
●
●
●
●
●
88B
short circuit between CAN L and + 12 V,
short circuit between CAN H and + 12 V,
short circuit between CAN H and earth,
short circuit between CAN L and earth,
short circuit between CAN L and CAN H,
open circuits.
Note:
In the case of a short circuit between CAN-L and
earth, communication between the different
computers which make up the multiplex network is
not interrupted. However, the multiplex network
becomes sensitive to interference and can be the
cause of an intermittent fault.
After having located the multiplex line fault, it is
possible to repair it whilst applying all the necessary
precautions outlined in this document.
88B-1
MULTIPLEXING
Multiplex network: Repair
3 - Repairing the multiplex line.
88B
WARNING
Do not untwist the harness to be repaired more
than 100 mm (D). The wires at (E) must be
twisted uniformly along the repaired length.
WARNING
Before starting to repair a multiplex line, it is
necessary that you familiarise yourself with the
use of the tools relating to this repair (see Wiring
repair kit: Use).
Disconnect the battery (see the MR corresponding to
the vehicle, 80A, Battery, Battery: Removal Refitting).
Remove the components necessary to enable access
to the wiring.
Detach the section of wire to be repaired from the main
wiring.
Cut the wires at (B) and (C), 50 mm on each side of
the damage.
Strip each end of the wires by 10 mm (F) at each side.
Take from the coil of twisted wires (0.5 mm2, specific
number of turns) to be used to repair the multiplexing,
a length of wire the same as that removed from the
harness, plus 30 mm for the wire joints (See Wiring
repair kit: Description).
88B-2
MULTIPLEXING
Multiplex network: Repair
88B
Refer to the precautions for use which relate to using
self-solder sleeves (see Wiring: Repair).
To join the wires, working wire by wire:
● slip the self-solder sleeve onto the wire,
● twist the end of the wires together.
WARNING
Do not try to heat the sheath too quickly, use a
backwards and forwards motion to ensure that it
does not burn.
Do not direct the flow of hot air onto the
insulation of the wires so as not to burn it.
Note:
For the soldering to be complete and for the sheath
to contract, the heating operation should last
approximately 30 s ± 10.
Spend the majority of the recommended time on the
ring of solder and the rest of the time on the ends of
the sleeve.
The recommended time is given as a guide. It can be
reduced or increased depending on how efficient the
heating is.
WARNING
The colour of the wires (CAN H et CAN L) must
be respected when they are being joined.
●
Position the sleeve with its solder ring in the centre of
the wire joint.
●
Switch on the heat gun.
●
Adjust the temperature of the tool to 340°C with a
ventilation speed set to maximum (See Wiring
repair kit: Use).
●
Heat the sleeve so that the solder ring melts (G) onto
the wires until the heat shrinkable sheath contracts.
88B-3
WARNING
Wait for the sleeve to cool before manipulating it
to maintain the quality of the solder (minimum
waiting period: 1 minute).
Do not bend the sleeve (even when cool) so as to
not damage the quality of the solder or the
sealing properties of the sleeve.
MULTIPLEXING
Multiplex network: Repair
4 - Checking the multiplex line.
88B
No turns (twists) at (H).
WARNING
After repairing the multiplex line, always check
the multiplex network using the diagnostic tool.
Note:
During the check with the diagnostic tool, move the
lines forwards and backwards slightly. If a fault is
recorded, start the operation again for the faulty line.
Refer to the fault finding procedure for the function
concerned.
WARNING
After having checked the multiplex line:
● refit it in the main harness,
● tape it up with adhesive tape.
The two wires added are of a different length.
Apply the recommendations from the generic repair
procedure concerning the fitting and fuses
(see Wiring: Check).
WARNING
The various struck-through cases are strictly
forbidden.
5 - Final check.
After any operation on the wiring, check that there are
no faults using the diagnostic tools (Clip).
Refer to the corresponding fault finding procedure.
If a fault is present, pass on the vehicle fault finding to
a qualified operator: automotive electrician, technician
agent or cotech (level 2 minimum).
88B-4
AIRBAGS AND PRETENSIONERS
288C
Airbag and pretensioner wiring: Repair
88C
WARNING
This procedure relates repairing airbag and pretensioner wiring only.
Note: Apply all the precautions and recommendations shown in the MR.
WARNING
All work on airbag and pretensioner systems must be carried out by qualified trained personnel.
WARNING
The pyrotechnic systems (pretensioners or airbags) must not be handled near to a heat source or flame;
there is a risk that they may be triggered.
WARNING
Before removing an electronic control unit (ECU) or before any operation on the safety systems or around
them, the airbag computer must be locked using the diagnostic tool. When this function is activated all the
trigger lines are inhibited, and the airbag warning light on the instrument panel is lit continuously.
WARNING
Before any operation on a pyrotechnic component connection (connector or wiring) found faulty during
fault finding, disconnect the pyrotechnic component.
1 - Identify the solution.
The case in question must figure in the table below. Otherwise, replace the wiring.
Airbag and pretensioner
components
Solutions
Under seat connector
(Airbag warning light on)
●
Connector on seat runner
No operation. Replace the wiring unless there is a specific procedure (OTS*).
Pyrotechnic component
connectors (squib) (airbag
triggers, pretensioner, etc.)
Replace the connector using the airbag connectors kit. See Pyrotechnic
component connectors in this section.
Airbag computer connector
If the connector has more than 10 wires, no operation can be carried out.
Replace the wiring unless there is a specific procedure (OTS*).
● If not, shunt the connector. See Under seat connector in this section.
No operation. Change the wiring harness except in the following cases:
If there is a specific procedure (OTS*), its application is authorised.
● If the connector lock is broken, replacing the lock authorised.
●
Airbag and pretensioner
harness damage
No operation except in specific conditions. See Airbag and Pretensioner
harness damage in this section.
*OTS: Special Technical Operation
WARNING
Any repair linked to the airbag function necessitates a specific check using the network's diagnostic tools.
88C-1
AIRBAGS AND PRETENSIONERS
Airbag and pretensioner wiring: Repair
88C
Example of a connector on a seat runner (A):
2 - Under seat connector.
Note:
For a connector on a seat runner, the wiring must be
replaced.
When fault finding identifies a under seat connector
fault, shunt the under seat connector following the
procedure below:
Cut the electrical wires either side of the connector.
Apply the specific procedure for repairing multiplex
lines (see Multiplex network: Repair), except the part
on locating the fault, to shunt the connector.
Note:
Check that the length of replacement wire is the
same as that removed from the harness, plus
30 mm for the wire joints.
113646
After the operation, check that the wire is not too taut
or too long when the seat is furthest forward or back.
3 - Pyrotechnic component connectors.
Protect the wires so that they are not damaged and
this new branch is correctly maintained. Hanging loops
are not allowed, regardless of the wires involved in the
repair.
Carry out the specific airbag and pretensioner line
repair checks. See Airbag line repair check and
Final check in this section.
Note:
Check that the harness is correctly repositioned after
the operation and that it is does not obstruct the seat
adjusting mechanisms.
These are airbag and pretensioner trigger connectors.
Identify the connector concerned on the vehicle.
Repair is possible if it is a SQUIB connector.
Find the colour of the connector: Blue, green or
orange.
Find the shape of the connector: Straight or angled.
Select the same connector (colour and shape) from
the airbag connectors kit (see under DIALOGYS).
88C-2
AIRBAGS AND PRETENSIONERS
Airbag and pretensioner wiring: Repair
Example of an angled SQUIB connector.
88C
Carry out the specific airbag and pretensioner line
repair checks. See Airbag line repair check and
Final check in this section.
5 - Airbag lines repair check.
Confirm the airbag line repair to ensure that the repair
is correct:
Check the quality of the operation by reading the
impedance reading produced by the computer using
the diagnostic tool.
● Unlock the airbag computer using the diagnostic
tools.
● The warning light should no longer be on.
●
Note:
During the check with the diagnostic tool, move the
lines forwards and backwards slightly.
The resistance measure should remain stable, if
variations in resistance are noticed, start the repair
operation again for the defective line.
Apply the specific procedure for repairing multiplex
lines (see Multiplex network: Repair), except the
section on locating the fault, to replace the connector.
Refer to the airbag and pretensioner function fault
finding procedure for the vehicle concerned.
Carry out the specific airbag and pretensioner line
repair checks. See Airbag line repair check and
Final check in this section.
Apply the recommendations from the generic repair
procedure concerning the fitting and fuses
(see Wiring: Check).
4 - Airbag and Pretensioner harness damage.
6 - Final check.
WARNING
No operation is authorised unless it is possible
to check the repair using the diagnostic tool.
Where the repair can be checked with the diagnostic
tool:
●
if it is a case of twisted wires with a cross-section
less than or equal to 0.5 mm2, apply the specific
procedure for repairing multiplex lines (see
Multiplex network: Repair), except for the
section on locating the fault, for the repair of the
lines;
●
After any operation on the wiring, check that there are
no faults using the diagnostic tools (Clip).
Refer to the fault finding procedure for the airbag and
pretensioner function concerned.
If a fault is present, pass on the vehicle fault finding to
a qualified operator: automotive electrician, technician
agent or cotech (level 2 minimum).
if it does not concern twisted wires, apply the
generic procedure for repairing the harness
(see Wiring: Check).
88C-3